FUJI FRENIC-Ace User - S Manual

High Performance Inverter
User's Manual
Thank you for purchasing our multifunction FRENIC-Ace series of inverters.

• This product is designed to drive a three-phase motor under variable speed control. Read through
this user's manual and become familiar with the handling procedure for correct use.
• Improper handling might result in incorrect operation, a short life, or even a failure of this product as
well as the motor.
• Deliver this manual to the end user of this product. Keep this manual in a safe place until this
product is discarded.
• For how to use an optional device, refer to the instruction and installation manuals for that optional
device.
24A7-E-0043a
Copyright © 2013 Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior
written permission from Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice

for improvement.
The purpose of this user's manual is to provide accurate information in handling, setting up
and operating of the FRENIC-Ace series of inverters. Please feel free to send your
comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found, or any suggestions you
may have for generally improving the manual.
In no event will Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting
from the application of the information in this manual.
Preface
Thank you for purchasing our multifunction FRENIC-Ace series of inverters. This product is
designed to drive a three-phase induction motor under variable speed control.
This manual provides all the information on the FRENIC-Ace series of inverters including its
operating procedure and selection of peripheral equipment. Before use, carefully read this manual
for proper use. Improper handling might result in incorrect operation, a short life, or even a failure
of this product as well as the motor.
The table below lists the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC-Ace. Read them in
conjunction with this manual as necessary.
Name Material No. Description
Product scope, features, specifications, external drawings,

Catalog 24A1-E-0042
and options of the product
Overview of functions implemented by using FRENIC-Ace

RS-485 Communication User's RS-485 communications facility, its communications
24A7-E-0021*
Manual specifications, Modbus RTU/Fuji general-purpose inverter
protocol, function codes and related data formats
*Available soon
The materials are subject to change without notice. Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use.
i
How this manual is organized
This manual contains Chapters 1 through 13 and Appendices.

Chapter 1 BEFORE USE
This chapter gives the check items to be used before the use of the inverter.
Chapter 2 INSTALLATION AND DRAWING
This chapter describes the important points in installing and wiring inverters.
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
This chapter describes keypad operation of the inverter.
Chapter 4 TEST RUN PROCEDURE
This chapter describes basic settings required for making a test run.
Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODE
This chapter explains the table of function code used in FRENIC-Ace, index per purpose, and the
detail of each function code
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions
or detects an alarm or a light alarm condition. In this chapter, first check whether any alarm code or
the "light alarm" indication (l-al) is displayed or not, and then proceed to the troubleshooting
items.
Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

This chapter describes the maintenance and inspection items of the inverter.
Chapter 8 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
This chapter describes the main block diagrams of the control section.
Chapter 9 COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS-485 and CANopen
communications. For details of RS-485 communication, refer to the RS-485 Communication
User's Manual (24A7-E-0021).
Chapter 10 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics,
selection procedure, and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and
inverter models. It also helps you select braking resistors, inverter mode (ND, HD, HND, or HHD),
and motor drive control.
Chapter 11 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-Ace's
configuration with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp
terminals.
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes the output ratings, input power, basic functions and other specifications of
the FRENIC-Ace standard model.
Chapter 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

This chapter gives external dimensions of the inverter.
Appendices
ii
CONTENTS

1.1 Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates and Inverter Type) ······························································· 1-1
1.2 External View and Terminal Blocks ·························································································· 1-3
1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters ······························································································· 1-4
1.3.1 Usage environment ········································································································ 1-4
1.3.2 Storage environment ······································································································ 1-6
[ 1 ] Temporary storage ............................................................................................................................. 1-6
[ 2 ] Long-term storage .............................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.3.3 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment ······························································ 1-7
[ 1 ] Phase-advancing capacitors for power factor correction ................................................................. 1-7
[ 2 ] Power supply lines (Application of a DC/AC reactor) ....................................................................... 1-7
[ 3 ] DC reactor (DCR) for correcting the inverter input power factor (for suppressing harmonics) ......... 1-7
[ 4 ] PWM converter for correcting the inverter input power factor .......................................................... 1-8
[ 5 ] Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) / residual-current-operated protective device (RCD) / earth
leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) ...................................................................................................... 1-8
[ 6 ] Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter input (primary) circuit......................................................... 1-8
[ 7 ] Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter output (secondary) circuit .................................................. 1-9
[ 8 ] Surge absorber/surge killer .............................................................................................................. 1-9
1.3.4 Noise reduction ············································································································· 1-9
1.3.5 Leakage current ·········································································································· 1-10
1.3.6 Precautions in driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) ································ 1-10
Chapter 2 INSTALLATION AND DRAWING

2.1 Installation ·························································································································· 2-1
2.2 Wiring ································································································································ 2-3
2.2.1 Basic connection diagram ······························································································· 2-3
2.2.2 Removal and attachment of the front cover and wiring guide ·················································· 2-6
2.2.3 Precautions for wiring ····································································································· 2-7
2.2.4 Precautions for long wiring (between inverter and motor) ······················································· 2-9
2.2.5 Main circuit terminals ···································································································· 2-11
[ 1 ] Screw specifications and recommended wire size (main circuit terminals) ...................................... 2-11
[ 2 ] Terminal layout diagram (main circuit terminal) ................................................................................ 2-24
[ 3 ] Description of terminal functions (main circuit terminal) ................................................................... 2-24
2.2.6 Control circuit terminals (common to all models) ································································ 2-28
[ 1 ] Screw specifications and recommended wire size (control circuit terminal) ..................................... 2-28
[ 2 ] Terminal layout diagram (control circuit terminal) ............................................................................. 2-29
[ 3 ] Description of terminal functions (control circuit terminal) ................................................................ 2-30
2.2.7 Switching connector ····································································································· 2-37
2.2.8 Operating various switches ···························································································· 2-39
2.3 Attachment and Connection of Keypad ··················································································· 2-41
2.3.1 Parts required for connection ························································································· 2-41
2.3.2 Attachment procedure ·································································································· 2-41
2.4 RJ-45 Cover ······················································································································ 2-45

3.1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components ··········································································· 3-1
3.2 Overview of Operation Modes ································································································· 3-3
3.3 Running Mode ····················································································································· 3-5
3.3.1 Monitoring the running status ··························································································· 3-5
3.3.2 Monitoring light alarms ···································································································· 3-7
3.3.3 Running or stopping the motor ························································································· 3-8
iii
3.3.4 Setting up reference frequency from the keypad ·································································· 3-8
3.3.5 Setting up PID commands from the keypad ········································································· 3-9
[ 1 ] Settings under PID process control .................................................................................................... 3-9
[ 2 ] Settings under PID dancer control.................................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.6 Jogging operation ········································································································ 3-13
3.3.7 Remote and local modes ······························································································· 3-14
3.4 Programming Mode ············································································································ 3-15
3.4.1 Setting up function codes "Data Setting:!f__ through!k__" ············································ 3-16
3.4.2 Checking changed function codes "Data Checking: "rep " ··············································· 3-17
3.4.3 Monitoring the running status "Drive Monitoring: #ope " ···················································· 3-18
3.4.4 Checking I/O signal status "I/O Checking: $i_o "····························································· 3-22
3.4.5 Reading maintenance information "Maintenance Information: %che " ··································· 3-26
3.4.6 Reading alarm information "Alarm Information: &al " ························································ 3-29
3.4.7 Setting up basic function codes quickly "Quick Setup: *fn:" ·············································· 3-32
3.5 Alarm Mode ······················································································································ 3-34
3.5.1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode ·························································· 3-34
3.5.2 Displaying the alarm history ··························································································· 3-34
3.5.3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm ··························································· 3-34
3.5.4 Switching to Programming mode ···················································································· 3-35

4.1 Test Run Procedure Flowchart ································································································ 4-1
4.2 Checking Prior to Powering On ······························································································· 4-2
4.3 Powering ON and Checking ··································································································· 4-3
4.4 Switching the Applicable Motor Rank (ND, HD, HND and HHD Modes) ··········································· 4-3
4.5 Selecting a Desired Motor Drive Control ···················································································· 4-4
4.5.1 V/f control with slip compensation inactive ·········································································· 4-4
4.5.2 Vector control without speed sensor (Dynamic torque vector) ················································· 4-4
4.5.3 V/f control with slip compensation active ············································································· 4-5
4.5.4 Performance comparison for drive controls (summary) ·························································· 4-5
4.5.5 Configuring function codes ······························································································ 4-6
[ 1 ] Basic settings < 1 > ............................................................................................................................ 4-6
[ 2 ] Basic settings < 2 > ............................................................................................................................ 4-7
4.5.6 Auto-tuning motor parameters ·························································································· 4-7
[ 1 ] Tuning procedure < 1 > ...................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.6 Running the Inverter for Motor Operation Check ········································································· 4-9
4.6.1 Test run procedure ········································································································ 4-9
4.6.2 Check points during a test run ·························································································· 4-9
4.6.3 Modification of motor control function code data ··································································· 4-9
4.7 Selecting a Frequency Command Source················································································ 4-10
4.7.1 Setting up a frequency command from the keypad ····························································· 4-10
4.7.2 Setting up a frequency command with an external potentiometer ··········································· 4-10
4.7.3 Setting up a frequency command with multistep frequency selection ······································ 4-11
4.8 Selecting a Run Command Source ························································································ 4-12
4.8.1 Setting up a run command from the keypad ······································································ 4-12
4.8.2 Setting up a run command with digital input signals (terminals [FWD] and [REV]) ····················· 4-12

5.1 Function Code Overview········································································································ 5-1
5.2 Function Code Table············································································································· 5-1
5.2.1 Supplementary note ······································································································· 5-1
5.2.2 Function code table ········································································································ 5-3
5.3 Description of Function Code ································································································ 5-31
5.3.1 F code (Basic function) ································································································· 5-31
iv
[ 1 ] Frequency setting by keypad (F01 = 0 (Factory default state), 8) ············································ 5-33
[ 2 ] Setting up a reference frequency using analog input (F01 = 1 to 3, 5) ······································ 5-33
[ 3 ] Frequency setting by digital input signal "UP"/"DOWN" (F01=7) ············································· 5-39
[ 4 ] Frequency setting using pulse train input (F01 = 12) ···························································· 5-40
5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ············································································· 5-77
5.3.3 C codes (Control functions) ·························································································· 5-108
5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) ······················································································· 5-117
5.3.5 H codes (High performance functions) ············································································ 5-122
[ 1 ] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment ···· 5-133
[ 2 ] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions at
power shutdown ·········································································································· 5-134
5.3.6 A codes (Motor 2 parameters) ······················································································· 5-148
5.3.7 J codes (Applied Functions) ·························································································· 5-150
[ 1 ] PID command with the [Image1] / [Image2] keys on the keypad (J02 = 0, factory default) ··········· 5-151
[ 2 ] PID command by analog inputs (J02 = 1) ········································································· 5-151
[ 3 ] PID command with UP/DOWN control (J02 = 3) ································································ 5-154
[ 4 ] PID command via communications link (J02 = 4) ······························································· 5-154
5.3.8 d codes (Applied Functions 2) ······················································································· 5-168
5.3.9 U codes (Customizable logic operation) ·········································································· 5-169
5.3.10 U1 codes (Customizable logic operation) ········································································· 5-191
5.3.11 y codes (Link function) ································································································· 5-196
6.1 Protective Function ··············································································································· 6-1
6.2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting ··················································································· 6-2
6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor ··········································································· 6-3
6.3.1 Alarm code list ·············································································································· 6-3
6.3.2 Causes, checks and measures of alarms ············································································ 6-6
[ 1 ] cof PID feedback wire break ....................................................................................................... 6-6
[ 2 ] dba Braking transistor error ......................................................................................................... 6-6
[ 3 ] dbh Braking resistor overheated.................................................................................................... 6-6
[ 4 ] ecf EN circuit failure.................................................................................................................... 6-7
[ 5 ] ecl Customized logic failure ......................................................................................................... 6-7
[ 6 ] ef Ground fault .............................................................................................................................. 6-7
[ 7 ] er1 Memory error .......................................................................................................................... 6-7
[ 8 ] er2 Keypad communications error .............................................................................................. 6-8
[ 9 ] er3 CPU error.............................................................................................................................. 6-8
[ 10 ] er4 Option communications error ................................................................................................. 6-8
[ 11 ] er5 Option error (To be responded soon.) .................................................................................... 6-8
[ 12 ] er6 Operation error ....................................................................................................................... 6-9
[ 13 ] er7 Tuning error ............................................................................................................................ 6-9
[ 14 ] er8 RS-485 communications error (Communications port 1)/
erp RS-485 communications error (Communications port 2) ..................................................... 6-10
[ 15 ] erd Step-out detection/detection failure of magnetic pole position at startup
(To be responded soon.) ............................................................................................................... 6-10
[ 16 ] ere Speed inconsistency / Excessive speed deviation (To be responded soon.) .........................6-11
[ 17 ] erf Data saving error during undervoltage .................................................................................6-11
[ 18 ] ero Positioning control error (To be responded soon) ............................................................... 6-12
[ 19 ] err Simulated failure .................................................................................................................. 6-12
[ 20 ] ert CAN communications failure ............................................................................................... 6-12
[ 21 ] fus DC fuse-blowing ................................................................................................................... 6-12
[ 22 ] lin Input phase loss.................................................................................................................. 6-13
v
[ 23 ] lu Undervoltage .......................................................................................................................... 6-13
[ 24 ] 0cn Instantaneous overcurrent .................................................................................................... 6-14
[ 25 ] 0h1 Cooling fin overheat ............................................................................................................ 6-15
[ 26 ] 0h2 External alarm ...................................................................................................................... 6-15
[ 27 ] 0h3 Inverter internal overheat .................................................................................................... 6-15
[ 28 ] 0h4 Motor protection (PTC thermistor) ........................................................................................ 6-16
[ 29 ] 0ln Motor overloads 1 to 2 .......................................................................................................... 6-16
[ 30 ] 0lu Inverter overload .................................................................................................................. 6-17
[ 31 ] 0pl Output phase-failure detection............................................................................................. 6-17
[ 32 ] 0s Overspeed protection.............................................................................................................. 6-18
[ 33 ] 0un Overvoltage ........................................................................................................................ 6-18
[ 34 ] pbf Charger circuit fault ............................................................................................................. 6-19
[ 35 ] p9 PG wire break (To be responded soon.) ................................................................................. 6-19
6.4 If the "Light Alarm" Indication (l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor ·············································· 6-20
6.5 When Codes Other Than Alarm Codes and Light Alarm Indication (l-al) are Displayed ················· 6-22
6.5.1 Abnormal motor operation ····························································································· 6-22
[ 1 ] The motor does not rotate.............................................................................................................. 6-22
[ 2 ] The motor rotates, but the speed does not increase...................................................................... 6-24
[ 3 ] The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command ............................................................. 6-25
[ 4 ] Speed fluctuation or current oscillation (e.g., hunting) occurs during running at constant speed ... 6-25
[ 5 ] Unpleasant noises are emitted from motor or noises fluctuate ...................................................... 6-26
[ 6 ] Motor is not accelerated or decelerated according to set-up acceleration or deceleration time ..... 6-26
[ 7 ] The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure ......... 6-27
[ 8 ] Motor generates heat abnormally .................................................................................................. 6-27
[ 9 ] The motor does not run as expected ............................................................................................. 6-27
[ 10 ] Motor stalls during acceleration ..................................................................................................... 6-28
6.5.2 Problems with inverter settings ······················································································· 6-29
[ 1 ] Nothing appears on the LED monitor............................................................................................. 6-29
[ 2 ] The desired menu is not displayed ................................................................................................ 6-29
[ 3 ] Display of under bars (_ _ _ _)....................................................................................................... 6-29
[ 4 ] Display of center bars (----) ............................................................................................................ 6-30
[5] c ] Display of parenthesis ..................................................................................................... 6-30
[ 6 ] Data of function codes cannot be changed .................................................................................... 6-30
[ 7 ] Function code data are not changeable (change from link functions) ............................................ 6-31

7.1 Inspection Interval ················································································································ 7-1
7.2 Daily Inspection ··················································································································· 7-2
7.3 Periodic Inspection ··············································································································· 7-3
[ 1 ] Periodic inspection 1--Before the inverter is powered ON or after it stops running .......................... 7-3
[ 2 ] Periodic inspection 2--When the inverter is ON or it is running ........................................................ 7-4
7.4 List of Periodic Replacement Parts ·························································································· 7-5
7.4.1 Judgment on service life ································································································· 7-6
[ 1 ] Measurement of discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor ....................................................... 7-6
[ 2 ] ON-time counting of DC link bus capacitor ...................................................................................... 7-7
7.5 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit ····································································· 7-9
7.6 Insulation Test ··················································································································· 7-10
7.7 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee ··················································································· 7-11
7.7.1 When making an inquiry ································································································ 7-11
7.7.2 Product warranty ········································································································· 7-11
[ 1 ] Free of charge warranty period and warranty range .......................................................................7-11
[ 2 ] Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity, etc. ............................................................................. 7-12
[ 3 ] Repair period after production stop, spare parts supply period (holding period) ............................ 7-12
[ 4 ] Transfer rights ................................................................................................................................ 7-12
[ 5 ] Service contents ............................................................................................................................ 7-12
vi
[ 6 ] Applicable scope of service ........................................................................................................... 7-12

8.1 Meanings of Symbols Used in the Control Block Diagrams ··························································· 8-1
8.2 Frequency Setting Section ····································································································· 8-2
8.3 Operation Command Section ·································································································· 8-5
8.4 PID Control Section (for Processing) ························································································ 8-6
8.5 PID Control Section (for Dancer) ····························································································· 8-7
8.6 Control Section ···················································································································· 8-8
8.6.1 V/f control ···················································································································· 8-8
8.7 FM Output Section ············································································································· 8-10

9.1 Overview of RS-485 Communication ························································································ 9-1
9.1.1 RS-485 common modes ································································································· 9-2
9.1.2 Terminal mode ·············································································································· 9-3
[ 1 ] RS-485 communication port 1 (for connecting the keypad) mode ................................................... 9-3
[ 2 ] RS-485 communication port 2 mode (only for FRN-E2S-4A, E) ...................................................... 9-3
[ 3 ] RS-485 communication port 2 (terminal block) mode (only for FRN-E2S-4C) ................................. 9-4
9.1.3 Connection method ········································································································ 9-5
9.1.4 RS-485 connection devices ····························································································· 9-8
[ 1 ] Converter ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
[ 2 ] Requirements for the cable (COM port 1: for RJ-45 connector)....................................................... 9-9
[ 3 ] Requirements for the cable (COM port 2: for RS-485 connector) .................................................... 9-9
[ 4 ] Branch adapter for multi-drop .......................................................................................................... 9-9
9.1.5 RS-485 noise suppression ······························································································· 9-9
9.2 CANopen Communication ···································································································· 9-10
9.2.1 Modes ······················································································································· 9-10
9.2.2 Connection method ······································································································ 9-11
[ 1 ] Basic connection configuration .......................................................................................................9-11
[ 2 ] Terminal mode ............................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.2.3 Inverter function codes related to CANopen setting ····························································· 9-13
9.2.4 Procedures to establish CANopen communication ······························································ 9-14
9.2.5 PDO protocol ·············································································································· 9-15
[ 1 ] About PDO protocol ....................................................................................................................... 9-15
[ 2 ] Reception PDO (from master to inverter) ...................................................................................... 9-16
[ 3 ] Transmission PDO (from inverter to master) ................................................................................. 9-18
[ 4 ] Communication parameters of reception PDO .............................................................................. 9-19
[ 5 ] Communication parameters of transmission PDO ......................................................................... 9-20
[ 6 ] Changing PDO (RPDO/TPDO) mapping entry .............................................................................. 9-21
9.2.6 SDO protocol ·············································································································· 9-22
[ 1 ] About SDO .................................................................................................................................... 9-22
[ 2 ] Response on SDO error ................................................................................................................ 9-22
9.2.7 Other services ············································································································ 9-23
9.2.8 Object list ··················································································································· 9-24
[ 1 ] Objects in the communication profile area ..................................................................................... 9-24
[ 2 ] Objects in the profile area specific to Fuji Electric.......................................................................... 9-27
9.2.9 Standard device profile area ·························································································· 9-28
9.2.10 Inverter operation in CANopen communication ·································································· 9-29
[ 1 ] Operation according to CANopen's drive profile (DSP 402) .......................................................... 9-29
[ 2 ] Operation according to the inverter function code S06 .................................................................. 9-34
9.2.11 Heartbeat and Node Guarding ························································································ 9-38
[ 1 ] Heartbeat ....................................................................................................................................... 9-38
[ 2 ] Node Guarding .............................................................................................................................. 9-39
9.2.12 Behavior upon detection of CANopen network disconnection ················································ 9-40
vii
9.2.13 Alarm code list ············································································································ 9-41
9.2.14 Other points to note ····································································································· 9-42
9.2.15 Keypad LED operation monitor “3_40” ············································································ 9-42
9.3 FRENIC Loader Overview ···································································································· 9-43
9.3.1 Modes ······················································································································· 9-43
9.3.2 Connection ················································································································· 9-44
9.3.3 Function overview ········································································································ 9-44
[ 1 ] Configuring inverter's function code ............................................................................................... 9-44
[ 2 ] Multi-monitor .................................................................................................................................. 9-45
[ 3 ] Running status monitor .................................................................................................................. 9-46
[ 4 ] Test-running ................................................................................................................................... 9-47
[ 5 ] Real-time trace .............................................................................................................................. 9-48
[ 6 ] Historical trace ............................................................................................................................... 9-49

10.1 Motor Output Torque Characteristics ······················································································ 10-1
10.2 Selection Procedure ··········································································································· 10-3
10.3 Equations for Selections ······································································································ 10-6
10.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running ······································································· 10-6
[ 1 ] General equation ........................................................................................................................... 10-6
[ 2 ] Obtaining the required force F ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation ··································································· 10-8
[ 1 ] Calculation of moment of inertia .................................................................................................... 10-8
[ 2 ] Calculation of the acceleration time ............................................................................................. 10-10
[ 3 ] Calculation of the deceleration time ..............................................................................................10-11
[ 4 ] Calculating non-linear acceleration/deceleration time ...................................................................10-11
[ 5 ] Calculating non-linear deceleration time ...................................................................................... 10-12
10.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor ······································································· 10-13
[ 1 ] Calculation of regenerative energy .............................................................................................. 10-13
10.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor ·········································································· 10-14
10.4 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (ND/HD/HND/HHD) ······························································· 10-15
10.4.1 Precaution in making the selection ················································································· 10-15
10.4.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity ····················································· 10-16
10.5 Selecting a Motor Drive Control ···························································································· 10-19
10.5.1 Features of motor drive controls ···················································································· 10-19
10.5.2 Selecting a motor drive control by purpose ······································································· 10-22

11.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Ace ································································································ 11-1
11.2 Currents Flowing Across the Inverter Terminals ········································································ 11-2
11.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-current-operated Protective Device (RCD)/
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC) ··········································· 11-4
11.3.1 Function overview ········································································································ 11-4
11.3.2 Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers ··········································· 11-5
11.4 Surge Killers for L-load ········································································································ 11-9
11.5 Arresters ························································································································· 11-10
11.6 Surge Absorbers ··············································································································· 11-11
11.7 Filtering Capacitors Suppressing AM Radio Band Noises ·························································· 11-12
11.8 Braking Resistors (DBRs) and Braking Units ··········································································· 11-13
11.8.1 Selecting a braking resistor ··························································································· 11-13
[ 1 ] Selection procedure ......................................................................................................................11-13
[ 2 ] Notes on selection ........................................................................................................................11-13
11.8.2 Braking resistors (DBRs) ······························································································ 11-14
[ 1 ] Standard model.............................................................................................................................11-14
[ 2 ] 10%ED model ...............................................................................................................................11-14
viii
11.8.3 Braking units ············································································································· 11-15
11.8.4 Specifications ············································································································ 11-16
11.8.5 External dimensions ···································································································· 11-18
11.9 Power Regenerative PWM Converters, RHC Series ································································· 11-20
11.9.1 Overview ·················································································································· 11-20
11.9.2 Specifications ············································································································ 11-21
[ 1 ] Standard specifications .................................................................................................................11-21
[ 2 ] Common specifications .................................................................................................................11-21
11.9.3 Function specifications ································································································ 11-22
11.9.4 Converter configuration ································································································ 11-23
11.9.5 External dimensions ···································································································· 11-25
11.10 DC Reactors (DCRs) ······································································································· 11-34
11.11 AC Reactors (ACRs) ······································································································· 11-36
11.12 Surge Suppression Unit (SSU) ·························································································· 11-38
11.13 Output Circuit Filters (OFLs) ····························································································· 11-39
11.14 Zero-phase Reactors for Reducing Radio Noise (ACLs) ························································· 11-41
11.15 External Cooling Fan Attachments ····················································································· 11-42
11.16 External Frequency Command Potentiometer ······································································ 11-43
11.17 Extension Cable for Remote Operation ··············································································· 11-44
11.18 Frequency Meters ·········································································································· 11-45
12.1 Standard Model ················································································································· 12-1
12.1.1 ND-mode inverters for general load ················································································· 12-1
12.1.2 HD-mode inverters for heavy duty load ············································································ 12-2
12.1.3 HND-mode inverters for general load ··············································································· 12-3
12.1.4 HHD-mode inverters for heavy duty load ·········································································· 12-4
12.2 Common Specifications ······································································································· 12-5

13.1 Standard Model ················································································································· 13-1
13.2 Keypad ···························································································································· 13-4
Appendix A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise) ······································ Appendix-1

A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices ··············································································· Appendix-1
[1] Effect on AM radios ............................................................................................................. Appendix-1
[2] Effect on telephones ........................................................................................................... Appendix-1
[3] Effect on proximity switches................................................................................................ Appendix-1
[4] Effect on pressure sensors ................................................................................................. Appendix-1
[5] Effect on position detectors (pulse encoders) ..................................................................... Appendix-1
A.2 Noise ······················································································································ Appendix-2
[1] Inverter noise ...................................................................................................................... Appendix-2
[2] Types of noise..................................................................................................................... Appendix-3
A.3 Measure ·················································································································· Appendix-4
[1] Noise prevention prior to installation ................................................................................... Appendix-4
[2] Implementation of noise prevention measures ................................................................... Appendix-5
[3] Noise prevention examples ................................................................................................ Appendix-8
Appendix B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage
or Special High Voltage (General-purpose inverter) ················································Appendix-12
B.1 Application to general-purpose inverters ·······································································Appendix-12
[1] Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general-purpose appliances.. Appendix-12
[2] Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special
high voltage ...................................................................................................................... Appendix-12
B.2 Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or special high
voltage ··················································································································Appendix-13
ix
[1] Calculation of equivalent capacity (Pi) .............................................................................. Appendix-13
[2] Calculation of Harmonic Current ....................................................................................... Appendix-14
[3] Examples of calculation .................................................................................................... Appendix-16
Appendix C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters ········Appendix-17
C.1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages ······································································Appendix-17
C.2 Effect of surge voltages ·····························································································Appendix-18
C.3 Countermeasures against surge voltages ······································································Appendix-18
[1] Using a surge suppressor unit, SSU (Patent pending) ..................................................... Appendix-18
[2] Suppressing surge voltages.............................................................................................. Appendix-19
[3] Using motors with enhanced insulation ............................................................................ Appendix-19
C.4 Regarding existing equipment ·····················································································Appendix-19
[1] In case of a motor being driven with 400 V class inverter ................................................. Appendix-19
[2] In case of an existing motor driven using a newly installed 400 V class inverter .............. Appendix-19
Appendix D Inverter Generating Loss ··················································································Appendix-20
Appendix E Conversion from SI Units ··················································································Appendix-21
[1] Conversion of units ........................................................................................................... Appendix-21
[2] Calculation formula ........................................................................................................... Appendix-22
Appendix F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires ··································································Appendix-23
Appendix G Index by Functional Code Purpose ·····································································Appendix-25
G.1 Performing the minimum setting required for simple operation ···········································Appendix-25
G.2 Setting the frequency ································································································Appendix-25
[1] Frequency setting on the keypad ...................................................................................... Appendix-25
[2] Analog-based frequency setting ....................................................................................... Appendix-25
[3] Other frequency setting .................................................................................................... Appendix-27
G.3 Inputting operation command······················································································Appendix-28
G.4 Starting/Stopping ·····································································································Appendix-28
G.5 Setting acceleration/deceleration (time/method/pattern) ···················································Appendix-28
G.6 Adjusting operation performance ·················································································Appendix-29
G.7 Controlling the motor·································································································Appendix-30
[1] Selecting the motor control system ................................................................................... Appendix-30
[2] Setting the motor constant ................................................................................................ Appendix-30
G.8 Setting input/output terminals······················································································Appendix-31
G.9 Performing motor output ····························································································Appendix-31
G.10 Continuing the operation ····························································································Appendix-32
G.11 Detecting/Outputting the inverter state signal ·································································Appendix-32
G.12 Performing various operations ····················································································Appendix-33
G.13 Performing control to suit each application·····································································Appendix-34
[1] Droop operation ................................................................................................................ Appendix-34
[2] PID control for process control.......................................................................................... Appendix-35
[3] PID control for dancer control ........................................................................................... Appendix-38
G.14 Using convenient functions on the keypad ·····································································Appendix-41
G.15 Controlling via communications ···················································································Appendix-41
G.16 Using customized logic ······························································································Appendix-43
G.17 Using protective functions ··························································································Appendix-44
[1] Protecting the machine (Limit functions) ........................................................................... Appendix-44
[2] Protecting the motor ......................................................................................................... Appendix-44
[3] Other protective/safety functions ...................................................................................... Appendix-45
G.18 Performing maintenance ····························································································Appendix-46
[1] Maintenance of inverter .................................................................................................... Appendix-46
[2] Maintenance of machine ................................................................................................... Appendix-47
Appendix H Conformity with Standards ················································································Appendix-48
H.1 Compliance with European Standards ( ) ······································································Appendix-48
H.1.1 Compliance with EMC standards ···············································································Appendix-48
H.1.2 Compliance with the low voltage directive in the EU ······················································Appendix-50
x
 Safety precautions
Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation, connections (wiring), operation, or maintenance
and inspection. Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety information
and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter.
Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous
conditions, possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous
conditions, possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and/or substantial
property damage.
Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences. These
safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times.
Application
• The FRENIC-Ace is designed to drive a three-phase induction motor. Do not use it for single-phase motors
or for other purposes.
Fire or an accident could occur.
• The FRENIC-Ace may not be used for a life-support system or other purposes directly related to the human
safety.
• Though the FRENIC-Ace is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices for applications
where serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of it.
An accident could occur.
Installation
• Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non-flammable material.

Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• Do not place flammable object nearby.
Doing so could cause fire.
• Inverters FRN0085E2S-4 or above, whose protective structure is IP00, involve a possibility that a human
body may touch the live conductors of the main circuit terminal block. Inverters to which an optional DC
reactor is connected also involve the same. Install such inverters in an inaccessible place.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Do not support the inverter by its front cover during transportation.

Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries.
• Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign materials from getting into the
inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink.
• When changing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases, use only the specified screws.
Otherwise, a fire or an accident might result.
• Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts.
Doing so could cause fire, an accident or injuries.
xii
Wiring
• If no zero-phase current (earth leakage current) detective device such as a ground-fault relay is installed in
the upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system's shutdown undesirable to
factory operation, install a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker
(ELCB) individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only.
• When wiring the inverter to the power source, insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent
protection) in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters. Use the recommended devices within the
recommended current capacity.
• Use wires in the specified size.
• Tighten terminals with specified torque.
• When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor, do not use a multicore cable for the
purpose of handling their wirings together.
• Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
Doing so could cause a fire.
• Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor (DCR) when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds
500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity.
• Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
• Be sure to ground the inverter's grounding terminals G.
Otherwise, an electric shock or a fire could occur.
• Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
• Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF.
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
• Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit.
Otherwise, an electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and
the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected.
Otherwise, a fire or an accident could occur.
• Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals (U, V, and W).
• When connecting a DC braking resistor (DBR), never connect it to terminals other than terminals P(+) and
DB.
Doing so could cause fire or an accident.
• In general, sheaths of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage (i.e.,
reinforced insulation is not applied). Therefore, if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live
conductor of the main circuit, the insulation of the sheath might break down, which would expose the signal
wire to a high voltage of the main circuit. Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact with
live conductors of the main circuit.
Doing so could cause an accident or an electric shock.
• Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate, turn OFF the power and
wait at least five minutes for inverters FRN0072E2S-4 or below, or at least ten minutes for inverters
FRN0085E2S-4 or above. Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further,
make sure, using a multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P(+)
and N(-) has dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or below).
• The inverter, motor and wiring generate electric noise. Be careful about malfunction of the nearby sensors
and devices. To prevent them from malfunctioning, implement noise control measures.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
xiii
Operation
• Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the cover when the inverter
power is ON.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Doing so could cause electric shock.
• If the auto-reset function has been selected, the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor
depending on the cause of tripping. Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured at
the time of restarting.
Otherwise, an accident could occur.
• If the stall prevention function (current limiter), automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), or
overload prevention control has been selected, the inverter may operate with acceleration/deceleration or
frequency different from the commanded ones. Design the machine so that safety is ensured even in such
cases.
• The key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 (=
0, 2 or 3). When the keypad operation is disabled, prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe
operations.
Switching the run command source from keypad (local) to external equipment (remote) by turning ON the
"Enable communications link" command LE disables the key. To enable the key for an emergency
stop, select the STOP key priority with function code H96 (= 1 or 3).
• If any of the protective functions have been activated, first remove the cause. Then, after checking that the
all run commands are set to OFF, release the alarm. If the alarm is released while any run commands are set
to ON, the inverter may supply the power to the motor, running the motor.
Otherwise, an accident could occur.
• If you enable the "Restart mode after momentary power failure" (Function code F14 = 3 to 5), then the
inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered.
Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting.
• If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this User's Manual, the
motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
• Starting auto-tuning involves motor rotation. Sufficiently check that motor rotation brings no danger
beforehand.
An accident or injuries could occur.
• Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor, if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input
terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T, voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U, V, and W.
• Even if the motor is stopped due to DC braking or preliminary excitation, voltage is output to inverter output
terminals U, V, and W.
An electric shock may occur.
• The inverter can easily accept high-speed operation. When changing the speed setting, carefully check the
specifications of motors or equipment beforehand.
Otherwise, injuries could occur.
• Do not touch the heat sink and braking resistor because they become very hot.
Doing so could cause burns.
• The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism.
Injuries could occur.
• Ensure safety before modifying the function code settings.
Run commands (e.g., "Run forward" FWD), stop commands (e.g., "Coast to a stop" BX), and frequency
change commands can be assigned to digital input terminals. Depending upon the assignment states of
those terminals, modifying the function code setting may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in
speed.
• When the inverter is controlled with the digital input signals, switching run or frequency command sources
with the related terminal commands (e.g., SS1, SS2, SS4, SS8, Hz2/Hz1, Hz/PID, IVS, and LE) may cause
a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed.
• Ensure safety before modifying customizable logic related function code settings (U codes and related
function codes) or turning ON the "Cancel customizable logic" terminal command CLC. Depending upon the
settings, such modification or cancellation of the customizable logic may change the operation sequence to
cause a sudden motor start or an unexpected motor operation.
An accident or injuries could occur.
xiv
Maintenance and inspection, and parts replacement
• Before proceeding to the maintenance/inspection jobs, turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes
for inverters FRN0072E2S-4 or below, or at least ten minutes for inverters FRN0085E2S-4 or
above. Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a
multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P(+) and N(-) has
dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or below).
• Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons.
• Take off the watch, rings and other metallic objects before starting work.
• Use insulated tools.
Otherwise, an electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Never modify the inverter.
Doing so could cause an electric shock or injuries.
Disposal
• Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.

Otherwise injuries could occur.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts. Restore
the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation.
Icons
The following icons are used throughout this manual.
This icon indicates information which, if not heeded, can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency,
as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents.
This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations.
 This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information.
xv
Chapter 1
BEFORE USE
This chapter gives the check items to be used before the use of the inverter.
Contents

1.1 Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates and Inverter Type) ......................................................... 1-1
1.2 External View and Terminal Blocks .......................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters ................................................................................................ 1-4
1.3.1 Usage environment ........................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.2 Storage environment ......................................................................................................... 1-6
[ 1 ] Temporary storage .......................................................................................................... 1-6
[ 2 ] Long-term storage ........................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.3 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment ........................................................ 1-7
[ 1 ] Phase-advancing capacitors for power factor correction ................................................ 1-7
[ 2 ] Power supply lines (Application of a DC/AC reactor) ..................................................... 1-7
[ 3 ] DC reactor (DCR) for correcting the inverter input power factor
(for suppressing harmonics) ........................................................................................... 1-7
[ 4 ] PWM converter for correcting the inverter input power factor ........................................ 1-8
[ 5 ] Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) / residual-current-operated
protective device (RCD) / earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) .................................... 1-8
[ 6 ] Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter input (primary) circuit ....................................... 1-8
[ 7 ] Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter output (secondary) circuit ................................ 1-9
[ 8 ] Surge absorber/surge killer ............................................................................................. 1-9
1.3.4 Noise reduction ................................................................................................................. 1-9
1.3.5 Leakage current .............................................................................................................. 1-10
1.3.6 Precautions in driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) ..................... 1-10
1.1 Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates and Inverter Type)

Chap 1 BEFORE USE

Unpack the package and check the following:
(1) An inverter and the following accessories are contained in the package.
Accessories - DC reactor (for ND-mode inverters of FRN0139E2S-4 or above, HD/HND-mode inverters of
FRN0168E2S-4 or above, and HHD-mode inverters of FRN0203E2S-4 or above)
(Not bundled with the FRN****E2S-4C)
- Keypad rear cover (with three screws for securing the keypad)
- Instruction manual
- CD-ROM (containing the FRENIC-Ace User's Manual)
(2) The inverter has not been damaged during transportation—there should be no dents or parts missing.
(3) The inverter is the type you ordered. You can check the type and specifications on the main nameplate. (The
main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter as shown on Figure 1.2-1.)
(a) Main Nameplate (b) Sub Nameplate

Figure 1.1 Nameplates
TYPE: Type of inverter
In this manual, inverter types are denoted as "FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4."
1-1
The FRENIC-Ace is available in four different drive modes--ND (Normal Duty), HD (Heavy Duty), HND
(High, Normal Duty), and HHD (High, Heavy Duty). One of these modes should be selected to match the
load property of your system. Specifications in each mode are printed on the main nameplate.
ND mode : Designed for general load applications.

Overload capability: 120% for 1 min.
HD mode : Designed for heavy duty load applications.
HND mode : Designed for general load applications.
HHD mode : Designed for heavy duty load applications.
Overload capability: 150% for 1 min. and 200% for 0.5 s.
SOURCE : Number of input phases (three-phase: 3PH), input voltage, input frequency, input current
OUTPUT : Number of output phases, rated output voltage, output frequency range, rated output
capacity, rated output current, and overload capability
SCCR : Short-circuit capacity
MASS : Mass of the inverter in kilogram
SER. No. : Product number
68A123A0579E BB 601
Production week
This indicates the week number that is numbered
from 1st week of January.
The 1st week of January is indicated as '01'.
Production year: Last digit of year
Product version
If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product, contact your
Fuji Electric representative.
1-2
1.2 External View and Terminal Blocks
1.2 External View and Terminal Blocks

(1) Outside and inside views
Chap 1 BEFORE USE

Cooling fans
Keypad
Control circuit terminal block
Front cover
Front cover
Main nameplate
Warning plate Main circuit
terminal block
Wiring guide
Front cover
mounting screw
(a) FRN0072E2S-4
Cooling fans
Internal air circulation fan

Mounting base
Keypad enclosure
(openable)
Front cover Control circuit

terminal block
Keypad
Front cover
Warning plate
Warning label
Main circuit
Main nameplate terminal block
(b) FRN0203E2S-4
Figure 1.2-1 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters
(2) Warning plates and label
(a) FRN0072E2S-4 (b) FRN0203E2S-4

Figure 1.2-2 Warning Plates and Label
1-3
1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters

This section provides precautions in introducing inverters, e.g. precautions for installation environment, power
supply lines, wiring, and connection to peripheral equipment. Be sure to observe those precautions.
1.3.1 Usage environment

Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 1.3-1.
Table 1.3-1 Usage Environment
Item Specifications
Site location Indoors
Ambient temperature -10 to +50C (14 to 122F) (Note 1)
Relative humidity 5 to 95% RH (No condensation)
Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive gases,
flammable gases, oil mist, vapor or water drops.
Pollution degree 2 (IEC60664-1) (Note 2)
The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt. (0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will
cause condensation to form.
Altitude 1,000 m (3,300 ft) max. (Note 3)
Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa
Vibration FRN0203E2S-4 or below
3 mm (Max. amplitude) 2 to less than 9 Hz
9.8 m/s2 9 to less than 20 Hz
2 m/s2 20 to less than 55 Hz
1 m/s2 55 to less than 200 Hz
(Note 1) When inverters are mounted side-by-side without any clearance between them (FRN0072E2S-4 or below), the
ambient temperature should be within the range from -10 to +40C.
(Note 2) Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to lint, cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which
will clog the heat sink of the inverter. If the inverter is to be used in such an environment, install it in a dustproof panel
of your system.
(Note 3) If you use the inverter in an altitude above 1,000 m (3,300 ft), you should apply an output current derating factor as
listed in Table 1.3-2.
Table 1.3-2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude
Output current derating

Altitude
factor
1,000 m or lower (3,300 ft or lower) 1.00
1,000 to 1500 m (3,300 to 4,900 ft) 0.97
1,500 to 2,000 m (4,900 to 6,600 ft) 0.95
2,000 to 2,500 m (6,600 to 8,200 ft) 0.91
2,500 to 3,000 m (8,200 to 9,800 ft) 0.88
1-4
Fuji Electric strongly recommends installing inverters in a panel for safety reasons, in particular, when installing
the ones whose enclosure rating is IP00.
When installing the inverter in a place out of the specified environmental requirements, it is necessary to derate
Chap 1 BEFORE USE

the inverter or consider the panel engineering design suitable for the special environment or the panel installation
location. For details, refer to the Fuji Electric technical information "Engineering Design of Panels" or consult your
Fuji Electric representative.
The special environments listed below require using the specially designed panel or considering the panel
installation location.
Environments Possible problems Sample measures Applications

Highly Corrosive gases cause Any of the following measures Paper manufacturing,
concentrated parts inside the inverter to may be necessary. sewage disposal, sludge
sulfidizing gas or corrode, resulting in an treatment, tire
- Mount the inverter in a sealed
other corrosive inverter malfunction. manufacturing, gypsum
panel with IP6X or air-purge
gases manufacturing, metal
mechanism.
processing, and a
- Place the panel in a room free particular process in
from influence of the gases. textile factories.
A lot of conductive Entry of conductive dust Any of the following measures Wiredrawing machines,
dust or foreign into the inverter causes a may be necessary. metal processing,
material (e.g., metal short circuit. extruding machines,
powders or printing presses,
panel.
shavings, carbon combustors, and industrial
fibers, or carbon - Place the panel in a room free waste treatment.
dust) from influence of the
conductive dust.
A lot of fibrous or Fibrous or paper dust Any of the following measures Textile manufacturing and
paper dust accumulated on the heat may be necessary. paper manufacturing.
sink lowers the cooing
effect.
panel that shuts out dust.
Entry of dust into the - Ensure a maintenance space
inverter causes the for periodical cleaning of the
electronic circuitry to heat sink in panel engineering
malfunction. design.
- Employ external cooling when
mounting the inverter in a panel
for easy maintenance and
perform periodical
maintenance.
High humidity or In an environment where a - Put a heating module such as a Outdoor installation.
dew condensation humidifier is used or where space heater in the panel.
Film manufacturing line,
the air conditioner is not
pumps and food
equipped with a
processing.
dehumidifier, high humidity
or dew condensation
results, which causes a
short-circuiting or
malfunction of electronic
circuitry inside the inverter.
Vibration or shock If a large vibration or shock - Insert shock-absorbing Installation of an inverter
exceeding the exceeding the specified materials between the panel on a carrier or
specified level level is applied to the mounting base of the inverter self-propelled machine.
inverter, for example, due and the panel for safe
Ventilating fan at a
to a carrier running on mounting.
construction site or a
seam joints of rails or
press machine.
blasting at a construction
site, the inverter structure
gets damaged.
Fumigation for Halogen compounds such - When exporting an inverter Exporting.
export packaging as methyl bromide used in built in a panel or equipment,
fumigation corrodes some pack them in a previously
parts inside the inverter. fumigated wooden crate.
- When packing an inverter
alone for export, use a
laminated veneer lumber (LVL).
1-5
1.3.2 Storage environment

The storage environment in which the inverter should be stored after purchase differs from the usage environment.
Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed below.
[ 1 ] Temporary storage
Table 1.3-3 Storage and Transport Environments
Item Specifications
Storage temperature During transport: -25 to +70C (-13 to +158F)
*1 Places not subjected to abrupt temperature
During storage: -25 to +65C (-13 to +153F)
changes or condensation or freezing
Relative humidity 5 to 95% RH *2
Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive or flammable gases, oil
mist, vapor, water drops or vibration. The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt.
(0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa (during storage)
70 to 106 kPa (during transportation)
*1 Assuming comparatively short time storage, e.g., during transportation or the like.
*2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements, avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to sudden
changes in temperature that will cause condensation or freezing.
Precautions for temporary storage

(1) Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor.
(2) If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements listed in Table , wrap the inverter in an airtight
vinyl sheet or the like for storage.
(3) If the inverter is to be stored in a high-humidity environment, put a drying agent (such as silica gel) in the
airtight package described in (2) above.
[ 2 ] Long-term storage
The long-term storage method of the inverter varies largely according to the environment of the storage site.
General storage methods are described below.
(1) The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage.
However, for storage exceeding three months, the surrounding temperature range should be within the range
from -10 to +30°C (14 to 86°F). This is to prevent electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from deterioration.
(2) The package must be airtight to protect the inverter from moisture. Add a drying agent inside the package to
maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70%.
(3) If the inverter has been installed to the equipment or panel at construction sites where it may be subjected to
humidity, dust or dirt, then temporarily remove the inverter and store it in the environment specified in Table
1.3-3.
Precautions for storage over 1 year

If the inverter has not been powered on for a long time, the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate.
Power the inverters on once a year and keep the inverters powering on for 30 to 60 minutes. Do not connect the
inverters to the load circuit (secondary side) or run the inverter.
1-6
1.3.3 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment

[ 1 ] Phase-advancing capacitors for power factor correction
Chap 1 BEFORE USE

Do not mount a phase-advancing capacitor for power factor correction in the inverter's input (primary) or
output (secondary) circuit. Mounting it in the input (primary) circuit takes no effect. To correct the inverter
power factor, use an optional DC reactor (DCR). Mounting it in the output (secondary) circuit causes an
overcurrent trip, disabling operation.
An overvoltage trip that occurs when the inverter is stopped or running with a light load is assumed to be due
to surge current generated by open/close of phase-advancing capacitors in the power system. An optional
DC/AC reactor (DCR/ACR) is recommended as a measure to be taken at the inverter side.
Input current to an inverter contains a harmonic component that may affect other motors and phase-advancing
capacitors on the same power supply line. If the harmonic component causes any problems, connect a
DCR/ACR to the inverter. In some cases, it is necessary to insert a reactor in series with the phase-advancing
capacitors.
[ 2 ] Power supply lines (Application of a DC/AC reactor)

Use a DC reactor (DCR) when the capacity of the power supply transformer is 500 kVA or more and is 10
times or more the inverter rated capacity or when there are thyristor-driven loads. If no DCR is used, the
percentage-reactance of the power supply decreases, and harmonic components and their peak levels
increase. These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of the inverter, or decrease
the capacitance of the capacitors.
If the input voltage unbalance rate is 2% to 3%, use an optional AC reactor (ACR).
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)

Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67 (IEC/EN618 00 - 3)
Three - phase average voltage (V)
[ 3 ] DC reactor (DCR) for correcting the inverter input power factor (for suppressing
harmonics)
To correct the inverter input power factor (to suppress harmonics), use a DCR. Using a DCR increases the
reactance of inverter’s power source so as to decrease harmonic components on the power source lines and
correct the power factor of the inverter.
Input power
DCR models Remarks
factor
The last letter identifies the capacitance.
These DCR models comply with "Standard
Specifications for Public Building Construction"
(Electric Equipment, 2010 version) supervised by the
Approx. 90% to Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and
DCR2/4-/A/B
95% Tourism.
(The input power factor is 94% or above when the
power factor of the fundamental harmonic is assumed
as "1" according to the 2010 version.)
Approx. 86% to Exclusively designed for nominal applied motor of 37
DCR2/4-C
90% kW or above.
• Select a DCR matching not the inverter capacity but the nominal applied motor. Applicable reactors
differ depending upon the selected ND, HD, HND or HHD mode even on the same type of inverters.
• For applied motors of 75 kW or above, be sure to connect a DCR to the inverter.
1-7
[ 4 ] PWM converter for correcting the inverter input power factor

Using a PWM converter (High power-factor, regenerative PWM converter, RHC series) corrects the inverter
power factor up to nearly "1."
When combining an inverter with a PWM converter, disable the main power down detection by setting the
function code H72 to "0" (default). If the main power down detection is enabled (H72 = 1, factory default), the
inverter interprets the main power as being shut down, ignoring an entry of a run command.
[ 5 ] Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) / residual-current-operated protective device

(RCD) / earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
Install a recommended MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) in the primary circuit of the inverter
to protect the wiring. Since using an MCCB or RCD/ELCB with a lager capacity than recommended ones
breaks the protective coordination of the power supply system, be sure to select recommended ones. Also
select ones with short-circuit breaking capacity suitable for the power source impedance.
If no zero-phase current (earth leakage current) detective device such as a ground-fault relay is installed in
the upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system's shutdown undesirable to
factory operation, install a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker
(ELCB) individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only.
[ 6 ] Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter input (primary) circuit

Avoid frequent ON/OFF operation of the magnetic contactor (MC) in the input circuit; otherwise, the inverter
failure may result. If frequent start/stop of the motor is required, use FWD/REV terminal signals or the /
keys on the inverter's keypad.
The frequency of the MC's ON/OFF should not be more than once per 30 minutes. To assure 10-year or
longer service life of the inverter, it should not be more than once per hour.
• From the system's safety point of view, it is recommended to employ such a sequence that shuts
down the magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter input circuit with an alarm output signal ALM
issued on inverter's programmable output terminals. The sequence minimizes the secondary
damage even if the inverter breaks.
When the sequence is employed, connecting the MC's primary power line to the inverter's auxiliary
control power input makes it possible to monitor the inverter's alarm status on the keypad.
• The breakdown of a braking unit or misconnection of an external braking resistor may trigger that of
the inverter's internal parts (e.g., charging resistor). To avoid such a breakdown linkage, introduce an
MC and configure a sequence that shuts down the MC if a DC link voltage establishment signal is
not issued within three seconds after the MC is switched on.
For the braking transistor built-in type of inverters, assign a transistor error output signal DBAL on
inverter's programmable output terminals to switch off the MC in the input circuit.
1-8
[ 7 ] Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter output (secondary) circuit

If a magnetic contactor (MC) is inserted in the inverter's output (secondary) circuit for switching the motor to a
commercial power or for any other purposes, it should be switched on and off when both the inverter and
Chap 1 BEFORE USE

motor are completely stopped. This prevents the contact point from getting rough due to a switching arc of the
MC. The MC should not be equipped with any main circuit surge killer.
Applying a commercial power to the inverter's output circuit breaks the inverter. To avoid it, interlock the MC on
the motor's commercial power line with the one in the inverter output circuit so that they are not switched ON
at the same time.
[ 8 ] Surge absorber/surge killer

Do not install any surge absorber or surge killer in the inverter's output (secondary) lines.
1.3.4 Noise reduction

If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices, or that generated from peripheral equipment causes the
inverter to malfunction, follow the basic measures outlined below.
(1) If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding wires:
- Isolate the grounding terminals of the inverter from those of the other devices.
- Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires.
- Isolate the power system of the other devices from that of the inverter with an insulated transformer.
- Decrease the inverter's carrier frequency (F26). (See Note below.)
(2) If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices:
- Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires.
- Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit pipe, and connect the pipe to the ground near the
inverter.
- Install the inverter into the metal panel and connect the whole panel to the ground.
- Connect a noise filter to the inverter's power wires.
- Decrease the inverter's carrier frequency (F26). (See Note below.)
(3) When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment:
- For inverter's control signal wires, use twisted or shielded-twisted wires. When using shielded-twisted wires,
connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of the control circuit.
- Connect a surge absorber in parallel with magnetic contactor's coils or other solenoids (if any).
Note: Running a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) at a low carrier frequency may heat the
permanent magnet due to the output current harmonics, resulting in demagnetization. When decreasing the
carrier frequency setting, be sure to check the allowable carrier frequency of the motor.
1-9
1.3.5 Leakage current

A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) switching on/off
inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitance of inverter input and output wires or a
motor. If any of the problems listed below occurs, take an appropriate measure against them.
Problem Measures
An earth leakage circuit 1) Decrease the carrier frequency. (See Note above.)
breaker* that is connected 2) Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter.
to the input (primary) side 3) Use an earth leakage circuit breaker with lower sensitivity than the one
has tripped. currently used.
*With overcurrent protection 4) Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that features measures against the
high frequency current component (Fuji SG and EG series).
An external thermal relay 1) Decrease the carrier frequency. (See Note above.)
was falsely activated. 2) Increase the current setting of the thermal relay.
3) Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the inverter, instead
of the external thermal relay.
Note: Running a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) at a low carrier frequency may heat the
permanent magnet due to the output current harmonics, resulting in demagnetization. When decreasing the
carrier frequency setting, be sure to check the allowable carrier frequency of the motor.
1.3.6 Precautions in driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM)

When using a PMSM, note the following.
• When using a PMSM other than the Fuji standard synchronous motor (GNF2), consult your Fuji Electric
representative.
• A single inverter cannot drive two or more PMSMs.
• A PMSM cannot be driven by commercial power.
1-10
Chapter 2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
This chapter describes the important points in installing and wiring inverters.
Contents
Chapter 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.1 Installation ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.1 Basic connection diagram ................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.2 Removal and attachment of the front cover and wiring guide ............................................................. 2-6
2.2.3 Precautions for wiring ......................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.4 Precautions for long wiring (between inverter and motor) ................................................................... 2-9
2.2.5 Main circuit terminals .........................................................................................................................2-11

[ 1 ] Screw specifications and recommended wire size (main circuit terminals) .....................................2-11
[ 2 ] Terminal layout diagram (main circuit terminal) .............................................................................. 2-24
[ 3 ] Description of terminal functions (main circuit terminal) ................................................................. 2-24
2.2.6 Control circuit terminals (common to all models) .............................................................................. 2-28
[ 1 ] Screw specifications and recommended wire size (control circuit terminal) ................................... 2-28
[ 2 ] Terminal layout diagram (control circuit terminal) ........................................................................... 2-29
[ 3 ] Description of terminal functions (control circuit terminal) .............................................................. 2-30
2.2.7 Switching connector .......................................................................................................................... 2-37
2.2.8 Operating various switches ............................................................................................................... 2-39

2.3 Attachment and Connection of Keypad ................................................................................................... 2-41
2.3.1 Parts required for connection ............................................................................................................ 2-41
2.3.2 Attachment procedure ....................................................................................................................... 2-41

2.4 RJ-45 Cover ............................................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.1 Installation
Chapter 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Chap 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.1 Installation
(1) Installation Environment
Please install FRENIC-Ace in locations which meet the conditions specified in “Chapter 1 1.3.1 Usage
environment”.
(2) Installation Surface

Please install the inverter on non-combustible matter such as metals. Also, do not mount it upside down or
horizontally.
Install on non-combustible matter such as metals.

Risk of fire exists
(3) Surrounding Space

Secure the space shown in Figure 2.1-1 and Table 2.1-1. When
enclosing FRENIC-Ace in cabinets, be sure to provide adequate board
ventilation, as the surrounding temperature may rise. Do not contain it
in small enclosures with low heat dissipation capacity.
 Installation of Multiple Inverters

When installing 2 or more units in the same equipment or cabinet,
generally mount them in horizontally parallel position. When the
inverters are mounted vertically, attach partitioning boards to prevent
the heat dissipated from the lower inverter to affect the upper inverter.
For types smaller than FRN0072E2S-4 and for ambient temperature
below 40°C only, the units can be installed horizontally without any
spacing in between. (30°C or lower for HND and HHD)
Table 2.1-1 Surrounding Space (mm)

Applicable Capacity A B C
FRN0059/0072E2S-4 10 0 *1
100
FRN0085 to 0203E2S-4 50 100
*1 A clearance of 50 mm is required to use RJ45 connector.
Figure 2.1-1 Installation Direction
C: Space in front of the inverter unit
 Installation with External Cooling

The external cooling form reduces internally generated heat by
dissipating approximately 70% of the total heat generated (total heat
loss) using the cooling fins protruding outside the equipment or cabinet.
Installation with external cooling is possible for types smaller than
FRN0072E2S-4 by adding attachments (optional) for external cooling,
and for types larger than FRN0085E2S-4 by moving the mounting
bases.
(Please refer to Chapter 11 Item 11.15 for the outside drawing of the
external cooling attachment (optional)).
Prevent lint, wastepaper, wood shavings, dust, metal scrap, and

other foreign material from entering the inverter or from attaching to
Figure 2.1-2 Installation with External
the cooling fins.
Cooling
Risk of fire and risk of accidents exist
2-1
2.1 Installation
To install the FRN0085E2S-4 inverter with external cooling, change the mounting position of the mounting
bases following the procedure in Figure 2.1-3.
As the type and number of screws differ by inverter type, please review the following table.
Table 2.1-2 Type and Number of Screws, and Tightening Torque

Inverter type Mounting base fixation screw Case attachment screw Tightening torque (Nm)
FRN0085E2S-4 M620 (5 screws on top, 3 M620
5.8
to FRN0168E2S-4 screws on bottom) (2 screws on top only)
M620 (3 screws on top and M612
FRN0203E2S-4 5.8
bottom each) (3 screws on top only)
1) Remove all of the mounting base fixation screws and the case attachment screws on the top of the inverter.
2) Fix the mounting bases to the case attachment screw holes using the mounting base fixation screws. A few
screws should remain after changing the position of the mounting bases.
3) Change the position of the mounting bases on the bottom side following the procedure in 1) and 2).
Mounting base fixation screw
Mounting base
Case attachment screw
(upper side)
Mounting base
(lower side)
Mounting base fixation screw
Figure 2.1-3 Method to Change the Mounting Base Positions
Use the specified screws in changing the mounting bases.

Risk of fire and risk of accidents exist
2-2
2.2 Wiring
2.2 Wiring
2.2.1 Basic connection diagram

 Standard terminal block board (with CAN) (Destination: -A, -E, -T and -K)
Motor (with cooling fan)
Transformer
Thermal (Note 7) Braking resistor (option)
FU 2
FV (CM)
FM 1
FW (G) P DB
(Note 13)
P(+) DB 2
(Note 6) R 1
Braking resistor (option) (THR)
(G) P(+) N(-)
(G) Braking unit
(Note 5) 2
(CM) BU (option)
Direct current 1
P DB (THR) P(＋) Ｎ(－)
reactor (option)
Circuit breaker
(MCCB) or earth (Note 2) P1 P(＋) DB Ｎ(-)
leakage breaker Magnetic
Thermal Motor
(ELCB) contactor (MC) (Note 13)
Ｆ
400 V system L1/R U U
380 V to 480 L2/S R V V M
C
V 50/60 Hz L3/T W W ３～
PTC
(Note 9) thermistor
Auxiliary power input for TH1
control R0 (Note11) To [C1]
(Note3) T0 ) ・Power supply voltage switching To [11]
THC
connector “CN UX”
Auxiliary power R1
・Fan power supply connector “CN R” / E
input for fan
(Note4)
｛ T1
Charge
DC/DC
“CN W”
U2 U1 FAN NC
Grounding
lamp G
Ground G CN UX CN R CN W terminal
terminal (Note 8)
30C
Contact output
RJ45 connector
+24VDC 0V 30B Integrated alarm
output
30 30A (30A, 30B, 30C)
(Note14) (Note 10)

(EN1) SW2
Safety signal Keypad (Note 12)
Data transmission and
connector
(EN2)
Option
reception (RS-485)
(PLC) SINK
Detachable terminal block
(PLC)
(Note 12)
SW1
<Y2> Transistor output 2
Transistor output
[OL] Motor
SOURCE overload forecast
(Note 9) <Y1> Transistor output 1
(FWD [RUN] In operation
Run forward command
) <CMY> Transistor output
(REV common
Run reverse command (Note10)
)
Digital input
Digital input 1
[SS1] Multi speed (X1)
selection
Analog pulse output
Digital input 2
(X2) FMI
[SS2] Multi speed selection Current output
(4(0) to 20 mA DC)
Digital input 3 Analog output/pulse
[SS4] Multi speed selection (X3) Voltage output FMV [FM]
(0 to +10 V DC) output
Digital input 4 Pulse output [Fout1] Output
[BX] Coast to a stop command (X4) (25 to 32kp/s) FMP frequency (prior to slip
(Note10) compensation)
SW5
Digital input 5
[RST] Alarm (error) reset
(X5) (Note12) (Note10)
Digital input common (CM) [11] Analog output
(Note15) 0V
+10VDC common
(Note 9)
3
〔13〕
Voltage input 12 DX+ Data transmission
(0 to +10VDC) DX-
Voltage input for setup 2 (0 to ±10VDC) and reception
〔12〕 CAN+ (RS-485)
(Note15) 0V CAN- (CAN-BUS)
Analog input
1 SW6
〔11〕 AI PTC (Note12) RJ45 Connector
SW4
Current input C1 (Note12)
(4(0) to 20 mA DC) V2
(Note 9) 〔C1〕 PTC thermistor input
(+) Voltage input V2
(0 to +10 V DC)
C1
Current input for setup SW6
SW3
(Note12) (Note12)
(-)
(Note15) 0V
Figure 2.2-1 Standard Terminal Block Board (with CAN)
2-3
2.2 Wiring
 Standard terminal block board (without CAN, with FM2) (Destination: -C)
Motor (with cooling fan)
Transformer
Thermal (Note 7) Braking resistor (option)
FU
2
FV (CM)
FM 1
FW (G) P DB
(Note 13)
P(+)R DB 2
1
Braking resistor (option) (Note 6) (THR)
(G) P(+) N(-)
(Note 5) (G) Braking unit BU
2
(CM) (option)
Direct current 1
(THR)
reactor (option) P DB P(+) Ｎ(-)
Circuit breaker (MCCB) or

earth leakage breaker (Note 2) P1 P(+) DB N(-)
Thermal Motor
(ELCB) Magnetic
(Note 1) contactor (MC) (Note 13)
F
L1/R U U
400 V system L2/S
380 V to 480 R V V M
C
V 50/60 Hz L3/T W W 3 to
(Note 9) PTC
(Note 11) thermistor
Auxiliary power input for R0 TH1
▪ Power supply voltage switching To [C1]
control T0 ) connector “CN UX” To [11] THC
(Note 3) ▪ Fan power supply connector “CN R” /
Auxiliary power input R1
“CN W” E
for fan
(Note 4)
｛ T1
Charge
DC/DC
U2 U1 FAN NC
Ground
lamp CN UX CN R CN W G terminal
G
Ground terminal (Note 8)
30C
Contact output
RJ45 connector
30B Integrated alarm
+24VDC 0V (Note 15)
output
30 (30A, 30B, 30C)
30A
SW2 (Note 10)

(Note 14) (EN1)
Safety signal Keypad (Note 12)
Data transmission and
connector
(EN2)
Option
reception (RS-485)
(PLC)
SINK
Detachable terminal block
(PLC)
(Note 12) SW1
Transistor output
<Y2> Transistor output 2
[OL] Motor overload
SOURCE forecast
(Note 9) <Y1>
Transistor output 1
(FWD)
Run forward command
<CMY>
(REV) [RUN] In operation
Run reverse command Transistor output (Note 10)
common
Digital input 1 (X1)

Digital input
[SS1] Multi speed selection

Digital input 2 (X2) Current output FMI
[SS2] Multi speed selection (4(0) to 20 mA DC)
Digital input 3 (X3) Voltage output FMV [FM] Analog output/pulse output
(0 to +10 V DC) [Fout1] Output frequency
[SS4] Multi speed selection
Digital input 4 (X4) Pulse output FMP (prior to slip compensation)
[BX] Coast to a stop (25 to 32kp/s)
(Note 10)
command SW5
Digital input 5 (X5) (Note 12)
Analog pulse output

[RST] Alarm (error) reset
Digital input common
(CM) [11]
(Note 15) 0V Analog output common
+10VDC
3 (Note 9)
[13] Current output FMI
Voltage input 12 (4(0) to 20 mA DC)
2
(0 to +10 V DC) [FM2]
(0 to ±10 V DC)
Voltage input for setup [12]
(Note 15) 0V Voltage output FMV Analog output 2
(0 to +10 V DC) (Note 10)
Analog input
1 SW7 [lout] Output current

[11] AI PTC
(Note 12)
SW4
Current input C1
(4(0) to 20 mA DC)
(Note 12)
V2 [11]
(Note 9) 0V
[C1] PTC thermistor input (Note 15) Analog output common
(+)
Voltage input V2 C1 (Note 9)
Current input for setup (0 to +10 V DC)
SW3 Data transmission
(Note 12) (DX+)
(-) and reception
(DX-)
(Note 15) 0V (RS-485)
SW6
(SD)
(Note 12)
Figure 2.2-2 Standard Terminal Block Board (Without CAN, With FM2)
2-4
2.2 Wiring
(Note 1) Install recommended circuit breakers (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/
earth leakage breakers (ELCB) (with overcurrent protective function) on the inputs of each inverter
(primary side) for wiring protection. Do not use breakers which exceed the recommended rated current.

(Note 2) Install recommended magnetic contactors (MC) as necessary on each inverter as these will be used to
disconnect the inverter from the power supply separately from the MCCB or RCD / the ELCB.
Additionally, when installing coils such as MC or solenoid close to the inverter, connect surge absorbers
in parallel.
(Note 3) When retaining the integrated alarm signal for the activation of the protective function at inverter main
power supply shut off is desired, or when continuous display of the keypad is desired, connect this
terminal to the power supply. The inverter can be operated without connecting power to this terminal.
(Note 4) The terminal does not need to be connected. Use this terminal when operating in combination with a
high power factor regenerative PWM converter (RHC series). (For types larger than FRN0203E2S-4)
(Note 5) Remove the shorting bar between the inverter main circuit terminals P1-P(+) before connecting the
direct current reactor (DCR) (option).
ND mode: Types larger than FRN0139E2S-4, HD/ HND mode: Types larger than FRN0168E2S-4,
HHD mode: Always connect for FRN0203E2S-4.
Use the direct current reactor (option) when the power supply transformer capacity is above 500 kVA
and the transformer capacity is over 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter, and when “thyristor
load exists” in the same power system.
(Note 6) Types smaller than FRN0072E2S-4 contain braking transistors, allowing direct connection of braking
resistors between P(+)-DB.
(Note 7) When connecting braking resistors to types larger than FRN0085E2S-4, always add the braking unit
(option). Connect the braking unit (option) between P(+)-N(-). Auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have
polarity. Please connect as shown in the diagram.
(Note 8) This terminal is used for grounding the motor. Grounding the motor using this terminal is recommended
in order to suppress inverter noise.
(Note 9) Use twisted lines or shielded lines for the control signal.
Generally, the shielded line requires grounding, but when the effect of externally induced noise is large,
connecting to [CM] may suppress the effect of noise. Separate the line from the main circuit wiring and
do not enclose in the same duct. (Separation distance of over 10 cm is recommended.) When crossing
the main circuit wiring, make the intersection perpendicular.
(Note 10) The various functions listed for terminals[X1] to [X5](digital input), terminals [Y1] to [Y2](transistor
output), and terminal [FM] (monitor output) show the functions assigned as factory default.
(Note 11) These are connectors for switching the main circuit. For details, refer to “2.2.7 Switching connectors”.
(Note 12) The various switches on the control printed circuit board define the setting for the inverter operation.
For details, refer to “2.2.8 Operating various switches”.
(Note 13) Make the circuit breakers (MCCB) or the magnetic contactors (MC) trip by the thermal relay auxiliary
contacts (manual recovery).
(Note 14) Shorting bars are connected between the safety function terminals [EN1], [EN2], and [PLC] as factory
default. Remove the shorting bars when using this function.
(Note 15) and are separated and insulated.
2-5
2.2 Wiring
Route the wiring following the steps below. (The inverter is already installed in the descriptions.)
2.2.2 Removal and attachment of the front cover and wiring guide
Always remove the RS-485 communication cable from the RJ-45 connector before removing the front cover.
Risk of fire and risk of accidents exist.
(1) Types smaller than FRN0072E2S-4

1) Loosen the screws of the front cover. Hold both sides of the front cover with the hands, slide the cover
downward, and pull. Then remove to the upward direction.
2) Push the wiring guide upward and pull. Let the guide slide and remove.
3) After routing the wires, attach the wiring guide and the front cover reversing the steps above.
Push upward and pull.

Front cover attachment screw Front cover Wiring guide Let the guide slide.
Figure 2.2-3 Removal of the Front Cover and the Wiring Guide (for FRN0072E2S-4)
(2) Types larger than FRN0085E2S-4

1) Loosen the screws of the front cover. Hold both sides of the front cover with the hands and slide upward to
remove.
2) After routing the wires, align the front cover top edge to the screw holes and attach the cover reversing the
steps in figure 2.2-4.
Open the keypad case to view the control printed circuit board.
Screw
Keypad case
Front cover
Screw
Tightening torque: 1.8 N·m (M4)

3.5 N·m (M5)
Figure 2.2-4 Removal of the front cover (for FRN0203E2S-4)
2-6
2.2 Wiring
2.2.3 Precautions for wiring

Exercise caution for the following when wiring.
(1) Confirm that the supply voltage is within the input voltage range described on the rating plate.

(2) Always connect the power lines to the inverter main power input terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T (3 phase). (The
inverter will be damaged when power is applied while the power lines are connected to the wrong terminals.)
(3) Always route the ground line to prevent accidents such as electric shock and fire and to reduce noise.
(4) For the lines connecting to the main circuit terminals, use crimped terminals with insulating sleeves or use
crimped terminals in conjunction with insulating sleeves for high connection reliability.
(5) Separate the routing of the lines connected to the main circuit terminal input side (primary side) and the
output side (secondary side) and the lines connected to the control circuit terminals.
The control circuit terminal lines should be routed as far from the main circuit routing as possible. Malfunction
may occur due to noise.
(6) To prevent direct contact with the main circuit live sections (such as the main circuit terminal block), route the
control circuit wiring inside the inverter as bundles using cable ties.
(7) After removing the main circuit terminal screw, always restore the terminal screw in position and tighten even
if lines are not connected.
(8) The wiring guide is used to separately route the main circuit wiring and the control circuit wiring. In
FRN0072/0085E2S-4, the main circuit wiring (lower level), the main circuit wiring (upper level) and the
control circuit wiring can be separated. Exercise caution for the order of wiring.
Control circuit wiring Main circuit wiring (upper level)
Wiring guide
Main circuit wiring

(lower level)
Case of FRN0072E2S-4
 Handling the Wiring Guide

For inverter types smaller than FRN0072E2S-4, the wiring space may become insufficient when routing the
main circuit wires, depending on the wire material used. In these cases, the relevant cut-off sections (see the
figure below) can be removed using a pair of nippers to secure routing space. Be warned that removing the wiring
guide to accommodate the enlarged main circuit wiring will result in non-conformance to IP20 standards.
Cut-off section
Cut-off section
After cut off
Wiring Guide (FRN0072E2S-4)
2-7
2.2 Wiring
(8) Depending on the inverter capacity, straight routing of the main circuit wires from the main circuit terminal
block may not be possible. In these cases, route the wires as shown in the figure below and securely attach
the front cover.
2-8
2.2 Wiring
2.2.4 Precautions for long wiring (between inverter and motor)

(1) When multiple motors are connected to one inverter, the wiring length is the total of all wire lengths.
(2) Precautions for high frequency leak current

When the wiring length from the inverter to the motor is long, the high frequency current may flow through
the stray capacitance between the wires with various phases. The effect may cause the inverter to become
overheated, or trip due to overcurrent. Leak current may increase and the accuracy of the displayed current
may not be ensured. Depending on the conditions, excessive leak current may damage the inverter. When
directly connecting the inverter and motor, the wiring length should be kept to below 100 meters.
To operate in excess of the above mentioned wiring length, reduce the carrier frequency or use an output
circuit filter (OFL--A).
When multiple motors are operated in parallel connection configuration (group operation), and especially
when shielded cables are used in the connections, the stray capacitance to ground is large. Reduce the
carrier frequency or use output circuit filters (OFL--A).
Without output circuit filter With output circuit filter
Below 5 m
Output circuit filter
Power Inverter Motor Power
supply Inverter Motor
supply
Below
50 m/100 m Below 400 m
When the output circuit filter is attached, the total wiring length should be below 100 meters (below 400
meters under V/f control).
For motors with encoders, the wiring length between the inverter and motor should be below 100 m. The
restriction comes from the encoder specification. For distances beyond 100 m, insulation converters should
be used. Please contact Fuji Electric when operating with wiring lengths beyond the upper limit.
(3) Precautions on the surge voltage when driving the inverter (especially for 400 V series motor)
When motors are driven by inverters using the PWM method, the surge voltage generated by the switching
of the inverter elements is added to the output voltage and is applied onto the motor terminals. Especially
when the motor wiring length is long, the surge voltage can cause insulation degradation in the motor.
Please perform one of the countermeasures shown below.
 Use motor with insulation enhancement (Fuji’s standard motors have insulation enhancements)
 Connect a surge suppression unit on the motor side (SSU50/100TA-NS)
 Connect an output circuit filter (OFL--A) to the inverter output side (secondary side)
 Reduce the wiring length from the inverter to the motor. (Less than 10 to 20 meters)
(4) When output circuit filters are attached to the inverter or when the wiring length is long, the voltage applied
to the motor will decrease due to the voltage drop caused by the filter or wiring. In these cases, current
oscillation and lack of torque may occur due to insufficient voltage.
2-9
2.2 Wiring
 For each inverter, connect to the power supply via circuit breaker and earth leakage breaker (with
overcurrent protective function). Use recommended circuit breakers and earth leakage breakers and do not
use breakers which exceed the recommended rated current.
 Always use the specified sizes for the wires.
 Tighten terminals with the defined tightening torque.
 When multiple combinations of inverters and motors exist, do not use multi-core cables for the purpose of
bundling the various wires.
 Do not install surge killers on the inverter output side (secondary side)
Risk of fire exists.
 Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
 Always ground the ground line connected to the inverter grounding terminal [ G]
Risk of electric shock and risk of fire exist.
 Qualified personnel should perform the wiring.
 Perform wiring after confirming that the power is shut off.
Risk of electric shock exists.
 Perform wiring only after the equipment is installed at the location.
Risk of electric shock and risk of injury exist.
 Confirm that the phase of the power input and the rated voltage for the product matches with the phase and
voltage of the power supply to be connected.
 Do not connect power supply lines to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W).
2-10
2.2 Wiring
2.2.5 Main circuit terminals
[ 1 ] Screw specifications and recommended wire size (main circuit terminals)

The specifications for the screws used in the main circuit wiring and the wire sizes are shown below. Exercise

caution as the terminal position varies by inverter capacity. In the diagram, the two ground terminals [ G]are not
differentiated for the input side (primary side) and the output side (secondary side).
Also, use crimped terminals with insulating sleeves and compatible for main circuit or terminals with insulating
tubes. The recommended wire sizes are shown by board temperature and wire type.
Table 2.2-1 Screw Specifications

Screw specifications
Auxiliary power input Auxiliary power input
Main circuit Grounding
Power See item for control [R0, T0] for fan [R1, T1]
Inverter type
System [2] Tightening Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Screw Screw Screw
size torque size torque torque torque
size size
(driver size) (Nm) (driver size) (Nm) (Nm) (Nm)
FRN0059E2S-4 M6 M6
Fig. A 5.8 5.8
FRN0072E2S-4 (No. 3) (No.3)
3 FRN0085E2S-4
- -
Phase FRN0105E2S-4 M3.5 1.2
400 V Fig. B M8 13.5
FRN0139E2S-4 M8 13.5
FRN0168E2S-4
FRN0203E2S-4 Fig. C M10 27 M3.5 1.2
The following terminals will have high voltage when power is ON.
Main circuit: L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, P1, P(+), N(-), DB, U, V, W, R0, T0, R1, T1
Insulation level
Main circuit - Casing : Basic insulation (overvoltage category III, degree of contamination 2)
Main circuit - Control circuit : Enhanced insulation (overvoltage category III, degree of contamination 2)
Risk of electric shock exists
The following wires are recommended unless special requirements exist.

 600 V vinyl insulation wire (IV wire)
The wire is used in circuits except the inverter control circuit. The wire is difficult to twist and is not recommended
for inverter control circuit. The maximum allowable temperature for the insulated wire is 60°C.
 600 V type 2 vinyl insulation wire or 600 V polyethylene insulation wire (HIV wire)
In comparison to the IV wire, the wire is smaller, more flexible, and the maximum allowable temperature for the
insulated wire is higher at 75°C, making it suitable for both the inverter main circuit and control circuit. However,
the wiring distance should be short and the wire must be twisted for use in the inverter control circuit.
 600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulation wire (FSLC wire)
The wire is used mainly in the main circuit and the grounding circuits. The size is even smaller than the IV wire or
the HIV wire and also flexible. Due to these features, the wire is used to reduce the area occupied by wiring and
to improve work efficiency in high temperature areas. The maximum allowable temperature for the insulated wire
is 90°C. As a reference, Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. produces Boardlex which satisfies the requirements.
 Shielded-Twisted cables for internal wiring of electronic/electric instruments
This product is used in inverter control circuits. Use this wire with high shielding effect when risk of exposure to or
effect of radiated noise and induced noise exists. Always use this wire when the wiring distance is long, even
within the board. Furukawa Electric’s BEAMEX S shielded cables XEBV or XEWV satisfy the requirements.
2-11
2.2 Wiring
Table 2.2-2 Recommended Wire Sizes (Common Terminals)

Recommended wire size
Common terminals Remarks
(mm2)
Auxiliary power input terminal for
2.0 -
control circuit R0, T0
Auxiliary power input terminal for
2.0 FRN0203E2S-4
fan R1, T1
1) Wire sizes conforming to low voltage directive in Europe
Table 2.2-3 Recommended Wire Sizes

ND Mode
2
Recommended wire size (mm )
Power System
Std Main power supply input Ground terminal

Applicable [L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] [ G] For DC For braking
Inverter type Inverter
Motor reactor resistor
output
(kW) With DC Without DC With DC Without DC connection connection
[U, V, W]
reactor reactor reactor reactor [P1, P(+)] [P(+), DB]
30 FRN0059E2S-4 16 25 16 16 16 25 2.5
37 FRN0072E2S-4 25 35 16 16 25 25 2.5
3 45 FRN0085E2S-4 25 50 16 25 35 35 2.5
Phase 55 FRN0105E2S-4 35 70 16 35 50 50 2.5
400 V 75 FRN0139E2S-4 70 - 35 35 70 95 2.5
90 FRN0168E2S-4 95 - 50 50 95 120 4
110 FRN0203E2S-4 50×2 - 70 70 50×2 150 6
HD Mode
2
Power System

Applicable Inverter type [L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] [ G] For DC For braking
Inverter
output
[U, V, W]
22 FRN0059E2S-4 10 16 10 16 10 16 2.5
30 FRN0072E2S-4 16 25 16 16 16 25 2.5
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 25 35 16 16 25 25 2.5
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 25 50 16 25 35 35 2.5
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 35 70 16 35 50 50 2.5
75 FRN0168E2S-4 70 - 35 35 70 95 4
90 FRN0203E2S-4 95 - 50 50 95 120 6
The recommended wire sizes for the main circuit terminals assume using 70°C 600 V PVC wire at 40°C ambient
temperature.
2-12
2.2 Wiring
HND Mode
2
Power System
Applicable [L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] [ G] For DC For braking
Inverter type Inverter
reactor resistor

Motor output
[U, V, W]
22 FRN0059E2S-4 10 16 10 16 10 16 2.5
30 FRN0072E2S-4 16 25 16 16 16 25 2.5
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 25 35 16 16 25 25 2.5
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 25 50 16 25 35 35 2.5
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 35 70 16 35 50 50 2.5
75 FRN0168E2S-4 70 - 35 35 70 95 2.5
90 FRN0203E2S-4 95 - 50 50 95 120 4
HHD Mode
2
Power System

Applicable Inverter type [L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] [ G] For DC For braking
Inverter
output
[U, V, W]
18.5 FRN0059E2S-4 6 16 10 16 10 10 2.5

22 FRN0072E2S-4 10 16 10 16 10 16 2.5
3 30 FRN0085E2S-4 16 25 16 16 16 25 2.5
Phase 37 FRN0105E2S-4 25 35 16 16 25 25 2.5
400 V 45 FRN0139E2S-4 25 50 16 25 35 35 2.5
55 FRN0168E2S-4 35 70 16 35 50 50 2.5
75 FRN0203E2S-4 70 - 35 35 70 95 4
The recommended wire sizes for the main circuit terminals assume using 70°C 600 V PVC wire at 40°C ambient
temperature.
2-13
2.2 Wiring
2) Wire sizes for board temperature: Below 40°C, wire type: 60°C wire

ND Mode
2
Power System
Std Main power supply input

Applicable [L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] For DC For braking
Inverter type Ground Inverter
terminal output
(kW) With DC Without DC connection connection
[ G] [U, V, W]
reactor reactor [P1, P(+)] [P(+), DB]
*1
30 FRN0059E2S-4 14 22 8 14 14 2
*1
37 FRN0072E2S-4 14 38 8 14 22 2
3 45 FRN0085E2S-4 22 38 8 22 38 2
Phase 55 FRN0105E2S-4 38 60 14 38 38 2
400 V 75 FRN0139E2S-4 60 - 14 60 60 2
*5
90 FRN0168E2S-4 60 - 14 60 100 3.5
110 FRN0203E2S-4 100 - 22 100 150 5.5
HD Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*1 *1
22 FRN0059E2S-4 8 14 5.5 8 14 2
*1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 14 22 8 14 14 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 14 38 8 22 22 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 22 38 8 22 38 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 38 60 14 38 38 2
75 FRN0168E2S-4 60 - 14 60 60 3.5
90 FRN0203E2S-4 60 - 14 60 100 5.5
HND Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*1 *1
22 FRN0059E2S-4 8 14 5.5 8 14 2
*1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 14 22 8 14 14 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 14 38 8 22 22 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 22 38 8 22 38 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 38 60 14 38 38 2
75 FRN0168E2S-4 60 - 14 60 60 2
90 FRN0203E2S-4 60 - 14 60 100 3.5
The recommended wire sizes for the main circuit terminals assume using 60°C IV wire.
*1 For compatible crimped terminal, please use model 8-L6 by JST Mfg. Co., Ltd. or equivalent.
*5 For compatible crimped terminal, please use model CB100-S8 by JST Mfg. Co., Ltd. or equivalent.
2-14
2.2 Wiring
HHD Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*1
18.5 FRN0059E2S-4 5.5 14 5.5 5.5 8 2
*1 *1
22 FRN0072E2S-4 8 14 5.5 8 14 2
3 30 FRN0085E2S-4 14 22 8 14 14 2
Phase 37 FRN0105E2S-4 14 38 8 22 22 2
400 V 45 FRN0139E2S-4 22 38 8 22 38 2
55 FRN0168E2S-4 38 60 14 38 38 2
75 FRN0203E2S-4 60 - 14 60 60 3.5

ND Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*1 *1 *1
30 FRN0059E2S-4 8 14 8 8 14 2
*1
37 FRN0072E2S-4 14 14 8 14 14 2
3 45 FRN0085E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
Phase 55 FRN0105E2S-4 22 38 14 22 38 2
400 V 75 FRN0139E2S-4 38 - 14 38 38 2
90 FRN0168E2S-4 38 - 14 38 60 2
110 FRN0203E2S-4 60 - 22 60 100 3.5
The recommended wire sizes for the main circuit terminals assume using 75°C 600 V HIV wire.
2-15
2.2 Wiring
HD Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*1
22 FRN0059E2S-4 5.5 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 2
*1 *1 *1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 8 14 8 8 14 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 14 14 8 14 14 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 22 38 14 22 38 2
75 FRN0168E2S-4 38 - 14 38 38 2
90 FRN0203E2S-4 38 - 14 60 60 3.5
HND Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*1
22 FRN0059E2S-4 5.5 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 2
*1 *1 *1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 8 14 8 8 14 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 14 14 8 14 14 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 22 38 14 22 38 2
75 FRN0168E2S-4 38 - 14 38 38 2
90 FRN0203E2S-4 38 - 14 60 60 2
HHD Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*6 *1 *6
18.5 FRN0059E2S-4 3.5 8 5.5 3.5 5.5 2
*1
22 FRN0072E2S-4 5.5 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 2
3 30 FRN0085E2S-4 8 14 8 8 14 2
Phase 37 FRN0105E2S-4 14 14 8 14 14 2
400 V 45 FRN0139E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
55 FRN0168E2S-4 22 38 14 22 38 2
75 FRN0203E2S-4 38 - 14 38 38 2
The recommended wire sizes for the main circuit terminals assume using 75°C 600V HIV wire.
*6 For compatible crimped terminal, please use model R5.5-6 by JST Mfg. Co., Ltd. or equivalent.
2-16
2.2 Wiring

ND Mode

2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*1 *1 *1
30 FRN0059E2S-4 5.5 8 8 5.5 8 2
*1 *1 *1
37 FRN0072E2S-4 8 14 8 8 14 2
3 45 FRN0085E2S-4 14 22 8 14 14 2
Phase 55 FRN0105E2S-4 14 22 14 14 22 2
400 V 75 FRN0139E2S-4 22 - 14 22 38 2
90 FRN0168E2S-4 38 - 14 38 38 2
110 FRN0203E2S-4 38 - 22 38 60 2
HD Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*6 *6
22 FRN0059E2S-4 3.5 5.5 5.5 3.5 5.5 2
*1 *1 *1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 5.5 8 8 5.5 8 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 8 14 8 8 14 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 14 22 8 14 14 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 14 22 14 14 22 2
75 FRN0168E2S-4 22 - 14 38 38 2
90 FRN0203E2S-4 38 - 14 38 38 2
HND Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*6 *6
22 FRN0059E2S-4 3.5 5.5 5.5 3.5 5.5 2
*1 *1 *1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 5.5 8 8 5.5 8 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 8 14 8 8 14 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 14 22 8 14 14 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 14 22 14 14 22 2
75 FRN0168E2S-4 22 - 14 38 38 2
90 FRN0203E2S-4 38 - 14 38 38 2
2-17
2.2 Wiring
HHD Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*6 *6 *6
18.5 FRN0059E2S-4 3.5 5.5 5.5 3.5 3.5 2
*6 *6
22 FRN0072E2S-4 3.5 5.5 5.5 3.5 5.5 2
3 30 FRN0085E2S-4 5.5 8 8 5.5 8 2

Phase 37 FRN0105E2S-4 8 14 8 8 14 2
400 V 45 FRN0139E2S-4 14 22 8 14 14 2
55 FRN0168E2S-4 14 22 14 14 22 2
75 FRN0203E2S-4 22 - 14 38 38 2

ND Mode
2
Power System
Std Main power supply input For DC

Applicable (Note 1) [L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] Ground Inverter For braking
Inverter type reactor
Motor terminal output resistor
connection
(kW) With DC Without DC (Note 1) (Note 1) connection
(Note 1)
reactor reactor [ G] [U, V, W] [P(+), DB]
[P1, P(+)]
*1
30 FRN0059E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
*1
37 FRN0072E2S-4 22 38 8 22 38 2
3 45 FRN0085E2S-4 38 38 8 38 38 2
Phase 55 FRN0105E2S-4 38 60 14 38 60 2
400 V 75 FRN0139E2S-4 60 - 14 60
*5
3.5
100
*5 *5 *5
90 FRN0168E2S-4 100 - 14 100 100 3.5
110 FRN0203E2S-4 100 - 22 100 150 5.5
Note 1) The rated current must be reduced for operation (Rated current x 80%). Recommended wire sizes
assume these conditions.
2-18
2.2 Wiring
HD Mode
2
Power System
Std Main power supply input For DC
Applicable (Note 1) [L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] Ground Inverter For braking
Inverter type reactor
terminal output resistor

Motor connection
(kW) With DC Without DC (Note 1) (Note 1) connection
(Note 1)
reactor reactor [ G] [U, V, W] [P(+), DB]
*[P1, P(+)]
*1
22 FRN0059E2S-4 8 14 5.5 14 14 2
*1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 22 38 8 22 38 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 38 38 8 38 38 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 38 60 14 38 60 3.5
*5
75 FRN0168E2S-4 60 - 14 60 100 3.5
90 FRN0203E2S-4 100 - 14 100 100 5.5
HND Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
22 FRN0059E2S-4 14 22 5.5 14 22 2
*1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 22 38 8 22 38 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 38 60 8 38 38 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 38 60 8 38 60 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 60
*5
14 60
*5
2
100 100
*5 *5 *5
75 FRN0168E2S-4 100 - 14 100 100 3.5
*3
90 FRN0203E2S-4 100 - 14 150 150 5.5
HHD Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
18.5 FRN0059E2S-4 14 22 5.5 14 14 2

22 FRN0072E2S-4 14 22 5.5 14 22 2
3 30 FRN0085E2S-4 22 38 8 22 38 2
Phase 37 FRN0105E2S-4 38 60 8 38 38 2
400 V 45 FRN0139E2S-4 38 60 8 38 60 2
*5 *5
55 FRN0168E2S-4 60 100 14 60 100 3.5
75 FRN0203E2S-4 100 - 14 100 100 5.5
*3 For compatible crimped terminal, please use model CB150-10 by JST Mfg. Co., Ltd. or equivalent.
2-19
2.2 Wiring

ND Mode
2
Power System

(Note 1) For DC
Applicable Ground Inverter For braking
Inverter type [L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] reactor
connection
(kW) (Note 1) (Note 1) connection
With DC Without DC (Note 1)
[ G] [U, V, W] [P(+), DB]
reactor reactor [P1, P(+)]
*1 *1 *1
30 FRN0059E2S-4 8 14 8 8 14 2
*1 *1
37 FRN0072E2S-4 8 14 8 14 14 2
3 45 FRN0085E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
Phase 55 FRN0105E2S-4 22 38 14 22 22 2
400 V 75 FRN0139E2S-4 38 - 14 38 38 2
90 FRN0168E2S-4 38 - 14 38 60 2
110 FRN0203E2S-4 60 - 22 60 60 3.5
HD Mode
2
Power System

(Note 1) For DC
connection
[ G] [U, V, W] [P(+), DB]
*1
22 FRN0059E2S-4 5.5 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 2
*1 *1 *1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 8 14 8 8 14 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 8 14 8 14 14 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 22 38 14 22 22 2
75 FRN0168E2S-4 38 - 14 38 38 2
90 FRN0203E2S-4 38 - 14 38 60 3.5
2-20
2.2 Wiring
HND Mode
2
Power System
reactor resistor

Motor terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*1 *1
22 FRN0059E2S-4 5.5 14 5.5 8 8 2
*1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 14 14 8 14 14 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 22 38 8 22 22 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 22 38 14 38 38 2
75 FRN0168E2S-4 38 - 14 60 60 2
90 FRN0203E2S-4 60 - 14 60 100 2
HHD Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*1
18.5 FRN0059E2S-4 5.5 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 2
*1 *1
22 FRN0072E2S-4 5.5 14 5.5 8 8 2
3 30 FRN0085E2S-4 14 14 8 14 14 2
Phase 37 FRN0105E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
400 V 45 FRN0139E2S-4 22 38 8 22 22 2
55 FRN0168E2S-4 22 38 14 38 38 2
75 FRN0203E2S-4 38 - 14 60 60 2
2-21
2.2 Wiring

ND Mode
2
Power System

(Note 1) For DC
connection
[ G] [U, V, W] [P(+), DB]
*1 *1
30 FRN0059E2S-4 5.5 8 8 5.5 5.5 2
*1 *1 *1
37 FRN0072E2S-4 5.5 14 8 8 8 2
3 45 FRN0085E2S-4 8 14 8 8 14 2
Phase 55 FRN0105E2S-4 14 22 14 14 14 2
400 V 75 FRN0139E2S-4 22 - 14 22 38 2
90 FRN0168E2S-4 22 - 14 38 38 2
110 FRN0203E2S-4 38 - 22 38 60 2
HD Mode
2
Power System

(Note 1) For DC
connection
[ G] [U, V, W] [P(+), DB]
*6 *6 *6
22 FRN0059E2S-4 3.5 5.5 5.5 3.5 3.5 2
*1 *1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 5.5 8 8 5.5 5.5 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 5.5 14 8 8 8 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 8 14 8 14 14 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 14 22 14 14 14 2
75 FRN0168E2S-4 22 - 14 22 38 2
90 FRN0203E2S-4 22 - 14 38 38 2
2-22
2.2 Wiring
HND Mode
2
Power System
reactor resistor

Motor terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*1
22 FRN0059E2S-4 5.5 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 2
*1 *1 *1 *1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 8 14 8 8 8 2
3 37 FRN0085E2S-4 8 14 8 14 14 2
Phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
400 V 55 FRN0139E2S-4 22 38 14 22 22 2
75 FRN0168E2S-4 38 - 14 38 38 2
90 FRN0203E2S-4 38 - 14 38 60 2
HHD Mode
2
Power System

terminal output
[ G] [U, V, W]
*6 *6
18.5 FRN0059E2S-4 3.5 5.5 5.5 3.5 5.5 2
*1
22 FRN0072E2S-4 5.5 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 2
3 30 FRN0085E2S-4 8 14 8 8 8 2
Phase 37 FRN0105E2S-4 8 14 8 14 14 2
400 V 45 FRN0139E2S-4 14 22 8 14 22 2
55 FRN0168E2S-4 22 38 14 22 22 2
75 FRN0203E2S-4 38 - 14 38 38 2
2-23
2.2 Wiring
[ 2 ] Terminal layout diagram (main circuit terminal)
Charge lump Figure B

Figure A Charge lump
Figure C
Charge lump
[ 3 ] Description of terminal functions (main circuit terminal)

Terminal
Classification Terminal name Specification
symbol
L1/R, L2/S, Main power

Terminals to connect 3 phase power source.
L3/T input
U, V, W Inverter output Terminals to connect 3 phase motors.

Terminals to connect DC reactor (DCR) for power factor enhancement.
For direct
ND mode: Types larger than FRN0139E2S-4,
P (+), P1 current reactor
HD/HND mode: Types larger than FRN0168E2S-4,
connection
HHD mode: Always connect for FRN0203E2S-4.
For direct
Terminals to connect direct current intermediate circuit of other inverters and PWM
P (+), N (-) current bus
converters.
connection
Main circuit
For braking
Terminals to connect P (+) terminal of braking resistor (option) and DB. (Wiring
P (+), DB resistor
length: Below 5 meters) (Types smaller than FRN0072E2S-4)
connection
For inverter
G chassis (case) Grounding terminal for inverter chassis (case).
grounding
When retaining the integrated alarm signal for the activation of the protective
Auxiliary power
R0, T0 function at inverter main power supply shut off is desired, or when continuous
input for brakes
display of the keypad is desired, connect this terminal to the power supply.
Ordinarily, the terminal does not need to be connected. Connect these terminals to
Auxiliary power
R1, T1 AC power supply when operating with direct current power input (such as in
input for fan
combination with PWM converters).
2-24
2.2 Wiring
Follow the steps below when wiring.
(1) Inverter ground terminal (zG)

(2) Inverter output terminals (U, V, W), motor ground terminal (zG)
(3) Direct current reactor connection terminals (P1, P(+))*
(4) Braking resistor connection terminals (P(+), DB)*
(5) Direct current bus connection terminals(P(+), N(-))*

(6) Main power supply input terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T)
* Connect as necessary
(1) Main power source input terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T (3 phase input)
Connect the 3 phase power source.
1) For safety, confirm that the circuit breaker (MCCB) or the magnetic contactor (MC) is OFF prior to wiring the
power lines.
2) Connect the power lines (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) to MCCB or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/
the earth leakage breaker (ELCB)*, or connect via MC as necessary. The phase sequence of the power lines
and the inverter do not need to be matched.
* With overcurrent protection
In emergencies such as when the inverter protective function is activated, disconnecting the inverter
from the power source to prevent magnification of failure or accident may be desired. Installation of an
MC which allows manual disconnection of the power source is recommended.
(2) Inverter output terminals U, V, W, motor ground terminal G

1) Connect the 3 phase motor terminals U, V, and W while matching the phase sequence.
2) Connect the ground line of the outputs (U, V, W) to the ground terminal ( G).
When multiple combinations of inverters and motors exist, do not use multi-core cables for the purpose
of bundling the various wires.
Inverter 1 Motor 1
Inverter 2 Motor 2
Inverter 3
Motor 3
2-25
2.2 Wiring
(3) Direct current reactor connection terminals P1, P(+)

Connect the direct current reactor (DCR) for power factor enhancement.
1) Remove the shorting bar from terminals P1-P(+).
(FRN0203E2S-4 will not have the shorting bar connected.)
2) Connect the P1, P(+) terminals for the direct current reactor (option).
Keep the wiring length below 10 meters.

Do not remove the shorting bar if the direct current reactor is not used.
When the capacity of the motor to be used is above 75 kW, always connect the direct current reactor.
Direct current reactors do not have to be connected when connecting PWM converters.
Always connect the direct current reactor (option) when the power supply transformer capacity is above 500
kVA and is over 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter.
(4) Braking resistor connection terminals P(+) DB (Types smaller than FRN0072E2S-4)
1) Connect terminals P(+), DB for the braking resistor (option).
2) Position the inverter main body and the braking resistor such that the wiring length will be less than 5 meters
and route the two wires twisted or in contact with each other (parallel).
Do not connect to terminals other than P(+)-DB when connecting braking resistors.
(5) Direct current bus terminals P(+), N(-)

1) Connecting the braking unit/braking resistor (option)
Additional
Inverter type Braking transistor instruments for Instruments connected/connection terminals
connection (option)
Types larger than Braking unit Inverter (P(+), N(-)) - Braking unit (P(+), N(-))
Not equipped
FRN0085E2S-4 Braking resistor Braking unit (P(+) R, DB) - Braking resistor (P, DB)
Braking units are necessary when using braking resistors for types larger than FRN0085E2S-4.
Connect terminals P(+), N(-) of the braking unit to the inverter terminals P(+), N(-). Position the equipment
such that the wiring length is below 5 meters and route the two wires twisted or in contact with each other
(parallel).
Connect the terminals P(+) R, DB of the braking unit to terminals P(+), DB of the braking resistor. Position the
equipment such that the wiring length is below 10 meters and route the two wires twisted or in contact with
each other (parallel).
For details such as other wirings, refer to the user’s manual for the braking unit.
Wire length below Wire length below

5 meters 10 meters
Braking unit
Braking resistor
2-26
2.2 Wiring
2) Connection of other instruments

The direct current intermediate circuit of other inverters and PWM converters can be connected.
(For connection with the PWM converter, refer to Chapter 11 "11.9 Power Regenerative PWM Converters,
RHC Series ").

(6) Inverter ground terminal G
The terminal is the ground terminal for the inverter chassis (case). Always connect to ground for safety and as a
countermeasure for noise. To prevent accidents such as electric shock and fire, the electric facility technical
standards require grounding construction for metallic frames in electric instruments.
Follow the steps below in connecting the ground terminal on the power supply side.
1) Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
2) The grounding wire should be thick, with large surface area, and as short as possible.
(7) Auxiliary power input terminals for control circuit R0, T0

The inverter can be operated without power input to the auxiliary power input terminals for control circuit. However,
the various inverter output signals and the keypad display will be terminated when the inverter main power is shut
off and the control power source is lost.
When retaining the integrated alarm signal for the activation of the protective function at inverter main power
supply shut off is desired, or when continuous display of the keypad is desired, connect these terminals to the
power supply. When the inverter input side has a magnetic contactor (MC), wire from the input side (primary side)
of the magnetic contactor (MC).
Terminal rating: AC 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz, maximum current 0.5 A (400 V series)
When connecting the earth leakage breaker, connect terminals R0, T0 to the output side of the earth
leakage breaker.
When connections are made to the input side of the earth leakage breaker, the earth leakage breaker
will malfunction because the inverter input is 3 phase and the terminals R0, T0 are single phase. When
connecting to terminals R0, T0 from the input side of the earth leakage breaker, make sure that the
insulating transformer is positioned as in the figure below, or make sure to connect the auxiliary B
contact of the magnetic contactor.
Magnetic
contactor
Magnetic
contactor
Figure 2.2-5 Connection of the Earth Leakage Breaker
2-27
2.2 Wiring
When connecting with the PWM converter, do not connect power source directly to the inverter’s
auxiliary power input terminals (R0, T0) for control circuit. Insert an insulating transformer or the auxiliary
B contact of a magnetic contactor on the power supply side.
On connection examples for the PWM converter side, refer to Chapter 11 "11.9 Power Regenerative
PWM Converters, RHC Series ".
Circuit breaker or earth Filter Boosting
leakage breaker reactor PWM FRENIC-Ace
Magnetic contactor reactor converter
Filter
Power
supply
Transformer
for insulation
(100 VA)
Or
Magnetic
contactor auxiliary
B contact
Figure 2.2-6 Example of Grounding in Combination with PWM Converter
(8) Auxiliary power input terminals for fan R1, T1

The terminals are equipped on FRN0203E2S-4 but is not used ordinarily.
Connect AC power source when using direct current power supply input (such as in combination with PWM
converters).
Also switch the fan power supply switching connectors “CN R”, “CN W”.
Terminal rating: AC 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz, maximum current 1.0 A (400 V series)
2.2.6 Control circuit terminals (common to all models)
[ 1 ] Screw specifications and recommended wire size (control circuit terminal)

The screw specifications and wire sizes to be used for control circuit wiring are shown below.
The control circuit terminal box differs by destination.
Table 2.2-10 Screw Specifications and Recommended Wire Sizes

Removal
Screw specification
size of wire
Allowable wire Driver cover Gauge size to
Terminal symbol
sizes (shape of tip) insert wire
Size Tightening torque
2 Minus
30A, 30B, 30C 0.14 to 1.5 mm *1
M3 0.5 to 0.6 N·m (0.6 mm×3.5 6 mm A1
EN1, EN2 (AWG26 to 16)
mm)
2 Minus
0.14 to 1 mm
Others M2 0.22 to 0.25 N·m (0.4 mm×2.5 5 mm φ1.6
(AWG26 to 18)
mm)
* Recommended rod terminal: Phoenix Contact Refer to Table 2.2-11 for details.
*1 Defined according to IEC/EN 60947-1.
Table 2.2-11 Recommended Rod Terminals

Type
Screw size Wire size Without insulating
With insulating collar
collar
2
0.25 mm (AWG24) AI 0.25-6 BU A 0.25-7
2
M2 0.34 mm (AWG22) AI 0.34-6 TQ A 0.34-7
2
0. 5 mm (AWG20) AI 0.5-6 WH A 0.5-6
M3 2
0.75 mm (AWG18) AI 0.75-6 GY A 0.75-6
2
1 mm (AWG18) AI 1-6 RD A 1-6
2
1.5 mm (AWG16) AI 1.5-6 BK A 1.5-7
Note) When sizes exceeding the recommended wire sizes are used, the front cover may be pushed outward
depending on the number of wires, causing erroneous operation of the keypad.
2-28
2.2 Wiring
[ 2 ] Terminal layout diagram (control circuit terminal)

Enhanced insulation
(Max. 250 VAC overvoltage category II, degree of
contamination 2)
Enhanced insulation Contact output
(Max. 250 VAC overvoltage category II, degree of
contamination 2)
Contact output
Destination: -A ,-E,-T and -K Destination: -C
The following terminals will have high voltage when the power is ON.
Control terminals: AUX-contact (30A, 30B, 30C, Y5A, Y5C)
Insulation level
Contact output – control circuit : Enhanced insulation (overvoltage category II, degree of contamination 2)
Risk of electric shock exists
2-29
2.2 Wiring
[ 3 ] Description of terminal functions (control circuit terminal)
Generally, the insulation for control signal lines are not enhanced. When the control signal lines come into
direct contact with the main circuit live section, the insulation cover may be damaged. High voltage of the main
circuit may be applied on the control signal lines, so exercise caution such that the main circuit live sections do
not contact the control signal lines.
Risk of accidents and risk of electric shock exist.
Noise is generated by the inverter, motor, and wiring.
Exercise caution to prevent malfunction of peripheral sensors and instruments.

Risk of accidents exists.
Table 2.2-12 shows the functional explanations for the control circuit terminals. The connection method differs for
the control circuit terminals depending on the functional code setting matching the purpose of inverter operation.
Properly wire such that the impact of noise generated by the main circuit wiring is reduced.
Table 2.2-12 Functional Description of Control Circuit Terminals

Classification
Terminal
Terminal name Functional description
symbol
[13] Power source The terminal is used for the power source (DC+10 V 10 mA Max) for the external speed
for variable setup device (variable resistor: 1 to 5 kΩ).
resistor Connect variable resistors larger than 1/2 W.
[12] Analog setup (1) Frequency is set up according to the external analog voltage input command value.
voltage input Normal operation
• DC0 to +10 V/0 to 100(%) (DC0 to +5 V/0 to 100%)
• DC0 to 10 V/0 to ±100(%) (DC0 to ±5 V/0 to ±100%)
Reverse operation
• DC+10 to 0 to -10 V/-100% to 0 to 100(%)
• DC-10 to 0 to +10 V/+100% to 0 to -100(%)
(2) The terminal can be assigned to PID command, feedback signal of PID control, auxiliary
frequency setup, ratio setup, torque limit setup, and analog input monitor aside from the
frequency setup by analog input.
(3) Hardware specification
Analog input
* Input impedance: 22 (kΩ)

* Up to DC±15 V can be input. However, input exceeding DC±10 V will be recognized as
DC±10 V.
[C1] Analog setup (1) Frequency is set up according to the external analog current input command value.
current input Normal operation
(C1 function) • DC4 to 20 mA/0 to 100(%)/-100% to 0 to 100%
• DC0 to 20 mA/0 to 100(%)/-100% to 0 to 100%
Reverse operation
• DC20 to 4 mA/0 to 100(%)/-100% to 0 to 100%
• DC20 to 0 mA/0 to 100(%)/-100% to 0 to 100%
* Input impedance: 250 (Ω)
* Up to DC 30 mA can be input. However, input exceeding DC 20 mA will be recognized
as DC 20 mA.
2-30
2.2 Wiring
Table 2.2-12 Functional Description of Control Circuit Terminals (continued)
Terminal Terminal
Classifi
cation
Functional description
symbol name

[C1] Analog setup (1) Frequency is set up according to the external analog voltage input command value.
voltage input SW3 (refer to “2.2.8 Operating various switches”) must be switched on the printed circuit
(V2 function) board.
Normal operation
• DC0 to +10 V/0 to 100(%) (DC0 to +5 V/0 to 100%)
• DC0 to +10 V/-100 to 0 to 100(%) (DC0 to +5 V/-100 to 0 to 100%)
Reverse operation
• DC+10 to 0 V/0 to 100(%) (DC＋5 V to 0 V/0 to 100%)
• DC+10 to 0 V/-100 to 0 to 100(%) (DC+5 to 0 V/-100 to 0 to 100%)
* Input impedance: 22(k)
* Up to DC15 V can be input. However, input exceeding DC10 V will be recognized as
DC10 V.
PTC (1) PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor for motor protection can be
thermistor connected. SW3 (C1/V2 Switch) and SW4 (PTC /Al Switch) (refer to “2.2.8 Operating
input various switches”) must be switched on the printed circuit board.
(PTC function) The following figure shows the internal circuit when SW3 and SW4 are set for PTC
thermistor input. For details on SW3 and SW4, refer to “2.2.8 Operating various
switches”. When SW3 and SW4 are switched to the PTC side, function code H26 also
needs to be changed.
<Control circuit block>

＜制御回路部＞
【13】
DC+10V
Resistor
抵抗器
1kΩ
Analog input
(Operating level)
（動作レベル）
Ai PTC
【C1】 V2 H27 比
Comparator
SW4
較
器 External
外部
PTC SW3 alarm
C1 アラーム
thermistor
サーミスタ
【11】 H26
0V
Figure 2.2-7 Internal circuit when SW4 is switched to PTC side

Analog input (1) The analog input monitor can be used to monitor the status of peripheral instruments
monitor using communication by inputting the analog signals of various sensors such as
temperature sensors. Data can be converted to physical property values such as
(AI function)
temperature and pressure by using display factors and shown on the keypad display.
[11] Analog input The terminal is the common terminal for analog input signals (terminals [12], [13], [C1]).
common The terminal is insulated against terminals [CM], [CMY].
• Use shielded lines and keep the wiring to the minimum as possible (below 20 meters) for control signals
which are susceptible to external noise. Grounding the external layer of the shielded lines is generally
recommended, but if external induction noise is large, connecting to terminal 11 may reduce the noise.
The shielded line increases the blocking effect. Always ground one end as shown in figure 2.2-8.
• When creating contacts to analog input signal lines, use twin contacts for small signals. Also, do not insert
contacts to terminal 11.
• When external analog signal generators are connected, the analog signal generator circuit may
malfunction due to the noise created by the inverter. In these cases, connect ferrite core (toroidal shape
or equivalent) to the output terminals of the analog signal generator or connect high frequency capacitors
between the control signal lines, as shown in figure 2.2-9.
Figure 2.2-8 Connection Diagram for Shielded Lines, Figure 2.2-9 Example of Noise Countermeasure
2-31
2.2 Wiring

Classification
Terminal
symbol
[X1] Digital input (1) Various signals (coast to a stop command, external alarm, multi-speed selection, etc) set
up by function codes E01 to E05, E98, E99 can be set up.
For details, refer to “Chapter 5 Function Codes”.
[X2] Digital input 2 (2) Input mode, sink/source can be switched using SW1.
(Refer to “2.2.8 Operating various switches”)
[X3] Digital input 3
(3) The operating mode between various digital input terminals and terminal CM can be
switched to “ON when shorted (active ON)” or “OFF when shorted (active OFF)”. (SINK
[X4] Digital input 4
side)
[X5] Digital input (4) Digital input terminal [X5] can be set up as a pulse train input terminal by changing the
5/pulse train function code
input Maximum wiring length 20 meters
[FWD] Run forward Maximum input pulse
command 30 kHz: When connected to open collector output pulse generator
100 kHz: When connected to complementary output pulse generator
[REV] Run reverse
command For function code settings, refer to “Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODE”
<Digital input circuit specification>
<Control circuit block> Item Minimum Maximum

DC+24 V
Operating ON level 0V 2V
PLC
SINK voltage
OFF level 22 V 27 V
(SINK)
Photo coupler
Operating ON level 22 V 27 V
SW1 voltage
OFF level 0V 2V
(SOURCE)
Operating current at ON
SOURCE 2.5 mA 5 mA
(at input voltage 0 V)
X1 to X5, (9.7 mA) (16 mA)
FWD, REV 6.6 k (for [X5] input terminal)
Digital input
Allowable leak current at OFF - 0.5 mA

CM
Figure 2.2-10 Digital Input Circuit
[EN1] Enable input (1) When terminals [EN1]-[PLC] or terminals [EN2]-[PLC] are OFF, the inverter output
transistors stop functioning. (safe torque off: STO)
[EN2]
Be sure to operate terminals [EN1] and [EN2] simultaneously; otherwise an ecf alarm is
issued and the operation of the inverter will be disabled.
To enable the Enable function, remove the short bar.
(2) The input mode for terminals [EN1] and [EN2] is fixed to source. The mode cannot be
switched to sink.
(3) Short terminals [EN1]-[PLC] and [EN2] – [PLC] using shorting bars when the enable
input function is not used. (Keep the shorting bar connected).
<EN terminal circuit spec>
<Control circuit block>
Shorting DC+24 V
PLC
bar Item Min Max
Photo coupler Operating ON level 22 V 27 V
EN1
voltage
6.6 kΩ (SOURCE) OFF level 0V 2V
Operating current at ON
- 4.5 mA
(at input voltage 24 V)
EN2
Allowable leak current at OFF - 0.5 mA
6.6 kΩ
CM
[PLC] Programmable (1) The terminal is used for connecting the output signal power source of the programmable
controller controller (rated voltage DC +24 V (power supply voltage fluctuation range: DC +22 to
signal power +27 V) maximum 100 mA).
source
(2) The terminal can also be used for the power source for the load connected to the
transistor output. For details, refer to the page on transistor output.
2-32
2.2 Wiring

Classification
Terminal
symbol

[CM] Digital This terminal is the common terminal for digital input signals.
common This terminal is insulated against terminals [11] and [CMY].
 When turning terminals [FWD], [REV], [X1] to [X5] ON and OFF using relay contacts
Figure 2.2-11 shows an example of the circuit configuration using relay contact. Circuit (a) in Figure 2.2-11
shows the switch on the sink side and circuit (b) shows the switch on the source side.
Caution: Use a relay which will not have contact failures (high contact reliability).
(Recommended product: Fuji Electric’s control relay type: HH54PW)
<Control circuit block> <Control circuit block>
PLC SINK PLC SINK
DC+24 V
DC+24 V
SOURCE SOURCE
X1 to X5, X1 to X5,
FWD, Photo coupler FWD, Photo coupler
REV REV
CM CM
(a) Switch on sink side (b) Switch on source side

Figure 2.2-11 Circuit Configuration Example Using Relay Contact
Digital Input
 When turning terminals [FWD], [REV], [X1] to [X5] ON and OFF using the programmable controller
Figure 2.2-12 shows an example of the circuit configuration using programmable controller. Circuit (a) in
Figure 2.2-12 shows the switch (SW1) on the sink side and circuit (b) shows the switch on the source side.
In circuit (a), terminals [FWD], [REV] , [X1] to [X5] can be turned ON/OFF by shorting/opening the open
collector transistor output of the programmable controller using the external power supply. Follow the
commands below when using this type of circuit.
• Connect the + side of the external power supply which is insulated from the programmable controller
power supply to terminal [PLC].
• Do not connect the inverter’s [CM] terminal and the common terminal of the programmable controller.
Programmable <Programmable
<Control circuit block> controller> <Control circuit block>
controller
PLC SINK PLC SINK

DC+24 V
DC+24 V
SOURCE SOURCE
X1 to X5, X1 to X5,
FWD, REV Photo coupler FWD, REV Photo coupler
CM CM
(a) Switch on the sink side (b) Switch on the source side
Figure 2.2-12 Circuit Configuration Example Using Programmable Controller
 Refer to “2.2.8 Operation of various switches” for more information on switches.
2-33
2.2 Wiring

Classification
Terminal
symbol
[FM] Analog The terminal outputs analog direct current voltage DC0 to 10 V or analog direct current/
monitor DC4 to 20 mA monitor signal. The output form (FMV/FMI) can be switched using SW5 on
the printed circuit board and function code F29. Refer to “Table 2.2-13 Functional
FMV function Description of Various Switches”.
FMI function The signal content can be chosen in the function code F31 data setting among the following
items.
• Output frequency (prior to • Output frequency • Output Current
slip compensation) (after slip
compensation)
• Output torque • Load factor • Power consumption
• Output voltage • PID feedback value • Direct current intermediate
(PV) circuit voltage
• Universal AO • Motor output • Analog output test
• PID command value (SV) • PID output (MV) • Customized logic output 1
to 5
• Inverter cooling fin
temperature
* Allowable impedance for connection: Min 5 k (at DC to 10 V output) (up to 2 analog volt
meters (DC0 to 10 V, input impedance 10 k) can be connected.)
* Allowable impedance for connection: Max 500  (at DC4 to 20 mA/DC0 to 20 mA) (in the
case of output)
* Gain adjustable range: 0 to 300%
Pulse monitor The terminal outputs pulse signal. Signal content can be chosen as with the FMV function
by function code F31 setting. The output form (FMP) can be switched using SW5 on the
Analog output/pulse output
FMP function printed circuit board and function code F29. Refer to “Table 2.2-13 Functional Description of
Various Switches”.
* Allowable impedance for connection: Min. 5 k (at DC to 10 V output) (up to 2 analog volt
meters (DC0 to 10 V, input impedance 10 k) can be connected.)
* Pulse duty: Approximately 50%, pulse rate: 25 to 32000 p/s (at full scale)
• Pulse output waveform • FMP output circuit
+15V
490
FM
11.2 to 12.0 V
10k
11
[FM2] Analog The terminal outputs analog direct current voltage DC0 to 10 V or analog direct current DC4
monitor to 20 mA monitor signal. The output form (FMV2/FMI2) can be switched using SW7 on the
printed circuit board and function code F32. Refer to “Table 2.2-13 Functional Description of
FMV2 Various Switches”.
function
Signal content can be chosen as with the FMV function by function code F35 setting.
FMI2 function * Allowable impedance for connection: Min 5 k (at DC to 10 V output)
(up to 2 analog volt meters (D0 to 10 V, input impedance 10 k) can be connected.)
* Allowable impedance for connection: Max 500  (at DC4 to 20 mA)
* Gain adjustable range: 0 to 300%
* This terminal is equipped only on FRNE2S-4C.
[11] Analog output This terminal is the common terminal for analog input/pulse output signals. The terminal is
common insulated against terminals [CM] and [CMY]. Do not use them as common terminal for [FM],
terminal [FM2].
2-34
2.2 Wiring

Classification
Terminal
symbol

[Y1] Transistor (1) Various signals (running signal, frequency reached signal, overload forecast signal, etc)
output 1 set up by function code E20, E21 can be output. For details, refer to “Chapter 5
Function Codes”.
[Y2] Transistor
output 2 (2) The operating mode between transistor output terminals [Y1], [Y2] and terminal CMY
can be switched to “ON (active ON) at signal output” or “OFF (active OFF) at signal
output”.
<Transistor output circuit specification>
Item Maximum
Operating ON level 3V
voltage OFF level 27 V
Voltage
Max load current at ON 50 mA
Leak current at OFF 0.1 mA
Figure 2.2-13 Transistor Output Circuit

• Connect surge absorbing diode on both ends of the excitation coil
when connecting control relays.
• When a power source is needed for the circuit to be connected, terminal
PLC can be used as a power source terminal (DC24 V (power supply
Transistor output
voltage fluctuation range: DC22 to 27 V), maximum 50 mA). In this case,

terminal [CMY] must be shorted to terminal [CM].
[CMY] Transistor This terminal is the common terminal for transistor output signals.
output This terminal is insulated against terminals [CM] and [11].
common
 When connecting the programmable controller to terminals [Y1], [Y2].
The circuit configuration example for connecting the inverter transistor output to the programmable controller
is shown in Figure 2.2-14. Circuit (a) in figure 2.2-14 shows the programmable controller input circuit as sink
input and circuit (b) shows as the source input case.
<Control circuit block> Programmable <Control circuit block> Programmable

controller controller
Photo coupler Current C0

Photo coupler Current
DC+24 V
Y1, Sink type input

Y2 Y1 to
31 to Y2
35 V 31 to
CMY 35 V
Source type
CMY
input
C0
(a) Connection diagram for sink input type (b) Connection diagram for source input type
programmable controller programmable controller
Figure 2.2-14 Example of Connection Circuit Configuration with Programmable Controller
[30A/B/C] Integrated (1) When the inverter stops with an alarm, output is generated on the relay contact (1C).
Contact output
alarm output Contact capacitance: AC250 V 0.3 A cos = 0.3, DC48 V 0.5 A
(2) Terminals can be switched to “Terminals [30A to 30C] shorted (excitation: active ON) at
ON signal output” or “Terminals [30A to 30C] open (non-excitation: active OFF) at ON
signal output”
2-35
2.2 Wiring

Classification
Terminal
symbol
RJ-45 RJ-45 (1) The terminal is used as a connector to connect the keypad. The power to the keypad
connector connector for will be supplied from the inverter via the extended cable for remote operation.
for keypad keypad
(2) The terminal is a connector to connect the computer, programmable controller, etc by
connection connection
RS-485 communication, after removing the keypad. (On termination resistance, refer
to “2.2.8 Operation of Various Switches”).
RS-485
communication
port 1
Termination
RJ-45 connector
resistance
RJ-45 connector
Figure 2.2-15 RJ-45 Connector Pin-layout
• Pins 1, 2, 7, and 8 are assigned as power supply source for the keypad. When
connecting this RJ-45 connector to other instruments, do not use these pins.
RJ-45 RS-485 (1) The terminal is a connector to connect the computer, programmable controller, etc by
connector communication RS-485 communication. (On termination resistance, refer to “2.2.8 Operation of
for RS-485 port 2 Various Switches”).
/CANopen (2) The terminal is a connector to connect the computer, programmable controller, etc by
communica- CANopen
tion
CANopen communication. (On termination resistance, refer to “2.2.8 Operation of
communication Various Switches”).
port
Communication
Figure 2.2-16 RJ-45 Connector Pin-layout

* The terminal is used on the models with the destination codes -A, -E, -T and -K.
[DX+ /DX- RS-485 The terminal is an I/O terminal to connect the computer, programmable controller, etc by
/SD] Communication RS-485 communication. (On termination resistance, refer to “2.2.8 Operation of Various
port 2 Switches”)
(terminal block)
Figure 2.2-17 RS-485 Communication Port 2 Terminal Block Pin-layout

* The terminal is used only on the models with the destination code -C.
2-36
2.2 Wiring
2.2.7 Switching connector

 Position of each connector
The individual switching connectors are positioned on the power supply printed circuit board as shown in the

figure below.
Power supply voltage switching

Keypad case connector “CN UX”
Fan voltage switching

connectors “CN R”, “CN
W”
Auxiliary power input
terminal for fan
Power supply printed

circuit board
Auxiliary power input
terminal for control circuit
Figure 2.2-18 Switching Connector Positions
When removing the individual connectors, pinch the

upper portion of the connector with the fingers, unlock
the fastener, and pull. When inserting the connector,
push in until the fastener lock engages with the
receiving end with a click.
Figure 2.2-19 Attachment and Removal of the

Switching Connector
 Power supply switching connector “CN UX”（FRN0203E2S-4）

The power supply switching connector “CN UX” is equipped on FRN0203E2S-4. When the power supply
connecting to the main power supply input terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) or the auxiliary power input terminals for
the fan (R1, T1) meets the following requirements, move the connector CN UX to U2 side. Otherwise, leave it on
the U1 side, which is the factory default.
For details on the switching procedure, refer to “Figure 2.2-18 Switching Connector Positions” and “Figure 2.2-19
Attachment and Removal of the Switching Connector”.
CN UX (red) CN UX (red)
Setting
Applicable 398 to 440 V/50 Hz, 430 to 480 V/60 Hz

380 to 398V/50 Hz, 380 to 430 V/60 Hz
voltage (Factory default)
2-37
2.2 Wiring
 Fan power source switching connector “CN R”, “CN W” (models larger than FRN0203E2S-4)
FRENIC-Ace supports direct current power supply input with PWM converters in the standard specification.
However, FRN0203E2S-4 contains parts which are driven by AC power supply such as the AC fan, so AC
power must also be supplied. When using DC power for the inverter, move connector “CN R” to NC side, move
connector “CN W” to FAN side, and connect an AC power source to the auxiliary power input terminals for the fan
(R1, T1).
For details on the switching procedure, refer to “Figure 2.2-18 Switching Connector Positions” and “Figure 2.2-19
Attachment and Removal of the Switching Connector”.
CN R (red) CN W (white)
CN W (white) CN R (red)
Setting
In the case terminals R1 and T1 are used

In the case terminals R1 and T1 are NOT used
Purpose  DC bus input type
(Factory default)
 Combination with PWM converter
The fan power source switching connector “CN R” is on FAN and “CN W” is on NC when shipped from
the factory. When direct current power supply input is not used, do not alter the setting.
Mistakes in the fan power source switching connector setting may prevent the cooling fan from
operating, and alarms such as cooling fin overheat 0h1 and charging circuit error pbf may be
generated.
2-38
2.2 Wiring
2.2.8 Operating various switches
Operation of the various switches should be conducted after more than 5 minutes has elapsed since power

is shut off for types smaller than FRN0072E2S-4 and after more than 10 minutes has elapsed for types
larger than FRN0085E2S-4. Confirm that the LED monitor and the charge lamp are turned off, and that the
direct current intermediate circuit voltage between the main circuit terminals P(+)-N(-) is below the safe voltage
(below DC+25 V) with the tester before operating the switches.
Risk of electric shock exists.
The I/O terminal specification can be changed, such as switching the analog output form, by operating the various
slide switches on the printed circuit board (figure 2.2-20 Various Switch Positions on the Control Printed Circuit
Board).
To operate the various slide switches, remove the front cover and make the control printed circuit board visible.
(For types larger than FRN0085E2S-4, also open the keypad case).
 Refer to “2.2.2 Removal and attachment of the front cover and wiring guide” to remove the front cover and to
open/close the keypad case.
The various switch positions on the control printed circuit board are shown below.
Destination: -A，-E，-T and -K Destination: -C
Figure 2.2-20 Various Switch Positions on the Control Printed Circuit Board
SW7
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 -C only
Factory
default
―
Destinati
on: -E
Factory
default
Destinati
on:
-A ,-C,-T,
and -K
Use pointed devices (such as tweezers) to operate the switches. Avoid touching other electronic parts
when moving the switches. The switch will be at open state when the slider is in the middle, so make
sure to push the slider to the ends.
2-39
2.2 Wiring
Functional description of the various switches is shown in Table 2.2-13 Functional Description of Various
Switches.
Table 2.2-13 Functional Description of Various Switches

Switch
Functional description
symbol
SW1 <Switch to change sink/source setting of digital input terminals>
• This switch determines the type of input (sink or source) to use for digital input terminals [X1] to [X5],
FWD, and REV.
SW2 <Switch to change the RS-485 communication termination resistance (RS-485 communication port (on the
control PCB))>
• Move to the ON side when RS-485 communication is used and this inverter is connected to the
termination.
SW3 <Switch to change terminal [C1] input setting to current/voltage/PTC thermistor>
SW4 This switch changes the input type for terminal [C1].
SW3 SW4 E59 H26
Input type
Current input (factory default) C1 side AI side 0 0
Voltage input V2 side AI side 1 0
PTC thermistor input C1 side PTC side 0 1
SW5 <Switch to change terminal [FM] output setting to current/voltage/pulse>

This switch changes the output type for terminal [FM]. When operating this switch, also change function code
F29.
SW5 F29
Output type
Current output FMI side 1 or 2
Voltage output (factory default) FMV side 0
Pulse output FMP side 3
SW6
<Switch to change the RS-485 communication termination resistance (RS-485 communication port (on the
terminal board))>
* In the case of Destination: -A, -E, -T and -K
・ Used for the RS-485/CANopen communication. Move the switch to the ON position when the inverter is
connected to the terminal. They cannot be used simultaneously.
* In the case of Destination: -C
・ Used for the RS-485 communication. Move the switch to the ON position when the inverter is
connected to the termination.
SW7 <Switch to change terminal [FM2] output setting to voltage/current> The terminal is used only on the model
with the destination code -C.
This switch changes the output type for terminal [FM2]. When operating this switch, also change function code
F32.
SW7 F32
Output type
Voltage output FMV2 side 0
Current output FMI2 side 3
Exercise caution as expected operation may not result if the setting above is not conducted accurately.
2-40
2.3 Attachment and Connection of Keypad

2.3.1 Parts required for connection
The following parts are necessary when attaching the keypad to locations other than the inverter main body.

Part name Type Remarks
Keypad extension cable (note 1) CB-5S, CB-3S, CB-1S Three lengths available (5 m, 3 m, 1 m)
Keypad attachment screw M3x (note 2) 2 screws required (prepared by user)
(Note 1) When using commercially available LAN cable, use 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX straight cables (below 20
meters) which meet the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A category 5 standards of U.S.A.
Recommended LAN cable
Manufacturer: Sanwa Supply, Inc.
Type: KB-10T5-01K (for 1 meter)
KB-STP-01K (for 1 meter) (shielded cable when conforming to EMC directive)
(Note 2) When attaching to the board, use an attachment screw of length appropriate for the board thickness.
2.3.2 Attachment procedure

The keypad can be attached in the following forms.
 Attach to the inverter main body (refer to figure 2.3-1(a), (b))

 Attach to the cabinet (refer to figure 2.3-2)
 Operate the panel remotely, close at hand (refer to Figure 2.3-3)
Keypad Keypad
(a) FRN0072E2S-4 (b) FRN0203E2S-4

Figure 2.3-1 Attaching the Keypad to the Inverter Main Body
Extension cable for

Cabinet
remote operation
Extension cable for

remote operation
Inverter main Keypad

body
Keypad
Keypad attachment
screws
Inverter main
body
Figure 2.3-2 Attaching the Keypad Figure 2.3-3 Operating the Keypad Remotely,
on the Cabinet Close at Hand
2-41
 Attachment to the board

(1) Squeeze the hooks at the arrows and pull as shown in the figure below.
Figure 2.3-4 Removal of the Keypad
(2) Attach the keypad rear cover to the keypad using the included keypad rear cover attachment screw.
Keypad rear cover
Keypad rear cover

attachment screw
Keypad
Figure 2.3-5 Attachment of the Keypad
2-42
(3) Cut the cabinet to attach the keypad, as shown in figure 2.3-6
(Units: mm)

Cabinet
opening to
cut
Attach keypad rear cover for remote
operation and cabinet installation
Cabinet cut dimensions (arrow A)
Figure 2.3-6 Attachment Screw Positions and the Dimensions of the Cabinet to Cut
2-43
(4) Fix the keypad to the cabinet using 2 keypad rear cover fixation screws. (Refer to figure 2.3-7) (tightening
torque: 0.7 N•m)
Cabinet
Keypad fixation
screws
Figure 2.3-7 Attachment of the Keypad
(5) Connect the extended cable for remote operation (CB-5S, CB-3S, CB-1S) or the commercially available LAN
cable (straight) to the keypad RJ-45 connector and the inverter main body RJ-45 connector (modular jack).
(Refer to Figure 2.3-8.)
RJ-45 connector
(modular jack)
Cabinet
Keypad
Connect to the RJ-45
connector of the
inverter main body
RJ-45 connector
Extended cable for remote

operation (CS-5S, CB-3S,
CB-1S) or LAN cable
Figure 2.3-8 Connection of the Extension Cable or the Commercially Available LAN Cable to the Keypad and the
Inverter Main Body
• The RJ-45 connector for keypad connection is specialized for keypad communication and does not support
RS-485 communication. Connection with the PC loader is not possible.
• Do not connect the inverter to PC LAN ports, Ethernet hubs, or telephone lines. The inverter and the
connected instrument may be damaged.
 Operating remotely, close at hand

Connect following the procedure (5) in “Attachment to the Board”.
2-44
2.4 RJ-45 Cover
2.4 RJ-45 Cover

The opening (RJ-45 connector) for the RS-485 communication cable connection is positioned below the section
where the keypad is attached.
* The RJ-45 cover is used on the models with the destination codes -A, -E, -T or -K.
To connect the RS-485 communication cable, open the RJ-45 cover until the “click” can be heard and connect, as
shown in the figure below.
RJ-45 cover
Figure 2.4-1 Connection of the RS-485 Communication Cable
Connect with the PC via the RS-485 converter using the RS-485 communication cable. The PC loader allows
editing, confirmation, and management of the inverter function codes, and monitoring of operation data remotely.
The operating status and alarms can also be monitored.
2-45
Chapter 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
This chapter describes keypad operation of the inverter.
Contents

3.1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components ....................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Overview of Operation Modes.................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Running Mode .......................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 Monitoring the running status ............................................................................................ 3-5
3.3.2 Monitoring light alarms ...................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.3 Running or stopping the motor.......................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.4 Setting up reference frequency from the keypad .............................................................. 3-8
3.3.5 Setting up PID commands from the keypad ..................................................................... 3-9
[ 1 ] Settings under PID process control ................................................................................. 3-9
[ 2 ] Settings under PID dancer control ................................................................................. 3-11
3.3.6 Jogging operation............................................................................................................ 3-13
3.3.7 Remote and local modes ................................................................................................ 3-14
3.4 Programming Mode ................................................................................................................ 3-15
3.4.1 Setting up function codes "Data Setting:!f__ through!k__".................................... 3-16
3.4.2 Checking changed function codes "Data Checking: "rep " ....................................... 3-17
3.4.3 Monitoring the running status "Drive Monitoring: #ope " ............................................. 3-18
3.4.4 Checking I/O signal status "I/O Checking: $i_o " ...................................................... 3-22
3.4.5 Reading maintenance information "Maintenance Information: %che " ....................... 3-26
3.4.6 Reading alarm information "Alarm Information: &al " ................................................. 3-29
3.4.7 Setting up basic function codes quickly "Quick Setup: *fn:" ..................................... 3-32
3.5 Alarm Mode ............................................................................................................................ 3-34
3.5.1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode..................................................... 3-34
3.5.2 Displaying the alarm history ............................................................................................ 3-34
3.5.3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm ...................................................... 3-34
3.5.4 Switching to Programming mode .................................................................................... 3-35
3.1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components
Chap 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

The keypad allows you to run and stop the motor, display various data, configure function code data, and
monitor I/O signal states, maintenance information and alarm information.
7-segment LED monitor
UP key
Program/Reset key
RUN key
LED indicators RUN LED
Function/Data key STOP key
Shift key DOWN key
Table 3.1-1 Overview of Keypad Functions

LED Monitor,
Item Keys, and Functions
LED Indicators
Four-digit, 7-segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the
operation modes.
 In Running mode: Running status information (e.g., output frequency,
current, and voltage)
LED Monitor
When a light alarm occurs, l-al is displayed.
 In Programming mode: Menus, function codes and their data
 In Alarm mode: Alarm code, which identifies the alarm factor that has
activated the protective function.
Program/Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter.
 In Running mode: Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming
mode.
 In Programming mode: Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode.
 In Alarm mode: Pressing this key after removing the alarm factor resets
the alarm and switches back to Running mode.
Function/Data key which switches the operations you want to do in each mode as
follows:
 In Running mode: Pressing this key switches the information to be
displayed concerning the status of the inverter (output
frequency (Hz), output current (A), output voltage (V),
etc.).
When a light alarm is displayed, holding down this key
Operation resets the light alarm and switches back to Running
Keys mode.
 In Programming mode: Pressing this key displays the function code or
establishes the data entered with and keys.
 In Alarm mode: Pressing this key displays the details of the problem
indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the
LED monitor.
RUN key. Press this key to run the motor.
STOP key. Press this key to stop the motor.
UP and DOWN keys. Press these keys to select the setting items and change the
and
function code data displayed on the LED monitor.
Shift key. Press this key to shift the cursor to the right for entry of a numerical value.
3-1
Table 3.1-1 Overview of Keypad Functions (continued)

LED Monitor,
Item Keys, and Functions
LED Indicators
Lights when running with a run command entered by the key, by terminal
RUN LED
command FWD or REV, or through the communications link.
Lights when the inverter is ready to run with a run command entered by the key
KEYPAD
(F02 = 0, 2, or 3). In Programming and Alarm modes, however, pressing the key
CONTROL LED
cannot run the inverter even if this indicator lights.
These three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED monitor in
Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them.
Unit: Hz, A, kW, r/min and m/min
LED Unit LEDs Refer to Section 3.3.1 "Monitoring the running status" for details.
Indicators (3 LEDs)
While the inverter is in Programming mode, Hz
the LEDs of Hz and kW light. A
kW
Lights when the data to display exceeds 9999. When this LED lights, the "displayed
value x 10" is the actual value.
x10 LED Example:
If data is "12,345," the LED monitor displays 1234 and the x10 LED lights, meaning
that "1,234  10 = 12,340."
 LED monitor
In Running mode, the LED monitor displays running status information (output frequency, current or
voltage); in Programming mode, it displays menus, function codes and their data; and in Alarm mode, it
displays an alarm code which identifies the alarm factor that has activated the protective function.
If one of LED4 through LED1 is blinking, it means that the cursor is at this digit, allowing you to change it.
If the decimal point of LED1 is blinking, it means that the currently displayed data is a value of the PID
command, not the frequency data usually displayed.
Figure 3.1-1 7-Segment LED Monitor
Table 3.1-2 Alphanumeric Characters on the LED Monitor

Character 7-segment Character 7-segment Character 7-segment Character 7-segment
0 0 9 9 i i r r
1 1 A a J j S s
2 2 b Bb K k T T
3 3 C Cc L l u U
4 4 d d M m V u
5 5 E e n n W w
6 6 F f o o X x
7 7 G g P p y y
8 8 H h q q Z Z
Special characters and symbols (numbers with decimal point, minus and underscore)
0. - 9. * – ) - - _ _
3-2
3.2 Overview of Operation Modes

The FRENIC-Ace features the following three operation modes.

Table 3.2-1 Operation Modes
Operation mode Description
When powered ON, the inverter automatically enters this mode.
This mode allows you to specify the reference frequency, PID command value and etc., and
Running mode run/stop the motor with the / keys.
It is also possible to monitor the running status in real time.
If a light alarm occurs, the l-al appears on the LED monitor.
Programming This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information
mode relating to the inverter status and maintenance.
If an alarm condition arises, the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode in which you can
view the corresponding alarm code* and its related information on the LED monitor.
Alarm mode * Alarm code: Indicates the cause of the alarm condition. For details, first see Table 6.1
"Abnormal States Detectable ("Heavy Alarm" and "Light Alarm" Objects)" in Chapter 6,
Section 6.1 "Protective Function," and then read the troubleshooting of each alarm.
Figure 3.2-1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes.
Power ON
Running mode
Programming mode
Run/Stop of motor Configuration of function
code data and monitor of
Monitor of running status maintenance/alarm info
and various status
Detection of Release of
a light alarm a light alarm
Run/Stop of motor
Light alarm displayed

+
(Press this key if
an alarm has
occurred.)
Occurrence of Release of
a heavy alarm a heavy alarm
Alarm mode
Display of alarm status
Figure 3.2-1 Status Transition between Operation Modes
Simultaneous keying
Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time. The simultaneous keying operation is
expressed by a "+" letter between the keys throughout this manual.
For example, the expression " + keys" stands for pressing the key with the key held down.
3-3
Figure 3.2-2 illustrates the transition of the LED monitor screen during Running mode, the transition between menu
items in Programming mode, and the transition between alarm codes at different occurrences in Alarm mode.
(*1) The speed monitor allows you to select the desired one from the speed monitor items by using function code
E48.
(*2) Applicable only when PID control is active (J01 = 1, 2 or 3).
(*3) The analog input monitor can appear only when the analog input monitor function is assigned to one of the
analog input terminals by one of function codes E61 to E63 (= 20).
(*4) 0 appears under the V/f control.
(*5) The Timer screen appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 (C21 = 1).
(*6) Applicable only when the full-menu mode is selected (E52 = 2).
Figure 3.2-2 Transition between Basic Screens in Individual Operation Mode
3-4
3.3 Running Mode
3.3 Running Mode

3.3.1 Monitoring the running status

In Running mode, the 15 items listed below can be monitored. Immediately after the inverter is turned on, the
monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed. Press the key to switch between monitor items.
Table 3.3-1 Monitoring Items

Display
Function
sample on LED indicator
Monitor items Unit Meaning of displayed value code data
the LED : on, : off
for E43
monitor * 1
Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED
Speed monitor 0
indicators.
Output frequency 1
(before slip 5*00 Hz A kW Hz Frequency actually being output (E48 = 0)
compensation)
Output frequency 2
(after slip 5*00 Hz A kW Hz Frequency actually being output (E48 = 1)
compensation)
Reference
5*00 Hz A kW Hz Reference frequency being set (E48 = 2)
frequency
120
Motor speed 1500 Hz A kW r/min Output frequency (Hz) × (E48 = 3)
P01
Load shaft speed 30*0 Hz A kW r/min Output frequency (Hz)  E50 (E48 = 4)
Line speed 30*0 Hz A kW m/min Output frequency (Hz)  E50 (E48 = 5)
Constant feeding 50
50 Hz A kW min (E48 = 6)
rate time Output frequency (Hz) x E39
Output frequency
Speed (%) 5*0 Hz A kW % x 100 (E48 = 7)
Maximum frequency
Output current 1"34 Hz A kW A Current output from the inverter in RMS 3
Input power 1*25 Hz A kW kW Input power to the inverter 9
Calculated torque *2 50 Hz A kW % Motor output torque (Calculated value) 8
Output voltage *3 200u Hz A kW V Voltage output from the inverter in RMS 4
Motor output *4 )85 Hz A kW kW Motor output (kW) 16
Load factor of the motor in % as the rated
Load factor *5 50; Hz A kW % 15
output being at 100%
*6, *7 PID command/feedback amount
1*0* Hz A kW － 10
PID command converted to a physical quantity of the
object to be controlled (e.g. temperature)
*6, *8 Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for
)0* Hz A kW － 12
PID feedback amount details.
PID output in % as the maximum
PID output * 6, * 7 10** Hz A kW % 14
frequency (F03) being at 100%
An analog input to the inverter in a format
suitable for a desired scale.
*9 Refer to the following function codes.
8"00 Hz A kW － 17
Analog input monitor Terminal [12]: C59, C60
Terminal [C1] (C1 function): C65, C66
Terminal [C1] (V2 function): C71, C72
Torque current *10 Torque current command value or
48 Hz A kW % 23
(Available soon) calculated torque current
Magnetic flux *10
command 50 Hz A kW % Magnetic flux command value 24
(Available soon)
Input watt-hour (kWh)
Input watt-hour 10*0 Hz A kW kWh 25
100
Timer *11 50 Hz A kW s Remaining time for timer operation 13
*1 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed as is on the 4-digit LED monitor screen, so the LED monitor displays
one-tenth of the actual value with the x10 LED lit.
*2 Calculated torque 100% is equal to the motor rated torque. For the calculation formula of the motor rated torque, refer
to [ 2 ] Calculated formula (1) in Appendix E "Conversion from SI Units."
*3 When the LED monitor displays an output voltage, the 7-segment letter u in the lowest digit stands for the unit of the
voltage "V."
*4 When the LED monitor displays the motor output, the unit LED indicator "kW" blinks.
*5 When the LED monitor displays the load factor, the 7-segment letter ; in the lowest digit stands for "%."
*6 These PID related items appear only under the PID control specified by function code J01 (= 1, 2 or 3).
*7 When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount, the dot (decimal point) attached to the lowest
digit of the 7-segment letter blinks.
3-5
3.3 Running Mode
*8 When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount, the dot (decimal point) attached to the lowest digit of the
7-segment letter lights.
*9 The analog input monitor appears only when the analog input monitor function is assigned to one of the analog input
terminals by one of function codes E61 to E63 (= 20). Specify the unit with C58, C64 and C70. When the displayed
value is less than -999, the x10 LED is lit.
*10 0 appears under the V/f control.
*11 The Timer screen appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 (C21 = 1).
The monitoring signals for the monitor items such as output frequency and output current can be
filtered with function code E42 (LED display filter). Increase the E42 data if the monitored values
are unstable and unreadable due to fluctuation of load.
( Function code E42)
3-6
3.3 Running Mode
3.3.2 Monitoring light alarms

The FRENIC-Ace identifies abnormal states in two categories--Heavy alarm and Light alarm. If the former
occurs, the inverter immediately trips; if the latter occurs, the inverter shows the l-al on the LED monitor

and blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED but it continues to run without tripping.
Which abnormal states are categorized as a light alarm ("Light alarm" object) should be defined with function
codes H81 and H82 beforehand.
Assigning the L-ALM signal to any one of the digital output terminals with any of function codes E20 to E24
and E27 (= 98) enables the inverter to output the L-ALM signal on that terminal upon occurrence of a light
alarm.
 For details of the light alarm objects, refer to Chapter 6 "TROUBLESHOOTING."
 How to check a light alarm factor

If a light alarm occurs, l-al appears on the LED monitor. To check the current light alarm factor, enter
Programming mode by pressing the key and select 5_36 on Menu #5 "Maintenance Information."
It is also possible to check the factors of the last three light alarms 5_37 (last) to 5_39 (3rd last). To check
the light alarm factors in Menu #5 "Reading maintenance information," it is necessary to set the data of
function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
For details of the menu transition of the maintenance information, refer to Section 3.4.5 "Reading
maintenance information."
 How to reset a light alarm

After checking the current light alarm factor, to switch the LED monitor from the l-al indication state back
to the running status display (e.g., output frequency), press the key in Running mode.
If the light alarm factor has been removed, the KEYPAD CONTROL LED stops blinking and the L-ALM signal
turns OFF. If not (e.g. DC fan lock), the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking and the L-ALM signal
remains ON.
3-7
3.3 Running Mode
3.3.3 Running or stopping the motor

By factory default, pressing the key starts running the motor in the forward direction and pressing the
key decelerates the motor to stop. The key is enabled only in Running mode.
When the inverter is running, the RUN LED lights.
To run the motor in the reverse direction or to run it reversibly, change the data of function code F02 to "3" or
"0," respectively.
RUN key
RUN LED
STOP key
Note: The rotation direction of IEC-compliant motors is opposite to the one shown above.
Table 3.3-2 Motor Rotation Direction Specified by F02
Data for F02 Pressing the key runs the motor:

0 In the direction commanded by terminal [FWD] or [REV]
1 Disable key (The motor is driven by terminal [FWD] or [REV] command.)
2 In the forward direction
3 In the reverse direction
3.3.4 Setting up reference frequency from the keypad

You can set up the desired reference frequency with the and keys on the keypad. It is also possible to
set up the reference frequency as load shaft speed, motor speed or speed (%) by setting function code E48.
Using the keypad (F01 = 0 (factory default) or 8)

(1) Set function code F01 to "0" (Keypad operation using / keys) or "8" (Keypad operation using /
keys, balanceless-bumpless). Frequency setting with the keypad is disabled in Programming or
Alarm mode. To enable it, switch to Running mode.
(2) Press the / key to display the current reference frequency. The lowest digit blinks.
(3) To change the reference frequency, press the / key again. The new setting can be saved into the
inverter’s internal memory.
7-segment LED monitor
UP key
Program/Reset key
Function/Data key
Shift key DOWN key
3-8
3.3 Running Mode
• Holding down the / key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry.
• The reference frequency can be saved either automatically by turning the main power OFF or
only by pressing the key. You can choose either way using function code E64. The factory

default is "0" (Automatic saving (when main power is turned OFF)).
• To set the reference frequency, first press the key once to blink the least significant digit.
After that, each time the key is pressed, the cursor moves to the next higher digit where data
can be changed. This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit
and change the data in higher digits.
• If you have set function code F01 to "0" or "8" but have selected a frequency command source
other than frequency command 1 (i.e., frequency command 2, frequency command via
communication, or multistep frequency command), then the and keys are disabled to
change the current frequency command even in Running mode. Pressing either of these keys
just displays the current reference frequency.
• Setting F01 data to "8" (Keypad operation using / keys, balanceles-bumpless) enables
balanceless-bumpless switching.
Balanceless-bumpless switching refers to the function that makes the inverter inherit the
current frequency that has applied before the frequency command source is switched to the
keypad from any other source, providing smooth switching and shockless running.
3.3.5 Setting up PID commands from the keypad

You can set up the desired PID commands with the and keys on the keypad.
[ 1 ] Settings under PID process control

To enable the PID process control, you need to set the J01 data to "1" or "2."
Under the PID control, the items that can be specified or checked with and keys are different from
those under regular frequency control, depending upon the current LED monitor setting. If the LED monitor is
set to the speed monitor (E43 = 0), the item accessible is a manual speed command (reference frequency);
if it is set to any other, the item is a PID process command.
Setting the PID process command with and keys

(1) Set function code J02 to "0" ( / keys on keypad).
(2) Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor (E43=0) when the inverter is in Running
mode. When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode, you cannot modify the PID process
command with the / key. To enable the PID process command to be modified with the /
key, first switch to Running mode.
(3) Press the / key to display the PID process command. The lowest digit and its decimal point blink
on the LED monitor.
(4) To change the PID process command, press the / key again. The new setting can be saved into
the inverter’s internal memory.
3-9
3.3 Running Mode
• The PID process command can be saved either automatically by turning the main power OFF or
only by pressing the key. You can choose either way using function code E64.
• Even if multistep frequency is selected as a PID command (PID-SS1 or PID-SS2 = ON), it is
possible to set a PID command using the keypad.
• When function code J02 is set to any value other than "0," pressing the / key displays, on
the LED monitor, the PID command currently selected, but does not allow any change.
• On the LED monitor, the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to discriminate the PID related
data from the reference command. The decimal point blinks or lights when a PID command or
PID feedback amount is displayed, respectively.
Table 3.3-3 PID Process Command Manually Set with / Key and Requirements
PID control
PID control
(Remote command LED monitor Multistep frequency
(Mode selection) With / key
SV) E43 PID-SS1, PID-SS2
J01
J02
PID process command by

0
keypad
1 or 2 Other than 0 ON or OFF
PID process command
Other than 0
currently selected
Setting up the reference frequency with and keys under PID process control
When function code F01 is set to "0" ( / keys on keypad) and frequency command 1 is selected as a
manual speed command (when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link, multistep
frequency command, and PID control), switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode
enables you to modify the reference frequency with the / keys.
In Programming or Alarm mode, the / keys are disabled to modify the reference frequency. You need
to switch to Running mode.
Table 3.3-4 lists the combinations of the commands. The figure illustrates how the manual speed command
entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command .
The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual reference frequency.
Table 3.3-4 Manual Speed (Frequency) Command Specified with / Keys and Requirements
PID
Communi-
control LED Frequency Multistep Multistep Cancel PID
cations link Pressing /
(Mode monitor command 1 frequency frequency control
operation keys controls:
selection) E43 F01 SS2 SS1 Hz/PID
LE
J01
Manual speed
command
0 OFF OFF OFF
(frequency) set
ON by keypad
(PID disabled) Manual speed
command
1 or 2 0 Other than the above
(frequency)
currently selected
PID output
OFF (as final
Don't care
(PID enabled) frequency
command)
3-10
3.3 Running Mode

[ 2 ] Settings under PID dancer control
To enable the PID dancer control, you need to set the J01 data to "3."
Under the PID control, the items that can be specified or checked with and keys are different from
those under the regular frequency control, depending upon the current LED monitor setting. If the LED
monitor is set to the speed monitor (E43 = 0), the item accessible is the primary frequency command; if it is
set to any other, the item is the PID dancer position command.
Setting the PID dancer position command with the and keys
(1) Set the J02 data to "0" ( / keys on keypad).
(2) Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor (E43=0) when the inverter is in Running
mode. When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode, you cannot modify the PID dancer position
command with the / key. To enable the PID dancer position command to be modified with the
/ key, first switch to Running mode.
(3) Press the / key to display the PID dancer position command. The lowest digit and its decimal
point blink on the LED monitor.
(4) To change the PID dancer position command, press the / key again. The command you have
specified will be automatically saved into the inverter’s internal memory as function code J57 data. It is
retained even if you temporarily switch to another PID command source and then go back to the
via-keypad PID command. Furthermore, you can directly configure the command with function code
J57.
• Even if multistep frequency is selected as a PID command (PID-SS1 or PID-SS2 = ON), it is

possible to set a PID command using the keypad.
• When function code J02 is set to any value other than "0," pressing the / key displays, on
the LED monitor, the PID command currently selected, but does not allow any change.
• On the LED monitor, the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to discriminate the PID related
data from the reference command. The decimal point blinks or lights when a PID command or
PID feedback amount is displayed, respectively.
3-11
3.3 Running Mode
Table 3.3-5 PID Command Manually Set with / Key and Requirements
PID control PID control

LED monitor Multistep frequency
(Mode selection) (Remote command SV) With / key
E43 PID-SS1, PID-SS2
J01 J02
0 PID command by keypad

3 Other than 0 ON or OFF PID command currently
Other than 0
selected
Setting up the primary frequency command with and keys under PID dancer control
When function code F01 is set to "0" ( / keys on keypad) and frequency command 1 is selected as a
primary frequency command (when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link,
multistep frequency command, and PID control), switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running
mode enables you to modify the primary frequency command with the / keys.
In Programming or Alarm mode, the / keys are disabled to modify the primary frequency command.
You need to switch to Running mode.
Table 3.3-6 lists the combinations of the commands. The figure illustrates how the primary frequency
command entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command .
The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual reference frequency.
Table 3.3-6 Primary Command (Frequency) Specified with / Keys and Requirements
PID
Communi-
control LED Frequency Multistep Multistep Cancel PID
cations link Pressing /
(Mode monitor command 1 frequency frequency control
operation keys controls:
selection) E43 F01 SS2 SS1 Hz/PID
LE
J01
Primary
command
0 OFF OFF OFF
(frequency) set
ON by keypad
(PID
disabled) Primary
command
3 0 Other than the above
(frequency)
currently selected
PID output
OFF (as final
Don't care
(PID enabled) frequency
command)
3-12
3.3 Running Mode
3.3.6 Jogging operation

This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor.

(1) Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below. The LED monitor should display jog .
Enter Running mode (see Section 3.2 "Overview of Operation Modes" on page 3-3) and press the +
keys simultaneously.
The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for approximately one second and then returns to jog
again.
• Function codes C20, H54 and H55 specify the jogging frequency and acceleration/deceleration
time, respectively. Use these function codes exclusively for the jogging operation with your
needs.
• Using the input terminal command JOG ("Ready for jogging") switches between the normal
operation state and ready-to-jog state.
• Switching between the normal operation state and read-to-jog state with the + keys is
possible only when the inverter is stopped.
(2) Jogging the motor.

Hold down the key during which the motor continues jogging. To decelerate to stop the motor,
release the key.
(3) Exiting the ready-to-jog state and returning to the normal operation state.
Press the + keys simultaneously.
 For details, refer to the descriptions of function codes E01 to E05 in Chapter 5, Section 5.2.2 "Function
code table."
3-13
3.3 Running Mode
3.3.7 Remote and local modes

The inverter is available in either remote or local mode. In the remote mode that applies to ordinary operation,
the inverter is driven under the control of the data settings stored in the inverter, whereas in the local mode
that applies to maintenance operation, it is separated from the control system and is driven manually under
the control of the keypad.
• Remote mode: Run and frequency commands are selected by function codes or source switching
signals except LOC ("Select local (keypad) operation").
• Local mode: The command source is the keypad, regardless of the settings specified by function
codes. The keypad takes precedence over the settings specified by communications link
operation signals.
Run commands from the keypad in local mode

The table below shows the input procedures of run commands from the keypad in the local mode.
Data for F02 Input Procedures of Run Commands from Keypad
0: Enable / keys on keypad Pressing the key runs the motor in the direction specified by
(Motor rotation direction from command FWD or REV assigned to terminal [FWD] or [REV],
digital terminals [FWD]/[REV]) respectively. Pressing the key stops the motor.
1: Enable terminal command Pressing the key runs the motor in the forward direction only.
FWD/REV Pressing the key stops the motor.
2: Enable / keys on keypad No specification of the motor rotation direction is required.
(Forward)
3: Enable / keys on keypad Pressing the key runs the motor in the reverse direction only.
(Reverse) Pressing the key stops the motor.
No specification of the motor rotation direction is required.
Switching between remote and local modes

The remote and local modes can be switched by a digital input signal provided from the outside of the
inverter.
To enable the switching, you need to assign LOC as a digital input signal to any of terminals [X1] to [X5] by
setting "35" to any of E01 to E05, E98 and E99.
Switching from remote to local mode automatically inherits the frequency settings used in remote mode. If
the motor is running at the time of the switching from remote to local, the run command will be automatically
turned ON so that all the necessary data settings will be carried over. If, however, there is a discrepancy
between the settings used in remote mode and ones made on the keypad (e.g., switching from the reverse
rotation in remote mode to the forward rotation only in local mode), the inverter automatically stops.
The transition paths between remote and local modes depend on the current mode and the value (ON/OFF)
of LOC, as shown in the status transition diagram given below. Also, refer to above table for details
Transition between Remote and Local Modes by LOC
3-14
3.4 Programming Mode

The Programming mode provides you with these functions--setting and checking function code data, monitoring
maintenance information and checking input/output (I/O) signal status. The functions can be easily selected with the

menu-driven system. Table 3.4-1 lists menus available in Programming mode. The leftmost digit (numerals) of each
letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate
the menu contents.
When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on, the menu selected last in Programming
mode will be displayed.
Table 3.4-1 Menus Available in Programming Mode
LED monitor
Menu # Menu Main functions Refer to:
shows:
F codes
!f__
(Fundamental functions)
E codes
!e__
(Extension terminal functions)
C codes
!c__
(Control functions)
P codes
!p__
(Motor 1 parameters)
H codes
!h__
(High performance functions)
H1 codes (100s)
!h1__
(High performance functions)
A codes
!a__ Selecting each of these
(Motor 2 parameters)
function codes enables its Section
1 "Data Setting" J codes
!j__ data to be 3.4.1
(Application functions 1)
displayed/changed.
J1 codes (100s)
!j1__
(PID functions)
d codes
!d__
(Application functions 2)
U codes
!u__
(Customizable logic functions)
U1 codes (100s)
!u1__
(Customizable logic functions)
y codes
!y__
(Link functions)
!k__ K code (Keypad functions)
o codes (Optional functions)
!o__
(Note)
Displays only function codes that have been changed from
"Data Section
2 "rep their factory defaults. You can refer to or change those
Checking" 3.4.2
function code data.
"Drive Displays the running information required for maintenance or Section
3 #ope
Monitoring" test running. 3.4.3
"I/O Section
4 $i_o Displays external interface information.
Checking" 3.4.4
"Maintenance Displays maintenance information including cumulative run Section
5 %che
Information" time. 3.4.5
"Alarm Displays the recent four alarm codes. You can refer to the Section
6 &al
Information" running information at the time when the alarm occurred. 3.4.6
Displays only basic function codes to customize the inverter Section
0 "Quick Setup" *fn:
operation. 3.4.7
(Note) The o codes display only when the corresponding option is mounted. For details, refer to the Instruction
Manual for the corresponding option.
3-15
 Selecting menus to display

The menu-driven system allows you to cycle through menus. To cycle through necessary menus only for simple
operation, use function code E52 that provides a choice of the display modes as listed below.
The factory default (E52 = 0) is to display three menus--Menu #1 "Data Setting," Menu #7 "Data Copying," and
Menu #0 "Quick Setup," allowing no switching to any other menu.
Table 3.4-2 Keypad Display Mode Selection – Function Code E52
Data for E52 Mode Menus selectable

Menu #1 "Data Setting"
0 Function code data editing mode (factory default) Menu #7 "Data Copying"
Menu #0 "Quick Setup"
Menu #2 "Data Checking"
1 Function code data check mode
Menu #7 "Data Copying"
2 Full-menu mode Menus #0 through #7
Press the key to enter Programming mode and display menus. While cycling through the menus with
the / key, select the desired menu item with the key. Once the entire menu has been cycled
through, the display returns to the first menu item.
3.4.1 Setting up function codes "Data Setting:!f__ through!k__"

Menu #1 "Data Setting" (!f__ through!k__) in Programming mode allows you to configure all function codes.
To use "Data Setting," you need to set function code E52 to "0" (Function code data editing mode) or "2" (Full-menu
mode).
Figure 3.4-1 shows the menu transition and the function code data change procedure in "Data Setting."
Figure 3.4-1 Menu Transition and Function Code Data Change Procedure in Menu #1 "Data Setting"
3-16
Basic key operation

(1) Turn the inverter ON. It automatically enters Running mode in which you press the key to switch to
Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.

(2) Use the and keys to select the desired function code group from the choices !f__ through !k__.
(3) Press the key to proceed to the list of function codes for the selected function code group.
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired function code, then press the key.
The data of this function code appears.
(5) Change the function code data using the and keys.
(6) Press the key to establish the function code data.
The saue appears (blinking) and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter. After that, the
display will return to the function code list and then move to the next function code.
Pressing the key instead of the key cancels the change made to the data. The data reverts to the
previous value, the display returns to the function code list, and the original function code reappears.
(7) Press the key to return to the menu from the function code list.
Cursor movement
When changing function code data, pressing the key once blinks the least significant digit. After that,
each time the key is pressed, the cursor moves to the next higher digit where data can be changed.
This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change the data in
higher digits.
3.4.2 Checking changed function codes "Data Checking: "rep "

Menu #2 "Data Checking" ("rep ) in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been
changed. Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED
monitor. You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary.
To check function codes in Menu #2 "Data Checking," you need to set function code E52 to "1" (Function code data
check mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).
The menu transition in "Data Checking" is just like that in Menu #1 "Data Setting."
3-17
3.4.3 Monitoring the running status "Drive Monitoring: #ope "

Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" (#ope ) is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and test running.
The display items for "Drive Monitoring" are listed in Table 3.4-3. Figure 3.4-2 shows the menu transition in "Drive
Monitoring."
Figure 3.4-2 Menu Transition in Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring"
Basic key operation

To monitor the running status in "Drive monitoring," set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
Programming mode. The function selection menu appears. (In this example, *fn: is displayed.)
(2) Use the and keys to display "Drive Monitoring" (#ope ).
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of monitoring items (e.g. 3_00 ).
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired monitoring item, then press the key.
The running status information for the selected item appears.
(5) Press the key to return to the list of monitoring items. Press the key again to return to the menu.
3-18
Table 3.4-3 "Drive Monitoring" Display Items

LED monitor
Item Unit Description
shows:

3_00 Output frequency 1 Hz Output frequency before slip compensation
3_01 Output frequency 2 Hz Output frequency after slip compensation
3_02 Output current A Output current
3_03 Output voltage V Output voltage
3_04 Calculated torque % Calculated output torque of the motor
3_05 Reference frequency Hz Frequency specified by a frequency command
Rotation direction of current output
3_06 Rotation direction N/A
f: forward, r: reverse, ----: stop
Running status in 4-digit hexadecimal format
3_07 Running status N/A Refer to " Displaying running status (3_07 ) and running status 2
(3_23 )" on the next page.
120
Display value = (Output frequency Hz) 
(No. of poles)
3_08 Motor speed r/min
If the value is 10000 or greater, the x10 LED turns ON and the LED
monitor shows one-tenth of the value.
Display value = (Output frequency Hz)  (Function code E50:
Coefficient for speed indication)
3_09 Load shaft speed r/min
Virtual physical value (e.g., temperature or pressure) of the object
to be controlled, which is converted from the PID command value
using function code E40 and E41 data (PID display coefficients A
3_10 PID command value N/A and B)
Display value = (PID command value)  (Coefficient A - B) + B
If PID control is disabled, "----" appears.
Virtual physical value (e.g., temperature or pressure) of the object
to be controlled, which is converted from the PID feedback amount
PID feedback using function code E40 and E41 data (PID display coefficients A
3_11 N/A and B)
amount
Display value = (PID feedback amount)  (Coefficient A - B) + B
3_12 Torque limit value A % Driving torque limit value A (based on motor rated torque)
3_13 Torque limit value B % Braking torque limit value B (based on motor rated torque)
When this setting is 100%, the LED monitor shows 1.00 time of the
3_14 Ratio setting % value to be displayed. If no ratio setting is selected, "----"
appears.
Display value = (Output frequency Hz)  (Function code E50:
Coefficient for speed indication)
3_15 Line speed m/min
Peripheral speed
3_16 monitor ― ―
(Available soon)
Target stop position
3_17 pulse ― ―
(Available soon)
Current position
3_18 pulse ― ―
(Available soon)
Positioning deviation
3_19 pulse (Available ― ―
soon)
Positioning control
3_20 status ― ―
(Available soon)
PID output value. (100% at the maximum frequency)
3_21 PID output value %
3-19
Table 3.4-3 "Drive Monitoring" Display Items (Continued)

LED monitor
Item Unit Description
shows:
Flux command
3_22 value % Magnetic flux command value.
(Available soon)
Running status 2 in 4-digit hexadecimal format
3_23 Running status 2 N/A Refer to " Displaying running status (3_07 ) and running status 2
(3_23 )" given below.
3_24 (Not used.) ― ―
SY synchronous
3_25 ― ―
deviation
3_26 (Not used.) ― ―
3_27 (Not used.) ― ―
3_28 (Not used.) ― ―
CANopen (built-in) Communications status monitor of CANopen (built-in)
3_40 communications ― For details, refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.2.15 Keypad LED operation
status monitor monitor “3_40”.
 Displaying running status (3_07 ) and running status 2 (3_23 )

To display the running status and running status 2 in 4-digit hexadecimal format, each state has been assigned to
bits 0 to 15 as listed in Tables 3.4-4 and 3.4-5. Table 3.4-6 shows the relationship between each of the status
assignments and the LED monitor display.
Table 3.4-7 gives the conversion table from 4-bit binary to hexadecimal.
Table 3.4-4 Running Status (3_07 ) Bit Assignment
Bit Notation Content Bit Notation Content

"1" when function code data is being
15 BUSY 7 VL "1" under voltage limiting control.
written.
14 Always "0." 6 TL "1" under torque limiting control.
WR "1" when the DC link bus voltage is
13 Always "0." 5 NUV
higher than the undervoltage level.
"1" when communication is enabled
12 RL (when ready for run and frequency 4 BRK "1" during braking.
commands via communications link).
"1" when the inverter output is shut
11 ALM "1" when an alarm has occurred. 3 INT
down.
10 DEC "1" during deceleration. 2 EXT "1" during DC braking.
"1" during running in the reverse
9 ACC "1" during acceleration. 1 REV
direction.
"1" during running in the forward
8 IL "1" under current limiting control. 0 FWD
direction.
3-20
Table 3.4-5 Running Status 2 (3_23 ) Bit Assignment

Speed limiting (under torque control)

15 7 ―
(Available soon)
14 6 ― (Not used.)
13 5 ― Motor selection
00: Motor 1
12 4 ―
01: Motor 2
11 3 ― Inverter drive control
10 2 ― 0000: V/f control with slip
compensation inactive
9 1 ―
0001: Vector control without speed
― (Not used.)
sensor (Dynamic torque vector)
0010: V/f control with slip
compensation active
0011: V/f control with speed sensor
0100: Dynamic vector control with
8 0 ― speed sensor (Available soon)
0110: Vector control with speed
sensor (Available soon)
1011: Torque control
(Vector control with speed
sensor) (Available soon)
Table 3.4-6 Running Status Display
LED No. LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Notation BUSY WR RL ALM DEC ACC IL VL TL NUV BRK INT EXT REV FWD
Binary 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
Hexa-
Example
decimal
on the
LED
monitor
 Hexadecimal expression
A 4-bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal (1 hexadecimal digit). Table 3.4-7 shows the
correspondence between the two notations. The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor.
Table 3.4-7 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion
Binary Hexadecimal Binary Hexadecimal

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 9
0 0 1 0 2 1 0 1 0 a
0 0 1 1 3 1 0 1 1 b
0 1 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 c
0 1 0 1 5 1 1 0 1 d
0 1 1 0 6 1 1 1 0 e
0 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 f
3-21
3.4.4 Checking I/O signal status "I/O Checking: $i_o "

Using Menu #4 "I/O Checking" ($i_o) displays the I/O status of external signals including digital and analog I/O
signals without using a measuring instrument. Table 3.4-8 lists check items available. The menu transition in "I/O
Checking" is shown in Figure 3.4-3.
Figure 3.4-3 Menu Transition in Menu #4 "I/O Checking"
Basic key operation

To check the status of the I/O signals, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(2) Use the and keys to display "I/O Checking" ($i_o).
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of I/O check items (e.g. 4_00 ).
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired I/O check item, then press the key.
The corresponding I/O check data appears. For the item 4_00 or 4_01, using the and keys switches
the display method between the segment display (for external signal information in Table 3.4-9) and
hexadecimal display (for I/O signal status in Table 3.4-10).
(5) Press the key to return to the list of I/O check items. Press the key again to return to the menu.
3-22
Table 3.4-8 I/O Check Items

LED
monitor Item Unit Description
shows:

Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals. Refer to
I/O signals on the control circuit
4_00 -- " Displaying control I/O signal terminals" on the next page
terminals
for details.
Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals that
I/O signals on the control circuit received a command via RS-485 or field bus option. Refer to
4_01 terminals under communications -- " Displaying control I/O signal terminals" and
control " Displaying control I/O signal terminals under
communications control" on the following pages for details.
4_02 Input voltage on terminal [12] V Shows the input voltage on terminal [12] in volts (V). (signed)
Input current on terminal [C1] (C1 Shows the input current on terminal [C1] (C1 function) in
4_03 mA
function) milliamperes (mA).
Output voltage on terminal [FM]
4_04 V Shows the output voltage on terminal [FM] (FMV) in volts (V).
(FMV)
Output voltage on terminal [FM2] Shows the output voltage on terminal [FM2] (FMV2) in volts
4_05 V
(FMV2) (V). (exclusive to FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4C)
Shows the output pulse rate per unit of time on terminal [FM]
Output frequency on terminal [FM]
4_06 p/s (FMP) in (p/s). (If the value is 10000 or greater, the x10 LED
(FMP)
turns ON and the LED monitor shows one-tenth of the value.)
Input voltage on terminal [C1] Shows the input voltage on terminal [C1] (V2 function) in volts
4_07 V
(V2 function) (V).
Output current on terminal [FM] Shows the output current on terminal [FM] (FMI) in
4_08 mA
(FMI) milliamperes (mA).
Output current on terminal [FM2] Shows the output current on terminal [FM2] (FMI2) in
4_09 mA
(FMI2) milliamperes (mA). (exclusive to FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4C)
Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals on the
Option control circuit terminal digital input and output interface cards (options). Refer to "
4_10 --
(I/O) (Available soon) Displaying control I/O signal terminals on options" on page
3-25 for details.
4_11 Terminal [X5] pulse input monitor -- Shows the pulse rate of the pulse train signal on terminal [X5].
PG pulse rate
Shows the pulse rate (p/s) of the A/B phase signal fed back
4_15 (A/B phase signal from the p/s
from the reference PG.
reference PG) (Available soon)
PG pulse rate
Shows the pulse rate (p/s) of the Z phase signal fed back from
4_16 (Z phase signal from the reference p/s
the reference PG.
PG) (Available soon)
PG pulse rate
Shows the pulse rate (p/s) of the A/B phase signal fed back
4_17 (A/B phase signal from the slave p/s
from the slave PG.
PG) (Available soon)
PG pulse rate
Shows the pulse rate (p/s) of the Z phase signal fed back from
4_18 (Z phase signal from the slave PG) p/s
the slave PG.
(Available soon)
Input voltage on terminal [32] Shows the input voltage on terminal [32] on the analog
4_20 V
(Available soon) interface card (option) in volts (V).
Input current on terminal [C2] Shows the input current on terminal [C2] on the analog
4_21 mA
(Available soon) interface card (option) in milliamperes (mA).
Output voltage on terminal [AO] Shows the output voltage on terminal [AO] on the analog
4_22 V
(Available soon) interface card (option) in volts (V).
Output current on terminal [CS] Shows the output current on terminal [CS] on the analog
4_23 mA
(Available soon) interface card (option) in milliamperes (mA).
Monitors the timer or counter value in the customizable logic
4_24 Customizable logic timer monitor --
specified by U91.
3-23
 Displaying control I/O signal terminals

The status of control I/O signal terminals can be displayed in two ways: with ON/OFF of each LED segment and in
hexadecimal.
• Displaying the I/O signal status with ON/OFF of each LED segment
As shown in Table 3.4-9 and the figure below, each of segments "a" to "dp" on LED1 and LED2 lights when the
corresponding digital input terminal circuit ([FWD], [REV], [X1] to [X5], [EN1] and [EN2]) is closed; it goes OFF when
it is open. Segment "a" or "b" on LED3 lights when the circuit between output terminal [Y1] or [Y2] and terminal
[CMY] is closed, respectively; it goes OFF when the circuit is open. Segment "a" on LED4 is for terminals [30A/B/C]
and lights when the circuit between terminals [30C] and [30A] is short-circuited (ON) and goes OFF when it is open.
If all terminal signals are OFF (open), segments "g" on all of LED1 to LED4 will light ("– – – –").
Table 3.4-9 Segment Display for External Signal Information
Segment LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1

a 30A/B/C Y1-CMY ― FWD
b ― Y2-CMY ― REV
c ― ― ― X1
d ― ― EN1 X2
e ― ― EN2 X3
f ― ― (XF) * X4
g ― ― (XR) * X5
dp ― ― (RST) * ―
—: No corresponding control circuit terminal exists
* (XF), (XR), and (RST) are assigned for communications control. Refer to " Displaying control I/O signal
terminals under communications control" on the next page.
• Displaying I/O signal status in hexadecimal

Each I/O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3.4-10. An unassigned bit is interpreted as
"0." Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor as four hexadecimal digits (0 to f each).
On the FRENIC-Ace, digital input terminals [FWD] and [REV] are assigned to bits 0 and 1, respectively. Terminals
[X1] through [X5] are assigned to bits 2 through 10. The bit is set to "1" when the corresponding input terminal is
short-circuited (ON), and it is set to "0" when the terminal is open (OFF). For example, when [FWD] and [X1] are ON
(short-circuited) and all the others are OFF (open), 0005 is displayed on LED4 to LED1.
Digital output terminals [Y1] and [Y2] are assigned to bits 0 through 3. Each bit is set to "1" when the output terminal
[Y1] or [Y2] is short-circuited with [CMY] (ON), and "0" when it is open (OFF).
The status of the relay contact output terminals [30A/B/C] is assigned to bit 8. It is set to "1" when the circuit between
output terminals [30A] and [30C] is closed, and "0" when the circuit between [30A] and [30C] is open.
For example, if [Y1] is ON, [Y2] is OFF, and the circuit between [30A] and [30C] is closed, then "0101 " is displayed
on the LED4 through LED1.
Table 3.4-10 presents bit assignment and an example of corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7-segment
LED.
3-24
Table 3.4-10 Segment Display for I/O Signal Status in Hexadecimal (Example)

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Input terminal (RST)* (XR)* (XF)* EN2 EN1 ― ― ― ― X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 REV FWD
30A/
Output terminal ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― Y2 Y1
B/C
Binary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
Hexa-
Example
decimal
on the
LED
monitor
– No corresponding control circuit terminal exists.
* (XF), (XR), and (RST) are assigned for communications control. Refer to " Displaying control I/O signal
terminals under communications control" given below.
 Displaying control I/O signal terminals under communications control

Under communications control, input commands (function code S06) sent via RS-485 or other optional
communications can be displayed in two ways: "with ON/OFF of each LED segment" and "in hexadecimal." The
content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I/O signal terminal status display; however, (XF),
(XR), and (RST) are added as inputs. Note that under communications control, the I/O display is in normal logic
(using the original signals not inverted)
 For details about input commands sent through the communications link, refer to the RS-485 Communication
User's Manual or the instruction manual of communication-related options as well.
 Displaying control I/O signal terminals on optional digital input and output interface
cards (Available soon)
The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the optional digital input and output interface
cards, just like the signal status of the control circuit terminals.
Table 3.4-11 lists the assignment of digital I/O signals to the LED segments.
Table 3.4-11 Segment Display for External Signal Information

(Digital input and output interface cards)
Segment LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1

a ― O1 I9 I1
b ― O2 I10 I2
c ― O3 I11 I3
d ― O4 I12 I4
e ― O5 I13 I5
f ― O6 I14 I6
g ― O7 I15 I7
dp ― O8 I16 I8

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input terminal I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Output terminal - - - - - - - - O8 O7 O6 O5 O4 O3 O2 O1
3-25
3.4.5 Reading maintenance information "Maintenance Information: %che "

Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" (%che ) contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the
inverter. The menu transition in "Maintenance Information" is just like that in Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring." (Refer to
Section 3.4.3.)
Basic key operation

To view the maintenance information, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(2) Use the and keys to display "Maintenance Information" (%che ).
(3) Press the key to proceed to the list of maintenance items (e.g. 5_00 ).
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired maintenance item, then press the key.
The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears.
(5) Press the key to return to the list of maintenance items. Press the key again to return to the menu.
Table 3.4-12 Display Items in "Maintenance Information"
LED Monitor
Item Description
shows:
Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of
the inverter.
Counter range: 0 to 65,535 hours
Display: Upper 2 digits and lower 3 digits are displayed
alternately.
5_00 Cumulative run time
Example: 0  535h (535 hours)
65  535h (65,535 hours)
The lower 3 digits are displayed with h (hour).
When the count exceeds 65,535, the counter will be reset to "0"
and start over again.
Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit.
5_01 DC link bus voltage
Unit: V (volts)
Shows the maximum temperature inside the inverter for every
Max. temperature inside the hour.
5_02
inverter
Unit: C (Temperatures below 20C are displayed as 20C.)
Max. temperature of heat Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour.
5_03
sink Unit: C (Temperatures below 20C are displayed as 20C.)
Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour.
5_04 Max. effective output current
Unit: A (amperes)
Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor
(reservoir capacitor) in %, based on the capacitance when
Capacitance of the DC link shipping as 100%. Refer to Chapter 7 "MAINTENANCE AND
5_05
bus capacitor INSPECTION" for details.
Unit: %
Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the
electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards, which is
calculated by multiplying the cumulative run time count by the
coefficient based on the surrounding temperature condition.
Cumulative run time of
electrolytic Counter range: 0 to 99,990 hours
5_06
capacitors on the printed Display range: 0 to 9999 The x10 LED turns ON.
circuit boards Actual cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitors on the
printed circuit boards (hours) = Displayed value x 10
When the count exceeds 99,990 the counter stops and the LED
monitor sticks to 9999.
3-26
Table 3.4-12 Display Items in "Maintenance Information" (Continued)
LED Monitor
Item Description
shows:

Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling
fan.
Cumulative run time of the
5_07 This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON/OFF control
cooling fan
(function code H06) is enabled and the fan stops.
The display method is the same as for 5_06 above.
Shows the content of the motor 1 startup counter (i.e., the number of
run commands issued).
Counter range: 0 to 65,530 times
Display range: 0 to 9999
5_08 Number of startups
If the count exceeds 10,000, the x10 LED turns ON
and the LED monitor shows one-tenth of the value.
When the count exceeds 65,530, the counter will be reset to "0" and
start over again.
Shows the input watt-hour of the inverter.
Display range: *001 to 9999
5_09 Input watt-hour Input watt-hour = Displayed value  100 kWh

To reset the integrated input watt-hour and its data, set function code
E51 to "0.000." When the input watt-hour exceeds 999,900 kWh, the
counter will be reset to "0."
Shows the value expressed by "input watt-hour (kWh) × E51 (whose
data range is 0.000 to 9,999)."
Unit: None (Display range: *001 to 9999 . The count cannot
exceed 9999. (It will be fixed at 9,999 once the calculated value
exceeds 9999.))
5_10 Input watt-hour data
Depending on the value of integrated input watt-hour data, the
decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED
monitors’ resolution.
To reset the integrated input watt-hour data, set function code E51 to
"0.000."
Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in RS-485
Number of RS-485 communication (COM port 1, connection to keypad) after the power is
5_11 communications errors turned ON.
(COM port 1)
Once the count exceeds 9999, the counter will be reset to "0."
Shows the latest error that has occurred in RS-485 communication
Content of RS-485 (COM port 1) in decimal.
5_12 communications error
(COM port 1) For error contents, refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s
Manual.
Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in the option.
5_13 Number of option errors 1
5_14 Inverter's ROM version Shows the inverter's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
5_16 Keypad's ROM version Shows the keypad's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in RS-485
Number of RS-485 communication (COM port 2, connection to terminal block) after the
5_17 communications errors power is turned ON.
(COM port 2)
Shows the latest error that has occurred in RS-485 communication
Content of RS-485 (COM port 2, connection to terminal block) in decimal.
5_18 communications error
(COM port 2) For error contents, refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s
Manual.
Shows the ROM version of the option as a 4-digit code.
5_19 Option's ROM version 1
If the option has no ROM, "----" appears on the LED monitor.
3-27
Table 3.4-12 Display Items in "Maintenance Information" (Continued)
LED Monitor
Item Description
shows:
Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of motor
1.
Display range: 0 to 9999 The x10 LED turns ON.
5_23 Cumulative run time of motor 1
Actual cumulative motor run time (hours) =
Displayed value x 10
When the count exceeds 99,990, the counter will be reset to "0" and
start over again.
Temperature inside the inverter Shows the current temperature inside the inverter.
5_24
(real-time value) Unit: C
Temperature of heat sink Shows the current temperature of the heat sink inside the inverter.
5_25
(real-time value) Unit: C
Shows the cumulative time during which a voltage is applied to the
DC link bus capacitor.
Lifetime of DC link bus
When the main power is shut down, the inverter automatically
5_26 capacitor
measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and
(elapsed hours)
corrects the elapsed time.
Shows the remaining lifetime of the DC link bus capacitor, which is
Lifetime of DC link bus estimated by subtracting the elapsed time from the lifetime (10
5_27 capacitor years).
(remaining hours)
Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of motor
5_28 Cumulative run time of motor 2 2.
Shows the hours remaining before the next maintenance, which is
estimated by subtracting the cumulative run time of motor 1 from the
maintenance interval specified by H78. (This function applies to
Remaining hours before the motor 1 only.)
5_31
next maintenance 1
Display range: 0 to 9999 The x10 LED turns ON.
Actual remaining hours before maintenance =
Displayed value x 10
Shows the content of the motor 2 startup counter (i.e., the number of
5_32 Number of startups 2 run commands issued).
Shows the startup times remaining before the next maintenance,
which is estimated by subtracting the number of startups from the
Remaining startup times preset startup count for maintenance specified by H79. (This function
5_35
before the next maintenance 1 applies to motor 1 only.)
Shows the factor of the latest light alarm as an alarm code.
5_36 Light alarm factor (Latest)
For details, refer to Chapter 6, Section 6.1 "Protective Functions."
Shows the factor of the last light alarm as an alarm code.
5_37 Light alarm factor (Last)
Shows the factor of the 2nd last light alarm as an alarm code.
5_38 Light alarm factor (2nd last)
Shows the factor of the 3rd last light alarm as an alarm code.
5_39 Light alarm factor (3rd last)
Shows the factor of the error that has occurred in the option being
5_40 Option error factor 1
connected to the A-port.
3-28
3.4.6 Reading alarm information "Alarm Information: &al "

Menu #6 "Alarm Information" (&al ) shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code. Further, it is also
possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred. Figure 3.4-4

shows the menu transition in "Alarm Information" and Table 3.4-13 lists the details of the alarm information.
Figure 3.4-4 Menu Transition in Menu #6 "Alarm Information"
Basic key operation

To view the alarm information, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(2) Use the or key to display "Alarm Information" (&al).
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of alarm codes (e.g. !0l1 ).
In the list of alarm codes, the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history.
(4) Each time the or key is pressed, the last 4 alarms are displayed beginning with the most recent one in the
order of ! , " , # and $
(5) Press the key with an alarm code being displayed.
The item number (e.g. 6_00 ) and the inverter status information (e.g. Output frequency) at the time of the
alarm occurrence alternately appear at approx. 1-second intervals.
Pressing the and keys displays other item numbers (e.g. 6_01 ) and the status information (e.g. Output
current) for that alarm code.
(6) Press the key to return to the list of alarm codes. Press the key again to return to the menu.
3-29
Table 3.4-13 Display Items in "Alarm Information"
LED monitor
shows: Item Description
(item No.)
6_00 Output frequency Output frequency before slip compensation
Output current
6_01 Output current
Display unit: A (Amperes)
Output voltage
6_02 Output voltage
Display unit: V (Volts)
6_03 Calculated torque Calculated motor output torque
6_04 Reference frequency Frequency specified by frequency command
Shows the current rotation direction.
6_05 Rotation direction
f: forward, r: reverse, ----: stop
Running status as four hexadecimal digits.
6_06 Running status Refer to " Displaying running status (3_07 ) and running status
2 (3_23 )" in Section 3.4.3 on page 3-18 for details.
Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of
the inverter.
Display: Upper 2 digits and lower 3 digits are displayed
alternately.
6_07 Cumulative run time
Example: 0  535h (535 hours)
65  535h (65,535 hours)
The lower 3 digits are displayed with h (hour).
Shows the content of the motor startup counter (i.e., the number
of run commands issued).
Counter range: 0 to 65,530 times
Display range: 0 to 9999
6_08 No. of startups If the count exceeds 10,000, the x10 LED turns
ON and the LED monitor shows one-tenth of the
value.
Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit.
6_09 DC link bus voltage
Unit: V (volts)
Temperature inside the Shows the temperature inside the inverter.
6_10
inverter Unit: C
Max. temperature of heat Shows the temperature of the heat sink.
6_11
sink Unit: C
Terminal I/O signal status
6_12 (displayed with ON/OFF of Shows the ON/OFF states of the digital I/O terminals.
LED segments)
For the contents of the display, refer to Table 3.4-9 "Segment
Terminal input signal status Display for External Signal Information" and Table 3.4-10
6_13
(in hexadecimal) "Segment Display for I/O Signal Status in Hexadecimal
Terminal output signal status (Example)" in Section 3.4.4 "Checking I/O signal status."
6_14
(in hexadecimal)
No. of consecutive Shows how many times the same alarm has occurred
6_15
occurrences consecutively.
Simultaneously occurring alarm code (1)
6_16 Multiple alarm 1
("----" is displayed if no alarm has occurred.)
Simultaneously occurring alarm code (2)
6_17 Multiple alarm 2
("----" is displayed if no alarm has occurred.)
3-30
LED monitor
shows: Item Description
(item No.)

Terminal I/O signal status
under communications control
6_18
(displayed with the ON/OFF
of LED segments)
Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals under
Terminal input signal status
RS-485 communications control. Refer to " Displaying control
6_19 under communications control
I/O signal terminals under communications control" in Section
(in hexadecimal)
3.4.4 "Checking I/O signal status" for details.
Terminal output signal status
under communications
6_20
control
(in hexadecimal)
6_21 Error sub code Secondary error code for an alarm.
Running status 2 as four hexadecimal digits.
6_22 Running status 2 For details, refer to Table 3.4-5 "Running Status 2 (3_23 ) Bit
Assignment" in Section 3.4.3 "Monitoring the running status."
6_23 Detected speed Shows the detected speed value.
Running status 3 as four hexadecimal digits.
6_24 Running status 3 For details, refer to Table 3.4-14 "Running Status 3 (3_24 ) Bit
Assignment" given below.
6_25 Multiple alarm sub code Secondary error code for a multiple alarm.
When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession, the alarm information for the first and the most
recent occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences in-between will be
discarded. The number of consecutive occurrences will be preserved as the first alarm information.
Table 3.4-14 Running Status 3 (3_24 ) Bit Assignment

15 ― Always "0." 7 FAN "1" when the fan is in operation.
14 ID2 "1" when current 2 is detected. 6 KP "1" during keypad operation.
"1" when a motor overload early warning
13 IDL "1" when low current is detected. 5 OL
is issued.
"1" during auto-restarting after momentary
12 ID "1" when current is detected. 4 IPF
power failure.
11 OLP "1" under overload prevention control. 3 SWM2 "1" when motor 2 is selected.
10 LIFE "1" when a lifetime early warning is issued. 2 RDY "1" when the inverter is ready to run.
"1" when a heat sink overheat early
9 OH 1 FDT "1" when frequency is detected.
warning is issued.
"1" when a frequency arrival signal is
8 TRY "1" during auto-resetting. 0 FAR
issued.
3-31
3.4.7 Setting up basic function codes quickly "Quick Setup: *fn:"

Menu #0 "Quick Setup" in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a predetermined basic set of
function codes.
To use Menu #0 "Quick Setup," you need to set function code E52 to "0" (Function code data editing mode) or "2"
(Full-menu mode).
The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter.
Figure 3.4-5 shows the menu transition in "Quick Setup" and function code data changing procedure.
Figure 3.4-5 Menu Transition in Menu #0 "Quick Setup" and Function Code Data Changing Procedure
3-32
Basic key operation

This section gives a description of the basic key operation in "Quick Setup," following the example of the function
code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3.4-5.

This example shows you how to change function code F01 data (Frequency command source) from the factory
default " / keys on keypad (F01 = 0)" to "Current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function) (4 to 20 mA DC) (F01 =
2)."
Programming mode. The function selection menu appears. (In this example, *fn: is displayed.)
(2) If anything other than *fn: is displayed, use the and keys to display *fn:.
(3) Press the key to proceed to the list of function codes.
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired function code (f 01 in this example), then press the key.
The data of this function code appears. (In this example, data 0 of f 01 appears.)
(5) Change the function code data using the and keys. (In this example, press the key two times to
change data 0 to 2.)
(6) Press the key to establish the function code data.
The saue appears (blinking) and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter. After that, the display
will return to the function code list and then move to the next function code. (In this example, f 02.)
Pressing the key instead of the key cancels the change made to the data. The data reverts to the
previous value, the display returns to the function code list, and the original function code reappears.
(7) Press the key to return to the menu from the function code list.
Cursor movement
When changing function code data, pressing the key moves the cursor to the desired digit and change
the data in that digit in the same say as with the frequency setting. This action is called "Cursor
movement."
It is possible to change or add function code items subject to quick setup. For details, consult your Fuji
Electric representatives.
3-33
3.5 Alarm Mode
3.5 Alarm Mode

If an abnormal condition arises, the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm, then the inverter
automatically enters Alarm mode. At the same time, an alarm code appears on the LED monitor.
3.5.1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode

Remove the cause of the alarm and press the key to release the alarm and return to Running mode. The
alarm can be removed using the key only when the alarm code is displayed.
3.5.2 Displaying the alarm history

It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed. Previous
alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the / key while the current alarm code is displayed.
3.5.3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm

When the alarm code is displayed, you may check various running status information (output frequency and
output current, etc.) by pressing the key. The item number and data for each running information will be
displayed alternately.
Further, you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the / key.
The information displayed is the same as for Menu #6 "Alarm Information" in Programming mode. Refer to
Table 3.4-13 in Section 3.4.6 "Reading alarm information."
Pressing the key while the running status information is displayed returns to the alarm code display.
When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause, pressing the
key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm state. This
means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this time.
3-34
3.5 Alarm Mode
3.5.4 Switching to Programming mode

You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing " + keys" simultaneously with the alarm
displayed, and modify the function code data.

Figure 3.5-1 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items.
Figure 3.5-1 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode
3-35
Chapter 4
TEST RUN PROCEDURE
This chapter describes basic settings required for making a test run.
Contents

4.1 Test Run Procedure Flowchart ................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Checking Prior to Powering On ................................................................................................ 4-2
4.3 Powering ON and Checking ..................................................................................................... 4-3
4.4 Switching the Applicable Motor Rank (ND, HD, HND and HHD Modes) ................................. 4-3
4.5 Selecting a Desired Motor Drive Control .................................................................................. 4-4
4.5.1 V/f control with slip compensation inactive ........................................................................ 4-4
4.5.2 Vector control without speed sensor (Dynamic torque vector) .......................................... 4-4
4.5.3 V/f control with slip compensation active ........................................................................... 4-5
4.5.4 Performance comparison for drive controls (summary) ..................................................... 4-5
4.5.5 Configuring function codes ................................................................................................ 4-6
[ 1 ] Basic settings < 1 > ............................................................................................................. 4-6
[ 2 ] Basic settings < 2 > ............................................................................................................. 4-7
4.5.6 Auto-tuning motor parameters ........................................................................................... 4-7
[ 1 ] Tuning procedure < 1 > ....................................................................................................... 4-7
4.6 Running the Inverter for Motor Operation Check ..................................................................... 4-9
4.6.1 Test run procedure ............................................................................................................. 4-9
4.6.2 Check points during a test run ........................................................................................... 4-9
4.6.3 Modification of motor control function code data ............................................................... 4-9
4.7 Selecting a Frequency Command Source ............................................................................. 4-10
4.7.1 Setting up a frequency command from the keypad ......................................................... 4-10
4.7.2 Setting up a frequency command with an external potentiometer................................... 4-10
4.7.3 Setting up a frequency command with multistep frequency selection ............................. 4-11
4.8 Selecting a Run Command Source ........................................................................................ 4-12
4.8.1 Setting up a run command from the keypad .................................................................... 4-12
4.8.2 Setting up a run command with digital input signals (terminals [FWD] and [REV]) ......... 4-12
4.1 Test Run Procedure Flowchart

4.1 Test Run Procedure Flowchart
Make a test run of the motor using the flowchart given below.
This chapter describes the test run procedure with motor 1 dedicated function codes that are marked with an
asterisk (*). For motor 2, replace those asterisked function codes with motor 2 dedicated ones.
 For the function codes dedicated to motor 2, see Chapter 5 "FUNCTION CODE."
TEST RUN PROCEDURE

Chap 4
Figure 4.1-1 Test Run Procedure
4-1
4.2 Checking Prior to Powering On
4.2 Checking Prior to Powering On

Check the following before powering on the inverter.
(1) Check that the wiring is correct.
Especially check the wiring to the inverter input terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T and output terminals U, V, and W.
Also check that the grounding wires are connected to the grounding terminals ( G) correctly. See Figure 4.2-1.
• Never connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U, V, and W. Doing so and turning the power
ON breaks the inverter.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes.
(2) Check the control circuit terminals and main circuit terminals for short circuits or ground faults.
(3) Check for loose terminals, connectors and screws.
(4) Check that the motor is separated from mechanical equipment.
(5) Make sure that all switches of devices connected to the inverter are turned OFF. Powering on the inverter with
any of those switches being ON may cause an unexpected motor operation.
(6) Check that safety measures are taken against runaway of the equipment, e.g., a defense to prevent people
from access to the equipment.
(7) Check that a power factor correction DC reactor (DCR) is connected to the DC reactor terminals P1 and P(+).
(ND-mode inverters of FRN0139E2S-4 or above, HD-/HND-mode ones of FRN0168E2S-4 or above, and
HHD-mode ones of FRN0203E2S-4 or above are provided together with a DCR as standard. Be sure to
connect the DCR to the inverter.)
Inverter
G L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) DB U V W G
Jumper bar
No DCR connected
～
～
M
～ 3
Inverter
G L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) DB U V W G
DCR connected
～
～
M
～ 3
Figure 4.2-1 Connection of Main Circuit Terminals
4-2
4.3 Powering ON and Checking
4.3 Powering ON and Checking
• Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the cover when the inverter
power is ON.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Turn the power ON and check the following points. The following is a case when no function code data is changed
from the factory defaults.
(1) Check that the LED monitor displays *00 (indicating that the reference frequency is 0 Hz) that is blinking.
TEST RUN PROCEDURE

(See Figure 4.3-1.)
(2) Check that the built-in cooling fans rotate.
Chap 4
Figure 4.3-1 Display of the LED Monitor after Power-on
4.4 Switching the Applicable Motor Rank (ND, HD, HND and HHD Modes)
Changing the data of function code F80 switches the applicable motor rank to match load conditions. In HD, HND or
HHD mode, the inverter drives a motor whose capacity is one or two ranks lower than the inverter's one.
F80 Overload Maximum Operating Application

Drive mode Application Applicable motor
data capability frequency temperature samples
Motor whose
General 120% for 1 Fan, pump, blower,
4 ND mode capacity is the same 120 Hz 40°C
load min. compressor, etc.
as the inverter's one.
Wire drawing
Motor whose
machine, winding
Heavy duty capacity is one rank 150% for 1
3 HD mode 120 Hz 40°C machine, twisting
load lower than the min.
machine, spinning
inverter's one.
frame, etc.
Motor whose
General capacity is one rank 120% for 1 Fan, pump, blower,
1 HND mode 120 Hz 50°C
load lower than the min. compressor, etc.
inverter's one.
Wire drawing
Motor whose 150% for 1 machine, winding
Heavy duty capacity is two ranks min. machine, twisting
0 HHD mode 500 Hz 50°C
load lower than the 200% for 0.5 machine, spinning
inverter's one. s. frame, hoist,
machine tool, etc.
The HD-/HND-/HHD-mode inverter brings out the continuous rated current level which enables the inverter to drive
a motor with one or two ranks lower capacity, but its overload capability (%) against the continuous current level or
the operating temperature increases. For details, see Chapter 12 "SPECIFICATIONS."
4-3
4.4 Switching the Applicable Motor Rank (ND, HD, HND and HHD Modes)
The inverter is subject to restrictions on the function code data setting range and internal processing as listed below.
Function
Name ND mode HD mode HND mode HHD mode Remarks
codes
DC braking In the
(Braking Setting range: Setting range: Setting range: ND/HD/HND
F21* 0 to 60% 0 to 80% 0 to 100%
level) mode, a value
out of the range,
Setting range: Setting range: Setting range: if specified,
0.75 to 10kHz 0.75 to 16kHz 0.75 to 16kHz
Motor (FRN0059E2S-4□) automatically
sound (FRN0059E2S-4□) (FRN0059E2S-4□ changes to the
F26 0.75 to 6kHz 0.75 to 10kHz to
(Carrier (FRN0072E2S-4□ to FRN0168E2S-4□) maximum value
frequency) (FRN0072E2S-4□ FRN0168E2S-4□) allowable in the
to 0.75 to 10kHz
FRN0203E2S-4□) 0.75 to 6kHz (FRN0203E2S-4□) ND/HD/HND
(FRN0203E2S-4□) mode.
Switching the
drive mode with
Current function code
Initial Initial F80
F44 limiter Initial value: 130% value: value: Initial value: 160%
(Level) automatically
160% 130% initializes the F44
data to the value
specified at left.
In the
ND/HD/HND
mode, if the
Setting range: maximum
Maximum Upper limit: 25 to 500 Hz frequency
F03* frequency exceeds 120 Hz,
120 Hz Upper limit:
500 Hz the actual output
frequency is
internally limited
to 120 Hz.
Based on Based on Based on the rated
Current Based on the rated the rated the rated current level for HHD
― indication current level for ND current current mode ―
and output mode level for level for
HD mode HND mode
Switching between the drive modes does not automatically change the motor rated capacity (P02*) to the one
suitable for the rank-changed motor, so configure the P02* data to match the applied motor rating as required.
4.5 Selecting a Desired Motor Drive Control

The FRENIC-Ace supports the following motor drive control.
F42* Basic Speed
Drive control Speed control For configuration, refer to:
data control feedback
V/f control
0 with slip compensation Frequency control
inactive Basic settings <1> (page 4-6)
Vector control without speed V/f Basic settings <2> (page 4-7)
1 sensor (Dynamic torque Disable
control Frequency control Tuning procedure <1>(page
vector) with slip 4-7)
V/f control compensation
2
with slip compensation active
4.5.1 V/f control with slip compensation inactive

Under this control, the inverter controls a motor with the voltage and frequency according to the V/f pattern specified
by function codes. This control disables all automatically controlled features such as the slip compensation, so no
unpredictable output fluctuation results, enabling stable operation with constant output frequency.
4.5.2 Vector control without speed sensor (Dynamic torque vector)

To get the maximal torque out of a motor, this control calculates the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to
optimize the voltage and current vector output.
Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation function.
This control is effective for improving the system response to external disturbances such as load fluctuation, and the
motor speed control accuracy.
Note that the inverter may not respond to a rapid load fluctuation since this control is an open-loop V/f control that
does not perform the current control, unlike the vector control. The advantages of this control include larger
maximum torque per output current than that the vector control.
4-4
Since slip compensation and vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector) use motor
parameters, the following conditions should be satisfied; otherwise, full control performance may not be
obtained.
• A single motor should be controlled per inverter.
• Motor parameters P02*, P03*, and P06* to P13* should be properly configured or auto-tuning (P04*)
should be performed.
• The capacity of the motor to be controlled should be two or more ranks lower (based on the HHD mode)
than that of the inverter under the vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector).
Otherwise, the inverter may not control the motor due to decrease of the current detection resolution.
The wiring distance between the inverter and motor should be 50 m or less. If it is longer, the inverter
may not control the motor due to leakage current flowing through stray capacitance to the ground or
between wires. Especially, small capacity inverters whose rated current is also small may be unable to
control the motor correctly even when the wiring is less than 50 m. In that case, make the wiring length
as short as possible or use a wire with small stray capacitance (e.g., loosely-bundled cable) to minimize
TEST RUN PROCEDURE

the stray capacitance.
4.5.3 V/f control with slip compensation active

Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics, decreasing the
motor rotation. The inverter’s slip compensation function first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the
motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation. This
prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip.
That is, this function is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy.
The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P12* (Rated slip frequency), P09* (Slip
compensation gain for driving) and P11* (Slip compensation gain for braking).
Chap 4
H68* enables or disables the slip compensation function according to the motor driving conditions.
Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone
H68* data Base frequency or Above the base
Accl/Decel Constant speed
below frequency
0 Enable Enable Enable Enable
1 Disable Enable Enable Enable
2 Enable Enable Enable Disable
3 Disable Enable Enable Disable
4.5.4 Performance comparison for drive controls (summary)

Each drive control has advantages and disadvantages. The table below compares the drive controls, showing their
relative performance in each characteristic.
Select the one that shows high performance in the characteristics that are important in your machinery. In rare
cases, the performance shown below may not be obtained due to various conditions including motor characteristics
or mechanical rigidity. The final performance should be determined by adjusting the speed control system or other
elements with the inverter being connected to the machinery (load). If you have any questions, contact your Fuji
Electric representative.
Output Speed Speed

F42* Maximum Load Current Torque
Drive control frequency control control
data torque disturbance control accuracy
stability accuracy response
V/f control with slip
0 compensation  ― ―  ― ―
inactive
Vector control
without speed
1
sensor (Dynamic  ― 
torque vector)
V/f control with slip
2 compensation ▲ ▲  ―
active
Relative performance symbols : Excellent, : Good, : Effective, ▲: Less effective, ―: Not effective
4-5
4.5.5 Configuring function codes

[ 1 ] Basic settings < 1 >
Driving a Fuji general-purpose motor under the V/f control (F42* = 0 or 2) or vector control without speed sensor
(dynamic torque vector) (F42* = 1) requires configuring the following basic function codes.
Select Fuji standard 8- or 6-series motors with the function code P99*.
Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values. For the
motor ratings, check the ratings printed on the motor's nameplate. For your machinery design values, ask system
designers about them.
 For details on how to modify the function code data, see Chapter 3, Section 3.4.1 "Setting up function codes."
Function Name Function code data Factory default

code
f 04 * Base frequency 1 50.0 (Hz)
Motor ratings
Rated voltage at base (printed on the nameplate of the motor) Three-phase 200 V: 200 (V)
f 05 *
frequency 1 Three-phase 400 V: 400 (V)
0: Motor characteristics 0 0: Motor characteristics 0
(Fuji standard motors, 8-series) (Fuji standard motors,
p 02 * Motor 1 selection
3: Motor characteristics 3 8-series)
(Fuji standard motors, 6-series)
Motor 1 Capacity of motor connected Nominal applied motor capacity
p 03 *
(Rated capacity)
f 03 * Maximum frequency 1 60.0 (Hz)
FRN0072E2S-4 or below:
Machinery design values 6.00 (s)
Acceleration time 1
f 07 (Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase FRN0085E2S-4 or above:
(Note)
values so that they are longer than your 20.00 (s)
machinery design values. If the specified time
is short, the inverter may not run the motor FRN0072E2S-4 or below:
Deceleration time 1 properly. 6.00 (s)
f 08
(Note) FRN0085E2S-4 or above:
20.00 (s)
After the above configuration, initialize motor 1 with the function code (H03 = 2). It automatically updates the motor
parameters P01*, P03*, P06* to P13*, and H46.
When accessing the function code P02*, take into account that changing the P02* data automatically
updates the data of the function codes P03*, P06* to P13*, and H46.
The motor rating should be specified properly when performing auto-torque boost, torque calculation
monitoring, auto energy saving, torque limiting, automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), auto
search for idling motor speed, slip compensation, torque vector control, droop control, or overload stop.
In any of the following cases, the full control performance may not be obtained from the inverter because
the motor parameters differ from the factory defaults, so perform auto-tuning. (Refer to [ 2 ].)
• The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non-standard product.
• The wiring distance between the inverter and the motor is too long (generally 20 m or more).
• A reactor is inserted between the inverter and the motor.
4-6
[ 2 ] Basic settings < 2 >

Under the V/f control (F42* = 0 or 2) or vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector) (F42* = 1), any
of the following cases requires configuring the basic function codes given below and auto-tuning.
- Driving a non-Fuji motor or non-standard motor
- Driving a Fuji general-purpose motor, provided that the wiring distance between the inverter and motor is long or a
reactor is connected
Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values. For the
motor ratings, check the ratings printed on the motor's nameplate. For your machinery design values, ask system
designers about them.
Function Name Function code data Factory default

code
TEST RUN PROCEDURE

f 04 * Base frequency 1 50.0 (Hz)
Rated voltage Three-phase 200 V: 200 (V)
f 05 *
at base frequency 1 Motor ratings Three-phase 400 V: 400 (V)
Motor 1 (printed on the nameplate of the motor) Nominal applied motor capacity
p 02 *
(Rated capacity)
Motor 1 Rated current of nominal applied
p 03 * motor
(Rated current)
f 03 * Maximum frequency 1 60.0 (Hz)
FRN0072E2S-4 or below:
Acceleration time 1 Machinery design values 6.00 (s)
Chap 4
f 07
(Note) (Note) For a test-driving of the motor, FRN0085E2S-4 or above:
increase values so that they are longer
20.00 (s)
than your machinery design values. If the
specified time is short, the inverter may not FRN0072E2S-4 or below:
run the motor properly. 6.00 (s)
Deceleration time 1
f 08
(Note) FRN0085E2S-4 or above:
20.00 (s)
When accessing the function code P02*, take into account that changing the P02* data automatically
updates the data of the function codes P03*, P06* to P13*, and H46.
4.5.6 Auto-tuning motor parameters

[ 1 ] Tuning procedure < 1 >
(1) Selection of tuning type
Check the situation of the machinery and select "Tuning with the motor stopped (P04* = 1)" or "Tuning with the
motor running (P04* = 2)." For the latter tuning, adjust the acceleration and deceleration times (F07 and F08) and
specify the rotation direction that matches the actual rotation direction of the machinery.
P04* Select under the

Tuning type Motor parameters subjected to tuning Tuning
data following conditions
Primary resistance (%R1) (P07*)
Tune while Leakage reactance (%X) (P08*) Tuning with the motor Cannot rotate the
1 the motor Rated slip frequency (P12*) stopped. motor.
stops. %X correction factor 1 and 2 (P53* and
P54*)
Tuning the %R1 and %X,
with the motor stopped. Can rotate the motor,
provided that it is
Tuning the no-load safe.
Tune while No-load current (P06*) current and magnetic
the motor is saturation factor, with the Note that little load
Primary resistance (%R1) (P07*)
2 rotating motor running at 50% of should be applied
Leakage reactance (%X) (P08*)
under V/f during tuning. Tuning
Rated slip frequency (P12*) the base frequency.
control with load applied
Tuning again the rated decreases the tuning
slip frequency, with the accuracy.
motor stopped.
The tuning results of motor parameters will be automatically saved into their respective function codes. If P04*
tuning is performed, for instance, the tuning results will be saved into P* codes (Motor 1* parameters).
4-7
(2) Preparation of machinery

Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load, such as disengaging the coupling from the motor and
deactivating the safety devices.
(3) Tuning
Set function code P04* to "1" or "2" and press the key. (The blinking of 1 or 2 on the LED monitor will
slow down.)
Enter a run command. The factory default is " key on the keypad for forward rotation." To switch to reverse
rotation or to select the terminal signal FWD or REV as a run command, change the data of function code
F02.
The moment a run command is entered, the display of 1 or 2 lights up, and tuning starts with the motor
stopped.
(Maximum tuning time: Approx. 40 to 80 s.)
If P04* = 2, after the tuning in above, the motor is accelerated to approximately 50% of the base frequency
and then tuning starts. Upon completion of measurements, the motor decelerates to a stop.
(Estimated tuning time: Acceleration time + 20 to 75 s + Deceleration time)
If P04* = 2, after the motor decelerates to a stop in above, tuning continues with the motor stopped.
(Maximum tuning time: Approx. 40 to 80 s.)
If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command (F02 = 1), end appears upon completion of
the measurements. Turning the run command OFF completes the tuning.
If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link, it automatically turns
OFF upon completion of the measurements, which completes the tuning.
Upon completion of the tuning, the subsequent function code appears on the keypad.
 Tuning errors
Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and, in the worst case, could even cause hunting
or deteriorate precision. Therefore, if the inverter finds any abnormality in the tuning results or any error in the tuning
process, it displays er7 and discards the tuning data.
Listed below are possible causes that trigger tuning errors.
Possible tuning error

Details
causes
- An interphase voltage unbalance or output phase loss has been detected.
Error in tuning results - Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter due to the
output circuit opened.
Output current error An abnormally high current has flown during tuning.
During tuning, a run command has been turned OFF, or STOP (Force to stop), BX
Sequence error (Coast to a stop), DWP (Protect from dew condensation), or other similar terminal
command has been received.
- During tuning, any of the operation limiters has been activated.
Error due to limitation - The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter (high) has limited tuning
operation.
Other errors An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred.
If any of these errors occurs, remove the error cause and perform tuning again, or consult your Fuji Electric
representative.
If a filter other than the Fuji optional output filter (OFL--A) is connected to the inverter's output
(secondary) circuit, the tuning result cannot be assured. When replacing the inverter connected with such a
filter, make a note of the old inverter’s settings for the primary resistance %R1, leakage reactance %X,
no-load current, and rated slip frequency, and specify those values to the new inverter’s function codes.
Vibration that may occur when the motor's coupling is elastic can be regarded as normal vibration due to the
output voltage pattern applied in tuning. The tuning does not always result in an error; however, run the
motor and check its running state.
4-8
4.6 Running the Inverter for Motor Operation Check
4.6 Running the Inverter for Motor Operation Check

After completion of preparations for a test run as described above, start running the inverter for motor operation
check using the following procedure.
If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this User's Manual, the motor
may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
Accident or injury may result.
If any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor, immediately stop operation and investigate the cause referring
to Chapter 6, "TROUBLESHOOTING."
TEST RUN PROCEDURE

4.6.1 Test run procedure
(1) Turn the power ON and check that the reference frequency *00 Hz is blinking on the LED monitor.
(2) Set a low reference frequency such as 5 Hz, using / keys. (Check that the frequency is blinking on the
LED monitor.)
(3) Press the key to start running the motor in the forward direction. (Check that the reference frequency is lit on
the LED monitor.)
(4) To stop the motor, press the key.
Chap 4
4.6.2 Check points during a test run
(1) Check that the motor is running in the forward direction.
(2) Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration.
(3) Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration.
When no abnormality is found, press the key again to start driving the motor, then increase the reference
frequency using / keys. Check the above points again.
4.6.3 Modification of motor control function code data

Modifying the current function code data sometimes can solve an insufficient torque or overcurrent incident. The
table below lists the major function codes to be accessed. For details, see Chapter 5 "FUNCTION CODE" and
Chapter 6 "TROUBLESHOOTING."
Drive
Function control
Name Modification key points
code
V/f
If the current limiter is activated due to a short acceleration time Y
f 07 Acceleration time 1
and large drive current, prolong the acceleration time.
If an overvoltage trip occurs due to a short deceleration time, Y
f 08 Deceleration time 1
prolong the deceleration time.
If the starting motor torque is deficient, increase the torque boost.
f 09 * Torque boost 1 If the motor with no load is overexcited, decrease the torque Y
boost.
Current limiter If the stall prevention function is activated by the current limiter Y
f 44 (Mode selection) during acceleration or deceleration, increase the operation level.
Motor 1
For excessive slip compensation during driving, decrease the
p 09 * (Slip compensation Y
gain for driving) gain; for insufficient one, increase the gain.
Motor 1
For excessive slip compensation during braking, decrease the
p 11 * (Slip compensation Y
gain for braking) gain; for insufficient one, increase the gain.
Output current
If the motor vibrates due to current fluctuation, increase the
h 80 * fluctuation damping Y
gain 1 (For motor 1) suppression gain.
Y: Modification effective N: Modification ineffective
4-9
4.7 Selecting a Frequency Command Source

A frequency command source is the keypad ( / keys) by factory default. This section provides the frequency
command setting procedures using the frequency command sources of the keypad, external potentiometer, and
frequency selection terminal commands.
4.7.1 Setting up a frequency command from the keypad

Follow the procedure given below.
(1) Configure the function codes as listed below.
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
F01 Frequency Command 1 0: Keypad ( / keys) 0
• When the inverter is in Programming or Alarm mode, frequency command setting with / keys is
disabled. To enable it, switch to Running mode.
• If any of higher priority frequency command sources (multistep frequency commands and frequency
commands via communications link) is specified, the inverter may run at an unexpected frequency.
(2) Press the / key to display the current frequency command on the LED monitor. The least significant digit
blinks.
(3) To change the frequency command, press the / key again.
When you start specifying the frequency command with the / key, the least significant digit on the display
blinks; that it, the cursor lies in the least significant digit. Holding down the / key changes data in the least
significant digit and generates a carry, while the cursor remains in the least significant digit.
(4) To save the new setting into the inverter's memory, press the key.
4.7.2 Setting up a frequency command with an external potentiometer

Function
code
1: Analog voltage input to terminal
F01 Frequency Command 1 [12] 0
(0 to ±10 V)
If terminal [FWD] and [REV] are ON (short-circuited), the F02 data cannot be changed. First turn those
terminals OFF and then change the F02 data.
(2) Connect an external potentiometer to terminals [11] through [13] of the inverter.
(3) Rotate the external potentiometer to apply voltage to terminal [12] for a frequency command input.
 For precautions in wiring, refer to Chapter 2 "INSTALLATION AND WIRING."

4-10
4.7.3 Setting up a frequency command with multistep frequency selection

Function
code
0, 1, 2, 3: Multistep frequency 1 to 15
E01 to E05 Terminal [X1] to [X5] Functions 0
(0: SS1, 1: SS2, 2: SS4, 3: SS8)
C05 to C19 Multistep Frequency 1 to 15 0.00 to 500.00 Hz 0.00
Assign signals SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 to four out of five digital input terminals [X1] to [X5] by four out of five
TEST RUN PROCEDURE

function codes E01 to E05 (data = 0, 1, 2 and 3). Specify multistep frequency commands with C05 to C19.
Turning digital signals SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 ON or OFF selectively switches the multistep frequency
commands specified beforehand.
Combination of input signals

3 2 1 0 Selected frequency command
SS8 SS4 SS2 SS1
OFF OFF OFF ON C05 (Multistep frequency 1)
OFF OFF ON OFF C06 (Multistep frequency 2)
OFF OFF ON ON C07 (Multistep frequency 3)
Chap 4
OFF ON OFF OFF C08 (Multistep frequency 4)
OFF ON OFF ON C09 (Multistep frequency 5)
OFF ON ON OFF C10 (Multistep frequency 6) Related function
C11 (Multistep frequency 7) codes
OFF ON ON ON
C05 to C19
ON OFF OFF OFF C12 (Multistep frequency 8)
ON OFF OFF ON C13 (Multistep frequency 9)
Data setting range:
ON OFF ON OFF C14 (Multistep frequency 10) 0.00 to 500.00
ON OFF ON ON C15 (Multistep frequency 11)
ON ON OFF OFF C16 (Multistep frequency 12)
ON ON OFF ON C17 (Multistep frequency 13)
ON ON ON OFF C18 (Multistep frequency 14)
ON ON ON ON C19 (Multistep frequency 15)
(2) Connect a multistep frequency switch to an X terminal and [CM].

(3) Turn the multistep frequency switch ON (short-circuit). The combination of those input signals switches a
multistep frequency command.

Enabling a multistep frequency command with a multistep frequency switch (ON between X terminal and
[CM]) disables the frequency command 1 specified by F01.
4-11
4.8 Selecting a Run Command Source
4.8 Selecting a Run Command Source

A run command source is the keypad ( and keys) by factory default.
4.8.1 Setting up a run command from the keypad

Function
code
0: Keypad operation (Rotation
direction input: Terminal block)
2: Keypad operation (Forward
Operation 2: Keypad operation (Forward direction)
F02 direction)
Method
3: Keypad operation (Reverse
direction)
(2) When F02 = 0: Press the key to run the motor. Press the key to stop it.
The rotation direction is specified by terminals [FWD] and [REV]. Connect the run forward switch between
terminals [FWD] and [CM] and the run reverse switch between [REV] and [CM].
Make sure that the SINK/SOURCE slide switch (SW1) is turned to the SINK position. If SW1 is in the
SOURCE position, the inverter cannot run the motor.
(3) When F02 = 2: Press the key to run the motor in the forward direction. Press the key to stop it.
(4) When F02 = 3: Press the key to run the motor in the reverse direction. Press the key to stop it.
4.8.2 Setting up a run command with digital input signals (terminals [FWD] and
[REV])
Function
code
F02 Operation Method 1: External digital input signal 0: Keypad operation
If terminal [FWD] and [REV] are ON (short-circuited), the F02 data cannot be changed. First turn those
terminals OFF and then change the F02 data.
(2) Connect the run forward switch between terminals [FWD] and [CM] and the run reverse switch between [REV]
and [CM].
Make sure that the SINK/SOURCE slide switch (SW1) is turned to the SINK position. If SW1 is in the
SOURCE position, the inverter cannot run the motor.
(3) Turn the run forward switch or run reverse switch ON (short-circuit) to run the motor in the forward or reverse
direction, respectively.

4-12
Chapter 5
FUNCTION CODE
This chapter explains the table of function code used in FRENIC-Ace, index per purpose, and the detail
of each function code.
Contents

5.1 Function Code Overview ······················································································ 5-1
5.2 Function Code Table ··························································································· 5-1
5.2.1 Supplementary note ······················································································· 5-1
5.2.2 Function code table ······················································································· 5-3
5.3 Description of Function Code ··············································································· 5-31
5.3.1 F code (Basic function) ·················································································· 5-31
[ 1 ] Frequency setting by keypad (F01 = 0 (Factory default state), 8) ···························· 5-33
[ 2 ] Setting up a reference frequency using analog input (F01 = 1 to 3, 5) ······················ 5-33
[ 3 ] Frequency setting by digital input signal "UP"/"DOWN" (F01=7)······························ 5-39
[ 4 ] Frequency setting using pulse train input (F01 = 12) ············································ 5-40
5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions)······························································ 5-77
5.3.3 C codes (Control functions) ·········································································· 5-108
5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) ······································································· 5-117
5.3.5 H codes (High performance functions) ···························································· 5-122
[ 1 ] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at
shipment ·································································································· 5-133
[ 2 ] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating
conditions at power shutdown ······································································· 5-134
5.3.6 A codes (Motor 2 parameters) ······································································· 5-148
5.3.7 J codes (Applied Functions) ·········································································· 5-150
[ 1 ] PID command with the [Image1] / [Image2] keys on the keypad (J02 = 0, factory
default) ···································································································· 5-151
[ 2 ] PID command by analog inputs (J02 = 1) ························································ 5-151
[ 3 ] PID command with UP/DOWN control (J02 = 3) ················································ 5-154
[ 4 ] PID command via communications link (J02 = 4) ··············································· 5-154
5.3.8 d codes (Applied Functions 2) ······································································· 5-168
5.3.9 U codes (Customizable logic operation) ·························································· 5-169
5.3.10 U1 codes (Customizable logic operation) ························································· 5-191
5.3.11 y codes (Link function)················································································· 5-196
5.1 Function Code Overview

5.1 Function Code Overview
Function code is used for selecting various functions of FRENIC-Ace. Function code comprises 3 digits or 4 digits
of alphanumeric character. The first digit categorizes the group of function code alphabetically and the subsequent
2 or 3 digits identify each code within the group by number. Function code comprises 11 groups: Basic function (F
code), Terminal function (E code), Control code (C code), Motor 1 parameter (P code), High-level function (H code)
(H1 code), Motor 2 parameter (A code), Application function 1 (J code) (J1 code), Application function 2 (d code),
Customizable logic (U code) (U1 code), Link function ( y code), Keypad functions ( k code), and Option function (o
code) . The function of each function code is determined according to the data to be set. The following descriptions
are for supplementary explanation of function code table. Refer to instruction manual of each option to find the
details of the option function (o code).
5.2 Function Code Table
FUNCTION CODE
5.2.1 Supplementary note
 Change, reflect, and save function code data during operation

Function code is categorized into those which data change is enabled during operation of the inverter and those
which such change is disabled. The meaning of the code in the "Change during operation" column of the function
code table is described in the following table.
Chap 5
Change during
Code Reflect and save data
operation
At the point when data is changed by / key, the changed data is immediately
reflected on the operation of inverter. However, at this stage, the changed value is
 Allowed not saved to the inverter. In order to save it to the inverter, press key. Without
saving by key and leaving the state of when the change was made by the key,
the data before the change is reflected on the operation of inverter.
Even if data is changed by the / key, the changed data will not be reflected on
 Allowed the operation of the inverter as is; by pressing the key, the changed value is
reflected on the operation of the inverter and is also saved to the inverter.
x Not allowed -
 Copying data
Function code data can be copied collectively by using the keypad (program mode menu number 7 " Data copy").
By using this function, it is possible to read out all function code data and write the same data to a different inverter.
However, if the specification of inverter at the copy source and copy destination is not identical, some function
codes may not be copied due to security reason. According to necessity, configure the settings individually for the
function code that is not to be copied. The code to categorize these codes is indicated in the "data copy" column in
the function code table in the next page and after.
: to be copied.
1: When inverter capacity is different, copying will not be performed.
2: When voltage group is different, copying will not be performed.
×: not to be copied.
5-1
 Negative logic setting of data

Digital input terminal and transistor/contact output terminal can become a signal for which negative logic is
specified by function code data setting. Negative logic is a function to reverse ON and OFF state of input or output,
and switch Active ON (function enabled with ON: positive logic) and Active OFF (function enabled with OFF:
negative logic). However, negative logic may not be enabled depending on the function of the signal.
Negative logic signal can be switched by setting the data with 1000 added to the function code data of the function
to be set. For example, the following example shows when coast to a stop command "BX" is selected by function
code E01.
Function code data Action

7 "BX" is ON and coast to a stop (Active ON)
1007 "BX" is OFF and coast to a stop (Active OFF)
5-2
5.2.2 Function code table

The table of function code to be used in FRENIC-Ace is shown.
 F code: Fundamental Functions (Basic function)

Under
Function Related
Name Data setting range operation Data copy Factory Default
code page
Change
F00 Data protection 0: No data protection, no digital setting protection   0 5-31
1: With data protection, no digital setting protection
2: No data protection, with digital setting protection
3: With data protection, with digital setting protection
F01 Frequency setting 1 x  0 5-32
0: Keypad key operation ( / key)
1: Analog voltage input (Terminal [12]) (from 0 to ±10 VDC)
2: Analog current input (Terminal [C1] (C1 function)) (4 to 20mA DC)
3: Analog voltage input (Terminal [12]) + Analog current input (Terminal
[C1] (C1 function))
5: Analog voltage input (Terminal [C1] (V2 function)) (0 to 10 VDC)
7: UP/DOWN control
(With balances bumpless)
10: Pattern operation
12: Pulse train input
F02 Operation 0: Keypad operation (rotation direction input: terminal block) x  2 5-41
1: External signal (digital input)
FUNCTION CODE
2: Keypad operation (forward rotation)
3: Keypad operation (Reverse rotation)
F03 Maximum output frequency 1 25.0 to 500.0 Hz x  CE:50.0, 5-42
TJK:60.0
A: 200V class
60.0
A: 400V class
50.0
F04 Base frequency 1 25.0 to 500.0Hz x  CEJKT:50.0, 5-43
A: 200 V class
60.0 A: 400 V
class 50.0
Chap 5
F05 Base frequency voltage 1 0: AVR disable (output voltage proportional to power voltage) x 2: TJK:200/400
80 to 240 V: AVR operation ( 200V class) A:220/415
160 to 500V: AVR operation ( 400V class) C:200/380
E:230/400
F06 Maximum output voltage 1 80 to 240V: AVR operation ( 200V class) x 2:
160 to 500V: AVR operation ( 400V class)
F07 Acceleration time1 0.00 to 6000 s   20.0 5-45
* 0.00 is for acceleration and deceleration time cancel (when  
F08 Deceleration time1
performing soft-start and stop externally)
F09 Torque boost 1 0.0 to 20.0% (% value against base frequency voltage 1)   *2 5-47
F10 Electronic thermal 1 (for motor 1: Enable (For a general-purpose motor with self-cooling fan)   1 5-47
protection) 2: Enable (For an inverter-driven motor (FV) with separately powered
(Characteristics selection) cooling fan)
F11 (Operation level) 0.00 (disable), current value of 1 to 135% of inverter rated current  12 *3
(Inverter rated current dependent on F80)
F12 (Thermal time constant) 0.5 to 75.0 min   *4

F14 Momentary power failure restart 0: Immediately trip   E:0 5-50
(Mode selection) 1: Trip at auto-restarting ACTJK:1
2: Trip after momentary deceleration is stopped
3: Continue to run (for heavy inertia load or general load)
4: Restart from frequency at power failure (for general load)
5: Restart from starting frequency
F15 Frequency Limiter (upper limit) 0.0 to 500.0Hz   70.0 5-56
F16 (Lower limit) 0.0 to 500.0Hz   0.0
F18 Bias -100.00 to 100.00%   0.00 5-57
(for frequency setting 1)
F20 DC braking 1 0.0 to 60.0Hz   0.0 5-57
(Braking starting frequency)
F21 (Operation level) 0 to 100% (HHD mode), 0 to 80% (HD/HND mode) 0 to 60% (ND mode )   0
F22 (Braking time) 0.00 (Disable): 0.01 to 30.00 s   0.00
F23 Starting Frequency 1 0.0 to 60.0Hz   0.5 5-60
F24 (Holding time) 0.00 to 10.00 s   0.00
F25 Stop Frequency 0.0 to 60.0 Hz   0.2
Factory defaultA (For Asia), C (for China), E (for Europe), T (For Taiwan), J (for Japan), K (for Korea)
indicates quick setup target function code.
*2 Standard value is set per capacitance. Refer to table A.
*3 Rated current of the motor is set. Refer to Table B (function code P03).
*4 Standard applicable electric motor is 5.0 min for 22 kw or lower and 10.0 min for 30 kW or higher.
5-3
Under
Function Data Factory Related
Name Data setting range operation
code Copy Default page
Change
F26 Motor sound 0.75 to 6 kHz ND: FRN0072 to 0203E2-4   2 5-61
(Carrier frequency) 0.75 to 10 kHz ND: FRN0059E2-4
HD: FRN0072 to 0203E2-4
HND: FRN0072 to 0203E2-4
HHD: FRN0203E2-4
0.75 to16 kHz HD: FRN0059E24
HND: FRN0059E2-4
HHD: FRN0059 to 0168E2-4
F27 (Tone) 0: Level 0 (Disable)   0
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
3: Level 3
F29 Terminal FM (Mode selection) 0: Voltage output (0 to +10 VDC)   0 5-62
1: Current output (4 to 20 mA DC)
3: Pulse output
F30 (Output gain) 0 to 300%   100
F31 (Function selection) 0: Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation)   0
1: Output frequency 2 (after slip compensation)
2: Output current
3: Output voltage
4: Output torque
5: Load factor
6: Consumed power
7: PID feedback value
9: DC intermediate circuit voltage
10: Universal AO
13: Motor output
14: Analog output test (+)
15: PID command (SV)
16: PID output (MV)
18: Inverter cooling fin temperature
111 to 115 Customizable logic output signal 1 to 5
F32 Terminal FM 2 (Mode selection) 0: Voltage output (0 to +10 VDC)   0
F33 Terminal FM (Pulse rate) 25 to 32000 p/s (number of pulse at 100%)   1440 5-62
F34 Terminal FM 2 *1 (Output gain) 0 to 300%   100
F35 (Function selection) Same as F31 (only 0 to 18 supported)   2
F37 Load selection/ Auto torque 0: Variable torque load x  1 5-65
boost/ Auto energy-saving 1: Constant torque load
operation 1 2: Auto torque boost
3: Auto energy-saving operation (variable torque load)
4: Auto energy-saving operation (constant torque load)
5: Auto energy-saving operation (auto torque boost)
F39 Stop frequency (Holding time) 0.00 to 10.00 s   0.00 5-67
F40 Torque limiter 1 (Drive) 0 to 300%; 999 (Disable)   999 5-68
F41 (Braking) 0 to 300%; 999 (Disable)   999
F42 Drive control selection 1 0: V/f control without slip compensation x  0 5-71
1: Vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector)
2: V/f control with slip compensation
F43 Current limiter (Mode selection) 0: Disable   2 5-73
1: Vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector)
2: At acceleration and constant speed (Disable at deceleration)
F44 (Operation level) 20 to 200% (inverter rated current standard value)   J:160,
ACEKT:130
F50 Electronic thermal 1 to 9000 kWs  12 OFF 5-74
(for braking resistor protection) OFF (Cancel)
(Discharging capacity)
F51 (Allowable average loss) 0.001 to 99.99 kW  12 0.001
F52 (Braking resistance value) 0.00: Resistance not required (FRENIC-Multi compatible operation)  12 0.00
0.01 to 999 Ω
F80 ND/HD/HND/HHD switching 0: HHD mode x  J:0 5-76
1: HND mode ACEKT:4
3: HD mode
4: ND mode
*1: F34 and F35 only exist for C model (for China).
5-4
 E code: Extension Terminal Functions (Terminal function)

Under
Function Related
code page
Change
E01 Terminal X1 (Function selection) 0 (1000): Select multi-frequency (0 to 1 steps) "SS1" x  0 5-77
E02 Terminal X2 1 (1001): Select multi-frequency (0 to 3 steps) "SS2" x  1
E05 Terminal X5 4 (1004): Select acceleration/deceleration (2 steps) "RT1" x  8
5 (1005): Select acceleration/deceleration (4 steps) "RT2"
6 (1006): Select self-hold "HLD"
7 (1007): Coast to a stop command "BX"
8 (1008): Alarm (Abnormal) reset "RST"
9 (1009): External alarm "THR"
(9 = Active OFF/ 1009 = Active ON)
10 (1010): Jogging operation "JOG"
11 (1011): Frequency setting 2/ Frequency setting 1 "Hz2/ Hz1"
12 (1012): Motor selection 2 "M2"
13: DC braking command "DCBRK"
14 (1014): Torque limit 2/ Torque limit 1 "TL2/ TL1"
15: Commercial power switching (50 Hz) "SW50"
FUNCTION CODE
17 (1017): UP command "UP"
18 (1018): DOWN command "DOWN"
19 (1019): Editing approval command (Data change enabled)
"WE-KP"
20 (1020): PID control cancel "Hz/PID"
21 (1021): Switch normal/ inverse operation "IVS"
22 (1022): Interlock "IL"
24 (1024): Select link operation (RS-485, BUS option) "LE"
25 (1025): Universal DI "U-DI"
Chap 5
26 (1026): Select starting mode "STM"
30 (1030): Force to stop "STOP"
(30 = Active OFF/1030 = Active ON)
33 (1033): PID Integer/Differential reset "PID-RST"
34 (1034): PID integer hold "PID-HLD"
35 (1035): Select local (Keypad) command "LOC"
46 (1046): Overload stop enable "OLS"
48: Pulse rate input (Only for X5 terminal (E05)) "PIN"
49 (1049): Pulse train sign "SIGN"
(Other than X5 terminal (E01 to E04))
65 (1065): Brake check “BRKE”
76 (1076): Select droop "DROOP"
80 (1080): Cancel customizable logic "CLC"
81 (1081): Clear all customizable logic timers "CLTC"
82 (1082): Anti-regenerative control cancel "AR-CCL"
100: No function assigned "NONE"
171 (1171): PID control multistage command 1 "PID-SS1"
* Inside the ( ) is the negative logic signal (OFF at short-circuit)
E10 Acceleration time2 0.00 to 6000 s   20.0 5-87
* 0.00 is for acceleration and deceleration time cancel (when
E11 Deceleration time2   20.0
performing soft-start and stop externally)
E12 Acceleration time 3   20.0
E13 Deceleration time 3   20.0
E14 Acceleration time 4   20.0
E15 Deceleration time 4   20.0
E16 Torque limiter 2 (Drive) 0 to 300%; 999 (Disable)   999 5-87
E17 (Braking) 0 to 300%; 999 (Disable)   999
E20 Terminal Y1 (Function selection) 0 (1000): During operation "RUN" x  0 5-87
E21 Terminal Y2 1 (1001): Frequency (speed) arrival "FAR" x  7
E27 Terminal 30A/B/C (Ry output) 2 (1002): Frequency (speed) detected "FDT" x  99
3 (1003): Undervoltage detected (inverter stopped) "LU"

4 (1004): Torque polarity detected "B/D"
5 (1005): Inverter output limiting "IOL"
6 (1006): Auto-restarting after momentary power failure "IPF"
7 (1007): Motor overload early warning signal "OL"
8 (1008) Keypad operation enabled "KP"
5-5
Under
Function Related
code page
Change
10 (1010): Inverter ready to run "RDY" 5-87
15 (1015): AX terminal function "AX"
16 (1016): Shift pattern operation stage "TU"
17 (1017): Complete pattern operation cycle operation "TO"
18 (1018): Pattern operation stage 1 "STG1"
21 (1021): Speed arrival 2 “FAR2”
22 (1022): Inverter output limiting with delay "IOL2"
25 (1025): Cooling Fan ON/OFF control "FAN"
26 (1026): Retrying "TRY"
27 (1027): Universal DO "U-DO"
28 (1028): Cooling fin overheat early warning "OH"
30 (1030): Lifetime alarm "LIFE"
31 (1031): Frequency (speed) detected 2 "FDT2"
33 (1033): Command loss detected "REF OFF"
35 (1035): Inverter outputting "RUN 2"
36 (1036) Overload prevention controlling "OLP"
37 (1037): Current detected "ID"
38 (1038): Current detected 2 "ID2"
39 (1039): Current detected 3 "ID3"
41 (1041): Low current detected "IDL"
42 (1042): PID alarm output "PID-ALM"
43 (1043): Under PID control "PID-CTL"
44 (1044): Motor stopped due to slow flow rate under PID control
"PID-STP"
45 (1045): Low torque detected "U-TL"
46 (1046): Torque detected 1 "TD1"
47 (1047): Torque detected 2 "TD2"
48 (1048): Motor 1 selected "SWM1"
49 (1049): Motor 2 selected "SWM2"
52 (1052): Running forward "FRUN"
53 (1053): Running reverse "RRUN"
54 (1054): During remote mode "RMT"
56 (1056): Thermistor detected "THM"
57 (1057): Brake signal "BRKS"
58 (1058): Frequency (speed) detected 3 "FDT3"
59 (1059): [C1] (C1 function) Terminal wire break detected "C1OFF"
72 (1072): Frequency (speed) arrival 3 "FAR3"
77 (1077): Low link bus voltage detection “U-EDC”
79 (1079): During decelerating at momentary power failure "iPF2"
84 (1084): Maintenance timer "MNT"
87 (1087): Frequency arrival AND frequency detected "FARFDT"
90 (1090): Alarm content 1 "AL1"
98 (1098): Light alarm "L-ALM"
99 (1099): Alarm output "ALM"
101 (1101): EN terminal detection circuit abnormal "DECF"
102 (1102): EN terminal OFF "ENOFF"
105 (1105): Braking transistor broken "DBAL"
111 (1111): Customizable logic output signal 1 "CLO1"
* Inside the ( ) is the negative logic signal. (OFF at short-circuit)

E29 Frequency arrival delay (FAR2) 0.01 to 10.00 s   0.10 5-97
E30 Frequency arrival detection width 0.0 to 10.0 Hz   2.5
(Detection width)
E31 Frequency detection 0.0 to 500.0 Hz   CE: 50.0, 5-99
(Operation level) JKT: 60.0
A: 200 V class
60.0
A: 400 V class
50.0
E32 (Hysteresis width) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz   1.0
5-6
Under
Function Related
code page
Change
E34 Overload Early Warning/Current 0.00 (Disable), 1 to 200% of inverter rated current  12 *3 5-99
detection (Inverter rated current dependent on F80)
(Operation level)
E35 (Timer time) 0.01 to 600.00 s   10.00
E36 Frequency detection 2 0.0 to 500.0 Hz   CE: 50.0, 5-100
A: 200 V class
60.0
A: 400 V class
50.0
E37 Current detection 2/ Low current 0.00 (Disable), 1 to 200% of inverter rated current  12 *3
detection (Inverter rated current dependent on F80)
(Operation level)
E38 (Timer time) 0.01 to 600.00 s   10.00
E39 Coefficient for constant rate sending 0.000 to 9.999   0.000 5-101
time
E42 LED Display Filter 0.0 to 5.0 s   0.5 5-101
E43 LED monitor (Item selection) 0: Speed monitor (Selectable with E48)   0 5-102
3: Output current
4: Output voltage
8: Calculated torque
9: Consumed power
10: PID command
FUNCTION CODE
12: PID feedback amount
13: Timer value
14: PID output
15: Load factor
16: Motor output
17: Analog signal input monitor
25: Input watt-hour
E44 (Display when stopped) 0: Display setting value 1: Display output value   0 5-103
E48 LED monitor detail 0: Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation)   0 5-103
(Speed monitor selection) 1: Output frequency 2 (after slip compensation)
2: Reference frequency
3: Motor rotation speed
Chap 5
4: Load rotation speed
5: Line speed
6: Constant rate sending time
7: Speed (%)
E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication 0.01 to 200.00   30.00 5-103
E51 Display Coefficient for Input 0.000 (Cancel/Reset). 0.001 to 9999   0.010
Watt-hour Data
E52 Keypad (Menu display mode) 0: Function code data setting mode (Menu 0, Menu1, and Menu 7)   0 5-104
1: Function code data check mode (Menu 2 and Menu 7)
2: Full-menu mode
E54 Frequency detection 3 0.0 to 500.0Hz   CE: 50.0, 5-104
A: 200 V class
60.0
A: 400V class
50.0
E55 Current detection 3 0.00 (Disable), 1 to 200% of inverter rated current  12 *3 5-104
(Operation level) (Inverter rated current dependent on F80)
E56 (Timer time) 0.01 to 600.00 s   10.00
E59 Terminal [C1] Function selection 0: Current input (C1 function)   0 5-105
1: Voltage input (V2 function)
E61 Terminal [12] 0: None x  0 5-106
(Extension function selection) 1: Auxiliary frequency setting 1
2: Auxiliary frequency setting 2 
E62 Terminal [C1] (C1 function) x 0
3: PID process command 1
E63 Terminal [C1] (V2 function) 5: PID feedback amount x  0
6: Ratio setting
7: Analog torque limiter A
8: Analog torque limiter B
20: Analog signal input monitor
E64 Saving of Digital Reference   0 5-106
0: Auto saving (main power is turned off) 1: Save by turning key
Frequency ON
E65 Reference loss detection 0: Stop deceleration, 20 to 120%, 999: Cancel   999 5-107
(Continue to run frequency)
E76 Direct current intermediate voltage 200 to 400 V (200 V class)   235 5-107
detection level 400 to 800 V (400 V class) 470
E78 Torque detection 1 0 to 300%   100 5-108
(Operation level)
E79 (Timer time) 0.01 to 600.00 s   10.00
E80 Torque detection 2/ Low torque 0 to 300%   20
detection
(Operation level)
E81 (Timer time) 0.01 to 600.00 s   20.00
5-7
Under
code copy Default page
Change
E98 Terminal FWD 0 (1000): Select multi-frequency (0 to 1 steps) "SS1" x  98 5-108
(Function selection)
E99 Terminal REV 1 (1001): Select multi-frequency (0 to 3 steps) "SS2" x  99
2 (1002): Select multi-frequency (0 to 7 steps) "SS4"
3 (1003): Select multi-frequency (0 to 15 steps) "SS8"
6 (1006): Select self-hold "HLD"
7 (1007): Free run command "BX"
8 (1008): Alarm (Abnormal) reset "RST"
9 (1009): External alarm "THR"
10 (1010): Jogging operation "JOG"
11 (1011): Frequency setting 2/ Frequency setting 1 "Hz2/ Hz1"
12 (1012): Motor selection 2 "M2"
13: DC braking command "DCBRK"
14 (1014): Torque limit 2/ Torque limit 1 "TL2/ TL1"
17 (1017): UP command "UP"
18 (1018): DOWN command "DOWN"
19 (1019): Editing approval command (Data change enabled)
"WE-KP"
20 (1020): PID control cancel "Hz/PID"
21 (1021): Switch normal/ inverse operation "IVS"
22 (1022): Interlock "IL"
24 (1024): Select link operation (RS-485, BUS option) "LE"
25 (1025): Universal DI "U-DI"
26 (1026): Select starting mode "STM"
30 (1030): Force to stop "STOP"
33 (1033): PID Integer/Differential reset "PID-RST"
34 (1034): PID integer hold "PID-HLD"
35 (1035): Select local (Keypad) command "LOC"
46 (1046): Overload stop enable "OLS"
49 (1049): Pulse train sign "SIGN"
65 (1065): Brake check "BRAKE"
76 (1076): Select droop "DROOP"
80 (1080): Cancel customizable logic "CLC"
81 (1081): Clear all customizable logic timers "CLTC"
82 (1082): Anti-regenerative control cancel "AR-CCL"
98: Run forward stop command "FWD"
99: Run reverse stop command "REV"
100: No function assigned "NONE"
5-8
 C code: Control Functions of Frequency (Control function)

Under
Change
C01 Jump frequency 1 0.0 to 500.0Hz   0.0 5-109
C02 2   0.0
C03 3   0.0
C04 (Width) 0.0 to 30.0Hz   3.0
C05 Multi-frequency 1 0.00 to 500.00Hz   0.00
C06 2   0.00
C07 3   0.00
C08 4   0.00
C09 5   0.00
C10 6   0.00
C11 7   0.00
C12 8   0.00
C13 9   0.00
C14 10   0.00
C15 11   0.00
C16 12   0.00
FUNCTION CODE
C17 13   0.00
C18 14   0.00
C19 15   0.00
C20 Jogging Frequency 0.00 to 500.00 Hz   0.00 5-110
C21 Pattern operation selection/ 0: 1 cycle operation x  0 5-111
Timer operation 1: Repetition operation
(Select openmin) 2: Constant speed operation after 1 cycle operation
3: Timer operation
C22 (Stage 1) Special setting: Press key three times.  
C23 (Stage 2) 1st: Set run time 0.0 to 6000 s and press key.  
Chap 5
C24 (Stage 3) 2nd: Set rotational direction F (forward) or r (reverse) and   1st: 0.00
press key. 2nd: F
C25 (Stage 4)  
3rd: Set acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 4 and press key. 3rd: 1
C26 (Stage 5)  
C27 (Stage 6)  
C28 (Stage 7)  
C30 Frequency setting 2 0: Keypad / key operation x  2 5-113
1: Analog voltage input (Terminal [12]) (from 0 to ±10 VDC)
2: Analog current input (Terminal [C1] (C1 function)) (4 to 20mA
DC)
3: Analog voltage input (Terminal [12]) + Analog current input
(Terminal [C1] (C1 function))
5: Analog voltage input (Terminal [C1] (V2 function)) (0 to 10 VDC)
7: UP DOWN control
(With balances bumpless)
10: Pattern operation
12: Pulse train input
C31 Analog input adjustment -5.0 to 5.0%   0.0 5-114
(Terminal [12] )
(Offset)
C32 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00%   100.0
C33 (Filter) 0.00 to 5.00 s   0.05
C34 (Gain base point) 0.00 to 100.00%   100.0
C35 (Polarity selection) 0: Bipolar 1: Single polarity x  1
C36 Analog input adjustment -5.0 to 5.0%   0.0
(Offset)
C37 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00%   100.0
C38 (Filter) 0.00 to 5.00 s   0.05
C40 Terminal [C1] (C1 function) 0: 4 to 20 mA Single polarity x  0
Range selection 1: 0 to 20 mA Single polarity
10: 4 to 20 mA Bipolar
11: 0 to 20 mA Bipolar
C41 Analog input adjustment -5.0 to 5.0%   0.0
(Terminal [C1] (V2 function))
(Offset)
C42 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00%   100.0
C43 (Filter) 0.00 to 5.00 s   0.05
C45 (Polarity selection) 0: Bipolar 1: Single polarity x  1
C50 Bias (for frequency setting 1) 0.00 to 100.00%   0.00 5-116
(Bias base point)
C53 Selection of normal/inverse 0: Normal 1: Inverse   0 5-117
operation (Frequency setting 1)
5-9
Under
Change
C55 Analog input adjustment -100.00 to 100.00%   0.00 5-114
(Terminal 12)
(Bias)
C56 (Bias base point) 0.00 to 100.00 %   0.00
C58 (Display unit) * Same as J105 (However ,Setting range is, 1 to 80)   2 5-117
C59 (Maximum scale) -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00   100
C60 (Minimum scale) -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00   0.00
C61 Analog input adjustment -100.00 to 100.00 %   0.00 5-114
(Bias)
C64 (Display unit) * Same as J105 (However ,Setting range is, 1 to 80)   2 5-114
C67 Analog input adjustment -100.00 to 100.00 %   0.00 5-114
(Bias)
C70 (Display unit) * Same as J105 (However ,Setting range is,1 to 80)   2 5-117
C89 Frequency compensation 1 by -32768 to 32767 (Keypad display is 8000 to 7FFFH)   0001 -
(Numerator) (Interpreted as 1 when the value is set to 0)
C90 Frequency compensation 2 by -32768 to 32767 (Keypad display is 8000 to 7FFFH)   0001 -
(Denominator) (Interpreted as 1 when the value is set to 0)
5-10
 P code: Motor 1 Parameters (Motor 1 parameter)

Under
Change
P01 Motor 1 (No. of poles) 2 to 22 poles x 12 4 5-115
P02 (Capacitance) 0.01 to 1000 kW (At P99 = 0 or 4) x 12 *6
0.01 to 1000 HP (At P99 = 1)
P03 (Rated current) 0.00 to 2000A x 12 *6
P04 (Auto-tuning) 0: Disable x X 0 5-116
1: Stop tuning (%R1, %X, Rated slip frequency)
2: Rotation tuning for V/f control (%R1, %X, Rated slip frequency,
No-load current, %X correction factor 1)
P05 (Online tuning) 0: Disable 1: Action   0 5-117
P06 (No-load current) 0.00 to 2000A x 12 *6
P07 (%R1) 0.00 to 50.00%  12 *6
P08 (%X) 0.00 to 50.00%  12 *6
P09 (Slip compensation gain for 0.0 to 200.0%   100.0 5-118
driving)
P10 (Slip compensation response 0.01 to 10.00 s  12 0.5
time)
P11 (Slip compensation gain for 0.0 to 200.0%   100.0
braking)
FUNCTION CODE
P12 (Rated slip frequency) 0.00 to 15.00Hz x 12 *6
P13 (Iron loss factor 1) 0.00 to 20.00%  12 *6
P53 (%X correction factor 1) 0 to 300%  12 100
P99 Motor 1 selection 0: Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard motors, 8-series) x 12 0 5-119
1: Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating motors)
4: Other motors

*6 Constant of motor is set per capacitance. Refer to table B.
Chap 5
5-11
 H code: High Performance Functions (High level function)

Under
Change
H03 Data initialization 0: Manual setting value x x 0 5-120
1: Initial value (factory default value)
2: Initialize motor 1 parameters
3: Initialize motor 2 parameters
11: Limited initialization (Initialization excluding communication
function code)
12: Limited initialization (initialize customizable logic)
H04 Retry (Count) 0: Disable, 1 to 20: Number of retries   0 5-121
H05 (Interval) 0.5 to 20.0 s   5.0
H06 Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control 0: Disable (Alway Fan ON)   0 5-122
1: Enable (ON/OFF control effective)
H07 Curve acceleration/deceleration 0: Disable (Linear acceleration/deceleration)   0 5-123
1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration (Weak)
2: S-curve acceleration/deceleration (Arbitrary: According to H57
to H60)
3: Curve acceleration/deceleration
H08 Rotational Direction Limitation 0: Disable x  0
1: Enable (Reverse rotation inhibited)
2: Enable (Forward rotation inhibited)
H09 Starting Mode (Auto search) 0: Disable x  0 5-125
1: Enable (Only at restart after momentary power failure)
2: Enable (At normal start and at restart after momentary power
failure)
H11 Deceleration Mode 0: Normal deceleration 1: Coast to a stop   0
H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent 0: Disable 1: Enable   1
Limiting
(Mode selection)
H13 Momentary power failure restart 0.1 to 20.0 s  12 *2
(Interval)
H14 (Frequency lowering rate) 0.00: Selected deceleration time, 0.01 to 100.00Hz/s,   999
999 (According to current limiter)
H15 (Continue to run level) 200 to 300V: (200 V class)  2: 235
400 to 600V: (400V class) 470
H16 (Allowable momentary power 0.0 to 30.0s, 999 (Auto judge by inverter)   999
failure time)
H26 Thermistor (for motor) 0: Disable   0 5-126
(Mode selection) 1: PTC: 0h4 trip and stop the inverter
2: PTC: Output the output signal "THM" and continue to run
H27 (Operation level) 0.00 to 5.00 V   1.60
H28 Droop control -60.0 to 0.0Hz   0.0 5-127
H30 Link Function (Mode selection) Frequency command Run command   0 5-128
0: F01/C30 F02
1: RS-485 communication (Port 1) F02
2: F01/C30 RS-485 Communication (Port 1)
3: RS-485 Communication (Port 1) RS-485 Communication (Port 1)
4: RS-485 Communication (Port 2) F02
6: F01/C30 RS-485 Communication (Port 2)
H42 Capacitance of DC link bus For adjustment at replacement (0000 to FFFF (in hexadecimal))  x - 5-130
capacitor
H43 Cumulative run time of cooling For adjustment at replacement  x -
fan Displays the cumulative run time of cooling fan in units of ten hours.
H44 Startup Count for Motor 1 For adjustment at replacement (0000 to FFFF (in hexadecimal))  x - 5-133
H45 Mock AlarmMock alarm 0: Disable  x 0
1: Occurrence of mock Alarm
H46 Starting Mode 0.1 to 20.0 s  12 *6
(Auto search delay time 2)
H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus For adjustment at replacement (0000 to FFF (in hexadecimal))  x - 5-134
capacitor
H48 Printed circuit board capacitor For adjustment at replacement Change in cumulative motor run  x -
cumulative run time time (Reset is enabled)
(in units of ten hours)
H49 Starting Mode 0.0 to 10.0 s   0.0 5-135
(Auto search delay time 1)
H50 Non-linear V/f1 (Frequency) 0.0 (Cancel), 0.1 to 500.0 Hz x  0.0
H51 (Voltage) 0 to 240 V: AVR operation ( 200 V class) x 2: 0
H52 Non-linear V/f2 0.0 (Cancel), 0.1 to 500.0 Hz x  0.0
(Frequency)
H53 (Voltage) 0 to 240V: AVR operation ( 200V class) x 2: 0
H54 Acceleration Time 0.00 to 6000 s   20.0
(Jogging operation)
H55 Deceleration Time 0.00 to 6000 s   20.0
(Jogging operation)
H56 Deceleration Time for Forced 0.00 to 6000 s   20.0
Stop
*6 Rated current of motor is set per capacitance. Refer to table B.
5-12
Under
Change
H57 1st S-curve acceleration range 0 to 100%   10 5-134
(At the start)
H58 2nd S-curve acceleration range 0 to 100%   10
(At the end)
H59 1st S-curve deceleration range 0 to 100%   10
(At the start)
H60 2nd S-curve deceleration range 0 to 100%   10
(At the end)
H61 UP/DOWN control initial value 0: Initial value is 0.00 Hz x  1
setting 1: Initial value is set frequency with UP/DOWN command right
before there is no more run command.
H63 Low limiter 0: Lower limit is F16: Continuous to run with limitation by frequency   0
(Mode selection) limiter (lower limit)
1: Lower limit is F16: Stop deceleration at or below the frequency
limiter (lower limit)
H64 (Minimum frequency during 0.0: F16: 0.1 to 60.0 Hz dependent on frequency limiter (lower   1.6
limiting operation) limit)
H65 Non-linear V/f Pattern 3 0.0 (Cancel), 0.1 to 500.0 Hz x  0.0
(Frequency)
H66 (Voltage) 0 to 240V: AVR operation ( 200V class) x 2: 0
FUNCTION CODE
H68 Slip Compensation 1 0: Enable during acceleration/deceleration, enable at base x  0 5-135
(Operating conditions selection) frequency or higher
1: Disable during acceleration/deceleration, enable at base
frequency or higher
2: Enable during acceleration/deceleration, disable at base
frequency or higher
3: Disable during acceleration/deceleration, disable at base
frequency or higher
H69 Anti-regenerative control 0: Disable   0
(Mode selection) 2: Torque control (Force to stop after elapse of three times of
deceleration time)
Chap 5
3: DC intermediate voltage control (Force to stop after elapse of
three times of deceleration time)
4: Torque control (Disable force to stop processing)
5: DC intermediate voltage control (Disable force to stop
processing)
H70 Overload prevention control 0.00: Comply with the selected deceleration time   999 5-136
0.01 to 100.00 Hz/s, 999 (Cancel)
H71 Deceleration characteristics 0: Disable 1: Enable   0
H72 Detected the main power 0: Disable 1: Enable   1
shoutdown (Mode selection)
H76 Torque limiter (Braking) 0.0 to 500.0Hz   5.0 5-137
(Frequency increment limit
for braking)
H77 Life of main circuit capacitor 0 to 8760 (in units of ten hours)  x -
(Time remaining before the
end of life)
H78 Maintenance Interval (M1) 0 (Disable): 1 to 9999 (in units of ten hours)  x J:8760
ACEKT:6132
H79 Preset Startup Count for OFF (Disable): 0001 to FFFF (in hexadecimal)  x OFF 5-138
Maintenance (M1)
H80 Output current fluctuation 0.00 to 1.00   0.20
damping Gain for Motor 1
H81 Light Alarm Selection 1 0000 to FFFF (in hexadecimal)   0000 5-139
H82 Light Alarm Selection 2 0000 to FFFF (in hexadecimal)   0000
H89 Reserved for particular 0.1   1 5-141
manufacturers
H90 Reserved for particular 0.1   0
manufacturers
H91 PID feedback wire break 0.0 (Alarm disable): 0.1 to 60.0 s   0.0 5-142
H92 Continue to run (P) 0.000 to 10.000 times; 999  12 999
H93 (I) 0.010 to 10.000 s; 999  12 999
H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 0 to 9999 x x - 5-137
Change in cumulative motor run time (Reset is enabled) (in units of 5-142
10 hours)
H95 DC Braking 0: Slow response   1 5-55
(Braking response mode) 1: Quick response 5-142
H96 STOP Key Priority/ 0: STOP key priority disable/ Start check function disable   0 5-142
Start Check Function 1: STOP key priority enable/ Start check function disable
2: STOP key priority disable/ Start check function enable
3: STOP key priority enable/ Start check function enable
H97 Clear Alarm Data 0: Disable  x 0 5-143
1: Alarm data clear (Automatically return to 0 after clearing data)
5-13
Under
Change
H98 Protection/Maintenance Function 0 to 255   FRN0059, 5-143
(Mode selection) (Data is displayed in decimal, Meaning of each bit 0: Disable; 1
Enable) 0072E2S-4□
Bit 0: Lower the carrier frequency automatically (0: Disable; 1: : 83
Enable)
Bit 1: Input phase loss protection (0: Disable; 1: Enable) FRN0085 to
Bit 2: Output phase loss protection (0: Disable; 1: Enable)
Bit 3 Main circuit capacitor life judgment selection 0203E2S-4□
(0: Factory default referenced; 1 User measurement :19
value standard)
Bit 4: Judge the life of main circuit capacitor (0: Disable; 1:
Enable)
Bit 5: Detect DC fan lock (0: Enable; 1: Disable)
Bit 6: Braking transistor error detection (22 kW or below)
(0: Disable; 1: Enable)
H114 Anti-regenerative control (Operation 0.0 to 50.0%, 999: disabled   999 5-145
level)
H180 Brake signal (Brake Operation 0.00 to 10.00 s   0.00
check time)
H195 DC braking (Braking time at the 0.00 (Disable): 0.01 to 30.00 s   0.00 5-55
startup) 5-145
5-14
 A code: Motor 2 Parameters (Motor 2 parameter)

Under
Change
A01 Maximum output frequency 2 25.0 to 500.0Hz x  CE: 50.0, JKT:
60.0 A: 200 V
class 60.0 A:
400V class
50.0
A02 Base frequency 2 25.0 to 500.0Hz x  CEJKT:50.0,
A: 200 V class
60.0 A: 400V
class 50.0
A03 Base frequency voltage 2 0: AVR disable (output voltage proportional to power x 2: TJK:200/400
voltage) A: 220/415,
80 to 240V: AVR operation ( 200V class) C: 200/380
160 to 500V: AVR operation ( 400V class) E: 230/400
A04 Maximum output voltage 2 80 to 240V: AVR operation ( 200V class) x 2:
A05 Torque boost 2 0.0 to 20.0% (% value against base frequency voltage 2)   *2
A06 Electronic thermal 2 1: Enable (For a general-purpose motor with self-cooling fan)   1
(for motor protection) 2: Enable (For an inverter-driven motor (FV) with separately
(Characteristics selection) powered cooling fan)
 12
FUNCTION CODE
A07 (Operation level) 0.00 (disable), current value of 1 to 135% of inverter rated current *3
A08 (Thermal time constant) 0.5 to 75.0 min   *4
A09 DC braking 2 0.0 to 60.0Hz   0.0
(Braking starting frequency)
A10 (Operation level) 0 to 100% (HHD mode), 0 to 80% (HD/HND mode)   0
0 to 60% (ND mode)
A11 (Braking time) 0.00 (Disable): 0.01 to 30.00 s   0.00
A12 Starting Frequency 2 0.0 to 60.0Hz   0.5
A13 Select load/ 0: Variable torque load x  1
Auto torque boost/ 1: Constant torque load
Chap 5
Auto energy-saving operation 2 2: Auto torque boost
3: Auto energy-saving operation (variable torque load)
4: Auto energy-saving operation (constant torque load)
5: Auto energy-saving operation (auto torque boost)
A14 Drive control selection 2 0: V/f control without slip compensation x  0
1: Vector control without speed sensor (Dynamic torque vector
control)
2: V/f control with slip compensation
A15 Motor 2 (No. of poles) 2 to 22 poles x 12 4
A16 (Capacitance) 0.01 to 1000 kW (At P39 = 0 to 4) x 12 *6
0.01 to 1000 HP (At P39 = 1)
A17 (Rated current) 0.00 to 2000A x 12 *6
A18 (Auto-tuning) 0: Disable x x 0
1: Stop tuning (%R1, %X, Rated slip frequency)
2: Rotation tuning for V/f control (%R1, %X, Rated slip frequency,
No-load current, %X correction factor 1)
A19 (Online tuning) 0: Disable 1: Enable   0
A20 (No-load current) 0.00 to 2000A x 12 *6
A21 (%R1) 0.00 to 50.00%  12 *6
A22 (%X) 0.00 to 50.00%  12 *6
A23 (Slip compensation gain for 0.0 to 200.0%   100.0
driving)
A24 (Slip compensation response 0.01 to 10.00 s  12 0.50
time)
A25 (Slip compensation gain for 0.0 to 200.0%   100.0
braking)
A26 (Rated slip frequency) 0.00 to 15.00Hz x 12 *6
A27 (Iron loss factor 1) 0.00 to 20.00%  12 *6
A39 Motor 2 Selection 0: Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard motors, 8-series) x 12 0
1: Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating motors)
4: Other motors
A40 Slip Compensation 2 0: Enable during acceleration/deceleration, enable at base x  0
(Operating conditions selection) frequency or higher
1: Disable during acceleration/deceleration, enable at base
frequency or higher
2: Enable during acceleration/deceleration, disable at base
frequency or higher
3: Disable during acceleration/deceleration, disable at base
frequency or higher
A41 Output Current Fluctuation 0.00 to 1.00   0.20
Damping Gain for Motor 2
A51 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 0 to 9999 x x -
Change in cumulative motor run time (Reset is enabled) (in units of
10 hours)
A52 Startup Counter for Motor 2 For adjustment at replacement (0000 to FFF (in hexadecimal))  x -
A53 (%X correction factor 1) 0 to 300%  12 100
A98 Motor 2 (Function selection) 0 to 255 x  0 5-147
(Data is displayed in decimal, Meaning of each bit 0: Disable; 1
Enable)
bit0 : Current control (F43, F44) (0: Disable; 1: Enable)
bit1 : Rotational direction control (H08) (0: Disable; 1: Enable)
5-15
Under
Change
bit2 : Non-linear V/f (H50 to H53, H65, H66) (0: Disable; 1: Enable)
bit3 : PID control (J01 to J62, H91) (0: Disable; 1: Enable)
bit4 : Brake signal (0: Disable; 1: Enable)
bit5 : Braking time at the Startup (H195)(0: Disable; 1: Enable)
Bit6 to 7: Empty
*4 Standard applicable electric motor is 5.0 min for 22 kw or lower and 10.0 min for 30 kW or higher.
*6 Rated current of motor is set per capacitance. Refer to table B.
5-16
 J code: Application Functions 1 (Application function 1)

Under
Change
J01 PID control 0: Disable x  - 5-148
(Mode selection) 1: For process (normal operation)
2: For process (inverse operation)
3: Speed control (Dancer)
J02 (Remote command) 0: Keypad key operation ( / key) x  – 5-149
1: PID process command 1 (Analog input: Terminals 12, C1 and
V2)
3: UP/DOWN
4: Communication
J03 P (Gain) 0.000 to 30.000 times   0.100 5-155
J04 I (Integral time) 0.0 to 3600.0 s   0.0
J05 D (Differential time) 0.00 to 600.00 s   0.00
J06 (Feedback filter) 0.0 to 900.0 s *1   0.5
J10 (Anti-reset windup) 0 to 200%   200 5-158
J11 (Select alarm output) 0: Absolute-value alarm   0
1: Absolute-value alarm (with Hold)
2: Absolute-value alarm (with Latch)
3: Absolute-value alarm (with Hold and Latch)
4: Deviation alarm
FUNCTION CODE
5: Deviation alarm (with Hold)
6: Deviation alarm (with Latch)
7: Deviation alarm (with Hold and Latch)
J12 (Upper limit warning (AH)) -100% to 100%   100
J13 (Lower limit warning (AL)) -100% to 100%   0
J15 (Stop frequency for slow flow 0.0 (Disable): 1.0 to 500.0 Hz   0.0 5-160
rate)
J16 (Slow flow rate level stop 0 to 60 s   30
latency)
J17 (Starting Frequency) 0.0 to 500.0Hz   0.0
Chap 5
J18 (PID output limiter Upper limit) -150% to 150% ; 999 (Conform to F15)   999 5-161
J19 (PID output limiter Lower limit) -150% to 150% ; 999 (Conform to F16)   999
J23 (Startup feedback difference 0.0 to 100.0%   0.0 5-160
at stop frequency for slow flow
rate)
J24 (Startup delay time at stop 0 to 3600 s   0
frequency for slow flow rate)
J57 (Dancer reference position) -100 to 0 to 100%   0 5-162
J58 (Dancer reference position 0: Cancel PID constant switch   0
detection width) 1 to 100%: Manual setting value
J59 P (Gain) 2 0.000 to 30.000 times   0.100
J60 I (Integral time) 2 0.0 to 3600.0 s   0.0
J61 D (Differential time) 2 0.00 to 600.00 s   0.00
J62 (PID control block selection) 0 to 3 x  0
bit0: PID output characteristics
0=Plus (Addition); 1=Minus (Subtraction)
bit1: Select output ratio compensation
0=Correction amount is ratio compensation (Ratio against
primary speed)
1=Correction amount is speed command correction (Ratio
against the maximum frequency)
J63 Overload stop (Detected value) 0: Torque, 1: Current   0
J64 (Detection level) 20 to 200%   100
J63 (Operation selection) 0: No operation   0
1: Stop after deceleration
2: Free run
J66 (Operation mode) 0: During constant speed running & deceleration   0
1: During constant speed running
2: All modes
J67 (Timer time) 0.00 to 600.00 s   0.00
J68 Brake Signal 0.00 to 300.00%   100.0 5-164
(Brake-OFF current)
J69 (Brake-OFF frequency/speed) 0.0 to 25.0 Hz   1.0
J70 (Brake-OFF timer) 0.00 to 5.00 s   1.00
J71 (Brake-ON frequency/speed) 0.0 to 25.0 Hz   1.0
J72 (Brake-ON timer) 0.00 to 5.00 s   1.00
*1 Perform it at 0.1 or below if J01 = 3 (dancer control).
5-17
Under
Change
J105 PID control (Display unit) 0 to 80 x  0 5-165
0: based on unit/scale of PID control feedback value
1: No unit
2: %
4: r/min
7: kW
[Flow rate]
20: m3/s
21: m3/min
22: m3/h
23: L/s
24: L/min
25: L/h
[Pressure]
40: Pa
41: kPa
42: MPa
43: mbar
44: bar
45: mmHg
46: psi PSI (Square inch per weight pound)
47: mWG
48: inWG
[Temperature]
60: K
61: °C
62: °F
[Concentration]
80: ppm
J106 (Maximum scale) -999.0 to 0.00 to 9990 x  100
J107 (Minimum scale) x  0.00
J136 (Multistage command 1) -999.0 to 0.00 to 9990   0.00
J137 (Multistage command 2)   0.00
J138 (Multistage command 3)   0.00
5-18
 d code: Application Functions 2 (Application function 2)

Under
Change
d51 For manufacturer *9 0 to 500 x  20 5-166
d52 For manufacturer *9 0 to 500 x  20
d55 For manufacturer *9 0000 to 00FF (Display in hexadecimal) x  0000
d61 Command pulse 0.000 to 5.000 s   0.005
(Filter time constant)
d62 (Pulse correction factor 1) 1 to 9999   1
d63 (Pulse correction factor 2) 1 to 9999   1
d69 For manufacturer *9 30.0 to 100.0Hz   30.0 ―
d91 For manufacturer *9 0.00 to 2.00, 999   999 5-160
d99 Extension function 1 0 to 15   0
Bit 0: For manufacturer *9
Bit 3: JOG operation from communication (0: Disable; 1: Enable)
*9 This is function code for manufacturer. Do not change the code.
FUNCTION CODE
Chap 5
5-19
 U code: Application Functions 3 (Customizable logic)

Under
Change
U00 Customizable logic 0: Disable 1: Enable (Customizable logic operation)   0 5-169
(Mode selection) ECL alarm occurs when the value is changed from 1 to 0 during
operation.
U01 Customizable logic: Step 1 [Digital] x  0
(Block selection) 0: No function assigned
10 to 15: Through output + General-purpose timer
20 to 25: ANDing + General-purpose timer
30 to 35: ORing + General-purpose timer
40 to 45: XORing + General-purpose timer
50 to 55: Set priority flip-flop + General-purpose timer
60 to 65: Reset priority flip-flop + General-purpose timer
70, 72, 73: Rising edge detector + General-purpose timer
80, 82, 83: Falling edge detector + General-purpose timer
90, 92, 93: Rising & falling edges detector + General-purpose timer
100 to 105: Hold + General-purpose timer
110: Increment counter
120: Decrement counter
130: Timer with reset input
General-purpose timer function (Least significant digit 0 to 5)
_0: No timer
_1: On-delay timer
_2: Off-delay timer
_3: Pulse (1 shot)
_4: Retriggerable timer
_5 Pulse train output
[Analog]
2001: Addition
2002: Subtraction
2003: Multiplication
2004: Division
2005: Limiter
2006: Absolute value
2007: Negative addition
2008: Variable limiter
2009: Linear addition
2051 to 2056: Comparison 1 to 6
2071, 2072 Window comparison 1, 2
2101: Maximum selection
2102: Minimum selection
2103: Average
2151: Function code
2201: Scale reverse conversion
2202: Scale conversion
3001 to 3002: Conversion 1 to 2
[Digital, Analog]
4001: Hold
4002: Negative addition switch
4003, 4004: Selection 1, 2
4005: LPS(Low-pass filter)
4006: Change rate limit
5000: Selection 3
5001 to 5014: Selection 3-1 to 14
5100: Selection 4
5101 to 5114: Selection 4-1 to 14
6001: Read function code
6002: Write function code
6003 : Selection 5
6101 : PID dancer output gain frequency
U02 Customizable logic: Step 1 [Digital] x  100
(Input 1) 0 to 105: The same as E20. However, 27, 111 to 115 cannot be
selected
U03 (Input 2) 2001 to 2100 (3001 to 3100): x  100
Output of Step 1 to 100 "SO01" to"SO100"
4001 (5001): X1 terminal input signal "X1"
4010 (5010): FWD terminal input signal "FWD"
4011 (5011): REV terminal input signal "REV"
6000 (7000): Final run command RUN "FL_RUN"
6001 (7001): Final run command FWD "FL_FWD"
6002 (7002): Final run command REV "FL_REV"
6003 (7003): Accelerating "DACC"
6004 (7004): Decelerating "DDEC"
6005 (7005): Under anti-regenerative control "REGA"
6006 (7006): Within dancer reference position "DR_REF"
6007 (7007): With/without alarm factor "ALM_ACT"
5-20
Under
Change
[Analog] 5-169
8000 to 8018 : The value with 8000 added to F31
9001: Analog 12 terminal input signal [12]
9002: Analog C1 terminal input signal [C1] (C1 function)
9003: Analog V2 terminal input signal [C1] (V2 function)
U04 (Function 1) -9990 to 0.00 to 9990 x  0.00
U05 (Function 2) x  0.00
Customizable logic Step 1 to 14 function code is assigned as follows: Setting value is the same as U01 to U05.
Step1 Step2 Step3 Step4 Step5 Step6 Step7 Step8 Step9 Step10
Logic circuit U01 U06 U11 U16 U21 U26 U31 U36 U41 U46
Input 1 U02 U07 U12 U17 U22 U27 U32 U37 U42 U47
Input 2 U03 U08 U13 U18 U23 U28 U33 U38 U43 U48
Function 1 U04 U09 U14 U19 U24 U29 U34 U39 U44 U49
Function 2 U05 U10 U15 U20 U25 U30 U35 U40 U45 U50
Step11 Step12 Step13 Step14
Logic circuit U51 U56 U61 U66
Input 1 U52 U57 U62 U67
Input 2 U53 U58 U63 U68
Function 1 U54 U59 U64 U69
Function 2 U55 U60 U65 U70
FUNCTION CODE
Under
Change
U71 Customizable logic 0: Disable x  0 5-169
Output signal 1 1 to 100: Output of Step 1 to 100 "S001" to "S0100"
(Output selection)
Chap 5
U72 Output signal 2 x  0
U81 Customizable logic 0 to 172 (1000 to 1172): Same as E01 x  100
Output signal 1 8001 to 8018: The value with 8000 added to E61
U91 Customizable logic x x 0
0: Monitor disable
Timer monitor
1 to 100: Step 1 to 100
(Step selection)
U92 Customizable logic operation -9.999 to 9.999 x  0.000
coefficient
(Mantissa of KA1)
U93 (Exponent part of KA1) -5 to 5 x  0
U94 (Mantissa of KB1) -9.999 to 9.999 x  0.000
U95 (Exponent part of KB1) -5 to 5 x  0
U96 (Mantissa of KC1) -9.999 to 9.999 x  0.000
U97 (Exponent part of KC1) -5 to 5 x  0
5-21
Under
Change
U100 Task process cycle setting 0: Auto select from 2, 5, or 10 ms depending on the number of steps x  0 5-169
2: 2 ms (Up to 10 step)
5: 5 ms (Up to 50 step)
10: 10 ms (Up to 100 step)
U101 Customizable logic   0.00 5-169
Operating point of customizable -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00 5-189
logic reduction 1 (X1)
U102 Operating point of customizable
logic reduction 1 (Y1)
U107 Auto calculation of customizable 0: Disable x  0
logic reduction coefficient 1. Execute calculation (Reduction 1)
U121 Customizable logic
-9990.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00   0.00 5-169
(User parameter 1)
U122 (User parameter 2)   0.00
-9990.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00   0.00
(Memory area 1)
U172 (Memory area 2)   0.00
U173 (Memory area 3)   0.00
15 to 100  x 15
Setting Step (Step number)
U191 Setting Step (Select circuit) Same as U01 x x 0
U192 Setting Step (Input 1) Same as U02 x x 100
U193 Setting Step (Input 2) Same as U03 x x 100
U194 Setting Step (Function 1) Same as U04 x x 0.00
U195 Setting Step (Function 2) Same as U05 x x 0.00
0 to 9999 - - -
ROM version (Monitor)
0 to 9999 x  0
ROM version (For User setting)
5-22
 y code: LINK Functions (Link function)

Under
Change
y01 RS-485 setting 1 1 to 255 x  1 5-194
(Station address)
y02 (Mode selection upon 0: Immediate er8 trip   0
occurrence of an error) 1: er8 trip after timer time operation
2: Retry communication during timer time operation and perform
er8 trip if communication cannot be recovered. When
communication is recovered, continue to run.
3: Continue to run
y03 (Timer time) 0.0 to 60.0 s   2.0
y04 (Transmission speed) 0: 2400 bps   3
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
y05 (Data length selection) 0: 8 bits 1: 7 bits   0
y06 (Parity bit selection) 0: None (Stop bit: 2 bits)   0
1: Even number parity (Stop bit: 1 bits)
2: Odd number parity (Stop bit: 1 bits)
3: None (Stop bit: 1 bits)
FUNCTION CODE
y07 (Stop bit selection) 0: 2 bits 1: 1 bit   0
y08 (Communication failure   0
0: No detection 1 to 60 s
detection time)
y09 (Response interval time) 0.00 to 1.00 s   0.01
y10 (Protocol selection) 0: Modbus RTU protocol   1
1: SX protocol (Loader protocol)
2: Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol
y11 RS-485 setting 2 1 to 255 x  1
(Station address)
y12 (Mode selection upon 0: Immediate erp trip   0
Chap 5
occurrence of an error) 1: erp trip after timer time operation
2: Retry communication during timer time operation and perform
erp trip if communication cannot be recovered. When
communication is recovered, continue to run.
3: Continue to run
y13 (Timer time) 0.0 to 60.0 s   2.0
y14 (Transmission speed) 0: 2400 bps   3
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
y15 (Data length selection) 0: 8 bits 1: 7 bits   0
y16 (Parity bit selection) 0: None (Stop bit: 2 bits)   0
1: Even number parity (Stop bit: 1 bits)
2: Odd number parity (Stop bit: 1 bits)
3: None (Stop bit: 1 bits)
y17 (Stop bit selection) 0: 2 bits 1: 1 bit   0
y18 (Communication failure   0
0: No detection 1 to 60 s
detection time)
y19 (Response interval time) 0.00 to 1.00 s   0.01
y20 (Protocol selection) 0: Modbus RTU protocol   0
1: SX protocol (Loader protocol)
2: Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol
y21 Set embedded CAN x  1 5-197
1 to 127
(Station address)
y24 (Transmission speed) 0: 125kbps   0
1: 20kbit/s
2: 50kbit/s
3: 125kbit/s
4: 250kbit/s
5: 500kbit/s
6: 800kbit/s
7: 1Mbit/s
y25 (Assign write function code 1) 0000 to FFFF (in hexadecimal) x  0000
y26 (Assign write function code 2) Data mapped I/O (Write) x  0000
y27 (Assign write function code 3) x  0000
5-23
Under
Change
y33 Set embedded CAN 0: Disable x  0 5-197
(Mode selection) 1: Enable
y34 (Mode selection in the event 0 to 15   0
of transmission abnormal 0: Upon occurrence of communication error, immediately perform
situation) ert trip.
1: After timer time operation from occurrence of communication
error, immediately perform ert trip.
2: Upon occurrence of communication error, communication
cannot be recovered by communication retry during timer time
operation, immediately perform ert trip.
3: Even if communication error occurred, continue to run without
er5 occurrence. After communication is recovered, operate
according to the communication command.
4 to 9: Same as 0.
10: After communication error occurred, stop deceleration and
perform ert trip.
11: After timer time operation from occurrence of communication
error, stop deceleration, and perform ert trip.
12: Upon occurrence of communication error, communication
cannot be recovered by communication retry during timer time
operation, stop deceleration. When communication is
recovered, continue to run according to communication
command.
13 to 15: Same as 3.
y35 (Transmission error timer time) 0.0 to 60.0   0.0
y95 Select data clear upon 0: Upon alarm occurrence of communication abnormal state, no   0 5-198
occurrence of communication function code Sxx data clear (Existing mode compatible)
abnormal situation 1: Upon alarm occurrence of communication abnormal state,
function code S01, S05, S19 data clear
2: Upon alarm occurrence of communication abnormal state, bit
clear for assigning operation command of function code S06
3: Above both 1 and 2 are clear operation
* Target alarm is er8, erp, er4, er5, ert
y97 Communication data storing 0: Store into nonvolatile memory (with restriction on the number of   0
method selection writes)
1: Write into temporary memory (no restriction on the number of
writes)
2: All save from temporary memory to nonvolatile memory
(After all save, return to Data 1)
y98 Bus link function Frequency command Run command   0
(Mode selection) 0: Follow H30 Follow H30
1: Command from bus link Follow H30
2: Follow H30 Command from bus link
3: Command from bus link Command from bus link
y99 Link Function for Support Frequency command Run command  x 0 5-199
(Mode selection) 0: Follow H30, y98 Follow H30, y98
1: Command from FRENIC loader Follow H30, y98
2: Follow H30, y98 Command from FRENIC
loader
3: Command from FRENIC loader Command from FRENIC
loader
5-24
■ K codes: Keypad functions for TP-A1

Modificati
Name Data setting range on during
code copy default page
operation
K01 Multifunction keypad TP-A1 0: Japanese   J: 0 -
(language selection) 1: English C: 6
2: German AEKT: 1
3: French
4: Spanish
5: Italian
6: Chinese
8: Russian
9: Greek
10: Turkish
11: Polish
12: Czech
13 Swedish
14: Portuguese
15 Dutch
16 Malay
17: Vietnamese
18: Thai
19: Indonesian
100: User-Customizable language
K02 (Backlight OFF time) 0: Always OFF   5 -
1 to 30 min
FUNCTION CODE
K03 (Backlight brightness 0 (dark) - 10 (bright)   5 -
adjustment)
K04 (Contrast adjustment) 0 (low) - 10 (high)   5 -
K08 (LCD monitor status display) 0: Not displayed   1 -
1: Fully displayed
K15 (Sub-monitor display selection) 0: Operation guide display   0 -
1: Bar graph display
K16 (Sub-monitor 1 display 13: Output current   13 -
selection) 14: Output voltage
Chap 5
18: Calculated torque  
K17 (Sub-monitor 2 display 19 -
19: Input power
selection)
20: PID command value
22: PID feedback value
23: Timer value
24: PID output
25: Load factor
26: Motor output
27: Analog input monitor
35: Input watt-hour
K20 (Bar graph 1 display selection) 1: Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation)   1 -
13: Output current  
K21 (Bar graph 2 display selection) 13 -
14: Output voltage
K22 (Bar graph 3 display selection) 18: Calculated torque   19 -
19: Input power
25: Load factor
26: Motor output
K91 (< key shortcut selection) 0: disabled   0 -
11 to 99: respective mode  
K92 (> key shortcut selection) 64 -
The keypad function K codes are used when the multi-function keypad (TP-A1) is connected. For details about the K codes, refer to the instruction manual for
the keypad.
5-25
Table A Factory default value per applicable electric motor capacitance
Applicable Momentary Applicable Momentary

electric motor Torque boost 1 to 2 power failure electric motor Torque boost 1 to 2 power failure
capacitance F09/ A05 restart capacitance F09/ A05 restart
[kW] H13 [kW] H13
0.4 7.1 55
0.75 6.5 75
1.5
1.5 4.9 90
2.2 4.5 0.5 110
3.7 4.1 132
2.0
5.5 3.4 160
7.5 2.7 200 0.0
11 2.1 220 2.5
15 1.6 280
18.5 1.3 315
1.0 4.0
22 1.1 355
30 400
37 0.0 500 5.0
45 1.5 630
5-26
Table B Motor constant

[1] When Fuji standard motor 8-series, or other motors are selected by motor selection
(Function code P99/ A39 = 0 or 4)
 3-phase 200V class
Motor capacity Applicable Rated No-load %R1 (%) %X (%) Rated slip Iron loss Starting
Setting range (kW) motor current current frequency factor 1 Mode (Auto
Capacitance (A) (A) search delay
(kW) P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26 P13/A27 time 2)
P02/A16
*1 *1 *1 *1 H46
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.44 0.40 13.79 11.75 1.77 14.00
0.10 to 0.19 0.1 0.68 0.55 12.96 12.67 1.77 14.00
0.20 to 0.39 0.2 1.30 1.06 12.95 12.92 2.33 12.60
0.5
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 2.30 1.66 10.20 13.66 2.40 9.88
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 3.60 2.30 8.67 10.76 2.33 7.40
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 6.10 3.01 6.55 11.21 2.00 5.85
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 9.20 4.85 6.48 10.97 1.80 5.91 0.6
FUNCTION CODE
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 15.00 7.67 5.79 11.25 1.93 5.24 0.8
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 22.50 11.00 5.28 14.31 1.40 4.75 1.0
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 29.00 12.50 4.50 14.68 1.57 4.03 1.2
11.00 to 14.99 11 42.00 17.70 3.78 15.09 1.07 3.92 1.3
15.00 to 18.49 15 55.00 20.00 3.25 16.37 1.13 3.32
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 67.00 21.40 2.92 16.58 0.87 3.34 2.0
22.00 to 29.99 22 78.00 25.10 2.70 16.00 0.90 3.28
Chap 5
30.00 to 36.99 30 107.0 38.90 2.64 14.96 0.80 3.10 2.3
37.00 to 44.99 37 130.0 41.50 2.76 16.41 0.80 2.30
2.5
45.00 to 54.99 45 156.0 47.50 2.53 16.16 0.80 2.18
55.00 to 74.99 55 190.0 58.60 2.35 16.20 0.94 2.45 2.6
75.00 to 89.99 75 260.0 83.20 1.98 16.89 0.80 2.33 2.8
90.00 to 109.9 90 310.0 99.20 1.73 16.03 0.80 2.31 3.2
From 110.0 110 376.0 91.20 1.99 20.86 0.66 1.73 3.5
*1: F05: The value for the model, in which the base frequency voltage 1 is not 200V, becomes the optimal value, which is different
from the above value.
5-27
Table B Motor constant (Cont.)
 3-phase 400V class

Motor capacity Applicable Rated No-load %R1 (%) %X (%) Rated slip Iron loss Starting
Setting range (kW) motor current current frequency factor 1 Mode (Auto
Capacitance (A) (A) search delay
P02/A16 (kW) P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26 P13/A27 time 2)
*1 *1 *1 *1 H46
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.22 0.20 13.79 11.75 1.77 14.00
0.10 to 0.19 0.1 0.35 0.27 12.96 12.67 1.77 14.00
0.20 to 0.39 0.2 0.65 0.53 12.95 12.92 2.33 12.60
0.5
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 1.15 0.83 10.20 13.66 2.40 9.88
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 1.80 1.15 8.67 10.76 2.33 7.40
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 3.10 1.51 6.55 11.21 2.00 5.85
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 4.60 2.43 6.48 10.97 1.80 5.91 0.6
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 7.50 3.84 5.79 11.25 1.93 5.24 0.8
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 11.50 5.50 5.28 14.31 1.40 4.75 1.0
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 14.50 6.25 4.50 14.68 1.57 4.03 1.2
11.00 to 14.99 11 21.00 8.85 3.78 15.09 1.07 3.92 1.3
15.00 to 18.49 15 27.50 10.00 3.25 16.37 1.13 3.32
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 34.00 10.70 2.92 16.58 0.87 3.34 2.0
22.00 to 29.99 22 39.00 12.60 2.70 16.00 0.90 3.28
30.00 to 36.99 30 54.00 19.50 2.64 14.96 0.80 3.10 2.3
37.00 to 44.99 37 65.00 20.80 2.76 16.41 0.80 2.30
2.5
45.00 to 54.99 45 78.00 23.80 2.53 16.16 0.80 2.18
55.00 to 74.99 55 95.00 29.30 2.35 16.20 0.94 2.45 2.6
75.00 to 89.99 75 130.0 41.60 1.98 16.89 0.80 2.33 2.8
90.00 to 109.9 90 155.0 49.60 1.73 16.03 0.80 2.31 3.2
110.0 to 131.9 110 188.0 45.60 1.99 20.86 0.66 1.73 3.5
132.0 to 159.9 132 224.0 57.60 1.75 18.90 0.66 1.80 4.1
160.0 to 199.9 160 272.0 64.50 1.68 19.73 0.66 1.50 4.5
200.0 to 219.9 200 335.0 71.50 1.57 20.02 0.66 1.36
4.7
220.0 to 249.9 220 365.0 71.80 1.60 20.90 0.58 1.25
250.0 to 279.9 250 415.0 87.90 1.39 18.88 1.33 5.0
0.54
280.0 to 314.9 280 462.0 93.70 1.36 19.18 1.27 5.5
315.0 to 354.9 315 520.0 120.0 0.84 16.68 0.45 1.81
5.6
355.0 to 399.9 355 580.0 132.0 0.83 16.40 0.43 1.77
400.0 to 449.9 400 670.0 200.0 0.62 15.67 0.29 1.58 7.5
450.0 to 499.9 450 770.0 0.48 13.03 0.23 1.84
500.0 to 559.9 500 835.0 270.0 0.51 12.38 0.18 1.80 9.8
560.0 to 629.9 560 940.0 0.57 13.94 0.20 1.61
630.0 to 709.9 630 1050.0 355.0 0.46 11.77 0.17 1.29
10.5
From 710.0 710 1150.0 290.0 0.54 14.62 0.21 0.97
*1: F05: The value for the model, in which the base frequency voltage 1 is not 200V, becomes the optimal value, which is different
from the above value.
5-28

[2] When HP display motor is selected by motor selection
(Function code P99/A39 = 1)
 200V class
Motor capacity Applicable Rated No-load %R1 %X Rated slip Iron loss Starting
Setting range (kW) motor current current (%) (%) frequency factor 1 Mode
Capacitance (A) (A) (Auto search
(kW) delay time 2)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26 P13/A27 H46

0.01 to 0.11 0.1 0.44 0.40 13.79 11.75 2.50 14.00
0.12 to 0.24 0.12 0.68 0.55 12.96 12.67 2.50 14.00
0.25 to 0.49 0.25 1.40 1.12 11.02 13.84 2.50 12.60
0.5
0.50 to 0.99 0.5 2.00 1.22 6.15 8.80 2.50 9.88
1.00 to 1.99 1 3.00 1.54 3.96 8.86 2.50 7.40
2.00 to 2.99 2 5.80 2.80 4.29 7.74 2.50 5.85
FUNCTION CODE
3.00 to 4.99 3 7.90 3.57 3.15 20.81 1.17 5.91 0.6
5.00 to 7.49 5 12.6 4.78 3.34 23.57 1.50 5.24 0.8
7.50 to 9.99 7.5 18.6 6.23 2.65 28.91 1.17 4.75 1.0
10.00 to 14.99 10 25.3 8.75 2.43 30.78 1.17 4.03 1.2
15.00 to 19.99 15 37.3 12.7 2.07 29.13 1.00 3.92 1.3
20.00 to 24.99 20 49.1 9.20 2.09 29.53 1.00 3.32
Chap 5
25.00 to 29.99 25 60.0 16.70 1.75 31.49 1.00 3.34 2.0
30.00 to 39.99 30 72.4 19.80 1.90 32.55 1.00 3.28
40.00 to 49.99 40 91.0 13.60 1.82 25.32 0.47 3.10 2.3
50.00 to 59.99 50 115.0 18.70 1.92 24.87 0.58 2.30
2.5
37.00 to 44.99 60 137.0 20.80 1.29 26.99 0.35 2.18
75.00 to 99.99 75 174.0 28.60 1.37 27.09 0.35 2.45 2.6
100.0 to 124.9 100 226.0 37.40 1.08 23.80 0.23 2.33 2.8
125.0 to 149.9 125 268.0 29.80 1.05 22.90 0.35 2.31 3.2
From 150.0 150 337.0 90.40 0.96 21.61 0.39 1.73 3.5
5-29
 400V class
Motor capacity Applicable Rated No-load %R1 %X Rated slip Iron loss Starting
Setting range (kW) motor current current (%) (%) frequency factor 1 Mode
Capacitance (A) (A) (Auto
(kW) search delay
time 2)
P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26 P13/A27 H46
P02/A16
0.01 to 0.11 0.1 0.22 0.20 13.79 11.75 2.50 14.00
0.12 to 0.24 0.12 0.34 0.27 12.96 12.67 2.50 14.00
0.25 to 0.49 0.25 0.70 0.56 11.02 13.84 2.50 12.60
0.5
0.50 to 0.99 0.5 1.00 0.61 6.15 8.80 2.50 9.88
1.00 to 1.99 1 1.50 0.77 3.96 8.86 2.50 7.40
2.00 to 2.99 2 2.90 1.40 4.29 7.74 2.50 5.85
3.00 to 4.99 3 4.00 1.79 3.15 20.81 1.17 5.91 0.6
5.00 to 7.49 5 6.30 2.39 3.34 23.57 1.50 5.24 0.8
7.50 to 9.99 7.5 9.30 3.12 2.65 28.91 1.17 4.75 1.0
10.00 to 14.99 10 12.7 4.37 2.43 30.78 1.17 4.03 1.2
15.00 to 19.99 15 18.7 6.36 2.07 29.13 1.00 3.92 1.3
20.00 to 24.99 20 24.6 4.60 2.09 29.53 1.00 3.32
25.00 to 29.99 25 30.0 8.33 1.75 31.49 1.00 3.34 2.0
30.00 to 39.99 30 36.2 9.88 1.90 32.55 1.00 3.28
40.00 to 49.99 40 45.5 6.80 1.82 25.32 0.47 3.10 2.3
50.00 to 59.99 50 57.5 9.33 1.92 24.87 0.58 2.30
2.5
60.00 to 74.99 60 68.7 10.4 1.29 26.99 0.35 2.18
75.00 to 99.99 75 86.9 14.3 1.37 27.09 0.35 2.45 2.6
100.0 to 124.9 100 113.0 18.7 1.08 23.80 0.23 2.33 2.8
125.0 to 149.9 125 134.0 14.9 1.05 22.90 0.35 2.31 3.2
150.0 to 174.9 150 169.0 45.2 0.96 21.61 0.39 1.73 3.5
175.0 to 199.9 175 188.5 45.2 0.96 21.61 0.39 1.80 4.1
200.0 to 249.9 200 231.0 81.8 0.72 20.84 0.23 1.50 4.5
250.0 to 299.9 250 272.0 41.1 0.71 18.72 0.35 1.36
4.7
300.0 to 324.9 300 323.0 45.1 0.53 18.44 0.23 1.25
325.0 to 349.9 325 342.9 45.1 0.53 18.44 0.23 1.33 5.0
350.0 to 399.9 350 375.0 68.3 0.99 19.24 0.46 1.27 5.5
400.0 to 449.9 400 429.0 80.7 1.11 18.92 0.46 1.81
5.6
450.0 to 499.9 450 481.0 85.5 0.95 19.01 0.48 1.77
500.0 to 599.9 500 534.0 99.2 1.05 18.39 0.45 1.58 7.5
600.0 to 699.9 600 1.84
700.0 to 749.9 700 9.8
638.0 140.0 0.85 18.38 0.39
750.0 to 799.9 750 1.70
From 800.0 800 10.5
5-30
5.3 Description of Function Code

This section describes details of function code. In principle, explanation is given for each function code in order of
group and numerical order. However, function codes that are strongly related to one function is explained together
in the first paragraph.
5.3.1 F code (Basic function)
F00 Data protection
This is a function to protect currently set data by disabling to make changes in function code data (except F00) and
each types of command value (frequency setting, PID command) by / key operation from keypad.
Change of function code Setting of each types of

F00 data command value by Keypad
Change from keypad Change from communication operation ( / key)
0 : Change enabled : Change enabled : Change enabled
FUNCTION CODE
1 ×: Change disabled* : Change enabled : Change enabled
2 : Change enabled : Change enabled ×: Change disabled
3 ×: Change disabled* : Change enabled ×: Change disabled
*Although it is not possible to change function code from keypad, function code F00 can be changed.
Chap 5
F00 data can be changed by the double key operation using " key + key" or " key + key''.
As a similar function related to data protection, "Editing approval command (Data change enabled) "WE-KP" " for
which digital input terminal is assigned, is available. ( Function code E01 to E05 Data = 19)
By combining data protection F00, protection of function code functions as follows:
Change in function code

Input signal "WE-KP"
Change from keypad Change from communication
OFF ×: Change disabled
: Change enabled
ON Follow setting of F00
Note • If "enable data change with keypad" [WE-KP] is set to the terminal by mistake, it is not possible to
make changes in function code. In this case, after shortening (ON) the terminal to which temporarily
"WE-KP" function is assigned, and the terminal [CM], change to the different function.
• "WE-KP" is the change approval signal of function code and this is not the function to protect
frequency setting and PID command by / key operation.
5-31
F01 Frequency Setting 1

Related function codes: F18 bias (Frequency setting 1)
C30 frequency setting 2
C31 to C35 analog input adjustment (Terminal [12])
C36 to C39 analog input adjustment (Terminal [C1] (C1
function))
C40 terminal [C1] (C1 function) (Mode selection)
C41 to C45 analog input adjustment (Terminal [C1] (V2
function))
C55 to C56 analog input adjustment (Terminal [12]) (Bias
Bias reference point)
C61 to C62 analog input adjustment (Terminal [C1] (C1
function) (BiasBias reference point)
C67 to C68 analog input adjustment (Terminal [C1] (V2
function)) (BiasBias reference point)
C50 bias (for frequency setting 1) (Bias reference point)
H61 UP/DOWN control initial value selection
d59, d61 to d63 command (Pulse train input)
Select setting method of frequency setting. Set frequency setting 1 by function code F01, frequency setting 2 by
C30.
F01, C30
Command sources
data
0 Frequency setting by keypad (refer to the following descriptions to find the setting method)
Set by voltage value to be input in the terminal [12] (0 to ±10VDC, Maximum output frequency
1
/DC±10V
Setting by current value to be input in the terminal [C1] (C1 function) (4 to 20mADC or 0 to 20
mADC, Maximum output frequency / 20 mADC)
(Set slide switch SW4 of printed circuit board to [AI] side (factory default state), SW3 to [C1]
2 side (factory default state), respectively.)
(It is necessary to select C1 function (factory default state) by E-59=0)
(It is necessary to disable PTC input function by H26=0)
Set by the addition result of voltage value to be input in the terminal [12] (0 to ±10VDC,
Maximum output frequency /±10 VDC) and current value to be input in the terminal [C1] (C1
3 function) (4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC, Maximum output frequency/20 mA DC)
When the addition result becomes maximum output frequency or higher, it is restricted by the
maximum output frequency)
Set by voltage value to be input in the terminal [C1] (V2 function) (0 to +10 VDC, Maximum
output frequency /+10 VDC)
(Set slide switch SW4 of printed circuit board to [AI] side (factory default state), SW3 to [V2]
5 side, respectively.)
(It is necessary to select V2 function by E59 = 1)
(It is necessary to disable PTC input function by H26 = 0)
Set by UP command "UP" and DOWN command "DOWN" assigned to the digital input terminal
7 It is necessary to assign UP command (Data = 17) and DOWN command (Data =18) to the
digital input terminal [X1] to [X5]. (E01 toE05)
8 Frequency setting by keypad (with balanceless bumpless function)
10 Set by pattern operation (C21 to C28)
Setting by pulse train input "PIN" (Data = 48), which was assigned to the digital input terminal
[X5]
12
Note: When using X5 terminal with pulse train input, it might be affected by noise from other
wire. Keep away from other wire from the wire to X5 terminal as far as possible.
5-32
Setting method of reference frequency

[1] Frequency setting by keypad (F01 = 0 (Factory default state), 8)
(1) Set the data of function code F01 to "0" or "8". When keypad is at program mode or alarm mode, it is not
possible to perform frequency setting with / key. In order to enable frequency setting with / key,
shift to the operation mode.
(2) When / key is pressed, reference frequency is displayed and the least significant digit of the reference
frequency flashes.
(3) By pressing the / key again, it is possible to change the reference frequency. To save the set
frequency, press key. (E64=1: Factory default state). When the frequency is saved, it is possible to
operate with the saved frequency next time the power is turned on.
• Automatic saving method (Function code E64 = 0) is available other than the above method as a data
saving method of frequency setting.
• While the data of function code F01 is set to "0" or '8", when frequency setting method other than
frequency setting 1 (frequency setting 2, communication, multi-frequency) is selected as frequency
setting, it is not possible to change the reference setting with / key even if keypad is at
FUNCTION CODE
operation mode. In this case, pressing / key displays the currently selected reference
frequency.
• When setting is performed for such as frequency setting with / key, the displayed the least
significant digit flashes and the data is changed from the least significant digit and the changing digit
gradually shifts to the upper digit.
• In order to perform setting such as reference frequency, press / once and when the least
significant digit flashed, push down the key, and then, the flashing digit will move. Therefore, it is
possible to change the large numerical number easily. This operation is called cursor movement.
Chap 5
• When the data of function code F01 is set to "8", balanceless bumpless function becomes enable.
when switching to frequency setting with keypad from frequency setting method other than keypad,
the switched initial value of frequency setting with keypad succeeds the frequency setting before it is
switched. Even if frequency setting is switched by using this function, it is possible to perform
operation without shock.
[2] Setting up a reference frequency using analog input (F01 = 1 to 3, 5)

It is possible to arbitrarily specify a frequency by multiplying frequency setting 1 (F01) against analog input (voltage
value to be input to terminal [12] and terminal [C1] (V2 function) and current value to be input to terminal [C1] (C1
function) by the gain and adding the bias. The polarity can be selected and the filter time constant and offset can
be adjusted.
Adjustment element of frequency setting 1
Bias Gain
F01 Polarity
Input terminal Input range Base Base Filter Offset
data Bias Gain selection
point point
0 to +10V,
1 [12] F18 C50 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
-10 to +10V
4 to 20 mA
2 [C1] (C1 function) F18 C50 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
0 to 20 mA
[12]+ [C1] (C1 0 to +10V,
F18 C50 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
function) -10 to +10V
3
(Set by result of 4 to 20 mA
addition) F18 C50 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
0 to 20 mA
5 [C1] (V2 function) 0 to +10V F18 C50 C42 C44 C45 C43 C41
5-33
Adjustment element of frequency setting 2

Bias Gain
C30 Polarity
Input terminal Input range Base Base Filter Offset
data Bias Gain selection
point point
0 to +10V,
1 [12] C55 C56 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
-10 to +10V
4 to 20 mA
2 [C1] (C1 function) C61 C62 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
0 to 20 mA
[12]+ 0 to +10V,
C55 C56 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
[C1] (C1 function) -10 to +10V
3
(Set by result of 4 to 20 mA
addition) C61 C62 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
0 to 20 mA
5 [C1] (V2 function) 0 to +10V C67 C68 C42 C44 C45 C43 C41
 Offset (C31, C36, C41)

C31, C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage/current input. The offset also applies to signals sent
from the external equipment.
 Filter time constant (C33, C38, C43)

C33, C38, and C43 provide the filter time constants for the voltage and current of the analog input. The larger the
time constant, the slower the response. Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response
speed of the machine (load). If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises, increase the time constant.
 Polarity selection [12] Terminal (C35)

C35 configures the input range for analog input voltage.
C35 data Modes for terminal inputs

0 -10 to +10 V
1 0 to +10 V (Negative value of voltage is regarded as 0 V)
 Selection of terminal [C1] (C1 function) input range (C40)
C40 data Terminal input range Handling of when bias value is set to minus
0 4 to 20 mA (Factory default)
Limit below 0 point with 0
1 0 to 20mA
10 4 to 20mA
Enable below 0 point as minus value.
11 0 to 20mA
 Polarity selection [C1] (V2 function) (C45)

0 to +10V
0
When bias value is set to minus, enable below 0 point as a minus value.
0 to +10V (factory default)
1
When bias value is set to minus, limit below 0 point by 0.
5-34
In order to use [C1] terminal in C1 function, V2 function, and PTC function, the following switching is necessary.
[C1] terminal SW3 SW4 E59 H26 C40

When using C1 function (4 to C1 side AI side 0 0 0,10
20 mA)
When using C1 function (0 to C1 side AI side 0 0 1,11
20 mA)
When using V2 function (0 to V2 side AI side 1 0 Unmentioned
+10V)
When using PTC function C1 side PTC side Unmentioned 1, 2 Unmentioned
For details of SW3 and SW4, refer to 2.2.8 in Chapter 2.

Caution is necessary that if the above switch setting is not performed accurately, unexpected frequency setting
may be performed for the inverter.
 GainBias
FUNCTION CODE
Terminal <Frequency setting 1: F01> <Frequency setting 2: C30>
Reference frequency Reference frequency
Gain Gain
Point B Point B
Chap 5
[12] Bias Bias
Point A Point A
Analog input Analog input
Bias base Gain base Bias base Gain base
point point point point
Gain Gain
Point B Point B
[C1]
(C1 Bias Bias
function) Point A Point A
Gain Gain
Point B Point B
[C1]
(V2 Bias Bias
function) Point A Point A
5-35
For [12] + [C1] (C1 function) (setting by the result of addition), bias and gain are reflected to [12] and [C1]
(C1 function) individually, and added by frequency command value of the result.
Function code F18, C50, C32, C34
Bias/gain Frequency command
Bias/gain
Function code F18, C50, C37, C39
For single polarity (Terminal [12] (C35=1), Terminal [C1] (C1 function), Terminal [C1] (V2
function)
As the above diagram indicates, for reference frequency and analog input of frequency setting 1, it is possible to
set arbitrary relationship by A point (determined by bias (F18) and bias reference point (C50)) and B point
(determined by the gain corresponding to each analog input and the gain reference point (C32 and C34, C37 and
C39, and C42 and C44)).
For reference frequency and analog input of frequency setting 2 (C30), it is possible to set arbitrary relationship by
A point (determined by bias and bias reference point (C55 and C56, C61 and C62, and C67 and C68)) and B point
(determined by the gain corresponding to each analog input and the gain reference point (C32 and C34, C37 and
C39, and C42 and C44)).
Both data of bias and gain are set with 100% as the maximum frequency. The data of bias reference point and gain
reference point are set up with full scale of analog input (10V or 20mA) as100%.
By setting the bias to minus value, even if the analog input is single polar, it is possible to perform frequency setting
as bipolar. For terminal [C1] (C1 function), C40 is set to 10 or 11, and for terminal [C1] (V2 function), 1 is set to
C45, and then, the frequency setting at analog input at or below 0 point becomes negative polarity, as a result, it
becomes possible to perform forward and reverse operation only by analog command.
<Frequency setting 1: F01>

• Analog input at or below bias reference point (C50) is restricted by bias value (F18).
• When numerical value with which relationship of bias reference point (C50) each gain reference
point (C34, C39, C44) is established, it is judged as incorrect setting and reference point becomes 0
Hz.
<Frequency setting 2: C30>
• Analog input at or below bias reference point (C56, C62, and C68) is restricted by bias value (C55,
C61 and C67).
• When numerical value with which relationship of bias reference point (C56, C62, C68) ≧ each gain
reference point (C34, C39, C44) is established, it is judged as incorrect setting and reference point
becomes 0 Hz.
5-36
Example) When setting reference frequency to 0 to 60 Hz by analog input (terminal [12]) 1 to 5V

(When maximum frequency is F03=60 Hz)
Reference frequency
(Maximum frequency: converted with F03 = 60 Hz as
100%)
Gain (C32)
Point
B
Point A
Bias (F18) Analog input (voltage)
Analog input (%)
(Analog input full scale:

Bias base Gain base converted with 10 V as 100%)
point point
FUNCTION CODE
(A point)
In order to set reference frequency to 0 Hz when analog input is 1V, set bias (F18) to 0%. At this point, 1V
becomes the bias reference point and 1V is equivalent to 10% against full scale 10V of terminal [12], therefore, set
the bias reference point (C50) to 10%.
(B point)
Chap 5
In order to set reference frequency so that the frequency becomes the highest when analog input is 5V, set the
gain (C32) to 100%. At this point, 5V becomes the gain reference point and 5V is equivalent to 50% against full
scale 10V of terminal [12], therefore, set the gain reference point (C34) to 50%.
The setting method without changing reference point and by using gain and bias individually is the same
as for our company's existing inverter.
For bipolar (Terminal [12] (C35=0))

For terminal [12], by setting function code C35 to "0", it is possible to use bipolar input (-10V to +10V).
When both bias (F18) and bias reference point (C50) are set to "0", command becomes forward and reverse
symmetric as shown in the diagram below.
Reference frequency
Gain
Point
B
Terminal [12] input

Gain base
point
5-37
 When bias (F18) and bias reference point (C50) is set to arbitrary value (A1 point, A2 point, and A3
point, etc.), as shown in the diagram below, it is restricted by the bias value (F18).
Reference frequency
Point A1
Point
A2
Terminal [12] input
Point
A3
• To input bipolar (0 to ±10 VDC) analog voltage at analog input (terminal [12]), set function code C35
to "0". When the data of C35 is "1", only DC 0 to +10V " is effective and negative polar input DC0 to
-10V is regarded as 0 (Zero) V.
• When setting reference frequency by display other than frequency (Hz), it is dependent on the data
setting of function code E48 (=3 to 5, and 7) of speed monitor selection.
When operating by single polar analog input as bipolar (terminal [C1] (C1 function) (C40 = 10,
11), terminal [C1] (V2 function) (C45 = 0)
For C1 function set C40 = 10, 11, for V2 function set C45 = 0, and by setting bias value to minus value, it is
possible to enter data as negative polarity at or below 0 point.
Example of frequency setting by V2 function when -100% is set to the bias value is shown in the diagram below.
Reference frequency
Reference frequency
+100%
Reference frequency 0% (V2) Input

0V 5V 10V
F18 = -100.0%
Reference frequency -100%
5-38
[3] Frequency setting by digital input signal "UP"/"DOWN" (F01=7)

As frequency setting, UP/DOWN control is selected, and when the terminal command UP or DOWN is turned on
with Run command ON, the output frequency increases or decreases accordingly, within the range from 0 Hz to
the maximum frequency.
To perform frequency setting by UP/DOWN control, it is necessary to set the data of function code F01 to "7" and
assign "UP command [UP], down command [DOWN]" to the digital input terminal. ( Function code E01 to E05
Data = 17, 18)
Input signal Input signal
"UP" "DOWN" Action
Data = 17 Data = 18
OFF OFF The output frequency will be held
Increase output frequency by currently selected acceleration
ON OFF
time
Decrease output frequency by currently selected deceleration
OFF ON
time
ON ON The output frequency will be held
 UP/DOWN control initial value selection
FUNCTION CODE
Set initial value of reference frequency when starting UP/DOWN control.
H61 data Initial value of frequency setting when starting UP/DOWN control.
Mode to fix to "0"
When restarting operation (including when the power to the inverter is turned ON),
0
initial value of setting frequency by UP/DOWN control is cleared with "0". Increase
speed by UP command.
This is the mode to set reference frequency at the previous UP/DOWN control as the
Chap 5
initial value.
1 The inverter internally holds the output frequency set by UP/DOWN control and start
control from the previous operation frequency at the next restart (including powering
ON).
At the restart of operation, before the internal frequency reaches the previous output frequency, when
UP/DOWN command is input, output frequency at the point is held internally and start UP/DOWN control
from the value. Therefore, the previous output frequency data is overwritten and deleted.
Frequency
Internally held frequency
Output frequency
Run
command
UP
command
< Initial value of UP/DOWN control when setting method of frequency setting is switched>
The initial value when setting method of frequency setting is set to UP/DOWN control is shown in the following
table.
Setting method prior to Initial value of UP/DOWN control
Switching signal
switching H61=0 H61=1
Setting other than Frequency setting
UP/DOWN (F01, C30) 2/ Frequency Reference frequency by setting method prior to switching
setting 1
PID control PID Cancel Reference frequency by PID control (PID output)
Multi-frequency Multi-frequency Reference frequency by Reference frequency by
selection setting method prior to previous UP/DOWN control
Communication Link operation switching
selection
5-39
[4] Frequency setting using pulse train input (F01 = 12)

 Pulse train input method
Input method of pulse train and operation overview are described below.
Pulse train input method Operation overview

Pulse train sign/ Apply speed command according to frequency of pulse train input to the inverter
Pulse train input main unit. In addition, it is possible to set polarity of speed command by pulse train
sign.
Pulse train input: Assign "PIN" to terminal [X5] (Data = 48)
Pulse train sign: Assign "SIGN" to terminal other than terminal [X5] (Data = 49)
When "SIGN" is not assigned, the polarity becomes positive.
+Polarity –Polarity
Pulse train sign
Pulse train input
Pulse train sign/Pulse train input
 Pulse correction coefficient 1 (d62), pulse correction coefficient 2 (d63)

For pulse train input, set the relationship between input pulse frequency and frequency setting value by function
code d62 (Command (pulse train input) pulse correction coefficient 1) and d63 (command (pulse train input) pulse
correction coefficient 2).
Frequency setting value
Pulse correction coefficient 2
Input pulse frequency
Pulse correction coeffcient 1
Relationship between input pulse frequency and frequency setting value
As shown in the figure, set input pulse frequency [kp/s] to function code d62 (command (pulse train input) pulse
correction coefficient 1) and set frequency setting value [Hz] at the value set to function code d63 (command (pulse
train input) pulse correction coefficient 2) by function code d62. At this time, the relationship formula of input pulse
frequency to be entered and frequency setting value f* (or speed command value) is as follows:
Pulse correction coefficient
* 2 (d63)
f [Hz] = Np [kp/s] ×
Pulse correction coefficient
1 (d63)
f* [Hz]: Frequency setting value
Np [kp/s]: Input pulse frequency to be input
Depending on the pulse train sign, polarity of the command is determined. Rotation direction of the motor is
determined by the polarity of pulse train input and "FWD"/"REV" command. The relationship between the pulse
train input polarity and rotation direction is specified in the table.
5-40
The relationship between the pulse train input polarity and rotation direction
Polarity according to the pulse train

Run command Rotational direction
input
+ "FWD" (Forward rotation command) Forward rotation
+ "REV" (Reverse rotation command) Reverse rotation
- "FWD" (Forward rotation command) Reverse rotation
- "REV" (Reverse rotation command) Forward rotation
 Filter time constant (d61)

Set filter time constant for pulse train input. The larger the time constant, the slower the response. Specify the
proper filter time constant by taking into account the response speed of the machine. If the pulse is lower and
frequency command fluctuates, set larger time constant.
Switching frequency setting
FUNCTION CODE
Switch frequency setting 1 (F01) and frequency setting 2 (C30) by the signal "Frequency setting 2/frequency
setting 1" "Hz2/ Hz1", which was assigned to the extraneous digital input terminal.
 (Refer to Function code E01 to E05 (Data =11) to find the details of "Hz2/ Hz1".
Input signal "Hz2/ Hz1" Frequency setting method to be selected

OFF Frequency setting 1 (F01)
Chap 5
ON Frequency setting 2 (C30)
F02 Operation
Select setting method of run command. Indicate instruction method of run/stop and rotation direction
(forward/reverse rotation) for each setting method.
Setting method of run command

F02 data
Run/stop Rotation direction command
0: Keypad operation
(Rotation direction input: Terminal / key "FWD", "REV"
block)
1: External signal (digital input) "FWD", "REV"
Rotation direction command is
unnecessary
2: Keypad operation (forward rotation) / key (Forward rotation operation only,
reverse rotation operation disabled)
Rotation direction command is
unnecessary
3: Keypad operation (Reverse rotation) / key (Reverse rotation operation only,
forward rotation operation disabled)
Digital input signal, "FWD", "REV" needs to be assigned to terminal [FWD], [REV].
( Function code E98, E99 data = 98, 99)
• F02 cannot be changed when "FWD" or "REV" is ON.

• If F02 = 1 and when assignment of terminal [FWD] or [REV] is changed from other function to "FWD"
function or "REV" function, turn the terminal [FWD] and [REV] off in advance (motor may rotate due to
change in the setting).
5-41
 3-wire operation by external signal

Although external signal of "FWD" and "REV" is 2-wire operation at the initial state, by assigning "Self-hold
selection (HLD)", it is possible to use as self-hold signal at 3-wire operation by "FWD", "REV" and "HLD" signal.
When "HLD" is ON, self-hold "FWD" or "REV" signal, and release the hold state by OFF. If there is no "HOLD"
function assignment, only "FWD" and "REV" become 2-wire operation.
 Refer to Function code E01 to E05 (Data =6) to find the details of "HLD".
frequency
Output
Forward
rotation
Reverse rotation
Ignored
As a setting method of run command, high-priority setting method (remote/local switch (refer to 3.3.7 in Chapter 3),
communication, etc.) are available in addition to the above mentioned settings.
F03 Maximum frequency 1
F03 specifies the maximum frequency that the inverter outputs. When the device to be driven is set to rated or
higher, the device may be damaged. Make sure to make an adjustment to design mode value of the machinery.
• Data setting range: 25.0 to 500.0 (Hz)
Modes Control mode Data setting range Remarks
HD/HND/HHD mode V/f control 500 Hz
ND mode V/f control 120 Hz Restricted internally.*
* When setting is performed by exceeding the maximum setting range (for example, 500 Hz), speed setting and
analog output (FMA) become input/output mode of full scale/setting value (10V/ 500Hz). However, it is internally
restricted (for example, 120Hz), therefore, even if 10V is input for setting value, the value is restricted internally
by 2.4 V (equivalent to 120 Hz), not by 500Hz.
Use function code F80 to switch between ND, HD, HND and HHD modes.
Inverter can perform setting of high speed operation easily. When changing the setting, make sure to check
the motor and machine mode before use.
Injuries could occur. Failure may occur.
When changing maximum output frequency (F03) in order to make the operation frequency a larger
value, change the frequency limiter (upper limit) (F15) as well.
5-42
F04, F05 Base frequency 1, Base frequency voltage 1

F06 Maximum output voltage 1
Related function codes H50, H51 Non-linear V/f 1 (Frequency, voltage)
H52, H53 Non-linear V/f 2 (Frequency, voltage)
H65, H66 Non-linear V/f 3 (Frequency, voltage)
Set the base frequency and base frequency voltage that are essential to operation of the motor. By combining
related function code H50 to H53, H65, and H66, it is possible to set non-linear V/f pattern (weak or strong voltage
by arbitrary point) and perform setting of V/f characteristics that is suitable for the load.
Impedance of the motor becomes larger with high frequency, and when output voltage becomes less, output torque
may be reduced. In order to prevent this, use when increasing voltage by high frequency at the maximum output
voltage 1. However, it is not possible to output voltage at or higher than the input power voltage of the inverter.
Function code
Point of V/f Remarks
Frequency Voltage
Maximum output During auto torque boost, vector without speed sensor, the
F03 F06
FUNCTION CODE
frequency maximum output voltage setting is disabled.
Base frequency F04 F05
Non-linear V/f 3 H65 H66
This code is disabled during auto torque boost, vector
without speed sensor.
<Setting example>
Chap 5
 Normal V/f pattern setting
Output voltage (V)
Maximum output voltage
Rated voltage at base frequency
Output
frequency
Base frequency Maximum output frequency 1
 Non-linear V/f pattern setting (3 points)

Output voltage (V)
Maximum output voltage

Rated voltage at base frequency
Non-linear V/f pattern 3 (voltage)
Output
frequency
Non-linear V/f Non-linear Non-linear Base Maximum
frequency 1 frequency 1
pattern 1 V/f pattern 2 V/f pattern 3
(frequency) (frequency) (frequency)
5-43
 Base frequency (F04)

Set the data in accordance with rated frequency of the motor (given on the nameplate of the motor).
• Data setting range: 25.0 to 500.0 (Hz) (limited to 120 Hz (max.) with the ND mode)
 Base frequency voltage (F05)

Set the data in accordance with "0" or rated voltage of the motor (given on the nameplate of the motor).
• Data setting range: 0 : AVR disable
80 to 240 (V) : AVR operation (at 200 V class)
• When data is set to "0", the base frequency voltage becomes equivalent to inverter input voltage. When input
voltage is fluctuated, output voltage fluctuates as well.
• When data is set to arbitrary voltage other than "0", automatically keep the output voltage constant. When
control function such as auto torque boost, auto energy-saving operation, and skip compensation is used, it is
necessary to adjust to the rated voltage (given on the nameplate of the motor) of the motor.
The voltage that the inverter can output is lower than the input voltage of the inverter. Appropriately set
the voltage in accordance with the mode of the motor.
 Non-linear V/f 1, 2, 3 (Frequency) (H50, H52, H65)

Set frequency at the arbitrary point of non-linear V/f pattern.
• Data setting range: 0.0 (Cancel), 0.1 to 500.00 (Hz)
When 0.0 is set, the setting becomes the pattern without using non-linear V/f pattern.
(limited to 120 Hz (max.) with the ND mode)
 Non-linear V/f 1, 2, 3 (Voltage) (H51, H53, H66)

Set voltage at the arbitrary point of non-linear V/f pattern.
• Data setting range: 0 to 240 (V) : AVR operation (at 200 V class)
 Maximum output voltage 1 (F06)

Set the voltage at maximum output frequency 1 (F03).
• Data setting range: 80 to 240 (V) : AVR operation (at 200 V class)
160 to 500 (V) : AVR operation (at 400V class)
When base frequency voltage (F05) is "0", the data of non-linear V/f (H50 to H53, H65, and H66) and
F06 becomes invalid (linear V/f for at or below base frequency, and constant voltage for at or higher than
base frequency).
5-44
F07, F08 Acceleration time1, Deceleration time 1

Related function codes E10, E12, E14 Acceleration time 2, 3, 4
E11, E13, E15 Deceleration time 2, 3, 4
H07 Curve acceleration/deceleration
H56 Deceleration time for Forced stop
H54, H55 Acceleration/deceleration time (Jogging operation)
H57 to H60 Acceleration/deceleration time No. 1, No.2 S-curve range
Acceleration time sets the time when the output frequency reaches the maximum output frequency from 0Hz, and
deceleration time sets the time until when the output frequency reaches 0Hz from the maximum.
• Data setting range: 0.00 to 6000 (s)
For V/f control

Maximum Deceleration
Acceleration time 1 output time 1
frequency
FUNCTION CODE
Starting frequency 1 Stop frequency
Actual Actual
acceleration time deceleration time
 Acceleration/Deceleration time
Type of Function code
Chap 5
Acceleration/ Switching factor of acceleration/deceleration time
Deceleration
deceleration Acceleration time ( Function code E01 to E05)
time
time
Acceleration/ "RT2" "RT1"
deceleration F07 F08
OFF OFF
time 1
Acceleration/
Switch by acceleration/deceleration
deceleration E10 E11 OFF ON
selection "RT1" "RT2". (Data = 4 or 5)
time 2
When there is no assignment,
Acceleration/
acceleration/deceleration time 1 (F07, F08)
deceleration E12 E13 ON OFF
are valid.
time 3
Acceleration/
deceleration E14 E15 ON ON
time 4
When jogging operation "JOG" is ON, switch to the mode with which
At jogging H54 H55 jogging operation is possible. (Data = 10)
( Function code C20)
Turning the Force to stop "STOP" command OFF causes the motor to
At Force to decelerate to a stop in accordance with the deceleration time for
- H56 forced stop (H56). After the motor stops, the inverter enters the alarm
stop
state with the alarm er6 displayed. (Data = 30)
 Curve acceleration/deceleration (H07)

Select acceleration/deceleration pattern (change pattern of frequency) at acceleration/deceleration
H07 Acceleration/deceleration
Action Function code
data pattern
Disable (Linear
0 Acceleration/deceleration with constant acceleration. -
acceleration/deceleration)
S-curve Smoothen the speed Weak: Fix acceleration/deceleration rate
1 acceleration/deceleration change and reduce shock to 5% of the maximum output frequency -
(Weak) when starting acceleration within each S-curve range.
and right before the speed
becomes constant, as well
S-curve Arbitrary: It is possible to set
as when starting H57, H58
2 acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration rate arbitrarily
deceleration and right H59, H60
(Arbitrary) within each S-curve range.
before the deceleration
stops.
Linear acceleration/deceleration (constant torque) at or below base
frequency and acceleration becomes gradually slower at or higher than
Curve
3 the base frequency, and acceleration/deceleration with constant load -
acceleration/deceleration
rate (rated output). It is possible to accelerate/decelerate with the
maximum capability.
5-45
S-curve acceleration/deceleration
For the purpose of decreasing the shock on the load machine side, smoothen the speed change at the start of
acceleration and right before it becomes constant speed, and at the start of deceleration and right before the stop
of deceleration. As for s-curve acceleration/deceleration range, fix with 5% for S-curve acceleration/deceleration
(weak), and for S-curve acceleration/deceleration (arbitrary), it is possible to set individually for each 4 locations by
function code H57 to 60. The specified acceleration/deceleration time determines acceleration of linear part and
the actual acceleration/deceleration time becomes longer than the specified acceleration /deceleration time.
Output frequency
Acceleration time Deceleration time
Specified acceleration time Specified deceleration time

Maximum
frequency
Time
At the start of At the end of At the start of At the end of

acceleration acceleration deceleration deceleration
S-curve (Weak) 5% 5% 5% 5%
H57 H58 H59 H60
S-curve (Arbitrary)
At acceleration At acceleration At deceleration At acceleration
Setting range:
No. 1 S-curve range No. 2 S-curve range No. 1 S-curve range No. 2 S-curve range
0 to 100%
(At the start) (At the end) (At the start) (At the endt)
Acceleration/Deceleration time
< S-curve acceleration/deceleration (Weak): When frequency change is 10% or higher than the maximum
frequency>
Acceleration or deceleration time (s) = (2  5/100 + 90/100+ 2  5/100)  reference
acceleration or deceleration time
= 1.1  reference acceleration or deceleration time
< S-curve acceleration/deceleration (Arbitrary: When 10% at the start, 20% at the end): When frequency change is
30% or higher than the maximum frequency.>
Acceleration or deceleration time (s) = (2  10/100 + 70/100 + 2  20/100)  (reference
acceleration or deceleration time)
= 1.3  (reference acceleration or deceleration time)
5-46
Curve acceleration/deceleration
This is a pattern to perform linear acceleration/deceleration (rated torque) at or below base frequency and
acceleration becomes gradually slower at or higher than the base frequency, and acceleration/deceleration with
constant load rate (rated output).
It is possible to accelerate/decelerate with the maximum capability of the motor to be driven by the inverter.
Torque/output
Acceleration torque
Acceleration output (kW)
Output frequency
Base frequency The diagram on the left
shows pattern at
acceleration.
FUNCTION CODE
Output frequency This is the same as at
deceleration.
Maximum frequency
Base frequency
Chap 5
Time
Specified acceleration time
• When S-curve acceleration/deceleration and curve acceleration/deceleration is selected by curve

acceleration/deceleration H07, the actual acceleration/deceleration time becomes longer than the set
value.
• If acceleration/deceleration time is set shorter than necessary, current limiting function, torque limit or
anti-regenerative function may operate and acceleration/deceleration time may become longer than
the set value.
F09 Torque boost 1 (Refer to F37)
For details of torque boost 1 setting, refer to the section of function code F37.
F10 to F12 Electronic thermal 1 (for Motor protection) (Characteristics selection, Operation mode,
Thermal time constant)
In order to detect overload of motor (electronic thermal function by inverter output current), set temperature
characteristics of motor (characteristics selection (F10), thermal time constant (F12), and operation level (F11).
When overload of motor is detected, inverter is turned off, and protect the motor with motor overload alarm 0l1.
Improper setting of the electronic thermal function may result in a failure to protect the motor from
burning.
Temperature characteristics of motor is used for motor overload early warning "OL" as well. Even if only
overload early warning is used, it is necessary to set temperature characteristics of the motor (F10, F12).
( Function code E34)
When setting motor overload alarm as disable, set F11 = 0.00 (Disable).
For PTC thermistor built-in motor, by connecting PTC thermistor to terminal [C1], it is possible to protect
the motor. Refer to H26 to find the details.
5-47
 Characteristics selection (F10)

F10 selects characteristics of cooling system of the motor.
F10 data Function

Self-cooling fan of general-purpose motor (Self-cooling)
1
(When operating with low frequency, cooling performance decreases.)
Inverter-driven motor, High-speed motor with separately powered cooling fan
2
(Keep constant cooling capability irrespective to output frequency)
The following diagram shows electronic thermal operation characteristics diagram when F10=1 is set. The
characteristics coefficient α1 and α3 and the switch coefficient f2, f3 differ depending on the characteristics of the
motor.
Each coefficient that is set by motor characteristics that is selected by motor capacitance and motor selection
(P99) is shown in the table below.
Actual detection level (%)

Detection level setting (F11)
fb = Base frequency
fb = 60 Hz for base
frequency of 60 Hz or
higher
Output frequency
Characteristics diagram of motor cooling system
When P99 = 0, 4 (Motor characteristics 0, Other)
Thermal Characteristics coefficient Characteristics

Thermal time
time switch frequency coefficient
Motor constant setting
constant τ
capacitance Standard current
(Factory f2 f3 1 2 3
value Imax
default)
0.4, 0.75 kW 75% 85% 100%
7Hz
1.5 to 3.7 kW 85% 85% 100%
5.5 to 11 kW 5 min 5 Hz 6Hz 90% 95% 100%
15 kW Continuous 7Hz 85% 85% 100%
18.5, 22 kW allowance current 5Hz 92% 100% 100%
value x 150%
30 to 45 kW 54% 85% 95%
Base Base
55 to 90 kW 51% 95% 95%
10 min frequency × frequency ×
110 kW or 33% 83% 53% 85% 90%
higher
5-48
When P99 = 1 (Motor characteristics 1)

Thermal time Thermal time Characteristics coefficient Characteristics
Motor constant τ constant setting switch frequency coefficient
capacitance (Factory Standard current
f2 f3 1 2 3
default) value Imax
Base
0.2 to 22 kW 5 min frequency × 69% 90% 90%
Continuous 33%
Base
allowance
30 to 45 kW frequency × 54% 85% 95%
current value x Base
55 to 90 kW 33% 51% 95% 95%
10 min 150% frequency
110 kW or
× 83% 53% 85% 90%
higher
When F10=2 is set, cooling effect by output frequency will not decrease, therefore, operation level becomes
constant value (F11) without decrease.
 Operation level (F11)

F11 sets operation level of electronic thermal.
FUNCTION CODE
• Data setting range: 1 to 135% of the rated current value of inverter (continuous allowance current value)
Normally, set to the motor continuous allowance current (in general, about 1.0 to 1.1 times of motor rated current)
when operating at base frequency.
When setting electronic thermal as disable, set (F11 = 0.00: Disable)
 Thermal time constant (F12)
Chap 5
F12 sets thermal time constant of the motor. For operation level that is set by F11, set the electronic thermal
operation time when 150% of current is flowed continuously. Thermal time constant of general-purpose motor of
Fuji Electric and general motors is 5 minutes for 22 kW or lower, and 10 minutes (factory default state) for 30kW or
higher.
• Data setting range: 0.5 to 75.0 (min)
(Example) When the data of function code F12 is set to "5" (5 minutes).
As shown in the diagram below, when 150% of current of operation level that was set flows for 5 minutes, motor
overload (alarm 0l1) protection function will operate. In addition, with 120%, it is operated for 12.5 minutes.
The time when alarm actually occurs is shorter than the set data because the time until the current reaches 150%
level after exceeding the continuous allowance current (100%) is considered.
<Example of current-operation time characteristics>
Operation time (min.)
Changed
with F12
(Output current / Detection level current) x 100 (%)
5-49
F14 Momentary power failure restart (Operation selection)

Related function codes H13 Momentary power failure restart (Delay
time)
H14 Momentary power failure restart
(frequency lowering rate)
(Continue to run level)
(Momentary power failure allowance time)
H92 Continue to run (P)
H93 Continue to run (I)
Set the operation for when momentary power failure occurs (trip operation, restart operation method at
auto-restarting)
 Momentary power failure restart (Mode selection) (F14)

Operation contents
F14 data
Without auto search With auto search
0: Immediately trip When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and at the time when
undervoltage is detected by the DC link bus voltage of the inverter, undervoltage alarm lu
is outputted, the inverter output shuts down, and the motor coasts to a stop.
1: Trip at auto-restarting When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and at the time when
undervoltage is detected by the DC link bus voltage of the inverter , the inverter output
shuts down and the motor coasts to stop, but the undervoltage alarm will not be outputted.
When auto-started from momentary power failure, undervoltage alarm lu is outputted.
2: after momentary power When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter and start deceleration
failure is stopped Trip stop control when DC link bus voltage of the inverter becomes at or drops below the
continue to run level. At deceleration stop control, operation energy of inertia moment of
the load is regenerated by decelerating, and degeneration operation is continued. After
deceleration is stop, output alarm of lu.
3: Continue to run When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter and start deceleration
(for heavy inertia load stop control when DC link bus voltage of the inverter becomes at or drops below the
or general load) continue to run level. At continue to run control, operation energy of inertia moment of the
load is regenerated by decelerating, and operation is continued to wait for auto-restarting.
If there is not enough energy for regeneration and when undervoltage is detected, the
inverter output shuts down and the motor coasts to a stop.
If run command is entered at If run command is entered at
auto-restarting, restart from the frequency auto-restarting, auto-searching is
of when undervoltage is detected. performed, motor speed is estimated, and
restart from the frequency.
This setting is most suitable for the fan with large inertia moment of load.
4: from frequency at When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and at the time when
power failure Restart undervoltage is detected by the DC link bus voltage of the inverter, the inverter output
(for general load) shuts down, and the motor coasts to a stop.
auto-restarting, restart from the frequency auto-restarting, auto-searching is
of when undervoltage is detected. performed, motor speed is estimated, and
restart from the frequency.
This setting is most suitable for the case (fan) when load inertial moment is large, and
motor speed does not decrease so much even if the motor coasts to a stop due to
momentary power failure.
5: From starting When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and at the time when
frequency Restart undervoltage is detected by the DC link bus voltage of the inverter, the inverter output
shuts down, and the motor coasts to a stop.
auto-restarting, restart from the starting auto-restarting, auto-searching is
frequency that was set by function code performed, motor speed is estimated, and
F23. restart from the frequency.
This setting is most suitable for the case (pump etc.) when load inertia moment is small,
when the load is heavy, and motor speed decreases up to 0 in a short time after the motor
coasts to a stop due to momentary power failure.
With auto-searching: Auto-searching is selected by starting mode selection "STM' ON or H09 = 1 or 2.
Refer to function code H09 (Starting mode) to find the detail of starting mode selection "STM" ON auto-searching.
5-50
When momentary power failure restart operation (F14 = 3 to 5) is selected, operation will resume automatically
at auto-restarting. Design your machinery so that safety is ensured even at restarting.
 Momentary power failure restart (Basic operation: Without auto-searching setting)

When inverter detected that DC link bus voltage of inverter becomes at or drops below undervoltage level while
operating, it is judged as a momentary power failure. When load is light and momentary power failure is very short,
momentary power failure may not be detected and motor operation might be continued because DC link bus
voltage does not drop so much.
When inverter judges the state as momentary power failure, return to momentary power failure restart mode and
prepare for restart. After power is auto-restarted, the inverter becomes at inverter ready to run state after elapse of
initial charging time. At momentary power failure, power of external circuit (relay circuit etc.), which controls the
inverter, decreases as well, and run command may be turned off. Therefore, when the inverter becomes at inverter
ready to run state, wait 2 seconds for input of run command. When input of run command is confirmed within 2
seconds, initiate restarting according to F14 (mode selection). When there is no input of run command at run
FUNCTION CODE
command input waiting state, momentary power failure restart mode will be released and start from normal starting
frequency. Therefore, input run command within 2 seconds after auto-restarting or hold run command by off-delay
timer or mechanical latch relay.
When run command is from keypad, input of rotation direction command of the mode (F02 = 0) with which rotation
direction command is determined by the terminal, is the same. For rotation direction fixed mode (F02 = 2, 3), run
command is held within the inverter, therefore, restart immediately the inverter becomes at inverter ready to run
state.
Power Power
Chap 5
failure restoration
DC link bus
voltage
Undervoltage level
Power failure Preparation time:

period approx. 0.3 to 0.6 s
Gate command ON Gate OFF Preparation complete

Inverter
status
Stand by for run command
Run command
Restart
5-51
• At auto-restarting, wait 2 seconds for input of run command, however, if momentary power failure
allowance time (H16) is elapsed after the state is judged as power failure, the state of run command
input waiting for 2 seconds will be canceled and normal starting operation is performed.
• When coasts to a stop command "BX" is entered during power failure, momentary power failure
restart waiting state is released and return to normal run mode, and when run command is inputted,
start from normal starting frequency.
• Detection of momentary power failure within the inverter is performed by detecting DC link bus voltage
drop of the inverter. With the structure in which a magnetic contactor is equipped on the output side of
the inverter, there will be no operation power of the magnetic contactor at momentary power failure
and the magnetic contactor becomes at open state. When the magnetic contactor becomes open,
connection of inverter and motor is released and load of the inverter is shutdown. Therefore, it
becomes difficult to decrease DC link bus voltage of the inverter and it may not be judged as a
momentary power failure. If this is the case, momentary power failure restart will not be performed
normal. As a countermeasure against this case, by connecting auxiliary contact signal of the magnetic
contactor to the interlock signal "IL" it is possible to detect momentary power failure without fail.
Function code E01 to E05 Data = 22
Terminal command “IL” Meaning

OFF No momentary power failure has occurred.
A momentary power failure has occurred.
ON (Restart after a momentary power failure
enabled)
When motor speed decreases during momentary power failure, and when restarting from frequency of before
momentary power failure after power is recovered (auto-restarting), current limiter becomes active and output
frequency of the inverter decreases automatically. When output frequency and motor rotation speed synchronize,
the speed is accelerated up to the original output frequency. Refer to the figure below. However, it is necessary to
enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting (H12 = 1) to bring in synchronization of the motor.
Power Power
F14 = 4 failure restoration
DC link bus
voltage Undervoltage
Time
Synchronization
Output frequency (motor

rotational speed) Acceleration
Time
Auto-restarting after
momentary power failure IPF
Time
• Auto-restarting after momentary power failure "IPF"

During momentary power failure auto-restarting "IPF" signal is turned on until returning to original frequency after
auto-restarting after momentary power failure occurred. When "IPF: is turned ON, motor speed decreases,
therefore, take necessary measures. ( Function code E20, E21, E27 Data = 6)
5-52
 Momentary power failure restart (Basic operation: With auto-searching setting)

Auto-searching is not performed normally if there is residual voltage of the motor.
Therefore, it is necessary to secure the time until residual voltage runs out.
Momentary power failure restart secures the necessary time with function code H46 starting mode (auto-searching
delay time 2). Even if starting conditions are satisfied, inverter does not start unless auto-searching delay time
elapses after inverter goes into OFF state. Start after elapse of auto-searching delay time. ( Function code H09,
d67)
Power Power
failure restoration
DC link bus
voltage
Motor speed/output
frequency
FUNCTION CODE
Output frequency Motor speed
• When operating auto-searching, it is necessary to perform auto-tuning in advance.

• When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency, the inverter
disables auto search and starts running the motor with the maximum frequency or the upper limit
frequency, whichever is lower.
• During auto search, if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs, the inverter restarts the suspended
Chap 5
auto search.
• Use 60 Hz or below for auto-searching
• Note that auto search may not fully provide the performance depending on load conditions, motor
parameters, wiring length, and other external factors.
• When output circuit filter OFL--2, -4 is equipped on the output side of the inverter,
auto-searching is disabled. Use OFL--A type.
 Momentary power failure restart (Momentary power failure allowance time) (H16)
Set the maximum time for after momentary power failure (undervoltage level) occurs and up until restart (setting
range: 0.0 to 30.0 s). Set coast to a stop time which is allowable for machine and equipment. Momentary power
failure restart operation is performed within the specified time, however, if the set time is exceeded, the inverter
judges the state as a power shut down, and then operates as powering on again without performing momentary
power failure restart operation.
Power failure Power restoration
DC link bus
voltage
Undervoltage level
Power failure Preparation time:

period approx. 0.3 to 0.6 s
Inverter Gate command ON Preparation complete

status
Run command
(case 1)
Restart
Run command
(case 2)
Normal operation start
5-53
When momentary power failure allowance time (H16) is set to "999", momentary power failure restart is performed
until DC link bus voltage decreases by momentary power failure restart allowance voltage (50 V (200 V level), 100
V (400 V level), however, if the voltage becomes at or below the momentary power failure allowance voltage, the
state is judged as a power shut down. As a result, the inverter operates as powering ON again without performing
momentary power failure restart operating.
Power supply Allowance voltage of momentary

group power failure restart
200V 50V
400V 100V
The time until voltage decreases to the momentary power failure restart allowance voltage from
undervoltage differs greatly depending on the inverter capacitance and with/without option.
 Momentary power failure restart (Holding time) (H13)

H13 set the time until restart is performed after momentary power failure occurred. (At auto-searching setting,
use H46 (auto-searching holding time 2)).
Restarting at the state when residual voltage of the motor is high, inrush current becomes greater or temporarily
becomes at regeneration state, and overcurrent alarm may occur. For security reason, in order to restart after
residual voltage is reduced to some extent, adjust H13. Even if auto-restarted, restart cannot be performed until the
holding time (H13) elapses.
DC link bus
voltage
Undervoltage level
Inverter
status (1) In operation Preparation complete
Run
command
Inverter Operation start

Gate OFF
status (2) Gate command ON (gate ON)
Restart
Factory default: At the factory default state, setting is performed so that it is appropriate to the standard motor
(refer to table A at the end of "5.1 Function Code Overview"). Basically, there is no need to
modify the default setting. However, when problems occur due to the long holding time or
decrease in flow rate of pump becomes significant, change to about half of the standard value
and make sure that alarm etc. will not occur.
5-54
 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (H14)

At momentary power failure restart operation, when inverter output frequency and motor rotation speed does not
synchronize, overcurrent occurs and current limiter will operate. when current limit is detected, automatically
decrease the output frequency and synchronize with the motor rotation speed. H14 sets the slope of lowering
output frequency (frequency lowering rate (Hz/s)).
H14 data Output frequency lowering operation

0.00 Decrease by the selected deceleration time.
0.01 to 100.00 (Hz/s) Decrease by the lowering rate that is set by H14.
Depending on the PI processor of current limiting processing (PI constant is
999
fixed value within the inverter), the rate will decrease).
When frequency lowering rate is increased, regeneration operation is performed at the moment when
output frequency of the inverter and rotation speed of inverter synchronize, and overvoltage trip may
occur. When frequency lowering rate is reduced, the time until output frequency of the inverter and motor
rotation speed synchronize (current limiting operation) becomes longer, and protection operation of
inverter overload may be activated.
FUNCTION CODE
 Restart of momentary power failure (Continue to run level) (H15)
Continue to run (P, I) (H92, H93)
• Trip after momentary deceleration is stopped
When trip after deceleration stopped is selected (F14 = 2), at momentary power failure restart operation (Mode
selection), momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and deceleration stop control starts when
DC link bus voltage of the inverter becomes at or drops below the continuous running level.
Adjust voltage level of DC link bus to start deceleration stop control by H15.
Chap 5
Under decelerate-to-stop control, the inverter decelerates its output frequency keeping the DC link bus voltage
constant using the PI processor.
P (proportional) and I (integral) components of the PI processor are specified by H92 and H93, respectively.
For normal inverter operation, it is not necessary to modify data of H15, H92 or H93.
• Continue to run
When momentary power failure restart operation (Continue to run) is selected (F14 = 3) at momentary power
failure restart (operation selection), momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter and continue to
run control starts when DC link bus voltage of the inverter becomes at or drops below the continue to run level.
Adjust continue to run level to start continue to run control by H15.
Under the continue to run control, the inverter continues to run keeping the DC link bus voltage constant using the
PI processor.
P (proportional) and I (integral) components of the PI processor are specified by H92 and H93, respectively.
For normal inverter operation, it is not necessary to modify data of H15, H92 or H93.
DC link bus
voltage Continuous running reset level (H15 + α)
Continuous running level (H15)
Undervoltage level
Inverter output
frequency
Power α
supply
group 22 kW or below 30 kW or above
200 V 5V 10 V
400 V 10 V 20 V
5-55
Even if "Deceleration stop control" or "Continue to run", is selected, the inverter may not be able to do so
when the inertia of the load is small or the load is heavy, due to undervoltage caused by a control delay.
In such a case, when "Deceleration stop control" is selected, the inverter allows the motor to coast to a
stop; when "Continue to run" is selected, the inverter saves the output frequency being applied when the
undervoltage alarm occurs and perform momentary power failure restart operation.
When the input power voltage for the inverter is high, setting the continue to run level high makes the
control more stable even if the inertia of the load is relatively small. Raising the continuous running level
too high, however, might cause the continue to run control activated even during normal operation.
When the input power voltage for the inverter is extremely low, continue to run control might be activated
even during normal operation, at the beginning of acceleration or at an abrupt change in load. To avoid
this, lower the continuous running level. Lowering it too low, however, might cause undervoltage that
results from voltage drop due to a control delay.
Before you change the continuous running level, make sure that the continuous running control will be
performed properly, by considering the fluctuations of the load and the input voltage.
F15, F16 Frequency Limiter (Upper limit), Frequency Limiter (Lower limit)
Related function codes H63 Lower limit Limiter (Mode
selection)
 Frequency Limiter (Upper limit) (Lower limit) (F15, F16)

F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency or reference frequency, respectively.
Frequency Limiter Object to which the limit is applied

Frequency Limiter (High) F15 Output frequency
Frequency Limiter (Low) F16 Reference frequency
When the limit is applied to the reference frequency or reference speed, delayed responses of control may
cause an overshoot or undershoot, and the frequency may temporarily go beyond the limit level.
 Low Limiter (Mode selection) (H63)

H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the low level specified by
F16, as follows:
H63 data Action
0 The output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16.
1 The inverter decelerates to stop the motor.
Refer to the figure below.

Operation Operation
frequency frequency
Maximum frequency Maximum frequency
Frequency Frequency limiter (high)
limiter (high)
Frequency limiter (low) Frequency limiter (low)

Frequency Frequency
setting setting
(For H63 = 0) (For H63 = 1)
• When changing the frequency limiter (High) (F15) in order to raise the reference frequency, be sure to
change the maximum frequency (F03) accordingly.
• Set each function code related to operation frequency so that the relationship among data becomes
the following magnitude relationship.
- F15>F16, F15>F23, F15>F25
- F03>F16
However, F23 is the starting frequency, and F25 is stop frequency
If any wrong data for these function codes is specified, the inverter may not run the motor at the
desired speed, or cannot start it normally.
5-56
F18 Bias (for frequency setting 1) (Refer to F01)
Refer to the description of function code F01 to find the details of bias (Frequency setting 1) setting.
F20 to F22 DC braking1 (Starting frequency, Operation level, Time)

H95 DC braking (Braking response mode)
H195 DC braking time at the Startup
These function codes specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during
decelerate-to-stop operation.
If the motor enters a decelerate-to-stop operation by turning OFF the run command or by decreasing the reference
frequency below the stop frequency, the DC braking starts when output frequency reached the DC braking starting
frequency. Set frequency (F20), operation level (F21), and operation time (F22) to start DC braking when
deceleration is stopped.
Setting the braking time to "0.00" (F22 = 0) disables the DC braking.
FUNCTION CODE
By H195, it is possible to perform DC braking when starting up inverter. By doing so, it is efficient for preventing
from falling down when the brake is released and when load is decreased, and prompt torque startup when starting
up.
 Braking starting frequency (F20)

F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor decelerate-to-stop state.
Chap 5
 Operation level (F21)
F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated. The function code data
should be set, assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100%, in increments of 1%.
• ND:0 to 60(%), HD/HND:0 to 80%,HHD:0 to 100%
The inverter rated output current differs between the ND/HD/HND/HHD modes.
 Braking time (F22)

F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking.
• Data setting range: 0.00 (Disable), 0.01 to 30.00 (s)
 Braking response mode (H95)

H95 specifies the DC braking response mode.
H95 data Characteristics Note

Slow response. Slows the rising edge of the Insufficient braking torque may result at the
0 current, thereby preventing reverse rotation start of DC braking.
at the start of DC braking.
Quick response. Quickens the rising edge of Reverse rotation may result depending on
1 the current, thereby accelerating the the moment of inertia of the mechanical load
build-up of the braking torque. and the coupling mechanism.
5-57
Decelerate-to-stop start
Output
frequency (Hz)
DC braking 1
(braking starting
frequency) (F20)
Time
DC braking 1
(braking time)
(F22)
DC braking 1
(braking level)
DC braking current (F21)
Time
DC braking (braking
response mode)
(H95)
It is also possible to input DC braking command "DCBRK" by using an external digital input signal as the
terminal command. As long as the DCBRK is ON, the inverter performs DC braking, regardless of the
braking time specified by F22. (Refer to function code E01 to E05 Data =13 to find the details of
"DCBRK")
Turning the “DCBRK” ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates the DC braking. This
feature allows the motor to be excited before starting, resulting in smoother acceleration (quicker
build-up of acceleration torque) (under V/f control).
In general, specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip frequency of motor. If an
extremely high value is set, control may become unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some
cases.
The DC braking function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism.
Injuries could occur.
5-58
 Braking time at the Startup (H195)

When starting up inverter by run command, it is possible to start by operating DC breaking.
This is particularly useful in applications such as hoists and elevators where the inverter runs at low speed braking
right after starting up, preventing loads from falling.
• Data setting range: 0.00: No DC braking at the start up 0.01 to 30.00 (s)
FUNCTION CODE
Output
current
DC braking
(operation time at startup)
(H195)
Chap 5
Operating
command
Inter
operation
status
5-59
F23 to F25 Starting Frequency1, Starting Frequency 1 (Holding time), Stop frequency
Related function codes
F39 Stop frequency (Holding time)
Under V/f control

At the startup of an inverter, the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency. The inverter stops its
output when the output frequency reaches the stop frequency. Set the starting frequency to a level at which the
motor can generate enough torque for startup. Generally, set the rated slip frequency of the motor as the starting
frequency.
Specifying the holding time for the starting frequency compensates for the delay time for the establishment of a
magnetic flux in the motor; specifying that for the stop frequency stabilizes the motor speed at the stop of the
inverter.
Output frequency
Starting frequency 1 Stop frequency

(holding time) (holding time)
Starting
frequency 1 Stop frequency
Time
Inverter Shut off Inverter in operation (gate ON) Shut off

operation status (gate OFF) (gate OFF)
Time
 Starting Frequency 1 (F23)

F23 specifies the starting frequency at the startup of an inverter.
Under V/f control, even if the stop frequency is set at 0.0 Hz, the inverter stops its output at 0.1 Hz.
 Starting Frequency 1 (Holding time) (F24)

F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1.
• Data setting range: 0.00 to 10.00 (s)
 Stop frequency (F25)

F25 specifies the stop frequency at the stop of the inverter.
Under V/f control, even if the stop frequency is set at 0.0 Hz, the inverter stops its output at 0.1 Hz.
 Stop Frequency (Holding time) (F39)

F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency.
If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency, the inverter does not output any power as long
as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency.
5-60
F26, F27 Motor Sound (Carrier frequency, Tone)

Related function codes: H98 Protection/Maintenance
Function (Mode selection)
 Motor Sound (Carrier frequency) (F26)

Adjust carrier frequency. By changing carrier frequency, it is possible to reduce an audible noise generated by the
motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself, and to decrease a leakage current from the main output
(secondary) wiring.
Setting frequency of carrier frequency differs depending on each model overload rating (ND/HD/HND/HHD).
Item Characteristics
Carrier frequency Low to High
Motor sound noise emission High  Low
Motor temperature (due to
High  Low
harmonics components)
Ripples in output current
FUNCTION CODE
Large  Small
waveform
Leakage current Low  High
Electromagnetic noise
Low  High
emission
Inverter loss Low  High
Chap 5
Setting range of carrier frequency is as follows.
Modes 0.75 to 6kHz 0.75 to 10kHz 0.75 to 16kHz

FRNE2-4 (ND) 0072 to 0203 0059 Disable
FRNE2-4 (HD)
Disable 0072 to 0203 0059
FRNE2-4 (HND)
FRNE2-4 (HHD) Disable 0203 0059 to 0168
Specifying a carrier frequency that is too low will cause the output current waveform to have a large
amount of ripples. As a result, the motor loss increases, causing the motor temperature to rise.
Furthermore, the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm. When the carrier
frequency is set to 1 kHz or lower, therefore, reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to
be 80% or less of the rated current.
When a high carrier frequency is specified, the temperature of the inverter may rise due to the ambient
temperature rise or an increase of the load. If it happens, the inverter automatically decreases the carrier
frequency to prevent the inverter overload (0lu) . With consideration for motor noise, the automatic
reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled. Refer to the description of H98.
5-61
 Motor Sound (Tone) (F27)

F27 changes the motor running sound tone (only for motors under V/f control). This setting is effective when the
carrier frequency specified by function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower. Changing the tone level may reduce the high
and harsh running noise from the motor.
If the tone level is set too high, the output current may become unstable, or mechanical vibration and
noise may increase. Also, this function code may not be very effective for certain types of motor.
F27 data Function

0 Disable (Level 0)
1 Enable (Level 1)
2 Enable (Level 2)
3 Enable (Level 3)
F29 to F35 Terminal [FM], [FM2] (Mode selection, Output gain, Function selection, Pulse rate)
These function codes allow outputting monitor data such as output frequency and output current to terminal [FM],
[FM2] as analog DC voltage, current, and pulse ([FM] only). In addition, voltage and current value to be output to
terminal [FM], [FM2] is adjustable.
When switching voltage, current, and pulse, it is necessary to switch both mode selection function code
and switch on the PCB.
Terminal [FM2] is mounted only on C (for China).
There is no pulse output function for terminal [FM2]
Mode selection
Terminal Gain Function Pulse rate Switch
function
[FM] F29 F30 F31 F33 SW5
[FM2] F32 F34 F35 None SW7
 Mode selection (F29, F32)

F29 and F32 selects output form of terminal [FM], [FM2]. Accordingly ,change the switch SW5, SW7 on the PCB.
 For details of the switches on the PCB, refer to Chapter 12 "MODES."
F29 data Terminal [FM] output form Control PCB switch (SW5)
0 Voltage output (0 to +10 VDC) FMV side
1 Current output (4 to 20 mA DC)
FMI side
2 Current output (0 to 20mA DC)
3 Pulse output FMP side
F32 data Terminal [FM2] Output form Control PCB switch (SW7)
0 Voltage output (0 to +10 VDC) FMV side
1 Current output (4 to 20 mA DC)
FMI side
2 Current output (0 to 20mA DC)
The output current is not isolated from analog input, and does not have an isolated power supply.
Therefore, if an electrical potential relationship between the inverter and peripheral equipment has been
established, e.g., by connecting an analog, cascade connection of a current output device is not
available.
Keep the optimum connection wire length.
5-62
 Output gain (F30, F34)

F30, F34 allows you to adjust the output voltage within the range of 0 to 300%.
Terminal FM, FM2 output voltage
Meter
FUNCTION CODE
 Function selection (F31, F35)
F31, F35 specifies what is output to the output terminal [FM], [FM2].
F31
[FMA] output Data Definition of monitor amount 100%
data
Output frequency 1 Output frequency of the inverter
0 (before slip (Equivalent to the motor Maximum frequency (F03)
Chap 5
compensation) synchronous speed)
Output frequency 2
1 (after slip Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency (F03)
compensation)
2 Output current Output current (RMS) of the inverter Twice the inverter rated current
200 V class: 250 V
3 Output voltage Output voltage (RMS) of the inverter
400 V class: 500 V
4 Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque
Load factor (Equivalent to the
5 Load factor Twice the rated motor load
indication of the load meter)
Twice the rated motor output
6 Input power Input power of the inverter (Motor rated power dependent on
F80)
7 PID feedback amount Feedback amount under PID control 100% of the feedback amount
200 V class: 500 V
9 DC link bus voltage DC link bus voltage of the inverter
400 V class: 1000 V
Command from communication
10 Universal AO ( RS-485 communication user 20,000/100%
manual)
Twice the rated motor output
13 Motor output Motor output (kW)
(P02/A16 setting value standard)
For meter calibration Always full scale (equivalent to 100%)
14 Calibration
Full scale output Output
15 PID command (SV) Command value under PID control PID command 100%
Output level of the PID processor
16 PID output (MV) under PID control (Frequency Maximum frequency (F03)
command)
5-63
F31
[FMA] output Data Meter scale (Full scale at 100%)
data
Heat skin detection temperature of
18 Heat sink temperature 200°C/100%
inverter
Customizable logic
111 Enable only at analog output 100% to 100%
output signal 1
Customizable logic
output signal 2
Customizable logic
output signal 3
Customizable logic
output signal 4
Customizable logic
output signal 5
If F31 = 16 (PID output), J01 = 3 (Dancer control), and J62 = 2 or 3 (Ratio compensation enabled), the
PID output is equivalent to the ratio against the primary reference frequency and may vary within 300%
of the frequency. The monitor displays the PID output in a converted absolute value (%). To indicate the
value up to the full-scale of 300%, set F30 data to "33" (%).
■ Pulse rate (F33)

F33 specifies the pulse rate at which the output of the monitored item selected reaches 100%, in accordance with
the modes of the counter to be connected.
• Data setting range: 25 to 32000 (pulse/s)
Pulse output waveform Pulse output circuit
11.2 to
12.0V
Instruments
5-64
F37 Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation 1

Related function codes F09 Torque boost 1
F37 specifies V/f pattern, torque boost type, and auto energy saving operation in accordance with the
characteristics of the load.
Auto
F37
V/f characteristics Torque boost Energy-saving Applicable load
data
Operation
Variable torque V/f Variable torque load
0 By F09 torque
pattern (General-purpose fan and pumps)
boost
1 Constant torque load
Disable
Linear V/f pattern Constant torque load (To be selected
2 Auto torque Boost if a motor may be over-exited at no
load)
Variable torque V/f Variable torque load
3 By F09 torque
pattern (General-purpose fan and pumps)
boost
FUNCTION CODE
4 Constant torque load
Action
Linear V/f pattern Constant torque load (To be selected
5 Auto torque Boost if a motor may be over-exited at no
load)
If a required "load torque + acceleration toque" is 50% or more of the rated torque, it is recommended to
select the linear V/f pattern. Factory default is set to linear V/f pattern.
Chap 5
 V/f characteristics
The FRENIC-MEGA series of inverters offer a variety of V/f patterns and torque boosts, which include V/f patterns
suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps and for constant torque load (including special
pumps requiring high starting torque). Two types of torque boosts are available: manual and automatic.
Output voltage (V) Output voltage (V)
Rated voltage Rated voltage
Torque Output Torque Output

boost frequency boost frequency
Base Base
frequency 1 frequency 1
Variable torque V/f pattern (F37 = 0) Linear V/f pattern (F37 = 1)
When the variable torque V/f pattern is selected (F37 = 0 or 3), the output voltage may be low at a low
frequency zone, resulting in insufficient output torque, depending on the characteristics of the motor and
load. In such a case, it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using
the non-linear V/f pattern.
Recommended value: H50 = 1/10 of the base frequency
H51 = 1/10 of the voltage at base frequency
5-65
Output V/f pattern of variable

voltage (V) torque V/f pattern with
non-linear V/f
Rated voltage at
base frequency 1
V/f pattern of variable

torque V/f pattern
without non-linear V/f
Non-linear V/f
pattern 1 (voltage)
Output frequency
Non-linear V/f
pattern 1 Base
(frequency) frequency 1
 Torque boost
• Manual torque boost by F09 (Manual adjustment)
• Data setting range: 0.0 to 20.0 (%), (100%/base frequency voltage)
In torque boost using F09, constant voltage is added to the basic V/f pattern, regardless of the load. To secure a
sufficient starting torque, manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09.
Specify an appropriate level that guarantees smooth Startup and yet does not cause over-excitation at no or light
load.
Torque boost using F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant regardless of the
load fluctuation.
Specify the function code F09 data in percentage to the base frequency voltage. At factory shipment, boost amount
with which approx. 100% of starting torque can be assured, is specified.
• Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque, but may cause overcurrent due to
over-excitation at no load. If you continue to drive the motor, it may overheat. To avoid such a
situation, adjust torque boost to an appropriate level.
• When the non-linear V/f pattern and the torque boost are used together, the torque boost takes effect
below the frequency on the non-linear V/f pattern’s point.
Output voltage (V)
Increase output
Rated voltage at voltage with Torque
base frequency 1 boost 1 (F09)
Non-linear V/f
pattern 1 (voltage)
Torque boost 1
Output frequency
Non-linear V/f
pattern 1 Base
(frequency) frequency 1
5-66
• Auto torque boost

This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load. Under light load,
auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over-excitation. Under heavy load, it
increases the output voltage to increase the output torque of the motor.
• This function controls in accordance with motor characteristics. Therefore, set the base frequency 1
(F04), base frequency voltage 1 (F05), and other pertinent motor parameters (P01 through P03 and
P06 through P99) in line with the motor capacity and characteristics, or else perform auto-tuning
(P04).
• When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity, the maximum torque might
decrease or the motor operation might become unstable. In such cases, do not use auto torque boost
but choose manual torque boost using F09 (F37 = 0 or 1).
F39 Stop Frequency (Holding time) (Refer to F23)
For details about the setting of the stop frequency (holding time), refer to the description of F23.
FUNCTION CODE
Chap 5
5-67
F40, F41 Torque limiter 1 (Drive), Torque limiter 1 (Braking)

Related function codes E16, E17 Torque limiter 2 (Drive), Torque limiter 2
(Braking)
H76 Torque control (Braking) (Frequency
increment limit for braking)
If the inverter output torque exceeds the specified levels of the torque limiters (F40, F41, E16, E17, and E61 to
E63), the inverter controls the output frequency and limits the output torque for preventing a stall.
To use the torque limiters, it is necessary to configure the function codes listed in the table below.
In braking, the inverter increases the output frequency to limit the output torque. Depending on the
conditions during operation, the output frequency could dangerously increase. H76 (Frequency
increment limit for braking) is provided to limit the increasing frequency component.
Related function codes

Function
Name V/f control Remarks
code
F40 Torque limiter 1 (Drive) 
F41 Torque limiter 1 (Braking) 
E16 Torque limiter 2 (Drive) 
E17 Torque limiter 2 (Braking) 
Torque Limiter (Frequency increment limit for
H76 
braking)
Terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function) • (V2 function) 7: Analog torque limit value A
E61 to E63 
Extension function selection 8: Analog torque limit value B
 Torque limit control mode

Torque limit is performed by limiting torque current flowing across the motor.
The graph below shows the relationship between the torque and the output frequency at the constant torque
current limit.
Torque Constant torque limit
Constant output limit
Output frequency
Base frequency
5-68
 Torque limiter (F40, F41, E16, E17) Data setting range: 0 to 300%; 999 (Disable)
These function codes specify the operation level at which the torque limiters become activated, as the percentage
of the motor rated torque.
Function
Name Torque limit feature
code
F40 Torque limiter 1 (Drive) Driving torque current limiter 1
F41 Torque limiter 1 (Braking) Braking torque current limiter 1
E16 Torque limiter 2 (Drive) Driving torque current limiter 2
E17 Torque limiter 2 (Braking) Braking torque current limiter 2
Although the setting range of the torque is 300%, the torque limiter determined by the overload current of
the unit internally limits the torque current output. Therefore, the torque current output is automatically
limited at a value lower than 300%, the maximum setting value.
 Analog torque limit values (E61 to E63)
FUNCTION CODE
The torque limit value can be specified by analog inputs (voltage or current) through terminals [12], [C1] (C1
function), and [C1] (V2 function). Assign by function code E61, E62, E63 (Terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function), [C1] (V2
function)(Extension function selection) as follows.
E61, E62, E63

Function Description
data
7 Analog torque limit value A Used when analog inputs are used as torque limiters. Input
8 Analog torque limit value B modes: 200% / 10 V or 20 mA
Chap 5
If these terminals have been set up to have the same data, the operation priority is given in the following order: E61
> E62 > E63
Refer to E59 on how to use terminals [C1] (C1 function) and [C1] (V2 function).
 Torque limiter levels specified via communications link (S10, S11)
The torque limiter levels can be changed via the communications link. Communication dedicated code S10, S11
interlocks with the function code F40, F41.
5-69
 Switching torque limiters

The torque limiters can be switched by the function code setting and the terminal command “TL2/TL1” (Select
torque limiter level 2/1) assigned to any of the digital input terminals. To assign the Torque limiter 2/Torque limiter 1,
“TL2/TL1” set Data = 14 by function code from E01 to E05. If no “TL2/TL1” is assigned, torque limiter levels 1-1
and 1-2 (F40 and F41) take effect by default.
E61 to E63 “TL2/TL1”
Torque limiter 1 (driving)
Analog torque limit value A

Driving torque
limiter
Torque limiter 2 (driving)
E61 to E63 “TL2/TL1”
Torque limiter 1 (braking)
Analog torque limit value B

Braking torque
limiter
Torque limiter 2 (braking)
 Torque limiter (Braking) (Frequency increment limit for braking) (H76) Data setting range:
0.0 to 500.0 (Hz)
H76 specifies the increment limit of the frequency in limiting torque for braking. The factory default is 5.0 Hz. If the
increasing frequency during braking reaches the limit value, the torque limiters no longer function, resulting in an
overvoltage trip. Such a problem may be avoided by increasing the setting value of H76.
The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar in function. If both are activated concurrently, they
may conflict with each other and cause hunting. Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters.
5-70
F42 Control methodselection 1

Related function codes: H68 Slip Compensation 1
(Operating conditions)
F42 specifies the motor drive control.
F42 data Control mode Basic control Speed feedback Speed control
Frequency
0 V/f control: No slip compensation
control
Vector control without speed sensor
Dynamic torque vector control V/f control Disable With slip
1 compensation
(With slip compensation and auto
torque boost) Frequency
control
2 V/f control: With slip compensation
 V/f control with slip compensation inactive
FUNCTION CODE
Under this control, the inverter controls a motor with the voltage and frequency according to the V/f pattern
specified by function codes. This control disables all automatically controlled features such as the slip
compensation, so no unpredictable output fluctuation occurs, enabling stable operation with constant output
frequency.
 V/f control with slip compensation active

Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics, decreasing the
motor rotation. The inverter’s slip compensation function first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the
Chap 5
motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation. This
prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip.
Function code Action

P12 Rated slip frequency Specify the rated slip frequency.
Adjust the slip compensation amount for driving.
Slip compensation gain for
P09 Slip compensation amount for driving = Rated slip x Slip compensation
driving
gain for driving
Adjust the slip compensation amount for braking.
Slip compensation gain for
P11 Slip compensation amount for braking = Rated slip x Slip compensation
braking
gain for braking
Slip compensation Specify the slip compensation response time. Basically, there is no
P10
response time need to modify the setting.
To improve the accuracy of slip compensation, perform auto-tuning.

H68 enables or disables the slip compensation function 1 according to the motor driving conditions.
Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone

H68 data During constant Base frequency or Above the base
Accl/Decel
speed below frequency
0 Enable Enable Enable Enable
1 Disable Enable Enable Enable
2 Enable Enable Enable Disable
3 Disable Enable Enable Disable
5-71
 Vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector)

To get the maximal torque out of a motor, this control calculates the motor torque matched to the load applied and
uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output.
When the vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector) is selected, automatically auto torque boost
and slip compensation become enabled. This control is effective for improving the system response to external
disturbances such as load fluctuations, and the motor speed control accuracy.
Note that the inverter may not respond to a rapid load fluctuation.
For slip compensation without vector control without speed sensor, constant of motor is used. Therefore,
satisfy the following conditions: If the conditions below cannot be satisfied, sufficient control performance
may not be able to obtain.
• A single motor is controlled per inverter.
• The prerequisite is that motor parameter P02, P03, P06 to P13 are accurately set or auto-tuning is
performed.
• Under control without speed sensor, the capacity of motor to be controlled must be within the capacity
of two ranks lower than that of inverter. Otherwise, the inverter may not control the motor due to
decrease of the current detection resolution.
• The capacity of motor to be controlled must be the wiring distance between the inverter and motor is
50 m or less. If it is longer, the inverter may not control the motor due to leakage current flowing
through stray capacitance to the ground or between wires. Especially, small capacity inverters whose
rated current is also small may be unable to control the motor correctly even if the wiring is less than
50 m. In that case, make the wiring length as short as possible or use a wire with small stray
capacitance (e.g., loosely-bundled cable) to minimize the stray capacitance.
5-72
F43, F44 Current Limiter (Mode selection and Level)

Related function codes: H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent
Limiting (Mode selection)
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter (F44), the inverter
automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limits the output current. According to limit value
based on Inverter’s rated current, the default setting of the current limiter is 160% for HHD/HD mode, and 130% for
HND/ND mode, respectively (Initial value is automatically written when selecting ND/HD/HND/HHD by function
code F80) If overload current, 160% (130%) or more of the current limit level, flows instantaneously so that an
output frequency decrease problem arises due to the current limiter, consider increasing the current limit level.
The current limiter mode should be also selected with F43. If F43 = 1, the current limiter is enabled only during
constant speed operation. If F43 = 2, it is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation.
Choose F43 = 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the output current
during constant speed operation.
 Mode selection (F43)

F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter becomes active.
FUNCTION CODE
Running states that enable the current limiter
F43 data
During acceleration During constant speed During deceleration
0 Disable Disable Disable
1 Disable Action Disable
2 Action Action Disable
Chap 5
 Level (F44)
F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated, in ratio to the inverter
rating.
• Data setting range: 20 to 200 (%) (in ratio to the inverter rating)
(Inverter’s rated current changes according to the setting value of function code F80.)
 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting (Mode selection) (H12)
H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip when its
output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level. Under the current limit processing, the inverter
immediately turns OFF its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output
frequency.
H12 data Function

0 Disable (An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level.)
1 Enable (An instantaneous overcurrent limiting operation is activated)
If any problem could occur when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing, it is
necessary to cause an overcurrent trip (H12 = 0) and actuate a mechanical brake at the same time.
• Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software, it may cause a delay in
control. If you need a quick response current limiting, also enable the instantaneous overcurrent
limiting with H12.
• If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set extremely low, the
inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency. This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous
turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting. Depending on the load, extremely short
acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output
frequency, causing hunting (undesirable oscillation of the system) or activating the inverter
overvoltage trip (alarm 0u ). When specifying the acceleration time, therefore, you need to take into
account machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load.
• The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar in function. If both are activated concurrently,
they may conflict with each other and cause hunting. Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters.
5-73
F50 to F52 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor (Discharging capability,
Allowable average loss and Resistance)
These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking resistor.
Set the discharging capability, allowable average loss and resistance to F50, F51 and F52, respectively. These
values are determined by the inverter and braking resistor models. For the discharging capability, allowable
average loss and resistance, refer to Chapter 11, Section 11.8.4 "Specifications."
The values listed in the tables are for standard models and 10% ED models of the braking resistors which Fuji
Electric provides. When using a braking resistor of any other manufacturer, confirm the corresponding values with
the manufacture and set the function codes accordingly.
Set 0.00 to F52 when replacing from FRENIC-Multi.
Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor, the electronic thermal
overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm dbh even if
the actual temperature rise is not large enough. If it happens, review the relationship between the
performance index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes.
Using the standard models of braking resistor or using the braking unit and braking resistor together can
output temperature detection signal for overheat. Assign terminal command THR ("Enable external
alarm trip") to any of digital input terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD] and [REV] and connect that terminal and
its common terminal to braking resistor's terminals 2 and 1.
Calculating the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor and
configuring the function code data
When using any non-Fuji braking resistor, inquire of the resistor manufacturer about the resistor rating and then
configure the related function codes.
The calculation procedures for the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor differ
depending on the application of the braking load as shown below.
<Applying braking load during deceleration>

In usual deceleration, the braking load decreases as the speed slows down. In the deceleration with constant
torque, the braking load decreases in proportion to the speed.
Use Expressions (1) and (3) given below.
Applying braking load during running at a constant speed

Different from during deceleration, in applications where the braking load is externally applied during running at a
constant speed, the braking load is constant.
Use Expressions (2) and (4) given below.
Braking load (kW) Braking load (kW)
(Braking time) (Braking time)
<Applying braking load during deceleration> <Applying braking load during running at a constant speed>
5-74
 Discharging capability (F50)

The discharging capability refers to kWs allowance for a single braking cycle. It can be calculated from breaking
time and motor capacity.
F50 data Function

1 to 9000 1 to 9000 (kWs)
OFF Disable the electronic thermal overload protection
Braking time (s) × Motor rated capacity (kW)

Discharging capability (kWs) =
2 (1)
Discharging capability (kWs) = Braking time (s) x Motor rated capacity (kW) (2)
 Allowable average loss (F51)

Allowance average loss is the resistor capacitor that enables continuous operation of motor. It can be calculated
from ED (%) and motor capacity (kW).
FUNCTION CODE
F51 data Function
0.001 to 99.99 0.001 to 99.99 (kW)
%ED(%)
× Motor rated capacity (kW)
100
Allowable average loss (kWs) =
2 (3)
Chap 5
%ED(%)
Allowable average loss (kWs) = × Motor rated capacity (kW)
100 (4)
 Resistance (F52)
F52 specifies the resistance of the braking resistor.
F52 data Function

Braking resistor protection method by FRENIC-Muiti method (Resistance not
0.00
required)
0.01 to 999 0.01 to 999 (Ω)
5-75
F80 ND/ HD/ HND/ HHD switching
HDD is the mode standard for J (for Japanese) mode, therefore, it is possible to use with the one or two frames
above the motor reference rated current by switching to HND/HD/ND mode. However, ambient temperature
condition, overload capability becomes lower.
ND is the mode standard for modes other than J (for Japanese) mode, therefore, it is possible to alleviate ambient
temperature condition and overoad capability by switching to HHD/HND/HD mode. However, rated current
becomes one or two frames lower than the motor reference rated current.
To change the data of function code F80 data, double key operation with " key + / key" is necessary.
Maximum
Ambient Overload
F80 data Drive mode Application Rated current level output
temperature capability
frequency
Capable of driving a motor
150% 1min,
0 HHD mode Heavy load whose capacity is the same 50°C 500Hz
200% 0.5s
as the inverter capacity.
whose capacity is one rank
1 HND mode Light load 50°C 120% 1 min 500Hz
higher than the inverter
capacity.
whose capacity is one rank
3 HD mode Medium load 40°C 150% 1 min 500Hz
capacity.
whose capacity is two rank
4 ND mode Light load 40°C 120% 1 min 120Hz
capacity.
For the concrete rated current level, refer to "Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS." Factory default is 0: HHD for Japan
and 4: ND for other countries.
When using by changing the mode of 75kw or higher, make sure to connect direct current reactor (DCR)
with the specified capacitance. However, it is not necessary when using PWM converter.
Failure may occur
ND, HD, HND, and HHD-mode inverters are subject to restrictions on the function code data setting range and
internal processing as listed below.
Function
Name Remarks
code
F21 DC braking 1 (Operation level) Upper limit restriction
F26 Motor sound (Carrier frequency) Upper limit restriction
F44 Current limiter (Operation level) Default setting, setting value
F03 Maximum frequency Output enabled frequency range
A10 DC braking 2 (Braking level) Upper limit
J68 Brake Signal Brake-OFF current Upper limit
Refer to explanation of each function code and selection guidance in Chapter 10.
5-76
5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions)
E01 to E05 Terminals [X1] to [X5] (function selection)

Related function codes: Terminal E98 [FWD] (function selection)
Terminal E99 [REV] (function selection)
E01 to E05, E98 and E99 assign commands to general-purpose, programmable, digital input terminals, [X1] to
[X5], [FWD], and [REV].
These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter
logic interprets the ON or OFF state of each terminal. The factory default setting is normal logic system “Active ON.
Functions assigned to digital input terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD] and [REV] are as shown below. Descriptions that
follow are given in normal logic system. The descriptions are, in principle, arranged in the numerical order of
assigned data. However, highly relevant signals are collectively described where one of them first appears. Refer
to the function codes in the “Related function codes” column, if any.
• Run commands (e.g., Run forward “FWD”), stop commands (e.g., Coast to a stop “BX”), and frequency
FUNCTION CODE
change commands can be assigned to digital input terminals. Depending on the state of digital input
terminals, modifying a function code setting alone may cause abrupt start of operation or significant
change of the speed. Ensure safety before modifying the function code settings.
• Functions for switching run or frequency command sources (such as “SS1, SS2, SS4, SS8”, “Hz2/Hz1”,
“Hz/PID”, “IVS” and “LE”) can be assigned to the digital input terminals. Switching these signals may
cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed depending on the condition.
An accident or physical injury may result.
Chap 5
Data
Related
Terminal commands assigned Symbol
function codes
Active ON Active OFF
0 1000 “SS1”
1 1001 “SS2”
Select multi-frequency (0 to 15 steps) C05 to C19
2 1002 “SS4”
3 1003 “SS8”
4 1004 Select ACC/DEC time (2 steps) “RT1”

F07, F08,
E10 to E15
5 1005 Select ACC/DEC time (4 steps) “RT2”
6 1006 Enable 3-wire operation “HLD” F02
7 1007 Coast to a Stop “BX” ―
8 1008 Reset alarm “RST” ―
1009 9 Enable external alarm trip “THR” ―
C20 H54, H55,

10 1010 Ready for jogging “JOG”
d09 to d13
11 1011 Select frequency command 2/1 “Hz2/Hz1” F01, C30
12 1012 Select motor 2 “M2” A42
13 - Enable DC braking “DCBRK” F20 to F22
5-77
Data
Related
function codes
F40, F41 E16,

14 1014 Select torque limiter level 2/1 “TL2/TL1”
E17
15 ― Switch to commercial power (50 Hz) “SW50” ―
16 ― Switch to commercial power (60Hz) “SW60” ―
17 1017 UP (Increase output frequency) “UP” Frequency

command: F01,
C30
18 1018 DOWN (Decrease output frequency) “DOWN” PID command:
J02
19 1019 Enable data change with keypad “WE-KP” F00
J01 to J19, J56

20 1020 Cancel PID control “Hz/PID”
to J62
21 1021 Switch normal/inverse operation “IVS” C53, J01
22 1022 Interlock “IL” F14
Enable communications link

24 1024 “LE” H30, y98
(RS-485, BUS option)
25 1025 Universal DI “U-DI” ―
Enable auto search for idling motor speed at

26 1026 “STM” H09, d67
starting
1030 30 Force to stop “STOP” F07, H56
33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components “PID-RST”

J01 to J19, J56
to J62
34 1034 Hold PID integral component “PID-HLD”
(See Section
35 1035 Select local (keypad) operation “LOC”
7.3.6)
46 1046 Overload stop enable "OLS" J63 to 67
Pulse train input (available only on terminal

48 ― “PIN”
[X5])
F01, C30 d62,
d63
Pulse train sign (available on terminals except
49 1049 “SIGN”
[X5])
65 1065 Brake check signal “BRKE” J68 to 96
76 1076 Select droop control “DROOP” H28
80 1080 Cancel customizable logic "CLC"

E01 toE05, U81
to U90
81 1081 Clear all customizable logic timers "CLTC"
82 1082 Anti-regenerative control cancel "AR-CCL" H69
Run forward (Exclusively assigned to [FWD]

98 ― “FWD”
and [REV] terminals by E98 and E99)
F02
Run reverse (Exclusively assigned to [FWD]
99 ― “REV”
and [REV] terminals by E98 and E99)
5-78
Data
Related
function codes
100 ― No function assigned “NONE” U81 to U90
171 1171 PID multi-step command 1 “PID-SS1”

J136 to J138
172 1172 PID multi-step command 2 “PID-SS2”
Any negative logic (Active OFF) command cannot be assigned to the functions marked with "-" in the
"Active OFF" column.
The "Enable external alarm trip" (data = 1009) and "Force to stop" (data = 1030) are fail-safe terminal
commands. In the case of "Enable external alarm trip," when data = 1009, "Active ON" (alarm is triggered
when ON); when data = 9, "Active OFF" (alarm is triggered when OFF).
Terminal function assignment and data setting
FUNCTION CODE
 Select multi-frequency – “SS1”, “SS2”, “SS4”, and “SS8” (Function code data = 0, 1, 2, and
3)
The combination of the ON/OFF states of digital input signals “SS1”, “SS2”, “SS4” and “SS8” selects one of 16
different frequency commands defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19 (Multi-frequency 0 to 15). With
this, the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset frequencies.
(Function codes C05 to C19)
Chap 5
 Select ACC/DEC time – “RT1” and “RT2” (Function code data = 4 and 5)
These terminal commands switch between ACC/DEC time 1 to 4 (F07, F08 and E10 through E15).
(Functions codes F07 and F08)
 Enable 3-wire operation – “HLD” (Function code data = 6)

Turning this terminal command ON self-holds the forward “FWD”, reverse “REV”, or hold "HLD" run command, to
enable 3-wire inverter operation.
(Function code F02)
 Coast to a stop -- “BX” (Function code data = 7)

Turning “BX” ON immediately shuts down the inverter output. The motor coasts to a stop, without issuing any
alarms.
 Reset alarm – “RST” (Function code data = 8)

Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state--alarm output (for any alarm). Turning it OFF erases the
alarm display and clears the alarm hold state. When you turn the “RST” command ON, keep it ON for 10 ms or
more. This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation.
Alarm generated
Inverter
operation Alarm indication illuminated No alarm indication
status Alarm hold state (stop) Operable state
Alarm output
(for any alarm)
ALM
10 ms min.
Reset alarm
RST
5-79
 Enable external alarm trip – “THR” (Function code data = 9)

Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output (so that the motor coasts to a
stop), displays the alarm 0h2, and issues the alarm output (for any alarm) ALM. The THR command is self-held,
and is reset when an alarm reset takes place.
Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to immediately shut down the
inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in peripheral equipment.
 Ready for jogging – “JOG” (Function code data = 10)

This terminal command is used to jog or inch the motor for positioning a workpiece.
Turning this command ON makes the inverter ready for jogging.
(Function code C20)
 Select frequency command 2/1 – “Hz2/Hz1” (Function code data = 11)

Turning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between frequency
command 1 (F01) and frequency command 2 (C30).
 Select motor 2 – “M2” (Function code data = 12)

The terminal command M2 switches to either of the 1st and 2nd motors.
 Enable DC braking – “DCBRK” (Function code data = 13)

This terminal command gives the inverter a DC braking command through the inverter’s digital input.
(Requirements for DC braking must be satisfied.)
(Function codes F20 to F22)
 Select torque limiter level 2/1 – “TL2/TL1” (Function code data = 14)
This terminal command switches between torque limiter 1 (F40 and F41) and torque limiter 2-1, 2-2 (E16 and E17).
(Function codes F40 and F41)
 Switch to commercial power for 50 Hz or 60 Hz – “SW50” and “SW60” (Function code data =
15 and 16)
When an external sequence switches the motor drive power from the commercial line to the inverter, the terminal
command SW50 or SW60 enables the inverter to start running the motor with the current commercial power
frequency, regardless of settings of the reference/output frequency in the inverter. A running motor driven by
commercial power is carried on into inverter operation. This command helps you smoothly switch the motor drive
power source from the commercial power to the inverter power.
For details, refer to the table below, the operation scheme and an example of external sequence and its operation
time scheme on the following pages.
Terminal command assigned Action

Switch to commercial power for 50 Hz
Starts at 50 Hz.
“SW50” Do not concurrently assign both SW50 and
Switch to commercial power for 60 Hz SW60.
Starts at 60 Hz.
“SW60”
5-80
<Operation timing scheme>

• When the motor speed remains almost the same during coast-to-stop:
0.1s min. 0.2s min.
Switch to commercial
power signal “SW50”
Run command
“FWD”
Coast to a stop
command “BX”
Commercial power
frequency Motor speed Restart mode after momentary
power failure (H13)
Inverter reference
Inverter output frequency
frequency
FUNCTION CODE
Inverter start at
commercial power
frequency
• When the motor speed decreases significantly during coast-to-stop (with the current limiter activated)
0.1s min. 0.2s min.
Chap 5
power signal “SW50”
Run command
“FWD”
Coast to a stop
command “BX”
Commercial power
frequency Motor speed Restart mode after momentary
power failure (H13)
Inverter reference
Inverter output frequency
frequency
Inverter start at
commercial power
frequency
• Secure more than 0.1 second after turning ON the "Switch to commercial power" signal before turning
ON a run command.
• Secure more than 0.2 second of an overlapping period with both the "Switch to commercial power"
signal and run command being ON.
• If an alarm has been issued or BX has been ON when the motor drive source is switched from the
commercial power to the inverter, the inverter will not be started at the commercial power frequency
and will remain OFF. After the alarm has been reset or “BX” turned OFF, operation at the frequency of
the commercial power will not be continued, and the inverter will be started at the ordinary starting
frequency.
If you wish to switch the motor drive source from the commercial line to the inverter, be sure to turn
“BX” OFF before the "Switch to commercial power" signal is turned OFF.
• When switching the motor drive source from the inverter to commercial power, adjust the inverter's
reference frequency at or slightly higher than that of the commercial power frequency beforehand,
taking into consideration the motor speed down during the coast-to-stop period produced by
switching.
• Note that when the motor drive source is switched from the inverter to the commercial power, a high
inrush current will be generated, because the phase of the commercial power usually does not match
the motor speed at the switching. Make sure that the power supply and all the peripheral equipment
are capable of withstanding this inrush current.
• If you have enabled "Restart after momentary power failure" (F14 = 3, 4, or 5), keep “BX” ON during
commercial power driven operation to prevent the inverter from restarting after a momentary power
failure.
5-81
Example of Sequence Circuit
Main circuit
power
Operation switch
Forward run Commercial
command power Coast to a stop Commercial
Run power
Normal Emergency
Stop
Inverter
Alarm
Note 1) Note 2
Emergency
switch Normal Emergency Alarm
Commercial
power
(Stop)
(Run)
Control
power
Commercial power
Run command Inverter operation operation
Note 1) Emergency switch

Manual switch provided for the event that the motor drive source cannot be switched normally to the
commercial power due to a serious problem of the inverter
Note 2) When any alarm has occurred inside the inverter, the motor drive source will automatically be switched to
the commercial power.
5-82
Example of Operation Time Scheme

Switching to commercial
power due to alarm
Inverter Commercial power Inverter generated during inverter
operation operation operation operation
Run
Stop
Run command
Alarm generated
Alarm
Select commercial
power Inverter Commercial power Inverter
Inverter primary
FUNCTION CODE
Inverter secondary
delay timer T3
(on-delay)
Inverter secondary
power delay timer T1
(off-delay)
Chap 5
Forward run command
power delay timer T2
(off-delay)
Select commercial power
Coast to a stop
Commercial power
circuit
Normal
acceleration
Inverter output and Motor rotation
motor rotation
Motor coast to a stop Motor coast to a stop Motor coast to a stop
Inverter output
coast to a stop Harmonization
 “UP” (Increase output frequency) and “DOWN” (Decrease output frequency) commands --
UP and DOWN (Function code data = 17 and 18)
• Frequency command: Turning the terminal command “UP” or “DOWN” ON causes the output frequency to
increase or decrease, respectively, within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency. (Function code
F01 data = 7)
• PID command: Turning the terminal command “UP” or “DOWN” ON causes the PID command value to increase
or decrease, respectively, within the range from 0 to 100%. (Function code J02 (data= 3)
 Enable data change with keypad – “WE-KP” (Function code data = 19)
Turning the terminal command “WE-KP” ON protects function code data from accidentally getting changed by
pressing the keys on the keypad. Only when this terminal command is ON, you can change function code data
from the keypad. (Function code F00)
5-83
 Cancel PID control – “Hz/PID” (Function code data = 20)

Turning this terminal command “Hz/PID” ON disables PID control. If the PID control is disabled with this command,
the inverter runs the motor with the reference frequency manually set by any of the multi-frequency, keypad,
analog input, etc.
Terminal command “Hz/PID” Function

OFF Enable PID control
ON Disable PID control (Enable manual settings)
(Function codes J01 to J19, J57 to J62)
 Switch normal/inverse operation – “IVS” (Function code data = 21)

This terminal command switches the output frequency control between normal (proportional to the input value) and
inverse in analog frequency setting or under PID process control. To select the inverse operation, turn the IVS ON.
Output frequency
Inverse operation
Normal
operation
Analog input voltage

Analog input current
The normal/inverse switching operation is useful for air-conditioners that require switching between
cooling and heating. In cooling, the speed of the fan motor (output frequency of the inverter) is increased
to lower the temperature. In heating, the speed of the fan motor (output frequency of the inverter) is
reduced to lower the temperature. This switching is realized by the IVS.
• When the inverter is driven by an external analog frequency command sources (terminals [12]
and [C1] (C1 function) and [C1] (V2 function)):
Switching normal/inverse operation can apply only to the analog frequency command sources (terminals [12] and
[C1] (C1 function) and [C1] (V2 function)) in frequency command 1 (F01) and does not affect frequency command
2 (C30) or UP/DOWN control. As listed below, the combination of the "Selection of normal/inverse operation for
frequency command 1" (C53) and the terminal command “IVS” determines the final operation. Combination of C53
and “IVS”
C53 data Terminal command “IVS” Action

0: Normal operation OFF Normal
0: Normal operation ON Inverse
1: Inverse operation OFF Inverse
1: Inverse operation ON Normal
• When process control is performed by the PID processor integrated in the inverter:
The terminal command Hz/PID ("Cancel PID control") can switch PID control between enabled (process is to be
controlled by the PID processor) and disabled (process is to be controlled by the manual frequency setting). In
either case, the combination of the "PID control" (J01) or "Selection of normal/inverse operation for frequency
command 1" (C53) and the terminal command IVS determines the final operation as listed below.
5-84
• When PID control is enabled: The normal/inverse operation selection for the PID processor
output (reference frequency) is as follows.
PID control (Mode selection) (J01) Terminal command “IVS” Action
OFF Normal
1: Enable (normal operation)
ON Inverse
OFF Inverse
2: Enable (inverse operation)
ON Normal
• When PID control is disabled: The normal/inverse operation selection for the manual
reference frequency is as follows.
Selection of normal/inverse operation for
Terminal command “IVS” Action
frequency command 1 (C53)
0: Normal operation - Normal
1: Inverse operation - Inverse
FUNCTION CODE
When process control is performed by the PID control facility integrated in the inverter, the “IVS” is used
to switch the PID processor output (reference frequency) between normal and inverse, and has no effect
on any normal/inverse operation selection of the manual frequency setting.
(Function codes J01 to J19, J57 to J62)
 Interlock – "IL" (Function code data = 22)

In a configuration where a magnetic contactor (MC) is installed in the power output (secondary) circuit of the
Chap 5
inverter, the momentary power failure detection feature provided inside the inverter may not be able to accurately
detect a momentary power failure by itself. Using a digital signal input with the interlock command IL assures the
accurate detection. (Function code F14)
Terminal command “IL” Meaning

OFF No momentary power failure has occurred.
A momentary power failure has occurred. (Restart after a momentary
ON
power failure enabled)
 Enable communications link via RS-485 or fieldbus (option) – “LE” (Function code data = 24)
Turning this terminal command “LE” ON gives priorities to frequency commands or run commands received via the
RS-485 communications link (H30) or the fieldbus option (y98). No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the
“LE” being ON.
No “LE” assignment is functionally equivalent to the “LE” being ON. (Function codes H30 and y98)
 Universal DI -- “U-DI” (Function code data = 25)

Using U-DI enables the inverter to monitor digital signals sent from the peripheral equipment via an RS-485
communications link or a fieldbus option by feeding those signals to the digital input terminals. Signals assigned to
the universal DI are simply monitored and do not operate the inverter.
 For an access to universal DI via the RS-485 or fieldbus communications link, refer to their respective
Instruction Manuals.
 Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting – “STM” (Function code data = 26)
This digital terminal command determines, at the start of operation, whether or not to search for idling motor speed
and follow it. (Function code H09)
5-85
 Force to stop – “STOP” (Function code data = 30)

Turning this terminal command “STOP” OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance with the H56
data (Deceleration time for forced stop). After the motor stops, the inverter enters the alarm state with the alarm
er6 displayed. (Function code F07)
 Reset PID integral and differential components – “PID-RST” (Function code data = 33)
Turning this terminal command “PID-RST” ON resets the integral and differential components of the PID processor.
(Function codes J01 to J19, J23, J24, J56 to J62)
 Hold PID integral component – “PID-HLD” (Function code data = 34)

Turning this terminal command “PID-HLD” ON holds the integral components of the PID processor.
(Function codes J01 to J19, J23, J24, J56 to J62)
 Select local (keypad) operation – “LOC” (Function code data = 35)

This terminal command “LOC” switches the sources of run and frequency commands between remote and local.
 For details of switching between remote and local modes, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.7 "Remote and
local modes."
 Overload stop enable – “OLS” (Function code data = 46)

Turning this terminal command ON enables the overload stop function; turning it OFF disables the function. If no
OLS is assigned, the function is enabled.
(Function codes J63 to J67)
 Pulse train input – “PIN” (available only on terminal [X5]) (Function code data = 48) Pulse
train sign – “SIGN” (available on terminals except [X5]) (Function code data = 49)
Assigning the command “PIN” to digital input terminal [X5] enables the frequency command by the pulse train
input. Assigning the command “SIGN” to one of the digital input terminals except [X5] enables the pulse train sign
input to specify the polarity of frequency command.
 Brake check signal – BRKE (Function code data = 65)

If the status of the brake signal BRKS fails to agree with the status of the brake check signal BRKE during inverter
operation, the inverter enters an alarm stop state with er6.
This signal is used as a feedback signal for the brake signal BRKS. When the mechanical brake does not operate,
it causes the inverter to trip to activate the mechanical brake. The response delay time for BRKS and BRKE can be
adjusted with H180: Brake response time.
(Function codes J68 to J96, H180)
 Select droop control – “DROOP” (Function code data = 76)

This terminal command “DROOP” toggles droop control on and off.
Terminal command “DROOP” Droop control

ON Enable
OFF Disable
(Function code H28)
 Cancel customizable logic – “CLC” (Function code data = 80), Clear all customizable logic
timers – “CLTC” (Function code data = 81)
Terminal command “CLC” stops the operation of customizable logic. Terminal command “CLTC” clears all
customizable logic timers.
(Function codes U codes)
5-86
 Cancel anti-regenerative control – “AR-CCL” (Function code data = 82)

Terminal command “AR-CCL” ON disable anti-regenerative control.
((Function codes H69)
 PID multi-step 1 – “PID-SS1” (Function code data = 171), PID multi-step 2 – “PID-SS2”
(Function code data = 172)
“PID-SS1” and “PID-SS2” can be used to switch PID commands for four steps.
 Run forward – “FWD” (Function code data = 98)

Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction; turning it OFF decelerates it to stop.
This terminal command “FWD” can be assigned only by E98 or E99.
FUNCTION CODE
 Run reverse – “REV” (Function code data = 99)
Turning this terminal command “REV” ON runs the motor in the reverse direction; turning it OFF decelerates it to
stop.
This terminal command “REV” can be assigned only by E98 or E99.
Chap 5
 Assigning no function – “NONE” (Function code data = 100)
It allows the inverter to run unaffected by ON/OFF of signals. It is used when a signal is externally input using
customizable logic. It is also used to temporarily disable a terminal function.
E10 to E15 Acceleration time 2 to 4, Deceleration time 2 to 4 (Refer to F07)
Refer to the description of F07.
E16 and Torque limiter 2 (driving), 2 (braking) (Refer to F40)

E17
For the torque limiter 2 (driving) and 2 (braking) settings, refer to the description of F40.
E20 to E21 Terminals [Y1] to [Y2] (function selection)

E27 Terminal [30A/B/C] (Relay output)
E20 through E21 and E27 assign output signals to general-purpose, programmable output terminals, [Y1], [Y2]
and [30A/B/C]. These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how
the inverter interprets the ON or OFF state of each terminal. The factory default setting is normal logic system
"Active ON."
The factory default setting is normal logic system "Active ON." Terminals [Y1] and [Y2] are transistor outputs and
terminals [30A/B/C] are contact outputs. In normal logic, if an alarm occurs, the relay will be energized so that [30A]
and [30C] will be closed, and [30B] and [30C] opened. In negative logic, the relay will be deenergized so that [30A]
and [30C] will be opened, and [30B] and [30C] closed. This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power
systems.
• When negative logic is employed, all output signals are active (e.g. an alarm would be recognized)
while the inverter is powered OFF. To avoid causing system malfunctions by this, interlock these
signals to keep them ON using an external power supply. Furthermore, the validity of these output
signals is not guaranteed for approximately 1.5 seconds (for 22 kW or below) or 3 seconds (for 30 kW
or above) after power-ON, so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient
period.
• Terminals [30A/B/C] use mechanical contacts. They cannot stand frequent ON/OFF switching. Where
frequent ON/OFF switching is anticipated (for example, limiting a current by using signals subjected to
inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line or direct-on-line starting), use
transistor outputs [Y1] and [Y2] instead.
The service life of a relay is approximately 200,000 times if it is switched ON and OFF at one-second
intervals. For signals expected to be turned ON/OFF frequently, use terminals [Y1] and [Y2] for output.
5-87
The tables given on the following pages list functions that can be assigned to terminals [Y1], [Y2], and [30A/B/C].
The descriptions are, in principle, arranged in the numerical order of assigned data. However, highly relevant
signals are collectively described where one of them first appears. Refer to the function codes or signals in the
"Related function codes/signals (data)" column, if any.
Explanations of each function are given in normal logic system "Active ON."
Data Related function

Terminal commands assigned Symbol codes/ Related
Active ON Active OFF signals (data)
0 1000 Inverter running “RUN” ―
1 1001 Frequency (speed) arrival signal “FAR” E30
2 1002 Frequency (speed) detection “FDT” E31, E32
3 1003 Undervoltage detection (Inverter stopped) “LU” ―
4 1004 Torque polarity detection “B/D” ―
5 1005 Inverter output limiting “IOL” ―
6 1006 Auto-restarting after momentary power failure “IPF” F14
7 1007 Motor overload early warning “OL” E34, F10, F12
8 1008 Keypad operation enabled “KP” ―
10 1010 Inverter ready to run “RDY” ―
AX terminal function
15 1015 “AX” ―
(For MC on primary side)
16 1016 Pattern operation stage transition "TU”
17 1017 Pattern operation cycle completed “TO”
18 1018 Pattern operation stage No. 1 “STG1”
21 1021 Speed arrival 2 “FAR2” E29
22 1022 Inverter output limiting (with delay) “IOL2” IOL (5)
25 1025 Cooling fan ON/OFF control “FAN” H06
26 1026 Auto-resetting “TRY” H04, H05
27 1027 Universal DO “U-DO” ―
28 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning “OH” ―
30 1030 Lifetime alarm “LIFE” H42
31 1031 Frequency (speed) detection 2 “FDT2” E32, E36
33 1033 Reference loss detection “REF OFF” E65
35 1035 Inverter output on “RUN2” RUN (0)
36 1036 Overload prevention control “OLP” H70
37 1037 Current detection “ID”
38 1038 Current detection 2 “ID2” E34, E35, E37,
39 1039 Current detection 3 “ID3” E38, E55, E56
41 1041 Low current detection “IDL”

42 1042 PID alarm “PID-ALM” J11 to J13
43 1043 Under PID control “PID-CTL” J01
5-88
Data Related function

Terminal commands assigned Symbol codes/ Related
Active ON Active OFF signals (data)
Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under
44 1044 “PID-STP” J08, J09
PID control
45 1045 Low output torque detection “U-TL”
46 1046 Torque detection 1 “TD1” E78 to E81
47 1047 Torque detection 2 “TD2”
48 1048 Motor 1 selected “SWM1”
―
49 1049 Motor 2 selected “SWM2”
52 1052 Running forward “FRUN” ―
53 1053 Running reverse “RRUN” ―
(Refer to Section
54 1054 In remote operation “RMT”
7.3.6)
FUNCTION CODE
56 1056 Detection by thermistor “THM” H26, H27
57 1057 Brake signal “BRKS” J68 to J72
58 1058 Frequency (speed) detection 3 “FDT3” E32, E54
59 1059 Terminal [C1] wire break “C1OFF” ―
72 1072 Frequency (speed) arrival signal 3 “FAR3” E30
Chap 5
77 1077 Low link bus voltage detection “U-EDC”
During deceleration in momentary power
79 1079 “IPF2”
failure
82 1082 Frequency arrival AND frequency detection “FARFDT” E30, E31, E32
84 1084 Maintenance timer “MNT” H44, H78, H79
90 1090 Alarm content 1 “AL1”
98 1098 Light alarm “L-ALM” H81, H82
99 1099 Alarm output (for any alarm) “ALM” ―
101 1101 EN terminal detection circuit error “DECF”
102 1102 EN terminal OFF “ENOFF”
105 1105 Braking transistor broken “DBAL” H98
111 1111 Customizable logic output signal 1 “CLO1”
U71 to U75, U81
to U90
Any negative logic (Active OFF) command cannot be assigned to the functions marked with “-” in the
"Active OFF" column.
5-89
 Inverter running – “RUN” (Function code data = 0), Inverter output on – “RUN2” (Function
code data = 35)
These output signals tell the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher. If
assigned in negative logic (Active OFF), these signals can be used to tell the "Inverter being stopped" state.
Output signal Basic function Remarks
These signals come ON when the inverter is running. Goes OFF even during DC
RUN
Under V/f control: These signals come ON if the braking.
inverter output frequency exceeds the starting
Comes ON even during DC
frequency, and go OFF if it drops below the stop
RUN2 braking, pre-exciting, zero speed
frequency. The “RUN” signal can also be used as a
control.
"Speed valid" signal DNZS.
 Frequency (speed) arrival signal – “FAR” (Function code data = 1), Frequency (speed) arrival
signal 3 – “FAR3” (Function code data = 72)
These output signals come ON when the difference between the output frequency (detected speed) and reference
frequency (reference speed) comes within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30. (Function
code E30)
 Frequency (speed) detection – “FDT” (Function code data = 2), Frequency (speed) detection 2
– “FDT2” (Function code data = 31), Frequency (speed) detection 3 – “FDT3” (Function code
data = 58)
The output signal FDT, FDT2 or FDT3 comes ON when the output frequency (detected speed) exceeds the
frequency detection level specified by E31, E36 or E54, respectively, and it goes OFF when the output frequency
(detected speed) drops below the "Frequency detection level (E31, E36 or E54) - Hysteresis width (E32).
(Function codes E31 and E32)
 Undervoltage detection (Inverter stopped) – “LU” (Function code data = 3)

This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage
level. When this signal is ON, the inverter cannot run even if a run command is given. It goes OFF when the
voltage exceeds the level. This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the
motor is in an abnormal stop state (e.g., tripped).
 Torque polarity detection – “B/D” (Function code data = 4)

The inverter issues the driving or braking polarity signal to this digital output judging from the internally calculated
torque or torque command. This signal goes OFF when the detected torque is a driving one, and it goes ON when
it is a braking one.
 Inverter output limiting – “IOL” (Function code data = 5), Inverter output limiting with delay –
“IOL2” (Function code data = 22)
The output signal IOL comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the
following actions (minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms). The output signal IOL2 comes ON when any of the
following output limiting operation continues for 20 ms or more.
• Torque limiting (F40, F41, E16 and E17, Maximum internal value)
• Current limiting by software (F43 and F44)
• Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware (H12 = 1)
• Automatic deceleration (Anti-regenerative control) (H69)
When the “IOL” is ON, it may mean that the output frequency may have deviated from the reference
frequency because of the limiting functions above.
 Auto-restarting after momentary power failure – “IPF” (Function code data = 6)

This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or during the period after
the inverter detects an undervoltage condition and shuts down the output until restart has been completed (the
output has reached the reference frequency).
5-90
 Motor overload early warning – “OL” (Function code data = 7)

The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition (alarm code 0l1 ) of the motor so that the
user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens. (Function code E34)
 Keypad operation enabled – “KP” (Function code data = 8)

This output signal comes ON when the / keys are specified as the run command source.
 Inverter ready to run – “RDY” (Function code data = 10)

This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation (such
as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control circuit) and no protective functions are
activated.
 Select “AX” terminal function – “AX” (Function code data = 15)

In response to a run command FWD, this output signal controls the magnetic contactor on the commercial-power
FUNCTION CODE
supply side. It comes ON when the inverter receives a run command. It goes OFF after the motor decelerates to
stop with a stop command received. This signal immediately goes OFF upon receipt of a coast-to-stop command
or when an alarm occurs.
“AX” can be selected where there is control power such as with FRN0059E2S-4 or higher.
Chap 5
Power Motor
Y1 (“AX”)
“FWD”
Run command
FWD
“AX” (52-1)
Preparation to run
(initial charging, etc.)
Inverter
status Running
Motor speed
5-91
 Pattern operation stage No. 1 – “STG1” (Function code data = 18), Pattern operation stage No. 2 – “STG2”
(Function code data = 19), Pattern operation stage No. 4 – “STG4” (Function code data = 20)
Outputs the stage (operation process) currently performed during pattern operation.
Operation Output terminal signal

pattern
stage No. STG1 STG2 STG4
Stage 1 ON OFF OFF

Stage 2 OFF ON OFF
Stage 3 ON ON OFF
Stage 4 OFF OFF ON
Stage 5 ON OFF ON
Stage 6 OFF ON ON
Stage 7 ON ON ON
 Frequency arrival 2 – “FAR2” (Function code data = 21)

The signals come ON when the difference between the output frequency before torque limiting and reference
frequency has entered within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30 and the frequency arrival
delay specified by E29 has elapsed.
(Function codes E29 and E30)
 Cooling fan ON/OFF control – “FAN” (Function code data = 25)

With the cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled (H06 = 1), this output signal is ON when the cooling fan is in
operation, and OFF when it is stopped. This signal can be used to make the cooling system of peripheral
equipment interlocked for an ON/OFF control.
 Auto-resetting – “TRY” (Function code data = 26)

This output signal comes ON when auto resetting (resetting alarms automatically) is in progress.
(Function codes H04 and H05)
 Universal DO -- “U-DO” (Function code data = 27)

Assigning this output signal to an inverter's output terminal and connecting the terminal to a digital input terminal of
peripheral equipment via the RS-485 communications link or the fieldbus, allows the inverter to send commands to
the peripheral equipment. The universal DO can be used as an output signal independent of the inverter operation.
 For the procedure for access to Universal DO via the RS-485 communications link or fieldbus, refer to the
respective instruction manual.
 Heat sink overheat early warning – “OH” (Function code data = 28)
This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a corrective action
before an overheat trip 0h1 actually happens.
ON at [(Overheat trip (0h1) temperature) – 5°C] or higher
OFF at [(Overheat trip (0h1) temperature) - 8°C] or lower
This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan (FRN0203 E2S-4 or above for 400 V class
series) has locked.
5-92
 Lifetime alarm – “LIFE” (Function code data = 30)

This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors (DC link bus capacitors
and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards) and cooling fan has expired. This signal should be used as
a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan. If this signal comes ON, use the specified maintenance
procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not.
This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan (FRN0203 E2S-4 or above for 400 V class
series) has locked.
Reference loss detection – “REF OFF” (Function code data = 33)

This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is in a reference loss
state (as specified by E65) due to a wire break or a weak connection. This signal goes OFF when the normal
operation under the analog input is resumed.
(Function code E65)
Overload prevention control – “OLP” (Function code data = 36)

This output signal comes ON when overload prevention control is activated. (The minimum ON-duration is 100
FUNCTION CODE
ms.)
Current detection – “ID” (Function code data = 37), Current detection 2 – “ID2” (Function code
data = 38), Current detection 3 – “ID3” (Function code data = 39)
When the inverter output current exceeds the level specified by E34, E37 or E55 for the period specified by E35,
E38 or E56, the ID, ID2 or ID3 signal turns ON, respectively. (The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
Chap 5
Low current detection – “IDL” (Function code data = 41)
When the inverter output current falls to or below the level specified by E34, E37 or E55 for the period specified by
E35, E38 or E56, the ID, ID2 or ID3 signal turns ON, respectively. (The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
PID alarm – “PID-ALM” (Function code data = 42)

Assigning this output signal enables PID control to output absolute-value alarm or deviation alarm.
Under PID control – “PID-CTL” (Function code data = 43)

This output signal comes ON when PID control is enabled ("Cancel PID control" (Hz/PID) = OFF) and a run
command is ON.
(Function code J01)
When PID control is enabled, the inverter may stop due to the slow flowrate stopping function or other
reasons. If that happens, the “PID-CTL” signal remains ON. As long as the “PID-CTL” signal is ON, PID
control is effective, so the inverter may abruptly resume its operation, depending on the feedback value
in PID control.
When PID control is enabled, even if the inverter stops its output during operation because of sensor signals or
other reasons, operation will resume automatically. Design your machinery so that safety is ensured even in
such cases.
5-93
Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control – “PID-STP” (Function code data = 44)
This output signal is ON when the inverter is in a stopped state due to the slow flowrate stopping function under
PID control.)
(Function codes J15 to J17, J23 J24)
Low output torque detection – “U-TL” (Function code data = 45)

This output signal comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter or torque command drops below the
level specified by E80 (Low torque detection (Level)) for the period specified by E81 (Low torque detection
(Timer)). (minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms) (Function codes E78 to E81)
Frequency arrival AND frequency detected – “FARFDT” (Function code data = 87)
The FARFDT, which is an ANDed signal of FAR and FDT, comes ON when both signal conditions are met.
(Function codes E30 to E32)
Torque detection 1 – “TD1” (Function code data = 46),Torque detection 2 – “TD2” (Function
code data = 47)
This output signal TD1 or TD2 comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter or torque command
exceeds the level specified by E78 or E80 (Torque detection (Level)) for the period specified by E79 or E81
(Torque detection (Timer)), respectively. (minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms) (Function codes E78 to
E81)
Motor 1, and 2 selected – “SWM1” and “SWM2” (Function code data = 48 and 49)
The output signal “SWM1” or “SWM2” comes ON corresponding to the motor selected by the signal “M2” or the
selected function code group. (Function code A42)
Running forward – “FRUN” (Function code data = 52) Running reverse – “RRUN” (Function
code data = 53)
Output signal Assigned data Running forward Running reverse Inverter stopped
“FRUN” 52 ON OFF OFF
“RRUN” 53 OFF ON OFF
In remote operation – “RMT” (Function code data = 54)

This output signal comes ON when the inverter switches from local to remote mode.
 For details of switching between remote and local modes, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.7 "Remote and
local modes."
Motor overheat detection by thermistor – “THM” (Function code data = 56)
Even when the PTC thermistor on the motor detects an overheat, the inverter turns this signal ON and continues to
run, without entering the alarm 0h4 state. This feature applies only when H26 data is set to "2." (Function codes
H26 and H27)
Brake signal – “BRKS” (Function code data = 57)

This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake. (Function codes J68 to J72)
Terminal [C1] wire break – “C1OFF” (Function code data = 59)

This output signal comes ON when the inverter detects that the input current to terminal [C1] (C1 function) drops
below 2 mA interpreting it as the terminal [C1] wire broken.
5-94
Assigning low-to-intermediate voltage detection – “U-EDC” (Function code data = 77)

This output signal comes ON when the DC intermediate voltage drops below E76 (DC intermediate voltage
detection level), and it goes OFF when the DC intermediate voltage exceeds E76.
((Function code E76)
(Assigning during deceleration in momentary power failure – “IPF2” (Function code data = 79)
When F14 data is set to 2 or 3, this output signal comes ON when the DC intermediate voltage drops below H15
(Continue to run level) and continue to run control starts. When the power returns and the DC intermediate voltage
becomes “at least 10 V higher than the voltage specified by H15,” the signal goes OFF.
Even when F14 data is set to 4 or 5, the signal comes ON when the DC intermediate voltage drops below the
undervoltage level, and it goes OFF when the DC intermediate voltage becomes “at least 10 V higher than the
undervoltage level.”
(Function codes F14 and H15)
Maintenance timer – “MNT” (Function code data = 84)
Once the inverter's cumulative run time or the startup times for the motor 1 exceeds the previously specified count,
this output signal comes ON.
(Function codes H78 and H79)
FUNCTION CODE
Alarm content – “AL1”, “AL2”, “AL4”, “AL8” (Function code data = 90, 91, 92, 93)
Outputs the state of operation of the inverter protective functions.
Output terminal
Alarm content (inverter protective function) Alarm code
AL1 AL2 AL4 AL8
Instantaneous overcurrent protection, earth fault 0c1, 0c2, 0c3

ON OFF OFF OFF
protection, fuse blown ef, fu5
Chap 5
Overvoltage protection 0u1, 0u2, 0u3 OFF ON OFF OFF
Undervoltage protection, input phase loss lu, lin ON ON OFF OFF
0l1,0l2,0l3
Motor overload, electronic thermal (motors 1 to 4) OFF OFF ON OFF
0l4
Inverter overload 0lu ON OFF ON OFF
INV overheat protection, inverter internal overheat 0h1, 0h3 OFF ON ON OFF
External alarm, DB resistor overheat, motor
0h2, dbh, 0h4 ON ON ON OFF
overheat
Memory error, CPU error, undervoltage save error, er1, er3, erf,
OFF OFF OFF ON
GAS-related error erh
Keypad communications error, option
er2, er4 ON OFF OFF ON
communications error
Option error er5 ert OFF ON OFF ON
Charging circuit error, operating procedure error, EN pbf, er6, ecf,
ON ON OFF ON
circuit error, DB transistor failure detection dba
Tuning error, output phase loss protection er7, 0pl OFF OFF ON ON
RS485 communications error er8, erp ON OFF ON ON
Overspeed protection, PG error, excessive
positioning error os, pg, ere, d0,
OFF ON ON ON
Speed mismatch (excessive speed deviation), ero
positioning control error
NTC thermistor (motor) wire break detection
PID feedback wire break, mock alarm nrb, c0f, err ON ON ON ON
Other alarm
*No terminal outputs a signal during normal operation.
Light alarm – “L-ALM” (Function code data = 98)

This output signal comes ON when a light alarm occurs. (Function codes H81 and H82)
5-95
Alarm output (for any alarm) – “ALM” (Function code data = 99)
This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode.
EN terminal detection circuit error – “DECF” (Function code data = 101)
The signal comes ON when any error is generated in the circuit for detecting EN terminal OFF.
EN terminal OFF – “ENOFF” (Function code data = 102)

The signal comes ON when the EN terminal has turned OFF.
Braking transistor broken – “DBAL” (Function code data = 105)

If the inverter detects a breakdown of the braking transistor, it displays the braking transistor alarm
(dba) and also issues the output signal “DBAL”. Detection of the breakdown of a braking transistor can be
canceled by H98. (FRN0072E2S-4 or below for 400 V class series)
A breakdown of the braking transistor could lead to a damage of the braking resistor or inverter’s internal
units. To prevent the secondary damage, use “DBAL” to cut off power to the magnetic contactor in
inverter primary circuits upon detection of a breakdown of the built-in braking transistor.
Customizable logic output signal 1 to 9 – “CLO1” to “CL09”

(Function code data =111 to 119)
Outputs the result of customizable logic operation.
(Function codes U codes)
E29 Frequency arrival delay (FAR2)

E30 Frequency arrival hysteresis (hysteresis width)
E30 specifies the detection level (hysteresis width) for the Frequency (speed) arrival signal “FAR”, Frequency
(speed) arrival signal 2 “FAR2” and the Frequency (speed) arrival signal 3 “FAR3”.
E20, E21, E27

Output signal Operating condition 1 Operating condition 2
assigned data
FAR always goes OFF when the run
“FAR” 1 command is OFF or the reference
The signals come ON when the speed is "0."
difference between the output When the run command is OFF, the
frequency (estimated/detected inverter regards the reference speed
speed) and the reference frequency as "0," so FAR3 comes ON as long
(reference speed) comes within the as the output frequency
“FAR3” 72 frequency arrival hysteresis width (estimated/detected speed) is within
specified by E30. the range of "0 ± the frequency
arrival hysteresis width specified by
E30."
The signal comes ON when the
difference between the output This signal always goes OFF when
frequency (before torque and current the run command is OFF or the
“FAR2” 21 limiting) and the reference frequency reference speed is "0."
(reference speed) comes within the
frequency arrival hysteresis width The delay can be specified by E29.
specified by E30.
5-96
• Data setting range: E30: 0.0 to 10.0 (Hz), E29: 0.01 to 10.00 (s)
The operation timings of each signal are as shown below.
Frequency/speed
Arrival range
Command
Detected speed
(output
frequency) Speed command=0
Arrival range
Run command
Frequency arrival “FAR”
Frequency arrival 3 “FAR3”
FUNCTION CODE
Frequency setting Frequency setting change
Reference frequency (1)+E30

Reference frequency (1)
Reference frequency (1)-E30
Chap 5
Reference frequency (2)+E30
Reference frequency (2) Output frequency
Reference frequency (2)-E30
Frequency arrival “FAR”
Frequency
Frequency arrival delay E29 arrival delay
E29
Frequency arrival 2 “FAR2”
5-97
E31,E32 Frequency detection (level and hysteresis width)

Related function codes: E36 (Frequency detection 2, level), E54
(Frequency detection 3, level)
When the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31, the "Frequency (speed)
detection signal" comes ON; when it drops below the "Frequency detection level minus Hysteresis width specified
by E32," it goes OFF.
The following three settings are available.
E20,E21, Operation level Hysteresis width

Output E27
Name Range: 0.0 to 500.0Hz Range: 0.0 to 500.0Hz
signal Assigned
data
Frequency
“FDT” 2 E31
detection
Frequency
“FDT2” 31 E36 E32
detection 2 (level)
Frequency
“FDT3” 58 E54
detection 3 (level)
Output frequency
Reference frequency
Detection level (E31, E36, E54)

Hysteresis width (E32)
Reset level
Time
Frequency
detection
signal
Time
E34,E35 Overload early warning/Current detection (level and timer)

Related function codes: E37, E38 (Current detection 2/Low current
detection level and timer)
E55, E56 (Current detection 3, level and timer)
These function codes define the detection level and time for the Motor overload early warning "OL", Current
detection "ID", Current detection 2 "ID2", Current detection 3 "ID3", and Low current detection "IDL" output signals.
E20,E21, Motor
Operation level Timer Thermal time constant
E27 characteristics
Output signal
Assigned
data Range: See below Range: 0.01 to 600.00 s Range: See below Range: 0.5 to 75.0 min
“OL” 7 E34 - F10 F12
“ID2 37 E34 E35
“ID2” 38 E37 E38
- -
“ID3” 39 E55 E56
“IDL” 41 E37 E38
• Data setting range
Operation level: 0.00 (Disable), 1 to 200% of inverter rated current
Motor characteristic 1: Enable (For a general-purpose motor with shaft-driven cooling fan)
2: Enable (For an inverter-driven motor, non-ventilated motor, or motor with separately powered cooling fan)
5-98
Motor overload early warning signal – “OL”

The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition (alarm code 0l1 ) of the motor so that the
user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens. The OL signal turns ON when the inverter
output current exceeds the level specified by E34. In typical cases, set E34 data to 80 to 90% against F11 data
(Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1, Overload detection level). Set the temperature characteristics
of the motor with electronic thermal (motor characteristics selection, thermal time constant).
Current detection, Current detection 2 and Current detection 3 – “ID”, “ID2” and “ID3”
When the inverter output current exceeds the level specified by E34, E37 or E55 for the period specified by E35,
E38 or E56, the ID, ID2 or ID3 signal turns ON, respectively. When the output current drops below 90% of the rated
operation level, the ID, ID2 or ID3 turns OFF. (The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
Detection level
Detection level ×0.9
Torque/output
Acceleration torque
FUNCTION CODE
“ID” / ”ID2” / ”ID3”
Low current detection – “IDL”

This signal turns ON when the output current drops below the level specified by E37 (Low current detection, Level)
for the period specified by E38 (Timer). When the output current exceeds the "Low current detection level plus 5%
of the inverter rated current," it goes OFF. (The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
Chap 5
Torque/output
Detection level+5%
Detection level
Acceleration torque
“IDL”
E36 Frequency detection 2 (refer to E31)
Refer to the description of E31.
E37, E38 Current detection 2/Low current detection (level and timer) (refer to E34)
For details about Current detection 2/Low current detection (level) (timer), refer to the description of E34.
5-99
E39 Coefficient for constant-rate feeding time

Related function code: E50 (Coefficient for speed indication)
E39 specifies the constant-rate feeding time, load shaft speed, coefficient for line speed setting, and coefficient for
output status monitor indication.
Formula
Coefficient for speed indication(E50)

Constant rate (min) 
Frequency x Coefficient for constant - rate feeding time (E39)
Load shaft speed = (E50: Coefficient for speed indication) x Frequency (Hz)
Line speed = (E50: Coefficient for speed indication) x Frequency (Hz)
The "Frequency" in the above formula is set frequency when each indication is the setting value (constant-rate
feeding time setting, load shaft speed setting, and line speed setting), whereas it is output frequency before slip
compensation when the indication is output status monitor.
When the constant-rate feeding time is 999.9 (min) or greater, or the denominator on the right-hand side of the
above formula is 0, "999.9" is displayed.
E42 LED Display filter
Excluding speed monitor (at E43 = 0), E43 specifies a filter time constant to be applied for displaying the output
frequency, output current and other running status monitored on the LED monitor on the keypad. If the display
varies unstably so as to be hard to read due to load fluctuation or other causes, increase this filter time constant.
5-100
E43 LED monitor (display selection) Related function code: E48 LED monitor (speed monitor
item)
E43 specifies the running status item to be monitored and displayed on the LED monitor.
Specifying the speed monitor with E43 provides a choice of speed-monitoring formats selectable with E48 (LED
Monitor).
Display
sample on E43
Monitor item LED indication Unit Meaning of displayed value
the LED data
monitor
Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and
Speed monitor 0
LED indicators.
Output frequency 1
Indicated value = Output frequency
(before slip 5*00 HzAkW Hz (E48 = 0)
(Hz)
compensation)
Output frequency 2
FUNCTION CODE
(after slip 5*00 HzAkW Hz (E48 = 1)
(Hz)
compensation)
Reference Indicated value = Reference frequency
5*00 HzAkW Hz (E48 = 2)
frequency (Hz)
Indicated value =
Motor speed 1500 HzAkW min-1 120 (E48 = 3)
Output frequency (Hz) ×
P01
Chap 5
Load shaft speed 30*0 HzAkW min-1 (E48 = 4)
(Hz) x E50
Line speed 30*0 HzAkW m/min (E48 = 5)
(Hz) x E50
Constant-rate Indicated value = E50/(Output
5*00 HzAkW min (E48 = 6)
feeding time frequency x E39)
Display speed (%) 5*0 HzAkW % Maximum frequency
 100 (E48 = 7)
Current output from the inverter in

Output current 1"34 HzAkW A 3
RMS
Output voltage 200u HzAkW V Output voltage (RMS) of the inverter 4
Motor output torque in % (Calculated
Calculated torque 50 HzAkW % 8
value)
Input power 1*25 HzAkW kW Input power to the inverter 9
PID command 1*0* HzAkW - PID command and its feedback 10

converted into physical quantities of
PID feedback value )0* HzAkW - the object to be controlled (e.g. 12
temperature)
Timer value 100 HzAkW s Timer value (remaining run time) 13
PID output in % as the maximum
PID output 10** HzAkW % 14
frequency (F03) being at 100%
Load factor of the motor in % as the
Load factor 50; HzAkW % 15
rated output being at 100%
Motor output )85 HzAkW kW Motor output in kW 16
Analog signal input An analog input to the inverter in a
8"00 HzAkW - 17
monitor format suitable for a desired scale.
Input watt-hour (kWh)
Input watt-hour 10*0 HzAkW kWh Indicated value = 25
100
 Illuminated,  Not illuminated
5-101
E44 LED monitor (display when stopped)
E44 specifies whether the specified value (data = 0) or the output value (data = 1) to be displayed on the LED
monitor of the keypad when the inverter is stopped. The monitored item depends on the E48 (LED monitor, Speed
monitor item) setting as shown below.
Inverter stopped
E48 data Monitored item
E44 = 0 Specified value E44 = 1 Output value
0 Output frequency 1 Reference frequency Output frequency 1 (before slip
(before slip compensation)
compensation)
1 Output frequency 2 Reference frequency Output frequency 2 (after slip
(after slip compensation)
compensation)
2 Reference Reference frequency Reference frequency
frequency
3 Motor speed Reference motor speed Motor speed
4 Load shaft speed Reference load shaft speed Load shaft speed
5 Line speed Reference line speed Line speed
6 Constant-rate Constant-rate feeding time Constant-rate feeding time
feeding time setting
7 Display speed (%) Reference display speed Display Speed
E48 LED monitor (speed monitor item) (refer to E43)
For details about LED Monitor (Speed monitor item), refer tot he description of E43.
E50 Coefficient for speed indication
E50 specifies the coefficient that is used when the load shaft speed or line speed is displayed on the LED monitor.
(Refer to the description of E43.)
Load shaft speed [min-1]=(E50: Coefficient for speed indication) × (Output frequency Hz)
Line speed [m/min] = (E50: Coefficient for speed indication) × (Output frequency Hz)
• Data setting range: 0.01 to 200.00
E51 Display coefficient for input watt-hour data
E51 specifies a display coefficient (multiplication factor) for displaying the input watt-hour data (5_10 ) in a part of
maintenance information on the keypad.
Input watt-hour data = Display coefficient (E51 data) × Input watt-hour (kWh)
• Data setting range: 0.000 (cancel/reset) 0.001 to 9999
Setting E51 data to 0.000 clears the input watt-hour and its data to "0." After clearing, be sure to restore
E51 data to the previous value; otherwise, input watt-hour data will not be accumulated.
5-102
E52 Keypad (menu display mode)
E52 provides a choice of three menu display modes for the standard keypad as listed below.
E52 data Menu display mode Menus to be displayed

0 Function code data editing mode Menus #0, #1 and #7
1 Function code data check mode Menus #2 and #7
2 Full-menu mode Menus #0 through #7
E52 specifies the menus to be displayed on the standard keypad. There are eight menus as shown in the table
below.
LED monitor
Menu # Function Display content
shows:
0 0.fnc Quick setup Quick setup function code
FUNCTION CODE
1 1.f__ Data setting F to o F to o group function code
2 2.rep Data check Modified function code
3 3.ope Operation monitor Operation status indication
4 4.i_o I/O check DIO, AIO status indication
5 5.che Maintenance Maintenance information indication
Chap 5
6 6.al Alarm information Alarm information indication
 For details of each menu item, refer to Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD."
E54 Frequency detection 3 (level) (refer to E31)
For details, refer to the description of E31.
E55, E56 Current detection 3 (level and timer) (refer to E34)
For details, refer to the description of E34.
5-103
E59 Terminal [C1] function selection (C1 function//V2 function)
Specifies whether terminal [C1] is used with current input +4 to +20 mA/0 to 20 mA or voltage input 0 to +10 V. In
addition, switch SW7 on the interface board must be switched.
E59 data Input form Switch SW7

0 Current input: 4 to 20 mA/0 to 20 mA (C1 function) C1
1 Voltage input: 0 to 10 V (V2 function) V2
When using terminal [C1] as a PTC thermistor input, specify E59 = 0.
For using terminal [C1] for the C1, V2 or PTC function, switching as shown below is necessary.
Terminal [C1] SW3 SW4 E59 H26 C40

For use of C1 function (4 to
C1 AI 0 0 0,10
20 mA)
C1 AI 0 0 1, 11
20 mA)
For use of V2 function (0 to
V2 AI 1 0 Does not matter
+10 V)
For use of PTC function C1 PTC Does not matter 1,2 Does not matter
 For details about SW3 and SW4, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.2.8.
Failure to correctly switch as shown above may cause a wrong analog input, possibly reading to unexpected
operation of the inverter.
Injuries may occur.
Failure may occur.
5-104
E61 to E63 Terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function), [C1] (V2 function) (extended function)
Select the functions of terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function) and [C1] (V2 function).
There is no need to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command sources.
E61, E62, E63

Function Description
data
0 None －
Auxiliary frequency input to be added to the reference frequency
Auxiliary frequency given by frequency command 1 (F01). Will not be added to any
1
command 1 other reference frequency given by frequency command 2 and
multi-frequency commands, etc. 100%/full scale
Auxiliary frequency input to be added to all frequencies. Will be
Auxiliary frequency
2 added to frequency command 1, frequency command 2,
command 2
multi-frequency commands, etc. 100%/full scale
Inputs command sources such as temperature and pressure
FUNCTION CODE
3 PID command 1 under PID control. You also need to set function code J02.
100%/full scale
Inputs feedback values such as temperature and pressure under
5 PID feedback value
PID control. 100%/full scale
Multiplies the final frequency command value by this value, for
use in the constant line speed control by calculating the winder
6 Ratio setting
diameter or in ratio operation with multiple inverters. 100%/full
Chap 5
scale
Analog torque Used when analog inputs are used as torque limiters.
7
limit value A (Function code F40) 200%/full scale
Analog torque Used when analog inputs are used as torque limiters.
8
limit value B (Function code F40) 200%/full scale
By inputting analog signals from various sensors such as the
temperature sensors in air conditioners to the inverter, you can
monitor the state of external devices via the communications link.
Analog signal input
20 By using an appropriate display coefficient, you can also have
monitor
various values to be converted into physical quantities such as
temperature and pressure before they are displayed. 100%/full
scale
If these terminals have been set up to have the same data, E61 is given priority. For E62 and E63, only
the terminal selected with E59 is enabled.
E64 Saving of digital reference frequency
E64 specifies how to save the reference frequency specified in digital formats by the / keys on the keypad as
shown below.
E64 data Function

0 The reference frequency will be automatically saved when the main power is turned
OFF. At the next power-on, the reference frequency at the time of the previous power-off
applies.
1 Saving by pressing key. Pressing the key saves the reference frequency. If the
control power is turned OFF without pressing the [image] key, the data will be lost. At the
next power-ON, the inverter uses the reference frequency saved when the key was
pressed last.
5-105
E65 Reference loss detection (continuous running frequency)
When the analog frequency command (setting through terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function) or [C1] (V2 function) has
dropped below 10% of the reference frequency within 400 ms, the inverter presumes that the analog frequency
command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by
E65 to the reference frequency. And "REF OFF" signal comes on.
(Function codes E20, E21 and E27, data = 33)
When the frequency command level (in voltage or current) returns to a level higher than that specified by E65, the
inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and continues to run following the frequency command.
400 ms
Analog frequency
command
Reference loss
detection REF OFF
Normal frequency
command
Frequency command
(internal data)
In the diagram above, f1 is the level of the analog frequency command sampled at any given time. The sampling is
repeated at regular intervals to continually monitor the wiring connection of the analog frequency command.
• Data setting range:0 (Decelerate to stop) 20 to 120 % 999 (Disable)
Avoid an abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command. An abrupt change may be
interpreted as a wire break.
Setting E65 data at "999" (Disable) allows the REF OFF signal ("Reference loss detected") to be issued,
but does not allow the reference frequency to change. (The inverter runs at the analog frequency
command as specified.)
When E65 = "0" or "999," the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is
"f1  0.2."
When E65 = "100" (%) or higher, the reference frequency level at which the wire is recognized as fixed is
"f1  1."
The reference loss detection is not affected by the setting of analog input adjustment (filter time
constants: C33, C38, and C43).
E76 DC intermediate voltage detection level
"U-EDC" signal comes ON when the DC intermediate voltage drops below E76 (DC intermediate voltage detection
level), and it goes OFF when the DC intermediate voltage exceeds E76.
(Function codes E20, E21 and E27, data = 77)
5-106
E78, E79 Torque detection 1 (level and timer)

E80, E81 Torque detection 2/Low torque detection (level and timer)
E78 specifies the operation level and E79 specifies the timer, for the output signal “TD1”. E80 specifies the
operation level and E81 specifies the timer, for the output signal “TD2” or “U-TL”.
Operation level Timer

Output signal Assigned data
Range: 0 to 300% Range: 0.01 to 600.00 s
“TD1” 46 E78 E79
“TD2” 47 E80 E81
“U-TL” 45 E80 E81
Torque detection 1 – “TD1”, Torque detection 2 – “TD2”

The output signal TD1 or TD2 comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter or torque command
exceeds the level specified by E78 or E80 (Torque detection (Level)) for the period specified by E79 or E81
(Torque detection (Timer)), respectively. The signal turns OFF when the calculated torque drops below "the level
FUNCTION CODE
specified by E78 or E80 minus 5% of the motor rated torque." (The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
Detection level
Detection level -5%
Calculated torque or
torque command
value
Chap 5
Acceleration torque
“TD1” , ”TD2”
Low output torque detection – “U-TL”

This output signal comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter or torque command drops below the
level specified by E80 (Low torque detection (Level)) for the period specified by E81 (Low torque detection
(Timer)). The signal turns OFF when the calculated torque exceeds "the level specified by E78 or E80 plus 5% of
the motor rated torque." (The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
Calculated torque or
torque command
value
Detection level+5%
Detection level
Acceleration torque
“U-TL”
In the inverter’s low frequency operation, as a substantial error in torque calculation occurs, no low torque can be
detected within the operation range at less than 20% of the base frequency (F04). (In this case, the result of
recognition before entering this operation range is retained.) The U-TL signal goes off when the inverter is stopped.
Since the motor parameters are used in the calculation of torque, it is recommended that auto-tuning be applied by
function code P04 to achieve higher accuracy.
E98, E99 Terminal [FWD] (function selection), Terminal [REV] (function selection) (refer to E01 to
E05)
For details, refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05.
5-107
5.3.3 C codes (Control functions)
C01 to C04 Jump frequency 1, 2 and 3, Jump frequency (hysteresis width)
These function codes enable the inverter to jump over three different points on the output frequency in order to skip
resonance caused by the motor speed and natural frequency of the driven machinery (load).
• While you are increasing the reference frequency, the moment the reference frequency reaches the bottom of
the jump frequency band, the inverter keeps the output at that bottom frequency. When the reference frequency
exceeds the upper limit of the jump frequency band, the internal reference frequency takes on the value of the
reference frequency. When you are decreasing the reference frequency, the situation will be reversed. Refer to
the figure on the lower left.
• When more than two jump frequency bands overlap, the inverter actually takes the lowest frequency within the
overlapped bands as the bottom frequency and the highest as the upper limit. Refer to the figure on the lower
right.
Internal reference frequency Internal reference frequency
Jump frequency
hysteresis width
Jump frequency Actual jump

Jump frequency Jump frequency
hysteresis width frequency 3 hysteresis hysteresis width
Jump
frequency
width Jump
Jump frequency 2
hysteresis frequency 2
width Jump
Jump frequency 1
frequency 1
Jump frequencies 1, 2 and 3 (C01, C02 and C03)

Specify the center of the jump frequency band.
• Data setting range: 0.0 to 500.0 (Hz) (Setting to 0.0 results in no jump frequency band.)
Jump frequency hysteresis width (C04)

Specify the jump frequency hysteresis width.
• Data setting range: 0.0 to 30.0 (Hz) (Setting to 0.0 results in no jump frequency band.)
C05 to C19 Multi-frequency 1 to 15
These function codes specify 15 frequencies required for driving the motor at frequencies 1 to
15.
Turning terminal commands “SS1”, “SS2”, “SS4” and “SS8” ON/OFF selectively switches the reference frequency
of the inverter in 15 steps. To use these features, you need to assign “SS1”, “SS2”, “SS4” and “SS8” ("Select
multi-frequency") to the digital input terminals with E01 to E05 (data = 0, 1, 2, and 3).
Multi-frequency 1 to 15 (C05 through C19)

5-108
The combination of “SS1”, “SS2”, “SS4” and “SS8” and the selected frequencies are as follows.
“SS8” “SS4” “SS2” “SS1” Selected frequency command

OFF OFF OFF OFF Other than multi-frequency*
OFF OFF OFF ON C05 (Multi-frequency 1)
OFF OFF ON OFF C06 (Multi-frequency 2)
OFF OFF ON ON C07 (Multi-frequency 3)
OFF ON OFF OFF C08 (multi-frequency 4)
OFF ON OFF ON C09 (multi-frequency 5)
OFF ON ON OFF C10 (Multi-frequency 6)
OFF ON ON ON C11 (Multi-frequency 7)
ON OFF OFF OFF C12 (Multi-frequency 8)
ON OFF OFF ON C13 (Multi-frequency 9)
FUNCTION CODE
ON OFF ON OFF C14 (Multi-frequency 10)
ON OFF ON ON C15 (Multi-frequency 11)
ON ON OFF OFF C16 (Multi-frequency 12)
ON ON OFF ON C17 (Multi-frequency 13)
ON ON ON OFF C18 (Multi-frequency 14)
ON ON ON ON C19 (multi-frequency 15)
Chap 5
*"Other than multi-frequency" includes frequency command 1 (F01), frequency command 2 (C30) and other
command sources except multi-frequency commands.
C20 Jogging frequency Related function codes: H54 and H55 Acceleration/Deceleration time (jogging)
C20 specifies the operating condition (frequency) to apply in jogging operation.
Function code Data setting range Description

C20 Jogging frequency 0.00 to 500.00 (Hz) Reference frequency for jogging
operation
H54 Acceleration Time (Jogging) 0.00 to 6000 s Acceleration time for jogging
operation
H55 Deceleration Time (Jogging) 0.00 to 6000 s Deceleration time for jogging
operation
 For details about jogging operation, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.6 "Jogging operation."
5-109
C21 Pattern operation mode selection

C22 to C28 Stage 1 to 7 /timer operation
Pattern operation is a function of automatic operation according to the predefined run time, rotational direction,
acceleration/deceleration time and reference frequency.
When using this function, set the frequency command (F01) to 10 (pattern operation).
The following operation patterns are available:
C21:Setting Operation pattern

0 Pattern operation performed for one cycle and stopped after the cycle.
1 Pattern operation repeatedly performed and immediately stopped with a stop command
2 Pattern operation performed for one cycle and operation continued at the reference
frequency after the cycle.
3 Timer operation
Run command
Setting value: 0 1 cycle completed
source
Forward
direction
Output Time
frequency 0
Reverse
direction
Run command 2 2cycles

Setting value: 1 1 cycle completed cyclecompleted
completed
source
Forward
direction
Time
Output
frequency 0
Reverse
direction
Run command
Setting value: 2 1 cycle completed
source
Forward
direction
Output Time
frequency
0
Reverse
direction
 C22 to C28 Stage 1 to Stage 7

Specify the run time for Stage 1 to Stage 7.
Press the key three times for each function code to set the following three data.
Setting Description
1st Specifies the run time between 0.0 and 6000 s.
2nd 2nd: Specifies the rotational direction F (forward) or r (reverse)
3rd 3rd: Specifies the acceleration/deceleration time between 1 and 4.
1: F07/F08 2: E10/E11 3: E12/E13 4: E14/E15
If the key is pressed to exit the function code before the three data are specified by pressing
the key three times, no data are updated.
For any unused stage, specify 0.0 as the run time. The stage is skipped and the next stage becomes ready for
setting.
■ Reference frequency
Multi-frequency 1 to 7 are assigned to the reference frequency of Stage 1 to 7.
5-110
 Example of pattern operation setting

C21 (Mode Acceleration/decele
selection) Run time Rotational direction ration time
Stage No. Operation (reference) frequency
Setting value
Setting value Setting value
Stage 1 60.0 F 2 C05 Multi-frequency 1
Stage 2 100 F 1 C06 Multi-frequency 2
Stage 3 65.5 r 4 C07 Multi-frequency 3
0 Stage 4 55.0 r 3 C08 Multi-frequency 4
The figure below illustrates the operation.
F o r w a r d d ir e c tio n
R un com m and
s o u rc e
FUNCTION CODE
(9 )
C10
Output frequency
C06 (8 )
C11 S e t a c c o r d in g to ( 1 ) to ( 1 0 )
A c c e le r a t io n tim e o r d e c e le r a tio n
C09
(1 0 ) tim e
C 05 (2 ) (3 ) (7 ) (1 ) A c c e le r a t io n tim e : E 1 0
Motor speed)
0
T im e
speed
(1 ) (2 ) A c c e le r a t io n tim e : F 0 7
(4 )
C07 (5 )
(6 )
D e c e le r a tio n tim e : E 1 5
(Motor
(3 )
C08
(4 ) A c c e le r a t io n tim e : E 1 4
Chap 5
R e v e rs e
6 0 .0 S 100S 6 5 .5 S 5 5 .0 S 5 0 .0 S 7 2 .0 S 3 5 .0 S
d ir e c tio n
(6 ) D e c e le r a tio n tim e : E 1 1
S e ttin g
v a lu e : 1 6
0 .1 S (8 ) A c c e le r a t io n tim e : E 1 4
Y 1 to Y 2 te r m in a ls o u tp u t s ig n a l (9 ) D e c e le r a tio n tim e : E 1 1
S e ttin g v a lu e :
17 (1 0 ) D e c e le r a tio n tim e : F 0 8
0 .1 S
1 As the deceleration time after the completion of one cycle, the F08 Deceleration time 1 setting is used for
deceleration to stop.
 To run or stop, use input from the key of the keypad and switching of the control terminal. With the keypad,
press the key to run. Press the key to suspend the progression of stages. Press the key again to
resume operation according to the stages from the point where it was suspended. For alarm stop, press the key
to reset the inverter protective functions. Then press the key. The suspended progression of the stages
resumes. If a need arises for operation from the first stage “C22 (Stage 1 runtime)" and “C82 (Stage 1 rotational
direction and acceleration/deceleration time)" during operation, input a stop command and press the key.
When operation from the first stage is necessary after an alarm stop, press the key for resetting the protective
functions and press the key again. For the key, use of the “RST” terminal (set "8 (Active ON)" or "1008 (Active
OFF)" for any of E01 to E05) functions the same way.
• Pattern operation can be started by either a forward run command (specify F02 = 2 and press the
key, or specify F02 = 1 and turn the FWD terminal ON) or reverse run command (specify F02 = 3 and
press the key, or specify F02 = 1 and turn the REV terminal ON). However, the rotational
direction is as specified by C82 to C88 whether the operation is started by a forward run command or
reverse run command.
• When the FWD or REV terminal is used, the run command self-hold function is disabled. Use an
alternate-type switch.
5-111
When pattern operation is started by specifying C21 = 0 and turning the FWD (REV) terminal ON, the motor
stops after the completion of the last stage even if the FWD (REV) terminal is kept turned ON.
In this case, modifying the value for F01 or C30 or switching the control terminal "Hz2/Hz1" ON/OFF without
turning the FWD (REV) terminal OFF causes the operation to be immediately resumed according to the
reference frequency after the modification.
An accident or physical injury may result.
■ Timer operation (C21 = 3)

Select this for timer operation, in which simply specifying the run time and inputting a run command starts motor
operation and stops the operation after the specified period has elapsed.
・To stop the timer operation, press the key during timer countdown.
・When the timer period is 0, pressing the key does not start operation even if C = 21.
・An external signal (FWD or REV) can also be used to start operation.
Example of timer operation

Preconfiguration
・To indicate the timer value on the LED monitor, set the data for E43 (LED monitor) to "13" (timer) and data for C21
to "3."
・Specify the reference frequency for timer operation. When the reference frequency is specified by keypad
operation and the timer value is indicated, press the key to switch to speed monitor display and modify the
reference frequency.
Timer operation (to start operation with the [FUN] key)
(1) While checking the timer value on the LED monitor, press the / key to specify the timer period (in
seconds). (The timer value is indicated as an integer without a decimal point on the LED monitor.)
(2) Press the key to start motor operation. The timer period is counted down. After the timer period has
elapsed, the operation stops without the need for pressing the key. (Timer operation is possible even when the
LED monitor indication is not the timer value.)
For operation by turning the FWD terminal ON, the indication alternates between "end" and LED monitor
display (0 for timer value) when the timer operation has been completed with deceleration to stop. Turning
FWD OFF brings back the LED monitor display.
C30 Frequency command 2 (refer to F01)

For details of frequency command 2, refer to the description of F01.
5-112
C31 to C35 Analog input adjustment (terminal [12])

(offset, gain, filter time constant, gain base point, polarity)
C36 to C40 Analog input adjustment (terminal [C1] C1 function)
(offset, gain, filter time constant, gain base point, range)
C41 to C45 Analog input adjustment (terminal [C1] V2 function)
(offset, gain, filter time constant, gain base point, polarity)
(refer to F01 for frequency command)
C55, C56 Bias (for PID, frequency command 2 (terminal [12])) (bias, bias base point) (refer to F01)
C61, C62 Bias (for PID, frequency command 2 (terminal [C1]) (C1 function))
(bias, bias base point)(refer to F01)
C67, C68 Bias (for PID, frequency command 2 (terminal [C1]) (V2 function))
(bias, bias base point)(refer to F01)
You can adjust the gain, bias, polarity, filter time constant and offset which are applied to analog inputs (voltage
FUNCTION CODE
inputs to terminals [12] and [C1] (V2 function) and current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function)).
Adjustable items for analog inputs (excluding those for frequency command 1)
Input Bias Gain Filter time

Input range Polarity Offset
terminal Bias Base point Gain Base point constant
0 to +10 V, -10 to
[12] C55 C56 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
Chap 5
+10 V
[C1] (C1) 4 to 20 mA, 0 to C61 C62 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
20 mA
[C1] (V2) 0 to +10 V C67 C68 C42 C44 C45 C43 C41
Offset (C31, C36, C41)

• Data setting range: -5.0 to +5.0 (%)
Filter time constant (C33, C38, C43)

Polarity Terminal [12] (C35)

C35 and C45 configure the input range for analog input voltage.

0 -10 to +10 V
1 0 to +10 V (negative value of voltage is regarded as 0 V)
5-113
 Polarity [C1] (V2 function) (C45)

0 0 to +10 V
When the bias is specified to be a negative value, makes a point less than 0
effective as a negative value.
1 0 to +10 V (factory default)
When the bias is specified to be a negative value, limits a point less than 0 to 0.
Gain
Reference frequency
Gain
Point
X
Analog input
Gain base
point
To input bipolar analog voltage (0 to ±10 VDC) to terminal [12], set C35 data to "0." Setting C35 data to
"1" enables the voltage range from 0 to +10 VDC and interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to -10
VDC as 0 V.
Terminal [C1] (C1 function) range (C40)

Selects the range of current input terminal [C1](C1 function).
C40 data Terminal input range When bias is specified to be negative

0 4 to 20 mA (factory default)
Limits a point less than 0 to 0.
1 0 to 20 mA
10 4 to 20 mA
Makes a point less than 0 effective as a negative value.
11 0 to 20mA
For using terminal [C1] for the C1, V2 or PTC function, switching as shown below is necessary.
Terminal [C1] SW3 SW4 E59 H26 C40

C1 AI 0 0 0, 10
20 mA)
C1 AI 0 0 1, 11
20 mA)
For use of V2 function (0 to
V2 AI 1 0 Does not matter
+10V)
For use of PTC function C1 PTC Does not matter 1, 2 Does not matter
For details about SW3 and SW4, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.2.8.
Expected operation may not be obtained if the settings above are not switched correctly. Use sufficient caution.
5-114
 Gain/bias
Terminal PID command, feedback, analog monitor

Reference frequency
Gain
Point B
[12]
Bias
Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
Reference frequency
Gain
Point B
FUNCTION CODE
[C1] (C1 function)
Bias
Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
Chap 5
Reference frequency
Gain
Point B
[C1] (V2 function)

Bias
Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
These are biases and bias base points used for PID command, PID feedback, frequency command 2 and analog
monitor. For details, refer to the description of F01 and J01.
Bias (C55, C61, C67)
• Data setting range: -100.00 to 100.00 (%)
Bias base point (C56, C62, C68)
• Data setting range: 0.00 to 100.00 (%)
Specifying the bias as a negative value allows an input to be specified as bipolar for a unipolar analog input. By
setting C40 data to 10 or 11 for terminal [C1] (C1 function) or C45 data to 1 for terminal [C1] (V2 function), an input
value for an analog input equal to or less than 0 point is specified to have negative polarity.
C50 Bias (Frequency command 1) (Bias base point) (refer to F01)
5-115
C58 Analog input adjustment (for analog monitor (terminal [12])) (unit)
C64 Analog input adjustment (for analog monitor (terminal [C1])) (C1 function) (unit)
C70 Analog input adjustment (for analog monitor (terminal [C1])) (V2 function) (unit)
The units for the respective analog inputs can be displayed when a multi-function keypad (TP-A1) is used. Set
these codes to use for command and feedback values of the analog input monitor and PID control. Use the
multi-function keypad to display the SV and PV values of the analog input monitor and PID control on the main and
sub-monitors. Indications are given in the specified units.
C58, C64,
C58, C64, C70 Unit C58, C64, C70 Unit Unit
C70
- - 23 L/s (flowrate) 45 mmHg (pressure)
1 No unit 24 L/min (flowrate) 46 Psi (pressure)
2 % 25 L/h (flowrate) 47 mWG (pressure)
4 r/min 40 Pa (pressure) 48 inWG (pressure)
7 kW 41 kPa (pressure) 60 K (temperature)
3
20 m /s (flowrate) 42 MPa (pressure) 61 °C (temperature)
3
21 m /min (flowrate) 43 mbar (pressure) 62 °F (temperature)
3
22 m /h (flowrate) 44 bar (pressure) 80 ppm (concentration)
C59, C60 Analog input adjustment (terminal [12]) (maximum scale, minimum scale)
C65, C66 Analog input adjustment (terminal [C1] (C1 function)) (maximum scale, minimum scale)
C71, C72 Analog input adjustment (terminal [C1] (V2 function)) (maximum scale, minimum scale)
Values of the analog input monitor (terminals [12] and [C1] (C1 and V2 functions) can be converted into easily
recognizable physical quantities for display. This function can also be used for PID feedback and PID command
values.
• Data setting range: (maximum scale and minimum scale) -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00
Indicated value
Maximum scale
(C59)
Minimum scale
(C60)
Analog input
(terminal [12])
C53 Selection of normal/inverse operation (frequency command 1)
Switches between the between normal and inverse operation of frequency command 1 (F01) .
 For details, refer to E01 through E05 (data = 21) for the terminal command IVS ("Switch normal/inverse
operation").
5-116
5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters)

To use the integrated automatic control functions such as auto torque boost, torque calculation monitoring, auto
energy saving operation, torque limiter, automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), auto search for idling
motor speed, slip compensation, vector control without speed sensor (torque vector), droop control, and overload
stop, it is necessary to build a motor model in the inverter by specifying proper motor parameters including the
motor capacity and rated current.
The FRENIC-Ace, provides built-in motor parameters for Fuji standard motors 8-series. To use these Fuji motors, it
is enough to specify motor parameters for P99 (Motor 1 Selection). If the cabling between the inverter and the
motor is long (generally, 20 m or longer) or a reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter, however, the
apparent motor parameters are different from the actual ones, so auto-tuning or other adjustments are necessary.
For the auto-tuning procedure, refer to the FRENIC-Ace Instruction Manual, Chapter 4 "TEST RUN
PROCEDURE."
When using a motor made by other manufacturers or a Fuji non-standard motor, obtain the datasheet of the motor
and specify the motor parameters manually or perform auto-tuning.
FUNCTION CODE
P01 Motor 1 (No. of poles)
P01 specifies the number of poles of the motor. Enter the value given on the nameplate of the motor. This setting is
used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor and to control the speed (refer to E43). The following
expression is used for the conversion.
-1
Motor rotational speed (min ) = 120/No.of poles x Frequency (Hz)
• Data setting range: 2 to 22 (poles)
Chap 5
P02 Motor 1 (Rated capacity)
P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor. Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor.
P02 data Unit Function

kW When P99 (Motor 1 Selection) = 0, 4
0.01 to 1000
HP When P99 (Motor 1 Selection) = 1
When accessing P02 with the keypad, take into account that the P02 data automatically updates data of P03, P06
through P13, P53 and H46.
P03 Motor 1 (rated current)
P03 specifies the rated current of the motor. Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor.
• Data setting range: 0.00 to 2000 (A)
5-117
P04 Motor 1 (auto-tuning)
The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory. Basically, it is not
necessary to perform tuning when a Fuji standard motor is used with a standard connection with the inverter.
There are two types of auto-tuning as listed below. Select appropriate one considering the limitations in your
equipment and control mode.
P04 Motor parameters

Auto-tuning Action
data to be tuned
0 Disable --- ---
Primary resistance (%R1) (P07)
Tune the motor Leakage reactance (%X) (P08) Rated
1 Tunes while the motor is stopped.
while it is stopped slip frequency (P12) %X correction
factors 1 (P53)
After tuning the motor in a No-load current (P06)
Tune the motor stopped state, retunes it running Primary resistance (%R1) (P07)
2 while it is rotating at 50% of the base frequency. Leakage reactance (%X) (P08)
under V/f control Rated slip frequency (P12)
%X correction factor 1 (P53)
 For details of auto-tuning, refer to the FRENIC-Ace Instruction Manual, Chapter 4 " TEST RUN
PROCEDURE."
In any of the following cases, perform auto-tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of
Fuji standard motors so that the best performance cannot be obtained under some controls.
• The motor to be driven is a non-Fuji motor or a non-standard motor.
• Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long. (Generally, 20 m or longer)
• A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter.
Other applicable cases
■ Functions in which the motor parameters affect the running capability
Function Related function codes (representative)

Auto torque boost F37
Output torque monitor F31, F35
Load factor monitor F31, F35
Auto energy saving operation F37
Torque limit control F40
Anti-regenerative control (Automatic deceleration) H69
Auto search H09
Slip compensation F42
Vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque F42
vector)
Droop control H28
Torque detection E78 to E81
Brake Signal (Brake-OFF torque) J95
5-118
P05 Motor 1 (online tuning)
When vector control without speed sensor (dynamic torque vector) or slip compensation control is used for
long-time operation, the motor parameters change along with motor temperature rise.
If motor parameters change, the amount of speed compensation may change to cause the motor speed to be
different from the initial speed.
Enabling auto-tuning allows the identification of the motor parameters that match the change in the motor
temperature, which minimizes the motor speed variation.
To use this function, specify "2" for auto-tuning (P04).
Online tuning is enabled only when F42 = 1 (Vector control without speed sensor) or F42 = 2 (V/f control
with slip compensation active) and F37 = 2, 5 (auto torque boost).
P06 to P08 Motor 1 (no-load current, %R1 and %X)
FUNCTION CODE
P06 through P08 specify no-load current, %R1 and %X, respectively. Obtain the appropriate values from the test
report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor. Performing auto-tuning automatically sets these
parameters.
• No-load current: Input the value obtained from the motor manufacturer.
• %R1: Enter the value calculated by the following expression.
Chap 5
R1 Cable R1
%R1  × 100 (%)
V / ( 3 ×I )
R1: Primary resistance of the motor (Ω)

Cable R1: Resistance of the output cable (Ω)
V: Rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: Rated current of the motor (A)
• %X: Enter the value calculated by the following expression.
X1  X2 × XM / (X2  XM)  Cable X
%X  × 100 (%)
V / ( 3 ×I )
X1: Primary leakage reactance of the motor (Ω)

X2: Secondary leakage reactance of the motor (converted to primary) (Ω)
XM: Exciting reactance of the motor (Ω)
Cable X: Reactance of the output cable (Ω)
V: Rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: Rated current of the motor (A)
For reactance, use the value at the base frequency (F04).
5-119
P09 to P11 Motor 1 (slip compensation gain for driving, slip compensation response time and slip
compensation gain for braking)
P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in % for driving and braking individually and adjust the slip
amount from internal calculation. Mode of 100% fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor. Excessive
compensation (100% or more) may cause hunting (undesirable oscillation of the system), so carefully check the
operation on the actual machine.
P10 determines the response time for slip compensation. Basically, there is no need to modify the default setting. If
you need to modify it, consult your Fuji Electric representatives.
Function code Operation (slip compensation)

P09 Slip compensation gain for Adjust the slip compensation amount for driving.
driving Slip compensation amount for driving = Rated slip x Slip compensation
gain for driving
P11 Slip compensation gain for Adjust the slip compensation amount for braking.
braking Slip compensation amount for braking = Rated slip x Slip
compensation gain for braking
P10 Slip compensation Specify the slip compensation response time. Basically, there is no
response time need to modify the setting.
 For details about slip compensation control, refer to the description of F42.
P12 Motor 1 (rated slip frequency)
P12 specifies rated slip frequency. Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the
manufacturer of the motor. Performing auto-tuning automatically sets these parameters.
• Rated slip frequency: Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following
expression and enter the converted value.
(Note: The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes shows a larger value.)
(Synchronous speed - Rated speed)

Rated slip frequency (Hz) =  Base frequency
Synchronous speed
 For details about slip compensation control, refer to the description of F42.
P13 Motor 1 (iron loss factor 1)
The combination of P99 (Motor 1 selection) and P02 (Motor 1 rated capacity) data determines the standard value.
Basically, there is no need to modify the setting.
P53 Motor 1 (%X correction factor 1)
This is a factor for correcting the variation of leakage reactance %X. Basically, there is no need to modify the
setting.
5-120
P99 Motor 1 selection
P99 specifies the motor type to be used.
P99 data Function

0 Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard motors, 8-series)
1 Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating motors)
4 Other motors
To select the motor drive control or to run the inverter with the integrated automatic control functions such as auto
torque boost and torque calculation monitoring, it is necessary to specify the motor parameters correctly.
First select the motor type with P99 from Fuji standard motors 8-series and then initialize the motor parameters
with H03. This process automatically configures the related motor parameters (P01, P03, P06 through P13,P53
and H46).
The data of F09 (Torque boost 1), H13 (Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Restart time)), and F11
(Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 (Overload detection level)) depends on the motor capacity, but
the process stated above does not change them. Specify and adjust the data during a test run if needed.
FUNCTION CODE
Chap 5
5-121
5.3.5 H codes (High performance functions)
H03 Data initialization
Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults. The motor parameters are also initialized.
To change the H03 data, it is necessary to press the + / keys (simultaneous keying).
H03 data Function

0 Disable initialization (Settings manually made by the user will be retained.)
1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults
2 Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 (Rated capacity) and P99 (Motor 1
selection)
3 Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 (Rated capacity) and A39 (Motor 2
selection)
11 Limited initialization (initialization other than communications function codes):
Communication can be continued after initialization.
12 Limited initialization (initialization of customizable logic function U codes only)
• To initialize the motor parameters, set the related function codes as follows.
Function code
Step Item Data
1st motor 2nd motor
(1) Motor selection Selects the motor type P99 A39
Motor (rated
(2) Sets the motor capacity (kW) P02 A16
capacity)
Data
(3) Initialize motor parameters H03 = 2 H03 = 3
initialization
P01, P03, P06 to A15, A17, A20 to
Function code data to be initialized
P13, P53, H46 A27, P53
• Upon completion of the initialization, the H03 data reverts to "0" (factory default).
• If P02/A16 data is set to a value other than the standard nominal applied motor rating, data initialization with
H03 internally converts the specified value forcibly to the standard nominal applied motor rating. (See Table B
given on the last page in "5.2 Function code table.")
• Motor parameters to be initialized are for motors listed below under V/f control. When the base frequency, rated
voltage, and the number of poles are different from those of the listed motors, or when non-Fuji motors or
non-standard motors are used, change the rated current data to that printed on the motor nameplate.
Motor selection V/f control data

Data = 0 or 4 Fuji standard motors, 8-series 4 poles 200 V/50 Hz, 400 V/50 Hz
Data = 1 HP rating motors 4 poles 230 V/60 Hz, 460 V/60 Hz
When accessing P02 with the keypad, take into account that the P02 data automatically updates data of
P03, P06 through P13, P53 and H46. Also, when accessing function code A16 for the 2nd motor, data of
related function codes for each are automatically updated.
5-122
H04, H05 Auto-reset (times and reset interval)
H04 and H05 specify the auto-reset function that makes the inverter automatically attempt to reset the tripped state
and restart without issuing an alarm output (for any alarm) even if any protective function subject to reset is
activated and the inverter enters the forced-to-stop state (tripped state). If the protective function is activated in
excess of the times specified by H04, the inverter will issue an alarm output (for any alarm) and not attempt to
auto-reset the tripped state.
Listed below are the protective functions subject to auto-reset.
Protective function LED monitor displays: Protective function LED monitor displays:
Overcurrent protection 0c1,, 0c2, 0c3 Motor overheat 0h4
Overvoltage protection 0u1, 0u2, 0u3 Braking resistor overheat dbh
Heat sink overheat 0h1 Motor overload 0l1, 0l2
Inverter internal overheat 0h3 Inverter overload 0lu
FUNCTION CODE
■ Number of reset times (H04)
H04 specifies the number of reset times for the inverter to automatically attempt to escape the tripped state. When
H04 = 0, the auto-reset function will not be activated.
• Data setting range: 0 (Disable), 1 to 20 (times)
Chap 5
If the "auto-reset" function has been specified, the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped
due to a trip fault, depending on the cause of the tripping. Design the machinery so that human body and
peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto-resetting succeeds.
■ Reset interval (H05)

H05 specifies the reset interval time between the time when the inverter enters the tripped state and the time when
it issues the reset command to attempt to auto-reset the state. Refer to the timing scheme diagrams below.
<Operation timing scheme>
• In the figure below, normal operation restarts in the 4-th retry.
Protective function
Tripped state
Tripped state reset

command
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
Inverter output
frequency
Auto-resetting
[TRY]
Time
5-123
• In the figure below, the inverter failed to restart normal operation within the number of reset times specified by
H04 (in this case, 3 times (H04 = 3)), and issued the alarm output (for any alarm) ALM.
Protective function
Tripped state
Tripped state reset

command
1st 2nd 3rd

Inverter output
frequency
Auto-resetting
[TRY]
Alarm output (for any

alarm) [ALM]
Time
• The auto-reset operation can be monitored from the external equipment by assigning the digital output signal
TRY to any of the programmable, output terminals [Y1], [Y2] or [30A/B/C] with any of E20, E21 or E27 (data =
26).
H06 Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control
To prolong the service life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running, the cooling fan stops when the
temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops. However, since frequent
switching of the cooling fan shortens its service life, the cooling fan keeps running for 10 minutes once started.
H06 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control its ON/OFF.
H06 data Function

0 Disable (Always in operation)
1 Enable (ON/OFF controllable)
■ Cooling fan in operation -- FAN (E20, E21 and E27, data = 25)
With the cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled (H06 = 1), this output signal is ON when the cooling fan is in
operation, and OFF when it is stopped. This signal can be used to make the cooling system of peripheral
equipment interlocked for an ON/OFF control
H07 Acceleration/Deceleration pattern (refer to F07)
For details, refer to the description of F07.
5-124
H08 Rotational direction limitation
H08 inhibits the motor from running in an unexpected rotational direction due to miss-operation of run commands,
miss-polarization of frequency commands, or other mistakes.
H08 data Function

0 Disable
1 Enable (Reverse rotation inhibited)
2 Enable (Forward rotation inhibited)
H09 Starting mode (auto searchmode)

Related function codes: H49 (Starting mode, auto search delay time 1)
H46 (Starting mode, auto search delay time 2)
FUNCTION CODE
Specify the mode for auto search without stopping the idling motor. The mode can be specified for each restart
after momentary power failure and each start of normal operation. The starting mode can be switched by assigning
“STM” to a general-purpose digital input signal. If it is not assigned, “STM” is regarded to be OFF. (Data = 26)
■ H09 (Starting mode, auto search) and terminal command “STM” ("Enable auto search for
idling motor speed at starting")
The combination of H09 data and the “STM” status determines whether to perform the auto search as listed below.
Chap 5
Function code Drive control Factory default
H09 V/f control (F42 = 0 to 2) 0: Disable
Enable auto search for idling Auto search for idling motor speed at starting
H09 data motor speed at starting For restart after momentary power
“STM” For normal startup
failure (F14 = 3 to 5)
0: Disable OFF Disable Disable
1: Enable OFF Enable Disable
2: Enable OFF Enable Enable
― ON Enable Enable
When “STM” is ON, auto search for idling motor speed at starting is enabled regardless of the H09 setting.
(Function codes E01 to E05, data =26)
5-125
Auto search for idling motor speed to follow

Starting the inverter (with a run command ON, BX OFF, auto-reset, etc.) with STM being ON searches for the idling
motor speed for a maximum of 1.2 seconds to run the idling motor without stopping it. After completion of the auto
search, the inverter accelerates the motor up to the reference frequency according to the frequency command and
the preset acceleration time.
Frequency command
Motor speed
Starting
mode (auto
search
delay time
1) (H49) 1.2 s max.
Motor speed
estimation
“STM”
“FWD”
■ Starting mode (auto search delay time 1) (H49)

Auto search does not function normally when performed with the residual voltage remaining in the motor.
Accordingly, time to allow the residual voltage to disappear must be ensured.
When operation is started by turning a run command ON, auto search is started after the period specified with the
starting mode (auto search delay time) (H49) has elapsed. When switching between two inverters for controlling
one motor and coasting to stop the motor at the time of switching to start by auto search, specifying H49 eliminates
the need for timing the run command.
■ Starting mode (auto search delay time 2) (H46)

At the restart after a momentary power failure, at the start by turning the terminal command “BX” ("Coast to a stop")
OFF and ON, or at the restart by auto-reset, the inverter applies the delay time specified by H46. The inverter will
not start unless the time specified by H46 has elapsed, even if the starting conditions are satisfied. The inverter
starts after the auto search delay time has elapsed.
Power Power
failure restoration
DC link bus
voltage
Motor speed/output
frequency
Output Motor speed
frequency
Under auto search control, the inverter searches the motor speed with the voltage applied at the motor start and
the current flowing in the motor, based on the model built with the motor parameters. Therefore, the search is
greatly influenced by the residual voltage in the motor.
5-126
H46 is available for motor 1 only. At factory shipment, H46 data is preset to a correct value according to the motor
capacity for the general-purpose motor, and basically there is no need to modify the data.
Depending on the motor characteristics, however, it may take time for residual voltage to disappear (due to the
secondary thermal time constant of the motor). In such a case, the inverter starts the motor with the residual
voltage remaining, which will cause an error in the speed search and may result in occurrence of an inrush current
or an overvoltage alarm.
If it happens, increase the value of H46 data and remove the influence of residual voltage.
(If possible, it is recommended to set the value around two times as large as the factory default value allowing a
margin.)
• Be sure to auto-tune the inverter preceding the start of auto search for the idling motor speed.
• When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency, the inverter
disables auto search and starts running the motor with the maximum frequency or the upper limit
frequency, whichever is lower.
• During auto search, if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs, the inverter restarts the suspended
auto search.
• Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below.
FUNCTION CODE
Note that auto search may not fully provide the performance depending on load conditions, motor
parameters, wiring length, and other external factors.
H11 Deceleration mode
Chap 5
H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF.
H11 data Action

0 Normal deceleration
1 The inverter immediately shuts down its output, so the motor stops according to the
inertia of the motor and machinery (load) and their kinetic energy losses.
When reducing the reference frequency, the inverter decelerates the motor according to the deceleration
commands even if H11 = 1 (Coast-to-stop).
H12 Instantaneous overcurrent limiting (mode selection) (refer to F43)
Refer to the descriptions of F43 and F44.
H13, H14 Restart mode after momentary power failure (restart time, frequency fall rate)
H15, H16 Restart mode after momentary power failure (continuous running level, allowable
momentary power failure time) (refer to F14)
For how to set these function codes (Restart time, Frequency fall rate, Continuous running level and Allowable
momentary power failure time), refer to the description of F14.
5-127
H26, H27 Thermistor (for motor) (mode selection and Level)
These function codes specify the PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor embedded in the motor. The
thermistor is used to protect the motor from overheating or output an alarm signal.
■ Thermistor (for motor) (mode selection) (H26)

H26 selects the function operation mode (protection or alarm) for the PTC/NTC thermistor as shown below.
H26 data Action

0 Disable
1 When the voltage sensed by PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level, motor
protective function (alarm 0h4) is triggered, causing the inverter to enter an alarm
stop state.
2 When the voltage sensed by the PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level, a motor
alarm signal is output but the inverter continues running.
You need to assign the "Motor overheat detected by thermistor" signal (“THM”) to one
of the digital output terminals beforehand, by which a temperature alarm condition can
be detected by the thermistor (PTC) (E20, E21 and E27, data = 56).
If H26 data is set to "1" or "2" (PTC thermistor), the inverter monitors the voltage sensed by PTC thermistor and
protect the motor even when the 2nd motor is selected.
■ Thermistor (for motor) (level) (H27)

H27 specifies the detection level (expressed in voltage) for the temperature sensed by the PTC thermistor.
• Data setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 (V)
The alarm temperature at which the overheat protection becomes activated depends on the characteristics of the
PTC thermistor. The internal resistance of the thermistor will significantly change at the alarm temperature. The
detection level (voltage) is specified based on the change of the internal resistance.
PTC thermistor
internal resistance
Temperature
Alarm temperature
Suppose that the internal resistance of the PTC thermistor at the alarm temperature is Rp, the detection level
(voltage) Vv2 is calculated by the expression below. Set the result Vv2 to function code H27.
Rp
VV 2   10.5(V )
1000  5  R p
5-128
Connect the PTC thermistor as shown below. The voltage obtained by dividing the input voltage on terminal [C1]
with a set of internal resistors is compared with the detection level voltage specified by H27.
Mode
selection
Comparator
PTC
thermistor
“THM”
Thermistor detection
level
FUNCTION CODE
When using the terminal [C1] for PTC thermistor input, also turn SW4 on the control printed circuit board
to the PTC/NTC side. For details, refer to Chapter 2.
H28 Droop control
Chap 5
In a system in which two or more motors drive single machinery, any speed gap between inverter-driven motors
results in some load unbalance between motors. Droop control allows each inverter to drive the motor with the
speed droop characteristic for increasing its load, eliminating such kind of load unbalance.
• Data setting range: -60.0 to 0.0 (Hz), (0.0: Disable)
Speed (output frequency)
Reference frequency
Output frequency
Droop characteristic
Load
Motor torque
■ Select droop control – “DROOP” (E01 to E05, data = 76)

The terminal command "DROOP” toggles droop control on and off.
The terminal command “DROOP” Droop control

ON Enable
OFF Disable
To use droop control, be sure to auto-tune the inverter for the motor.
Under V/f control, to prevent the inverter from tripping even at an abrupt change in load, droop control
applies the acceleration/deceleration time to the frequency obtained as a result of droop control. This
may delay reflection of the frequency compensated during droop control on the motor speed, thereby
running the inverter as if droop control is disabled.
5-129
H30 Communications link function (mode selection)

Related function codes: y98 bus link function (mode selection)
Using the RS-485 communications link, built-in CAN communications link or fieldbus (option) allows you to issue
frequency commands and run commands from a computer or PLC at a remote location, as well as monitor the
inverter running information and the function code data. Sets the source that specifies the frequency and run
commands with H30 and y98. H30 and y98 set the sources that specify RS-485 communications and fieldbus
respectively.
When the built-in CAN communications link is enabled with y33 = 1, the fieldbus in the figure below is replaced with
the built-in CAN communications link.
“LE”
Selected setting
Inverter
(frequency command/run
command)
RS-485 communications link
(port 1: RJ-45)
Setting specified by H30 or
RS-485 communications link y98 applies when “LE” is
(port 2: terminal) not assigned.
Fieldbus (option)
Command sources selectable
Command sources Data

Inverter itself Sources except RS-485 communications link and fieldbus
Frequency command source: Specified by F01/C30, or multi-frequency
command
Run command source: Via the keypad or digital input terminals selected by
F02
Via RS-485 communications link Via the standard RJ-45 port used for connecting a keypad
(port 1)
Via RS-485 communications link C model (for China):Via the terminals DX+, DX- and SD
(port 2)
Other than C model (other than for China): Via RJ-12 connector
Via fieldbus Via fieldbus (DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
(option and built-in CAN) Via built-in CAN communications link
*C model (for China) is not equipped with the CAN communications link.
Command sources specified by H30 (Communications link function, Mode selection)
H30 data Frequency command Run command source

0 Inverter itself (F01/C30) Inverter itself (F02)
1 RS-485 communications link (port 1) Inverter itself (F02)
2 Inverter itself (F01/C30) RS-485 communications link (port 1)
3 RS-485 communications link (port 1) RS-485 communications link (port 1)
4 RS-485 communications link (port 2) Inverter itself (F02)
6 Inverter itself (F01/C30) RS-485 communications link (port 2)
5-130
Command sources specified by y98 (Bus link function, Mode selection)
y98 data Frequency command Run command source

0 Follow H30 data Follow H30 data
1 Via fieldbus (option) Follow H30 data
2 Follow H30 data Via fieldbus (option)
3 Via fieldbus (option) Via fieldbus (option)
H30 and y98 settings by combination of sources
Frequency command
Via RS-485 Via RS-485
Inverter itself communications link communications link Via fieldbus (option)
port 1 port 2
H30 = 0 H30 = 1 H30 = 4 H30 = 0 (1, 4)
Inverter itself
FUNCTION CODE
y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 1
Run command source
Via RS-485
H30 = 2 H30 = 3 H30 = 5 H30 = 2 (3, 5)
communications link
y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 1
(port 1)
Via RS-485
H30 = 6 H30 = 7 H30 = 8 H30 = 6 (7, 8)
communications link
y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98 = 1
(port 2)
Chap 5
Via fieldbus (option H30 = 0 (2, 6) H30 = 1 (3, 7) H30 = 4 (5, 8) H30 = 0 (1 to 8)
and built-in CAN) y98 = 2 y98 = 2 y98 = 2 y98 = 3
 For details, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual or the Field Bus (Option and Built-in CAN)
Instruction Manual.
• When the terminal command “LE” ("Enable communications link via RS-485 or fieldbus") is assigned to a digital
input terminal, turning “LE” ON makes the settings of H30 and y98 enabled. When LE is OFF, those settings are
disabled so that both frequency commands and run commands specified from the inverter itself take control.
(Function codes E01 to E05, data = 24)
No “LE” assignment is functionally equivalent to the “LE” being ON.
5-131
H42, H43, Capacitance measurement of DC link bus capacitor, Cumulative run time of cooling fan
H48 Cumulative run time of capacitors on printed circuit boards
Related function codes: H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor
H98 Protection/maintenance function
 Life prediction function

The inverter has the life prediction function for some parts which measures the discharging time or counts the
voltage applied time, etc. The function allows you to monitor the current lifetime state on the LED monitor and
judge whether those parts are approaching the end of their service life. The life prediction function can also issue
early warning signals if the lifetime alarm command LIFE is assigned to any of the digital output terminals by any of
E20, E21 and E27.
The predicted values should be used only as a guide since the actual service life is influenced by the surrounding
temperature and other usage environments.
Object of life Prediction On the LED

Prediction function End-of-life criteria
prediction timing monitor
DC link bus Calculating the capacitance 85% or lower of the initial At periodic 5_05
capacitor of DC link bus capacitor capacitance at shipment inspection (Capacitance)
Measures the discharging (See "[ 1 ] Measuring the H98 bit3 = 0
time of the DC link bus capacitance of DC link
capacitor when the main bus capacitor in
power is shut down and comparison with initial
calculates the capacitance. one at shipment" on the
next page.)
85% or lower of the During 5_05
reference capacitance ordinary (Capacitance)
under ordinary operating operation
conditions at the user site H98 bit3 = 1
(See "[ 2 ] Measuring the
capacitance of DC link
bus capacitor under
ordinary operating
conditions" on page
5-155.)
ON-time counting of DC link Exceeding 87,600 hours During 5_26
bus capacitor (10 years) ordinary (Elapsed
Counts the time elapsed (ND mode: 61,320 operation time)
when the voltage is applied to hours) 5_27
the DC link bus capacitor,
(Time
while correcting it according
remaining
to the capacitance measured
before the
above.
end of life)
Electrolytic Counts the time elapsed Exceeding 87,600 hours During 5_06
capacitors on when the voltage is applied to (10 years) ordinary (Cumulative
printed circuit the capacitors, while (ND mode: 61,320 operation run time)
boards correcting it according to the hours)
surrounding temperature.
Cooling fans Counts the run time of the Exceeding 87,600 hours During 5_07
cooling fans. (10 years) ordinary (Cumulative
(ND mode: 61,320 operation run time)
hours)
 Capacitance measurement of DC link bus capacitor (H42)
Calculating the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor
• The discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor depends largely on the inverter's internal load conditions, e.g.
options attached or ON/OFF of digital I/O signals. If actual load conditions are so different from the ones at
which the initial/reference capacitance is measured that the measurement result falls out of the accuracy level
required, then the inverter does not perform measuring.
• The capacitance measuring conditions at shipment are extremely restricted, e.g., all input terminals being OFF
in order to stabilize the load and measure the capacitance accurately. Those conditions are, therefore, different
from the actual operating conditions in almost all cases. If the actual operating conditions are the same as those
at shipment, shutting down the inverter power automatically measures the discharging time; however, if they are
different, no automatic measurement is performed. To perform it, put those conditions back to the factory default
ones and shut down the inverter. For the measuring procedure, see [ 1 ] given below.
5-132
• To measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is
turned OFF, it is necessary to set up the load conditions for ordinary operation and measure the reference
capacitance (initial setting) when the inverter is introduced. For the reference capacitance setup procedure, see
[ 2 ] on the next page. Performing the setup procedure automatically detects and saves the measuring
conditions of the DC link bus capacitor.
Setting bit 3 of H98 data to 0 restores the inverter to the measurement in comparison with the initial capacitance
measured at shipment.
When the inverter uses an auxiliary control power input, the load conditions widely differ so that the
discharging time cannot be accurately measured. In this case, measuring of the discharging time can be
disabled with the function code H98 (Bit 4 = 0) for preventing unintended measuring. (For details, refer to
H98.)
ON-time counting of DC link bus capacitor

• In a machine system where the inverter main power is rarely shut down, the inverter does not measure the
discharging time. For such an inverter, the ON-time counting is provided. If the capacitance measurement is
made, the inverter corrects the ON-time according to the capacitance measured. The ON-time counting result
can be represented as "elapsed time" and "remaining time" before the end of life.
FUNCTION CODE
[1] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at
shipment
When bit 3 of H98 data is 0, the measuring procedure given below measures the capacitance of DC link bus
capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment when the power is turned OFF. The measuring result can be
displayed on the keypad as a ratio (%) to the initial capacitance.
----------------------------------------------Capacitance measuring procedure----------------------------------------
Chap 5
1) To ensure validity in the comparative measurement, put the condition of the inverter back to the state at
factory shipment.
• Remove the option card (if already in use) from the inverter.
• In case another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P(+) and N(-) terminals of the main circuit,
disconnect the wires. (You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor (optional), if any.)
• Disconnect power wires for the auxiliary input to the control circuit (R0, T0).
• In case the standard keypad has been replaced with an optional multi-function keypad TP-A1 after the
purchase, put back the original standard keypad.
• Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals [FWD], [REV], and [X1] through [X5] of the control circuit
• If a potentiometer is connected to terminal [13], disconnect it.
• If an external apparatus is attached to terminal [PLC], disconnect it.
• Ensure that transistor output signals ([Y1] and [Y2]) and relay output signals ([30A/B/C]) will not be turned ON.
• Disable the RS-485 and built-in CAN communications links.
If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals, they are considered ON
when the inverter is not running. Specify positive logic for them.
• Keep the surrounding temperature within 25 ±10℃.

2) Turn ON the main circuit power.
3) Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state.
4) Turn OFF the main circuit power.
5) The inverter automatically starts the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor. Make
sure that " . . . . " appears on the LED monitor.
If " . . . . " does not appear on the LED monitor, the measurement has not started. Check the conditions
listed in 1).
5-133
6) After " . . . . " has disappeared from the LED monitor, turn ON the main circuit power again.
7) Select Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in Programming mode and note the reading (relative capacitance
(%) of the DC link bus capacitor).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[2] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating
conditions at power shutdown
When bit 3 of H98 data is 1, the inverter automatically measures the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor
under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF. This measurement requires setting up the load
conditions for ordinary operation and measuring the reference capacitance when the inverter is introduced to the
practical operation, using the setup procedure given below.
Function code Name Data

H42 Capacitance of DC link bus • Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor (measured
capacitor value)
• Start of initial capacitance measuring mode under
ordinary operating conditions (0000)
• Measurement failure (0001)
H47 Initial capacitance of DC link • Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor (measured
bus capacitor value)
• Start of initial capacitance measuring mode under
ordinary operating conditions (0000)
• Measurement failure (0001)
When replacing parts, clear or modify the H42 and H47 data. For details, refer to the maintenance related
documents.
---------------------------------------Reference capacitance setup procedure--------------------------------------

1) Set function code H98 (Protection/maintenance function) to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria
for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor (Bit 3 = 1) (refer to function code H98).
2) Turn OFF all run commands.
3) Make the inverter ready to be turned OFF under ordinary operating conditions.
4) Set both function codes H42 (Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor) and H47 (Initial capacitance of DC link
bus capacitor) to "0000".
5) Turn OFF the inverter, and the following operations are automatically performed.
The inverter measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and saves the result in function code
H47 (Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor).
The conditions under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved.
During the measurement, " . . . . " will appear on the LED monitor.
6) Turn ON the inverter again.
Confirm that H42 (Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor) and H47 (Initial capacitance of DC link bus
capacitor) hold right values. Shift to Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" and confirm that the relative
capacitance (ratio to full capacitance) is 100%.
Note If the measurement has failed, "0001" is entered into both H42 and H47. Remove the factor of the failure
and conduct the measurement again.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hereafter, each time the inverter is turned OFF, it automatically measures the discharging time of the DC link bus
capacitor if the above conditions are met. Periodically check the relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor
(%) with Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in Programming mode.
Note The condition given above tends to produce a rather large measurement error. If this mode gives you a
lifetime alarm, set H98 (Protection/maintenance function) back to the default setting (Bit 3 (Select life
judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor) = 0) and conduct the measurement under the condition at
the time of factory shipment.
5-134
 Cumulative run time of capacitors on printed circuit boards (H48)

H48 Cumulative run time of Displays the cumulative run time of capacitor on the
capacitors on printed circuit printed circuit board in units of ten hours.
boards • Data setting range: 0 to 9999 (0 to 99990 hours)
When replacing capacitors on printed circuit boards, clearing or modifying H48 data is required. For details, refer to
the maintenance related documents.
 Cumulative run time of cooling fan (H43)

H43 Cumulative run time of Displays the cumulative run time of cooling fan in units of
cooling fan ten hours.
• Data setting range: 0 to 9999 (0 to 99990 hours)
FUNCTION CODE
When replacing the cooling fan, clearing or modifying H43 data is required. For details, refer to the maintenance
related documents.
H44 Startup counter for motor 1
Chap 5
H44 counts the number of inverter startups and displays it in hexadecimal format. Check the displayed number on
the maintenance screen of the keypad, and use it as a guide for maintenance timing for parts such as belts. To
start the counting over again, e.g. after a belt replacement, set the H44 data to "0000."
H45 Mock alarm

Related function codes: H97 (Clear alarm data)
H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences function correctly
at the time of machine setup. Setting the H45 data to "1" displays mock alarm err on the LED monitor. It also
issues alarm output (for any alarm) “ALM” (if assigned to a digital output terminal by any of E20, E21 and E27).
Accessing the H45 data requires simultaneous keying of the key + key. After that, the H45 data
automatically reverts to "0," allowing you to reset the alarm.
Just as data (alarm history and relevant information) of those alarms that could occur in running the inverter, the
inverter saves mock alarm data, enabling you to confirm the mock alarm status.
To clear the mock alarm data, use H97. (Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying of the key +
key.) H97 data automatically returns to "0" after clearing the alarm data.
A mock alarm can be issued also by simultaneous keying of the key + key" on the keypad for 5
seconds or more.
H46 Starting mode (auto search delay time 2) (refer to H09)
For details, refer to the description of H09.
5-135
H47, H48 Initial capacitance of DC Link bus capacitor, Cumulative run time of capacitors on
printed circuit boards (refer to H42)
H49 Starting mode (auto search delay time 1) (refer to H09)
H50, H51 Non-linear V/f pattern１(frequency and voltage) (refer to F04)

H52, H53 Non-linear V/f pattern 2 (frequency and voltage)
H54, H55 Acceleration/Deceleration time (jogging) (refer to F07)

H56 Deceleration time for forced stop
H57 to H60 1st/2nd S-curve acceleration/deceleration range
H61 UP/DOWN control (initial frequency setting) (refer to F01)
H63 Low limiter (mode selection) (refer to F15)
H64 Low limiter (lower limiting frequency)
H64 specifies the lower limit of frequency to be applied when the current limiter, torque limiter, or overload
prevention control is activated. Normally, it is not necessary to change this data.
H65, H66 Non-linear V/f pattern 3 (frequency and voltage) (refer to F04)
5-136
H68 Slip compensation 1 (operating conditions) (refer to F42)
H69 Anti-regenerative control (mode selection)

Related function codes: H76 (Torque limiter) (frequency increment
limit for braking)
Enable the automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control) with this function code. In the inverter not equipped
with a PWM converter or braking unit, if the regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter's braking capability,
an overvoltage trip occurs.Turning digital input “AR-CCL” ON disables anti-regenrative control. (Function codes
E01 to E05, data =82)
If anti-regenerative control is selected, the output frequency is controlled to suppress the regenerative energy for
avoiding an overvoltage trip.
Function
H69 Force-to-stop with actual deceleration time AR-CCL
Control mode
FUNCTION CODE
exceeding three times the specified one
0 Disable automatic deceleration - OFF
2 Torque limit control Enable OFF
3 DC link bus voltage control Enable OFF
4 Torque limit control Disable OFF
5 DC link bus voltage control Disable OFF
- Disable automatic deceleration - ON
Chap 5
FRENIC-Ace is equipped with two control modes: torque limiter and DC link bus voltage control.
Understand the features of the respective modes and select the appropriate one.
Control mode Control operation Operation mode Characteristics

Torque limiter Controls the output Enabled during Features high response and makes
(H69 = 2, 4) frequency so that the acceleration, less prone to overvoltage trips under
braking torque is constant speed impact load.
approximately 0. operation and
deceleration.
DC link bus Controls the output Enabled only during Makes use of the regenerative
voltage control frequency so that the DC deceleration capability of the inverter to allow
(H69 = 3, 5) link bus voltage is Disabled during reduced deceleration time.
decreased when it constant speed
exceeds the limit level. operation
 Torque limiter (frequency increment limit for braking) (H76)

With the torque limiter, the inverter increases the output frequency to limit the output torque. Excessive increase of
the output frequency may cause danger and the frequency increment limit for braking (H76) is provided. This
prevents the output frequency from increasing to exceed the "reference frequency + H76." If the limit is reached,
however, anti-regenerative control is restricted and an overvoltage trip may occur. Increasing the frequency
increment limit for braking improves the anti-regenerative capability.
If a run command is turned OFF, the anti-regenerative control causes the frequency to increase and operation may
not stop depending on the load conditions. For safety, a function is provided in which the anti-regenerative control
is forced to be disabled in three times the deceleration time currently selected to force the operation to stop. The
function can be enabled/disabled by the H69 setting.
• The deceleration time may be automatically increased by anti-regenerative control.

• Disable the anti-regenerative control when a braking unit is connected. Otherwise, the
anti-regenerative control may be activated at the same time as the operation of the braking unit,
resulting in a deceleration time not in accordance with the setting.
• An excessively short deceleration time causes the DC link bus voltage of the inverter to rise too fast
for the anti-regenerative control to function. In that case, specify a longer deceleration time.
5-137
H70 Overload prevention control
Specifies the rate of decrease of the output frequency of overload prevention control. Before the inverter generates
a heat sink overheat or overload trip (alarm 0h1 or 0lu), the output frequency of the inverter is decreased for
avoiding a trip. This is applied when operation is required to continue even if the output frequency decreases in a
system in which the load decreases as the output frequency decreases, such as a pump.
H70 data Function

0.00 Uses the deceleration time currently selected (F08, E11, E13, E15, etc.).
0.01 to 100.0 Decelerates at a deceleration of 0.01 to 100.0 (Hz/s).
999 Cancel overload prevention control
 Overload prevention control – “OLP” (E20, E21 and E27, data = 36)
Outputs “OLP”, which is a signal that turns ON during overload prevention control, in order to show that the
overload prevention control has been activated and the output frequency has changed.
No effect can be expected in a system in which the load does not decrease even if the output frequency
decreases. Do not use this function.
H71 Deceleration characteristic
Enable hard braking control with this function code.

During motor deceleration, if the regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter's braking capability, an
overvoltage trip occurs. When hard braking control is selected, the motor loss is increased and the deceleration
torque is increased during motor deceleration.
H71 data Function

0 Disable
1 Action
This function suppresses the torque during deceleration and is not effective if braking load is
applied. When anti-regenerative control of the torque limiter is enabled (H69 = 2, 4), the
deceleration characteristic is disabled.
H72 Main circuit power cutoff detection (mode selection)
This function monitors the AC input power supply of the inverter to see if the AC input power supply (main circuit
power) is established and prevents inverter operation when the main circuit power is not established.
H72 data Function
0 Disables main circuit power cutoff detection

1 Enables main circuit power cutoff detection
With power supply via a PWM converter or DC link bus, there is no AC input. When the data for H72 is "1," the
inverter cannot operate. Change the data for H72 to "0."
For single-phase supply, consult your Fuji Electric representatives.
5-138
H76 Torque limiter (Frequency increment limit for braking) (refer to H69)
H77 Life of DC link bus capacitor (time remaining before the end of life)
Indicates the time remaining (in units of ten hours) before the end of service life of the DC link bus capacitor.
Transfer the DC link bus capacitor life data when replacing the printed circuit board.
• Data setting range: 0 to 8760 (in units of 10 hours 0 to 87,600 hours)
H78 Maintenance interval (M1)

H94 Cumulative motor run time 1
FUNCTION CODE
Specify the maintenance interval in hours with the maintenance interval (M1) (H78).
Specify in units of 10 hours. Up to 9999 x 10 hours can be specified.
• Data setting range: 0 (disable), 1 to 9999 (in units of 10 hours)
 Maintenance timer – “MNT” (E20, E21 and E27, data = 84)

When the cumulative motor run time 1 (H94) reaches the value specified by the maintenance interval (H78), the
Chap 5
inverter outputs the maintenance timer signal “MNT”.
 Cumulative motor run time 1 (H94)

The cumulative run time of the motor can be indicated by keypad operation. It can be used for management of the
machinery or maintenance. Specifying an arbitrary time for the cumulative motor run time 1 (H94) allows an
arbitrary value to be specified for the cumulative motor run time. It can be replaced with the initial data to use as a
guide for the replacement of machine parts or inverter. Specifying "0" as the setting allows the cumulative motor
run time to be reset.
<For half yearly maintenance>
Cumulative motor run time (H94)
(8760 h=a year)
(4380 h=halt year)
Time
Maintenance timer
“MNT”
If the maintenance interval is reached, set a new value in H78 and press the key to reset the output
signal and restart measurement.
This function is exclusively applied to the 1st motor.
5-139
 Count the run time of commercial power-driven motor 1, 2 – “CRUN-M1, 2” (E01 to E05, data
= 72, 73)
Even when a motor is driven by commercial power, not by the inverter, it is possible to count the cumulative motor
run time 1, 2 (H94, A51) by detecting the ON/OFF state of the auxiliary contact of the magnetic contactor for
switching to the commercial power line.
Check the cumulative motor run time with 5_23 on Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" of the keypad.
H79 Preset startup count for maintenance (M1) Related function codes: H44 Startup counter
for motor 1
H79 specifies the number of inverter startup times to determine the next maintenance timing, e.g., for replacement
of a belt.
Set the H79 and H44 data in hexadecimal. The maximum setting count is 65,535 (FFFF in hexadecimal.)
• Data setting range: OFF (disable), 0001 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
 Maintenance timer – “MNT” (E20, E21 and E27, data = 84)

When the startup counter for motor 1 (H44) reaches the number specified by H79 (Preset startup count for
maintenance (M1)), the inverter outputs the maintenance timer signal “MNT” (if assigned to any digital terminal
with any to E20 to E24 and E27) to remind the user of the need of the maintenance of the machinery.
< Maintenance every 1,000 times of startups >
Startup counter 1(H44)
(2000 times)
(1000 times)
Startup counter
Maintenance timer
“MNT”
If the startup counter reaches the specified value, set a new value for the next maintenance in H79 and
press the key to reset the output signal and restart counting.
This function is exclusively applied to the 1st motor.
H80 Output current fluctuation damping gain for motor 1
The inverter output current driving the motor may fluctuate due to the motor characteristics and/or backlash in the
machinery (load). Modifying the H80 data adjusts the controls in order to suppress such fluctuation. However, as
incorrect setting of this gain may cause larger current fluctuation, do not modify the default setting unless it is
necessary.
• Data setting range: 0.00 to 1.00
5-140
H81, H82 Light alarm selection 1 and 2
If the inverter detects a minor abnormal state "light alarm", it can continue the current operation without tripping
while displaying the "light alarm" indication l-al on the LED monitor. In addition to the indication l-al, the inverter
blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED. Function codes H81 and H82 specify which alarms should be categorized as
"light alarm."
The table below lists alarms selectable as "light alarm."
Code Name Description

0h1 Heat sink overheat Heat sink temperature increased to the trip level.
An error that has occurred in peripheral equipment
0h2 Enable external alarm trip
turned the external alarm signal THR ON.
The temperature inside the inverter abnormally has
0h3 Inverter internal overheat
increased.
Estimated temperature of the coil in the braking
dbh Braking resistor overheat
resistor exceeded the allowable level.
Motor temperature calculated with the inverter output
FUNCTION CODE
0l1 to 0l2 Overload of motor 1 to 2
current reached the trip level.
Communications error between the inverter and an
er4 Option communications error
option.
er5 Option error An option judged that an error occurred.
Built-in CAN communications link
ert Error generated in built-in CAN communications link
error
er8 RS-485 communications error RS-485 communications error between the COM
Chap 5
erp (COM port 1, 2) ports 1 and 2.
cof PID feedback wire break The PID feedback signal wire(s) is broken.
fal Detect DC fan lock Failure of the air circulation DC fan inside the inverter
0l Motor overload early warning Early warning before a motor overload
0h Heat sink overheat early warning Early warning before a heat sink overheat trip
It is judged that the service life of any one of the
capacitors (DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic
capacitors on the printed circuit boards) and cooling
lif Lifetime alarm
fan has expired.
Or, failure of the air circulation DC fan inside the
inverter.
ref Reference loss Analog frequency command was lost.
Warning related to PID control (absolute-value alarm
pid PID alarm
or deviation alarm)
Output torque drops below the low torque detection
uTl Low output torque detection
level for the specified period.
The PTC thermistor on the motor detected a
pTc PTC thermistor activated
temperature.
The motor cumulative run time reached the specified
rTe Inverter life (Cumulative run time)
level.
cnT Inverter life (Number of startups) Number of startups reached the specified level.
Set data for selecting "light alarms" in hexadecimal. For details on how to select the codes, see the next page.
• Data setting range: 0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
5-141
 Selecting light alarm factors

To set and display the light alarm factors in hexadecimal format, each light alarm factor has been assigned to bits 0
to 15 as listed in Tables 5.1 and 5.2. Set the bit that corresponds to the desired light alarm factor to "1." Table 5.3
shows the relationship between each of the light alarm factor assignments and the LED monitor display.
Table 5.4 gives the conversion table from 4-bit binary to hexadecimal.
Table 5.1 Light Alarm Selection 1 (H81), Bit Assignment of Selectable Factors
Bit Code Data Bit Code Data

15 - - 7 - -
14 - - 6 0l2 Overload of motor 2
RS-485 communications error (COM
13 erp 5 0l1 Overload of motor 1
port 2)
RS-485 communications error (COM
12 er8 4 dbh Braking resistor overheat
port 1)
er5 Option error

11 Built-in CAN communications link 3 - -
ert
error
10 er4 Option communications error 2 0h3 Inverter intetrnal overheat
9 - - 1 0h2 External alarm
8 - - 0 0h1 Heat sink overheat
Table 5.2 Light Alarm Selection 2 (H82), Bit Assignment of Selectable Factors
Bit Code Data Bit Code Data
15 - － 7 lif Lifetime alarm
14 - － 6 0h Heat sink overheat early warning
13 cnT Inverter life (Number of startups) 5 0l Motor overload early warning
12 rTe Inverter life (Cumulative run time) 4 fal Detect DC fan lock
11 pTc PTC thermistor activated 3 cof PID feedback wire break
10 uTl Low output torque detection 2 - -
9 pid PID alarm 1 - -
8 ref Reference loss 0 - -

Table 5.3 Display of Light Alarm Factor
(Example) Light alarm factors "RS-485 communications error (COM port 2)," "RS-485 communications error
(COM port 1)," "Option communications error," "Overload of motor 1" and "Heat sink overheat" are
selected by H81.
LED No. LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Code - - erp er8 er5 er4 - - - 0l2 O0l1 dbh - 0h3 O0h2 O0h1
Binary 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
Hexadec
imal
Sample indication
*Refer to 3 4 2 1
conversi
on table
below
Hexadec
imal on
the LED
monitor
5-142
 Hexadecimal expression
A 4-bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format (hexadecimal digit). The table below shows the
correspondence between the two notations.
Table 5.4 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion
Binary Hexadecim Binary Hexadecim

al al
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 9
0 0 1 0 2 1 0 1 0 a
0 0 1 1 3 1 0 1 1 b
0 1 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 c
0 1 0 1 5 1 1 0 1 d
FUNCTION CODE
0 1 1 0 6 1 1 1 0 e
0 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 f
When H26 = 1 (PTC (The inverter immediately trips with 0h4 displayed)), if the PTC thermistor is
activated, the inverter stops without displaying l-al, blinking the KEYPAD CONTROL LED, or outputting
L-ALM signal, regardless of the assignment of bit 11 (PTC thermistor activated) by H82 (Light Alarm
Selection 2).
Chap 5
 Light alarm – “L-ALM” (E20, E21 and E27, data = 98)
This output signal “L-ALM” comes ON when a light alarm occurs.
H89 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor – data retention
When the electronic thermal overload protection for motor is used, whether to clear the cumulative value of the
thermal by inverter power-off or retain the value after power-off can be specified.
Data for H89 Function
0 Clears cumulative value of thermal by inverter power-off.

1 Retains cumulative value of thermal after inverter power-off (factory default).
H90 Reserved for particular manufacturers
H90 is reserved for particular manufacturers. Unless otherwise specified, do not access these function codes.
5-143
H91 PID feedback wire break
Using the terminal [C1] (C1 function) (current input) for PID feedback signal enables wire break detection and
alarm (cof) issuance. H91 specifies whether the wire break detection is enabled, or the duration of detection.
(The inverter judges an input current to the terminal [C1] below 2 mA as a wire break.)
This function does not work unless C40 is set to 0.
• Data setting range: 0.0 (Disable wire break detection)
0.1 to 60.0 s (Detect wire break and issue cof alarm within the time)
H92, H93 Continue to run (P, I) (refer to F14)
H94 Cumulative motor run time 1 (refer to H78)
Refer to the description of H78.
H95 DC braking (braking response mode) (refer to F20 to F22)
Refer to the descriptions of F20 through F22.
H96 STOP key priority/Start check function
H96 specifies a functional combination of "STOP key priority" and "Start check function" as listed below.
H96 data STOP key priority Start check function
0 Disable Disable
1 Enable Disable
2 Disable Enable
3 Enable Enable
 STOP key priority

Even when run commands are entered from the digital input terminals or via the RS-485 communications link (link
operation), pressing the key forces the inverter to decelerate and stop the motor. After that, er6 appears on
the LED monitor.
 Start check function
For safety, this function checks whether any run command has been turned ON or not in each of the following
situations. If one has been turned ON, the inverter does not start up but displays alarm code er6 on the LED
monitor.
• When the power to the inverter is turned ON.
• When the key is pressed to release an alarm status or when the digital input terminal command “RST”
("Reset alarm") is turned ON.
• When the run command source is switched by a digital input terminal command such as “LE” ("Enable
communications link via RS-485 or fieldbus") or “LOC” ("Select local (keypad) operation").
5-144
H97 Clear alarm data Related function codes: H45 Mock alarm
H97 clears alarm data (alarm history and relevant information) stored in the inverter.
To clear alarm data, simultaneous keying of " key + key" is required.
H97 data Function

0 Disable
1 Enable (Setting "1" clears alarm data and then returns to "0.")
H98 Protection/Maintenance function (mode selection)
H98 specifies whether to enable or disable automatic lowering of carrier frequency, input phase loss protection,
output phase loss protection, judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor, judgment on the life of DC link
FUNCTION CODE
bus capacitor, DC fan lock detection and braking transistor error detection in combination.
Automatic lowering of carrier frequency (Bit 0)

This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter running. Even if a heat sink
overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load, abnormal surrounding temperature, or cooling system failure,
enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping (0h1, 0h3 or 0lu). Note that enabling this
function results in increased motor noise.
Chap 5
Input phase loss protection (lin ) (Bit 1)
Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit due to phase loss or
line-to-line voltage unbalance in the three-phase power supplied to the inverter, this protection feature stops the
inverter and displays an alarm lin.
In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected, phase loss or line-to-line
voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus
connected to the main circuit.
Output phase loss protection (0pl) (Bit 2)

Upon detection of output phase loss while the inverter is running, this feature stops the inverter and displays an
alarm 0pl.
Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit, if the magnetic contactor goes OFF
during operation, all the phases will be lost. In such a case, this protection feature does not work.
Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor (Bit 3)

Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor between the factory default
setting and a user-defined setting.
Before specifying a user-defined threshold, measure and confirm the reference level in advance.
5-145
Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor (Bit 4)

Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is judged by measuring the discharging time after power
OFF. The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the
inverter. Therefore, if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly, the discharging time cannot be accurately
measured. As a result, it may be mistakenly determined that the DC link bus capacitor has reached the end of its
life. To avoid such an error, you can disable the judgment based on the discharging time. (Even if it is disabled, the
judgment based on the "ON-time counting" while the voltage is applied to the DC link bus capacitor is continued.)
 For details about the life prediction function, refer to H42.
Since load may fluctuate significantly in the following cases, disable the judgment on the life during operation.
During periodical maintenance, either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate
conditions or conduct the measurement under the operating conditions matching the actual ones.
• Auxiliary input for control power is used.
• An option card is used.
• Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to terminals of the DC link bus.
DC fan lock detection (bit 5) (400 V class: FRN0203E2S-4 or above)

An inverter may be equipped with the internal air circulation DC fan depending on the capacity. When the inverter
detects that the DC fan is locked by a failure or other cause, you can select either continuing the inverter operation
or having the inverter enter into the alarm state.
Entering alarm state: The inverter issues the alarm 0h1 and allows the motor to coast to a stop.
Continuing operation: The inverter does not enter the alarm state and continues to run the motor.
Note that, however, the inverter turns ON the “OH” and “LIFE” signals on the transistor output terminals whenever
the DC fan lock is detected regardless of your selection.
If the ON/OFF control of the cooling fan is enabled (H06 = 1), the cooling fan may stop depending on the
operating condition of the inverter. In this case, the DC fan lock detection feature is considered normal
(e.g., the cooling fan is normally stopped by the stop fan command.) so that the inverter may turn OFF
the LIFE or OH signal output, or enable to cancel the alarm 0h1 , even if the internal air circulation DC
fan is locked due to a failure etc. (When you start the inverter in this state, it automatically issues the run
fan command. Then the inverter detects the DC fan lock state, and turns ON the “LIFE” or “OH” output or
enters the alarm 0h1 state.)
Note that, operating the inverter with the DC fan being locked for a long time may shorten the service life of
electrolytic capacitors on the PCBs due to local high temperature inside the inverter. Be sure to check with the
“LIFE” signal etc., and replace the broken fan as soon as possible.
Braking transistor error detection (Bit 6) (dba FRN0072E2S-4 or below)

Upon detection of a built-in braking transistor error, this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm dba. Set
data of this bit to "0" when the inverter does not use a braking transistor and there is no need of entering an alarm
state.
5-146
To set data of function code H98, assign the setting of each function to each bit and then convert the 8-bit binary to
the decimal number. Refer to the assignment of each function to each bit and a conversion example below.
Bit Function Data = 0 Data = 1 Factory default

Bit 0 Lower the carrier frequency Disable Enable 1: Enable
automatically
Bit 1 Detect input phase loss Continue to run Enter alarm 1: Enter alarm
processing processing
Bit 2 Detect output phase loss Continue to run Enter alarm 0: Continue to run
processing
Bit 3 Select life judgment threshold of DC link Factory default User-defined 0: Factory default
bus capacitor setting
Bit 4 Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor Disable Enable 1: Enable
Bit 5 Detect DC fan lock Enter alarm Continue to run 0: Enter alarm
processing processing
Bit 6 Detect braking transistor breakdown Continue to run Enter alarm 0: Continue to run
FUNCTION CODE
processing
Decimal and binary conversion

Decimal = Bit 6 x 26 + Bit 5 x 25 + Bit 4 x 24 + Bit 3 x 23 + Bit 2 x 22 + Bit 1 x 21 + Bit 0 x 20
= Bit 7 x 128 + Bit 6 x 64 + Bit 5 x 32 + Bit 4 x 16 + Bit 3 x 8 + Bit 2 x 4 + Bit 1 x 2 + Bit 0 x 1
= 64 + 0 x 32 + 1 x 16 + 0 x 8 + 0 x 4 + 1 x 2 + 1 x 1
Chap 5
= 16 + 2 + 1
= 19
H114 Anti-regenerative control (level) Related function code: H69
Allows the adjustment of the level when anti-regenerative control of the torque limiter is performed with H69 = 2, 4.
Basically, there is no need to modify the setting.
Data for H114 Function

0.0 to 50.0% Adjusted level: Increasing the value increases the frequency operation.
999 Standard level
H180 Brake signal (brake operation check time) Related function code: J68 to J72
Refer to the description of J68.
H195 Braking period for DC braking at startup Related function code: F21
DC braking can be activated at startup. For details, refer to the description of F21.
5-147
5.3.6 A codes (Motor 2 parameters)

FRENIC-Ace enables you to switch among 2 motors for operation using a same inverter.
Function code "M2" Motor to drive Remarks

F/E/P and other OFF Motor 1 Including function codes commonly applied to
codes motors 1 to 2.
A codes ON Motor 2
This manual describes function codes applied to motor 1 only. For ones applied to motor 2, refer to the
corresponding function codes prepared for motor 1 in Table 5.5 on the next page.
When motor switching is specified, the function codes in Table 5.5 are switched. Note that the functions listed in
Table 5.6 are for the 1st motor only and unavailable when the 2nd motor is selected. However, they can be
enabled with A98.
Table 5.5 Function Codes to be Switched
Function code
Name
1st motor 2nd motor
Maximum frequency F03 A01

Base frequency F04 A02
Rated voltage at base frequency F05 A03
Maximum output voltage F06 A04
Torque boost F09 A05
Electronic thermal overload protection for motor (Select motor F10 A06
characteristics)
(Overload detection level) F11 A07
(Thermal time constant) F12 A08
DC braking (Braking starting frequency) F20 A09
(Overload detection level) F21 A10
(Braking time) F22 A11
Starting Frequency F23 A12
Load selection/ Auto torque boost/ Auto energy saving operation F37 A13
Drive control selection F42 A14
Motor parameters (No. of poles) P01 A15
(Capacitance) P02 A16
(Rated current) P03 A17
(Auto-tuning) P04 A18
(Online tuning) P05 A19
(No-load current) P06 A20
(%R1) P07 A21
(%X) P08 A22
(Slip compensation gain for driving) P09 A23
(Slip compensation response time) P10 A24
(Slip compensation gain for braking) P11 A25
(Rated slip frequency) P12 A26
(Iron loss factor 1) P13 A27
(%X correction factor 1) P53 A53
5-148
Table 5.5 Function Codes to be Switched (cont'd)
Function code
Name
1st motor 2nd motor
Motor selection P99 A39

Slip Compensation (Operating conditions) H68 A40
Output current fluctuation damping gain for motor H80 A41
Cumulative motor run time H94 A51
Startup counter for motor H44 A52
Reserved for particular manufacturers d51 d52
Table 5.6 Function Codes Unavailable for the 2nd Motor
Data Function codes 2nd motor operation
FUNCTION CODE
Non-linear V/f pattern H50 to H53, H65, H66 Disable
Starting frequency 1 (Holding time) F24 Disable
Stop frequency (Holding time) F39 Disable
Motor overload early warning E34, E35 Disable
Droop control H28 Disable
UP/DOWN control H61 Fixed at the initial setting (0
Chap 5
Hz)
PID control J01 to J06, J08 to J13, J15 to J19 Disable
J56 to J62, J105 to J138, H91
Brake signal J68 to J72, J95, J96 Disable
Current limiter F43, F44 Disable
Rotational Direction Limitation H08 Disable
Maintenance Interval/ Preset H78, H79 Disable
Startup Count for Maintenance
Braking period (for DC braking at H195 Disable
startup)
A98 Motor 2 (function selection)
Setting range: 0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
Of the functions disabled for the 2nd motor shown in Table 5.6, enables the functions below.
Bit Function Data = 0 Data = 1 Factory default
Bit 0 Current limitation Disabled Enabled 0: Disabled

Bit 1 Rotational direction limitation Disabled Enabled 0: Disabled
Bit 2 Non-linear V/f Disabled Enabled 0: Disabled
Bit 3 PID control Disabled Enabled 0: Disabled
Bit 4 Brake signal Disabled Enabled 0: Disabled
Bit 5 DC braking at start-up Disabled Enabled 0: Disabled
Bit 6 to No function assigned －－－
15
5-149
5.3.7 J codes (Applied Functions)
J01 PID control (Mode selection)
Under PID control, the inverter detects the state of a control target object with a sensor or the similar device and
compares it with the commanded value (e.g., temperature control command). If there is any deviation between
them, PID control operates so as to minimize it. That is, it is a closed loop feedback system that matches controlled
variable (feedback amount).
PID control expands the application area of the inverter to process control (e.g., flow control, pressure control, and
temperature control) and speed control (e.g., dancer control).
If PID control is enabled (J01 = 1, 2 or 3), the frequency control of the inverter is switched from the drive frequency
command generator block to the PID command generator block.
 Mode Selection (J01) J01 data Function

J01 selects the PID control mode. 0 Disable
Enable (Process control,
1
normal operation)
Enable (Process control,
2
inverse operation)
3 Enable (Dancer control)
<PID process control block diagram>
Manual speed
command Frequency
command
PID process command PID processor
PID feedback
<PID dancer control block diagram>
Winder
Fixed roll Fixed roll
Rotational speed control

Upper limit position
Dancer roll
Position information
Reference position
Inverter
e.g. 0 to 10 V
Potentiometer, etc.
Lower limit position

Adjusts line speed with
dancer roll position as
reference
Speed command Frequency

(primary reference) command
Upper limit
PID command (dancer PID
reference position) operation
Lower limit
PID feedback (dancer
position feedback)
5-150
• Using J01 enables switching between normal and inverse operations against the PID control output, so you can
specify an increase/decrease of the motor rotating speed to the difference (error component) between the
commanded (input) and feedback amounts, making it possible to apply the inverter to air conditioners. The
terminal command IVS can also switch operation between normal and inverse.
 For details about the switching of normal/inverse operation, refer to the description of Switch normal/inverse
operation IVS (E01 to E05, data = 21).
J02 PID Control (Remote command SV XE "Remote command SV" )

Related function code J105: PID control (display unit)
J106: PID control (maximum scale)
J107: PID control (minimum scale)
J136 to J138: PID control multi-step
command 1 to 3
FUNCTION CODE
J02 sets the source that specifies the command value (SV) under PID control.
J02 data Function

Keypad
0
Specify the PID command by using the / keys on the keypad.
PID command 1 (Analog input: Terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function), [C1] (V2 function))
Chap 5
Voltage input to the terminal [12] (0 to ±10 VDC, 100% PID command/ ±10 VDC)
1 Current input to the terminal [C1] (C1 function) (4 to 20 mA DC, 100% PID command/ 20
mA DC)
Voltage input to the terminal [C1] (V2 function) (0 to +10 VDC, 100% PID command/ +10
VDC)
Terminal command UP/DOWN
Using the “UP” or “DOWN” command in conjunction with PID minimum scale to maximum
3 scale (specified by J106 and J107) with which the command value is converted into a
physical quantity, etc., you can specify 0 to 100% of the PID command (± 100% for PID
dancer control).
Command via communications link
4 Use function code S13 that specifies the communications-linked PID command. The
transmission data of 20000d (decimal) is equal to 100% (maximum frequency) of the PID
command.
[1] PID command with the [Image1] / [Image2] keys on the keypad (J02 = 0, factory
default)
Using the / keys on the keypad in conjunction with PID minimum / maximum scale (specified by J106 and
J107), you can specify 0 to 100% of the PID command (±100% for PID dancer control) in an easy-to-understand,
converted command format. "
For details of operation, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.5 "Setting up PID commands from the keypad."
[2] PID command by analog inputs (J02 = 1)

When any analog input (voltage input to terminals [12] and [C1] (V2 function), or current input to terminal [C1] (C1
function)) for PID command 1 (J02 = 1) is used, it is possible to arbitrary specify the PID command by multiplying
the gain and adding the bias. The polarity can be selected and the filter time constant and offset can be adjusted.
In addition to J02 setting, it is necessary to select PID command 1 for analog input (specified by any of E61 to E63,
function code data = 3). For details, refer to the descriptions of E61 to E63.
5-151
Adjustable elements of PID command
Bias Gain
Input terminal Input range Polarity Filter Offset
Bias Base point Gain Base point
0 to +10V,
[12] C55 C56 C32 C34 C35 C33 C31
-10 to +10V
4 to 20mA, 0
[C1] (C1) C61 C62 C37 C39 C40 C38 C36
to 20mA
[C1] (V2) 0 to +10V C67 C68 C42 C44 C45 C43 C41
 Offset (C31, C36, C41)

 Filter time constant (C33, C38, C43)

 Polarity [12] terminals (C35)

C35 configures the input range for analog input voltage.

0 -10 to +10V
1 0 to +10 V(negative value of voltage is regarded as 0 V)
 Range selection: terminals [C1] (C1 function) (C40)

Terminals [C1] (C1 function) configure the input range for analog input current.
C40 data Range of terminal inputs Handling when a bias value is configured as minus
0 4 to 20 mA (Factory default)
Limits any values less than 0 to 0.
1 0 to 20 mA
10 4 to 20 mA
Enables any values less than 0 as minus values.
11 0 to 20 mA
 Polarity selection [C1] (V2 function) (C45)
C45 data Modes for terminal inputs When bias is specified to be negative
0 0 to +10V Makes a point less than 0 effective as a negative value.

1 0 to +10V (factory default) Limits a point less than 0 to 0.
5-152
 Gain and bias
Terminal Data
Reference frequency
Gain
Point B
[12] Bias
Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
Reference frequency
FUNCTION CODE
Gain
Point B
[C1] (C1) function Bias

Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
Chap 5
Reference frequency
Gain
Point B
[C1] (V2 function) Bias

Point A
Analog input
Bias base Gain base
point point
(Example) Mapping the range of 1 through 5 V at terminal [12] to set 0 through 100%
Process command
Gain
Gain base point
Bias base point
Bias
Terminal [12] input
5-153
[3] PID command with UP/DOWN control (J02 = 3)

When UP/DOWN control is selected as a PID speed command, turning the terminal command “UP” or “DOWN”
ON causes the PID speed command to change within the range from minimum scale to maximum scale.
The PID speed command can be specified in mnemonic physical quantities (such as temperature or pressure) with
the minimum scale (J106) and maximum scale (J107).
To select UP/DOWN control as a PID speed command, the “UP” and “DOWN” should be assigned to the digital
input terminals [X1] to [X5]. ( Function codes E01 to E05 data = 17, 18)
"UP" "DOWN"
Action
Data = 17 Data = 18
OFF OFF Retain PID speed command value.
Increase PID speed command value at a rate between 0.1%/0.1 s
ON OFF
and 1%/0.1 s.
Decrease PID speed command value at a rate between 0.1%/0.1 s
OFF ON
and 1%/0.1 s.
ON ON Retain PID speed command value.
The inverter internally holds the PID command value set by UP/DOWN control and applies the
held value at the next restart (including powering ON).
[4] PID command via communications link (J02 = 4)

Use function code S13 that specifies the communications-linked PID command. The transmission data of 20000
(decimal) is equal to 100% (maximum frequency) of the PID command. For details of the communications format,
refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual.
• Other than the remote command selection by J02, the PID multi-step commands 1, 2 or 3 (specified
by J106, J137 or J138, respectively) specified by the PID multi-step commands “PID-SS1” and
“PID-SS2” can also be selected as a preset value for the PID command.
• In dancer control (J01 = 3), the setting from the keypad interlocks with data of J57 (PID control:
Dancer reference position), and is saved as function code data.
Selecting Feedback Terminals

For feedback control, determine the connection terminal according to the type of the sensor output.
• If the sensor is a current output type, use the current input terminal [C1] (C1 function) of the inverter.
• If the sensor is a voltage output type, use the voltage input terminal [12] of the inverter, or switch over the
terminal [C1] (V2 function) to the voltage input terminal and use it.
 For details, refer to the descriptions of E61 to E63.
<Application example: Process control> (for air conditioners, fans and pumps)
The operating range for PID process control is internally controlled as 0% through 100%. For the given feedback
input, determine the operating range to be controlled by means of gain adjustment.
Example: When the output level of the external sensor is within the range of 1 to 5 V:
• Use terminal [12] designed for voltage input.
• Set the gain (C32 for analog input adjustment) at 200% in order to make the maximum value (5 V) of the
external sensor's output correspond to 100%. Note that the input mode for terminal [12] is 0 to 10 V
corresponding to 0 to 100%; thus, a gain factor of 200% (= 10 V 5 V 100) should be specified. Note also that any
bias setting does not apply to feedback control.
5-154
Feedback
Terminal [12] input
<Application examples: Dancer control> (for winders)

(Example 1) When the output level of the external sensor is ±7 VDC:
• Use terminal [12] since the voltage input is of bipolar.
• When the external sensor's output is of bipolar, the inverter controls the speed within the range of 100%. To
FUNCTION CODE
convert the output 7 VDC to 100%, set the gain (C32 for analog input adjustment) as calculated below
10 V
≒ 143% .
7 V
Feedback
Chap 5
Terminal [12] input
(Example 2) When the output level of the external sensor is 0 to 10 VDC:

• Use terminal [12] designed for voltage input.
• When the external sensor's output is of unipolar, the inverter controls the speed within the range of 0 to 100%.
Feedback
Terminal [12] input
In this example, it is recommended that the dancer reference position be set around the 5 V (50%) point.
5-155
PID Display Coefficient and Monitoring

To monitor the PID command and its feedback value, set the scale to convert the values into easy-to-understand
physical quantities such as temperature. Unit is unavailable with the standard keypad. The display unit is used with
the multi-function keypad (TP-A1).
Display unit Maximum scale Minimum scale

Terminal [12] C58 C59 C60
Terminal [C1] (C1) C64 C65 C66
Terminal [C1] (V2) C70 C71 C72
 Refer to function codes C59, C60, C65, C66, C71 and C72 for details on scales, and to E43 for details on
monitoring.
 Display unit (J105)

The unit can be displayed when a multi-function keypad (TP-A1) is used.
Use the factory default value (0) if the unit selected in the feedback is used.
J105 Display unit J105 Display unit J105 Display unit

0 * (Factory default) 23 L/s (flow) 45 mmHg (pressure)
1 No unit 24 L/min (flow) 46 Psi (pressure)
2 % 25 L/h (flow) 47 mWG (pressure)
4 r/min 40 Pa (pressure) 48 inWG (pressure)
7 kW 41 kPa (pressure) 60 K (temperature)
3
20 m /s (flow) 42 MPa (pressure) 61 ℃ (temperature)
21 m3/min (flow) 43 mbar (pressure) 62 ℉ (temperature)

3
22 m /h (flow) 44 bar (pressure) 80 ppm (density)
* Follows the unit/scale of the feedback value.

 Maximum scale/minimum scale (J106, J107)
The PID control displayed can be converted to a physical amount that is easy to recognize. Use J106 to set the
maximum scale "display when the PID command value is 100%", and J107 to set "display when the PID command
is 0%". The display value is determined as follows:
Display value = (PID command value (%))/100(Max. scale - Min. scale)+Min. scale
• Data setting range: (Max. scale and min. scale) -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00
If using the feedback signal's scale/unit, use J105=0 (factory default); then, it is unnecessary to set J106 and J107.
 PID multi-step command 1 to 3 (J136, J137 and J138)
A PID command value can be given by a digital input multiple-step command. Assign the digital input terminals
with 171: PID-SS1 and 172: PID-SS2.
PID-SS2 PID-SS1 PID multi-step command

OFF OFF Not selected
OFF ON J136: PID multi-step command 1 Modification range: -999.0 to 0.00 to 9990
ON OFF J137: PID multi-step command 2 Modification range: -999.0 to 0.00 to 9990
ON ON J138: PID multi-step command 3 Modification range: -999.0 to 0.00 to 9990
5-156
J03 to J06 PID Control P (Gain), I ( Integral time), D (Differential time), Feedback filter
 P gain (J03)
J03 specifies the gain for the PID processor.
• Data setting range: 0.000 to 30.000 (times)
P (Proportional) action
An operation in which the MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is proportional to the deviation is called P
action, which outputs the MV in proportion to deviation. However, P action alone cannot eliminate deviation.
Gain is data that determines the system response level against the deviation in P action. An increase in gain
speeds up response, but an excessive gain may oscillate the inverter output. A decrease in gain delays response,
but it stabilizes the inverter output.
FUNCTION CODE
Deviation
Time
Manipulated
value
Chap 5
Time
 I integral time (J04)

J04 specifies the integral time for the PID processor.
0.0 indicates that the integral component is ineffective
I (Integral) action
An operation in which the change rate of the MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is proportional to the
integral value of deviation is called I action, which outputs the MV that integrates the deviation. Therefore, I action
is effective in bringing the feedback amount close to the commanded value. For the system whose deviation
rapidly changes, however, this action cannot make it respond quickly.
The effectiveness of I action is expressed by integral time as parameter, that is J04 data. The longer the integral
time, the slower the response. The reaction to the external disturbance also becomes slow. The shorter the integral
time, the faster the response. Setting too short integral time, however, makes the inverter output tend to oscillate
against the external disturbance.
Deviation
Time
Manipulated
value
Time
5-157
 D differential time (J05)

J05 specifies the differential time for the PID processor.
0.00 indicates that the differential component is ineffective.
D (Differential) action
An operation in which the MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is proportional to the differential value of the
deviation is called D action, which outputs the MV that differentiates the deviation. D action makes the inverter
quickly respond to a rapid change of deviation.
The effectiveness of D action is expressed by differential time as parameter, that is J05 data. Setting a long
differential time will quickly suppress oscillation caused by P action when a deviation occurs. Too long differential
time makes the inverter output oscillation more. Setting short differential time will weakens the suppression effect
when the deviation occurs.
Deviation
Time
Manipulated
value
Time
The combined uses of P, I, and D actions are described below.

(1) PI control
PI control, which is a combination of P and I actions, is generally used to minimize the remaining deviation caused
by P action. PI control always acts to minimize the deviation even if a commanded value changes or external
disturbance steadily occurs. However, the longer the integral time of I action, the slower the system response to
quick-changed control. P action can be used alone for loads with very large part of integral components.
(2) PD control
In PD control, the moment that a deviation occurs, the control rapidly generates greater MV (manipulated value:
output frequency) than that generated by D action alone, to suppress the deviation increase. When the deviation
becomes small, the behavior of P action becomes small. A load including the integral component in the controlled
system may oscillate due to the action of the integral component if P action alone is applied. In such a case, use
PD control to reduce the oscillation caused by P action, for keeping the system stable. That is, PD control is
applied to a system that does not contain any damping actions in its process.
(3) PID control
PID control is implemented by combining P action with the deviation suppression of I action and the oscillation
suppression of D action. PID control features minimal control deviation, high precision and high stability. In
particular, PID control is effective to a system that has a long response time to the occurrence of deviation.
Follow the procedure below to set data to PID control function codes.
It is highly recommended that you adjust the PID control value while monitoring the system response waveform of
the PID feedback with an oscilloscope or equivalent. Repeat the following procedure to determine the optimal
solution for each system.
 Increase the data of J03 (PID control P (Gain)) within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate.
 Decrease the data of J04 (PID control I (Integral time)) within the range where the feedback signal does not
oscillate.
 Increase the data of J05 (PID control D (Differential time)) within the range where the feedback signal does not
oscillate.
5-158
Refining the system response waveforms is shown below.
1) Suppressing overshoot
Increase the data of J04 (Integral time) and decrease that of J05 (Differential time).
After
refinement
Response
Before
refinement
Time
2) Quick stabilizing (Moderate overshoot is allowable.)

Decrease the data of J03 (Gain) and increase that of J05 (Differential time).
After
refinement
Response
FUNCTION CODE
Before
refinement
Time
3) Suppressing oscillation whose period is longer than the integral time specified by J04
Increase the data of J04 (Integral time).
Chap 5
After
refinement
Response
Before
refinement
Time
4) Suppressing oscillation whose period is approximately the same as the time specified by J05 (Differential
time)
Decrease the data of J05 (Differential time).
Decrease the data of J03 (Gain), if the oscillation cannot be suppressed even though the differential time is
set at 0 sec.
After
refinement
Response
Before
refinement
Time
 Feedback filter (J06)

J06 specifies the time constant of the filter for feedback signals under PID control.
• Data setting range:0.0 to 900.0 (s)
• This setting is used to stabilize the PID control loop. Setting too long a time constant makes the system
response slow.
Under PID dancer control, the filter time constant setting of up to 0.1 s is recommended. To specify the
filter time constant more finely, apply filter time constants for analog input (C33, C38 and C43) with J06 =
0.0.
5-159
J10 PID Control (Anti-reset windup)
J10 suppresses overshoot in control with the PID processor. As long as the deviation between the feedback and
the PID command is beyond the preset range, the integrator holds its value and does not perform integration
operation.
• Data setting range: 0 to 200 (%)
PID feedback value

(PV)
Integral action held in this range.
PID command Integral action performed in this range.

value (SV)
Integral action held in this range.
Time
J11 to J13 PID Control (Select alarm output, Upper level alarm (AH) and Lower level alarm (AL))
The inverter can output two types of alarm signals (absolute-value and deviation alarms) associated with PID
control if the digital output signal "PID-ALM" is assigned to any of the programmable, output terminals with any of
E20, E21 and E27 (data = 42).
J11 specifies the alarm output types. J12 and J13 each specify the upper and lower limits for alarms.
 PID Control (Select alarm output) (J11)

J11 specifies one of the following alarms available.
J11 data Alarm Data

0 Absolute-value alarm While PV < AL or AH < PV, "PID-ALM" is ON
PID feedback value

PID control (lower (PV)
PID control (upper
level alarm (AL)) level alarm (AH))
(J13) (J12)
1 Absolute-value alarm Same as above (with Hold)

(with Hold)
2 Absolute-value alarm Same as above (with Latch)
(with Latch)
3 Absolute-value alarm Same as above (with Hold and Latch)
(with Hold and Latch)
4 Deviation alarm While PV < SV - AL or SV + AH < PV, "PID-ALM" is ON.
PID control PID control
(lower level (upper level
alarm (AL)) alarm (AH))
(J13) (J12)
PID feedback value

(PV)
PID command
value (SV)
5 Deviation alarm (with Hold) Same as above (with Hold)

6 Deviation alarm (with Latch) Same as above (with Latch)
7 Deviation alarm Same as above (with Hold and Latch)
(with Hold and Latch)
5-160
Hold: During the power-on sequence, the alarm output is kept OFF (disabled) even when the monitored quantity
is within the alarm range. Once it goes out of the alarm range, and comes into the alarm range again, the
alarm is enabled.
Latch: Once the monitored quantity comes into the alarm range and the alarm is turned ON, the alarm will remain
ON even if it goes out of the alarm range. To release the latch, perform a reset by using the key on
keypad or turning the terminal command RST ON. Resetting can be done by the same way as resetting an
alarm.
 PID Control (Upper limit alarm) (AH) (J12)

J12 specifies the upper limit of the alarm (AH) in percentage (%) of the feedback amount.
 PID Control (Lower limit alarm) (AL) (J13)

J13 specifies the lower limit of the alarm (AL) in percentage (%) of the feedback amount.
The value displayed (%) is the ratio of the upper/lower limit to the full scale (10 V or 20 mA) of the
feedback amount (in the case of a gain of 100%).
FUNCTION CODE
Upper level alarm (AH) and lower level alarm (AL) also apply to the following alarms.
How to handle the alarm

Alarm Data
Select alarm output (J11) Parameter setting
Upper limit (absolute) ON when AH < PV Absolute-value alarm AL = 0
Chap 5
Lower limit (absolute) ON when PV < AL AH = 100%
Upper limit (deviation) ON when SV + AH < PV Deviation alarm AL = 100%
Lower limit (deviation) ON when PV < SV - AL AH = 100%
Upper/lower limit ON when |SV - PV| > AL AL = AH
(deviation)
Upper/lower range limit ON when SV - AL < PV < Deviation alarm
(deviation) SV + AL
A negative logic signal
Upper/lower range limit ON when AL < PV < AH Absolute-value alarm
should be assigned to
(absolute)
"PID-ALM".
Upper/lower range limit ON when SV - AL < PV < Deviation alarm
(deviation) SV + AH
5-161
J15 PID control (slow flowrate stop/operating frequency level)

J16 PID control (slow flowrate stop/stop latency)
J17 PID control (slow flowrate stop/starting frequency)
J23 PID control (slow flowrate stop - feedback deviation for startup)
J24 PID control (slow flowrate stop - startup delay time)
Slow flowrate stopping function (J15 to J17, J23, J24)

J15 to J17 configure the slow flowrate stopping function in pump control, a function that stops the inverter when the
discharge pressure increases, causing the volume of water to decrease.
When the discharge pressure has increased, decreasing the reference frequency (output of the PID processor)
below the stop frequency for slow flowrate level (J15) for the period of slow flowrate level stop latency (J16), the
inverter decelerates to stop, while PID control itself continues to operate. When the discharge pressure decreases,
increasing the reference frequency (output of the PID processor) above the starting frequency (J17), the inverter
resumes operation.
The restarting conditions can be adjusted with J23 and J24 based on the time and pressure deviation.
 PID control (Stop frequency for slow flowrate) (J15)

J15 specifies the frequency which triggers slow flowrate stop of inverter.
 PID control (Slow flowrate level stop latency) (J16)

J16 specifies the period from when the PID output drops below the frequency specified by J15 until the inverter
starts deceleration to stop.
 PID control (Starting frequency) (J17)

J17 specifies the starting frequency. Set J17 to a frequency higher than the stop frequency for slow flowrate (J15).
If the specified starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency for slow flowrate, the latter stop frequency is
ignored; the slow flowrate stopping function is triggered when the output of the PID processor drops below the
specified starting frequency.
 Assignment of "PID-STP" ("Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control") (E20,
E21 and E27, data = 44)
"PID-STP" ("Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control") is ON when the inverter is in a stopped state
due to the slow flowrate stopping function under PID control. PID-STP should be assigned if it is necessary to
output a signal to indicate that the inverter is stopped.
5-162
For the slow flowrate stopping function, see the chart below.
Output frequency
Acceleration time Deceleration time setting

setting
Starting
frequency
Slow flowrate level MV increased

PID output (MV) stop latency again by
decrease of
Starting frequency pressure (PV)
Stop frequency for slow flowrate
Feedback (PV)
Pressure in pipeline Command
Pressure decrease
started by opening tap Pressure increased by
FUNCTION CODE
inverter restart
Run command
Motor stopped due to slow
flowrate under PID control
PID-STP
Time
Chap 5
 PID control (slow flowrate stop - feedback deviation for startup) (J23)
 PID control (slow flowrate stop - startup delay time) (J24)
When both of the two conditions below are satisfied (AND), the inverter is restarted.
• The discharge pressure has decreased, increasing the frequency (output of the PID processor) to or above the
starting frequency (J17) and the startup delay time (J24) has elapsed.
• The difference between the SV (command value) and PV (feedback value) has increased to the level of
feedback deviation for startup (J23) or higher and the startup delay time (J24) has elapsed.
Output frequency PID output (MV) MV > = J17 MV > = J17

(Hz)
J17
J15
MV < J15
t
Feedback PV J16 time up
Does not start
(%) J16
Note 1 SV- PV > = J23 J23
SV
J24 t
Slow J 24 timeup
flowrate ON ON
t
stopping 『PID-STP』
signal
【J23 = 0】 & 【J24 = 0】【J23 ≠ 0】 & 【J24 ≠ 0】

(Defect (Defect Note 1
value) value) Normal operation：SV-PV≧J23
Reverse operation：SV-PV≦J23
J18, J19 PID Control (Upper limit of PID process output, Lower limit of PID process output)
The upper and lower limiters can be specified to the PID output, exclusively used for PID control. The settings are
ignored when PID cancel "Hz/PID" is enabled and the inverter is operated at the reference frequency previously
specified.
( Function codes E01 to E05 data = 20)
 PID Control (Upper limit of PID process output) (J18)
J18 specifies the upper limit of the PID processor output limiter in %. If you specify "999", the setting of the
frequency limiter (High) (F15) will serve as the upper limit.
5-163
 PID Control (Lower limit of PID process output) (J19)

J19 specifies the lower limit of the PID processor output limiter in %. If you specify "999", the setting of the
frequency limiter (Low) (F16) will serve as the lower limit.
J57 PID Control (Dancer reference position)
J57 specifies the dancer reference position in the range of -100% to +100% for dancer control. If J02 = 0 (keypad)
is selected, this function code is enabled as the dancer reference position.
It is also possible to modify the PID command with the / keys on keypad. If it is modified, the new
command value is saved as J57 data.
For the setting procedure of the PID command, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.5 "Setting up PID commands from
the keypad."
J58 PID Control (Detection width of dancer position deviation)

J59 to J61 PID Control P (Gain) 2, I (Integral time) 2 and D (Differential time) 2
The moment the feedback value of dancer roll position comes into the range of "the dancer reference position
detection width of dancer position deviation (J58)" the inverter switches PID constants from the combination of J03,
J04 and J05 to that of J59, J60 and J61, respectively in its PID processor. Giving a boost to the system response
by raising the P gain may improve the system performance in the dancer roll positioning accuracy.
 PID Control (Detection width of dancer position deviation) (J58)

J58 specifies the bandwidth in the range of 1 to 100%. Specifying "0" does not switch PID constants.
 PID Control P (Gain) 2 (J59)

 PID Control I (Integral time) 2 (J60)
 PID Control D (Differential time) 2 (J61)
Descriptions for J59, J60, and J61 are the same as those of PID control P (Gain) (J03), I (Integral time) (J04), and
D (Differential time) (J05), respectively.
J62 PID Control (PID control block selection)
J62 allows you to select either adding or subtracting the PID dancer processor output to or from the primary speed
command. Also, it allows you to select either controlling the PID dancer processor output by the ratio (%) against
the primary speed command or compensating the primary speed command by the absolute value (Hz).
J62 data Block selection

Decimal Bit 1 Bit 0 Control value type Operation for the primary
speed command
0 0 0 Ratio (%) Addition
1 0 1 Ratio (%) Subtraction
2 1 0 Absolute value (Hz) Addition
3 1 1 Absolute value (Hz) Subtraction
J63 Overload stop function (detected value)
J64 Overload stop function (detection level)
J65 Overload stop function (mode selection)
J66 Overload stop function (operation mode)
J67 Overload stop function (timer)
Detects an overload status and if it exceeds the specified detection level (J64) for the specified timer duration (J67), the
operation is stopped based on the selected action (J65). It is used to protect the system when an unacceptable overload
is applied or to lock the motor shaft by mechanically hitting it to the stopper.
5-164
 Detected Value (J63)

Select a target (detected value) to monitor the load status.
J63 data Detected value Function overview

0 Torque To improve the accuracy of calculated torque, perform auto-tuning.
It is targeted for the driving torque.
1 Current No-load current flows even at no load; therefore, consider the no-load
current and set the value accordingly.
 Detection Level (J64)
Set the value, assuming that the motor rated torque and current are 100%.
 Mode Selection (J65)
Select an operation when the load exceeds the value specified in J64.
J65 data Action Function overview
0 Disable Overload stop function operation cancellation
1 The inverter Decelerates to stop the motor, as specified in deceleration time.
FUNCTION CODE
decelerates to
stop the motor.
2 Coast to stop Immediately shuts down the inverter, allowing the motor to coast to a stop.
• When the system enters the overload stop function operation, the mode is maintained and you cannot
re-accelerate the inverter. To perform re-acceleration, turn OFF the run command and turn it ON
again.
Chap 5
<Mode selection J65=1, 2>
Stopper hit
Motor speed/output
frequency Decelerate to stop or coast
to a stop
Detection level
Current/torque
Timer
 Operation Mode (J66)

Specifies an operation status where the overload stop J66 data Operation mode
function is triggered.
Make sure that a malfunction does not occur in unnecessary Enabled during constant speed
0
status. or in deceleration time.
1 Enabled during constant speed
2 Enabled in all modes
 Timer (J67)
Sets the timer to prevent the overload stop function from being triggered due to instantaneous, unintended load
fluctuation. The overload stop function starts the operation when the operation condition of overload stop function
is satisfied for a period of the timer (if J65=1, 2).
5-165
 Enable overload stop - "OLS" (E01 to E05 = 46)

Turning this terminal command ON enables the overload stop function; turning it OFF disables the function. If no
OLS is assigned, the function is enabled.
J68 to J70 Brake signal (Brake-OFF current, Brake-OFF frequency/speed and Brake-OFF timer)
J71, J72 Brake signal (Brake-ON frequency/speed and Brake-ON timer)
J95 Brake signal (Brake-OFF torque)
Related function code: A98: Motor 2 (function selection)
These function codes are for the brake releasing/turning-on signals of vertical carrier machines.
It is possible to set the conditions of the brake releasing/turning-on signals (current and frequency) so that a
hoisted load does not fall down at the start or stop of the operation, or so that the load applied to the brake is
reduced.
 Brake signal BRKS (E20, E21 and E27, data = 57)

This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake.
Releasing the Brake

When any of the inverter output current and output frequency exceeds the specified level of the brake signal
(J68/J69/J95) for the period specified by J70 (Brake signal (Brake-OFF timer)), the inverter judges that required
motor torque is generated and turns the signal BRKS ON for releasing the brake.
This prevents a hoisted load from falling down due to an insufficient torque when the brake is released.
Function code Name Data setting range Remarks

J68 Brake-OFF 0.00 to 300.00%: Set it putting the inverter rated
current current at 100%.
J69 Brake-OFF 0.0 to 25.0 Hz
frequency/speed
J70 Brake-OFF timer 0.00 to 5.00s
Turning the Brake ON

When the run command is OFF and the output frequency drops below the level specified by J71 (Brake signal
(Brake-ON frequency/speed)) and stays below the level for the period specified by J72 (Brake signal (Brake-ON
timer)), the inverter judges that the motor rotation is below a certain level and turns the signal "BRKS" OFF for
activating the brake.
This operation reduces the load applied to the brake, extending lifetime of the brake.
Function code Name Data setting range Remarks

J71 Brake-ON 0.0 to 25.0 Hz
frequency/speed
J72 Brake-ON timer 0.00 to 5.00s
 Brake check signal BRKE (E20, E21 and E27, data = 65)
If the status of the brake signal BRKS fails to agree with the status of the brake check signal BRKE during inverter
operation, the inverter enters an alarm stop state with Er6.
This signal is used as a feedback signal for the brake signal BRKS. When the mechanical brake does not operate,
it causes the inverter to trip to activate the mechanical brake. The response delay time for BRKS and BRKE can be
adjusted with H180: Brake operation check time.
H180 : Breake signal (brake operation chaeck time) range 0.00s to 10.00s
5-166
F39:停止周波数
F39: Stop frequency
holding time
　　継続時間
Speed
速度指令/検出
command/detection
J71: Brake-ON
J71:投入周波数
frequency
F25: Stop frequency
F25:停止周波数
BrakeBrake
signalsignal
BRKS
ブレーキ信号
"BRKS" OFF
ON
『BRKS』
J72 Brake-ON timer*

J72:投入タイマ*
* When the input of inverter turned OFF during timer/count, J72 timer
*タイマカウント中にインバータの出力がOFFした場合，
is abused and the brake is applied.
　J72のタイマは無視され，ブレーキが投入されます。
• The brake signal applies only in the 1st motor. When the 2nd motor is selected, switch the motor to
apply the brake signal. However, it can be enabled with A98.
• When the inverter is shut down due to an alarm status or coast-to-stop command, the brake signal is
FUNCTION CODE
immediately applied.
• The stop is determined after the output frequency exceeds "F25 stop frequency + E30 frequency
arrival hysteresis width", and then the output frequency falls below F25.
To inch the motor (repeatedly turn ON and OFF the run command in a short time), adjust F25 and
E30.
Operation time chart
Chap 5
Brake-ON
F23: Starting frequency 1 Brake-OFF frequency/speed
Output frequency frequency/speed Stop frequency
Starting frequency 1
Stop frequency (holding time)
(holding time)
J68: Brake-OFF current

Output current
Run command
Brake signal BRKS
Brake-OFF timer Brake-ON timer
• After releasing the brake (BRKS ON), operating for a while, and then activating the brake (BRKS
OFF) to stop the motor, if you want to release the brake (BRKS ON), turn the inverter's run command
OFF and then ON.
 No brake release signal is output during auto-tuning (stop mode).
J105
to PID control 1 (display unit, maximum scale, minimum scale)
J107
Refer to the description of J02.
J136
to PID control 1 (PID multi-step command 1 to 3)
J138
For details, refer to the description of J02.
5-167
5.3.8 d codes (Applied Functions 2)
d51, d52 Reserved for particular manufacturers

d55, d69,
d91
Function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers. Unless otherwise specified, do not access these
function codes.
d61 to d63 Command (Pulse Rate Input)

(Filter time constant, Pulse count factor 1 and Pulse count factor 2) (Refer to F01.)
Refer to the description of the function code F01 for details on the pulse rate input.
d99 Extended function 1
To enable the jogging operation "JOG" from communication, set bit 3=1 for this function.
Other value than bit 3 for this function code is for manufacturers. Do not change this function code.
5-168
5.3.9 U codes (Customizable logic operation)
The customizable logic function allows the user to form a logic or operation circuit for digital/analog input/output
signals, customize those signals arbitrarily, and configure a simple relay sequence inside the inverter.
In the customizable logic, one step (component) is composed of:
1) Digital 2 input, digital 1 output + logical operation (including timer)
2) Analog 2 input, analog 1 output/digital 1 output + numerical operation
3) Analog 1 input, digital 1 input, analog 1 output + numerical operation, logical operation
and a total of 100 steps can be used to configure a sequence.
 Modes
Item Modes
Terminal command Digital 2 input Analog 2 input Analog 1 input
Digital 1 input
Operation block Logical operation, Numerical operation, Selector, hold, etc.:
FUNCTION CODE
counter, etc.: 13 types comparator, limiter, 12 types
Timer: 5 types etc.: 25 types
Output signal Digital 1 output Analog 1 output/ Analog 1 output
Digital 1 output
Number of steps 100 steps
Customizable logic output signal 9 outputs
Chap 5
Customizable logic processing 2 ms (max. 10 steps), 5 ms (max. 50 steps),
time 10 ms (max. 100 steps)
Can be selected with the function codes.
Customizable logic cancellation Enables to stop all the customizable logic operations by assigning "CLC"
command "CLC" to a general-purpose input terminal to turn it ON.
It is used when you want to deactivate the customizable logic temporarily.
Customizable logic timer Resets the timer, counter and all the previous values used in customizable
cancellation command "CLTC" logic by assigning "CLTC" to a general-purpose input terminal to turn it
ON. It is used when a customizable logic is changed or if you want to
synchronize it with external sequence.
If you use the customizable logic cancellation command and customizable logic timer cancellation
command, the inverter can unintentionally start because the speed command is unmasked, depending
on the structure of the customizable logic. Be sure to turn OFF the operation command to turn it ON.
A physical injury may result.
A damage may result.
5-169
 Block diagram
Analog input
Analog output
(12, C1, V2
(FM terminals)
terminals) Internal input Internal output
signal signal
12 FOUT1 FM1
FSUB1
C1 FSUB2 FM2
Inverter FOUT2
V2 SV1 IOUT
Application
PV1 VOUT
Process
TLIMA MV1
Customizable logic
Step 1 Output
Input 1 (U02) Operation block signal
(U01, U04, *1 (U71)
U05) S001
Input 2 (U03) CL01(U81)
(U72)
CL02(U82)
Input 1 Operation
block
Input 2 S002
Terminal
command Step 3 Customizable *1 (U71
Input 1 )
Operation *2 (U73) logic Disable 0
block Output signal 1
S003 S001
CL03(U83) S002 2 CL01
Input 2
Step 4 (U74)
CL04(U84)
Input 1 Operation
block
S004
Input 2 S0100 100
Step 5 CLO10
S005
Input 1 Operation (U90)
block
(U80) *2 (U73)
Input 2
Disable 0
S001 1
2
Step 100 S002
3
S003
Input 1 Operation 4
S004 CL03
block
Input 2 S0100
S0100 100
Digital input Digital output

(X terminal) (Y terminal)
X1 SS1 RUN Y1
X2 SS2 FAR Y2
X3 SS4 FDT Y3
X4 IOL
SS8
X5
RT1
Inverter SW88
Sequence
FWD RT2 SW52-2
processor
REV BX ID2
STOP
RDY
Hz2/Hz1 LIFE
FWD PID-ALM
TD1
Internal input signal Internal output signal
Mode selection function codes for enabling customizable logic can be modified during operation but the
customizable logic output may become temporarily unstable due to the setting modification. Therefore,
since unexpected operation can be performed, change the settings if possible when the inverter is
stopped.
A physical injury may result.
A damage may result.
5-170
U00 Customizable logic (mode selection)

U01 to U70 Customizable logic: step 1 to 14 (mode setting)
U71 to U80 Customizable logic: output signal 1 to 10 (output selection)
U81 to U90 Customizable logic: output signal 1 to 10 (function selection)
U91 Customizable logic: Customizable logic timer monitor (No. selection)
U92 to U97 Customizable logic: conversion factor
U100 Customizable logic: task process setting
U101 to U107 Customizable logic: operating point 1 to 3. Factor auto-calculation
U121 to U140 Customizable logic: User parameter 1 to 20
U171 to U173 Customizable logic: Storage area 1 to 3
U190 to U195 Customizable logic: step 15 to 100 setting
 Customizable Logic (Mode selection) (U00)

U00 specifies whether to enable the sequence configured with the customizable logic function or disable it to run
the inverter only via its input terminals and others.
U00 data Function
FUNCTION CODE
0 Disable
1 Enable (Customizable logic operation)
The ecl alarm occurs when changing U00 from 1 to 0 during operation.
 Customizable Logic (Mode Setting) (U01 to U70, U190 to U195)
Chap 5
In a customizable logic, one step is categorized into the following three components:
[Input: digital] Block selection (U01, U06, U11, etc.) = 1 to 1999
[Input: analog] Block selection (U01, U06, U11, etc.) = 2001 to 3999
[Input: digital, analog] Block selection (U01, U06, U11, etc.) = 4001 to 5999
5-171
The function code settings for each step are as follows:

• Step 1 to 14
Step No. Control function Input 1 Input 2 Function 1 Function 2 Output Note)
Step 1 U01 U02 U03 U04 U05 "SO01"
= 1 to 1999 Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Time setting Not required Digital output
= 2001 to 3999 Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Value 1 Value 2 Analog/digital
output
= 4001 to 6999 Analog input 1 Digital input 2 Value 1 Value 2 Analog output
Step 2 U06 U07 U08 U09 U10 "SO02"
Step 3 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 "SO03"
Step 4 U16 U17 U18 U19 U20 "SO04"
Step 5 U21 U22 U23 U24 U25 "SO05"
Step 6 U26 U27 U28 U29 U30 "SO06"
Step 7 U31 U32 U33 U34 U35 "SO07"
Step 8 U36 U37 U38 U39 U40 "SO08"
Step 9 U41 U42 U43 U44 U45 "SO09"
Step 10 U46 U47 U48 U49 U50 "SO10"
Step 11 U51 U52 U53 U54 U55` "SO11"
Step 12 U56 U57 U58 U59 U60 "SO12"
Step 13 U61 U62 U63 U64 U65 "SO13"
Step 14 U66 U67 U68 U69 U70 "SO14"
Note) Output is not a function code. It indicates the output signal symbol.
• Step 15 to 100
Specify a step number in U190, and set the block selection to function 2 in U191 to U195.
Control
Step No. U190 Input 1 Input 2 Function 1 Function 2 Output
function
Step 15 15 "SO15"
Step 16 16 "SO16"
･･････ U191 U192 U193 U194 U195 ･･･
Step 99 99 "SO99"
Step 100 100 "SO100"
5-172
[Input: digital] Block function code setting

 Block selection (U01 etc.)
Any of the following items can be selected as a logic circuit (with general-purpose timer):
The data can be logically inverted by adding 1000.
Data Logic circuit Description
0 No function assigned Output is always OFF.
10 Through output + Only a general-purpose timer. No logic circuit exists.
General-purpose timer
(No timer)
11 (On-delay timer) Turning an input signal ON starts the on-delay timer.
When the period specified by the timer has elapsed, an
output signal turns ON. Turning the input signal OFF turns
the output signal OFF.
12 (Off-delay timer) Turning an input signal ON turns an output signal ON.
Turning the input signal OFF starts the off-delay timer.
FUNCTION CODE
When the period specified by the timer has elapsed, the
output signal turns OFF.
13 (One-shot pulse output) Turning an input signal ON issues a one-shot pulse whose
length is specified by the timer.
14 (Retriggerable timer) Turning an input signal ON issues a one-shot pulse whose
length is specified by the timer.
If an input signal is turned ON again during the preceding
Chap 5
one-shot pulse length, however, the logic circuit issues
another one-shot pulse.
15 (Pulse train output) If an input signal turns ON, the logic circuit issues ON and
OFF pulses (whose lengths are specified by the timer)
alternately and repeatedly. This function is used to flash a
luminescent device.
20 to 25 ANDing + General-purpose timer AND circuit with 2 inputs and 1 output, plus
general-purpose timer.
30 to 35 ORing + General-purpose timer OR circuit with 2 inputs and 1 output, plus
40 to 45 XORing + General-purpose timer XOR circuit with 2 inputs and 1 output, plus
50 to 55 Set priority flip-flop + Set priority flip-flop with 2 inputs and 1 output, plus
General-purpose timer general-purpose timer.
60 to 65 Reset priority flip-flop + Reset priority flip-flop with 2 inputs and 1 output, plus
70, 72, 73 Rising edge detector + Rising edge detector with 1 input and 1 output, plus
This detects the rising edge of an input signal and outputs
the ON signal for 5 ms (*1).
80, 82, 83 Falling edge detector + Falling edge detector with 1 input and 1 output, plus
This detects the falling edge of an input signal and outputs
the ON signal for 5 ms (*1).
90, 92, 93 Rising & falling edges detector + Rising and falling edge detector with 1 input and 1 output,
General-purpose timer plus general-purpose timer.
This detects both the falling and rising edges of an input
signal and outputs the ON signal for 5 ms (*1).
100 to 105 Hold + General-purpose timer Hold function of previous values of 2 inputs and 1 output,
plus general-purpose timer.
If the hold control signal is OFF, the logic circuit outputs
input signals; if it is ON, the logic circuit retains the
previous values of input signals.
*1: Equals the task cycle: 2 ms for a task cycle of 2 ms, 5 ms for 5 ms and 10 ms for 10 ms.
5-173
Data Logic circuit Description

110 Increment counter Increment counter with reset input.
By the rising edge of an input signal, the logic circuit
increments the counter value by one. When the counter
value reaches the target one, the output signal turns ON.
Turning the reset signal ON resets the counter to zero.
120 Decrement counter Decrement counter with reset input.
By the rising edge of an input signal, the logic circuit
decrements the counter value by one. When the counter
value reaches zero, the output signal turns ON.
Turning the reset signal ON resets the counter to the initial
value.
130 Timer with reset input Timer output with reset input.
If an input signal turns ON, the output signal turns ON and
the timer starts. When the period specified by the timer
has elapsed, the output signal turns OFF, regardless of
the input signal state.
Turning the reset signal ON resets the current timer value
to zero and turns the output OFF.
The data can be logically inverted by adding 1000.
The block diagrams for individual functions are given below.

(Data=1) Through output (Data=2) AND (Data=3) OR
(Data=4) XOR (Data=5) Set priority flip-flop

Previous
Input 1 Input 2 Output Remarks
output
Hold
OFF OFF previous
OFF value
OFF
ON ON
ON － OFF
ON －－ ON Set priority
5-174
(Data=6) Reset priority flip-flop
Previous
Input 1 Input 2 Output Remarks
output
Hold
OFF OFF previous
OFF OFF
value
ON ON
Reset
- ON - OFF
priority
ON OFF - ON
(Data=7) Rising edge detector (Data=8) Falling edge detector (Data=9) Rising & falling edges detector
FUNCTION CODE
(Data=10) Hold (Data=110) Increment counter (Data=120) Decrement counter
Chap 5
(Data=130) Timer with reset input
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

ON Timer Input 1
Input 1 Output
OFF ON OFF
Input 2
Reset OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Output
Input 2
Timer
Time setting
5-175
 Operation of general-purpose timer

The operation schemes for individual timers are shown below.
(End 1) On-delay timer (End 2) Off-delay timer
(End 3) One-shot pulse output (End 4) Retriggerable timer
(End 5) Pulse train output
5-176
 Inputs 1 and 2 (U02, U03, etc.)

The following digital signals are available as input signals. Value in ( ) is a negative logic.
Data Selectable Signals

0000 (1000) General-purpose output signals Same as the ones specified by E20, e.g., "RUN"
(Inverter running), FAR (Frequency (speed) arrival signal), "FDT" (Frequency (speed)
to detected), "LU" (Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped)), "B/D" (Torque polarity
detected)
0105 (1105)
Note: 27 (Universal DO) is not available.
Note: Customizable logic output signals for 111 (1111) to 115 (1115) cannot be
selected.
2001 (3001) Output of step 1 "SO01"
to to
2100 (3100) Output of step 100 "SO100"
4001 (5001) Terminal X1 input signal "X1"
FUNCTION CODE
4010 (5010) Terminal FWD input signal FWD
4011 (5011) Terminal REV input signal REV
Chap 5
6000 (7000) Final RUN command "FL_RUN" (ON when a run command is given)
6001 (7001) Final FWD run command "FL_FWD" (ON when a run forward command is given)
6002 (7002) Final REV run command "FL_REV" (ON when a run reverse command is given)
6003 (7003) During acceleration "DACC" (ON during acceleration)
6004 (7004) During deceleration "DDEC" (ON during deceleration)
6005 (7005) Under anti-regenerative control "REGA" (ON under anti-regenerative control)
6006 (7006) Within dancer reference position "DR_REF" (ON when the dancer position is within the
reference range)
6007 (7007) Alarm factor presence “ALM_ACT” (ON when there is no alarm factor)
 Function 1 (U04 etc.)

U05 and other related function codes specify the general-purpose timer period or the increment/decrement counter
value.
Data Function Description

Timer The period is specified by seconds.
0.00 to +600.00 The specified value is multiplied by 100 times.
Counter value
(If 0.01 is specified, it is converted to 1.)
-9990.00 to -0.01 - The timer or counter value works as 0.00. (No timer)
+601.00 to +9990.00 - The timer or counter value works as 600.
5-177
[Input: analog] Block function code setting

 Block selection, function 1, function 2 (U01, U04, U05, etc.)
The following items are available as operation circuit.
Note that if the upper and lower limits are the same value, there are no upper and lower limits.
Block
Operation Function 1 Function 2
selection Description
circuit (U04 etc.) (U05 etc.)
(U01 etc.)
0 No function Output is always 0% (or OFF). Not required Not required
assigned
2001 Addition Addition circuit with two inputs and one output. Upper limit Lower limit
2002 Subtraction Subtraction circuit with two inputs and one output. Upper limit Lower limit
2003 Multiplication Multiplication circuit with two inputs and one output. Upper limit Lower limit
2004 Division Division circuit with two inputs and one output. Upper limit Lower limit
2005 Limiter Upper and lower limiter circuit with one input and one Upper limit Lower limit
output.
2006 Absolute value Absolute value circuit with one inputs and one output. Upper limit Lower limit
2007 Reverse Reverse addition circuit with one input and one Addition value Addition value
addition output. (former) (latter)
2008 Variable Variable limiter circuit with one input and one output. Step number Not required
limiter One input for upper limiter value and two inputs for
lower limit value.
2009 Linear Linear conversion circuit with one input and one Factor KA Factor KB
conversion output. It satisfies the following expression. The -9990.0 to -9990.0 to
output is limited with a range between -9990 and +9990.0 +9990.0
9990 by the internal limiter.
y  K A  x  KB
2051 Comparison 1 Digitally outputs a comparison of two input Deviation Hysteresis
deviations. width
2052 Comparison 2 Digitally outputs a comparison of two input Deviation Hysteresis
deviations. width
2053 Comparison 3 Digitally outputs a comparison of two input deviations Deviation Hysteresis
(absolute values). width
2054 Comparison 4 Digitally outputs a comparison of two input deviations Deviation Hysteresis
(absolute values). width
2055 Comparison 5 Digitally outputs a comparison of one input and one Reference Hysteresis
reference value. value width
2056 Comparison 6 Digitally outputs a comparison of one input and one Reference Hysteresis
reference value. value width
2071 Window Outputs a comparison of one input and upper/lower Upper Lower
comparison 1 limits. threshold threshold
2072 Window Outputs a comparison of one input and upper/lower Upper Lower
comparison 2 limits. threshold threshold
2101 Maximum Circuit to output a larger value of two inputs. Upper limit Lower limit
selection
2102 Minimum Circuit to output a smaller value of two inputs. Upper limit Lower limit
selection
2103 Average Circuit to output an average value of two inputs. Upper limit Lower limit
2151 Function code Takes the function code S13(%) value as input. Maximum Minimum
scale scale
2201 Scale reverse Circuit to convert the analog 1 input to 0-100.00 in the Maximum Minimum
conversion scale setting value. scale scale
Use it to connect to analog output terminals.
Maximum used number is two steps.
2202 Scale Circuit to convert the analog 1 input to 0-100.00 in the Maximum Minimum
conversion scale setting value. scale scale
Signal selection of input 1 can be used only for the
setting values 8000 to 8085. Maximum used number
is two steps.
3001 Conversion 1 K （入力  Input 11）
2
 K  Input
入力11  K Upper limit Lower limit
A B C
U92 to U97 are used for the factors
Maximum used number is one step in either (3001) or
(3002).
3002 Conversion 2 入力11 
Input KA Upper limit Lower limit
KC
KB
U92 to U97 are used for the factors
Maximum used number is one step in either (3001) or
(3002).
5-178
The block diagrams for each operation circuit are given below. The setting value for functions 1 and 2 is indicated
with U04 and U05.
(2001) Addition (2002) Subtraction (2003) Multiplication
(2004) Division (2005) Limiter (2006) Absolute value
FUNCTION CODE
Chap 5
(2007) Reverse addition (2009) Linear conversion
Input 1 Output Input 1

入力１ + + 出力
×
Output
+ +
入力２2 U04 -1 U05 Input 2

Input
Input 1
(2051) Comparison 1 (2052) Comparison 2
ON is prioritized when both of the conditions are satisfied.
(2053) Comparison 3 (2054) Comparison 4 (2055) Comparison 5
With Input 1-Input 2 > U04+|U05|

Input 1 With Input 1-Input 2  U04+|U05| Input 1
Output ON Output OFF when Input 1 <
Output ON Input 1
U04 – |U05|
Output Output Output
Input 2 With Input 1-Input 2 ≤ U04-|U05| Input 2 With Input 1-Input 2 < U04-|U05| Input 2 Output ON when Input 1 ≥
Output OFF Output OFF U04
ON is prioritized when both of the conditions are satisfied.
5-179
(2056) Comparison 6 (2071) Window comparison 1 (2072) Window comparison 2
(2101) Maximum value selection (2102) Minimum value selection (2103) Average
Input 1 output when Input Input 1 output when Input (Input 1 + Input 2) / 2
Input 1 1 ≥ Input 2 Input 1 1 ≤ Input 2 Input 1
output
Output Output Output

Maximum Minimum Average
value value operation
Input 2 selection selection
Input 2 Input 2
Input 2 output when Input Input 2 output when Input
1 < Input 2 1 > Input 2
(2151) Function code input (2201) Scale reverse conversion (2202) Scale conversion
Input 1
U04
Output
U05
0 100.00
Input 2
* Use it to connect to analog output * Signal selection of input 1

terminals. can be used only for the
* Maximum used number is two setting values 8000 to
steps. 8085.
* Maximum used number is
two steps.
(3001) Conversion 1 (3002) Conversion 2
Input 1 Output Input 1 Output
Input Input Input

Input 2 Input 2
* Maximum used number is one step in either (3001) or (3002).
5-180
 Inputs 1 and 2 (U02, U03, etc.)

The following signals are available as analog input signals.
Data Selectable Signals

8000 General-purpose analog output signal (same as signals selected in F31 and F35:
output frequency 1, output current, output torque, power consumption, DC link bus
to voltage, etc.)
8018 Example: For maximum frequency of output frequency 1, 100.00 is input as 100%.
Example: For output current, 100.00 is input with 200% of the inverter rated current.
Note: 10 (Universal AO) is not available.
2001 to 2100 Output of step 1 to 100 "SO01" to "SO100"
9001 Analog 12 terminal input signal [12]
9002 Analog C1 terminal input signal [C1] (C1 function)
9003 Analog C1 terminal input signal [C1] (V2 function)
FUNCTION CODE
 Function 1, Function 2 (U04, U05, etc.)
Sets the upper limit and lower limit of operation circuit.
Data Function Description

Reference value
Hysteresis width
Chap 5
Upper limit
-9990.00 to Lower limit
Setting value for the operation circuit selected in an operation setting
0.00 to Upper threshold
such as U01
+9990.00 Lower threshold
Setting value
Maximum scale
Minimum scale
 Conversion factor setting (U92 to U97)

Sets the factor of conversion function (3001, 3002) of operation circuit.
Function Name Data setting range Factory

code default
U92 Significand of the conversion factor KA Significand: -9.999 to 9.999 0.000
U93 Exponent part of the conversion factor KA Exponent part: -5 to 5 0
U94 Significand of the conversion factor KB 0.000
U95 Exponent part of the conversion factor KB 0
U96 Significand of the conversion factor Kc 0.000
U97 Exponent part of the conversion factor Kc 0
U92 to U97 can automatically be calculated based on measured data. For details, refer to the descriptions of U101
to U107 (P5-XX).
5-181
[Input: digital, analog] Block function code setting

 Lock selection, function 1, function 2 (U01, U04, U05, etc.)
The following items are available as operation circuit/logic circuit.
Note that if the upper and lower limits are identical, there are no upper and lower limits.
Block
(U01 etc.)
4001 Hold Circuit to hold analog 1 input based on digital 1 Upper limit Lower limit
input.
4002 Reverse Circuit to reverse analog 1 input based on digital 1 Addition value Addition value
addition input. (former) (latter)
switch
4003 Selection 1 Circuit to select analog 1 input and setting value Setting value Not required
based on digital 1 input.
4004 Selection 2 Circuit to select setting value 1/2 based on digital 1 Setting value 1 Setting value
input. 2
4005 LPF Value of an analog 1 input is filtered through LPF Time Fixed as 0
(Low pass (time constant U04) when the digital 1 input is "1". constant
filter) When the digital 1 input is "0", the analog 1 input is 0: No filter
directly output. 0.01 to 5.00s
(LPF maintains the previous output value.
Therefore, when the digital 1 input changes from 0
to 1, the output will be the value with the previous
output value added as the initial value of LPF.)
(No upper/lower limiter)
4006 Change Value of an analog input is limited with change rate Upward Downward
rate limit specified in functions 1 and 2 when the digital 1 change rate change rate
input is "1". When the digital 1 input is "0", the Time taken to Time taken to
analog 1 input is directly output. When setting the change 100% change 100%
initial value, carry out an operation with the initial
value for input 1 and 0 for input 2. Then, reflect the 0: No limit 0: The same
result as the initial value (= previous output value) 0.01 to 600 s change rate
with 1 applied to input 2. as function 1
During the initialization or when the CLC terminal is 0.01 to 600 s
ON, the previous output value is cleared to 0.
5000 Selection 3 Circuit to select analog 2 input based on "SO01" to Step No. Not required
"SO100".
5001 Selection Circuit to select analog 2 input based on "SO01". Not required Not required
3-1
•••
•
•
•
•
•
•
5014 Selection Circuit to select analog 2 input based on "SO14". Not required Not required
3-14
5100 Selection 4 Circuit to select analog 1 input and "SO01" to Step No. Not required
"SO100" based on digital 1 input.
5101 Selection Circuit to select analog 1 input and "SO01" based Not required Not required
4-1 on digital 1 input.
•••
•
•
•
•
•
•
5114 Selection Circuit to select analog 1 input and "SO14" based Not required Not required
4-14 on digital 1 input.
5-182
Block
(U01 etc.)
6001 Reading Circuit to output the content of arbitrary function 0 to 255 0 to 99
function code. Use function1 (such as U04) to specify a
codes function code category, and function 2 (such as
U05) to specify the last two digits of the function
code number.
Data formats that can be read correctly are as
follows (the values are restricted between -9990
and 9990 and, for [29], 20000 is indicated as 100%):
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], [8], [9], [10], [12], [22],
[24], [29], [35], [37], [45], [61], [67], [68], [74], [92]
and [93]
Data formats other than the above cannot be read
correctly. Do not use any other format.
FUNCTION CODE
6002 Writing Reflect the input 1 value in a specific function code 39 71 to 73
function (U171 to U173) when the input 2 is 1. When the
codes input 2 is 0, the specific function code maintains the
previous value. The input 1 value is written to the
function code when the inverter detects
undervoltage.
Do not use more than one instance of this operation
circuit for one function code.
Chap 5
6003 Function Circuit to select a value on memory of a specific 0 to 255 0 to 99
code switch function code (appendix) among values of function
2 and input 1.
Specify a function code category in function 1
(U04). Specify the last two digits of a function code
number in function 2 (U05).
When the input 2 is 0, the current value is reflected
in the value on a memory of the function code.
When the input 2 is not 0, the value of the input 1 is
reflected. Note that when no specific function code
(such as U04 and U05) is specified, data 0 is
reflected.
For details on appendix and this function, refer to
P5-188.
This operation circuit is intended for switching of the
value of a specific function code. Do not use this as
the input of other LE. Do not use more than one
instance of this operation circuit for switching one
function code.
6101 PID dancer Circuit to switch either to calculate a frequency Gain ratio Lower
output gain correction where 100% of PID output shall be the 0 to 200% frequency
frequency maximum frequency, or to calculate a frequency limit
correction where a specified frequency (specified in 0 to 500Hz
the line speed command). Use the input 1 to set
whether to activate this circuit. Use the input 2 and
gain ratio to select a frequency correction.
Output: Frequency correction = (PID output)(Line
speed command) ••• (Input 2 OFF, U04≠0%)
Frequency correction amount = (PID outputGain
ratio (U04))(Maximum output frequency) ••• (Input
2 ON, U04 ≠ 0%) Note that when the gain ratio is
set to 0%, the following applies regardless of the
input 2:
Output: Frequency correction amount = (PID
output)(Line speed command)
This circuit is used with the PID control.
5-183
(4001) Hold (4002) Reverse addition switch (4003) Selection 1
(4004) Selection 2 (4005) Low pass filter (4006) Change rate limit
Input 1 Input 1
=0 =0
Output
Output rate
LPF limiter
Input 2 ?0
Input 2 ?0
U04 U04
(5001 to 5014) Selection 3-1 to 3-14 (5101 to 5114) Selection 4-1 to 4-14
(5000) Selection 3 (5100) Selection 4
(6001) Reading function codes (6002) Writing function codes
5-184
(6003) Selection 5 (6101) PID dancer output gain frequency

U04 U05
Input 1 [Function code]
=0
Output
≠0
Input 2
 Output signal
In a customizable logic, outputs from steps 1 to 10 are issued to SO01 to SO100, respectively.
SO01 to SO100 differ in configuration depending upon the connection destination, as listed below. (To relay those
outputs to any function other than the customizable logic, route them via customizable logic outputs CL01 to
CLO010.)
FUNCTION CODE
Connection destination of each
Configuration Function code
step output
Input of customizable logic Select one of the internal step output signals “SO01” to Such as U02
“SO100” in customizable logic input setting. and U03
Input of inverter sequence Select one of the internal step output signals “SO01” to
processor “SO100” to be connected to customizable logic output U71 to U80
Chap 5
(such as multi-step speed “SS1” signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”).
or operation command “FWD”) Select an inverter's sequence processor input function to
which one of the customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 U81 to U90
(“CL01” to “CLO10”) is to be connected. (Same as in E01)
Analog input Select one of the internal step output signals “SO01” to
(such as auxiliary frequency “SO100” to be connected to customizable logic output
signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”). U71 to U80
commands or PID process
commands)
Select an analog input function to which one of the
customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to U81 to U90
“CLO10”) is to be connected. (Same as in E61)
General-purpose digital output Select one of the internal step output signals “SO01” to
([Y] terminals) “SO100” to be connected to customizable logic output U71 to U80
signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”).
To specify a general-purpose digital output function (on [Y]
terminals) to which one of the customizable logic output
E20, E21,
signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”) is to be connected,
E27
select one of “CLO1” to “CLO5” by specifying the
general-purpose digital output function on any Y terminal.
General-purpose analog output Select one of the internal step output signals “SO01” to
([FM] terminals) “SO100” to be connected to customizable logic output U71 to U80
signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”).
To specify a general-purpose analog output function (on
[FM] terminals) to which one of the customizable logic
output signals 1 to 10 (“CL01” to “CLO10”) is to be
F31, F35
connected, select one of “CLO1” to 10 “CLO5” by
specifying the general-purpose digital output function on
any [FM] terminal.
General-purpose digital outputs (on [Y] terminals) are updated every 5 ms. To securely output a
customizable logic signal via [Y] terminals, include on- or off-delay timers in the customizable logic.
Otherwise, short ON or OFF signals may not be reflected on those terminals.
5-185
Function Factory
Name Data setting range
codes default
U71 Customizable logic output signal 1 0: Disable 0
(Output selection) 1: Output of step 1, “SO01”
U72 Customizable logic output signal 2 2: Output of step 2, “SO02” 0
(Output selection) •••
U73 Customizable logic output signal 3 99: Output of step 99, “SO99” 0
(Output selection) 100: Output of step 100, “SO100”
U74 Customizable logic output signal 4 0
(Output selection)
(Output selection)
(Output selection)
(Output selection)
(Output selection)
(Output selection)
U80 Customizable logic output signal 0
10 (Output selection)
U81 Customizable logic output signal 1  If a step output is digital 100
(Function selection) The same value as E98 can be specified.
U82 Customizable logic output signal 2 0(1000): Select multi-frequency (0 to 1 steps) “SS1” 100
(Function selection) 1(1001): Select multi-frequency (0 to 3 steps) “SS2”
2(1002): Select multi-frequency (0 to 7 steps) “SS4”
(Function selection) 3(1003): Select multi-frequency (0 to 15 steps) “SS8”
4(1004): Select ACC/DEC time (2 steps) “RT1”
(Function selection) 5(1005): Select ACC/DEC time (4 steps) “RT2”
6(1006): Enable 3-wire operation “HLD”
U85 Customizable logic output signal 5 7(1007): Coast-to-stop command “BX” 100
8(1008): Reset alarm “RST”
U86 Customizable logic output signal 6 9(1009): Enable external alarm trip “THR” 100
(Function selection) (9=Active OFF/1009=Active ON)
and so on.
(Function selection)  If a step output is analog
8001: Auxiliary frequency command 1
(Function selection) 8002: Auxiliary frequency command 2
8003: PID process command 1
U89 Customizable logic output signal 9 8005: PID feedback amount 1 100
8006: Ratio setting
U90 Customizable logic output signal 8007: Analog torque limit value A 100
10 (Function selection) 8008: Analog torque limit value B
5-186
 Specific function codes

The following function codes helps change values on memory using the customizable logic "Function code switch
(6003)". Overwritten values are cleared with power off.
Number Name Number Name

F07 Acceleration Time 1 H50 Non-linear V/f Pattern 1 (Frequency)
F08 Deceleration Time 1 H51 Non-linear V/f Pattern 1 (Voltage)
F15 Frequency Limiter (Upper) H52 Non-linear V/f Pattern 2 (Frequency)
F16 Frequency Limiter (Lower) H53 Non-linear V/f Pattern 2 (Voltage)
F21 DC Braking 1 (Braking level) H65 Non-linear V/f Pattern 3 (Frequency)
F22 DC Braking 1 (Braking time) H66 Non-linear V/f Pattern 3 (Voltage)
F23 Starting Frequency 1 H91 PID Feedback Wire Break
F24 Starting Frequency 1 (Holding time) J03 PID Control P (Gain)
F25 Stop Frequency J04 PID Control I (Integral time)
FUNCTION CODE
F39 Stop Frequency (Holding time) J05 PID Control D (Differential time)
F40 Torque Limiter 1 (Driving) J06 PID Control (Feedback filter)
F41 Torque Limiter 1 (Braking) J10 PID Control (Anti-reset windup)
F44 Current Limiter (Level) J12 PID Control (Upper limit alarm (AH))
E10 Acceleration Time 2 J13 PID Control (Lower limit alarm (AL))
Chap 5
E11 Deceleration Time 2 J15 PID Control (Stop frequency for slow flowrate)
E12 Acceleration Time 3 J16 PID Control (Slow flowrate level stop latency)
E13 Deceleration Time 3 J17 PID Control (Starting frequency)
E14 Acceleration Time 4 J18 PID Control (Upper limit of PID process output)
E15 Deceleration Time 4 J19 PID Control (Lower limit of PID process output)
C05 Multi-Frequency 1 J58 PID Control (Detection width of dancer position
deviation)
C06 Multi-Frequency 2 J59 PID Control P (Gain) 2
C07 Multi-Frequency 3 J60 PID Control I (Integral time) 2
C08 Multi-Frequency 4 J61 PID Control D (Differential time) 2
C09 Multi-Frequency 5 J72 Brake Signal (Brake-ON timer)
H28 Droop control
5-187
 Function codes for the customizable logic
Function code Name Range Minimum unit Remarks

number
U121 to U140 User parameter 1 to 20 -9990.00 to 9990.00 0.01 to 10
Effective number 3 digits
U171 to U173 Storage area 1 to 3 -9990.00 to 9990.00 0.01 to 10 Memorizes the
Effective number 3 digits data when
powered off.
 Configuration of function codes

Set a code value in the following table to function 1 (such as U04) and set the last two digits of the function code
number to function 2 (such as U05) to specify individual function codes.
Group Code Name Group Code Name

F 0 00H Basic function M 8 08H Monitor data
E 1 01H Terminal function J 13 0DH Applied function 1
C 2 02H Control function d 19 13H Applied function 2
H 4 04H High performance function U 11 0BH Customizable logic
U1 39 27H For customizable logic W 15 0FH Monitor 2
5-188
 Task process setting (U100)
U100 data Data

0 Automatically adjusts the task cycle in 2 ms to 10 ms depending on the number of used
steps. This is the factory default. It is recommended to use this value.
2 2 ms: Up to 10 steps. If it exceeds 10 steps, the customizable logic does not work.
5 5 ms: Up to 50 steps. If it exceeds 50 steps, the customizable logic does not work.
10 10 ms
Note that if it exceeds the steps defined in 2 or 5, the customizable logic does not work.
 Operating precautions
The customizable logics are calculated by 2 ms to 10 ms (according to U100) and processed in the following
procedure:
(1) First, latch the external input signals for all the customizable logics in step 1 to 100 to maintain synchronism.
FUNCTION CODE
(2) Perform logical operations sequentially from step 1 to 100.
(3) If an output of a step is an input to the next step, outputs of step with high priority can be used in the same
process.
(4) The customizable logic simultaneously updates 10 output signals.
Input
Chap 5
signal
2 to 10 ms cycle
latch
Logical operation Simultaneous Input

Step 1 → 2 → 3 · · · 100 update of signal latch
output signals
Note that if you do not consider the process order of customizable logic when configuring a logic circuit, the signal
delay can be an issue due to a slow process of logical operation; you may not be able to obtain an expected
output; the operation can be slower; or a hazard signal can occur.
Changing a functional code related to the customizable logic (U code etc.) or turning ON the customizable logic
cancel signal "CLC” causes change in operation sequence depending on the setting, which may suddenly start
an operation or start an unexpected action. Fully ensure it is safe before performing the operation.
An accident or physical injury may occur.
5-189
 Customizable logic timer monitor (step selection) (U91, X89 to X93)

The monitor function codes can be used to monitor the I/O status or timer's operation state in customizable logics.
Selection of monitor timer
Function code Function Remarks

U91 0: Monitor not active The setting value is cleared to 0 when
(the monitor data is 0) powered off.
1 to 100: set the step No. to monitor
Monitor method
Monitor method Function code Data

Communication X89 customizable logic Digital I/O data for steps defined in U91
(digital I/O) (only for monitoring)
X90 customizable logic Data of the timer/counter value defined in U91
(timer monitor) (only for monitoring)
X91 customizable logic Analog input 1 data for steps defined in U91
(analog input 1) (only for monitoring)
X92 customizable logic Analog input 2 data for steps defined in U91
(analog input 2) (only for monitoring)
X92 customizable logic Analog output data for steps defined in U91
(analog input) (only for monitoring)
 Customizable logic cancellation "CLC" (function codes E01 to E05 Data = 80)
Customizable logic operations can temporarily be disabled so that you can operate it without a customizable logic's
logical circuit and timer operation, for example during maintenance.
"CLC" Function
OFF Customizable logic enabled (according to U00 setting)
ON Customizable logic disabled
If you turn ON the customizable logic cancellation signal "CLC", a sequence by the customizable logic is
cleared, which can suddenly start an operation depending on the setting. Ensure the safety and check
the operation before switching the setting.
 Customizable logic all timers clear "CLTC" (function codes E01 to E05 Data = 81)
If the CLTC terminal function is assigned to a general-purpose input terminal to turn it ON, all the general-purpose
timers and counters in the customizable logic are reset. It is used to reset and restart the system, when, for
example, the timing of external sequence cannot be consistent with internal customizable logic due to a
momentary power failure.
"CLTC" Function
OFF Normal operation
Resets all the general-purpose timers and counters in the customizable logic.
ON
(To reactivate it, turn it OFF again.)
5-190
5.3.10 U1 codes (Customizable logic operation)
Customizable logic
U101 to
(conversion operating point 1 (X1, Y1), conversion operating point 2 (X2, Y2), conversion
U106
operating point 3 (X3, Y3))
Operation circuit: sets the three operating points to auto-calculate the factors (KA, KB, KC) when using conversion 1
( K A  Input１2  K B  Input１  K C ). Input signal (such as flow signal) and factors (KA, KB, KC) are used to create the
target signal (such as target pressure). (Linearization function)
Data setting range: -999.00 to 0.00 to 9990.00
Example of linearization characteristics
350
Pump characteristics
300
FUNCTION CODE
250
Upper limit
200
Pressure [kPa]
Operating point (3)
150
Operating point (2)

100
Chap 5
Operating point (1)
Linearization characteristics
50
Lower
limit
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
3
Flow [m[m3/h]
Flow /h]
U107 Customizable logic (conversion factor auto-calculation)
Auto-calculates the factors (KA, KB, KC) from three operating points defined in U101 to U106.
The calculated results are stored in U92 to U97, and U107 will be "0".
U107 data Function

0 Disable
1 Auto-calculation (operation circuit: conversion 1 (3001))
K A  Input １2  K B  Input １ K C
5-191
 Setting examples of customizable logic

Setting example 1: Use one switch to change among multiple signals
If you use one switch to change among the frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1 and torque limit 2/torque limit 1
simultaneously, replace an external circuit that is conventionally needed with a customizable logic to reduce the
general-purpose input terminals to be used to a single terminal.
Inverter
Hz2/Hz1
Customizable logic
Step 1
To configure this customizable logic, set the function codes as follows. (Timer selection) and (Timer setting) do not
need to be modified if no change is made.
Function code Setting Settings Remarks

value
E01 Terminal X1 (Function selection) 11 Select frequency command Can be used in
2/1 “Hz2/Hz1” parallel as
general-purpose
input terminals
U00 Customizable Logic (Mode selection) 1 Action
U01 Customizable logic: (Block 10 Through output + Mode selection
Step 1 selection) General-purpose timer
U02 (Input 1) 4001 Terminal [X1] input signal X1
U71 Customizable logic: (Output 1 Output of step 1, “SO01”
Output signal 1 selection)
U81 (Function 14 Select torque limiter level 2/1
selection) “TL2/TL1”
5-192
Setting example 2: Bring multiple output signals in a single signal

If the general-purpose RUN signal is kept ON at restart after momentary power failure, replace an external circuit
that is conventionally needed with a customizable logic to reduce the general-purpose output terminals and
external relays.
Inverter
Customizable logic
Step 1
FUNCTION CODE

value
E20 Terminal Y1 (Function selection) 111 Customizable logic output
signal 1 “CL01”
Chap 5
U01 Customizable logic: (Block selection) 30 ORing + General-purpose Mode selection
Step 1 timer
U02 (Input 1) 0 During operation “RUN”
U03 (Input 2) 6 Auto-restarting after
momentary power failure
“IPF”
U71 Customizable logic (Output 1 Output of step 1, “SO01”
output signal 1 selection)
U81 (Function 100 No function assigned
selection) “NONE”
5-193
Setting example 3: One-shot operation

If the SW-FWD or SW-REV switch is short-circuited to start the operation and the SW-STOP switch is
short-circuited to stop the operation (equivalent to / key/ key on keypad), replace an external circuit that
is conventionally needed with a customizable logic.
Inverter
Customize logic
Step 2
Step 1
Step 4
Step 3

value
F02 Operation 1 1 External signal
E01 Terminal X1 (Function selection) 100 No function assigned “NONE”
E98 Terminal FWD (Function selection) 100 No function assigned “NONE”
E99 Terminal REV (Function selection) 100 No function assigned “NONE”
U01 Customizable logic: (Block 30 ORing + General-purpose timer Mode selection
Step 1 selection)
U02 (Input 1) 4011 Terminal REV input signal “REV”
U03 (Input 2) 4001 Terminal X1 input signal “X1”
U06 Customizable logic: (Block 60 Reset priority flip-flop + Mode selection
U07 (Input 1) 4010 Terminal FWD input signal “FWD”
U08 (Input 2) 2001 Output of step 1 “SO01”
U11 Customizable logic: (Block 30 ORing + General-purpose timer Mode selection
Step 3 selection)
U12 (Input 1) 4010 Terminal FWD input signal “FWD”
U13 (Input 2) 4001 Terminal X1 input signal “X1”
U16 Customizable logic: (Block 60 Reset priority flip-flop + Mode selection
U17 (Input 1 4011 Terminal REV input signal “REV”
U18 (Input 2) 2003 Output of step 3 “SO03”
5-194

value
U71 Customizable logic (Output 2 Output of step 2 “SO02” “FWD” command
output signal 1 selection)
U72 Customizable logic 4 Output of step 4 “SO04” “REV” command
output signal 2
U81 Customizable logic (Function 98 Run forward/stop command
output signal 1 selection) “FWD”
U82 Customizable logic 99 Run reverse/stop command
output signal 2 “REV”
FUNCTION CODE
Chap 5
5-195
5.3.11 y codes (Link function)
y01 to y20 RS-485 setting 1, RS-485 setting 2
In the RS-485 communication, two systems can be connected.
System Connection method Function code Equipment that can be

connected
Standard keypad
Via RS-485 communication link (port 1) Inverter supporting loader
1 system y01 to y10
(RJ-45 connector to connect keypad) Host equipment (upper
equipment)
Via RS-485 communications link (port 2)
Other than C model (for China) Host equipments (upper
2 systems RJ-45 (shared with CAN communication) y11 to y20 equipments)
C (for China) Inverter supporting loader
Via digital input terminal blocks (DX+, DX-, SD)
Overview of the equipments is given below.
(1) Standard keypad

Standard keypads can be connected to operate and monitor the inverter.
Regardless of the y code settings, standard keypads are available.
(2) Inverter supporting loader (FRENIC loader)

Inverter supporting (monitor, function code editing, test operation) can be performed by connecting a computer
with the FRENIC loader installed.
 For the y codes setting, refer to the function codes y01 to y10.
(3) Host equipments (upper equipments)

Host equipments (upper equipments) such as PLC and controller can be connected to control and monitor the
inverter. Modbus RTU* protocol or Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol can be selected for communication.
* Modbus RTU is a protocol defined by Modicon.
 For details, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual.
 Station addresses (y01, y11)

Set the station addresses for the RS-485 communication. The setting range varies on each of the protocols.
Protocol Range Broadcast

Modbus RTU 1 to 247 0
Protocol for loader commands 1 to 255 -
Fuji general-purpose inverter 1 to 31 99
• When specifying a value out of range, no response is returned.

• The settings to use inverter supporting loader should be matched with the computer's settings.
5-196
 Mode selection when error occurs (y02, y12)

Select an operation when an error occurs for the RS-485 communication.
The RS-485 errors are logical errors such as address error, parity error and framing error, transmission errors and
disconnection errors specified in y08 and y18. Any of them are determined only when operating the inverter for the
configuration where the operation command or frequency command is issued via the RS-485 communication. If
the operation command or frequency command is not issued via the RS-485 communication, and when the
inverter is stopped, the system does not determine an error.
y02, y12
Function
data
Displays the RS-485 communication error (er8 for y02, erp for y12), and immediately
0
stops the operation (alarm stop).
Operates for a period specified in the error process timer (y03, y13), and then displays the
1 RS-485 communication error (er8 for y02, erp for y12), and stop the operation (alarm
stop).
Retries the communication for a period specified in the error process timer (y03, y13), and
FUNCTION CODE
if the communication is recovered, the operation is continued. Displays the RS-485
2
communication error (er8 for y02, erp for y12) if the communication is not recovered,
and immediately stops the operation (alarm stop).
3 Continues the operation if a communication error occurs.
Chap 5
 Timer operation time (y03, y13)
Sets the error process timer. If the value passes the timer value specified when a response request is issued due
to any reasons such as no response from the counterpart. Also refer to the section of disconnection detection time
(y08, y18).
 Transmission speed (y04, y14)

Sets the transmission speed. y04 and y14 data Function
• For inverter supporting loader (via RS-485): 0 2400 bps
Match the value with the computer setting.
1 4800 bps
2 9600 bps
3 19200 bps
4 38400 bps
 Data length selection (y05, y15)

Sets the character length. y05 and y15 data Function
• For inverter supporting loader (via RS-485): 0 8 bits
The value does not need to be set since it automatically
becomes 8 bit. 1 7 bits
(It also applies to Modbus RTU.)
5-197
 Parity bit selection (y06, y16)

Sets the parity bit. y06 and y16 data Function
• For inverter supporting loader (via No parity bit
RS-485): The value does not need to 0
be set since it automatically becomes (2 bits of stop bit for Modbus RTU)
even parity. Even parity
1
(1 bit of stop bit for Modbus RTU)
Odd parity
2
(1 bit of stop bit for Modbus RTU)
No parity bit
3
(1 bits of stop bit for Modbus RTU)
 Stop bit selection (y07, y17)

Sets the stop bit. y07 and y17 data Function
• For inverter supporting loader (via RS-485): 0 2 bits
The value does not need to be set since it automatically
becomes 1 bit. 1 1 bit
For Modbus RTU: The value does not need to be set since it
is automatically determined in conjunction with the parity bit.
 Disconnection detection time (y08, y18)

Sets a period from the time when the system detects y08 and y18 data Function
no-access status for any reason such as disconnection in
equipment facilities that always accesses to the station in a Disconnection is not
0
specific time during the operation using the RS-485 detected.
communication, until the time when the system processes
the communication errors. Detection time from 1 to
1 to 60
60 (s)
For details on processing communication errors, refer to y02
and y12.
 Response interval time (y09, y19)

Sets a period from the time when the system receives a request from host equipment (upper equipment) such as
computer or PLC until the time when it returns a response. Even for the host equipments that are slow to process
the task from completed transmission to completed reception preparation, a timing can be synchronized by setting
a response interval time.
Host device Request
Inverter Response
T1
T1 = Response interval time + α

α: Processing time inside the inverter. It varies depending on the timing and command.
To set an inverter by the inverter supporting loader via the RS-485 communication, consider the
performance and condition of the computer and converter (such as USB-RS-485 converter). (Some
converters monitor communication status and switch transmission and reception with timer.)
5-198
 Protocol selection (y10, y20)

Selects a communication protocol. y10 and y20 data Function
0 Modbus RTU protocol
1 Loader protocol
Fuji general-purpose
2
inverter protocol
y21 to y35 CANopen communication setting
For details, refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.2 "CANopen communication."
FUNCTION CODE
Chap 5
5-199
y95 Data clear selection at communication error
If any of the communication error alarms (Er8, ErP, Er4, Er5, ErU) occurs in RS-485, CANopen communication or
bus option, the data of communication command function codes (S codes) can automatically be cleared.
Since the frequency and operation commands are also disabled when the data is cleared, the inverter does not
start unintentionally when an alarm is released.
y95 data Function

When a communication error alarm occurs, the function code Sxx data is not cleared
0
(compatible with the conventional mode).
When a communication error alarm occurs, the function codes S01, S05 and S19 data is
1
cleared.
When a communication error alarm occurs, the bit assigned by the function code S06's
2
operation command is cleared.
3 Clear operations of 1 and 2 above are performed.
y97 Communication data storage method selection
The inverter memory (non-volatile memory) has a limited number of writes (100 thousand to 1 million times). If the
count immoderately increases, the data cannot be modified or saved, causing a memory error.
If the data should frequently be overwritten via communication, it can be saved in the temporary memory instead of
the non-volatile memory. This enables you to reduce the number of writes to the non-volatile memory, which can
avoid a memory error.
If y97 is set to "2", the data saved in the temporary memory is stored (All Saved) in the non-volatile memory.
To change the y97 data, it is necessary to press the + / keys (simultaneous keying).
y97 data Function

0 Saved in the non-volatile memory (the number of writes is limited)
1 Saved in the temporary memory (the number of writes is not limited)
The data All Saved from the temporary memory to the non-volatile memory
2
(After the All Save is performed, the y97 data is returned to 1)
y98 Bus function (mode selection) (Refer to H30)
For details on setting the y98 bus function (mode selection), refer to the description of H30.
5-200
y99 Supporting link function (mode selection)
Function code to switch the links for the inverter supporting loader. Rewriting y99 with the inverter supporting
loader (FRENIC loader) enables the frequency command and operation command from the inverter supporting
loader. You do not need to use the keypad since the data is rewritten from the inverter supporting loader.
If the operation command is configured to be given from the inverter supporting loader, and if a computer starts to
go out of control during the operation and a stop command from the loader is ignored, remove a communication
cable connected to the computer that runs the inverter supporting loader, and connect the keypad to set the y99
data to 0. By setting the y99 data to 0, the operation is isolated from the inverter supporting loader's commands,
switching to the commands of inverter's own settings (such as function code H30).
The y99 data is not saved in the inverter; the setting is lost and returned to 0 when powered off.
Function
y99 data
Frequency command Run command source
0 From function codes H30 and y98 From function codes H30 and y98
1 Command issued from FRENIC loader From function codes H30 and y98
FUNCTION CODE
2 From function codes H30 and y98 Command issued from FRENIC loader
3 Command issued from FRENIC loader Command issued from FRENIC loader
Chap 5
5-201
Chapter 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or
detects an alarm or a light alarm condition. In this chapter, first check whether any alarm code or the
"light alarm" indication (l-al) is displayed or not, and then proceed to the troubleshooting items.
Contents
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING··················································································· 6-1

6.1 Protective Function ····························································································· 6-1
6.2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting ·································································· 6-2
6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor ·························································· 6-3
6.3.1 Alarm code list ······························································································ 6-3
6.3.2 Causes, checks and measures of alarms···························································· 6-6
[ 1 ] Cof PID feedback wire break········································································ 6-6
[ 2 ] dba Braking transistor error ········································································· 6-6
[ 3 ] dbh Braking resistor overheated ··································································· 6-6
[ 4 ] ecf EN circuit failure ·················································································· 6-7
[ 5 ] ecl Customized logic failure ········································································ 6-7
[ 6 ] ef Ground fault ························································································· 6-7
[ 7 ] er1 Memory error······················································································ 6-7
[ 8 ] er2 Keypad communications error ································································ 6-8
[ 9 ] er3 CPU error ·························································································· 6-8
[ 10 ] er4 Option communications error ································································· 6-8
[ 11 ] er5 Option error (To be responded soon.) ······················································ 6-8
[ 12 ] er6 Operation error ··················································································· 6-9
[ 13 ] er7 Tuning error ······················································································· 6-9
[ 14 ] er8 RS-485 communications error (Communications port 1)/ erp RS-485
communications error (Communications port 2)·················································· 6-10
[ 15 ] erd Step-out detection/detection failure of magnetic pole position at startup (To
be responded soon.) ···················································································· 6-10
[ 16 ] ere Speed inconsistency / Excessive speed deviation (To be responded soon.) ····· 6-11
[ 17 ] erf Data saving error during undervoltage····················································· 6-11
[ 18 ] ero Positioning control error (To be responded soon) ······································· 6-12
[ 19 ] err Simulated failure ················································································ 6-12
[ 20 ] ert CAN communications failure ································································· 6-12
[ 21 ] fus DC fuse-blowing················································································· 6-12
[ 22 ] lin Input phase loss ················································································· 6-13
[ 23 ] lu Undervoltage ······················································································· 6-13
[ 24 ] 0cn Instantaneous overcurrent ···································································· 6-14
[ 25 ] 0h1 Cooling fin overheat ············································································ 6-15
[ 26 ] 0h2 External alarm ··················································································· 6-15
[ 27 ] 0h3 Inverter internal overheat ····································································· 6-15
[ 28 ] 0h4 Motor protection (PTC thermistor) ·························································· 6-16
[ 29 ] 0ln Motor overloads 1 to 2 ········································································· 6-16
[ 30 ] 0lu Inverter overload ················································································ 6-17
[ 31 ] 0pl Output phase-failure detection······························································· 6-17
[ 32 ] 0s Overspeed protection ············································································ 6-18
[ 33 ] 0un Overvoltage ······················································································ 6-18
[ 34 ] pbf Charger circuit fault ············································································· 6-19
[ 35 ] p9 PG wire break (To be responded soon.)····················································· 6-19
6.4 If the "Light Alarm" Indication (l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor ······························ 6-20
6.5 When Codes Other Than Alarm Codes and Light Alarm Indication (l-al) are Displayed · 6-22
6.5.1 Abnormal motor operation ·············································································· 6-22
[ 1 ] The motor does not rotate ············································································· 6-22
[ 2 ] The motor rotates, but the speed does not increase ············································ 6-24
[ 3 ] The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command ····································· 6-25
[ 4 ] Speed fluctuation or current oscillation (e.g., hunting) occurs during running at
constant speed ··························································································· 6-25
[ 5 ] Unpleasant noises are emitted from motor or noises fluctuate ······························· 6-26
[ 6 ] Motor is not accelerated or decelerated according to set-up acceleration or
deceleration time ························································································· 6-26
[ 7 ] The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power
failure ······································································································· 6-27
[ 8 ] Motor generates heat abnormally ···································································· 6-27
[ 9 ] The motor does not run as expected ································································ 6-27
[ 10 ] Motor stalls during acceleration ······································································ 6-28
6.5.2 Problems with inverter settings ········································································ 6-29
[ 1 ] Nothing appears on the LED monitor ······························································· 6-29
[ 2 ] The desired menu is not displayed ·································································· 6-29
[ 3 ] Display of under bars (_ _ _ _) ···································································· 6-29
[ 4 ] Display of center bars (----) ········································································ 6-30
[5] c ] Display of parenthesis ····································································· 6-30
[ 6 ] Data of function codes cannot be changed ························································ 6-30
[ 7 ] Function code data are not changeable (change from link functions) ······················· 6-31
6.1 Protective Function
6.1 Protective Function
FRENIC-Ace is provided with various protective functions shown in Table below to prevent system down or to
shorten a downtime. The protective functions marked with an asterisk (*) in the table are disabled by factory default.
Enable them according to your needs.
The protective functions include, for example, the "heavy alarm" detection function which, upon detection of an
abnormal state, displays the alarm code on the LED monitor and causes the inverter to trip, the "light alarm"
detection function which displays the alarm code but lets the inverter continue the current operation, and other
warning signal output functions.
If any problem arises, understand the protective functions listed below and follow the procedures given in Sections
6.2 and onwards for troubleshooting.
Table 6-1 Abnormal States Detectable ("Heavy Alarm" and "Light Alarm" Objects)
Relative
Protective function Description
function code
This function detects an abnormal state, displays the corresponding alarm code,
and causes the inverter to trip. See Table 6.3-1 “Various failure detections
"Heavy alarm" detection (Heavy failure objects)” for alarm codes. For details of each alarm code, see the H98
corresponding item in the troubleshooting in Section 6.3.
The inverter retains the last four alarm codes and their factors together with their
Chap 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
running information applied when the alarm occurred, so it can display them.
This function detects an abnormal state categorized as a "light alarm," displays

l-al and lets the inverter continue the current operation without tripping.
Details of light alarms are selectable. Selectable details (codes) are codes H81
"Light alarm" detection*
shown in Table 6.4-1 "Various failure detections (Light alarm objects)." H82
See Section 6.4 for the confirming method and releasing method of the light
alarms.
When the output current exceeds the current limiter level (F44) during
Stall prevention acceleration/ deceleration or constant speed running, this function decreases F44
the output frequency to avoid an overcurrent trip.
Overload prevention Before the inverter trips due to a cooling fin overheat (0h1) or inverter overload
(0lu), this function decreases the output frequency of the inverter to reduce the H70
control*
load.
If regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter's braking capability, this

Anti-regenerative control* function automatically increases the deceleration time or controls the output H69
frequency to avoid an overvoltage trip.
Deceleration
During deceleration, this function increases the motor energy loss and
characteristics*
decreases the regenerative energy returned to avoid an overvoltage trip (0u). H71
(Improvement of braking
performance)
This function detects a frequency reference loss (due to a broken wire, etc.),
Reference loss detection* issues the alarm, and continues the inverter operation at the specified E65
frequency.
Automatic lowering of Before the inverter trips due to an abnormal surrounding temperature or output
H98
carrier frequency current, this function automatically lowers the carrier frequency to avoid a trip.
When the inverter output current has exceeded the specified level, this function
Motor overload early issues the "Motor overload early warning" signal before the thermal overload E34
warning* protection function causes the inverter to trip for motor protection. (Only for the E35
1st motor)
When the inverter has stopped because of a trip, this function allows the inverter
to automatically reset and restart itself. H04
Retry*
(The number of retries and the latency between stop and reset can be H05
specified.))
Upon receipt of the "Force to stop" terminal command STOP, this function
Forced stop* interrupts the run and other commands currently applied in order to forcedly H56
decelerate the inverter to a stop.
This function protects the inverter from a surge voltage invaded between main
Surge protection -
circuit power lines and the ground.
• If a momentary power failure for 15 ms or longer occurs, a protective operation

(inverter stop) is activated.
Momentary power failure
• When momentary power failure restart is selected, the inverter is restarted F14
protection*
responding to voltage restoration within a set-up time (momentary power failure
permissible time).
6-1
6.2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting
6.2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting
• If any of the protective functions has been activated, first remove the cause. Then, after checking that the all
run commands are set to OFF, release the alarm. If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to
ON, the inverter may supply the power to the motor, running the motor.
Injury may occur.
• Even though the inverter has interrupted power to the motor, if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input
terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T, voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U, V, and W.
• Turn OFF the power and wait for at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of FRN0072E2S-4 or
below, or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of FRN0085E2S-4 or above. Make sure that the
LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a multimeter or a similar
instrument, that the DC intermediate circuit voltage between the terminals P (+) and N (-) has dropped to the
safe level (+25 VDC or below).
Electric shock may occur.
Follow the procedure below to solve problems.

(1) Is wire connection correct?
See Chapter 2 "2.2.1 Basic connection diagram."
(2) Check whether an alarm code or the "light alarm" indication (l-al) is displayed on the LED monitor.
 When an alarm code (excluding light alarms) is displayed To Section 6.3
 If the “Light Alarm” Indication (l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor To Section 6.4
 When codes other than alarm codes and light alarm
indication (l-al) are displayed To Section 6.5
Abnormal motor operation To Section 6.5.1
6.5.1 [1] The motor does not rotate.
6.5.1 [2] The motor rotates, but the speed does not increase.
6.5.1 [3] The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command.
6.5.1 [4] Speed fluctuation or current oscillation (e.g., hunting) occurs during running at
constant speed.
6.5.1 [5] Unpleasant noises are emitted from motor or noises fluctuate.
6.5.1 [6] The motor is not accelerated or decelerated according to set-up acceleration or
deceleration time.
6.5.1 [7] The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power
failure.
6.5.1 [8] Motor generates heat abnormally.
6.5.1 [9] The motor does not run as expected.
6.5.1 [10] Motor stalls during acceleration.
Problems with inverter settings To Section 6.5.2
6.5.2 [1] Nothing appears on the LED monitor.

6.5.2 [2] The desired menu is not displayed.
6.5.2 [3] Display of under bars(_ _ _ _)
6.5.2 [4] Display of cenfer bars(- - -)
6.5.2 [5] c ] Display of parenthesis
6.5.2 [6] Data of fuction codes cannot be changed.
6.5.2 [7] Function code data are not changeable (change from link functions)
If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
6-2
6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor

6.3.1 Alarm code list
When an alarm is detected, check an alarm code displayed on 7-segment LED of keypad.
When one alarm code has plural factors, alarm subcodes are provided to make it easy to identify causes. When a
factor is one, the alarm subcode is displayed as "-" and described as "-."
* See (Chapter 3 “3.4.6 Reading alarm information”) for the check method of the alarm codes.
* With regard to alarm details having alarm subcodes name“for manufacturer”, inform us of the alarm subcodes,
too, when contacting us or requesting an inverter repair.
Table 6.3-1 Various failure detections (Heavy failure objects)
Heavy Light
Retry Reference
Alarm code Alarm code name failure alarm Alarm subcode* Alarm subcode name
object page
object selectable
cof PID feedback wire break   - - - 6-6
dba Braking transistor broken  - - - - 6-6
Braking resistor overheat 0 DB resistor overheat

dbh    6-6
(FRN0072E2S-4 or below) 1 For manufacturer
10 ASIC alarm for functional safety
ecf EN circuit failure  - - 3000 Erroneous detection of STO input 6-7
Other than above For manufacturer
ecl Customized logic failure  - - - - -
Ground fault
ef  - - - - 6-7
(FRN0085E2S-4 or above)
er1 Memory error  - - 1 to 16 For manufacturer 6-7
Keypad communications
er2  - - 1 to 2 For manufacturer 6-8
error
er3 CPU error  - - 1 to 9000 For manufacturer 6-8
er4 Option communications error   - 1 For manufacturer 6-8
Option error 0 Time-out

er5   - 6-8
(To be responded soon.) 1 to 10 For manufacturer
STOP key priority/forced stop

1
(STOP terminal)
2 Start check function
Start check function

3
(when operation is permitted)

4
er6 Operation error  - - (when reset is turned on) 6-9

5 (when the power recovers in
powering on)

6
(TP connection)
8 to 14 For manufacturer
6-3
Continuation of Table 6.3-1

Heavy Light
Retry Reference
object page
object selectable
Operation command OFF during

7
motor tuning
8 Forced stop during motor tuning
9 BX command during motor tuning
Hardware current limit during motor

10
tuning
Occurrence of low voltage (LV)

11
during motor tuning
Failure due to prevention of reverse

12
rotation during motor tuning
Over upper limit frequency during

13
er7 Tuning error  - - motor tuning 6-9
Switching to commercial power

14
during motor tuning
Occurrence of alarm during motor

15
tuning
Change of run command source

16
during motor tuning
Over acceleration time during motor

18
tuning
EN terminal failure during motor

24
tuning
RS-485 communications
er8   - - - 6-10
error (Communication port 1)
Detection of step-out (To be

erd  - - 5001 to 5008 For manufacturer 6-10
responded soon.)
Signs of speed command and speed

1
detection are inconsistent.
In the case of excessive speed

3 deviation (|detected speed|>|speed
Speed inconsistency/ command|)
ere excessive speed deviation   - 6-11
(To be responded soon.) Detected speed remains 0Hz
5
irrespective of speed command.
In the case of excessive speed

7 deviation (|detected speed|<|speed
command|)
Data saving error during

erf  - - - - 6-12
undervoltage
Positioning control error

ero   - 1 to 5 For manufacturer 6-12
(To be responded soon.)
RS-485 communications
erp   - - - -
error (Communication port 2)
err Simulated failure  - - - - 6-12
ert CAN communications failure  - - 1 to 2 For manufacturer 6-12
DC fuse-blowing
fUs (The capacity is not  - - - - 6-12
determined yet.)
6-4
Continuation of Table 6.3-1

Heavy Light
Retry Reference
object page
object selectable
lin Input phase loss  - - 1-2 For manufacturer 6-13
Occurrence of low voltage during

1
gate on (F14=0)
Timer time and run command ON

2
lu Undervoltage  - - during low voltage (F14=0, 2) 6-13
LV trip on power recovery from a
3
momentary power failure (F14=1)
4 to 5 For manufacturer
0c1
0c2 Instantaneous overcurrent  -  1 to 5001 For manufacturer 6-14
0c3
6 Detection of fan stop
0h1 Cooling fin overheat    6-15
0h2 External alarm   - - - 6-15
0 Interior air overheat
0h3 Inverter internal overheat    1 Charging resistor overheat 6-15
Motor protection (PTC

0h4  -  - - 6-16
thermistor)
0l1 Motor 1 overload    - -

6-16
0l2 Motor 2 overload    - -
1 IGBT protection
0lu Inverter overload  -  2 Inverter overload 6-17
10 For manufacturer
Output phase-failure
0pl  - - 1 to 10 For manufacturer 6-17
detection
0s Overspeed protection  - - - - 6-18
0u1
0u2 Overvoltage  -  1 to 12 For manufacturer 6-18
0u3
Charging circuit failure
pbf  - - 1 to 2 For manufacturer 6-19
(FRN0203E2S-4 or above)
PG wire break (To be

p9  - - 10 to 20 For manufacturer 6-19
responded soon.)
NB) • If a control power supply voltage drops to such a level that the operation of the inverter control circuit
cannot be maintained, all protective functions are automatically reset.
• By OFF  ON operation between key or X terminal (assigned to RST) and CM of the keypad, the
protection stop state can be released. In a state that an alarm factor is not removed, however, resetting
operation fails to become effective.
• If two or more alarms are occurring, the resetting operation remains ineffective until all the alarm factors
are removed.
(Alarm factors not removed can be checked from the keypad.)
• When assigned to light alarms, "30A/B/C" do not work.
6-5
6.3.2 Causes, checks and measures of alarms

[1] Cof PID feedback wire break
Phenomena The signal line of PID feedback is broken.
Possible Causes Check and Measures
(1) The PID feedback signal wire is Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected correctly.
broken.  Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected
correctly. Or, tighten up the related terminal screws.
 Check whether any contact part bites the wire sheath.
(2) The inverter was affected by Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been
strong electrical noise. implemented (e.g. correct grounding and routing of signal wires,
communications cables, and main circuit wires).
 Implement noise control measures.
 Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as
possible.
[2] dba Braking transistor error

Phenomena Faulty operation of the braking transistor was detected.
The braking transistor is broken. Check whether resistance of the braking resistor is correct or there is a
misconnection of the resistor.
 Consult your Fuji Electric representative for repair.
[3] dbh Braking resistor overheated

Phenomena The electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor has been activated.
(1) Braking load is too heavy. Reconsider the relationship between the braking load estimated and the
real load.
[Subcode: 0]  Lower the real braking load.
 Review the selection of the braking resistor and increase the
braking capability. (Modification of related function code data (F50,
F51, and F52) is also required.)
(2) Specified deceleration time is Recalculate the deceleration torque and time needed for the load
too short. currently applied, based on a moment of inertia for the load and the
deceleration time.
[Subcode: 0]  Increase the deceleration time (F08, E11, E13, E15, and H56).
 Review the selection of the braking resistor and increase the
braking capability. (Modification of related function code data (F50,
F51, and F52) is also required.)
(3) Incorrect setting of function Recheck the modes of the braking resistor.
code data F50, F51, and F52.  Review data of function codes F50, F51, and F52, then modify
them.
[Subcode: 0]
The inverter issues an overheat alarm of the braking resistor by monitoring the magnitude of the braking
load, not by measuring its surface temperature.
When the braking resistor is used so frequently as to exceed the settings made by function codes F50,
F51, and F52, therefore, the inverter issues an overheat alarm even if the surface temperature of the
braking resistor does not rise. To squeeze out full performance of the braking resistor, configure function
codes F50, F51, and F52 while actually measuring the surface temperature of the braking resistor.
6-6
[4] ecf EN circuit failure

Phenomena Enable circuit state was diagnosed and a circuit failure was detected.
(1) Contact defect on interface Confirm that the interface substrate is firmly mounted on the body.
substrate  Alarm is released by turning on again.
[Subcode: 10]
(2) Enable circuit logic failure Confirm that outputs from safety switch etc. are inputted by the same
logic (High/High or Low/Low) with EN1 terminal/EN2 terminal.
[Subcode: 3000]  Alarm is released by turning on again.
(3) A failure (single failure) of If the circuit failure is not removable by the procedures above, the
enable circuit (safety stop inverter is out of order.
circuit) was detected.  Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
[5] ecl Customized logic failure

Phenomena A setting failure of customized logic was detected.
(1) Setting of the selection of Check whether the selection (Function code U00) of customized logic
customized logic operation was operation is changed during operation.
changed during operation.  Do not change the selection of customized logic operation during
operation to prevent a danger.
[6] ef Ground fault

Phenomena A ground fault current flew from the output terminal of the inverter.
(1) Inverter output terminal(s) Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals (U, V, and W) and
grounded (ground fault). perform a Megger test.
 Remove the grounded parts (including replacement of the wires,
relay terminals and motor).
[7] er1 Memory error

Phenomena Error occurred in writing the data to the memory in the inverter.
(1) When writing data (especially Initialize data by data initialization (H03), and check whether an alarm
initializing or copying data), the can be released by key after finishing the initialization.
inverter was shut down so that
 Revert the initialized function code data to their previous settings,
the voltage to the control PCB
then restart the operation.
has dropped.
(2) The inverter was affected by Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented
strong electrical noise when (e.g., correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires).
writing data (especially Also, perform the same check as described in (1) above.
initializing).  Implement noise control measures. Revert the initialized function
code data to their previous settings, then restart the operation.
(3) The control PCB failed. Initialize data by data initialization (H03), and check whether an alarm
continues even when the release of the alarm is attempted by key
after finishing the initialization.
 The control PCB (on which the CPU is mounted) is defective.
Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
6-7
[8] er2 Keypad communications error

Phenomena A communications error occurred between the keypad and the inverter.
(1) Broken communications cable Check continuity of the cable, contacts and connections.
or poor contact.  Re-insert the connector firmly.
 Replace the cable.
(2) Connecting many control wires Check the mounting condition of the front cover.
hinders the front cover from  Use wires of the recommended size (0.75 mm2) for wiring.
being mounted, lifting the  Change the wiring layout inside the unit so that the front cover can
keypad. be mounted firmly.
strong electrical noise. (e.g., correct grounding and routing of communications cables and
main circuit wires).
 Implement noise control measures. (For details, refer to Appendix
A.)
(4) A keypad failure occurred. Replace the keypad with another one and check whether a
communications error (er2) occurs.
 Replace the keypad.
[9] er3 CPU error

Phenomena A CPU error (e.g. erratic CPU operation) occurred.
strong electrical noise. (e.g. correct grounding and routing of signal wires, communications
cables, and main circuit wires).
[ 10 ] er4 Option communications error

Phenomena A communications error occurred between the option card and the inverter.
(1) There was a problem with the Check whether the connector on the option card is properly engaged
connection between the option with that of the inverter.
card and the inverter.  Reload the option card into the inverter.
[ 11 ] er5 Option error (To be responded soon.)

An error detected by the option card.
Refer to the instruction manual of the option card for details.
6-8
[ 12 ] er6 Operation error

Phenomena An incorrect operation was attempted.
(1) key was pressed when the Check whether the key was pressed in a state that a run command
key is effective (H96=1, 3). is inputted via terminal block or communications.
[Subcode:1]  If this was not intended, check the setting of H96.
(2) The start check function was Check that any of the following operations has been performed with a
activated when H96 = 2 or 3. run command being entered.
• Power on
[Subcode:2to6] • Release of alarm
• Switching to link operation command
 Review the running sequence to avoid input of a Run command
when this error occurs.
If this was not intended, check the setting of H96.
(Turn the run command OFF before releasing the alarm.)
(3) The forced stop (digital input Check that the forced stop “STOP” is turned off.
terminal) STOP was turned  If this was not intended, check the settings of E01 through E05 for
OFF. terminals [X1] through [X5].
[Subcode:1]
[ 13 ] er7 Tuning error

Phenomena Auto-tuning failed.
(1) A phase was missing in the  Properly connect the motor to the inverter.
connection between the inverter
and the motor.
(2) V/f or the rated current of the Check whether the data of function codes (F04*, F05*, H50, H51, H52,
motor was not properly set. H53, H65, H66, P02*, P03*) agree with the motor modes.
(3) The wiring length between the Check whether the wiring length between the inverter and the motor
inverter and the motor was too exceeds 50 m. (Inverters with a small capacity are greatly affected by
long. the wiring length.)
 Review, and if necessary, change the layout of the inverter and the
motor to shorten the connection wire. Alternatively, minimize the
wiring length without changing the layout.
 Disable both auto-tuning and auto-torque boost (set data of F37* to
"1").
(4) The rated capacity of the motor Check whether the rated capacity of the motor is three or more ranks
was significantly different from lower, or two or more ranks higher than that of the inverter.
that of the inverter.  Replace the inverter with one with an appropriate capacity.
 Set motor constants (P06*, P07*, P08*) manually.
 Disable both auto-tuning and auto-torque boost (set data of F37* to
"1").
(5) The motor was a special type  Disable both auto-tuning and auto-torque boost (set data of F37* to
such as a high-speed motor. "1").
(6) Tuning (P04*=2) operation was  Specify the tuning that does not involve the motor rotation (P04* =
performed of rotating a motor in 1).
a state that braking is applied to  Perform the tuning (P04*=2) with the braking released.
the motor.
6-9
[ 14 ] er8 RS-485 communications error (Communications port 1)/

erp RS-485 communications error (Communications port 2)
Phenomena A communications error occurred during RS-485 communications.
(1) Communications conditions of Compare the settings of the function codes (y01 to y10, y11 to y20) with
the inverter do not match that of those of the host equipment.
the host equipment.  Correct any settings that differ.
(2) Even though no-response error Check the host equipment.
detection time (y08, y18) has  Change the settings of host equipment software or disable the
been set, communications is not no-response error detection (y08, y18 = 0).
performed within the specified
cycle.
(3) The host equipment did not Check the host equipment (e.g., PLCs and personal computers).
operate due to defective  Remove the cause of the equipment error.
software, settings, or defective
hardware.
(4) The RS-485 converter did not Check the RS-485 converter (e.g., check for poor contact).
operate due to incorrect  Change the various RS-485 converter settings, reconnect the
connections and settings, or wires, or replace hardware with recommended devices as
defective hardware. appropriate.
(5) Broken communications cable Check the continuity of the cables, contacts and connections.
or poor contact.  Replace the cable.
 Implement noise reduction measures on the host side.
 Replace the RS-485 converter with a recommended insulated one.
(7) Terminating resistor is not Check that the inverter serves as a terminating device in the network.
properly configured.  Set terminal resistor changeover switches for RS-485
communications (SW2/SW6) correctly.
(That is, turn the switch (es) to ON.)
[ 15 ] erd Step-out detection/detection failure of magnetic pole position at startup

(To be responded soon.)
Phenomena The step-out of PM motor was detected. The magnetic pole position at startup failed
to be detected.
(1) Function code settings do not Check whether F04, F05, P01, P02, P03, P60, P61, P62, P63, P64
agree with the motor agree with the motor constant.
characteristics.  Perform auto-tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used.
(2) Magnetic pole position Confirm that the magnetic pole position detection method matches the
detection method is not motor type.
appropriate.  Match the magnetic pole position detection method selection (P30)
to the motor type.
(3) Starting frequency (continuation Check whether a starting frequency (continuation time) (F24) is set
time) (F24) is insufficient. optimally, after setting the magnetic pole position detection method
(In PM sensorless vector selection (P30) to "0" or "3."
control)  Set a period of time during which motor can rotate by one or more
revolutions.
F24P01/2/F23 (P01: Number of poles, F23: Starting frequency)
(4) Starting torque is insufficient. Check the data of acceleration times (F07, E10, E12, E14) and a current
command value on a start (P74).
 Change the acceleration time to match the load.
 Increase the current command value at startup.
(5) Load is small. Check the data of a current command value at startup (P74).
 Decrease the current command value at startup.
Set it to 80% or lower when running a motor single unit in a test run etc.
6-10
[ 16 ] ere Speed inconsistency / Excessive speed deviation (To be responded soon.)

Phenomena An excessive deviation appears between the speed command and the detected
speed.
(1) Incorrect setting of function Check the motor parameter "Number of poles" (P01*).
code data.  Specify the P01* data in accordance with the motor to be used.
(2) Overload. Measure the inverter output current.
 Reduce the load.
Check whether any mechanical brake is working.
 Release the mechanical brake.
(3) The motor speed does not Check the data of function code F44 (Current limiter (Level)).
increase due to the current  Change the F44 data correctly. Or, set the F43 data to "0" (Disable)
limiter operation. if the current limiter operation is not needed.
Check the data of the function codes (F04*, F05*, P01*-P12*) to see if
V/f is set correctly.
 Match the V/f pattern setting with the motor ratings.
 Change the function code data in accordance with the motor
parameters.
(4) Function code settings do not Confirm that P01*, P02*, P03*, P06*, P07*, P08*, P09*, P10*, P12*
match the motor characteristics. match the motor constant.
 Perform auto-tuning of the inverter, using the function code P04*.
(5) Wiring to the motor is incorrect. Check the wiring to the motor.
 Connect the inverter output terminals U, V, and W to the motor
input terminals U, V, and W, respectively.
(6) The motor speed does not Check the data of F40 (Torque limiter (Level)).
increase due to the torque  Change the F40 data correctly. Or, set the F40 data to "999"
limiter operation. (Disable) if the torque limiter operation is not needed.
[ 17 ] erf Data saving error during undervoltage

Phenomena The inverter failed to save data such as the frequency commands and PID
commands (which are specified through the keypad), or the output frequencies
modified by the UP/DOWN signal commands when the power was turned OFF.
(1) During data saving performed Check how long it takes for the DC intermediate circuit voltage to drop
when the power was turned to the preset voltage when the power is turned OFF.
OFF, the voltage fed to the  Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC
control PCB dropped in an intermediate circuit voltage. After pressing the key and releasing
abnormally short period due to the alarm, return the data of the relevant function codes (such as
the rapid discharge of the DC the frequency commands and PID commands (specified through
intermediate circuit. the keypad) or the output frequencies modified by the UP/DOWN
signal commands) back to the original values and then restart the
operation.
(2) The inverter operation was Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented
affected by strong electrical (e.g., correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires).
noise during data saving  Implement noise control measures. After pressing the key and
performed when the power was releasing the alarm, return the data of the relevant function codes
turned OFF. (such as the frequency commands and PID commands (specified
through the keypad) or the output frequencies modified by the
UP/DOWN signal commands) back to the original values and then
restart the operation.
(3) The control circuit failed. Check if erf occurs each time the power is turned ON.
 The control PCB (on which the CPU is mounted) is defective.
Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
6-11
[ 18 ] ero Positioning control error (To be responded soon)

Phenomena Excessive position deviation occurred on a servo-lock.
(1) Insufficient gain in positioning Readjust the settings of J97 (Servo-lock (Gain)) and d03 (Speed control
control system 1 P (Gain)).
(2) Incorrect control completion Check whether the setting of J99 (Servo-lock (Completion width)) is
width correct.
 Correct the setting of J99.
(3) Position deviation is excessive. Check whether the detection width of excessive deviation (d78) is set
up properly.
[ 19 ] err Simulated failure

Phenomena The LED displays the alarm err.
(1) Keep key + key pressed  To escape from this alarm state, press the key.
for five seconds or longer.
[ 20 ] ert CAN communications failure

Phenomena Communications error occurred in CAN bus communications.
(1) Transmission speed settings Check the data of transmission speed (y23) and setting details of host
differ. equipment side.
 Correct any settings that differ.
(2) Defect of host controllers Check the host equipment.
(including programmable  Remove the cause of the equipment error.
controller, personal computer,
etc.) (Defects of control software,
setting and hardware)
(3) Break and contact failure of Check the continuity of the cables, contacts and connections.
communications cables  Replace the cable.
 Implement noise reduction measures on the host side.
[ 21 ] fus DC fuse-blowing
Phenomena The fuse inside the inverter blew.
(1) The fuse blew due to Check whether there has been any excess surge or noise coming from
short-circuiting inside the outside.
inverter.  Take measures against surges and noise.
 Consult your Fuji Electric representative for repair.
6-12
[ 22 ] lin Input phase loss

Phenomena Input phase loss occurred, or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large.
(1) Breaks in wiring to the main Measure the input voltage.
power input terminals.  Repair or replace the main circuit power input wires or input devices
(MCCB, MC, etc.).
(2) The screws on the main power Check if the screws on the main power input terminals have become
input terminals are loosely loose.
tightened.  Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque.
(3) Interphase voltage unbalance Measure the input voltage.
among three phases was too  Connect an AC reactor (ACR) to lower the voltage unbalance
large. between input phases.
 Increase the inverter capacity.
(4) Overload cyclically occurred. Measure the ripple wave of the DC intermediate circuit voltage.
 If the ripple is large, increase the inverter capacity.
(5) Single-phase voltage was input Check the inverter type.
to the three-phase input  Apply three-phase power.
inverter.
Note The input phase loss protection can be disabled with the function code H98.
[ 23 ] lu Undervoltage
Phenomena DC intermediate circuit voltage has dropped below the undervoltage detection level.
(1) A momentary power failure  Release the alarm.
occurred.  If you want to restart running the motor without treating this
[Subcode:1] condition as an alarm, set F14 to "3," "4," or "5," depending on the
[Subcode:3] load type.
(2) The power to the inverter was Check if the power to the inverter was switched back to ON while the
switched back to ON too soon control power was still alive. (Check whether the LEDs on the keypad
(when F14 = 1). light.)
[Subcode:2] Turn the power ON again after all LEDs on the keypad go off.
(3) The power supply voltage did not Measure the input voltage.
reach the inverter's mode range.  Increase the voltage to within the specified range.
(4) Peripheral equipment for the Measure the input voltage to find which peripheral equipment
power circuit malfunctioned, or malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect.
the connection was incorrect.  Replace any faulty peripheral equipment, or correct any incorrect
connections.
(5) Any other loads connected to the Measure the input voltage and check the voltage fluctuation.
same power supply has required  Reconsider the power supply system configuration.
a large starting current, causing a
temporary voltage drop.
(6) Inverter's inrush current caused Check if the alarm occurs when a molded case circuit breaker
the power voltage drop because (MCCB), earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent
the power supply transformer protection) or magnetic contactor (MC) is turned ON.
capacity was insufficient.  Reconsider the capacity of the power supply transformer.
6-13
[ 24 ] 0cn Instantaneous overcurrent

Phenomena The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level.
0c1 Overcurrent occurred during acceleration.
0c2 Overcurrent occurred during deceleration.
0c3 Overcurrent occurred during running at a constant speed.
(1) The inverter output lines were Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals (U, V and W) and
short-circuited. measure the interphase resistance of the motor wiring. Check if the resistance
is too low.
 Remove the short-circuited part (including replacement of the wires, relay
terminals and motor).
(2) Ground faults have occurred at Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals (U, V, and W) and perform a
the inverter output lines. Megger test.
 Remove the grounded parts (including replacement of the wires, relay
terminals and motor).
(3) Overload. Measure the motor current with a measuring device to trace the current trend.
Then, use this data to judge if the trend is over the calculated load value for your
system design.
 If the load is too heavy, reduce it or increase the inverter capacity.
Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the
current.
 If there are any sudden changes, make the load fluctuation smaller or
increase the inverter capacity.
 Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting (H12 = 1).
(4) Excessive torque boost Check whether decreasing the torque boost (F09*) decreases the output
specified. (The manual torgue current but does not stall the motor.
boost when (F37* = 0, 1, 3, or  If no stall occurs, decrease the torque boost (F09*).
4))
(5) The specified acceleration/ Check that the motor generates enough torque required during
deceleration time was too short. acceleration/deceleration. That torque is calculated from the moment of inertia
for the load and the acceleration/deceleration time.
 Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10 through E15,
and H56).
 Enable the current limiter (F43) and torque limiter (F40, F41, E16, and E17).
(6) Malfunction caused by noise. Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented (e.g.,
correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires).
 Implement noise control measures. For details, refer to Appendix A.
 Enable the retry (H04).
 Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor's coils or other solenoids
(if any) causing noise.
6-14
[ 25 ] 0h1 Cooling fin overheat

Phenomena Temperature around heat sink has risen abnormally.
(1) The surrounding temperature Measure the surrounding temperature.
exceeded the inverter's mode  Lower the temperature (e.g., ventilate the panel where the inverter
limit. is mounted).
(2) Ventilation paths are blocked. Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter.
 Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance.
Check if the fin is not clogged.
 Clean the fin.
(3) Cooling fan's airflow volume Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan. (See Chapter 3 "3.4.5
decreased due to the service Reading maintenance information.")
life expired or failure.  Replace the cooling fan.
Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally.
[Subcode:6]
 Replace the cooling fan.
 Reduce the load (Reduce the load before reaching an overload
using cooling fin overheat forecast (E01-E05)/overload forecast
(E34)).
 Decrease the motor sound (carrier frequency) (F26).
 Enable overload prevention control (H70).
[ 26 ] 0h2 External alarm

Phenomena External alarm was inputted (THR).
(when the "Enable external alarm" signal THR has been assigned to any of digital
input terminals)
(1) An alarm function of external Check the operation of external equipment.
equipment was activated.  Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred.
(2) Wrong connection or poor Check if the external alarm signal wiring is correctly connected to the
contact in external alarm signal terminal to which the "Enable external alarm" has been assigned (Any
wiring. of E01 to E05, E98, and E99 should be set to "9.").
 Connect the external alarm signal wire correctly.
(3) Incorrect setting of function Check whether an “external alarm” is assigned to a terminal not used
code data. yet among E01 to E05, E98, E99.
 Correct the assignment.
Check whether the logic of [THR] set up at E01 to E05, E98, E99 agrees
with that (positive/negative) of external signals.
 Ensure the matching of the logic.
[ 27 ] 0h3 Inverter internal overheat

Phenomena Temperature inside the inverter has exceeded the allowable limit.
exceeded the inverter's mode  Lower the temperature around the inverter (e.g., ventilate the panel
limit. where the inverter is mounted).
[Subcode:0]
6-15
[ 28 ] 0h4 Motor protection (PTC thermistor)

Phenomena Temperature of the motor has risen abnormally.
(1) The temperature around the Measure the surrounding temperature.
motor exceeded the motor's  Lower the temperature around the motor.
mode range.
(2) Cooling system for the motor is Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally.
defective.  Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor.
 Reduce the load (e.g. Use the overload early warning (E34) and
reduce the load before the overload protection is activated.). (In
winter, the load tends to increase.)
 Lower the temperature around the motor.
 Increase the motor sound (Carrier frequency) (F26).
(4) The activation level (H27) of the Check the PTC thermistor modes and recalculate the detection voltage.
PTC thermistor for motor  Modify the data of function code H27.
overheat protection was set
inadequately.
(5) The setting of the PTC Check thermistor (operation selection) (E59) (H26) and the changeover
thermistor is not adequate. switches (SW3) (SW4) of terminal [C1].
 Change the settings to E59=0, H26=1, and set SW3 to C1 side and
SW4 to PTC side.
(6) Excessive torque boost Check whether decreasing the torque boost (F09*) does not stall the
specified (F09*) motor.
 If no stall occurs, decrease the F09* data.
(7) The V/f pattern did not match Check if the base frequency (F04*) and the voltage at base frequency
the motor. (F05*) match the rated values on the motor's nameplate.
 Match the function code data with the values on the motor's
nameplate.
(8) Incorrect setting of function Although PTC thermistor is not used, the thermistor (operation
code data. selection) (H26) is in the operation state.
 Set the H26 data to "0" (Disable).
[ 29 ] 0ln Motor overloads 1 to 2

Phenomena Electronic thermal function for motor overload detection of motors 1-2 worked.
0l1 Motor 1 overload
0l2 Motor 2 overload

(1) The electronic thermal Check the motor characteristics.
characteristics do not match  Review the data of function codes (P99*, F10*, F12*).
the motor overload  Use an external thermal relay.
characteristics.
(2) Activation level for the Check the continuous allowable current of the motor.
electronic thermal protection  Reconsider and change the data of function code F11*.
was inadequate.
(3) The specified acceleration/ Recalculate the acceleration/deceleration torque and time needed for the
deceleration time was too load, based on the moment of inertia for the load and the
short. acceleration/deceleration time.
 Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10 through
E15, and H56).
reduce the load before the overload protection is activated.). (In winter,
the load tends to increase.)
(5) Excessive torque boost Check whether decreasing the torque boost (F09*) does not stall the motor.
specified (F09*)  If no stall occurs, decrease the F09* data.
6-16
[ 30 ] 0lu Inverter overload

Phenomena Temperature inside inverter has risen abnormally.
exceeded the inverter's mode  Lower the temperature (e.g., ventilate the panel where the inverter
limit. is mounted).
(2) Excessive torque boost Check whether decreasing the torque boost (F09*) does not stall the
specified (F09*) motor.
(3) The specified acceleration/ Recalculate the acceleration/deceleration torque and time needed for
deceleration time was too short. the load, based on the moment of inertia for the load and the
acceleration/deceleration time.
 Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10 to E15,
and H56).
reduce the load before the overload protection is activated.). (In
winter, the load tends to increase.)
 Decrease the motor sound (Carrier frequency) (F26).
 Enable overload prevention control (H70).
(5) Ventilation paths are blocked. Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter.
 Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance.
Check if the fin is not clogged.
 Clean the fin.
(6) Cooling fan's airflow volume Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan. (See Chapter 3 "3.4.5
decreased due to the service life Reading maintenance information.")
expired or failure.  Replace the cooling fan.
Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally.
 Replace the cooling fan.
(7) The wires to the motor are too Measure the leakage current.
long, causing a large leakage  Insert an output circuit filter (OFL).
current from them.
[ 31 ] 0pl Output phase-failure detection

Phenomena Output phase loss occurred.
(1) Inverter output wires are Measure the inverter output current.
broken.  Replace the output wires.
(2) The motor winding is broken. Measure the inverter output current.
 Replace the motor.
(3) The terminal screws for inverter Check if any screws on the inverter output terminals have become
output were not tight enough. loose.
 Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque.
(4) A single-phase motor has been  The inverter cannot be used. (FRENIC-Ace is for driving 3-phase
connected. induction motors.)
6-17
[ 32 ] 0s Overspeed protection
Phenomena Motor rotated at excessive speed. (When motor speed(F03×1.2))
(1) Incorrect setting of function Check the motor parameter "Number of poles" setting (P01*).
code data.  Specify the P01* data in accordance with the motor to be used.
Check the maximum frequency setting (F03*).
 Specify the F03* data in accordance with the output frequency.
[ 33 ] 0un Overvoltage
Phenomena The DC intermediate circuit voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage.
0u1 Overvoltage occurred during acceleration.
0u2 Overvoltage occurred during deceleration.
0u3 Overvoltage occurred during running at constant speed.
(1) The power supply voltage Measure the input voltage.
exceeded the inverter's mode  Decrease the voltage to within the specified range.
range.
(2) A surge current entered the In the same power line, if a phase-advancing capacitor is turned
input power supply. ON/OFF or a thyristor converter is activated, a surge (momentary large
increase in the voltage or current) may be caused in the input power.
 Install a DC reactor.
(3) The deceleration time was too Recalculate the deceleration torque based on the moment of inertia for
short for the moment of inertia the load and the deceleration time.
for load.  Increase the deceleration time (F08, E11, E13, E15, and H56).
 Enable the anti-regenerative control (H69), or deceleration
characteristics (H71).
 Set torque limit (F40, F41, E16, E17) in effect.
 Set the voltage at base frequency (F05*) to "0" to improve the
braking capability.
 Consider the use of a braking resistor.
(4) The acceleration time was too Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration.
short.  Increase the acceleration time (F07, E10, E12, and E14).
 Select the S-curve pattern (H07).
(5) Braking load is too heavy. Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter.
 Set the voltage at base frequency (F05*) to "0" to improve the
braking capability.
(6) Malfunction caused by noise. Check if the DC intermediate circuit voltage was below the protective
level when the overvoltage alarm occurred.
 Implement noise control measures. For details, refer to Appendix A.
 Enable the retry (H04).
 Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor's coils or other
solenoids (if any) causing noise.
6-18
[ 34 ] pbf Charger circuit fault

Phenomena The magnetic contactor for short-circuiting the charging resistor failed to work.
(1) The control power was not Check that, in normal connection of the main circuit (not a connection
supplied to the magnetic via the DC link bus), the connector (CN R) on the power printed circuit
contactor intended for board (power PCB) is not inserted to NC.
short-circuiting the charging  Insert the connector (CN R) to FAN .
resistor.
Check whether you quickly turned the circuit breaker ON and OFF to
confirm safety after cabling/wiring.
 Wait until the DC intermediate circuit voltage has dropped to a
sufficiently low level and then release the current alarm. After that,
turn ON the power again. (Do not turn the circuit breaker ON and
OFF quickly.)
(Turning ON the circuit breaker supplies power to the control circuit
to the operation level (lighting the LEDs on the keypad) in a short
period. Immediately turning it OFF even retains the control circuit
power for a time, while it shuts down the power to the magnetic
contactor intended for short-circuiting the charging resistor since
the contactor is directly powered from the main power. Under such
conditions, the control circuit can issue a turn-on command to the
magnetic contactor, but the contactor not powered can produce
nothing. This state is regarded as abnormal, causing an alarm.)
[ 35 ] p9 PG wire break (To be responded soon.)

Phenomena The pulse generator (PG) wire has been broken somewhere in the circuit.
(1) The wire between the pulse Check whether the pulse generator (PG) is correctly connected to the
generator (PG) and the option option card or any wire is broken.
card has been broken.  Check whether the PG is connected correctly. Or, tighten up the
related terminal screws.
 Check whether any contact part bites the wire sheath.
 Replace the wire.
 Separate the control circuit wires from the main power wires as far
as possible.
6-19
6.4 If the "Light Alarm" Indication (l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor
If the inverter detects a minor abnormal state, it can continue the current operation without tripping while displaying
the "light alarm" indication (l-al) on the LED monitor. In addition to the indication l-al, the inverter blinks the
KEYPAD CONTROL LED and outputs the "light alarm" signal L-ALM to a digital output terminal to alert the
peripheral equipment to the occurrence of a light alarm. (To use the L-ALM, it is necessary to assign the signal to
any of the digital output terminals by setting any of function codes E20 to E21 and E27 to "98.")
Function codes H81 and H82 specify which alarms should be categorized as "light alarm." Selectable factors
(codes) are the codes of light alarm objects shown in Table 6.4-1.
To display the "light alarm" factor and escape from the light alarm state, follow the instructions below.
 Check method of light alarm factors

1) Press the key to enter Programming mode.
2) Check the light alarm factor in 5_36 (Light alarm factor (latest)) under Menu #5 "Maintenance Information"
in Programming mode. The light alarm factor is displayed in alarm codes. See Table 6.3-1 for code details.
 See Chapter 3 "3.4.5 Reading maintenance information" for the details of screen transition in the
"Maintenance Information." It is possible to display the factors of most recent 3 light alarms in 5_37 (Light
alarm factor (last)) to 5_39 (Light alarm factor (3rd last)).
 Switching the LED monitor from the light alarm to normal display
If it is necessary to return the LED monitor to the normal display state (showing the running status such as
reference frequency) temporarily before removing the light alarm factor because it takes a long time to remove the
light alarm factor, for example, follow the steps below.
1) Press the key to return the LED monitor to the light alarm indication (l-al).
2) Press key in a state of light alarm display (l-al). Keypad display returns from light alarm display
(l-al) to monitor display (including frequency display) in the ordinary running state. KEYPAD CONTROL
LED continues blinking, though.
 Release method of light alarms

1) See function codes (H81, H82) corresponding to light alarm factors (codes) checked in the Maintenance
Information to remove the occurrence factors of light alarms.
2) To return the LED monitor from the l-al display to the normal display state (showing the running status
such as reference frequency), press the key in Running mode.
If the light alarm factor(s) has been successfully removed in step 1) above, the KEYPAD CONTROL LED
stops blinking and the digital output L-ALM also goes OFF. If any light alarm factor persists (e.g., detecting a
DC fan lock), the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking and the L-ALM remains ON.
6-20
Table 6.4-1 Various failure detections (Light alarm objects)

Code Name
cnT Inverter life (Number of startups)
cof PID feedback wire break
dbh Braking resistor overheat
er8 RS-485 communications error

erp (Communications ports 1, 2)
ere (To be responded soon.) Speed inconsistency or excessive speed deviation
ero (To be responded soon.) Excessive positional deviation
ert CAN communications failure
fal DC fan locked
lif Lifetime alarm
0h Cooling fin overheat early warning
0h1 Cooling fin overheat
0h2 External alarm
0h3 Inverter internal overheat
0l Overload early warning
0l1 to 0l2 Motors 1to2 overload
pid PID alarm output
pTc PTC thermistor activated
ref Reference command loss detected
rTe Machine life (Cumulative motor running hours)
uTl Low torque detection
6-21
6.5 When Codes Other Than Alarm Codes and Light Alarm Indication (l-al) are Displayed
6.5 When Codes Other Than Alarm Codes and Light Alarm Indication (l-al)
are Displayed
This section describes the troubleshooting procedure based on function codes dedicated to motor 1. When motor 2
is used, it is necessary to read respective corresponding function codes by conversion. The function codes that
need to be read by conversion are marked with "*."
 For the function codes to be read by conversion, see Chapter 5 "FUNCTION CODE."
6.5.1 Abnormal motor operation

[1] The motor does not rotate
(1) No power supplied to the Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance.
inverter.  Switch on a molded-case circuit breaker, an earth-leakage circuit
breaker (with overcurrent protective function) or a magnetic contactor.
 Check for voltage drop, phase loss, poor connections, or poor
contacts, and fix them if necessary.
 If only the auxiliary control power input is supplied, also supply the
main power to the inverter.
(2) No forward/reverse operation Check the input status of the forward/reverse command with Menu "I/O
command was inputted, or Checking" using the keypad.
both the commands were  Input a run command.
inputted simultaneously  Set either the forward or reverse operation command to OFF.
(external signal operation).
 Correct the run command source. (Set F02 data to "1.")
 Correct the assignment error of terminals [FWD], [REV]. (E98, E99)
 Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals [FWD]
and [REV] correctly.
 Make sure that the sink/source slide switch (SW1) on the control
printed circuit board (control PCB) is properly configured.
(3) No rotational direction is Check the input status of the forward/reverse rotation direction command
instructed. with Menu "I/O Checking" using the keypad.
(Keypad operation)  Input the rotation direction (F02 = 0), or select the keypad operation
with which the rotation direction is fixed (F02 = 2 or 3).
(4) The inverter could not accept Check which operation mode the inverter is in, using the keypad.
any run commands from the  Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run command.
keypad since it was in
Programming mode.
(5) A run command with higher Based on the run command block diagram (See Chapter 8 BLOCK
priority than the one DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC.), check a higher priority run
attempted was active, and command by function code data check and I/O checking from Menu using
the run command was the keypad.
stopped.  Correct any incorrect function code data settings such as link function
(Mode selection) (H30) and bus function (Mode selection) (y98) or
cancel the higher priority run command.
(6) No analog frequency Check that a reference frequency has been entered correctly, using Menu
command input. "I/O Checking" on the keypad.
 Connect external circuit wirings of terminals [13], [12], [11], [C1]
correctly.
6-22

(7) The reference frequency was Check that a reference frequency has been entered correctly, using Menu
below the starting or stop "I/O Checking" on the keypad.
frequency.  Set the reference frequency at the same or higher than that of the
starting and stop frequencies (F23* and F25).
 Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies (F23* and F25), and if
necessary, change them to the lower values.
 Inspect the external frequency command potentiometers, signal
converters, switches, and relay contacts. Replace any ones that are
faulty.
 Connect external circuit wirings of terminals [13], [12], [11], [C1]
correctly.
(8) A frequency command with Based on the frequency setting block diagram (See Chapter 8.), check the
higher priority than the one data by function code data check and I/O checking from Menu using the
attempted was active. keypad.
 Correct any incorrect function code data (e.g. cancel the higher priority
run command).
(9) The upper and lower Check the data of function codes F15 (Frequency limiter (High)) and F16
frequencies for the frequency (Frequency limiter (Low)).
limiters were set incorrectly.  Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones.
(10) The coast-to-stop command Check the data of the function codes (E01E05, E98, E99), and check an
was effective. input state by I/O checking.
 Release the coast-to-stop command setting.
(11) Broken wires, incorrect Check the wiring (Measure the output current).
connection or poor contact  Repair the wires to the motor, or replace them.
with the motor.
 Reduce the load (In winter, the load tends to increase.)
(13) Torque generated by the Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost (F09*)
motor was insufficient. is increased.
 Increase the value of torque boost (F09*).
Check the data of function codes (F04*, F05*, H50, H51, H52, H53, H65,
and H66).
 Change the V/f pattern to match the motor's characteristics.
Check that the motor switching signal (selecting motor 1 - 2) is correct and
the data of function codes matches each motor.
 Correct the motor switching signal.
 Modify the function code data to match the connected motor.
Check whether the reference frequency is below the slip-compensated
frequency of the motor.
Change the reference frequency so that it becomes higher than the
slip-compensated frequency of the motor.
(14) Wrong connection or poor Check the wiring. DC reactor is a standard accessory for inverters of ND
contact of DC reactor (DCR) modes: FRN0139E2S-4 or above and HD, HHD modes:
FRN0168E2S-4 or above, HHD modes FRN203E2S-4 or above
respectively. These inverters cannot run without a DCR.
 Connect the DCR correctly. Repair or replace DCR wires.
(15) No speed command is set Check a speed set value of tough panel.
up. (Keypad operation)  Press key to change the speed set value.
(16) No enable inputs [EN1], Check the EN terminal input state by I/O checking.
[EN2] are entered.  Connect the terminals [EN1], [EN2].
(See Chapter 2 “2.2.6 [3] Description of terminal functions” [EN1],
[EN2].)
6-23
[2] The motor rotates, but the speed does not increase
(1) The maximum frequency Check the data of function code F03* (Maximum frequency).
currently specified was too  Correct the F03* data.
low.
(2) The data of frequency limiter Check the data of function code F15 (Frequency limiter (High)).
(High) currently specified was  Correct the F15 data.
too low.
(3) Speed setting is not Check that the reference frequency has been entered correctly, using Menu
changing. (Analog setting) "I/O Checking" on the keypad.
 Increase the reference frequency.
 Inspect the external frequency command potentiometers, signal
converters, switches, and relay contacts. Replace any ones that are faulty.
 Connect external circuit wirings of terminals [13], [12], [11], [C1] correctly.
(4) A frequency command (e.g., Based on the frequency setting block diagram (See Chapter 8 BLOCK
multi-frequency or via DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC.), check the inputted frequency
communications) with higher command by function code data check and I/O checking from Menu using the
priority than the one keypad.
attempted was active and its  Correct any incorrect data of function codes (e.g. cancel the higher priority
reference frequency was too frequency command).
low.
(5) The acceleration time was Check the data of acceleration times (F07, E10, E12, E14, H54).
too long or too short.  Change the acceleration time to match the load.
 Reduce the load.
(7) Function code settings do not When automatic torque boost and automatic energy-saving operations are
agree with the motor performed, confirm that P02*, P03*, P06*, P07*, P08* agree with motor
characteristics. constant.
 Perform auto-tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used.
(8) The output frequency does Make sure that F43 (Current limiter (Mode selection)) is set to "2" and check
not increase due to the the data of F44 (Current limiter (Level)).
current limiter operation.  Change the F44 data correctly. Or, set the F43 data to "0" (Disable) if the
current limiter operation is not needed.
Decrease the value of torque boost (F09*), then run the motor again and check
if the speed increases.
Check the data of function codes (F04*, F05*, H50, H51, H52, H53, H65, and
H66) to ensure that the V/f pattern setting is right.
 Match the V/f pattern setting with the motor ratings.
(9) The output frequency does Check whether the data of torque control levels (F40, F41, E16, E17) are set to
not increase due to the appropriate values. Also, check whether torque limit 2/1 switching signal
torque limiter operation. [TL2/TL1] is correct.
 Correct the data of F40, F41, E16 and E17 or reset them to the factory
defaults.
 Set the TL2/TL1 correctly.
(10) Bias and gain incorrectly Check the data of the function codes (F18, C50, C32, C34, C37, C39, C42,
specified. C44, C55-C72).
 Readjust the bias and gain to appropriate values.
(11) External wirings of terminals Check that the reference frequency has been entered correctly, using Menu
[X1]-[X5] are not connected "I/O Checking" on the keypad.
correctly. Or settings are not  Connect the external circuit wirings of terminals [X1]-[X5] correctly.
correct.  Set up the data of E01-E05 correctly.
 Set up the data of C05-C19 correctly. (Setting of multi-step speed)
(12) Speed set value is not Check whether it changes by changing the speed command value of keypad.
changing. (Keypad  Press / keys to change the speed command value.
operation)
6-24
[3] The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command

(1) Wiring to the motor is Check the wiring to the motor.
incorrect.  Connect terminals U, V, and W of the inverter to the U, V, and W
terminals of the motor, respectively.
(2) Incorrect connection and Check the data of function codes (E98 and E99) and the connection.
settings for run commands  Correct the data of the function codes and the connection.
and rotation direction
commands (FWD and REV).
(3) A run command (with fixed Check the data of function code F02 (Run command).
rotational direction) from the  Change the data of function code F02 to "2: / keys on keypad
keypad is active, but the (forward)" or "3: / keys on keypad (reverse)."
rotational direction setting is
incorrect.
(4) The rotation direction mode The rotation direction of IEC-compliant motors is opposite to that of
of the motor is opposite to incompliant motors.
that of the inverter.  Switch the FWD/REV signal setting.
(5) The function code data Check the function code data. (See "Chapter 8 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR
related to the speed CONTROL LOGIC.")
command are incorrect.
 Set correct data.
[4] Speed fluctuation or current oscillation (e.g., hunting) occurs during running at
constant speed
(1) Analog speed setting is Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu "I/O Checking" using
fluctuating. the keypad. (See Chapter 3 "3.4.4 Checking I/O signal status.")
 Increase the filter constants (C33, C38, and C43) for the frequency
command.
(2) An external frequency Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources.
command  Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible.
potentiometer is used  Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals.
for frequency setting.
Check whether the external frequency command potentiometer is malfunctioning
due to noise from the inverter.
 Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer or insert a
ferrite core on the signal wire. (See Chapter 2 Fig. 2.2-9 Example of Noise
Countermeasure.)
(3) Frequency switching or Check whether the relay signal for switching the frequency command is
multi-frequency chattering.
command was  If the relay contact is defective, replace the relay.
enabled.
(4) The wiring length Check whether auto-torque boost, auto-energy saving operation, or dynamic
between the inverter torque vector control is enabled.
and the motor is too  Perform auto-tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used.
long.  Disable the automatic control systems by setting F37* to "1" (Constant
torque load) and F42* to "0" (V/f control), then check that the motor vibration
stops.
 Make the output wires as short as possible.
(5) The machinery is Once disable all the automatic control systems such as auto torque boost, auto energy
hunting due to vibration saving operation, overload prevention control, current limiter, torque limiter,
caused by low rigidity anti-regenerative control, auto search for idling motor speed, slip compensation,
of the load. Or the dynamic torque vector control, droop control, overload stop function, speed control,
current is irregularly online tuning, notch filter, and observer, and then check that the motor vibration comes
oscillating due to to a stop.
special motor  Disable the functions causing the vibration.
parameters.
 Readjust the output current fluctuation damping gain (H80*).
Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the level of F26
(Motor sound (Carrier frequency)) or set F27 (Motor sound (Tone)) to "0."
 Decrease the carrier frequency (F26) or set the tone to "0" (F27 = 0).
6-25
[5] Unpleasant noises are emitted from motor or noises fluctuate

(1) The specified carrier Check the data of motor operation noise (carrier frequency) (F26) and motor
frequency is too low. operation noise (tone) (F27).
 Increase the carrier frequency (F26).
 Change the setting of F27 to appropriate value.
(2) Ambient temperature of Measure the temperature inside the panel where the inverter is mounted.
inverter is high. (In the  If it is over 40°C, lower it by improving the ventilation.
selection of carrier
frequency automatic  Lower the temperature of inverter by reducing a load. (In the case of
reduction function funs/pumps, lower frequency limiter (upper limit) (F15).)
(H98)) NB) The release of H98 causes alarms 0h1, 0h3, 0lu in some cases.
(3) Resonance with the Check the machinery mounting accuracy or check whether there is resonance
load. with the mounting base.
 Sort out a resonance cause by running the motor independently, and
improve the characteristics at the cause side.
 Avoid continuous running at the frequency range where the resonance
occurs by regulating the jump speed (C01-C04)
[6] Motor is not accelerated or decelerated according to set-up acceleration or

deceleration time
(1) The inverter runs the Check the data of function code H07 (Acceleration/deceleration pattern).
motor with S-curve or  Set linear acceleration/deceleration. (H07=0)
curvilinear pattern.
 Shorten the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10 through E15).
(2) The current limiting Make sure that F43 (Current limiter (Mode selection)) is set to 2, then check that
operation prevented the the setting of F44 (Current limiter (Level)) is reasonable.
output frequency from  Readjust the setting of F44 to appropriate value, or disable the function of
increasing (during current limiter with F43.
acceleration).
 Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10 through E15).
(3) The anti-regenerative Check the data of function code H69 (Anti-regenerative control (Mode
control is enabled selection)).
(during deceleration).  Increase the deceleration time (F08, E11, E13, and E15).
 Reduce the load (For fans or pumps, decrease the frequency limiter (upper
limit) (F15).) (In winter, the load tends to increase.)
(5) Torque generated by the Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost (F09*) is
motor was insufficient. increased.
 Increase the value of the torque boost (F09*).
(6) An external frequency Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources.
command potentiometer  Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible.
is used for frequency
setting.  Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals.
 Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer or insert a
ferrite core on the signal wire. (See Chapter 2 “2.2.6 [3] Description of
terminal functions (control circuit terminal) [12], [C1].”)
(7) The output frequency is Check whether the data of torque limit levels (F40, F41, E16, E17) are set to
limited by the torque appropriate values. Also, check whether torque limit 2/1 switching signal
limiter. [TL2/TL1] is correct.
 Correct the data of F40, F41, E16 and E17 or reset them to the factory
defaults.
Set the TL2/TL1 correctly.
Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10 through E15).
(8) The specified Check the terminal commands RT1 and RT2 for acceleration/ deceleration
acceleration or times.
deceleration time was  Correct the RT1 and RT2 settings.
incorrect.
6-26
[7] The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power
failure
(1) The data of function code F14 is Check if an undervoltage trip (lu) occurs.
either "0," "1," or "2."  Change the data of function code F14 (Restart mode after
momentary power failure (Mode selection)) to "3," "4," or "5."
(2) The run command remains OFF Check the input signal with Menu "I/O Checking" using the keypad. (See
even after the power has been Chapter 3 "3.4.4 Checking I/O signal status.")
restored.  Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit. If
necessary, consider the use of a relay that can keep the run
command ON.
In a 3-wire operation, momentary power failure duration is long so that
control circuit power source of inverter is shut off once. Also, self-hold
selection signal [HOLD] is switched OFF once.
 Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be
issued again within 2 seconds after the power has been restored.
[8] Motor generates heat abnormally
(1) Excessive torque boost Check whether decreasing the torque boost (F09*) decreases the output
specified. current but does not stall the motor.
 If no stall occurs, decrease the torque boost (F09*).
(2) Continuous running in Check the running speed of the inverter.
extremely slow speed.  Change the speed setting or replace the motor with a motor
exclusively designed for inverters.
 Reduce the load. (In the case of funs/pumps, lower frequency limiter
(upper limit) (F15).) (In winter, the load tends to increase.)
[9] The motor does not run as expected

(1) Incorrect setting of function Check that function codes are correctly configured and no unnecessary
code data. configuration has been done.
 Configure all the function codes correctly.
Make a note of function code data currently configured and then
initialize all function code data using H03.
 After the above process, reconfigure function codes one by one,
checking the running status of the motor.
6-27
[ 10 ] Motor stalls during acceleration

(1) The acceleration time was too Check the data of acceleration times (F07, E10, E12, E14, H57, H58).
short.  Extend the acceleration times.
(2) Inertial moment of load is large. Measure the inverter output current.
 Reduce the moment of inertia of the load.
(3) Voltage drop of wiring is large. Check the terminal voltage of motor.
 Increase the diameter or shorten the distance of wirings between
the inverter and motor.
(4) Torque of load is large. Measure the inverter output current.
 Reduce the torque of load.
(5) Torque generated by the motor Check whether the inverter is started when torque boosts (F09, F37,
was insufficient. H51) are increased.
 Increase F09, F37, H51.
6-28
6.5.2 Problems with inverter settings

[1] Nothing appears on the LED monitor
(1) No power (neither main power Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance.
nor auxiliary control power) is  Switch on a molded-case circuit breaker, an earth-leakage circuit
supplied to the inverter. breaker (with overcurrent protective function) or a magnetic
contactor.
 Check for voltage drop, phase loss, poor connections, or poor
contacts and fix them if necessary.
(2) The power for the control PCB Check if the shorting bar has been removed between terminals P1 and
did not reach a sufficiently high P(+) or if there is a poor contact between the shorting bar and those
level. terminals.
 Mount a shorting bar or a DC reactor between terminals P1 and
P(+). For poor contact, tighten up the screws.
(3) The keypad was not properly Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter.
connected to the inverter.  Remove the keypad, put it back, and see whether the problem
recurs.
 Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the
problem recurs.
When running the inverter remotely, ensure that the extension cable is
securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter.
 Disconnect the cable, reconnect it, and see whether the problem
recurs.
 Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the
problem recurs.
[2] The desired menu is not displayed

(1) The menu display mode is not Check the data of function code E52 (Keypad (Menu display mode)).
selected appropriately.  Change the E52 data so that the desired menu appears.
[3] Display of under bars (_ _ _ _)

Phenomena Although key, run forward command [FWD], or key, run reverse command
[REV], was pressed, the motor did not rotate and under bars were displayed.
(1) The voltage of the DC Select 5.01 from Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in the program
intermediate circuit was low. mode of keypad to check the DC intermediate circuit voltage. (3-phase
200V: 200VDC or less, 3-phase 400V: 400VDC or less)
 Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input modes.
(2) The main power is not ON, Check whether the main power is turned ON.
while the auxiliary input power  Turn on the main power.
to the control circuit is supplied. Check if the shorting bar has been removed between terminals P1 and
P(+) or if there is a poor contact between the shorting bar and those
terminals.
 Mount a shorting bar or a DC reactor between terminals P1 and
P(+). For poor contact, tighten up the screws.
(3) AC power source is not Check the connection to the main power and check if the H72 data is set
connected due to the to "1" (factory default).
connection of DC power supply,  Review the data of H72.
but the detection of main power
interruption is activated
(H72=1).
(4) Breaks in wiring to the main Measure the input voltage.
power input terminals.  Repair or replace the main circuit power input wires or input devices
(MCCB, MC, etc.).
6-29
[4] Display of center bars (----)

Phenomena A center bar (----) appeared on the LED monitor.
(1) When PID control had been disabled Make sure that when you wish to view other monitor items, E43
(J01 = 0), you changed E43 (LED is not set to "10: PID command" or "12: PID feedback amount."
Monitor (Item selection)) to 10 or 12.
 Set E43 to a value other than "10" or "12."
With the PID being enabled (J01 = 1, 2,
Make sure that when you wish to view a PID command or a PID
or 3), you disabled PID control (J01 = 0)
feedback amount, J01 (PID control) is not set to "0: Disable."
when the LED monitor had been set to
display the PID command or PID  Set J01 to "1: Enable (Process control normal operation),"
feedback amount by pressing the "2: Enable (Process control inverse operation)," or "3:
key. Enable (Dancer control)."
(2) The keypad was poorly connected. Prior check: Even when key is pressed, the display is not
switched.
Check continuity of the extension cable used in remote
operation.
 Replace the cable.
[5] c ] Display of parenthesis

Phenomena c ] was displayed during speed monitoring by keypad.
(1) The display data overflows the LED Check whether the product of the output frequency and the
monitor. display coefficient (E50) exceeds 99,999.
 Correct the E50 data.
[6] Data of function codes cannot be changed

(1) An attempt was made to change Check if the inverter is running with Menu "Drive Monitoring"
function code data that cannot be using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the
changed when the inverter is running. function codes can be changed when the motor is running by
referring to the function code tables.
 Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes.
(2) The data of the function codes is Check the data of function code F00 (Data Protection).
protected.  Change the data of F00 from a data protection state (F00=1
or 3) to a data changeable state (F00=0 or 2).
(3) The WE-KP terminal command ("Enable Check the data of the function codes (E01-E05, E98, E99), and
data change with keypad") is not check an input state by I/O checking from Menu using keypad.
entered, though it has been assigned to  Input a WE-KP command through a digital input terminal.
a digital input terminal.
(4) The key was not pressed. Check whether key was pressed after changing the data of
the function codes.
 Press key after changing the data.
Check that saue is displayed on the LED monitor.
(5) The data of the function codes F02, Either one of the FWD and REV terminal commands is turned
E01-E05, E98, E99 are not changeable. ON.
 Turn OFF both FWD and REV.
(6) The function code(s) to be changed If Menu #0 "Quick Setup" (*fn:) is selected, only the
does not appear. particular function codes appear.
 Call the menu of !f_ to !y _ by key from the quick
setup (*fn:) state on the Menu to display an intended
function code and to change the codes. (See Chapter 3
Section 3.4 Table 3.4-1 “Menus Available in Programming
Mode” for the details.)
6-30
[7] Function code data are not changeable (change from link functions)
(1) An attempt was made to Check if the inverter is running with Menu "Drive Monitoring" using the
change function code data that keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be
cannot be changed when the changed when the motor is running by referring to the function code
inverter is running. tables.
 Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes.
(2) The setting of the function code Check whether the setting of the function code y33 (incorporated CAN)
y33 (incorporated CAN) is is correct.
wrong.  Set y33 correctly.
(3) The data of the function code Either one of the FWD and REV terminal commands is turned ON.
F02 is not changeable.  Turn OFF both FWD and REV.
6-31
Chapter 7
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
This chapter describes the maintenance and inspection items of the inverter.
Contents

7.1 Inspection Interval ................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Daily Inspection ..................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3 Periodic Inspection ................................................................................................................ 7-3
[ 1 ] Periodic inspection 1--Before the inverter is powered ON or after it stops running....... 7-3
[ 2 ] Periodic inspection 2--When the inverter is ON or it is running ..................................... 7-4
7.4 List of Periodic Replacement Parts ....................................................................................... 7-5
7.4.1 Judgment on service life ................................................................................................ 7-6
[ 1 ] Measurement of discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor .................................... 7-6
[ 2 ] ON-time counting of DC link bus capacitor .................................................................... 7-7
7.5 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit.............................................................. 7-9
7.6 Insulation Test ..................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.7 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee .............................................................................. 7-11
7.7.1 When making an inquiry .............................................................................................. 7-11
7.7.2 Product warranty .......................................................................................................... 7-11
[ 1 ] Free of charge warranty period and warranty range ................................................... 7-11
[ 2 ] Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity, etc............................................................ 7-12
[ 3 ] Repair period after production stop, spare parts supply period (holding period) ......... 7-12
[ 4 ] Transfer rights .............................................................................................................. 7-12
[ 5 ] Service contents .......................................................................................................... 7-12
[ 6 ] Applicable scope of service ......................................................................................... 7-12
7.1 Inspection Interval

Perform daily and periodic inspections to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation of the inverter for a long time.
When performing inspections, follow the instructions given in this chapter.
• Before proceeding to the maintenance/inspection jobs, turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes
for inverters FRN0072E2S-4 or below, or at least ten minutes for inverters FRN0085E2S-4 or
above. Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a
multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P(+) and N(-) has
dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or below).
Electric shock may occur.
• Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons.
• Take off the watch, rings and other metallic objects before starting work.
• Use insulated tools.
• Never modify the inverter.
Electric shock or injuries could occur.
Chap 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.1 Inspection Interval
Table 7.1-1 lists the inspection intervals and check items, as a guide.
Table 7.1-1 List of Inspections
Inspection type Inspection interval Check items
Daily inspection Every day See Section 7.2.
Periodic inspection Every year See Section 7.3.
Decennial inspection *1 Every 10 years *2 Replacement of cooling fans *3
Replacement of DC link bus capacitors and close
checks
*1 The decennial inspection (except replacement of cooling fans) should be performed only by the persons who
have finished the Fuji Electric training course. Contact the sales agent where you purchased the product or your
nearest Fuji Electric representative.
*2 Every 7 years for ND-mode inverters.
*3 For the standard replacement interval of cooling fans, refer to Section 7.4 "List of Periodic Replacement Parts."
The replacement intervals are based on the inverter's service life estimated at an ambient temperature of
40°C at 100% (HHD-mode inverters) or 80% (ND-/HD-/HND-mode inverters) of full load. In environments
with an ambient temperature above 40°C or a large amount of dust or dirt, the replacement intervals may
be shorter.
Standard replacement intervals mentioned above are only a guide for replacement, not a guaranteed
service life. Refer to Section 7.4 "List of Periodic Replacement Parts."
7-1
7.2 Daily Inspection
7.2 Daily Inspection

Visually inspect the inverter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when the inverter is
running or the power is ON.
Table 7.2-1 lists daily inspection items.
Table 7.2-1 Daily Inspection List

Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria
Environment 1) Check the surrounding temperature, 1) Check visually or 1) The usage
humidity, vibration and atmosphere measure using environment given in
(dust, gas, oil mist, or water drops). apparatus. Chapter 1, Section
1.3.1 must be
2) Check that tools or other foreign
satisfied.
materials or dangerous objects are 2) Visual inspection
not left around the equipment. 2) No foreign or
dangerous objects
are left.
External 1) Check that the bolts securing the 1) Retighten before 1) No looseness. If
appearance wires to the main circuit terminals turning the power ON. loose, retighten the
and others and control circuit terminals are not screws.
loose before turning the power ON.
2) Visual inspection
2) Check for traces of overheat,
2), 3)
discoloration and other defects.
No abnormalities
3) Check for abnormal noise, odor, or 3) Auditory, visual, and
excessive vibration. olfactory inspection
Cooling fans Check for abnormal noise or excessive Auditory and visual No abnormalities
vibration when the cooling fans are in inspections
operation.
Keypad Check for alarm indication. Visual inspection If any alarm is
displayed, refer to
Chapter 6.
Performance Check that the inverter provides the Check the monitor items No abnormalities in the
expected performance (as defined in shown on the keypad. output speed, current
the standard specifications). and voltage and other
running data.
7-2
7.3 Periodic Inspection

[ 1 ] Periodic inspection 1--Before the inverter is powered ON or after it stops running
Perform periodic inspections according to the items listed in Table 7.3-1. Before performing periodic inspection 1,
shut down the power and then remove the front cover.
Even if the power has been shut down, it takes the time for the DC link bus capacitor to discharge. After the charging
lamp is turned OFF, therefore, make sure that the DC link bus voltage has dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or
below) using a multimeter or a similar instrument.
Table 7.3-1 Periodic Inspection List 1
Structure such as Check for:
frame and cover 1) Loose bolts (at clamp sections). 1) Retighten. 1), 2), 3), 4) No
2) Deformation and breakage abnormalities
2), 3), 4) Visual inspection
3) Discoloration caused by overheat
4) Contamination and accumulation of (If any section is stained,
dust or dirt clean it with a soft cloth.)
Common 1) Check that bolts and screws are tight 1) Retighten. 1), 2), 3)
and not missing. No abnormalities
2) Check the devices and insulators for 2), 3) (If any section is stained,
deformation, cracks, breakage and Visual inspection clean it with a soft cloth.)

discoloration caused by overheat or
deterioration.
3) Check for contamination or
accumulation of dust or dirt.
Conductors 1) Check conductors for discoloration 1), 2) 1), 2)
and wires and distortion caused by overheat. Visual inspection No abnormalities
2) Check the sheath of the wires for
cracks and discoloration.
Main circuit
Terminal Check that the terminal blocks are not Visual inspection No abnormalities
blocks damaged.
DC link bus 1) Check for electrolyte leakage, 1), 2) 1), 2)

capacitor discoloration, cracks and swelling of Visual inspection No abnormalities
the casing.
2) Check that the safety valve does not
protrude remarkably.
Braking 1) Check for abnormal odor or cracks in 1) Olfactory and visual 1) No abnormalities
resistor insulators caused by overheat. inspection
2) Check for wire breakage. 2) Check the wires visually, or 2) Within ±10% of the
disconnect either one of the resistance of the
wires and measure the braking resistor
conductivity with a
multimeter.
Printed 1) Check for loose screws and 1) Retighten. 1), 2), 3), 4)
circuit board connectors. 2) Olfactory and visual No abnormalities
Control circuit
2) Check for odor and discoloration. inspection

3) Check for cracks, breakage, 3), 4)
deformation and remarkable rust. Visual inspection
4) Check the capacitors for electrolyte * Judgment on service life using
leaks and deformation. "Menu #5 Maintenance
Information" in Section 3.4.5.
Cooling fan 1) Check for engagement or abnormal 1) Turn by hand. (Be sure to turn 1) Smooth rotation
vibration. the power OFF beforehand.)
2) Check for loose bolts. 2) Retighten.
3) Check for discoloration caused by 3) Visual inspection 2), 3)
Cooling system
overheat. * Judgment on service life using No abnormalities

"Menu #5 Maintenance
Information" in Section 3.4.5.
Ventilation Check the heat sink, intake and exhaust Visual inspection No clogging or
path ports for clogging and foreign materials. accumulation of dust, dirt or
foreign materials.
Clean it, if any, with a
vacuum cleaner.
7-3
[ 2 ] Periodic inspection 2--When the inverter is ON or it is running

Visually inspect the inverter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when the inverter is
ON or it is running.
Perform periodic inspections according to the items listed in Table 7.3-2
Table 7.3-2 Periodic Inspection List 2

Input voltage Check that the input voltages of the Measure the input voltages The standard
main and control circuits are correct. using a multimeter or the specifications must be
like. satisfied.
Structure such as Check for abnormal noise or excessive Visual and auditory No abnormalities
chassis and vibration when the inverter is running. inspections
covers
Transformer Check for abnormal roaring noise or Auditory, visual, and No abnormalities
s and odor when the inverter is running. olfactory inspections
reactors
Magnetic Check for chatters when the inverter is Auditory inspection No abnormalities
Main circuit
contactors running.
and relays
DC link bus Measure the capacitance if necessary. Judgment on service life Capacitance 
capacitor using "Menu #5 Initial value x 0.85
Maintenance Information
(%che )" in Chapter 3,
Section 3.4.5.
Cooling fans Check for abnormal noise or excessive Visual and auditory No abnormalities
vibration when the inverter is running. inspections
Additional notes
(1) The inspection interval (every year) of check items given in Table 7.3-1 and Table 7.3-2 is merely a guide. Make
the interval shorter depending on the usage environment.
(2) Store and organize the inspection results to utilize them as a guide for operation and maintenance of the
equipment and service life estimation.
(3) At the time of an inspection, check the cumulative run times on the keypad to utilize them as a guide for
replacement of parts. (Refer to Section 7.4.1 "Judgment on service life.")
(4) The inverter has cooling fans inside to ventilate itself for discharging the heat generated by the power converter
section. This will accumulate dust or dirt on the heat sink depending on the ambient environment.
In a dusty environment, the heat sink requires cleaning in a shorter interval than that specified in periodic
inspection. Neglecting cleaning of the heat sink can rise its temperature, activating protective circuits to lead to
an abrupt shutdown or causing the temperature rise of the surrounding electronic devices to adversely affect
their service life.
7-4
7.4 List of Periodic Replacement Parts

Each part of the inverter has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating
conditions. It is recommended that the following parts be replaced at the specified intervals.
When the replacement is necessary, consult your Fuji Electric representative.
Table 7.4-1 Replacement Parts

Standard replacement intervals
Part name
(See Note below.)
DC link bus capacitor 10 years (7 years in the ND mode)
Electrolytic capacitors on printed circuit boards 10 years (7 years in the ND mode)
Cooling fans 10 years (7 years in the ND mode)
Fuses 10 years (7 years in the ND mode)
Note These replacement intervals are based on the inverter's service life estimated at a surrounding
temperature of 40°C at 100% (HHD-mode inverters) or 80% (ND-/HD-/HND-mode inverters) of full
load. In environments with an ambient temperature above 40°C or a large amount of dust or dirt, the
replacement intervals may be shorter.

Notes for periodic replacement of parts
(1) The replacement intervals listed above are a guide for almost preventing parts from failure if those parts are
replaced with new ones at the intervals. They do not guarantee the completely fault-free operation.
(2) The table above does not apply to unused spare parts being kept in storage.
It applies only when they are stored under the temporary and long-term storage conditions given in Chapter 1,
Section 1.3.2 "Storage environment" and energized approximately once a year.
(3) Cooling fans can be replaced by users. As for other parts, only the persons who have finished the Fuji Electric
training course can replace them. For the purchase of spare cooling fans and the request for replacement of
other parts, contact the sales agent where you purchased the product or your nearest Fuji Electric
representative.
7-5
7.4.1 Judgment on service life

The inverter has the life prediction function for some parts which measures the discharging time or counts the
voltage applied time, etc. The function allows you to monitor the current lifetime state on the LED monitor and judge
whether those parts are approaching the end of their service life.
The life prediction function can also issue early warning signals if the life time alarm command LIFE is assigned to
any of the digital output terminals. (Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.5 "Reading maintenance information.")
Table 7.4-2 lists the parts whose service life can be predicted and details the life prediction function. The predicted
values should be used only as a guide since the actual service life is influenced by the ambient temperature and
other usage environments.
Table 7.4-2 Life Prediction
Object of life "5: MAINTENANCE"
Prediction function End-of-life criteria Prediction timing
prediction on the LED monitor
DC link bus Measurement of discharging 85% or lower of the initial At periodic 5_05
capacitor time capacitance at shipment inspection (Capacity)
Measures the discharging time (H98: Bit 3 = 0)
of the DC link bus capacitor
when the main power is shut 85% or lower of the During ordinary 5_05
down and calculates the reference capacitance operation (Capacity)
capacitance. under ordinary operating
(H98: Bit 3 = 1)
conditions at the user site
ON-time counting Exceeding 87,600 hours During ordinary 5_26
operation
Counts the time elapsed when (10 years) (Elapsed time)
the voltage is applied to the DC
link bus capacitor, while 5_27
correcting it according to the (Time remaining
capacitance measured above. before the end of
life)
Electrolytic Counts the time elapsed when Exceeding 87,600 hours During ordinary 5_06
capacitors the voltage is applied to the (10 years) operation (Cumulative run
on printed capacitors, while correcting it time)
circuit according to the surrounding
boards temperature.
Cooling fans Counts the run time of the Exceeding 87,600 hours During ordinary 5_06
cooling fans. (10 years) operation (Cumulative run
time)
The service life of the DC link bus capacitor can be judged by the "measurement of discharging time" or "ON-time
counting."
[ 1 ] Measurement of discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor

- The discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor depends largely on the inverter's internal load conditions, e.g.
options attached or ON/OFF of digital I/O signals. If actual load conditions are so different from the ones at which
the initial/reference capacitance is measured that the measurement result falls out of the accuracy level required,
then the inverter does not perform measuring.
When the inverter is connected with a converter or with another inverter via DC common connection, it performs
no measurement.
- The capacitance measuring conditions at shipment are drastically restricted, e.g., all input terminals being OFF in
order to stabilize the load and measure the capacitance accurately. Those conditions are, therefore, different from
the actual operating conditions in almost all cases. If the actual operating conditions are the same as those at
shipment, shutting down the inverter power automatically measures the discharging time; however, if they are
different, no automatic measurement is performed. To perform it, put those conditions back to the factory default
ones and shut down the inverter. Refer to the measuring procedure given below.
- To measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is
turned OFF, it is necessary to set up the load conditions for ordinary operation and measure the reference
capacitance (initial setting) when the inverter is introduced. For the reference capacitance setup procedure, see
(2) on page 7-8. Performing the setup procedure automatically detects and saves the measuring conditions of the
DC link bus capacitor.
Setting bit 3 of H98 data at "0" restores the inverter to the measurement in comparison with the initial capacitance
measured at shipment.
7-6
- In a machine system where the inverter main power is rarely shut down, the inverter does not measure the
discharging time. For such an inverter, the ON-time counting is provided. The ON-time counting result can be
represented as "elapsed time"(5_26 ) and "time remaining before the end of life" (5_27 ) as shown in the "DC
link bus capacitor" section in Table 7.4-2.
When the inverter uses an auxiliary control power input, the load conditions widely differ so that the
discharging time cannot be accurately measured. In this case, measuring of the discharging time can be
disabled with the function code H98 (Bit 4 = 0) for preventing unintended measuring.
[ 2 ] ON-time counting of DC link bus capacitor

(1) Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment
The measuring procedure given below measures the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial
one at shipment when the power is turned OFF. The measuring result can be displayed on the keypad as a ratio (%)
to the initial capacitance.
------------------------------------------------- Capacitance measuring procedure ---------------------------------------------------

1) To ensure validity in the comparative measurement, put the condition of the inverter back to the state at factory

shipment.
 Remove the option card (if already in use) from the inverter.
 In case another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P(+) and N(-) terminals of the main circuit,
disconnect the wires. (You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor (optional), if any.)
 Disconnect power wires for the auxiliary input to the control circuit (R0, T0).
 Mount the keypad.
 Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals [FWD], [REV], and [X1] through [X5] of the control circuit.
 If an external speed command potentiometer is connected to terminal [13], disconnect it.
 If an external apparatus is attached to terminal [PLC], disconnect it.
 Ensure that transistor outputs [Y1] and [Y2] and Relay output terminals [30A/B/C] will not be turned ON.
 Disable the RS-485 communications link and CANopen communications link.
If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals, they are considered ON
when the inverter is not running. Specify positive logic for them.
2) Turn ON the main circuit power.

3) Confirm that the DC cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state. Disable the cooling fan ON/OFF
control (H06 = 0).
4) Shut down the main circuit power.
5) The inverter automatically starts the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor.
If " . . . . " does not appear on the LED monitor, the measurement has not started. Check the conditions
listed in 1).
6) After " . . . . " has disappeared from the LED monitor, turn ON the main circuit power again.
7) Select Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in Programming mode and check the capacitance (%) of the DC link
bus capacitor (5_05 ).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7-7
(2) Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions
The inverter automatically measures the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating
conditions when the power is turned OFF. This measurement requires setting up the load conditions for ordinary
operation and measuring the reference capacitance when the inverter is introduced to the practical operation, using
the setup procedure given below
--------------------------------------------- Reference capacitance setup procedure -----------------------------------------------

1) Set bit 3 of function code H98 at "1" (User mode) to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria for the service
life of the DC link bus capacitor.
2) Turn OFF all run commands.
3) Make the inverter ready to be turned OFF under ordinary operating conditions.
4) Set each of function codes H42 (Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor) and H47 (Initial Capacitance of DC Link
Bus Capacitor) at "0000."
5) Turn OFF the inverter, and the following operations are automatically performed.
The inverter measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and saves the result in function code
H47 (Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor).
The conditions under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved.
6) Turn ON the inverter again.
Confirm that H47 (Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor) holds right values. Switch to Menu #5
"Maintenance Information" in Programming mode and confirm that the main capacitor capacity is 100% (5_05 =
100%).
If the measurement has failed, "0001" is entered into each of H42 and H47. Remove the factor of the
failure and conduct the measurement again.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hereafter, each time the inverter is turned OFF, it automatically measures the discharging time of the DC link bus
capacitor if the above conditions are met. Periodically check the capacitance (%) of the DC link bus capacitor
(5_05 ) with Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in Programming mode.
The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error. If this mode gives you a lifetime
alarm, revert bit 3 of H98 (Select life judgment threshold of CD link bus capacitor) to the default setting (Bit 3
= 0) and conduct the measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment.
(3) Early warning of lifetime alarm

For the components listed in Table 7.4-2, the inverter can issue an early warning of lifetime alarm LIFE at one of the
transistor output terminals [Y1] and [Y2] and Relay output terminals [30A/B/C] as soon as any one of the levels
specified in Table 7.4-2 has been exceeded.
The early warning signal is also turned ON when a lock condition on the internal air circulation DC fan (provided on
FRN0203E2S-4 or above) has been detected.
7-8
7.5 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit
7.5 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit

Because the voltage and current of the power supply (input, primary circuit) of the main circuit of the inverter and
those of the motor (output, secondary circuit) contain harmonic components, the readings may vary with the type of
the meter. Use meters indicated in Table 7.5-1 when measuring with meters for commercial frequencies.
The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power-factor meter that measures the phase
difference between the voltage and current. To obtain the power factor, measure the power, voltage and current on
each of the input and output sides and use the following formula.
 Three-phase input
Electric power (W)
Power factor = × 100 %
3 × Voltage (V) × Current (A)
Table 7.5-1 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit

DC link bus
Item
Input (primary) side Output (secondary) side voltage

(P(+)-N(-))
Voltage Current Voltage Current
Waveform

Name of
meter
Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter

DC voltmeter V
AR, AS, AT VR, VS, VT WR, WT AU, AV, AW VU, VV, VW WU, WW
Rectifier or Digital
Type of
meter
Moving iron Digital AC Digital AC Digital AC

moving iron AC power Moving coil type
type power meter power meter power meter
type meter
of meter
Symbol
   
It is not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for measuring the output
voltage or output current since they may cause larger measurement errors or, in the worst case, they may
be damaged.
Figure 7.5-1 Connection of Meters
7-9
7.6 Insulation Test
7.6 Insulation Test

Since the inverter has undergone an insulation test before shipment, avoid making a Megger test at the customer's
site.
If a Megger test is unavoidable for the main circuit, observe the following instructions; otherwise, the inverter may be
damaged.
A withstand voltage test may also damage the inverter if the test procedure is wrong. When the withstand voltage
test is necessary, consult your Fuji Electric representative.
(1) Megger test of main circuit

1) Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail before measurement.
2) If the test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring, disconnect all the wiring from the control circuit.
3) Connect the main circuit terminals with a common line as shown in Figure 7.6-1.
4) The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground ( ).
5) Value of 5 M or more displayed on the Megger indicates a correct state. (The value is measured on an inverter
alone.)
Figure 7.6-1 Main Circuit Terminal Connection for Megger Test
(2) Insulation test of control circuit

Do not make a Megger test or withstand voltage test for the control circuit. Use a high resistance range tester for the
control circuit.
1) Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals.
2) Perform a continuity test to the ground. One M or a larger measurement indicates a correct state.
(3) Insulation test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit
Disconnect all the wiring connected to the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.
7-10
7.7 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee

7.7.1 When making an inquiry
Upon breakage of the product, uncertainties, failure or inquiries, inform your Fuji Electric representative of the
following information.
1) Inverter type (Refer to Chapter 1, Section 1.1 "Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates and Inverter Type.")
2) SER No. (serial number of equipment) (Refer to Chapter 1, Section 1.1 "Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates and
Inverter Type.")
3) Function codes and their data that you changed (Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.2 "Checking changed function
codes.")
4) ROM version (Refer to the maintenance item 5_14 in Chapter 3, Section 3.4.5 "Reading maintenance
information.")
5) Date of purchase
6) Inquiries (for example, point and extent of breakage, uncertainties, failure phenomena, and other circumstances)

7.7.2 Product warranty
To all our customers who purchase Fuji Electric products included in this documentation:
Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order.
When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials, please be aware
that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the contract, catalog, specifications or
other materials will be as mentioned below.
In addition, the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the place where they
can be used, etc., and may require periodic inspection. Please confirm these points with your sales representative
or directly with this company.
Furthermore, regarding purchased products and delivered products, we request that you take adequate
consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management and maintenance even
before receiving your products.
[ 1 ] Free of charge warranty period and warranty range

(1) Free of charge warranty period
1) The product warranty period is ''1 year from the date of purchase'' or 24 months from the manufacturing date
imprinted on the name place, whichever date is earlier.
2) However, in cases where the use environment, conditions of use, use frequency and times used, etc., have
an effect on product life, this warranty period may not apply.
3) Furthermore, the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric's Service Department is ''6 months from
the date that repairs are completed.''
(2) Warranty range

1) In the event that breakdown occurs during the product's warranty period which is the responsibility of Fuji
Electric, Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has broken down free of charge at the
place where the product was purchased or where it was delivered. However, if the following cases are
applicable, the terms of this warranty may not apply.
 The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions, environment, handling or use methods, etc.
which are not specified in the catalog, operation manual, specifications or other relevant documents.
 The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji's product.
 The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji's product, such as the customer's equipment
or software design, etc.
 Concerning the Fuji's programmable products, the breakdown was caused by a program other than a
program supplied by this company, or the results from using such a program.
7-11
 The breakdown was caused by disassembly, modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji
Electric.
 The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using consumables, etc. specified
in the operation manual or catalog, etc.
 The breakdown was caused by a science or technical problem that was not foreseen when making
practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or delivered.
 The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used.
 The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company's responsibility, such as lightning or
other disaster.
2) Furthermore, the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered product alone.
3) The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item (1) above and any damages (damage to
or loss of machinery or equipment, or lost profits from the same, etc.) consequent to or resulting from
breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be excluded from coverage by this warranty.
(3) Trouble diagnosis

As a rule, the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis. However, at the customer's
request, this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a chargeable basis. In this
case, the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in accordance with this company's fee
schedule.
[ 2 ] Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity, etc.

Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period, this company shall
not be liable for any loss of opportunity, loss of profits, or damages arising from special circumstances, secondary
damages, accident compensation to another company, or damages to products other than this company's products,
whether foreseen or not by this company, which this company is not be responsible for causing.
[ 3 ] Repair period after production stop, spare parts supply period (holding period)
Concerning models (products) which have gone out of production, this company will perform repairs for a period of
7 years after production stop, counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs. In addition, we
will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of 7 years, counting from the month and year
when the production stop occurs. However, if it is estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is
short and it will be difficult to procure or produce those parts, there may be cases where it is difficult to provide
repairs or supply spare parts even within this 7-year period. For details, please confirm at our company's business
office or our service office.
[ 4 ] Transfer rights
In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application program, the
products shall be transported to and transferred to the customer and this company shall not be responsible for local
adjustments or trial operation.
[ 5 ] Service contents
The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or service costs.
Depending on the request, these can be discussed separately.
[ 6 ] Applicable scope of service

Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you purchased the
products.
Consult the local supplier or Fuji for the detail separately.
7-12
Chapter 8
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL
LOGIC
This chapter describes the main block diagrams of the control section.
Contents
Chapter 8 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC ................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Meanings of Symbols Used in the Control Block Diagrams ...................................................... 8-1
8.2 Frequency Setting Section ........................................................................................................ 8-2
8.3 Operation Command Section .................................................................................................... 8-5
8.4 PID Control Section (for Processing) ........................................................................................ 8-6
8.5 PID Control Section (for Dancer)............................................................................................... 8-7
8.6 Control Section .......................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.6.1 V/f control ............................................................................................................................ 8-8
8.7 FM Output Section .................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.1 Meanings of Symobols Used in the Control Block Diagrams

The high-performance and compact inverter FRENIC-Ace is provided with various functions for enabling
operations that meet purposes. Refer to “Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODE” for details of each function code.
Function codes are mutually related and priority order is given depending on the function codes and data thereof.
This chapter shows major internal control block diagrams. Understand the diagrams together with the explanation
of each function code to correctly set up each function code.
Note that the internal control block diagrams show only the function codes mutually related. Refer to “Chapter 5
FUNCTION CODE” for function codes operated individually and each function code explanation.
8.1 Meanings of Symbols Used in the Control Block Diagrams

This section explains major codes, with examples, used in the block diagrams from the next item.
Table 8.1-1 Codes and Meanings

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
These symbols denote
This denotes a function code.
general-purpose input/output
[FWD], [Y1], etc.
terminals of the inverter control
Chap 8 CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAMS

circuit terminal blocks.
These symbols denote control
signals (input) or state signals
“FWD”, “REV”, etc. This indicates a switch
(output) allocated to the control
circuit terminals. controlled by a function code.
Figures of switch terminals
This is low-pass filter. Time indicate function code data.
constant is changeable based
on function code data.
This symbol denotes control LINK OPERATION This indicates a switch
SET FREQUENCY SELECTION
command used inside the controlled by an internal function
“LE”
inverter. control command. An example
This indicates upper limit limiter. at left indicates a link operation
This limits an upper limit value selection command “LE”
by function code setting or a allocated to a digital input
constant. terminal.
This indicates lower limit limiter. This denotes a logical sum (OR)
This limits a lower limit value by circuit.
function code setting or a In the case of the positive logic,
constant. when any one of inputs is ON,
C=ON, and when all inputs are
OFF, C=OFF.
This is 0 (zero) limiter. This This denotes an NOR
prevents data from becoming (NOR-OR) circuit.
minus. In the case of the positive logic,
when any one of inputs is OFF,
C=ON, and when all inputs are
ON, C=OFF.
This denotes a set frequency This denotes a conjunction
given by a current or a voltage. (AND) circuit.
This is a gain analog multiplier In the case of the positive logic,
for an analog output signal etc., only when A=ON and B=ON,
calculated by C=A×B. C=ON, and C=OFF under other
conditions.
This denotes an adder of two This denotes a logical negation
signals or amounts, calculated (NOT) circuit.
by C=A+B. In the case of the positive logic,
when A=ON, B=OFF, and when
This becomes a subtracter
A=OFF, B=ON.
when B is a minus sign,
calculated by C=A-B.
8-1
Details of LED (Main) Monitor
E48
Key operation of touch panel (TP)
Command
Set frequency A E65 loss
judgment
Motor rotating speed command

3 Forward operation/reverse
C53
operation switching ”IVS”
Load rotating speed command
4 PID control inoperative
(J01=0)
5 Forward/reverse
Line speed command
judgment
Inching time command

6
%-indication frequency 7
command Forward operation/
× reverse operation 1
+ +
+ +
Balanceless bumpless processing C33 B Operation
(F01=8, C30=8) continuation Gain Bias
C31 E65 frequency C32 C34 F18 C50
(12) “0”
0 limiter
【12】
Comparator
C38 (Common)H26=0
E59=0 H26=0
8.2 Frequency Setting Section
4-20mA/
【C1】 0-20mA_ Forward operation/
× reverse operation
2
Selection + +
+ +
C38 C Operation
C40 C36 continuation Gain Bias
E65 frequency C37 C39 F18 C50
(C1) “0”
Frequency 0 limiter
setting 1
8-2
Forward operation/
Thermistor × reverse operation 3
(Operation +
selection) +
+110% H26 Gain Bias
H26=1,2
1 Alarm C42 C44 F18 C50
“0”
-10% 0 limiter
2 Thermistor
H27 Comparator
detection
Thermistor (PTC)『THM』 Forward operation/
(Operation level) × reverse operation 4
+
+
Gain Bias
Fig. 8.2-1 Frequency Setting Section Block Diagram

C32 C34 C55 C56
“0”
0 limiter
Forward operation/
+
E59=1 +
【V2】 Gain Bias
+
+ C37 C39 C61 C62
Operation “0”
C41 C43 D
continuation 0 limiter
E65 frequency Forward operation/
(V2) +
SW3 SW4 E59 H26 +
C1 input C1side AI 0 0 Gain Bias
V2 input V2side AI 1 0 C42 C44 C67 C68
“0”
PTC input C1side PTC Optional 1, 2 0 limiter
1
+100%
Terminal 12
*1 E61 Frequency auxiliary
setting 1
0
1 -100%
2
3 +100%
*3
B × 5 Frequency auxiliary
+ setting 2
+ 6 +200%
Polarity -100%
selection 7 Ratio setting
C35=1
* 100% = Maximum frequency
0%
Gain Bias “0” 6
C32 C34 C55 C56 0 limiter +300%
7,8
Torque limit value
B’
9 0%
* PID control block diagram +200%
10,11
Torque bias (Corresponding within days)
-200%
+300%
Torque command/current (Corresponding within days)
20 command
×
-300%
LCD display
Scale conversion W33

C60 C59
8888
Terminal C1 *1 E62
0
E42
1
Display filter
2
C40=1
C × *3
+
8-3
+ 6
Polarity
selection
7,8
RS-485 communication port 1
9 Connector for connecting
Gain Bias
“0” touch panel
C37 C39 C61 C62 10,11
0 limiter Host Set frequency for
equipment communication
C’
20 RS-485 communication port 2
S01
×
* PID control block diagram
¹0
Nectar (-A, -E) S01
Control circuit terminal (-C) S05
Terminal V2 *1 E63 E
Host ¹0 0
0 Scale conversion equipment S05
1 C66 C65
CANopen 0
Polarity selection 2 Priority to S19
communication port 2
Connector (-A, -E) y33 later writing
C45=0,

1 Host =1
D × equipment
+ 6 *3
+
7,8 =0
9 Command clearing Alarm
Gain “0” processing on er8 erpP er4 er5 ert
Bias communication failure
10,11 Host Filed bus card
C42 C44 C67 C68 0 limiter (option) *2 On occurrence of these errors, it is also possible to clear frequency
equipment command and operation commands (FWD and REV).
y95
D’
*1 Priority order when the same function is selected for E61 to E63
20
* PID control block diagram × U90 > …>U81 >Terminal [12] > Terminal [C1] >Terminal [V2] >Terminal [32] >Terminal [C2]
*2 Refer to instruction manual of each option for the details thereof.
(NB) • This block diagram is not applicable during the PID control.
Scale conversion
• S codes are function codes related to communication.
C72 C71 Refer to “RS-485 Communication User’s Manual” for details.
2

Set frequency Local
A Link operation Multi-step frequency Multifunction
selection JOG operation
selection (touch panel) +
“Hz2/Hz1” operation selection touch panel “JOG”
Frequency setting 1 F01 “LE” command
“SS1, 2, 4, 8”
selection
0,8 “LOC”
1
1 ×
+ Remote/local judgment
+
2
2 × * PID control block diagram
+
P Frequency
3 limiter upper
× +
limit
Pattern operation +
Link function F15
selection
5 Bus function
3 × H30
C21 0,2,6 +
y98 Assisting link function Frequency
7 Jump command
1,3～5, 0,2 y99
frequency
10 7,8 0,2
Pattern operation
1,3 C01 H63
F16
1,3 C02 Lower limit
11 ÷ × Frequency
9 C03 limiter
limiter lower
operation
C04 limit
12 C90 C89 Multi-step frequency 1 C05 × selection
8 × C20
Multi-step frequency 2 C06 × Jogging
E frequency
Frequency setting 2 C30 Multi-step frequency 3 C07 ×
0,8
Multi-step frequency 4 C08 ×
1 W02
4 ×
M05
+
8-4
+ Multi-step frequency 7 C11 ×
5 2
× •••
3 Multi-step frequency13 C17 ×

×
Multi-step frequency14 C18 ×
× 5 ×
6 Multi-step frequency15 C19 A
7
Ratio setting
10 Frequency auxiliary
setting 2
11
9 With option
Pulse train input Pulse input ON

12 “PIN” processing
8 ×
OFF 8
Pulse correction factor 1 d62 ×
Setting rate
Pulse train Pulse correction factor 2 d63 d61 Pulse train input
“-1”
code Filter time constant
“SIGN”
UP/DOWN control
Operation selection Pulse input
PG interface card
Host equipment (option) d59 Pulse input system
H61 processing
d62 Pulse correction factor 1
UP command
"UP" d63 Pulse correction factor 2
UP/DOWN control
DOWN command Digital input Digital input
"DOWN" Host equipment interface card 9
processing
(option)
Frequency auxiliary
setting 1
3
8.3 Operation Command Section
8.3 Operation Command Section
Fig. 8.3-1 Operation Command Section Block Diagram
8-5
8.4 PID Control Section (for Processing)
8.4 PID Control Section (for Processing)
Fig. 8.4-1 PID Control Section (For Processing) Block Diagram
8-6
Multifunction
touch panel Local
(touch panel)
command selection
“LOC”
Remote/local judgment
PID control
cancellation
“Hz/PID” During PID control
“PID-CTL”
During
operation
[RUN]
Frequency limiter upper limit
Main setting +
Frequency setting (3) F15
P
+ Frequency
Jump
frequency command
C01
PID control cancellation
Fig. 8.5-1
“Hz/PID” C02 F16
C03 Frequency limiter lower limit
C04
PID control Frequency setting (1) A
(Remote command)
PID control J02
(Dancer reference position) 0
Touch panel PID command value J57
PID command 1
C58 Display unit

3
C59 Maximum scale
8.5 PID Control Section (for Dancer)
C60 Minimum scale 4 PID multi-step PID control (Anti-reset windup)

S13
command selection J10
PID command for “PSS1,2” PID integration hold bit 0 PID control
[12]*1 communication “PID-HLD” PID control J62 (PID output polarity)
E61 (PID output limiter upper limit)
PID integration/differential reset
8-7
Frequency setting (2) +110% 3 “PID-RST” J18 0 1
Dancer reference
position × “-1”
B’ MV (Ratio) 0
5 PID regulator ×
-110% PID multi-step +
command 1 -
PID control P (Gain) J03 1
J136 J19
PID control I (Integration time) J04 MV (Speed)
[12]
PID multi-step PID control D (Differential time) PID control
J05 J62 bit 1 PID control (Output ratio correction selection)
command 2 (PID output limiter lower limit)
-10% UP command
“UP” J137
limiter UP/DOWN PID control P (Gain)2 J59
DOWN command control PID control I (Integration time)2 J60 J59 to J61 within
“DOWN” PID multi-step
C64 Display unit command 3 PID control D (Differential time)2 J61 detected width
C65 Maximum scale J138 J105 Display unit
C66 Minimum scale [C1]*1 J106 Maximum scale
E62 J107 Minimum scale J58 PID control (Dancer reference position detected width)
Frequency setting (2)
+110% 3
PID control
C’ 5 (Feedback filter)
-110%
Alarm PID alarm output
judgement “PID-ALM”
J06
PID Control Section (For Dancer) Block Diagram

-10% [C1] J11 PID control (Alarm output selection)
limiter
J12 PID control (Upper limit alarm (AH))
C70 Display unit J13 PID control (Lower limit alarm (AL))
C71 Maximum scale PID feedback value

C72 Minimum scale [V2]*1
E63
Frequency setting (2)
+110% 3 *1 Priority order when the same function is selected for analog input terminals such as E61 to E63
D’ U90 > …>U81 >Terminal [12] > Terminal [C1] >Terminal [V2] >Terminal [32] >Terminal [C2] >Terminal [PT1] > Terminal [PT2]
5
-110%
[12] User U81
[C1] •
C45=0,1 Customized •
[V2] logic U90
-10%
limiter
[V2]
8.5 PID Control Section (for Dancer)

8.6 Control Section
8.6 Control Section

8.6.1 V/f control
F03 Maximum output frequency 1
FWD REV
F04 Base frequency 1
F23 Starting frequency 1
Rotating F24 (Duration)
direction limit
F25 Stop frequency
"0" H08 F39 (Duration)
Prevention of
Frequency forward rotation
command
Acceleration/deceleration
arithmetic nit
x Prevention of
reverse rotation
"-1" Droop control
Curve deceleration H07
Torque
calculated value
Acceleration time 1st S shape range H57
H28 Acceleration time 2nd S shape range H58 H11
Droop control Deceleration mode
Deceleration time 1st S shape range H59
Droop selection Deceleration time 2nd S shape range H60 H56
"DROOP"
Forced stop
JOG operation Deceleration time
+ “JOG”
Acceleration/deceleration H63
selection (4 steps)
"RT1" "RT2" Lower limit limiter
Acceleration time Acceleration time 1 (Operation selection)
S08 F07
S09 F08
Deceleration time Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2 E10
Decelerati0n time 2 E11 H70=0.00 Overload avoidance H69=0 F40,F41,E16,E17
Acceleration time 3 E12 H70=0,999 =999
Deceleration rate Frequency
Decelerati0n time 3 E13 F14≠2,3
calculation calculation
H70 H70≠0.00
Acceleration time 4 E14 F43=0
Decelerati0n time 4 E15 Overload H70≠0.00
avoidance
H69
=2 to 5 +
Acceleration time (Jogging operation) H54 control
Operation judgment
F40,
F
Decelerati0n time (Jogging operation) H55 F41, F14 +
Torque limit (braking) E16, =2,3 F43≠0
(Incremental frequency limiter) E17
H76 Regeneration ¹999
H69
Torque Regeneration avoidance + Regeneration =2,4
avoidance control
(Operation
calculated value avoidance regulator selection)
- =3,5
Limit level
DC intermediate circuit + Regeneration
voltage (Edc) avoidance regulator
-
Limit level Operation judgment
Regeneration
avoidance control H69
(Operation selection)
(Operation level) H114
Torque limit 2/torque limit 1

“TL2/TL1”
E61 E62 E63
F40 ≠7
Torque limit value 1 (driving)
Torque limit Torque limit (braking)
Incremental frequency limiter
Analog torque limit value A
=7 +
H76
Torque limit value 2 (driving) E16 - Torque limit
E61 E62 E63
Torque limit value 1 (braking) F41 ≠8
- regulator
+
=8
Analog torque limit value B
Operation judgment
Torque limit value 2 (braking) E17
Torque calculated
value
Torque limit
H73
(Operation condition selection)
Operation continuance (P) H92 Deceleration stop/

operation continuance on
Operation continuance (I) H93 Momentary power failure
+ Edc control
Momentary power failure restart H15
(Operation continuance level) regulator
-
Operation judgment
Edc (DC intermediate circuit voltage)
Momentary power failure restart

F14
Torque Control method selection F42 Valid/invalid

Momentary power failure restart
H14 Current limit calculated value judgment
(Frequency drop rate) Slip compensation 1 H68
Slip compensation P09
Current limit (Operation level) F44
+ Current limit regulator gain (Drive) X
- P12 Ｘ
(Drive)
Output current Operation judgment Rated slip P10

(Braking)
Ｘ Slip compensation
Current limit (Operation selection) F43 response time
Slip compensation
gain (Braking) P11
Fig. 8.6-1 V/f control Section Block Diagram
8-8
8.6 Control Section
Rectifying circuit
Power source Main circuit
capacitor M
Cooling fan
Motor
Detection of Cooling fan

Gate drive circuit output currents ON-OFF control
(Iu, Iv, Iw) H06
Cooling fan
PWM signal
ON-OFF
control
Instantaneous overcurrent limit
(Operation selection) H12
Output currents
(Iu, Iv, Iw) 0 Alarm to
Comparator
Current limit level 1 Current limit processing

Main power source
H72 interruption detection F05 Base frequency voltage 1
Main power source F06 Maximum output voltage 1
interruption detection F09 Torque boost 1
(Operation selection) F37 Load selection/automatic torque boost/automatic energy-saving operation 1
F42 Control method selection 1
F
H50 Polygonal line V/f 1 (Frequency)
H51 (Voltage)
H52 Polygonal line V/f 2 (Frequency)
Frequency limiter H53 (Voltage)
Edc
(Upper limit) H65 Polygonal line V/f 3 (Frequency)
(DC intermediate
H66 (Voltage)
F15 Deceleration circuit voltage)
H71 characteristics 2-/3-phase converter
Voltage calculation
+
Edc PWM
Current oscillation
- compensation calculation
PWM signal
control gain 1
H80 x

Motor constant
P01 ～ P03
Phase angle
P06 ～ P20 Current oscillation
calculation
P53 ～ P56 control
H64≠0.0 H64=0.0 P99 Motor 1 selection Motor operation sound

H64 F16 (Carrier frequency)
Lower limit Frequency F26

Carrier
limiter limiter F27
frequency
(Minimum (Lower DC braking DC braking (Tone)
frequency on limit) (Characteristics
limiting H95 Voltage
selection) Cancellation by “0”
operation) (Operation level) F21 calculation
Hardware H98 （bit 0）
current limit
F20
(Time) F22 Operation judgment
Carrier frequency
(Start operation time) F195 reduction processing
"DCBRK"
(Characteristics selection) H95 Operation judgment
Inverter start
"STM"
Start characteristics (Picking-up mode) H09 Picking-up
Start characteristics (Picking-up standby time 1) H49 processing
Start characteristics (Picking-up standby time 2) H46
Instantaneous power failure restart (Operation selection) F14

Instantaneous power
Instantaneous power failure restart (Standby time) H13
failure restart
(Frequency drop rate) H14 processing
(Instantaneous power failure allowable time) H16
Fig. 8.6-2 V/f Control Section Block Diagram
8-9
8.7 FM Output Section
8.7 FM Output Section
Fig. 8.7-1 FM Output Section Block Diagram
8-10
Chapter 9
COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS-485 and CANopen
communications.
For details of RS-485 communication, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual.
Contents
9.1 Overview of RS-485 Communication ...................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 RS-485 common modes .................................................................................................. 9-2
9.1.2 Terminal mode ................................................................................................................. 9-3
[1] RS-485 communication port 1 (for connecting the keypad) mode .................................. 9-3
[2] RS-485 communication port 2 mode (only for FRN-E2S-4A, E) ..................................... 9-3
[3] RS-485 communication port 2 (terminal block) mode (only for FRN-E2S-4C) ................ 9-4
9.1.3 Connection method .......................................................................................................... 9-5
9.1.4 RS-485 connection devices ............................................................................................. 9-8
[1] Converter ......................................................................................................................... 9-8
[2] Requirements for the cable (COM port 1: for RJ-45 connector) ...................................... 9-9
[3] Requirements for the cable (COM port 2: for RS-485 connector) ................................... 9-9
[4] Branch adapter for multi-drop .......................................................................................... 9-9
9.1.5 RS-485 noise suppression ............................................................................................... 9-9
9.2 CANopen Communication..................................................................................................... 9-10
9.2.1 Modes ............................................................................................................................ 9-10
9.2.2 Connection method .........................................................................................................9-11
[1] Basic connection configuration .......................................................................................9-11
[2] Terminal mode ............................................................................................................... 9-12
9.2.3 Inverter function codes related to CANopen setting ...................................................... 9-13
9.2.4 Procedures to establish CANopen communication ....................................................... 9-14
9.2.5 PDO protocol.................................................................................................................. 9-15
[1] About PDO protocol ....................................................................................................... 9-15
[2] Reception PDO (from master to inverter) ...................................................................... 9-16
[3] Transmission PDO (from inverter to master) ................................................................. 9-18
[4] Communication parameters of reception PDO .............................................................. 9-19
[5] Communication parameters of transmission PDO......................................................... 9-20
[6] Changing PDO (RPDO/TPDO) mapping entry .............................................................. 9-21
9.2.6 SDO protocol.................................................................................................................. 9-22
[1] About SDO ..................................................................................................................... 9-22
[2] Response on SDO error ................................................................................................ 9-22
9.2.7 Other services ................................................................................................................ 9-23
9.2.8 Object list ....................................................................................................................... 9-24
[1] Objects in the communication profile area ..................................................................... 9-24
[2] Objects in the profile area specific to Fuji Electric ......................................................... 9-27
9.2.9 Standard device profile area .......................................................................................... 9-28
9.2.10 Inverter operation in CANopen communication ............................................................. 9-29
[1] Operation according to CANopen's drive profile (DSP 402) .......................................... 9-29
[2] Operation according to the inverter function code S06.................................................. 9-34
9.2.11 Heartbeat and Node Guarding ....................................................................................... 9-38
[1] Heartbeat ....................................................................................................................... 9-38
[2] Node Guarding ............................................................................................................... 9-39
9.2.12 Behavior upon detection of CANopen network disconnection ....................................... 9-40
9.2.13 Alarm code list................................................................................................................ 9-41
9.2.14 Other points to note........................................................................................................ 9-42
9.2.15 Keypad LED operation monitor “3_40” .......................................................................... 9-42
9.3 FRENIC Loader Overview..................................................................................................... 9-43
9.3.1 Modes ............................................................................................................................ 9-43
9.3.2 Connection ..................................................................................................................... 9-44
9.3.3 Function overview .......................................................................................................... 9-44
[1] Configuring inverter's function code ............................................................................... 9-44
[2] Multi-monitor .................................................................................................................. 9-45
[3] Running status monitor .................................................................................................. 9-46
[4] Test-running ................................................................................................................... 9-47
[5] Real-time trace ............................................................................................................... 9-48
[6] Historical trace ............................................................................................................... 9-49
9.1 Overview of RS-485 Communication

The FRENIC-Ace has two RS-485 communication ports at the locations shown below.
(i) Communication port 1: RJ-45 connector for the keypad (modular jack)
(ii) Communication port 2: RJ-45 connector for RS-485 communication (modular jack) * only for
FRN-E2S-4A, E, RS-485 terminals (control circuit terminals SD, DX-, DX+) * only for FRN-E2S-4C
RS-485 terminals (SD, DX-, and DX+)

RJ-45 RJ-45 (which facilitate multi-drop connection.)
connector connector
Chap 9 COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS

COM port 1 COM port 2
Using the RS-485 communication ports shown above enables the extended functions listed below.
• Remote operation from a keypad at the remote location (COM port 1)

The standard keypad enables remote operation by mounting the keypad on a remote panel and
connecting the keypad to RJ-45 connector with an extension cable. (maximum cable length: 20 m)
• Operation by FRENIC Loader (COM ports 1, 2)

It is possible to edit and monitor the function codes by connecting the RJ-45 connector (RS-485
communication) in the inverter and PC and using the inverter support loader (FRENIC Loader, see “9.3
FRENIC Loader Overview”).
• Control via host equipment (COM ports 1 and 2)

Connecting the inverter to the host equipment (upper controller), such as a computer and
programmable controller (PLC), enables to control the inverter as a subordinate device.
Besides the communication port 1 (RJ-45 connector) shared with the keypad, the FRENIC-Ace has the
RS-485 communication port 2 by default.
The protocols for controlling inverters support the Modbus RTU protocol (compliant to the protocol
established by Modicon Inc.) that is widely used and the Fuji Electric's general-purpose inverter protocol
that is common to Fuji Electric's inverters including conventional series.
• Connecting the keypad to the COM port 1 automatically switches to the keypad protocol; there
is no need to modify the function code setting.
• When using FRENIC Loader, which requires a special protocol for handling Loader
commands, you need to set up some communication function codes accordingly.
For details, refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual.
 For details of RS-485 communication, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual.
9-1
9.1.1 RS-485 common modes

Item Modes
Protocol FGI-BUS Modbus RTU FRENIC Loader
(support only for standard)
Compliance Fuji general-purpose inverter Modicon Modbus Dedicated protocol (Not
protocol RTU-compliant disclosed)
(only in RTU mode)
Connection quantity Host device: 1, Inverters: Up to 31
Electrical mode EIA RS-485
Connection to RS-485 RJ-45 connector or terminal block
Synchronization Asynchronous
Communication system Half-duplex
Transmission speed 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 bps

(bps)
Max. transmission 500 m

cable length
Station No. 1 to 31 1 to 247 1 to 255
Message frame format FGI-BUS Modbus RTU FRENIC Loader
Frame synchronization Header character detection Detection of no-data time Header character
(SOH) (for 3 characters period) detection
(Start code: 96H)
Frame length Normal transmission:16 Variable length Variable length

bytes (fixed)
High-speed transmission:8 or
12 bytes
Max. transfer data Write: 1 word Write: 50 words Write: 41 words

Read: 1 word Read: 50 words Read: 41 words
Messaging system Polling/Selecting/Broadcast Command message
Transmission character ASCII Binary Binary

format
Character length 8 or 7 bit 8 bits (fixed) 8 bits (fixed)

Selectable with the function
code
Parity Even, Odd, or None (selectable by the function code) Even (fixed)
Stop bit length 1 or 2 bit Parity none: 1 bits (fixed)

Selectable with the function 2/1 bit
code
Parity:
1 bit
Select by parity setting.
Error checking Sum-check CRC-16 Sum-check
9-2
9.1.2 Terminal mode

[ 1 ] RS-485 communication port 1 (for connecting the keypad) mode
The port designed for a standard keypad uses an RJ-45 connector having the following pin assignment:
Pin Signal name Description
1 Vcc Power source for the keypad (5 V)
2 GND Ground signal
3 NC Not connected
4 DX- RS-485 signal, low side *2
5 DX+ RS-485 signal, high side *2
6 NC Not connected
7 GND Ground signal
8 Vcc Power source for the keypad (5 V)
Termination RJ-45 connector

resistance
RJ-45 connector
* The terminating resistance 112 Ω is built in. Open/close with SW2. *

For details about SW6, refer to Chapter 2, “2.2.8 Operating various switches.”
The power supply for keypad is connected to the RJ-45 connector for RS-485 communication
(Pins 1, 2, 7, and 8). When connecting other devices to the RJ-45 connector, take care not to use
those pins. Use pins 4 and 5 only.
[ 2 ] RS-485 communication port 2 mode (only for FRN-E2S-4A, E)

The port designed for a standard keypad uses an RJ-45 connector having the following pin assignment:
1 CAN+ CAN signal, high side
2 GND Ground signal
3 CAN- CAN signal, low side
4 DX- RS-485 signal, low side
5 DX+ RS-485 signal, high side
6 NC Not connected
7 GND Ground signal
8 NC Not connected

For details about SW6, refer to Chapter 2, “2.2.8 Operating various switches.”
9-3
[ 3 ] RS-485 communication port 2 (terminal block) mode (only for FRN-E2S-4C)

The FRENIC-Ace has terminals for RS-485 communication in the control circuit terminal. The details of
each terminal are shown below.
Terminal symbol Description Remarks
SD Shield terminal
DX- RS-485 signal, low side Built-in terminating resistor: 112 Ω
DX+ RS-485 signal, high side Open/close with SW2*
Terminating
resistor

For details about SW6, refer to Chapter 2, “2.4.2 Setting up the slide switches.”
9-4
9.1.3 Connection method
• Up to 31 inverters can be connected to one host equipment.

• The protocol is commonly used in the FRENIC series of general-purpose inverters, so
programs for similar host equipment can run/stop the inverter.
(The parameters modes may differ depending on the equipment.)
• Fixed-length transmission frames facilitate developing communication control programs for

hosts.
 For details of RS-485 communication, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual
(MEH448).
Multi-drop connection using the RS-485 communication port 1 (for connecting the keypad)
For connecting inverters in multi-drop connection, use the branch adapters for multi-drop
connection as shown below.
Branch adapter for
multi-drop
RS-232C/RS-485
converter
Terminating resistor
Terminating resistor switch SW2 OFF
ON (100-120 Ω) RJ-45
connector

Computer switch SW2 OFF
(FRENIC Loader) RJ-45
connector
switch SW2 ON
RJ-45
connector
Figure 9.1.3-1 Multi-drop Connection for RS-485 Communication Port 1 (Using the RJ-45 Connector)
• The power supply for keypad is connected to the RJ-45 connector for RS-485 communication
(COM port 1) (pins 1, 2, 7 and 8). When connecting other devices to the RJ-45 connector,
take care not to use those pins. Use pins 4 and 5 only. (refer to 9.1.2 Terminal mode for
RS-485 communication)
• When selecting additional devices to prevent the damage or malfunction of the control PCB
caused by external noises or eliminate the influence of common mode noises, be sure to see
the Section “9.1.4 RS-485 connection devices.”
• The maximum wiring length must be 500 m.
• Use the cables and converters meeting the modes for connecting the RS-485 communication
ports. (Refer to [2] “Requirements for the cable (COM port 1: for RJ-45 connector)” in the
Section 9.1.4 “RS-485 connection devices”)
9-5
Multi-drop connection using the RS-485 communication port 2 (RJ-45 connector) (only for FRN-E2S-4A, E)
For connecting inverters in multi-drop connection, use the branch adapters for multi-drop connection as
shown below.
Branch adapter for

multi-drop Terminating resistor
RS-232C/RS-48 switch SW6 OFF
5 converter
Terminating resistor ON
(100-120 Ω) RJ-45
connector
switch SW6 OFF
Computer
(FRENIC Loader) RJ-45
connector
switch SW6 ON
RJ-45
connector
Figure 9.1.3-2 Multi-drop Connection for RS-485 Communication Port 2 (Using the RJ-45 Connector)
Use the cables and converters meeting the modes for connecting the RS-485 communication
ports.
(Refer to [3] “Requirements for the cable (COM port 2: for RJ-45 connector)” in the Section 9.1.4
“RS-485 connection devices”)
9-6
Multi-drop connection using the RS-485 communication port 2 (on the terminal block) (only for
FRN-E2S-4C)
Host equipment Host equipment

USB or RS-232C
RS-485
(4 wires)
Terminating
resistor
USB - RS-485 converter (112 Ω) Shield
or FRENIC-Ace series
RS-232C - RS-485 Inverter 1
converter
Off-the-shelf one DX+ Station No.: 01
(2 wires) DX- (2 wires)
SD
Using the built-in

terminating FRENIC-Ace series
resistor
Inverter 2
DX+
DX- Station No.: 02
SD (2 wires)

Up to 31
inverters
FRENIC-Ace series
Inverter n
DX+ Station No.: n
DX-
(2 wires)
SD
Switching terminating
resistors
SW2
112 Ω
Figure 9.1.3-3 Multi-drop Connection Diagram (Connecting to the Terminal Block)
Use the cables and converters meeting the modes for connecting the RS-485 communication
ports.
(Refer to [3] “Requirements for the cable (COM port 2: for RJ-45 connector)” in the Section 9.1.4
“RS-485 connection devices”)
9-7
9.1.4 RS-485 connection devices

This section describes the devices required for connecting the inverter to a PC having no RS-485 interface
or for connecting two or more inverters in multi-drop network.
[ 1 ] Converter
In general, PC is not equipped with an RS-485 port. Therefore, an RS-232C–RS-485 or USB–RS-485
converter is required. To use the equipment properly, be sure to use the converter which meets the mode
below. Be careful that a converter not recommended may not work properly.
Requirements for recommended converters

Send/receive switching
Auto-switching by monitoring the transmission data at PC (RS-232C)
system:
Electric isolation: Electrically isolated from the RS-485 port
Fail-safe: Fail-safe facility (*)
Other requirements: Superior noise immunity
Note: The fail-safe function refers to a feature that ensures the RS-485 receiver's output is at “logic high”
even if the RS-485 receiver's input is opened or short-circuited or all the RS-485 drivers are inactive.
(Refer to Figure 8.3 “Communication level conversion”.)
Recommended converters
System Sacom Sales Corporation (Japan) : KS-485PTI (RS-232C-RS-485 converter)

: USB-485I RJ45-T4P (USB-RS-485 converter)
Send/receive switching system
The RS-485 communication system of the inverter acts in half-duplex mode (2-wire), so the converter must
have a send/receive switching function. Generally, the switching system may be either one of the
followings.
(1) Auto-switching by monitoring the transmitted data

(2) Switching by RS-232C control signal (RTS or DTR) from the computer
Computer
Driver
Driver
Receiver input
Receiver input
Level conversion
Driver
Driver
Send/ receive enable
enable
switch
Receiver output Receiver

output
Receiver enable
Receiver
Receiver enable
Receiver
FRENIC-Ace (two-wire system)

RS-232C—RS-485 converter
Figure 9.1.4-1 Communication Level Conversion
9-8
[ 2 ] Requirements for the cable (COM port 1: for RJ-45 connector)

Use a standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX LAN cable (US ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A category 5 compliant, straight
cable).
The power supply for keypad is connected to the RJ-45 connector for RS-485 communication
(COM port 1) (pins 1, 2, 7 and 8). When connecting other devices to the RJ-45 connector, take
care not to use those pins. Use pins 4 and 5 only.
[ 3 ] Requirements for the cable (COM port 2: for RS-485 connector)

To ensure the reliability of connection, use twisted pair shield cables for long distance transmission AWG
16 to 26.
Recommended LAN cable manufacturer: FURUKAWA Electric Co., LTD AWM2789 cable for long
distance connection
Type (Product code): DC23225-2PB
[ 4 ] Branch adapter for multi-drop

The RJ-45 connector is used as the communication connector. To use a standard LAN cable for multi-drop
connection, use the branch adapter for the RJ-45 connector.
Recommended branch adapter

SK Koki (Japan): MS8-BA-JJJ
9.1.5 RS-485 noise suppression
Depending on the operating environment, the malfunction may occur due to the noise generated by the
inverter. Possible measures to prevent such malfunction are: separating the wiring, use of shielded cable,
isolating the power supply, and adding an inductance component. The description shown below is an
example of adding an inductance.
 Refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual, Chapter 2, Section 2.2.4 “Precautions for long
wiring (between inverter and motor)” for details.
Adding inductance components
Keep the impedance of the signal circuit high against the high-frequency noises by inserting an inductance
component, such as by inserting a choke coil in series or passing the signal line through a ferrite core.
Ferrite core
RS-485 communications cable
RS-485 Inverter
converter
Pass the wiring through the ferrite core or

wind the ferrite core with the wiring a few times
Figure 9.1.5-1 Adding an Inductance Component
9-9
9.2 CANopen Communication

9.2.1 Modes
The Table 9.2.1-1 lists the CANopen mode. The CANopen mode will apply to the items not contained in the table
below.
Table 9.2.1-1 CANopen Mode
Item Modes Remarks

Physical layer CAN (ISO11898) (High speed)
Node ID 1 to 127 Sets the inverter function
code y21 / o31
Baud rate 20k, 50k, 125k, 250k, 500k, 800k, 1Mbit/s Sets the inverter function
code y24 / o32
Maximum cable Refer to Table 9.2.2-2 Twisted pair cable (shielded)
length
No. of 30 (MAX) Loop bus
connection units
Protocol Standard format (2.0A)
version
Profile Compliant with the following profiles;
• CiA DS 301 Ver.4.02
• CiA DSP 402 Ver.2.0 Velocity Mode
PDO - Reception PDO and Transmission PDO, three types each Refer to 9.2.5
- PDO assignment cannot be changed
SDO - Supports one Server SDO Refer to 9.2.6
Other services - Network Management(NMT) Start_Remote_Node, Refer to 9.2.7
Stop_Remote_Node, Enter_Pre-Operational,
Reset_Communication, Reset_Node
- Heartbeat (Producer and Consumer)
- Node Guarding
- Emergency (EMCY)
9-10
9.2.2 Connection method
• Before the connection, shut off the inverter's power source and take 5 min (FRN0072E2S-4□) or 10 min
(FRN0085E2S-4) or more. Furthermore, confirm that the LED monitor and charge lamp are turned off and
that the DC link bus voltage of main circuit terminals between P (+) and N (-) indicates the safety value (+25
VDC or less) by using a tester.
• A qualified specialist should perform the wiring work.
An electric shock may occur.
• In general, since the cover of the control signal line is not reinforcedly insulated, direct current flow in the
control signal line in the main circuit's live part may destroy the insulation cover. If this is the case, the
control signal line my be applied by high voltage in the main circuit. Be careful lest main circuit's live part
comes into contact with the control signal line.
It may cause an accident or fire.
The noise may be generated from the inverter, motor, and cables. Be careful about malfunction of surrounding
sensor and equipment.
[ 1 ] Basic connection configuration
Branch adapter for

multi-drop Terminating resistor
CANopen switch SW6 OFF
master

Terminating resistor ON RJ-45
(100-120 Ω)
connector
switch SW6 OFF
RJ-45
connector
switch SW6 ON
RJ-45
connector
Figure 9.2.2-1 Multi-drop Connection for CANopen Communication Port 2 (Using the RJ-45 Connector)
9-11
[ 2 ] Terminal mode
(1) RJ-45 connector (COM port 2) for CANopen communication
The Figure 9.2.2-2 and Table 9.2.2-1 show the pinout and signal description.
Figure 9.2.2-2 RJ-45 connector's Pinout for CANopen Communication
Table 9.2.2-1 CANopen's signals

1 CAN+ CAN signal, high side *1
2 GND Ground signal
3 CAN- CAN signal, low side *1
4 DX- RS-485 signal, low side *2
5 DX+ RS-485 signal, high side *2
6 NC Not connected
7 GND Ground signal
8 NC Not connected
*1: The pins used in the CANopen communication are the pin nos 1 and 3.
*2: The pin nos 4 and 5 are for RS-485 communication.
(2) CANopen communication cable
Use a standard LAN cable (US ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A category 5 compliant, straight cable) for the
communication. The Table 9.2.2-2 lists the maximum cable lengths.
Table 9.2.2-2 Maximum CANopen Cable Length
Baud rate
20 k 50 k 125 k 250 k 500 k 800 k 1M
(bit/s)
Maximum
2500m 1000m 500 m 250m 100m 50m 25m
cable length
(4) Connecting terminating resistor
When the inverter is connected to either end of CANopen communication cable, set the terminating resistor
(SW6=ON) shown below.
9-12
9.2.3 Inverter function codes related to CANopen setting

In order to use this communication card for the CANopen communication, it is required to set the inverter function
code listed in Table 9.2.3-1 shown below. Also, Table 9.2.3-2 lists the related inverter function codes. Set the code,
if necessary.
Table 9.2.3-1 Inverter Function Codes Necessary for CANopen Communication
Default
Function code Description Function code data to be set Remarks
setting
*1
y21 / o31 Sets the node ID 0 1 to 127
(station No)
*2
y24 / o32 Sets a baud rate 0 0 to 7 Set the same value as
0: 125 kbit/s, 1: 20 kbit/s, the master's baud rate.
2: 50 kbit/s, 3: 125 kbit/s,
4: 250 kbit/s, 5: 500 kbit/s,
6: 800 kbit/s, 7: 1 Mbit/s,
8 or more: 1 Mbit/s,
y33 Built-in CAN settings 0 0: Operation disabled (bus option enabled)
(operation selection) 1: Operation enabled (built-in CAN enabled; bus
option disabled)
*3
y98 Selects 0 Select from the following choices: The setting y98=3 is
running/frequency recommended.
y98 Frequency Operation
command source
0 Inverter Inverter
1 CANopen Inverter
2 Inverter CANopen
3 CANopen CANopen

C89 Frequency 1 The data set with 604B is written in the inverter.
correction via
communication, 1
(numerator)
C90 Frequency 1 The data set with 604B is written in the inverter.
correction via
communication, 2
(denominator)
*1: If y21/ o31 is set, in order to reflect the setting in the inverter, restart the inverter or issue the ResetNode
service to inverter from the CANopen master.
*2: If y24/ o32 is set, in order to reflect the setting in the inverter, restart the inverter.
*3: Besides y98, there is an inverter function code to select the running & frequency command source. These
settings enable to select the running & frequency command source in detail. For more information, refer to
the H30 and y98 pages in Chapter 5 “Function Code”.
Table 9.2.3-2 Related Function Codes

Data setting
Function code Description Default setting Remarks
range
y34 / o27 *1 Selects the behavior on CANopen 0 0 to 15
communication error
y35 / o28 *1 Timer on CANopen communication error 0.0 s 0.0 s to 60.0 s
y25 to y28 / Sets the inverter function code (write) to be 0 (no 0000 to FFFF This setting is
*2
o40 to o43 mapped to TPDO No. 3 mapping) (hex) used in PDO
y29 to y32 / Sets the inverter function code (read) to be 0 (no 0000 to FFFF No. 3.
*2
o48 to o51 mapped to RPDO No. 3 mapping) (hex)
*1: For more information on y34 / o27 and y35 / o28, refer to 9.2.12 “Behavior upon detection of CANopen
network disconnection”.
*2: For information on how to set y25 to y28 / o40 to o43 and y29 to y32 / o48 to o51, refer to “9.2.5 [ 2 ]
Reception PDO (from master to inverter)”, “(4) How to set the inverter function codes y25 to y32/o40 to o43,
o48 to o51 and Indexes 5E00, 5E01”.
After the setup, in order to reflect the settings in the inverter, restart the inverter or issue the ResetNode
service to inverter from the CANopen master.
9-13
9.2.4 Procedures to establish CANopen communication

This chapter describes the procedures to connect the CANopen communication between the master and inverter.
The procedure are the steps 1 to 5.
1. Set the CANopen master
2. Set the node ID and baud rate of inverter by specifying the inverter function codes.
3. Restart the inverter and put the inverter in a pre-operational state
4. Set the object for detecting disconnection (Heartbeat or Node Guarding)
5. Transmit the Start Remote Node command from the master to the inverter to put the inverter in an operational
state
From now on, describes the procedures 1 to 5.
1. Set the CANopen master

- Set the node ID and baud rate of the master.
- Use the inverter’s EDS file for the CANopen communication to register it with the master.
For information about how to set the CANopen master, refer to the master's user's manual.
The EDS file does not come with inverter.

Download the EDS file from the following Web site. (required to subscribe
(charge-free))
URL: http://www.fujielectric.com/products/#/tab2/tab1
2. Set the node ID and baud rate of inverter by specifying the inverter function codes.
- Set the node ID with y21 / o31 and the baud rate with y24 / o32. Set the same values as those registered in
the master.
- If necessary, set the inverter function codes y34 / o27, y35 / o28.
 For more information on y34 /o27 and y35 / o28, refer to 9.2.12 “Behavior upon detection of CANopen network
disconnection”.
3. Restart the inverter and put the inverter in a pre-operational state

If the settings of the CANopen master and inverter are correct on the inverter restart and the wiring is proper,
the inverter automatically enters into a pre-operational state, enabling to communicate with the master.
In this state, RUN LED blinks in green and ERR LED turns off or blinks in red in this communication card.
4. Set the object for detecting disconnection (Heartbeat or Node Guarding)

In order to detect the disconnection, set Heartbeat or Node Guarding in both master and inverter.
 For information about Heartbeat or Node Guarding, refer to “9.2.11 Heartbeat and Node Guarding”.
The object for detecting disconnection in the CANopen device is invalid by

default. Unless the setting is enabled, the CANopen network including inverter
can not detect a disconnection even if the disconnection occurs. We strongly
recommend to enable the setting.
5. Transmit the Start Remote Node command from the master to inverter to put the inverter in an operational state
After receiving this command, the inverter enters the operational state. This enables the master to control and
monitor the inverter real time through the PDO communication.
 For information about the format of PDO communication, refer to “9.2.5 PDO protocol”.
9-14
9.2.5 PDO protocol

[ 1 ] About PDO protocol
The PDO (Process Data Object) protocol is used for communicating the process data between the CANopen
master and inverter periodically (example: running command, speed monitoring). As shown in Table 9.2.5-1 and
Table 9.2.5-2, CANopen communication of inverter supports three types of reception PDO (RPDO: from master to
inverter) and transmission PDO (TPDO: from inverter to master) each.
Table 9.2.5-1 Reception PDO (RPDO, from master to inverter)
PDO No. Initial value of COB-ID Description

1 0x200 + node ID Controls the state change of DS-402
2 0x300 + node ID Controls the state change of DS-402 and the speed command
3 0x400 + node ID Writes four types of mapped inverter function codes
Table 9.2.5-2 Transmission PDO (TPDO, from inverter to master)
PDO No. Initial value of COB-ID Description

1 0x180 + node ID Controls the state change of DS-402
2 0x280 + node ID Controls the state change of DS-402 and the speed command
3 0x380 + node ID Reads four types of mapped inverter function codes
Timing to transmit transmission PDO

The factory default is “Transmit PDO upon data change and at the time specified by Event timer”. Since
the transmission is not synchronized with the command from the reception PDO but is done when the
data changes, three transmission PDOs my be transmitted continuously, as the case may be. (for

example, while the master issues a command with PDO No.2, the answers are returned from PDO Nos.
1 and 3.) To prevent this, it is possible to disable each transmission PDO. For information about the
method, refer to “9.2.5 [ 2 ] Reception PDO (from master to inverter)”, “(2) COB-ID”. Besides, it is
possible to set the transmission timing to periodical, for example. For information on this, refer to “9.2.5
[ 5 ] Communication parameters of transmission PDO”, “(3) Transmission type”.
Enable/disable setting of PDO
All PDOs are enabled by default. Set the bit 31 in COB-ID of each PDO to one to disable the PDO
(nonresponse).
The PDO protocol is available for use only in operational state.
It is recommended to change the PDO protocol when the inverter is in the Pre-Operational state.
9-15
[ 2 ] Reception PDO (from master to inverter)
(1) Reception PDO No.1
PDO Default COB-ID Name Re-

No. map
1 0x200+Node ID Control word (Default) Yes
User-defined Yes
User-defined Yes
User-defined Yes
Controlword: Controls the inverter's operation by operating the state machine with DSP 402
 For information about Controlword and state machine with DSP 402, refer to “9.2.10 [ 1 ] Operation according
to CANopen's drive profile (DSP 402)”.

No. map
2 0x300+Node ID Control word (Default) Yes
vl target velocity (r/min) (Default)
User-defined Yes
User-defined Yes
Controlword: Controls the inverter's operation by operating the state machine with DSP 402
vl target velocity: Speed command (r/min)
 For information about Controlword, vl control effort, and state machine with DSP 402, refer to “9.2.10 [ 1 ]
Operation according to CANopen's drive profile (DSP 402)”.
When you give the speed command (r/min), set the number of motor poles (P01/A15) properly according
to the applicable motor; otherwise the speed command (r/min) will be off.

The format for writing the mapped control codes by the inverter function codes y25 to y28/o40 to o43 in advance.
There are four types of mapped function codes.
No. map
3 0x400+Node ID Writing function code 1 (function code data specified by y25/o40) No
Writing function code 2 (function code data specified by y26/o41)
 For information on how to set y25 to y28/o40 to o43, refer to “9.2.5 [ 2 ] (4) How to set the inverter function
codes y25 to y32/o40 to o43, o48 to o51 and Indexes 5E00, 5E01”.
For information about data format of the mapped inverter function codes, refer to RS-485 Communication User's
Manual, Chapter 5, “5.2 Data Format”.
When the same function code is assigned by multiple inverter function codes, only the assignment by the
y / o code of the minimum number will be valid. (example: If the same function code is mapped by both
o40 and o43, only the mapping with y25 / o40 becomes effective. y28 / o43 is assumed that nothing is
mapped.)
After the setup of y25 to y28 / o40 to o43, in order to reflect the settings in the inverter, restart the inverter
or issue the ResetNode service to the inverter from the CANopen master.
The object's Indexes 5E00 sub 1 to 4 also can map the inverter function codes. In this case, the mappings
become effective immediately after the change. However, if the inverter is restarted or the ResetNode
service is issued, the mappings by y25 to y28 /o40 to o43 become effective.
The reflection timing of each reception PDO can be changed. Refer to “9.2.5 [ 4 ] Communication
parameters of reception PDO”, “(3) Transmission type”. The “change is reflected in the inverter
immediately after reception” by factory default.
9-16
(4) How to set the inverter function codes y25 to y32/o40 to o43, o48 to o51 and Indexes 5E00, 5E01
Specify the function code type (Table 9.2.5-3) and number in a 4-digit hexadecimal notation.
Function code No. (hexadecimal notation)

Function code type (according to Table 7.3)
Table 9.2.5-3 Function Code Types
Type Group code Type Group code Type Group code

― ― W 0x10 (16) H1 0x20 (32)
― ― X 0x11 (17) o1 0x21 (33)
S 0x02 (2) Z 0x12 (18) U1 0x22 (34)
M 0x03 (3) b 0x13 (19) M1 0x23 (35)
F 0x04 (4) d 0x14 (20) J1 0x24 (36)
E 0x05 (5) ― ― J2 0x25 (37)
C 0x06 (6) ― ― J3 0x26 (38)
P 0x07 (7) W1 0x17 (23) J4 0x27 (39)
H 0x08 (8) W2 0x18 (24) J5 0x28(40)
A 0x09 (9) W3 0x19 (25) J6 0x29(41)
o 0x0A (10) X1 0x1A (26) d1 0x2A (42)
L 0x0B (11) X2 0x1B (27)
r 0x0C (12) Z1 0x1C (28)
L1 0x0D (13) K 0x1D(29)
J 0x0E (14) T 0x1E(30)

y 0x0F (15) E1 0x1F (31)
Example: For F26 F  group code 04

26  1A (hexadecimal “041A”
notation)
9-17
[ 3 ] Transmission PDO (from inverter to master)

(1) Transmission PDO No.1

No. map
1 0x180+Node ID Status word (Default) Yes
User-defined Yes
User-defined Yes
User-defined Yes
Statusword: Display the status of state machine with DSP 402
 For information about Statusword and state machine with DSP 402, refer to “9.2.10 [ 1 ] Operation according
to CANopen's drive profile (DSP 402)”.

No. map
2 0x280+Node ID Status word (Default) Yes
vl control effort (r/min) (Default)
User-defined Yes
User-defined Yes
Statusword: Display the status of state machine with DSP 402

vl control effort: Monitor output speed (r/min)
 For information about Statusword and vl control effort, refer to “9.2.10 [ 1 ] Operation according to CANopen's
drive profile (DSP 402)”.
The format for reading the control codes mapped by the inverter function codes y29 to y32/o48 to o51 in advance.
There are four types of mapped function codes.
No. map
3 0x380+Node ID Reading function code 1 (function code data specified by y29/o48) No
Reading function code 2 (function code data specified by y30/o49)
 For information on y29 to y32/o48 to o51, refer to “9.2.5 [ 2 ] Reception PDO (from master to inverter)”, “(4)
How to set the inverter function codes y25 to y32/o40 to o43, o48 to o51 and Indexes 5E00, 5E01”.
 For information about data format of the mapped inverter function codes, refer to RS-485 Communication
User's Manual, Chapter 5, “5.2 Data Format”.
After the setup of y29 to y 32/ o48 to o51, in order to reflect the settings in the inverter, restart the inverter
or issue the ResetNode service to the inverter from the CANopen master.
The object indexes 5E01 sub 1 to 4 can map the inverter function codes. In this case, the mappings
become effective immediately after the change. However, if the inverter is restarted or the ResetNode
service is issued, the mappings with y29 to y 32/ o48 to o51 become effective.
The transmission timing of each transmission PDO can be changed. Refer to “9.2.5 [ 5 ]
Communication parameters of transmission PDO”, “(3) Transmission type”. The factory default is
“Transmit PDO upon data change and at the time specified by Event timer”.
9-18
[ 4 ] Communication parameters of reception PDO

(1) Communication parameters
Set the property of each reception PDO (RPDO). The Table 9.2.5-4 lists appropriate objects.
Table 9.2.5-4 Communication Parameters of Reception PDO and Default Values

Index Sub Name Description
0x1400 RPDO No.1 1 COB-ID Set CAN ID of each PDO and validity
0x1401 RPDO No.2 Default value:
0x1402 RPDO No.3 RPDO No.1: 0x200 + node ID
RPDO No.2: 0x300 + node ID
RPDO No.3: 0x400 + node ID
2 Transmission type Set the timing to reflect the received data in the
operation (table 9.2.5-5)
Default value: 255 (reflect it in the inverter
immediately)
The value changed of the objects listed in the Table 9.2.5-4 is held even if inverter is turned OFF.
(2) COB-ID
Specify 11 bit CAN ID value for each PDO. The default changes according to the node ID.
(Example: If the node ID of inverter is one, RPDO No.2 COB-ID = 0x301). If the most significant bit (31th bit) is
set to one, the RPDO will be invalid.

It is possible to change COB-ID only when the PDO is invalid.
CAN ID is 11 bit. The bits 11 to 30 are fixed at zero. (Only the standard frame is supported.)
(3) Transmission type
In the reception PDO, set the timing to reflect the received PDO in the inverter. The Table 9.2.5-5 lists the setting.
Table 9.2.5-5 Transmission Type Setting of Reception PDO

Transmission type Name Action
0 Acyclic Synchronous Reflects the received PDO in the inverter after receiving a
Sync signal
1-240 Cyclic Synchronous Same as above
241-251 Reserved ---
252 Synchronous RTR only No operation *
253 Asynchronous RTR only No operation *
254 Asynchronous1 Reflects the received PDO immediately in the inverter
255 Asynchronous2 Same as above (default)
*: The CANopen communication of inverter does not support the CAN's remote frame.
9-19
[ 5 ] Communication parameters of transmission PDO

(1) Communication parameters
Set the property of each transmission PDO (TPDO). The Table 9.2.5-6 lists appropriate objects.
Table 9.2.5-6 Communication Parameters of Transmission PDO and Default Values

Index Sub Name Description
0x1800 TPDO No.1 1 COB-ID Set CAN ID of each PDO and validity
0x1801 TPDO No.2 Default value:
0x1802 TPDO No.3 TPDO No.1: 0x180 + node ID
TPDO No.2: 0x280 + node ID
TPDO No.3: 0x380 + node ID
2 Transmission type Specify the transmission timing (table 9.2.5-7)
Default value: 255 (transmit data if the data changes)
3 Inhibit time Specify the minimum interval (unit: 0.1 ms) to next
transmission.
*
Default value: 100 (10.0 ms)
5 Event timer Specify periodical transmission time (ms). Valid when
the transmission type is 254/255
*
Default value: 0 (no operation)
*: The resolution of timer setting value is 2 ms. If an odd value is specified, the value is moved forward. For
example, if the timer is set to 119 ms, the value is assumed to be 120 ms.
The value changed of the objects listed in the Table 9.2.5-6 is held even if inverter is turned OFF.
(2) COB-ID
Specify 11 bit CAN ID value for each PDO. The default changes according to the node ID. (Example: If the node ID
of inverter is one, TPDO No.2 COB-ID = 0x281). If the most significant bit (31th bit) is set to one, the TPDO will be
invalid.
It is possible to change COB-ID only when the PDO is invalid.
CAN ID is 11 bit. The bits 11 to 30 are fixed at zero. (Only the standard frame is supported.)
(3) Transmission type
Set the transmission timing to the master for the transmission PDO. The TableTable 9.2.5-7 lists the setting.
Table 9.2.5-7 Transmission Type Setting of Transmission PDO

Transmission type Name Action
0 Acyclic Synchronous When the data is changed, transmits PDO immediately after
receiving a Sync signal
1-240 Cyclic Synchronous Transmits PDO every 1 to 240 times a sync signal is
received.
(Example: (if it is set to 10, transmits PDO every 10 times a
sync signal is received)
241-251 Reserved -
252 Synchronous RTR only No operation *
253 Asynchronous RTR only No operation *
254 Asynchronous1 Transmits PDO periodically at the time specified by Event
timer
255 Asynchronous2 Transmit PDO upon data change and at the time specified by
Event timer
*: The CANopen communication of inverter does not support the CAN's remote frame.
9-20
(4) Inhibit time
Set the minimum transmission interval (unit: 0.1 ms) for transmitting each PDO. All transmission types depend on
this setting.
It is possible to change Inhibit time only when the PDO is invalid, that is, COB-ID's bit 31 is set to one.
If a smaller value is set for the Inhibit time, the data transmission frequency becomes higher, thereby
increasing the CANopen communication traffic. As a result, the performance of the whole CANopen
network may be degraded. Adjust the setting value according to the network configuration used, please.
(5) Event timer
Set the periodical transmission interval (unit: 1 ms) for transmission PDO. Valid when the transmission type is 254
or 255.
[ 6 ] Changing PDO (RPDO/TPDO) mapping entry

Follow the procedure below to change mapping entries:
(1) Disable the PDO by changing the bit 31 of the relevant COB-ID entry to “1”.
Example) RPDO: Index 0x1400, Subindex 1, Bit31 = 1
TPDO: Index 0x1800, Subindex 1, Bit31 = 1
(2) Disable the PDO mapping by writing 0h in the subindex 0h of the relevant mapping entry.
Example) RPDO: Disable the current mapping and set Index 0x1600, Subindex 0 = 0.

TPDO: Disable the current mapping and set Index 0x1A00, Subindex 0 = 0.
(3) Configure the target new PDO mapping.
Example) RPDO: Index 0x1600, Subindex 1 through 4 = New object
TPDO: Index 0x1A00, Subindex 1 through 4 = New object
(4) Set the subindex 0h of the relevant mapping index to the number of objects to be mapped (n).
Example) RPDO: Index 0x1600, Subindex 0 = n
TPDO: Index 0x1A00, Subindex 0 = n
(5) Enable the PDO by changing the bit 31 of the relevant COB-ID entry to “0”.
Example) RPDO: Index 0x1400, Subindex 1, Bit31 = 0
TPDO: Index 0x1800, Subindex 1, Bit31 = 0
9-21
9.2.6 SDO protocol

[ 1 ] About SDO
The SDO (Service Data Object) protocol is used to set and adjust inverter. SDO enables to access all objects
(parameters) inverter. The CANopen communication of inverter supports a single Server SDO.
 For information about how to transmit data in SDO, refer to the manual of the master or configuration tool.
 For information about the objects, refer to “9.2.8 Object list”.
[ 2 ] Response on SDO error

If the access in SDO has an error, this communication card returns an Abort code listed in Table 9.2.6-1.
Table 9.2.6-1 Abort Codes on SDO Access Error

Abort codes Description
0503 0000 Error on divided SDO transmission: Improper toggle bit
0504 0000 Response timeout error
0601 0000 Unsupported access to an object
0601 0001 Write only object is read
0601 0002 Read only object is written
0602 0000 Parameter not existent
0604 0041 Object cannot be mapped to the PDO.
0604 0042 The number and length of the objects to be mapped would exceed PDO length.
0606 0000 Writing while EEPROM is running of inverter
0607 0010 Different parameter's data type
0607 0012 Data type does not match, length of service parameter too high.
0607 0013 Data type does not match, length of service parameter too low.
0609 0011 Accessed to the object without subindex
0609 0030 The value written is out of range
0609 0031 Value of parameter written too high.
0609 0032 Value of parameter written too low.
Inverter function code write error
0800 0021
(SO1, SO5, and SO6 are written by CANopen when the link to RS-485 communication port is valid)
0800 0022 Disabled to write inverter function code (running, writing, digital input terminal is ON)
9-22
9.2.7 Other services

(1) Network management (NMT)
Controls the DS 301 state machine. The Table 9.2.7-1 lists the behavior upon reception of each service.
Table 9.2.7-1 Behavior Upon Reception of NMT Services

Services Behavior on reception Remarks
PDO communication is valid only in Operational
Start_Remote_Node Enters into Operational state
state.
Stop_Remote_Node Enters into the Stop state. Only the NMT service is available in the Stop state.
Enter_Pre-Operational PDO communication is unavailable in the
Enters into Pre-Operational state.
Reset_Communication Pre-Operational state.
Reflects the node ID, y25 to y32/ o40 to o51 in the

Reset_Node Same as the power restart
operation.
 For more information on NMT, refer to the master's user's manual or CANopen specifications DS 301 issued
by CiA.
(2) Heartbeat and Node Guarding
A service for the disconnect detection. We recommend you to use either one.
 For information about Heartbeat and Node Guarding, refer to “9.2.11 Heartbeat and Node Guarding”.

Important: Either Heartbeat or Node Guarding is recommended
The setting for detecting disconnection in the CANopen device is invalid by default. Unless the setting is
enabled, the CANopen network including inverter can not detect a disconnection even if the disconnection
occurs. We strongly recommend to enable the setting.
(3) Emergency (EMCY)
This service enables inverter to automatically transmit the alarm occurred in the inverter. The format of the
transmission data is as follows:
COB-ID Byte0 Byte1 Byte2 Byte3 Byte4 Byte5 Byte6 Byte7

Error field Error
0x80 + node ID 0 0 0 0 0
(L byte) (H byte) register
Error field: Indicates the contents of alarm.

Error register: 1: alarm occurring, 0: no alarm. (same as Index 1001.)
 For more information on the alarm code, refer to “9.2.13 Alarm code list”.
9-23
9.2.8 Object list

This chapter describes the objects (parameters) supported by The CANopen communication of inverter. The
objects are classified into three types of areas.
(1) Communication profile area
(Indexes: 1000 to 1FFF)
The objects common to all devices for the CANopen communication. This area is defined in the CANopen
specifications DS 301.
(2) Manufacturer specific profile area (Indexes 2000 to 5FFF)
The objects only for our company. It is possible to access the inverter function codes, for example. Since they
are dedicated objects, they are not compatible with CANopen devices provided by other manufacturer.
(3) Standard device profile area (Indexes 6000 to 9FFF)
The objects for controlling the inverter. This area is standardized in the CANopen specifications DSP 402 and
is compatible with the devices provided by other companies.
[ 1 ] Objects in the communication profile area

Table 9.2.8-1 lists the objects in the communication profile area. In the access field, R represents read only, RW
represents readable & writable. In the data hold field, O represents that the written data is held after the power
OFF.
Table 9.2.8-1 Objects in the Communication Profile Area

Index
Sub Name Description Data type Access
(Hex)
1000 - Device type Fixed at 0x10192 UNSIGNED32 R
1001 - Error register 1: Error, 0: No error UNSIGNED8 R
1003 - Pre-defined error field ARRAY -
Number of errors occurred
0 Number of errors UNSIGNED8 R
1: one error, 0: no error
Displays the code of the occurring error
1 Standard error field UNSIGNED32 R
(For details, refer to the table 14.1)
COB-ID of the SYNC message
1005 - COB-ID SYNC UNSIGNED32 RW
Default value: 0x080
Device name:
Manufacturer device Built-in CAN: “FRN-E2-COP”
1008 - STRING R
name Option CAN: “OPC-E2-COP”
(ASCII) fixed
Manufacturer HW Hardware version:
1009 - “SP0146” (ASCII) STRING R
version Control PCB No. for E2S
Manufacturer SW Software version:
100A - “E2S1-” + code M25 STRING R
version (same as the inverter ROM Version)
Guarding reception cycle setting (ms)
100C - Guard time UNSIGNED16 RW
Guarding time coefficient
100D - Life time factor UNSIGNED8 RW
COB-ID of the EMCY message
1014 - COB-ID EMCY UNSIGNED32 R
Read value: 0x0080 + node ID
- Consumer heartbeat time ARRAY -
0 Number of entries Number of configurations UNSIGNED8 R
1016 Upper word: Node ID to be monitored
Consumer heartbeat
1 Lower word: Heartbeat monitoring cycle UNSIGNED32 RW
time
Producer heartbeat Transmission cycle of Heartbeat message
1017 - UNSIGNED16 RW
time Default value: 0 (no operation)
- Identity Object RECORD -
0 Number of entries Number of subindexes: 1 UNSIGNED8 R
1018
0x0000025E
1 Vendor ID UNSIGNED32 R
(Fuji Electric Group)
- Server SDO parameter RECORD -
1200 1 COB-ID C->S (rx) 0x600 + station No. UNSIGNED32 R
2 COB-ID S->C (tx) 0x580 + station No. UNSIGNED32 R
9-24
Index
(Hex)
- 1st Receive PDO Communication Parameter RECORD -
COB-ID of RPDO No.1 *1
1 COB-ID UNSIGNED32 RW
Default value: 0x200 + node ID
1400
Select the transmission type
Default value: 255
2 Transmission type UNSIGNED8 RW
(Change of state event)
(refer to Tables 9.2.5-5, 9.2.5-6)
- 2nd Receive PDO Communication Parameter RECORD -
1401
Default value: 255
(refer to Tables 9.2.5-5, 9.2.5-6)
- 3rd Receive PDO Communication Parameter RECORD -
1402
Default value: 255
(refer to Tables 9.2.5-5, 9.2.5-6)
- 1st Receive PDO Mapping Parameter RECORD -
Number of mapped
0 Number of mapped objects: 1 (up to 4) UNSIGNED8 R
objects
0x60400010
1600 1 PDO mapping entry1 UNSIGNED32 R
(Controlword)
2 PDO mapping entry2 Default value: No mapping UNSIGNED32 R
- 2nd Receive PDO Mapping Parameter RECORD -
Number of mapped

objects
0x60400010
1 PDO mapping entry1 UNSIGNED32 R
1601 (Controlword)
0x60420010
(vl target velocity)
- 3rd Receive PDO Mapping Parameter RECORD -
Number of mapped
0 Number of mapped objects: 4 UNSIGNED8 R
objects
0x5F020110
(writing function code mapping 1)
1602 0x5F020210
0x5F020310
0x5F020410
- 1st Transmit PDO Communication Parameter RECORD -
0 Largest sub-index Maximum sub-index No.: 5 UNSIGNED8 R
COB-ID of TPDO No.1 *1
Default value: 255
1800
(refer to Tables 9.2.5-6, 9.2.5-7)
Waiting time for transmission (unit: 0.1 ms) *2
3 Inhibit time UNSIGNED16 RW
Periodical transmission interval (unit: 1 ms)
Transmission type
5 Event timer UNSIGNED16 RW
Valid at the time of 254 or 255.
Default value: 0 (not used)
9-25
Index
(Hex)
- 2nd Transmit PDO Communication Parameter RECORD -
Default value: 255
1801
(refer to Tables 9.2.5-6, 9.2.5-7)
Transmission type
- 3rd Transmit PDO Communication Parameter RECORD -
Default value: 255
1802
(refer to Tables 9.2.5-6, 9.2.5-7)
Transmission type
- 1st Transmit PDO Mapping Parameter RECORD -
Number of mapped
objects
0x60410010
1A00 1 PDO mapping entry1 UNSIGNED32 R
(Statusword)
- 2nd Transmit PDO Mapping Parameter RECORD -
Number of mapped
objects
0x60410010
1A01 (Statusword)
0x60440010
(vl control effort)
- 3rd Transmit PDO Mapping Parameter RECORD -
Number of mapped
0 Number of mapped objects: 4 UNSIGNED8 R
objects
0x5F030110
(reading function code mapping 1)
1A02 0x5F030210
0x5F030310
0x5F030410
*1: The change of COB-ID will be possible after writing one into the bit 31.
*2: The change of Inhibit timer is possible when the concerned PDO is invalid (COB-ID's bit 31 is one).
9-26
[2] Objects in the profile area specific to Fuji Electric

Table 9.2.8-2 lists the objects in the profile area specific to Fuji Electric. In the access field, R represents read only,
RW represents readable & writable. In the data hold field, O represents that the written data is held after the power
OFF.
Table 9.2.8-2 Objects in the Profile Area Specific to Fuji Electric

Index
(Hex)
CAN communication state
0: Normal
2200 0 Bus state UNSIGNED8 R
1: Bus off/error passive
2: Other error
CANopen communication state
0: CAN not connected
1: Initializing
3000 0 Node state UNSIGNED8 R
2: Stopped
3: Pre-Operational
4: Operational
- Assignment of RPDO No.3 ARRAY -
0 Number of entries Number of configurations: 4 UNSIGNED8 R
(writing function code mapping 1 for PDO No.3)
1 Function code1 UNSIGNED16 RW
Default value: Setting value of y25 / o40
5E00 (writing function code mapping 2 for PDO No.3)
*2 2 Function code2 UNSIGNED16 RW
- Assignment of TPDO No.3 ARRAY -

(reading function code mapping 1 for PDO No.3)
1 Function code1 UNSIGNED16 -
5E01 (reading function code mapping 2 for PDO No.3)
*2 2 Function code2 UNSIGNED16 RW
Inverter function code access
[How to specify function code]
5F02 to
1 to FRENIC's function Index=5F□□, Sub=xx *1
5FFF UNSIGNED16 RW
*3 100 code □□: type (table 9.2.5-3)
xx: number + 1
Example: E01 Index 5F05, Sub 02
*1: Writable only in Pre-Operational state.

*2: For information on how to specify the function code, refer to “9.2.5 [ 2 ] Reception PDO (from master to
inverter)”, “(4) How to set the inverter function codes y25 to y32/o40 to o43, o48 to o51 and Indexes 5E00,
5E01”.
If the function code mapping is changed by the Indexes 5E00, 5E01, the change is reflected in the
inverter immediately. If the inverter is restarted or the ResetNode service is received, the mapping with
y25 to y32 / o40 to o43 and o48 to o51 becomes effective.
*3: For information on the function code type, refer to “9.2.5 [ 2 ] (4) How to set the inverter function codes y25 to
y32/o40 to o43, o48 to o51 and Indexes 5E00, 5E01”. For information about data format of the inverter
function codes, refer to RS-485 Communication User's Manual, Chapter 5, “5.2 Data Format”.
*4: The inverter function codes S01, S05, S06, S07, S12, S13, and S19 are cleared after the power OFF.
9-27
9.2.9 Standard device profile area

Table 9.2.9-1 lists the objects in the standard device profile area specific. In the access field, R represents read
only, W represents write only, and RW represents readable & writable. In the data hold field, O represents that the
written data is held after the power OFF.
Table 9.2.9-1 Objects in Standard Device Profile Area
Index
(Hex)
Alarm history (latest)
603F - Error code UNSIGNED16 R
(For details, refer to the Table 14.1)
Operation control
6040 - Controlword UNSIGNED16 RW
(DS 402 state machine control)
Status monitor
6041 - Statusword UNSIGNED16 R
(display the DS 402 state machine status)
6042 - vl target velocity Speed command (r/min) INTEGER16 RW
6043 - vl velocity demand Monitor the output speed (r/min) INTEGER16 R
6044 - vl control effort ditto INTEGER16 R
- vl velocity min max amount ARRAY -
vl velocity min Lower limit speed (r/min)
6046 1 UNSIGNED32 RW
amount (corresponding to the inverter function code F16)
Maximum speed (r/min)
vl velocity max
2 (corresponding to the inverter function codes UNSIGNED32 RW
amount
F03/A01 *1)
vl velocity acceleration
- (Delta speed/Delta time sets the acceleration. It corresponds to the RECORD -
inverter function code S08)
6048 0 Number of entries Number of subindexes: 2 UNSIGNED8 R
1 Delta speed Speed increment (r/min) for Delta time UNSIGNED32 RW
2 Delta time Time (s) UNSIGNED16 RW
vl velocity deceleration
- (Delta speed/Delta time sets the deceleration. It corresponds to the RECORD -
inverter function code S09)
6049
1 Delta speed Delta time sets the deceleration (r/min) UNSIGNED32 RW
vl velocity quick stop
- (Delta speed/Delta time sets the deceleration. It corresponds to the RECORD -
inverter function code H56)
604A 0 Number of entries Number of subindexes: 2 UNSIGNED8 R
1 Delta speed Delta time sets the deceleration (r/min) UNSIGNED32 RW
Changes the resolution and range for the speed
- vl set-point factor ARRAY -
setting
Highest sub-index Number of subindexes: 2
0 INTEGER16 R
604B supported
vl set-point factor -32768 to +32767
1 INTEGER16 RW
numerator (Except for 0; treated as “1” when the
2 vl set-point setting is made.) INTEGER16 RW
Number of motor poles
604D - vl pole number (corresponds to the inverter function codes UNSIGNED8 RW
P01/A15 *1)
6060 - Modes of operation Select the DS 402's mode INTEGER8 W
Modes of operation Selected state of the DS 402's mode
6061 - INTEGER8 R
display Always fixed at 2=Velocity mode
6077 - Torque actual value Actual value of instantaneous torque INTEGER16 R
6078 - Current actual value Actual value of output current INTEGER16 R
*1: The corresponding inverter function code automatically changes according to the motor's selected state.
 For information about mode selection, refer to Chapter 5, “5.3.6 A codes”.
*2: If the power is turned OFF, the acceleration and deceleration slope values are held.
9-28
9.2.10 Inverter operation in CANopen communication

This chapter describes the inverter's operation by using the CANopen communication.
There are the following two ways to run the inverter:
1. Operation according to CANopen's drive profile (DSP 402)
2. Operation according to the inverter function code S06
[ 1 ] Operation according to CANopen's drive profile (DSP 402)

(1) Related object list
Index
(Hex)
6040 - Controlword Controls the state change of state machine UNSIGNED16 RW
6041 - Statusword Displays the current state. UNSIGNED16 R
6042 - vl target velocity Speed command (r/min) INTEGER16 RW
6044 - vl control effort Monitor the output speed (r/min) INTEGER16 R
Modifies the resolution and specified range
604B - vl set-point factor ARRAY RW
of the speed settings.
As for the inverter's operation, PDO No.2 is useful which can send both Controlword and speed
command at the same time.

(2) Description of related object
 Controlword
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Fault Enable Quick Enable

0 0 0 Switch on
reset operation stop voltage
X4 X3 X2 X1 Reverse 0 0 Halt
bits 0 to 3 : Operates the state change of state machine. Refer to Figure 11.1.
bit 7 Fault reset : Resets the alarm by change from zero to one.
bit 8 Halt : 1= Fixes the inverter's output speed at 0 r/min.
bit 11 Reverse : Sets the rotation direction. 0= rotates forward, 1=rotates backward
bits 12 to 15 : Digital input terminal X1 to X4. 0=OFF, 1=ON
9-29
 Statusword
Switch on Quick Voltage Operation Switched Ready to

Warning Fault
disabled stop enabled enabled On switch on
Direction Internal Target

0 0 0 Remote 0
of rotation limit active reached
bits 0 to 2, 5, 6 : Displays the state machine status. Refer to Figure 11.1.

bit 3 Fault : 1= Tripping
bit 4 Voltage enabled : 1= Main circuit ON
bit 7 Warning : Not used. Fixed at 0.
bit 9 Remote : 1= Either speed or operation command is enabled through CANopen.
bit 10 Target reached : 1= Reached to preset speed.
bit 11 Internal limit active : 1= The torque, voltage, or current limit is limited.
bit 15 Direction of rotation : 0= Normal rotation or stop, 1= Reverse rotation
 vl target velocity
Issues a speed command on a r/min basis. Valid range: -32768 r/min to 32767 r/min
 vl control effort
Displays the current output speed on a r/min basis. Output range: -32768 r/min to 32767 r/min
9-30
(3) State Machine
To run the inverter, operate the state machine (state transition diagram) defined with DSP 402. The state of the
state machine is changed by Controlword (CTW in the figure) and the state is monitored by Statusword (STW in
the figure). The Figure 9.2.10-1 shows the state machine and the Table 9.2.10-1 shows the commands to the
inverter during each state transition.
The inverter enters into running state by putting the state machine in the state 5 “Operation enabled” in
the Table 9.2.10-1.
Caution:
Since upper bytes of CTW and
STW are independent of state Start
machine, the description is omitted Every state
1: True, 0: False, x: Don't care
13 Alarm occur
1. Not Ready to switch on 7.Fault reaction active

STW = x00x 0000 STW = x0xx 1111
Trip cleared 14 Output shut off (trip)

Internal initialization finished 1 or
CTW = 1xxx xxxx
8. Fault
15
2. Switch on disabled STW = x00x 1000
STW = x10x 0000

9 CTW=0xxx 0000

CTW=0xxx xx0x
CTW=0xxx x110 2 7 or
CTW=0xxx x0xx
3. Ready to switch on CTW=0xxx xx0x

10 or
STW = x01x 0001 CTW=0xxx x0xx
Output shut off

CTW=0xxx x111 or 12
3 6 CTW=0xxx 0110
CTW = 0xxx x00x
4. Switched on
8 CTW=0xxx x110
STW = x01x 0011
CTW=0xxx 1111 4 5 CTW=0xxx 0111

CTW=0xxx x01x
5. Operation enabled 6. Quick stop active
11
STW = x01x 0111 STW = x00x 0111
Figure 9.2.10-1 State Machine
Table 9.2.10-1 Correspondence of the States of State Machine and Inverter

State No. Name State of inverter
1 Not Ready to switch on Initializing the CANopen
2 Switch on disabled Inverter's alarm cleared
3 Ready to switch on Inverter output shut off
4 Switched on Inverter stopped (running command OFF)
5 Operation enabled Inverter running (running command ON)
6 Quick stop active Inverter stopped urgently (for the time set in Index 604A)
7 Fault reaction active Alarm detected
8 Fault Inverter tripping
9-31
(4) Communication example

This section describes the communication example when running the inverter by controlling the DSP 402 state
machine. In the description, PDO No.2 is used. Besides, the following conditions are assumed:
- Node ID of inverter (inverter function code y21 / o31 of this communication card) =1
- Transmission PDO Nos. 1 and 3 are invalid.
That is, Index 1800 sub1=0x80000181, Index 1802 sub1=0x80000381
- Other CANopen's objects are set to default
- Inverter function code y98 =3
The format of PDO No.2 is as follows:

■ Reception PDO (from master to inverter)
COB-ID Byte0 Byte1 Byte2 Byte3
Controlword vl_target_velocity
0x301
(L byte) (H byte) (L byte) (H byte)
■ Transmission PDO (from inverter to master)

COB-ID Byte0 Byte1 Byte2 Byte3
Statusword vl_control_effort
0x281
(L byte) (H byte) (L byte) (H byte)
1) If Start_Remote_Node service is received, the inverter moves to Operational state to enable the PDO
communication. At the same time as the state change, the transmission PDO No.2 responds as follows: The
lower byte of Statusword (Byte0, 1) = 50 indicates that the state machine is in the state 2.
Transmission PDO COB-ID Byte0 Byte1 Byte2 Byte3

(from inverter to master)
0x281 50 02 00 00
2) Here, change the state from 2 to 3. Transmit the data below to Controlword (Byte0, 1).
Reception PDO COB-ID Byte0 Byte1 Byte2 Byte3

(from master to inverter)
0x301 06 00 00 00
As shown above, the transmission PDO responds as follows. The lower byte of Statusword (Byte0, 1) = 31
indicates that the state is 3.

0x281 31 02 00 00
3) Next, change the state from 3 to 4. Transmit the data below to Controlword (Byte0, 1).

0x301 07 00 00 00
As shown above, the transmission PDO responds as follows. The lower byte of Statusword (Byte0, 1) = 33
indicates that the state is 4.

0x281 33 02 00 00
9-32
4) Issue the change of the state from 4 to 5 (normal rotation command) and a speed command. The speed
command enters 1800 r/min (=0x0708) into vl_target_velocity (Byte2, 3).

0x301 0F 00 08 07
Thus, the inverter enters into running state and starts to raise to 1800 r/min. The lower byte of Statusword
(Byte0, 1) = 37 indicates that the state is 5. Also, since the value in the speed monitor vl_control_effort (Byte2,
3) changes during the acceleration, the inverter transmits the data below continuously until it reaches the
speed.

0x281 37 02 ** **
5) To stop the inverter, change the state from 5 to 4.

0x301 07 00 08 07
As shown above, the inverter is decelerated. The lower byte of Statusword (Byte0, 1) = 33 indicates that the
state is 4. Also, since the value in the speed monitor vl_control_effort (Byte2, 3) changes during the

acceleration, the inverter transmits the data below continuously until it stops.

0x281 33 02 ** **
9-33
[2] Operation according to the inverter function code S06

Important: In order to enable the running command with S06, it is necessary to meet all conditions below:
- Both reception PDO Nos. 1 and 2 are invalid.
That is, Index 1400 sub1=0x80000xxx, Index 1401 sub1=0x80000xxx
- The DSP 402 state machine is in the state 2.
- The inverter function code y98 = 2 or 3.
Index
(Hex)
5F02 07 Inverter function code S06 Running command (note) UNSIGNED16 RW
5F03 0F Inverter function code M14 Running status monitor UNSIGNED16 R
5F02 06 Inverter function code S05 Frequency command (unit: 0.01 Hz) INTEGER16 RW
Output frequency monitor (unit: 0.01
5F03 0A Inverter function code M09 INTEGER16 R
Hz)
The inverter operation with S06 does not follow the DSP 402 state machine.
Therefore, Statusword does not indicates the inverter's status. Use M14.
PDO No.3 is useful for the operation with S06. For information about PDO
No.3, refer to “9.2.5 PDO protocol”.
(2) Description of related object
■ Function code S06 only for the inverter communication

- X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 REV FWD
RST XR XF 0 0 0 0 0
bit 0 FWD: 1= normal rotation command

bit 1 REV: 1= reverse rotation command
bits 2 to 10, X1 to X5: Communication control input terminal (FRENIC-Ace supports X1 to X5)
bits 13, 14, XF, XR: Communication control input terminal, XF (FWD) terminal, XR (REV) terminal
bit 15 RST: Change value 0 to 1 for the bit to release the trip
9-34
■ Function code M14 only for the inverter communication

VL TL NUV BRK INT EXT REV FWD
BUSY 0 0 RL ALM DEC ACC IL
bit 0 FWD: 1= normal rotating

bit 1 REV: 1= reverse rotating
bit 2 EXT: 1= DC braking or pre-exciting
bit 3 INT: 1= inverter shut off
bit 4 BRK: 1= braking
bit 5 NUV: 1= DC link established
bit 6 TL: 1= torque limiting
bit 7 VL: 1= voltage limiting
bit 8 IL: 1= current limiting
bit 9 ACC: 1= accelerating
bit 10 DEC: 1= decelerating
bit 11 ALM: 1= batch alarm

bit 12 RL: 1= valid communication
bit 15 BUSY: 1= function code writing
■ Function code S05 only for the inverter communication

Issue a frequency command on a 0.01 Hz basis. Setting range: -327.68 Hz to 327.67 Hz
■ Function code M09 only for the inverter communication

Displays the current output frequency on a 0.01 Hz basis. Output range: -327.68 Hz to 327.67 Hz
9-35
(3) Communication example

This section describes the communication example when running the inverter by using S06. In the description,
PDO No.3 is used. Besides, the following conditions are assumed:
- Node ID of inverter (y21 o31 of this communication card) =1
- Mapping of PDO No.3
y25 / o40=0206 (write function code 1=S06) y29 / o48=030E (read function code 1=M14)
y26 / o41=0205 (write function code 2=S05) y30 / o49=0309 (read function code 2=M09)
y27 / o42=0000 (write function code 3=none) y31 / o50=0000 (read function code 3=none)
y28 / o43=0000 (write function code 4=none) y32 / o51=0000 (read function code 4=none)
- Reception PDO Nos. 1 and 2 are invalid.
- Transmission PDO Nos. 1 and 2 are invalid.
- Other CANopen's objects are set to default
- Inverter function code y98 =3
The format of PDO No.3 mapped above is as follows:

■ Reception PDO (from master to inverter)

Terminal Terminal
S06 S05 command command
0x401
(L byte) (H byte) (L byte) (H byte) assigned assigned
Disable Disable
■ Transmission PDO (from inverter to master)

Terminal Terminal
M14 M09 command command
0x381
(L byte) (H byte) (L byte) (H byte) assigned assigned
Disable Disable
9-36
1) If Start_Remote_Node service is received from, the inverter moves to Operational state (RUN LED lights up in
green) to enable the PDO communication. At the same time as the state change, the transmission PDO No.3
responds as follows:
Transmission PDO COB-ID Byte0 Byte1 Byte2 Byte3 Bytes 4 to 7

(from inverter to master) 00000000
0x381 28 10 00 00
2) In this case, S06=1 (FWD=1) as a running command and S05=50.00 Hz (=0x1388) as a frequency command
are transmitted.
Reception PDO COB-ID Byte0 Byte1 Byte2 Byte3 Bytes 4 to 7

(from master to inverter) 00000000
0x401 01 00 88 13
Thus, the inverter enters into a running state. The transmission PDO are as follows when the speed is
reached:

0x381 21 10 88 13
3) To stop the inverter, transmit S06=0 (FWD=0).

0x401 00 00 88 13
The FWD OFF command lets the inverter decelerate. After the stop, the transmission PDO responds as
follows.

0x381 28 10 00 00
4) To run the inverter in reverse, transmit S06=2 (REV=1).

0x401 02 00 88 13
Thus, the inverter enters into a reverse running state. The responses are as follows when the speed is
reached:

0x381 22 10 88 13
00
9-37
9.2.11 Heartbeat and Node Guarding

The Heartbeat and Node Guarding services are provided for detecting disconnection. We recommend you to use
either one.
Important: The use of either Heartbeat or Node Guarding is recommended

The setting for detecting disconnection in the CANopen device is invalid by default. Unless the setting is
enabled, the CANopen network including inverter can not detect a disconnection even if the disconnection
occurs. We strongly recommend to enable the setting.
[ 1 ] Heartbeat
Heartbeat is to detect the disconnection in the CANopen network by monitoring the signals from the specified
node.
 For more information about detailed behavior of Heartbeat, refer to the CANopen specifications DS 301.
Do not use both Heartbeat and Node Guarding at the same time. If they are used at the same time, the
disconnection is not detected properly. To use Heartbeat, make Node Guarding invalid, that is, set Index
100C=0 and Index 100D=0 (refer to 9.2.11 [ 2 ] ).
Index
(Hex)
- Consumer heartbeat time ARRAY -
Upper word: Node ID to be
1016 monitored
1 Consumer heartbeat time Lower word: Heartbeat monitoring UNSIGNED32 RW
time
Transmission cycle of Heartbeat
1017 - Producer heartbeat time message UNSIGNED16 RW
(2) Consumer heartbeat time
Monitors whether the Heartbeat signals are received from the specified node ID (Heartbeat producer) at a preset
interval. The format is as follows: If the Heartbeat signal can not be received over monitoring time, the
disconnection is deemed to occur.
 For information on the behavior upon the CANopen disconnection, refer to 9.2.12 “Behavior upon detection of
CANopen network disconnection”.
Byte0 Byte1 Byte2 Byte3 Byte4 Byte5 Byte6 Byte7
Node ID to be
0000 Heartbeat monitoring time (ms)
monitored
(3) Producer Heartbeat time
Automatically transmits the Heartbeat signals continuously at the preset interval (on a 1 ms basis). Other node
(Heartbeat consumer) monitors this Heartbeat signals.
9-38
[2] Node Guarding

Node Guarding is a scheme to detect disconnections by monitoring the guarding signals periodically sent from the
master.
 For more information about detailed behavior of Node Guarding, refer to the CANopen specifications DS 301.
Do not use both Heartbeat and Node Guarding at the same time. If they are used at the same time, the
disconnection is not detected properly. To use Node Guarding, make Heartbeat invalid, that is, set Index
1016=0 and Index 1017=0 (refer to 9.2.11 [ 1 ] ).
Index
(Hex)
Guarding reception cycle setting (ms)
100C - Guard time UNSIGNED16 RW
Guarding time coefficient Default value:
100D - Life time factor UNSIGNED8 RW
0 (no operation)
(2) Guard time and Life time factor
Sets the receive interval of Guarding signals from the master. If the Guarding signal can not be received over
preset receiving time, the disconnection is deemed to occur.
Set the receive interval in the equation below:
Guarding receive interval (ms) = Guard time (ms) × Life time factor

Example: Guard time=100ms, Life time factor =5:
Guarding receive interval (ms) = 100 ms × 5 = 500 ms
 For information on the behavior upon the CANopen disconnection, refer to 9.2.12 “Behavior upon detection of
CANopen network disconnection”.
9-39
9.2.12 Behavior upon detection of CANopen network disconnection

The inverter function codes y34 / o27 y35 / and o28 set up the behavior (Table 9.2.12-1) when the inverter detects
the disconnection of the CANopen network.
Note that the inverter determines under the conditions below that a disconnection occurred:
• Consumer heartbeat or Node Guarding detect the disconnection.
• The bus-off occurs in CAN
 For more information about Heartbeat consumer or Node Guarding, refer to “9.2.11 Heartbeat and Node
Guarding”.
 If a disconnection occurs, the inverter switches to Pre-Operational and PDO becomes unavailable.
Table 9.2.12-1 Behavior Setting upon Detection of CANopen Network Disconnection (y34 / o27, y35 / o28)
y34 / o27 y35 / o28 Behavior upon disconnect detection Remarks
0, Invalid Immediately coast to stop & trip, er5

4 to 9
1 0.0 s to 60.0 s After the lapse of the time specified by y35 / o28, coast
to stop, er5.
2 0.0 s to 60.0 s If data is input within the time specified by y35 / o28,
ignore the error. Time over and coast to stop, er5.
3, Invalid Keep the current operation, ignoring the If a communication error is
13 to 15 communication error. (er5.) detected, LED indicates a
communication error.
10 Invalid Immediately decelerate to a stop. er5 after stop. The forcible deceleration time
depends on the inverter function
code F08.
11 0.0 s to 60.0 s After the lapse of the time specified by y35 / o28, ditto
decelerate to a stop, resulting in er5.
12 0.0 s to 60.0 s If data is input within the time specified by y35 / o28, Same as above
ignore the error. If the time is over, decelerate to a
stop, resulting in er5.
9-40
9.2.13 Alarm code list

There are following two ways to read alarm codes via CANopen when the inverter trips.
1. Read the alarm code defined in CANopen from Index 1003 sub1 Standard error field or Index 603F Error code
For reference: When an alarm on occurs, EMCY message is automatically sent to the CANopen master (see
9.2.7) and the alarm code is written into Index 1003 sub1 Standard error field and Index 603F Error code.
However, since the EMCY message is not held, the message can not be read afterward.
2. Use the inverter function codes M16, M17, M18, and M19 to read the alarm codes (latest, first, second, and
third most recent alarm codes)
The Table 9.2.13-1 lists the alarm codes:
Table 9.2.13-1 Alarm Code List
Alarm code Alarm code

Content Display Content Display
Error field M16 to M19 Error field M16 to M19
0000 0 (00H) No alarm --- 7310 27 (1BH) Overspeed protection 0 s
2310 1 (01H) Over current (accelerating) 0c1 7301 28 (1CH) PG disconnection pg
2310 2 (02H) Over current (decelerating) 0c2 7300 29 (1DH) NTC thermistor nrb
disconnected
2310 3 (03H) Over current (constant rate) 0c3 5500 31 (1FH) Memory error er1
2120 5 (05H) Ground fault ef 7520 32 (20H) Communication error for er2
the keypad
3210 6 (06H) Overvoltage (accelerating) 0u1 5220 33 (21H) CPU error er3
3210 7 (07H) Overvoltage (decelerating) 0u2 7510 34 (22H) Communication card er4
hardware error
3210 8 (08H) Overvoltage (constant rate 0u3 8100 35 (23H) Option error er5
or stopping)

3220 10 (0AH) Undervoltage lu F004 36 (24H) Operation error er6
3130 11 (0BH) Open input phase lIn 7200 37 (25H) Tuning error er7
5450 14 (0EH) Fuse disconnection fus 7510 38 (26H) RS-485 communication er8
error (COM port 1)
5440 16 (10H) Charging circuit error pbf 3300 46 (0EH) Open output phase 0pl
4210 17 (11H) Heat sink overheat 0h1 8400 47 (2FH) Speed mismatch ere
(excessive speed
deviation)
9000 18 (12H) Enable external alarm trip 0h2 3221 51 (33H) Data save error during erf
undervoltage
4210 19 (13H) Inverter internal overheat 0h3 7510 53 (35H) RS-485 communication erp
error
(COM port 2)
4310 20 (14H) Motor protection (PTC/NTC 0h4 8100 54 (36H) Hardware error erh
thermistor)
4210 22 (16H) Braking resistor overheat dbh 8100 55 (37H) CAN communication error ert
4310 23 (17H) Overload of motor 1 0l1 7200 58 (3AH) PID feedback wire break cof
4310 24 (18H) Overload of motor 2 0l2 5400 59 (3BH) Braking transistor broken dba
4110 25 (19H) Inverter overload 0lu
FF00 254 (FEH) Mock alarm err
8110 --- CAN overrun (Note) ---
8120 --- CAN error passive (Note) ---
8130 --- Guarding error or hard beat ---
error
(CANopen communication
disconnect detection)
(Note)
8140 --- Recovery from CAN bus-off ---
(Note)
Note: After this error occurred, the inverter generates er5 according to the y34 / o27 setting.
9-41
9.2.14 Other points to note

Here, lists the points to note when using the CANopen communication:
(1) Avoid setting Transmission type 255 for the transmission PDO Nos. 2 and 3 at the same time (transmitted each
time the data changes) and setting Inhibit time to zero. The CANopen communication traffic rises due to the
frequency of the data change so that intended feature can not be met. Reduce either one of transmission
frequency (set larger Inhibit time, use Sync signal, etc.)
(2) The resolution of the timer is 2 ms. Consequently, if odd timer value is set for the object whose timer can be set,
the value is moved forward. For example, if the timer is set to 21 ms, the value is assumed to be 22 ms.
(3) To cancel the auto-tuning (writing data into the inverter function code P04 and A18) over the CANopen
communication, write zero into each inverter function code.
(4) If the same object is mapped in the same RPDO, the information mapped later will be valid.
Example: If CTW is mapped in all elements of RPDO1, only the last data is valid.
6040 6040 6040 6040
Invalid Invalid Invalid Valid
(5) Relationship between 6043 and 6044 in TPDO

• The simultaneity of numeric value is not guaranteed in order to poll internal data.
• Since 6043 is a request and 6044 is a feedback, in order to use the numeric value simply,
it is recommended to map in order of 6043 and 6044.
9.2.15 Keypad LED operation monitor “3_40”

The status of CAN communication is displayed in the LED operation monitor item “3_40” in the keypad.
Display CANopen state LED Display

Data
item
No-operation state (no operation is
0
selected)
“Stop” state 1
3_40
“Pre-Operational” state 2
“Operational” state 3
9-42
9.3 FRENIC Loader Overview
FRENIC Loader is a software tool that supports the operation of the inverter via an RS-485 communication.
This software allows you to edit, set, and manage the inverter function codes, monitor running data, and
remotely operate the operation and stop, as well as monitor the running status and alarm history.
With special order-made inverters, FRENIC Loader may not be able to display some function
codes normally.
 For details, refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual.
9.3.1 Modes
Item Modes Remarks
Name Inverter support loader (FRENIC Loader)
Supported inverter FRENIC-MEGA/Multi/Eco/Mini (Note 1)
Number of connected USB connection: 1
inverters RS-485 connection: Up to 31
Recommended cable Cable (10BASE-T or more) compliant with For the RS-485 interface
EIA568
RJ-45 connector
CPU Intel Pentium III 600 MHz or later (Note 2)
OS Microsoft Windows XP (32 bit) (Note 3)
Operating environment
Microsoft Vista (32 bit)

Microsoft 7 (32 bit, 64 bit)
Memory RAM area with 512 MB or more 1GB or more is recommended.
Hard disk 20 MB or more of empty area

COM port RS-232C (conversion to RS-485
communication is required to connect
inverters) or USB
Monitor 800 x 600 or higher XGA (1024×768) 32 bit Color or
more monitor is recommended.
COM port COM1 to COM255 PC COM ports assigned to
Loader
Transmission speed USB connection: 19200 bps or more is
Between loader and keypad recommended
(Note 4)
Transmission requirements
= fixed at 12 Mbps
Between keypad and inverter
= fixed at 19200 (bps)
RS-485 connection:
38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400 (bps)
Character length 8 bit Prefixed
Stop bit length 1 bit Prefixed
Parity Even Prefixed
No. of retries None or 1 to 10 No. of retry times before detecting
communication error
Timeout setting 100 ms, 300 ms, 500 ms, 1.0 s to 1.5 s to 1.9 s, Set longer than the “Response
2.0 to 9.0 s, 10.0 to 60.0 s interval time y09”
Note 1: The loader model is unavailable which does not support the protocol for loader commands (SX
protocol).
Note 2: Use a PC with as high a performance as possible, since some slow PCs may not properly
refresh the operation monitoring and test-running windows.
Note 3: Only Microsoft Windows XP service pack 2 (SP2) or more is supported.
Note 4: To connect to the network where there is a FRENIC-Mini inverter, choose 19200 bps or below.
9-43
9.3.2 Connection
By connecting a number of inverters to one PC, you can control one inverter at a time or a number of
inverters simultaneously. You can also simultaneously monitor a number of inverters on the multi monitor.
 For how to connect a PC to one or more inverters, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual
(MEH448).
9.3.3 Function overview
[ 1 ] Configuring inverter's function code

You can set, edit, and check the setting of the inverter’s function code data.
List and Edit
In List and edit, you can list and edit function codes with function code No., name, set value, set range, and
factory default.
You can also list function codes by any of the following groups according to your needs:
• Function code group
• Function codes that have been modified from their factory defaults
• Result of comparison with the settings of the inverter
• Result of search by function code name
• User-specified function code set
etc.
9-44
Comparison
You can compare the function code data currently being edited with that saved in a file or stored in the
inverter.
To perform a comparison and review the result displayed, click the Comparison tab and then click the
Compared with inverter tab or click the Compared with file tab, and specify the file name.
The result of the comparison will be displayed also in the Comparison Result column of the list.
File information
Clicking the File information tab displays the property and comments for identifying the function code editing
file.
(1) Property
Shows file name, inverter model, inverter’s capacity, date of readout, etc.
(2) Comment
Displays the comments you have entered. You can write any comments necessary for identifying the file.
[2] Multi-monitor
This feature lists the status of all the inverters that are marked “connected” in the configuration table.
Multi-monitor

Allows you to monitor the
status of more than one
inverter in a list format.
9-45
[3] Running status monitor
The running status monitor offers four monitor functions: I/O monitor, System monitor, Alarm monitor, and
Meter display. You can choose an appropriate monitoring format according to the purpose and situation.
I/O monitor
Allows you to monitor the
ON/OFF states of the digital input
signals to the inverter and the
transistor output signals.
System monitor
The inverter's system information
(version, type, maintenance
information, etc.) can be
confirmed.
Alarm monitor
The alarm monitor shows the
alarm status of the selected
inverter. In this window you can
check the details of the alarm
currently occurs and related
information.
Meter display
Displays analog readouts of the
selected inverter (such as output
frequency) on analog meters. The
example on the right displays the
reference frequency and the
output frequency.
9-46
[4] Test-running
The Test-running feature allows you to test-run the motor in the forward or reverse direction while
monitoring the running status of the selected inverter.
Operation status Select monitor item Frequency command I/O terminal status
Shows FWD, REV, Select what is to be displayed (e.g., (updated) Shows the status of the
STOP and alarm output frequency or current) here Transmits the frequency programmable digital
codes. using the pull-down menu. entered to the inverter I/O terminals of the
inverter.

Switch the frequency and
Operation buttons* Select monitor item Update with latest running commands
inverter information (updated)
Select the operation status
information to be monitored (updated) Select the frequency and
in real-time. Click the Refresh button run command sources
to refresh the contents of and click Apply.
this window to show the
latest inverter status.
*: The table below lists the details of the operation buttons.
Button Functionality
STOP Stop the motor.
FWD The motor runs in the normal rotation. (depressed state
indicates running state.)
REV The motor runs in the reverse rotation. (depressed state
indicates running state.)
RESET Reset all alarm information saved in the selected inverter.
9-47
[5] Real-time trace
When continuously observing the running state of inverters while the sampling time is fixed at 200 ms, up to
4 analog channels and up to 8 digital channels are available (up to 8 channels in total).
(Maximum waveform amount: 15360 sample/channel)
Type of trace Cursor Tracing status

• Cursor position Save data
• Adjustment of Tracing type Hardcopy of

graph waveform monitor Cursor scroll bar
positions
START/STOP Advanced Scope scroll Bar Cursor B Monitor

the historical waveform settings window
Cursor A
trace for each channel
Optimize Y-axis origin

of each channel
• The station No can not be changed while tracing waveforms real time.
• The detailed waveform can not be changed while tracing waveforms real time.
• Change the real time trace window to change the size of monitor window.
• The scrolling and cursor moving are unavailable in the waveform monitoring window while
tracing waveforms real time.
9-48
[6] Historical trace
The sampling time can be selected between 1 ms to 200 ms. When observing the running state of inverters
in much finer continuous waveforms than real-time trace, up to 4 analog channels and up to 8 digital
channels are available (up to 8 channels in total).
• Number of pieces of saved data: 2 kbyte
(Waveform capturing capability: Max. 500 sample/channel)
Type of trace Cursor Tracing status

• Cursor position Save data
• Adjustment of Tracing type Hardcopy of

graph waveform monitor Cursor scroll bar
positions

START/STOP Advanced Scope scroll Bar Cursor B Monitor
the historical waveform settings window
Cursor A
trace for each channel
Optimize Y-axis origin

of each channel
• The station No can not be changed while tracing waveforms historically.

• The detailed waveform can not be changed while tracing waveforms historically.
• Change the historical trace window to change the size of monitor window.
9-49
Chapter 10
SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND
INVERTER CAPACITIES
This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics,
selection procedure, and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and
inverter models. It also helps you select braking resistors, inverter mode (ND, HD, HND, or HHD),
and motor drive control.
Contents

10.1 Motor Output Torque Characteristics ..................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Selection Procedure ............................................................................................................... 10-3
10.3 Equations for Selections......................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running ................................................................... 10-6
[ 1 ] General equation ........................................................................................................... 10-6
[ 2 ] Obtaining the required force F ....................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation ............................................................... 10-8
[ 1 ] Calculation of moment of inertia .................................................................................... 10-8
[ 2 ] Calculation of the acceleration time ............................................................................. 10-10
[ 3 ] Calculation of the deceleration time ............................................................................. 10-11
[ 4 ] Calculating non-linear acceleration/deceleration time ................................................. 10-11
[ 5 ] Calculating non-linear deceleration time ...................................................................... 10-12
10.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor ................................................................... 10-13
[ 1 ] Calculation of regenerative energy .............................................................................. 10-13
10.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor ....................................................................... 10-14
10.4 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (ND/HD/HND/HHD) ........................................................ 10-15
10.4.1 Precaution in making the selection ............................................................................... 10-15
10.4.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity ............................................. 10-16
10.5 Selecting a Motor Drive Control ........................................................................................... 10-19
10.5.1 Features of motor drive controls ................................................................................... 10-19
10.5.2 Selecting a motor drive control by purpose ................................................................... 10-22
10.1 Motor Output Torque Characteristics
Chapter 10 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND

INVERTER CAPACITIES
When selecting a general-purpose inverter, first select a motor and then inverter as follows:
(1) Key point for selecting a motor: Determine what kind of load machine is to be used, calculate its
moment of inertia, and then select the appropriate motor capacity.
(2) Key point for selecting an inverter: Taking into account the operation requirements (e.g., acceleration
time, deceleration time, and frequency in operation) of the load machine to be driven by the motor
selected in (1) above, calculate the acceleration/deceleration/braking torque.
This section describes the selection procedure for (1) and (2) above. First, it explains the output torque
characteristics obtained by using the motor driven by the inverter (FRENIC-Ace).
Figures 10.1-1 and 10.1-2 graph the output torque characteristics of motors at the rated output frequency
individually for 50 Hz and 60 Hz base. The horizontal and vertical axes show the output frequency and output
torque (%), respectively. Curves (a) through (f) depend on the running conditions.
Chap 10 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

Figure 10.1-1 Output Torque Characteristics (Base frequency: 50 Hz)
Figure 10.1-2 Output Torque Characteristics (Base frequency: 60 Hz)
10-1
(1) Continuous allowable driving torque
 Standard motor (Curve (a1) in Figures 10.1-1 and 10.1-2)

Curve (a1) shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter continuous rated
current, where the standard motor's cooling characteristic is taken into consideration. When the motor runs
at the base frequency of 60 Hz, 100 % output torque can be obtained; at 50 Hz, the output torque is
somewhat lower than that in commercial power, and it further lowers at lower frequencies. The reduction of
the output torque at 50 Hz is due to increased loss by inverter driving, and that at lower frequencies is mainly
due to heat generation caused by the decreased ventilation performance of the motor cooling fan.
 Motor exclusively designed for vector control (Curve (a2) in Figures 10.1-1 and 10.1-2)
Curve (a2) shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter continuous rated
current, where the motor exclusively designed for vector control is connected. In the motor exclusively
designed for vector control, the attached forced-cooling fan reduces heat generation from the motor, so that
the torque does not drop in the low-speed range, compared to the standard motor.
(2) Maximum driving torque in a short time (Curves (b) and (c) in Figures 10.1-1 and 10.1-2)
Curve (b) shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter overload capability
in a short time (ND/HND mode: 120% for 1 minute, HD mode: 150% for 1 minute, HHD mode: 150% for 1
minute and 200% for 0.5 seconds) when torque-vector control is enabled. At that time, the motor cooling
characteristics have little effect on the output torque.
Curve (c) shows an example of the torque characteristic when one class higher capacity inverter is used to
increase the short-time maximum torque. In this case, the short-time torque is 20 to 30% greater than that
when the standard capacity inverter is used.
(3) Starting torque (around the output frequency 0 Hz in Figures 10.1-1 and 10.1-2)
The maximum torque in a short time applies to the starting torque as it is.
(4) Braking torque (Curves (d), (e), and (f) in Figures 10.1-1 and 10.1-2)
In braking the motor, kinetic energy is converted to electrical energy and regenerated to the DC link bus
capacitor (reservoir capacitor) of the inverter. Discharging this electrical energy to the braking resistor
produces a large braking torque as shown in curve (e). If no braking resistor is provided, however, only the
motor and inverter losses consume the regenerated braking energy so that the torque becomes smaller as
shown in curve (d).
When an optional braking resistor is used, the braking torque is allowable only for a short time. Its time
ratings are mainly determined by the braking resistor ratings. This manual and associated catalogs list the
allowable values (kW) obtained from the average discharging loss and allowable values (kWs) obtained from
the discharging capability that can be discharged at one time.
Note that the torque % value varies according to the inverter capacity.
Selecting an optimal brake unit enables a braking torque value to be selected comparatively freely in the
range below the short-time maximum torque in the driving mode, as shown in curve (f).
 For braking-related values when the inverter and braking resistor are normally combined, refer to
Chapter 11, Section 11.8 "Braking resistors (DBRs) and braking units."
10-2
10.2 Selection Procedure
Figure 10.2-1 shows the general selection procedure for optimal inverters. Items numbered (1) through (5)
are described on the following pages.
You may easily select inverter capacity if there are no restrictions on acceleration and deceleration times. If
"there are any restrictions on acceleration or deceleration time" or "acceleration and deceleration are
frequent," then the selection procedure is more complex.
Figure 10.2-1 Selection Procedure
10-3
(1) Calculating the load torque during constant speed running (For detailed calculation, refer to Section
10.3.1.)
It is essential to calculate the load torque during constant speed running for all loads.
First calculate the load torque of the motor during constant speed running and then select a tentative
capacity so that the continuous rated torque of the motor during constant speed running becomes
higher than the load torque. To perform capacity selection efficiently, it is necessary to match the rated
speeds (base speeds) of the motor and load. To do this, select an appropriate reduction-gear
(mechanical transmission) ratio and the number of motor poles.
If the acceleration or deceleration time is not restricted, the tentative capacity can apply as a defined
capacity.
(2) Calculating the acceleration time (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 10.3.2, [ 2 ].)
When there are some specified requirements for the acceleration time, calculate it according to the
following procedure:
1) Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor
Calculate the moment of inertia for the load, referring to Section 10.3.2 "Acceleration and
deceleration time calculation." For the moment of inertia for motors, refer to the related motor
catalogs.
2) Calculate the minimum acceleration torque (See Figure 10.2-2.)
The acceleration torque is the difference between the motor short-time output torque (base
frequency: 60 Hz) explained in Section 10.1 (2) "Maximum driving torque in a short time" and the
load torque (L / G) during constant speed running calculated in the above (1). Calculate the
minimum acceleration torque for the whole range of speed.
3) Calculate the acceleration time
Assign the value calculated above to the equation (10.3.2-7) in Section 10.3.2 "Acceleration and
deceleration time calculation" to calculate the acceleration time. If the calculated acceleration time
is longer than the expected time, select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity
and calculate it again.
Figure 10.2-2 Example Study of Minimum Acceleration Torque
10-4
(3) Deceleration time (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 10.3.2, [ 3 ].)
To calculate the deceleration time, check the motor deceleration torque characteristics for the whole
range of speed in the same way as for the acceleration time.
1) Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor
Same as for the acceleration time.
2) Calculate the minimum deceleration torque (See Figures 10.2-3 and 10.2-4.)
Same as for the deceleration time.
3) Calculate the deceleration time
Assign the value calculated above to the equation (10.3.2-8) to calculate the deceleration time in
the same way as for the acceleration time. If the calculated deceleration time is longer than the
requested time, select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity and
calculate it again.

Figure 10.2-3 Example Study of Minimum Figure 10.2-4 Example Study of Minimum
Deceleration Torque (1) Deceleration Torque (2)
(4) Braking resistor rating (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 10.3.3.)
Braking resistor rating is classified into two types according to the braking periodic duty cycle.
1) When the periodic duty cycle is 100 sec or less:
Calculate the average loss to determine rated values.
2) When the periodic duty cycle exceeds 100 sec:
The allowable braking energy depends on the maximum regenerative braking capacity. The
allowable values are listed in Chapter 11, Section 11.8 "Braking resistors (DBRs) and braking
units."
(5) Motor RMS current (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 10.3.4.)
In metal processing machines and materials handling machines requiring positioning control, highly
frequent running for a short time is repeated. In this case, calculate the maximum equivalent RMS
current value (effective value of current) not to exceed the allowable value (rated current) for the motor.
10-5
10.3 Equations for Selections
10.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running
[ 1 ] General equation
The frictional force acting on a horizontally moved load must be calculated. Calculation for driving a load along
a straight line with the motor is shown below.
Where the force to move a load linearly at constant speed  (m/s) is F (N) and the motor speed for driving this
is NM (r/min), the required motor output torque M (N·m) is as follows:
60   F
  2 N 
M
(N  m) (Equation 10.3.1-1)
 M
G
where, G is Reduction-gear efficiency.
When the inverter brakes the motor, efficiency works inversely, so the required motor torque should be
calculated as follows:
60  
  2   N  F 
M
M
G
(N  m) (Equation 10.3.1-2)
(60·) / (2·NM) in the above equation is an equivalent turning radius corresponding to speed  (m/s) around
the motor shaft.
The value F (N) in the above equations depends on the load type.
[ 2 ] Obtaining the required force F

 Moving a load horizontally
A simplified mechanical configuration is assumed as shown in Figure 10.3.1-1. If the mass of the carrier table
is W0 (kg), the load is W (kg), and the friction coefficient of the ball screw is , then the friction force F (N) is
expressed as follows, which is equal to a required force for driving the load:
F  ( W0  W )  g   (N) (Equation 10.3.1-3)

2
where, g is the gravity acceleration ( 9.8 (m/s )).
Then, the driving torque around the motor shaft is expressed as follows:
60   ( W0  W )  g  
  2 N  (N  m) (Equation 10.3.1-4)

M
M
G
Figure 10.3.1-1 Moving a Load Horizontally
10-6
 Vertical lift load

A simplified mechanical configuration is assumed as shown in Figure 10.3.1-2. If the mass of the cage is W0
(kg), the load is W (kg), and the balance weight is WB (kg), then the forces F (N) required for lifting the load up
and down are expressed as follows:
F = (W0 + W W ) • g (N) (For lifting up) (Equation 10.3.1-5)

B
F = (W0 W W ) • g (N) (For lifting down) (Equation 10.3.1-6)

B
Assuming the maximum load is Wmax, the mass of the balance weight WB (kg) is generally obtained with the
expression WB = WO + Wmax /2. Depending on the mass of load W (kg), the values of F (N) may be negative in
both cases of lifting up and down, which means the lift is in braking mode. So, be careful in motor and inverter
selection.
For calculation of the required output torque τ around the motor shaft, apply the expression (10.3.1-1) or
(10.3.1-2) depending on the driving or braking mode of the lift, that is, apply the expression (10.3.1-1) if the
value of F (N) is positive, and the (10.3.1-2) if negative.
Reduction-gear

Motor
Cage
W0 (kg)
NM (r/min)
Load
W (kg)
Balance weight
WB (kg)
Figure 10.3.1-2 Vertical Lift Load
 Inclined lift load

Although the mechanical configuration of an inclined lift load is similar to that of a vertical lift load, unignorable
friction force in the inclined lift makes a difference; in an inclined lift load, there is a distinct difference between
the expression to calculate the lift force F (N) for lifting up and that for lifting down.
If the incline angle is θ, and the friction coefficient is μ, as shown in Figure 10.3.1-3, the driving force F (N) is
expressed as follows:
F  ((W0  W) (sin    cos )  WB )  g (N) (For lifting up) (Equation 10.3.1-7)
F  ((WB  ( W0  W) (sin    cos ))  g (N) (For lifting down) (Equation 10.3.1-8)
The braking mode applies to both lifting up and down as in the vertical lift load. And the calculation of the
required output torque τ around the motor shaft is the same as in the vertical lift load; apply the expression
(10.3.1-1) if the value of F (N) is positive, and the (10.3.1-2) if negative.
Reduction-gear
Carrier
W0 (kg) Motor
Load
W (kg)
NM (r/min)
Balance weight
WB (kg)
Figure 10.3.1-3 Inclined Lift Load
10-7
10.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation

When an object whose moment of inertia is J (kg·m2) rotates at the speed N (r/min), it has the following kinetic
energy:
J 2π • N 2
E= • ( ) (J) (Equation 10.3.2-1)
2 60
To accelerate the above rotational object, the kinetic energy will be increased; to decelerate the object, the
kinetic energy must be discharged. The torque required for acceleration and deceleration can be expressed as
follows:
2π dN
τ=J• ( ) (N • m) (Equation 10.3.2-2)
60 dt
This way, the mechanical moment of inertia is an important element in the acceleration and deceleration. First,
calculation method of moment of inertia is described, then those for acceleration and deceleration time are
explained.
[ 1 ] Calculation of moment of inertia

For an object that rotates around the shaft, virtually divide the object into small segments and square the
distance from the shaft to each segment. Then, sum the squares of the distances and the masses of the
segments to calculate the moment of inertia.
J = ∑( W i • r i 2 ) (kg • m2 ) (Equation 10.3.2-3)
The following describes equations to calculate moment of inertia having different shaped loads or load
systems.
(1) Hollow cylinder and solid cylinder

The common shape of a rotating body is hollow cylinder. The moment of inertia J (kgm2) around the hollow
cylinder center axis can be calculated as follows, where the outer and inner diameters are D1 and D2 [m] and
total mass is W [kg] in Figure 10.3.2-1.
W • (D12 + D2 2 )
J= (kg • m2 ) (Equation 10.3.2-4)
8
For a similar shape, a solid cylinder, calculate the moment of inertia as D2 is 0.
Figure 10.3.2-1 Hollow Cylinder
10-8
(2) For a general rotating body

Table 10.3-1 lists the calculation equations of moment of inertia of various rotating bodies including the above
cylindrical rotating body.
Table 10.3-1 Moment of Inertia of Various Rotating Bodies
Mass: W (kg) Mass: W (kg)

Shape Moment of inertia: Shape Moment of inertia:
2
J (kg·m ) J (kg·m2)
π
Hollow cylinder W= • (D1
2
D22 ) • L • ρ W =A •B•L•ρ
4
1 2 2
J= • W • (D1 + D 2 )
8 1 2 2
Ja = • W • (L + A )
12
Sphere π 3 1 2
1 2
W= •D • ρ Jb = • W • (L + • A )
6 12 4
1 2
Jc ≈W • (L02 + L0 • L+ •L )
1 2
3
J= • W • D

10
π π
Cone W= 2
•D •L • ρ W= 2
•D • L • ρ
12 4
3 2
J= • W •D
40 1 2
3 2
Ja = • W • (L + •D )
12 4
W =A •B•L•ρ 1 3
Rectangular prism Jb = • W • (L2 + 2
•D )
3 16
1 2
Jc ≈W • (L02 +L0 • L + •L )
1 2 2 3
J= • W • (A + B )
12
Square cone (Pyramid, 1 1

W= • A •B •L • ρ W= • A •B •L • ρ
rectangular base) 3 3
1 2 2 1 1
J= • W • (A + B ) Jb = 2
• W • (L +
2
• A )
20 10 4
3 3
Jc ≈W • (L02 + • L0 • L + • L2 )
2 5
Triangular prism 3 2
W= • A • L • ρ
4
1 2
π 2
J= • W • A W= •D •L • ρ
3 12
Tetrahedron with an 3 2
W= • A •L • ρ
equilateral triangular 12
1 3
base Jb = 2
• W • (L +
2
•D )
10 8
1 3 3 2
J= • W • A
2 Jc ≈W • (L02 + • L • L+ • L )
5 2 0 5
Main metal density (at 20C) (kg/m3) Iron: 7860, Copper: 8940, Aluminum: 2700
10-9
(3) For a load running horizontally

Assume a carrier table driven by a motor as shown in Figure 10.3.1-1. If the table speed is  (m/s) when the
motor speed is NM (r/min), then an equivalent distance from the shaft is equal to 60· / (2·NM) (m). The
moment of inertia of the table and load to the shaft is calculated as follows:
60 • υ 2
J=( ) • ( W0 + W ) (kg • m2 ) (Equation 10.3.2-5)
2 π • NM
(4) For a vertical or inclined lift load

2
The moment of inertia J (kg·m ) of the loads connected with a rope as shown in Figures 10.3.1-2 and 10.3.1-3
is calculated with the following equation using the mass of all moving objects, although the motion directions of
those loads are different.
60 • υ 2
J=( ) • (W0 + W + WB ) (kg • m 2 ) (Equation 10.3.2-6)
2 π • NM
[ 2 ] Calculation of the acceleration time

Figure 10.3.2-2 shows a general load model. Assume that a motor drives a load via a reduction-gear with
efficiency G. The time required to accelerate this load in stop state to a speed of NM (r/min) is calculated with
the following equation:
J1 + J2 ηG 2π • (NM 0)
t ACC = • ( s) (Equation 10.3.2-7)
τM τL ηG 60
where,
J1: Motor shaft moment of inertia (kg·m2)
J2: Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft (kg·m2)
M: Minimum motor output torque in driving motor (N·m)
L: Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft (N·m)
G: Reduction-gear efficiency.
As clarified in the above equation, the equivalent moment of inertia becomes (J1+J2/G) by considering the
reduction-gear efficiency.
Figure 10.3.2-2 Load Model Including Reduction-gear
10-10
[ 3 ] Calculation of the deceleration time

In a load system shown in Figure 10.3.2-2, the time needed to stop the motor rotating at a speed of NM (r/min)
is calculated with the following equation:
J1 + J2 • ηG 2π • (0 NM)
tDEC = • ( s) (Equation 10.3.2-8)
τM τL • ηG
60
where,
2
J1: Motor shaft moment of inertia (kg·m )
J2: Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft (kg·m2)
M: Minimum motor output torque in braking (or decelerating) motor (N·m)
L: Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft (N·m)
G: Reduction-gear efficiency
In the above equation, generally output torque M is negative and load torque L is positive. So, deceleration
time becomes shorter.
For lift applications, calculate the deceleration time using the negative value of L (maximum load
torque converted to motor shaft).

[ 4 ] Calculating non-linear acceleration/deceleration time
In applications requiring frequent acceleration/deceleration, the inverter can accelerate/decelerate the motor
in the shortest time utilizing all torque margin. The inverter in a vector control mode can easily perform this type
of operation.
Torque/Power
Speed
Figure 10.3.2-3 An Example of Driving Characteristics with a Constant Output Range
In this case, the acceleration/deceleration vs. speed curve will form a non-linear figure, and the
acceleration/deceleration time cannot be calculated by a single expression.
Generally, the acceleration/deceleration time is obtained by calculating the acceleration/deceleration time of

N that is a difference of speed N broken into small parts, and then integrating it to obtain the total
acceleration/deceleration time from start to end. Because the smaller N provides higher accuracy, this
numerical calculation needs an aid of a computer program.
The following is a guide for the numerical calculation method using a computer program.
Figure 10.3.2-3 illustrates an example of driving characteristics with a constant output range. In the figure, the
range under N0 is of constant torque characteristics, and the range between N0 and N1 is of a constant output
with the non-linear acceleration/deceleration characteristics.
The expression (10.3.2-9) gives an acceleration time ∆tACC within a ∆N speed thread.
J１ + J２ / ηG 2π  ∆ N
∆tACC =  (s) (Equation 10.3.2-9)
τM - τL / ηG 60
10-11
Before proceeding this calculation, obtain the motor shaft moment of inertia J1, the load shaft moment of inertia
converted to motor shaft J2, maximum load torque converted to motor shaft τL, and the reduction-gear
efficiency ηG. Apply the maximum motor output torque τM according to an actual speed thread ∆N as follows.
[τM in N ≤ N0] Constant output torque range
60  PO
τM = (Nm) (Equation 10.3.2-10)
2π  N0
[τＭ in N0 ≤N ≤ N1] Constant output power range

(The motor output torque is inversely proportional to the motor speed)
60  PO
τM = (Nm) (Equation 10.3.2-11)
2π  N
If the result obtained by the above calculation does not satisfy the target value, select an inverter with one rank
higher capacity.
[ 5 ] Calculating non-linear deceleration time

Use the following expression to obtain the non-linear deceleration time as well as for the acceleration time.
J1 + J2  ηG 2π  ∆ N
∆tDEC = τM - τL ηG  (s) (Equation 10.3.2-12)
60
In this expression, both τM, and ∆N are generally negative values so that the load torque τL serves to assist the
deceleration operation. For a lift load, however, the load torque τL is a negative value in some modes. In this
case, the τM, and τL will take polarity opposite to each other and the τL will serve to prevent the deceleration
operation of the lift.
10-12
10.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor

If the inverter brakes the motor, the kinetic energy of mechanical load is converted to electric energy to be
regenerated into the inverter circuit. This regenerative energy is often consumed in so-called braking resistors
as heat. The following explains the braking resistor rating.
[ 1 ] Calculation of regenerative energy

In the inverter operation, one of the regenerative energy sources is the kinetic energy that is generated at the
time an object is moved by an inertial force.
(1) Kinetic energy of a moving object

When an object with moment of inertia J (kg·m2) rotates at a speed N2 (r/min), its kinetic energy is as follows:
J 2π • N2 2
E= •( ) (J = Ws) (Equation 10.3.3-1)
2 60
1 2
≈ • J • N2 (J) (Equation 10.3.3-1')
182.4
When this object is decelerated to a speed N1 (r/min), the output energy is as follows:

2 2
J 2π • N2 2π • N1
E= • (J) (Equation 10.3.3-2)
2 60 60
1 2
≈ • J • (N2 N12 ) (J) (Equation 10.3.3-2')
182.4
The energy regenerated to the inverter as shown in Figure 10.3.2-2 is calculated from the reduction-gear
efficiency G and motor efficiency M as follows:
1
E≈
182.4
• ( J +J
1 2
• ηG) • ηM • ( N2 2 N12 ) (J) (Equation 10.3.3-3)
(2) Potential energy of a lift

When an object whose mass is W (kg) falls from the height h2 (m) to the height h1 (m), the output energy is as
follows:
E = W  g  (h２ - h１) (J=Ws) (Equation 10.3.3-4)

2
g  9.8065 (m/s )
The energy regenerated to the inverter is calculated from the reduction-gear efficiency G and motor efficiency
M as follows:
E = W  g  (h２ - h１)  G  M (J) (Equation 10.3.3-5)
10-13
10.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor

In case of the load which is repeatedly and very frequently driven by a motor, the motor current fluctuates largely and
enters the short-time rating range of the motor repeatedly. Therefore, you have to review the allowable thermal rating
of the motor. The heat value is assumed to be approximately proportional to the square of the motor current.
If an inverter drives a motor in duty cycles that are much shorter than the thermal time constant of the motor, calculate
the "equivalent RMS current" as mentioned below, and select the motor so that this RMS current will not exceed the
rated current of the motor.
Figure 10.3.4-1 Sample of the Repetitive Operation
First, calculate the required torque of each part based on the speed pattern. Then using the torque-current
curve of the motor, convert the torque to the motor current. The "equivalent RMS current, Ieq" can be finally
calculated by the following equation:
I12 • t1 + I2 2 • t 2 + I3 2 • t3 + I4 2 • t 4 + I5 2 • t5
Ieq = (A) (Equation 10.3.4-1)
t1 + t 2 + t3 + t 4 + t5 + t 6
The torque-current curve for the dedicated motor is not available for actual calculation. Therefore, calculate
the motor current I from the load torque 1 using the following equation (10.3.4-2). Then, calculate the
equivalent current Ieq:
2
τ1 2
I= × It100 + Im100 (A) (Equation 10.3.4-2)
100
Where, 1 is the load torque (%), It100 is the torque current, and Im100 is exciting current.
10-14
10.4 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (ND/HD/HND/HHD)
10.4.1 Precaution in making the selection

The FRENIC-Ace is available in four different drive modes--ND and HD modes for general load and HND
and HHD modes for heavy duty load, which allows users to switch the drive modes on site.
Select the inverter capacity appropriate to the user application, considering the motor capacity, overload
characteristics, and ND/HD/HND/HHD mode, referring to Section 10.4.2 "Guideline for selecting inverter
drive mode and capacity."
ND mode for general load

Apply to equipment where the inverter’s load current in normal operations is less than the inverter rated
current and the load current in overcurrent operation is less than 120% of the rated current for 1 minute. (Fan,
pump, etc.)
HD mode for heavy duty load

current and the load current in overcurrent operation is less than 150% of the rated current for 1 minute.
(Wire drawing machine, etc.)

HND mode general load
current and the load current in overcurrent operation is less than 120% of the rated current for 1 minute. This
mode is for applications which require running the motor under low noise conditions or running the inverter
with high responsibility. (Fan, pump, centrifugal machine, etc.)
HHD mode for heavy duty load

current and the load current in overcurrent operation is less than 150% of the rated current for 1 minute and
200% for 0.5 second. This mode is for applications which require running the motor under low noise
conditions or running the inverter with high responsibility. (Compact hoist, winding machine, etc.)
10-15
10.4.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity

Table 10.4-1 lists the functional differences between ND, HD, HND, and HHD modes.
If the ND mode does not satisfy the requirements in your application in view of the overload capability and
functionality, you need to select the inverter one or two ranks higher in capacity (HD/HND/HHD mode) than
that of the motor rating.
To use the inverter under the ambient temperature or carrier frequency condition changed from the factory
default, the output current rating requires derating due to the ambient temperature or carrier frequency. It is,
therefore, necessary to select the inverter unit, referring to Figures 10.4.2-1 through 10.4.2-4.
Table 10.4-1 Functional Differences between ND, HD, HND, and HHD Modes
Function ND mode HD mode HND mode HHD mode
Application General load Heavy duty load General load Heavy duty load
Data for function "4" "3" "1"
"0"
code F80 (Factory default)
Continuous 100% (Operating temperature: 40°C) 100% (Operating temperature: 50°C)
current rating 80% (Operating temperature: 50°C)
level (inverter
rated current (See Figure 10.4.2-1.)
level)
Overload 120% for 1 min. 150% 1 min. 120% 1 min. 150% for 1 min.
capability 200% for 0.5 s
Maximum Setting range: Setting range:
frequency 25 to 120 Hz 25 to 500 Hz
*1 Upper limit:
Upper limit: 500 Hz
120Hz
DC braking Setting range: Setting range: Setting range: Setting range:
(Braking level) 0 to 60% 0 to 80% 0 to 80% 0 to 100%
*1 (Based on the (Based on the (Based on the rated (Based on the rated
rated current level rated current level current level of current level of
of ND-mode of HD-mode HND-mode inverter) HHD-mode inverter)
inverter) inverter)
Motor sound Setting range: Setting range: Setting range:
(Carrier 0.75 to 10 kHz 0.75 to 16 kHz 0.75 to 16 kHz
frequency) (FRN0059E2S-4) (FRN0059E2S-4) (FRN0059E2S-4
*1 0.75 to 10 kHz ) to
0.75 to 6 kHz
(FRN0072E2S-4 to FRN0168E2S-4
(FRN0072E2S-4
to FRN0168E2S-4) 0.75 to 10 kHz
FRN0203E2S-4) 0.75 to 6 kHz (FRN0203E2S-4
(FRN0203E2S-4) )
Current limiter Initial value: 130% Initial value: 160% Initial value: 130% Initial value: 160%
(Level)
*2
Current indication Based on the rated Based on the Based on the rated Based on the rated
and output current level of rated current level current level of current level of
ND-mode inverter of HD-mode HND-mode HHD-mode
inverter inverter inverter
*1 In the ND/HD/HND mode, a setting value out of the range will be replaced with the upper limit of each
mode.
*2 Mode switching with function code F80 initializes the current limiter level.
10-16
HND/HHD mode
(Ambient temp.: 50°C)
Output current ratio (%)
ND/HD mode

Ambient temperature
Figure 10.4.2-1 Derating of Output Current Due to Ambient Temperature

Output current derating ratio
HND/HHD mode
ND mode
HD mode
(%)
2 Hz: Factory default

Carrier frequency (kHz)
Figure 10.4.2-2 Derating of Output Current Due to Carrier Frequency (FRN0059E2S-4)
10-17
HND mode HHD mode

(Ambient temp.: (Ambient temp.:
ND mode
(Ambient temp.:
HD mode
(Ambient temp.:
(%)
2 Hz: Factory default Carrier frequency (kHz)
Figure 10.4.2-3 Derating of Output Current Due to Carrier Frequency

(FRN0072E2S-4 to FRN0168E2S-4)
HHD mode
(Ambient temp.:
ND/HD mode
HND mode
(%)
2 Hz: Factory default Carrier frequency (kHz)
Figure 10.4.2-4 Derating of Output Current Due to Carrier Frequency (FRN0203E2S-4)
10-18
10.5 Selecting a Motor Drive Control
10.5.1 Features of motor drive controls

The FRENIC-Ace supports the following motor drive controls.
This section shows their basic configurations and describes their features.
Drive
Basic Speed
Drive control control Speed control Other restrictions
control feedback
class
V/f control
with slip compensation Frequency control ―
inactive
Vector control without speed
V/f
sensor (Dynamic torque Disable V/f ―
control Frequency control
vector)
with slip
V/f control compensation
with slip compensation ―
active

 V/f control with slip compensation inactive
<Main circuit>
Converter Inverter
+
Ｍ
<Control block>
V/f |V *|
pattern Three-
Accelerator/ processor
decelerator phase
voltage
PWM
processor f*
processor
Frequency
command
Figure 10.5.1-1 Schematic Block Diagram of

V/f Control with Slip Compensation Inactive
As shown in the above configuration, the inverter does not receive any speed information feedback from the
target machinery being controlled and it controls the load shaft speed only with a frequency command given
by the frequency setting device (open-loop control). The inverter outputs the voltage/frequency following the
V/f pattern processor's output to drive a motor. This control disables all automatically controlled features
(such as the slip compensation), causing no unpredictable output fluctuation and enabling stable operation
with constant output frequency.
This control is suitable for applications that do not need quick speed change such as variable torque load
equipment, fans and pumps.
10-19
 Vector control without speed sensor (Dynamic torque vector)

Vector control without speed sensor (Dynamic torque vector)
The FRENIC-Ace features the dynamic torque vector controller with the flux estimator, which is always
correcting the magnetic flux phase while monitoring the inverter output current as the feedback. This feature
allows the inverter to always apply the drive power with an optimal voltage and current and consequently
respond to quick load variation or speed change.
The feature also estimates the generated torque of the motor from the estimated flux data and output current
to the motor to improve the motor efficiency for matching the current operation situation.
This control mode is effective for applications that need large torque in low speed range or that have quick
load fluctuations. Selecting the dynamic torque vector control automatically enables the auto-torque boost
and slip compensation.
10-20
 V/f control with slip compensation active
<Main circuit>
Converter Inverter
+
Ｍ
<Control block>
+ V/f pattern | V*|
Three-
+ processor phase
Accelerator/ voltage PWM
f*
decelerator  s1 processor
Frequency processor
command K

Output v

torque
processor
i

V/f Control with Slip Compensation Active
Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics, decreasing
the motor rotation. The inverter’s slip compensation function first presumes the slip value of the motor based
on the motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor
rotation. This prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip.
10-21
10.5.2 Selecting a motor drive control by purpose

Listed below is a general guide for selecting a motor drive control by purpose. Use this guide just for
reference. In individual cases, selection should be made carefully after a technical consultation regarding the
detailed specifications of your system.
Table 10.5-1 Motor Drive Control by Purpose

Drive control abbreviation: "V/f" (V/f control), "Torque vector" (Vector control without
speed sensor (Dynamic torque vector))
Drive control
Type of Applications Segment
industry V/f Torque
vector
Delivery Crane (Hoisting) Compact hoist-type crane N Y
equipment (Traveling) 1:1 Y* Y*
(Traveling) 1:N Y N
(Traversing) N Y*
Traveling dolly Single motor Y Y
Multiple motors Y Y
Parking tower Less than 50 m/min Y* Y
(Elevator type) 50 m/min or above Y* Y*
(Zero speed not required)
Parking tower (Circulation type) Y* Y
Multistory warehouse
Without position Y Y
(Stacker crane) compensation
Variable speed escalator Y* Y
Plastic Extruding machine Low precision N Y
Metalworking Wire drawing machine Storage type Y* Y
Drawbench Y* Y
Press main engine driving Standard type Y Y
High-speed press Y* Y
Textile Synthetic fiber spinning Various rolls, gear pump Y Y
Others Winder with dancer Center drive (winding off) Y* Y
Center drive (taking up) Y* Y
(Cement) kiln Y* Y
Centrifuge Y* Y
Agitator Y* Y
Crusher Y* Y
Y: Applicable (Examination required), Y*: Examination required, N: Not applicable
10-22
Chapter 11
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-Ace's
configuration with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals.
Contents

11.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Ace ............................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Currents Flowing Across the Inverter Terminals .................................................................. 11-2
11.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-current-operated Protective Device
(RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC) .................... 11-4
11.3.1 Function overview ......................................................................................................... 11-4
11.3.2 Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers ................................ 11-5
11.4 Surge Killers for L-load......................................................................................................... 11-9
11.5 Arresters ............................................................................................................................. 11-10
11.6 Surge Absorbers ................................................................................................................ 11-11
11.7 Filtering Capacitors Suppressing AM Radio Band Noises ................................................. 11-12
11.8 Braking Resistors (DBRs) and Braking Units..................................................................... 11-13
11.8.1 Selecting a braking resistor......................................................................................... 11-13
[ 1 ] Selection procedure ........................................................................................................ 11-13
[ 2 ] Notes on selection .......................................................................................................... 11-13
11.8.2 Braking resistors (DBRs) ............................................................................................ 11-14
[ 1 ] Standard model .............................................................................................................. 11-14
[ 2 ] 10%ED model ................................................................................................................. 11-14
11.8.3 Braking units ............................................................................................................... 11-15
11.8.4 Specifications .............................................................................................................. 11-16
11.8.5 External dimensions.................................................................................................... 11-18
11.9 Power Regenerative PWM Converters, RHC Series ......................................................... 11-20
11.9.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 11-20
11.9.2 Specifications .............................................................................................................. 11-21
[ 1 ] Standard specifications................................................................................................... 11-21
[ 2 ] Common specifications................................................................................................... 11-21
11.9.3 Function specifications................................................................................................ 11-22
11.9.4 Converter configuration............................................................................................... 11-23
11.9.5 External dimensions.................................................................................................... 11-25
11.10 DC Reactors (DCRs).......................................................................................................... 11-34
11.11 AC Reactors (ACRs) .......................................................................................................... 11-36
11.12 Surge Suppression Unit (SSU) .......................................................................................... 11-38
11.13 Output Circuit Filters (OFLs) .............................................................................................. 11-39
11.14 Zero-phase Reactors for Reducing Radio Noise (ACLs) ................................................... 11-41
11.15 External Cooling Fan Attachments ..................................................................................... 11-42
11.16 External Frequency Command Potentiometer ................................................................... 11-43
11.17 Extension Cable for Remote Operation ............................................................................. 11-44
11.18 Frequency Meters .............................................................................................................. 11-45
11.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Ace

11.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Ace
This section lists the names and features of peripheral equipment and options for the FRENIC-Ace as well as a
configuration example.
Chap 11 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 11.1-1 Quick Overview of Options
11-1
11.2 Currents Flowing Across the Inverter Terminals

Table 11.2-1 summarizes average (effective) electric currents flowing across the terminals of each inverter model
for ease of reference when selecting peripheral equipment and options for each inverter--including supplied power
voltage and applicable motor rating.
Table 11.2-1 Currents Flowing across the Inverter Terminals
ND mode
50Hz, 400V 60Hz, 440V Braking
Nominal
Input RMS current (A) DC link Input RMS current (A) DC link resistor
Power supply applied
Inverter type DC reactors (DCRs) bus DC reactors (DCRs) bus circuit
voltage motor
current current current
(kW)
w/ DCR w/o DCR (A) w/ DCR w/o DCR (A) (A)
30 FRN0059E2S-4 57.0 77.9 69.9 51.4 70.2 63.0 7.2
37 FRN0072E2S-4 68.5 94.3 83.9 61.8 85.0 75.7 7.7
45 FRN0085E2S-4 83.2 114 102 75.0 103 91.9 －
Three-phase －
55 FRN0105E2S-4 102 140 125 91.9 126 113
400V
75 FRN0139E2S-4 138 - 169 124 - 152 －
90 FRN0168E2S-4 164 - 201 148 - 181 －
110 FRN0203E2S-4 201 - 246 181 - 222 －
HD mode
Nominal
voltage motor
(kW)
22 FRN0059E2S-4 42.2 60.6 51.7 38.0 54.6 46.6 7.2
30 FRN0072E2S-4 57.0 77.9 69.9 51.4 70.2 63.0 7.7
37 FRN0085E2S-4 68.5 94.3 83.9 61.8 85.0 75.7 －
Three-phase
45 FRN0105E2S-4 83.2 114 102 75.0 103 91.9 －
400V
55 FRN0139E2S-4 102 140 125 91.9 126 113 －
75 FRN0168E2S-4 138 - 169 124 - 152 －
90 FRN0203E2S-4 164 - 201 148 - 181 －
HND mode
Nominal
voltage motor
(kW)
22 FRN0059E2S-4 42.2 60.6 51.7 38.0 54.6 46.6 7.2
30 FRN0072E2S-4 57.0 77.9 69.9 51.4 70.2 63.0 7.7
37 FRN0085E2S-4 68.5 94.3 83.9 61.8 85.0 75.7 －
Three-phase －
45 FRN0105E2S-4 83.2 114 102 75.0 103 91.9
400V
55 FRN0139E2S-4 102 140 125 91.9 126 113 －
75 FRN0168E2S-4 138 - 169 124 - 152 －
90 FRN0203E2S-4 164 - 201 148 - 181 －
11-2
HHD mode
50Hz, 400V 60Hz, 440V
Braking
Nominal
Inverter type bus bus circuit
voltage motor DC reactors (DCRs) DC reactors (DCRs)
(kW)
(A) (A) (A)
w/ DCR w/o DCR w/ DCR w/o DCR
18.5 FRN0059E2S-4 35.5 52.3 43.5 32.0 47.1 39.2 7.2

22 FRN0072E2S-4 42.2 60.6 51.7 38.0 54.6 46.6 7.7
30 FRN0085E2S-4 57.0 77.9 69.9 51.4 70.2 63.0 －
Three-phase
400V 37 FRN0105E2S-4 68.5 94.3 83.9 61.8 85.0 75.7 －
45 FRN0139E2S-4 83.2 114 102 75.0 103 91.9 －
55 FRN0168E2S-4 102 140 125 91.9 126 113 －
75 FRN0203E2S-4 138 - 169 124 - 152 －
• Inverter efficiency is calculated using values suitable for each inverter model. The input route mean square
current is calculated based on a power supply capacity of 500 kVA (or 10 times as large as the inverter's
capacity when the inverter's capacity exceeds 50 kVA), and a power supply reactance of 5%.
• The input RMS current listed in the above table will vary in inverse proportion to the power supply voltage, such
as 480 VAC.
• The braking current is always constant, independent of braking resistor specifications, including standard and
10%ED models.
11-3
(RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC)
11.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-current-operated

Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic
Contactor (MC)
11.3.1 Function overview

 MCCBs and RCDs/ELCBs* * With overcurrent protection
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) are designed to protect the power circuits between the power
supply and inverter's main circuit terminals ([L1/R], [L2/S] and [L3/T]) from overload or short-circuit, which in
turn prevents secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter.
Residual-Current-Operated Protective Devices (RCDs)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCBs) function in
the same way as MCCBs.
Built-in overcurrent/overload protective functions protect the inverter itself from failures related to its
input/output lines.
 Magnetic contactor
An MC can be used at both the power input and output sides of the inverter. At each side, the MC works as
described below. Use it as necessary. When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter, the MC can also
switch the motor drive power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines.
At the power supply side

Insert an MC in the power supply side of the inverter in order to:
(1) Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power supply (generally, commercial/factory power lines) with the
protective function built into the inverter, or with the external signal input.
(2) Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command due to
internal/external circuit failures.
(3) Cut off the inverter from the power supply when the MCCB inserted in the power supply side cannot cut
it off for maintenance or inspection purpose. For the purpose only, it is recommended that you use an
MC capable of turning the MC ON/OFF manually.
Avoid frequent ON/OFF operation of the magnetic contactor (MC) in the input (primary) circuit;
otherwise, the inverter failure may result.
The frequency of the MC's ON/OFF should not be more than once per 30 minutes. To assure
10-year or longer service life of the inverter, it should not be more than once per hour.
If frequent start/stop of the motor is required, use FWD/REV terminal signals or the / keys
on the inverter's keypad.
At the output side

Insert an MC in the power output side of the inverter in order to:
(1) Prevent externally turned-around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals ([U],
[V], and [W]) unexpectedly. An MC should be used, for example, when a circuit that switches the motor
driving power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines is connected to the
inverter.
If a magnetic contactor (MC) is inserted in the inverter's output (secondary) circuit for switching
the motor to a commercial power or for any other purposes, it should be switched on and off when
both the inverter and motor are completely stopped. This prevents the contact point from getting
rough due to a switching arc of the MC. The MC should not be equipped with any main circuit
surge killer (Fuji SZ-ZM□, etc.).
Applying a commercial power to the inverter's output circuit breaks the inverter. To avoid it,
interlock the MC on the motor's commercial power line with the one in the inverter output circuit so
that they are not switched ON at the same time.
(2) Drive more than one motor selectively by a single inverter.
(3) Selectively cut off the motor whose thermal overload relay or equivalent devices have been activated.
11-4
Driving the motor using commercial power lines

MCs can also be used to switch the power supply of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial power
supply.
Select the MC so as to satisfy the rated currents listed in Table 11.2-1, which are the most critical RMS
currents for using the inverter (Refer to Table 11.3-1). For switching the motor drive source between the
inverter output and commercial power lines, use the MC of class AC3 specified by JIS C8325 in the
commercial line side.
11.3.2 Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers

Figure 11.3-1 shows a connection example for MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) and MC
in the inverter input circuit. Table 11.3-1 lists the rated current for the MCCB and corresponding inverter
models. Table 11.3-2 lists the applicable grades of RCD/ELCB sensitivity.
Insert an MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) recommended for each inverter for its input
circuits. Do not use an MCCB or RCD/ELCB of a higher rating than that recommended.
Doing so could result in a fire.

Molded case circuit breaker or
residual-current-operated protective
device/ earth leakage circuit breaker Magnetic contactor
Molded case circuit breaker

(MCCB)
or residual-current-operated
Magnetic contactor
protection device (RCD)/earth Inverter
leakage circuit breaker
Three-phase
power supply
200 to 240 V
50/60 Hz or
three-phase
power supply
380 to 480 V
50/60 Hz
Figure 11.3-1 External Views of MCCB or RCD/ELCB and MC and Connection Example
11-5
Table 11.3-1 Rated Current of Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-Current-Operated Protective Device
(RCD)/ Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC)
ND mode
MCCB, RCD/ELCB Magnetic contactor (MC)
Nominal
Power rated current (A) Input circuit
applied
supply Inverter type Output
motor DC reactors (DCRs) DC reactors (DCRs)
voltage circuit
(kW)
30 FRN0059E2S-4 75 SC-N2 SC-N3 SC-N2
125
37 FRN0072E2S-4 SC-N2S SC-N2S
100 SC-N4
45 FRN0085E2S-4 150 SC-N3
Three-phase SC-N3
55 FRN0105E2S-4 125 200 SC-N5 SC-N4
400V
75 FRN0139E2S-4 175 SC-N4 SC-N5
90 FRN0168E2S-4 200 - - SC-N7
SC-N8
110 FRN0203E2S-4 250 SC-N8
HD mode
Nominal
applied
voltage circuit
(kW)
22 FRN0059E2S-4 50 100 SC-N1 SC-N2S SC-N1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 75 SC-N2 SC-N3 SC-N2
125
Three-phase 100 SC-N4
45 FRN0105E2S-4 150 SC-N3
400V SC-N3
55 FRN0139E2S-4 125 200 SC-N5 SC-N4
75 FRN0168E2S-4 175 SC-N4 SC-N5
- -
90 FRN0203E2S-4 200 SC-N7 SC-N7
HND mode
Nominal
applied
voltage circuit
(kW)
22 FRN0059E2S-4 50 100 SC-N1 SC-N2S SC-N1
30 FRN0072E2S-4 75 SC-N2 SC-N3 SC-N2
125
Three-phase 100 SC-N4
45 FRN0105E2S-4 150 SC-N3
400V SC-N3
55 FRN0139E2S-4 125 200 SC-N5 SC-N4
75 FRN0168E2S-4 175 SC-N4 SC-N5
- -
90 FRN0203E2S-4 200 SC-N7 SC-N7
• Install the MCCB or RCD/ELCB at the input side of the inverter. They cannot be installed at the output
side of the inverter.
• The above table lists the rated current of MCCBs and RCD/ELCBs to be used in the power control panel
with an internal temperature of lower than 50°C. The rated current is factored by a correction coefficient
of 0.85 as the RCDs'/MCCBs' and ELCBs' original rated current is specified when using them in a
surrounding temperature of 40°C or lower. Select an MCCB and/or RCD/ELCB suitable for the actual
short-circuit breaking capacity needed for your power systems.
• For the selection of the MC type, it is assumed that HIV (allowable surrounding temperature: 75°C)
wires for the power input/output of the inverter are used. If an MC type for another class of wires is
selected, the wire size suitable for the terminal size of both the inverter and the MC type should be taken
into account.
• Use ELCBs with overcurrent protection.
• To protect your power systems from secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter, use an MCCB
and/or RCD/ELCB with the rated current listed in the above table. Do not use an MCCB or RCD/ELCB
with a rating higher than that listed.
11-6
Table 11.3-1 Rated Current of Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-Current-Operated Protective
Device (RCD)/ Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC) (continued)
HHD mode
Nominal rated current (A)
Power Input circuit
applied
voltage circuit
(kW)
18.5 FRN0059E2S-4 40 75 SC-N2
SC-N1 SC-N1
22 FRN0072E2S-4 50 100 SC-N2S
30 FRN0085E2S-4 75 SC-N2 SC-N3 SC-N2
Three-phase 125
400V 100 SC-N4
45 FRN0139E2S-4 150 SC-N3
SC-N3
55 FRN0168E2S-4 125 200 SC-N5 SC-N4
75 FRN0203E2S-4 175 - SC-N4 - SC-N5
• Install the MCCB or RCD/ELCB at the input side of the inverter. They cannot be installed at the output
side of the inverter.
• The above table lists the rated current of MCCBs and RCD/ELCBs to be used in the power control panel
with an internal temperature of lower than 50°C. The rated current is factored by a correction coefficient
of 0.85 as the RCDs'/MCCBs' and ELCBs' original rated current is specified when using them in a
surrounding temperature of 40°C or lower. Select an MCCB and/or RCD/ELCB suitable for the actual
short-circuit breaking capacity needed for your power systems.
• For the selection of the MC type, it is assumed that the 600 V HIV (allowable surrounding temperature:
75°C) wires for the power input/output of the inverter are used. If an MC type for another class of wires is
selected, the wire size suitable for the terminal size of both the inverter and the MC type should be taken
into account.
• Use ELCBs with overcurrent protection.
• To protect your power systems from secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter, use an MCCB
and/or RCD/ELCB with the rated current listed in the above table. Do not use an MCCB or RCD/ELCB
with a rating higher than that listed.
11-7
Table 11.3-2 lists the relationship between the rated leakage current sensitivity of RCDs/ELCBs (with
overcurrent protection) and wiring length of the inverter output circuits. Note that the sensitivity levels listed
in the table are estimated values based on the results obtained by the test setup in the Fuji laboratory where
each inverter drives a single motor.
Table 11.3-2 Rated Current Sensitivity of Residual-Current-Operated Protective Device (RCD)/ Earth Leakage
Circuit Breakers (ELCBs)
Power supply Nominal Wiring length and current sensitivity

voltage applied motor 10m 30m 50m 100m 200m 300m
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2 30mA
3.7
5.5
7.5 100mA
11
Three- phase
200V 15
18.5 200mA
22
30
37
45
55
75 500mA
90
110
15
18.5
22 30mA
30 100mA
37 200mA
Three- phase 45
400V
55 500mA
75
90 1000mA
110
132
• Values listed above were obtained using Fuji ELCB EG or SG series applied to the test setup.
• The rated current of applicable motor rating indicates values for Fuji standard motor (4 poles, 50 Hz and 200 V three-phase).
• The leakage current is calculated based on neutral grounding for 400 V class Y-connection power lines.
• Values listed above are calculated based on the static capacitance to the earth when the 600 V class of vinyl-insulated IV
wires are used in a wiring through metal conduit pipes.
• Wiring length is the total length of wiring between the inverter and motor. If more than one motor is to be connected to a
single inverter, the wiring length should be the total length of wiring between the inverter and motors.
11-8
11.4 Surge Killers for L-load
11.4 Surge Killers for L-load

A surge killer absorbs surge voltage induced by L-load of an electro magnetic switch or solenoid valve. Use
of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment, including inverters, from damage or
malfunctioning caused by such surges.
Install a surge killer near the power coil of the surge source. Connected to the inverter's power source side,
as shown in Figure 11.4-1, a surge killer absorbs the surge voltage, preventing the electronic equipment,
from damage or malfunctioning. (Available rated capacity of nominal applied motors is 3.7 kW or less.)
Refer to the catalog "Fuji Surge Killers/Absorbers (HS118: Japanese edition only)" for details. These
products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
* Do not use the surge killer in the inverter secondary (output) line.
Mounting Terminal
screw M4 screw M4
Inverter
35 mm wide MCCB or
IEC standard RCD/ELCB
*

rail
Motor
Except the ground-fault

protection types
Note: Available rated capacity of nominal

applied motors is 3.7 kW or less.
Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Figure 11.4-1 Dimensions of Surge Killer and Connection Example
11-9
11.5 Arresters
11.5 Arresters
An arrester suppresses surge currents induced by lightning invaded from the power supply lines. Common
use of the grounding wire that is used for electric equipment in the panel, with the arrester, is effective in
preventing electronic equipment from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges.
Applicable arrester models are CN5132 for three-phase 200V class series, and CN5134 for three-phase
400V class series. (CN523 series with 20 kA of discharging capability is also available.) Figure 11.5-1
shows their external dimensions and connection examples. Refer to the catalog "Fuji Surge
Killers/Absorbers (HS165a: Japanese edition only)" for details. These products are available from Fuji
Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Tree-phase (AC240/440V)
Master Inverter Motor *1 Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

*2 The models with a built-in arrestor separator (CN5212-FK and
CN5232-FK) are not required when the short-circuit current of
Arrester Plug fuse or the circuit is 250 VAC, 10kA or less.
separator *2 MCCB
(N-phase terminal is only for CN5234 and CN5234-K.)
Terminal cover
Red LED operation

indicator *2
35 mm wide
rail lock Terminal
cover
(When rail height is 7.5)
Mounting bracket slot

Can also be mounted to the couple mounting plate for JIS standard distribution breakers.
Grounding
terminal (E)
Alarm contact terminal

Available from Fuji Electric
*1 Available only on the CN5□-K series.
*2 Two-pole models have only the left indicator.
Technica Co., Ltd.
Figure 11.5-1 Arrester Dimensions and Connection Examples
11-10
11.6 Surge Absorbers
11.6 Surge Absorbers

A surge absorber absorbs surges or noises generated by a magnetic contactor (MC) or solenoid valve in
the power system to effectively protect electronic equipment in the panel from malfunctions or breakdown.
Installed parallel to a coil of an MC, solenoid valve, or L load, a surge absorber absorbs a surge voltage.
Applicable surge absorber models are the S2-A-O and S1-B-O. Figure 11.6-1 shows their external
dimensions.
These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Type: S2-A-O (for magnetic contactor)

300 (lead wire) 40±1
Type: S1-B-O (for mini-control relay or timer)

300 (lead wire) 40±1

Available from Fuji Electric
Technica Co., Ltd.
Figure 11.6-1 Surge Absorber Dimensions
11-11
11.7 Filtering Capacitors Suppressing AM Radio Band Noises
11.7 Filtering Capacitors Suppressing AM Radio Band Noises

These capacitors are effective to suppress AM radio band (less than 1 MHz) noises. Using them with
Zero-phase reactors upgrades capability.
Applicable models are NFM25M315KPD1 for 200 V class series inverters and NFM60M315KPD for 400 V
class. Use one of them no matter what the inverter capacity. Figure 11.7-1 shows their external dimensions.
These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
* Do not use the filtering capacitor in the inverter secondary (output) line.
NFM25M315KPD1 NFM60M315KPD
Figure 11.7-1 Filtering Capacitors Dimensions
11-12
11.8 Braking Resistors (DBRs) and Braking Units
11.8.1 Selecting a braking resistor

[1] Selection procedure
Depending on the cyclic period, the following requirements must be satisfied.
(1) If the cyclic period is 100 s or less: [Requirement 1] and [Requirement 3]

(2) If the cyclic period exceeds 100 s: [Requirement 1] and [Requirement 2]
[Requirement 1] : The maximum braking torque should not exceed the values listed in the tables in
11.8.4 Specifications. To use the maximum braking torque exceeding the values in
those tables, select the braking resistor whose capacity is one class larger.
[Requirement 2] : The discharge energy for a single braking action should not exceed the discharging
capability (kWs) listed in the tables. For calculation details, refer to Chapter 10,
"10.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor."
[Requirement 3] : The average loss that is calculated by dividing the discharge energy by the cyclic
period must not exceed the average allowable loss (kW) listed in the tables in 11.8.4
Specifications.
[2] Notes on selection
The braking time T1, cyclic period T0, and duty cycle %ED are converted under deceleration braking
conditions based on the rated torque as shown in Figure 11.8-1. However, it is not necessary to consider
these values in the selection of braking resistor capacity.

Braking
power
Time
Braking time T1 Braking time T1
Cyclic period T0
Figure 11.8-1 Duty Cycle
Duty cycle T1
×100 (%)
(%ED) = T0
11-13
11.8.2 Braking resistors (DBRs)

A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration of the motor to heat for consumption.
Use of a braking resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter.
[1] Standard model
The standard model of a braking resistor integrates a facility that detects the temperature on the heat sink of
the resistor and outputs a digital ON/OFF signal if the temperature exceeds the specified level (as an
overheating warning signal). To ensure that the signal is recognized at one of the digital input terminals of
the FRENIC-Ace, assign the external alarm THR to any of terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD] and [REV]. Connect
the assigned terminals to terminals [1] and [2] of the braking resistor. Upon detection of the warning signal
(preset detection level: 150°C), the inverter simultaneously transfers to Alarm mode, displays alarm 0h2 on
the LED monitor and shuts down its power output.
Terminal [X1]
through [X5],
[FWD], [REV]
(External alarm
THR)
Figure 11.8-2 Braking Resistor (Standard Model) and Connection Example
[2] 10%ED model
The 10%ED braking resistor does not support overheating detection or warning output, so an electronic
thermal overload relay needs to be set up using function codes F50 and F51 to protect the braking resistor
from overheating.
Figure 11.8-3 Braking Resistor (10%ED Model) and Connection Example
 For the specifications and external dimensions of the braking units, refer to 11.8.4 Specifications and
11.8.5 External dimensions.
11-14
11.8.3 Braking units

Add a braking unit to the braking resistor to upgrade the braking capability of inverters with the following capacity.
FRN0072E2S-4 or the lower models of inverters have built-in IGBTs for the braking resistor.
Figure 11.8-4 Braking Unit
 For the specifications and external dimensions of the braking units, refer to 11.8.4 Specifications and
11.8.5 External dimensions.
11-15
11.8.4 Specifications
Table 11.8-1 Generated Loss in Braking Unit
Min. connection
Model Generated loss (W)
resistance (Ω)
BU37-4C 35 12
BU55-4C 40 7.5
BU90-4C 50 4.7
BU132-4C 60 3.0
*10%ED
Table 11.8-2 Braking Unit and Braking Resistor (Standard Model)
ND mode
Continuous braking Repetitive braking
Maximum braking
Selecting Options (100% braking (each cycle is 100 s or
torque
Nominal torque) less)
Power
applied Average
supply Inverter type Discharging Braking
motor Braking units Braking resistor 50Hz 60Hz allowable Duty cycle
voltage capability time
(kW) loss
Resistance
Model Q'ty Model Q'ty (N･m) (N･m) (kWs) (s) (kW) (%ED)
(Ω)
30 FRN0059E2S-4 DB18.5-4 1 27 146 121 93 6 0.463 3
-
37 FRN0072E2S-4 DB22-4 1 22 180 150 88 4.7 0.55 3
45 FRN0085E2S-4 BU37-4C 1 DB37-4C 1 12 220 182 185 10 1.85 10
Three-
phase 55 FRN0105E2S-4 DB45-4C 1 10 75 268 223 225 10 2.25 10
400V BU55-4C 1
75 FRN0139E2S-4 DB55-4C 1 7.5 365 303 275 10 2.75 10
90 FRN0168E2S-4 DB75-4C 1 6.5 437 364 375 10 3.75 10
BU90-4C 1
110 FRN0203E2S-4 DB110-4C 1 4.7 534 444 450 10 4.50 10
HD mode
Repetitive braking
Maximum braking Continuous braking
Selecting Options (each cycle is 100 s or
torque (100% braking torque)
Nominal less)
Power
applied Average
supply Inverter type Discharging Braking Duty
motor Braking units Braking resistor 50Hz 60Hz allowable
voltage capability time cycle
(kW) loss
Resistance
(Ω)
22 FRN0059E2S-4 DB18.5-4 1 27 144 119 93 8 0.463 4
-
30 FRN0072E2S-4 DB22-4 1 22 195 162 88 6 0.55 3.5
37 FRN0085E2S-4 BU37-4C 1 DB37-4C 1 12 240 200 185 10 1.85 10
Three-
phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 DB45-4C 1 10 100 293 243 225 10 2.25 10
400V BU55-4C 1
55 FRN0139E2S-4 DB55-4C 1 7.5 357 298 275 10 2.75 10
75 FRN0168E2S-4 DB75-4C 1 6.5 487 405 375 10 3.75 10
BU90-4C 1
90 FRN0203E2S-4 DB110-4C 1 4.7 583 486 450 10 4.50 10
HND mode
Continuous braking Repetitive braking
Maximum braking
Selecting Options (100% braking (each cycle is 100 s or
torque
Nominal torque) less)
Power
applied Average
(kW) loss
Resistance
(Ω)
22 FRN0059E2S-4 DB18.5-4 1 27 144 119 93 8 0.463 4
- 100
30 FRN0072E2S-4 DB22-4 1 22 195 162 88 6 0.55 3.5
37 FRN0085E2S-4 DB30-4C 1 15 180 150 150 10 1.50 10
Three- BU37-4C 1
phase 45 FRN0105E2S-4 DB37-4C 1 12 219 182 185 10 1.85 10
400V
55 FRN0139E2S-4 DB45-4C 1 10 75 269 223 225 10 2.25 10
BU55-4C 1
75 FRN0168E2S-4 DB55-4C 1 7.5 365 303 275 10 2.75 10
90 FRN0203E2S-4 BU90-4C 1 DB75-4C 1 6.5 439 364 375 10 3.75 10
11-16
Table 11.8-3 Braking Unit and Braking Resistor (Standard Model)
HHD mode
Repetitive braking
Selecting Options (each cycle is 100
Nominal s or less)
Power
applied Average
(kW) loss
Resistance
(Ω)
18.5 FRN0059E2S-4 DB18.5-4 1 27 182 151 93 10 0.463 5
- 150
22 FRN0072E2S-4 DB22-4 1 22 216 179 88 8 0.55 5
30 FRN0085E2S-4 DB30-4C 1 15 195 162 150 10 1.50 10
Three- BU37-4C 1
phase 37 FRN0105E2S-4 DB37-4C 1 12 240 200 185 10 1.85 10
400V
45 FRN0139E2S-4 DB45-4C 1 10 100 292 243 225 10 2.25 10
BU55-4C 1
55 FRN0168E2S-4 DB55-4C 1 7.5 359 298 275 10 2.75 10
75 FRN0203E2S-4 BU90-4C 1 DB75-4C 1 6.5 487 405 375 10 3.75 10
Table 11.8-4 Braking Resistors (10% ED Models)
ND mode
Repetitive braking
Selecting Options (each cycle is 100 s
Nominal or less)
Power
applied Average
(kW) loss
Resistance
(Ω)
Three- 30 FRN0059E2S-4 146 121 93 6 0.925 6
phase - DB22-4 1 22 75
400V 37 FRN0072E2S-4 180 150 110 6 1.1 6
HD mode
Repetitive braking
Nominal or less)
Power
applied Average
(kW) loss

Resistance
(Ω)
Three- 22 FRN0059E2S-4 144 119 93 7 0.925 7
phase - DB22-4 1 22 100
400V 30 FRN0072E2S-4 195 162 110 7 1.1 7
HND mode
Repetitive braking
Nominal or less)
Power
applied Average
(kW) loss
Resistance
(Ω)
Three- 22 FRN0059E2S-4 144 119 93 7 0.925 7
phase - DB22-4 1 22 100
400V 30 FRN0072E2S-4 195 162 110 7 1.1 7
HHD mode
Repetitive braking
Nominal or less)
Power
applied Average
(kW) loss
Resistance
(Ω)
Three- 18.5 FRN0059E2S-4 182 151 92 10 0.925 10
phase - DB22-4 1 22 150
400V 22 FRN0072E2S-4 216 179 110 10 1.1 10
* The 10%ED braking resistor does not support overheating detection or warning output, so an electronic thermal overload
relay needs to be set up using function codes F50 and F51 to protect the braking resistor from overheating.
11-17
11.8.5 External dimensions

Braking resistors, standard models
Power supply Dimensions (mm) Mass

Type Figure
voltage
Figure A Figure B Figure C
200 V
class series
Figure D
400 V
class series
Figure E
* DB220-4C should be used in pairs. The dimension

above is for one unit.
Braking resistors, 10% ED models

Figure A Figure B Figure C Figure D
Dimensions Unit : [mm] Mass

Type Figure
11-18
Braking units
Fan units for braking units
Using this option improves the duty cycle [%ED] from 10%ED to 30%ED.
11-19
11.9 Power Regenerative PWM Converters, RHC Series
11.9.1 Overview
Comparison of Input Current Waveforms
11-20
11.9.2 Specifications
[1] Standard specifications
 200 V class series
 400 V class series

(*1) When the power supply voltage is 200/400 V, 220/440 V, or 230/460 V, the output voltage is approximate 320/640 VDC,
343/686 VDC, 355/710 VDC, respectively.
(*2) The 220 to 230 V/50 Hz models are available on request.
(*3) Voltage unbalance (%) = (Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)) / Three-phase average voltage (V) x 67
(*4) When the power supply voltage is 380 to 398 V/50 Hz and 380 to 430 V/60 Hz, tap-switching is required in the converter.
[2] Common specifications

Item Specifications
Control method AVR constant control with DC ACR minor
Running/Stopping Starts rectification when the converter is powered ON after connection.
Starts boosting when it receives a run signal (terminals [RUN] and [CM] short-circuited or a run command via the
communications link).
After that, the converter is ready to run.
Running status signal Running, power running, regenerative operation, ready-to-run, alarm output (for any alarm), etc.
Control
CT/VT switching Switching between CT and VT modes.

CT: 150% of overload rating for 1 min
VT: 120% of overload rating for 1 min
Carrier frequency Fixed to high carrier frequency
Input power factor 0.99 or above
Restart after momentary Shields the gate when the voltage level reaches the undervoltage level if a momentary power failure occurs, and the
power failure converter can automatically restart after the power recovers.
Power limiting control Controls the power not to exceed the preset limit value.
Alarm display AC fuse blown, AC overvoltage, AC undervoltage, AC overcurrent, AC input current error, input phase loss, synchronous
(Protective functions) power supply frequency error, DC fuse blown, DC overvoltage, DC undervoltage, charge circuit fault, heat sink overheat,
external alarm, converter internal overheat, overload, memory error, keypad communications error, CPU error, network
device error, operation procedure error, A/D converter error, optical network error, IPM error
Indication
Alarm history Saves and displays the most recent 10 alarms.

Saves and displays the detailed information of the trip cause for the previous alarm.
Monitor Displays input power, input current in RMS, input voltage in RMS, DC link bus voltage and power supply frequency.
Load factor Allows the user to measure the load factor with the keypad.
Language Allows the user to specify or refer to function codes in any of the three languages--Japanese, English or Chinese.
Charging lamp Lights when the DC link bus capacitor is charged.
11-21
11.9.3 Function specifications

 Terminal functions
Main circuit Classification
Symbol Name Functions
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T Main circuit power inputs Connects with the three-phase input power lines through a dedicated reactor.
P(+), N(-) Converter outputs Connects with the power input terminals P(+) and N(-) on an inverter.
ok Grounding Grounding terminal for the converter's chassis (or casing).
Auxiliary power input for the
R0, T0 For a backup of the control circuit power supply, connect the power lines same as that of the main power input.
control circuit
Synchronous power input for Voltage detection terminals for the internal control of the converter. Connect with the power supply side of the dedicated reactor or
detection
Voltage
R1, S1, T1
voltage detection filter.
R2, T2 Inputs for control monitoring Detection terminal for AC fuse blown.
[RUN] Run command Short-circuiting terminals [RUN] and [CM] runs the converter; opening them stops the converter.
When the converter stops due to an alarm, removing the alarm factor and short-circuiting the terminals [RST] and [CM] cancels the
Input signal
[RST] Reset alarm command

protective function, restarting the converter.
0: Enable external alarm trip THR 1: Cancel current limiter LMT-CCL 2: 73 answerback 73ANS 3: Switch current limiter I-LIM
[X1] General-purpose transistor input
4: Option DI OPT-DI
[CM] Digital input common Common terminal for digital input signals.
[PLC] PLC signal power Connects to PLC output signal power supply. (Rated voltage: 24 VDC (22 to 27 VDC)
Alarm relay output Outputs a signal when the protective function is activated to stop the converter.
[30A/B/C]
(for any alarm) (Contact: [1C], Terminals [30A] and [30C] are closed: Signal ON) (Contact rating: 250 VAC, max. 50 mA)
[Y1], [Y2], [Y3], [Y11] 0: Converter running RUN 1: Converter ready to run RDY 2: Power supply current limiting IL 3: Lifetime alarm LIFE
General-purpose transistor output
to [Y18] 4: Heat sink overheat early warning PRE-OH 5: Overload early warning PRE-OL 6: Power running DRV 7: Regenerating REG
[CME] Digital output common 8: Current limiting early warning CUR 9: Restarting after momentary power failure U-RES
Output signal
10: Synchronizing power supply frequency SY-HZ 11: Alarm content 1 AL1 12: Alarm content 2 AL2 13: Alarm content 4 AL4
[Y5A/C] Relay output 14: Option DO OPT-DO
* Mounting the OPC-VG7-DIOA option makes 8 points of DO extended functions available. (DI functions are not available.)
0: Input power PWR 1: Input current in RMS I-AC 2: Input voltage in RMS V-AC 3: DC link bus voltage V-DC
[A01], [A04], [A05] General-purpose analog output 4: Power supply frequency FREQ 5: +10 V test P10 6: -10 V test N10
* Mounting the OPC-VG7-AIO option makes 2 points of AO extended functions available. (AI functions are not available.)
[M] Analog output common Common terminal for analog output signal.
Charging resistor input relay
[73A], [73C] Control output for the input relay of the external charging resistor (73).
outputs
 Communications specifications
Item Specifications
Monitoring the running information, running status and function code data, and controlling (selecting) the terminals [RUN], [RST] and
General communication specifications [X1].
* Writing to function codes is not possible.
Communicating with a PC or PLC.
RS-485 (standard)
(The converter supports the Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol and Modbus RTU protocol.)
T-Link (option) Mounting the OPC-VG7-TL option enables communication with a T-Link module of MICREX-F or MICREX-SX via a T-Link network.
SX-bus (option) Mounting the OPC-VG7-SX option enables communication with a MICREX-SX via an SX bus network.
CC-Link (option) Mounting the OPC-VG7-CCL option enables communication with a CC-Link master.
Traceback (option) Hardware Mounting the OPC-RHC-TR option enables tracing back of the running status data of the converter.
WPS-LD-TR software is required.
Software Installing the WPS-RHC-TR software enables collecting of traceback data on the PC.
 Function settings  Protective functions

Function code Name LED monitor
Item Description Remarks
displays:
F00 Data protection AC fuse blown Stops the converter output if the AC fuse (R-/T-phase only) is blown.
acf
F01 High frequency filter selection
AC overvoltage a0u Stops the converter output upon detection of an AC overvoltage condition.
F02 Restart mode after momentary
AC undervoltage alu Stops the converter output upon detection of an AC undervoltage condition.
power failure (Mode selection)
AC overcurrent a0c Stops the converter output if the peak value of the input current exceeds the overcurrent
F03 Current rating switching level.
F04 LED monitor, item selection AC input current error ace Stops the converter output upon detection of the excessive deviation of the AC reactor
F05 LCD monitor, item selection from the AC input.
F06 LCD monitor, language selection Input phase loss lpu Stops the converter output upon detection of an input phase loss.
F07 LCD monitor, contrast control Synchronous power fre After the MC for charging circuit (73) is turned on, the converter checks the power
frequency error frequency. If it detects a power frequency error, this function stops the converter output. An
F08 Carrier frequency error during converter running (e.g., momentary power failure) triggers no alarm.
E01 Terminal [X1] function DC fuse blown dcf Stops the converter output if the DC fuse (P side) is blown. 18.5 kW or above
E02 to E13 Terminal [Y1], [Y2], [Y3,], [Y5], DC overvoltage d0u Stops the converter output upon detection of a DC overvoltage condition. 200 V class series: 400 V 3 V
[Y11] to [Y18] function If a power failure continues for a long time and the control power source is shut down, this 400 V class series:800 V 5 V
alarm is automatically reset.
E14 I/O function normal open/closed
DC undervoltage dlu Stops the converter output upon detection of a DC undervoltage condition. 200 V class series: Stops at 185 V,
E15 RHC overload early warning level If a power failure continues for a long time and the control power source is shut down, this restarts at 208 V.
E16 Cooling fan ON/OFF control alarm is automatically reset. 400 V class series: Stops at 371 V,
E17 Under current limiting (Hysteresis restarts at 417 V.
Charging circuit fault pbf Stops the converter output upon detection of a charging circuit fault, provided that the Condition: 73ANS (Answerback from
width) answerback signal from 73 is enabled. 73) is assigned to terminal [X1].
E18 to E20 A01, A04 and A05, function Heat sink overheat 0h1 Stops the converter output upon detection of a heat sink overheat.
selection External alarm 0h2 Stops the converter output upon receipt of an external signal THR. Condition: THR (Enable external
E21 to E23 A01, A04 and A05, gain setting alarm trip) is assigned to terminal
E24 to E26 A01, A04 and A05, bias setting [X1].
Converter internal 0h3 Stops the converter output upon detection of an internal overheat of the converter.
E27 A01, A04 and A05, filter setting overheat
S01 Operation method Converter overload 0lu Stops the converter output with the inverse-time characteristics due to the input current. Activate at 105%, 150% for 1 min
S02, S03 Power supply current limiting Memory error er1 Stops the converter output if a data writing error or any other memory error occurs (when
(driving/braking) the checksums of the EEPROM and RAM do not match).
H01 Station address Keypad communications er2 Displays "er2 " upon detection of a wire break in initial communication with the keypad.
error This does not affect the converter operation.
H02 Communications error processing
CPU error er3 Activated if a CPU error occurs.
H03 Timer
Network device error er4 Stops the converter output if a fatal error (including no power supply connection) occurs in Applies to T-Link, SX-bus, and
H04 Baud rate the master unit in the network. CC-Link devices.
H05 Data length Operation procedure er6 Stops the converter output upon detection of an error in the operation procedure.
H06 Parity bits error
A/D converter error er8 Stops the converter output upon detection of a failure in the A/D converter circuit.
H07 Stop bits
Optical network error erb Stops the converter output upon detection of an optical cable break or a fatal error in the
H08 No-response error detection time optical option.
H09 Response interval IPM error 1pe Activated when the IPM's self-diagnosis function works due to an overcurrent or overheat. 15 kW or below
H10 Protocol selection
H11
H12
TL transmission format
Parallel system
 Required structure and environment
H13 Number of slave stations in Item Required structure, environment and standards Remarks
parallel system Structure Mounting in a panel or mounting for external cooling
H14 Clear alarm data Enclosure IP00
Structure
H15, H16 Power supply current limiter Cooling system Forced air cooling
(driving 1/2) Installation Vertical installation
Coating color Munsell 5Y3/0.5, eggshell
H17, H18 Power supply current limiter (Same color as our inverter FRENIC 5000VG7S series.)
(braking 1/2) Maintainability Structure designed for easy parts replacement
H19, H20 Current limiting early warning Site location Shall be free from corrosive gases, flammable gases, dusts, and direct sunlight. Indoor use
(level/timer) only.
M09 Power supply frequency Surrounding -10 to 50C
temperature
M10 Input power
Environment
Relative humidity 5 to 95% RH (No condensation)

M11 Input current in RMS Altitude 3,000 m max. (For use in an altitude between 1,001 m to 3,000 m, the output current should be
M12 Input voltage in RMS derated.)
Vibration 2 to 9 Hz: Amplitude = 3 mm, 9 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2,
M13 Run command 20 to 55 Hz: 2 m/s2 (9 to 55 Hz: 2 m/s2 for 90 kW or above),
M14 Running status 55 to 200 Hz: 1 m/s2
M15 Output terminals [Y1] to [Y18] Storage temperature -20 to 55C
Storage humidity 5 to 95% RH
11-22
11.9.4 Converter configuration

 List of configurators
CT mode
VT mode
(*1) The charging box (CU) contains a combination of a charging resistor (R0) and a fuse (F). If no CU is used, it is necessary to
prepare the charging resistor (R0) and fuse (F) at your end.
(*2) The filtering capacitor consists of two pieces of capacitors. For an order of quantity "1," two pieces of capacitors are to be
delivered.
11-23
 Basic connection diagrams

 RHC7.5-2C to RHC90-2C (Applicable inverters: Three-phase 200 V  RHC7.5-2C to RHC90-2C (Applicable inverters: Three-phase 200 V
class series, 7.5 to 90 kW) class series, 7.5 to 90 kW)
 RHC7.5-4C to RHC220-4C (Applicable inverters: Three-phase 400  RHC7.5-4C to RHC220-4C (Applicable inverters: Three-phase 400
V class series, 7.5 to 220 kW) V class series, 7.5 to 220 kW)
*When a charging box is connected
Symbol Part name

Lr Boosting reactor
Symbol Part name Lf Filtering reactor
Lr Boosting reactor Cf Filtering capacitor
Lf Filtering reactor Rf Filtering resistor
Cf Filtering capacitor R0 Charging resistor
Rf Filtering resistor F Fuse
CU Charging box Magnetic contactor for
Magnetic contactor for 73
73 charging circuit
charging circuit
(*1) For the 400 V class power supply, connect a stepdown transformer to limit the
(*1) For the 400 V class power supply, connect a stepdown transformer to limit the voltage of the sequence circuit to 220 V or below.
voltage of the sequence circuit to 220 V or below. (*2) Be sure to connect the auxiliary power input terminals R0 and T0 of the PWM
(*2) Be sure to connect the auxiliary power input terminals R0 and T0 of the PWM converter to the main power input lines via B contacts of magnetic contactors
converter to the main power input lines via B contacts of magnetic contactors of the charging circuit (73 or MC).
of the charging circuit (73 or MC). If 73 uses SC-05, SC-4-0, or SC-5-1, connect an auxiliary contact unit to the
If 73 uses SC-05, SC-4-0, or SC-5-1, connect an auxiliary contact unit to the MC's B contact or 73.
MC's B contact or 73. (*3) Be sure to connect the auxiliary power input terminals R0 and T0 of the
inverter to the main power input lines via B contacts of magnetic contactors of
(*3) Be sure to connect the auxiliary power input terminals R0 and T0 of the
the charging circuit (73 or MC). For 200 V class series of inverters with a
inverter to the main power input lines via B contacts of magnetic contactors of
capacity of 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above,
the charging circuit (73 or MC). For 200 V class series of inverters with a
connect the fan power input terminals R1 and T1 of the inverter to the main
capacity of 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above,
power input lines without going through the MC's B contacts or 73.
connect the fan power input terminals R1 and T1 of the inverter to the main
power input lines without going through the MC's B contacts or 73. (*4) Construct a sequence in which a run command is given to the inverter after
the PWM converter becomes ready to run.
(*4) Construct a sequence in which a run command is given to the inverter after
(*5) Assign the external alarm THR to any of terminals [X1] to [X9] on the inverter.
the PWM converter becomes ready to run.
 RHC280-4C to RHC400-4C (Applicable inverters: Three-phase 400  RHC400-4C in VT mode (Applicable inverters: Three-phase 400 V,
V, 280 to 400 kW) 400 kW)
 RHC500-4C and RHC630-4C (Applicable inverters: Three-phase
400 V, 500 and 630 kW)
Symbol Part name Sym

Lr Boosting reactor Part name
bol
Lf Filtering reactor Lr Boosting reactor
Cf Filtering capacitor Lf Filtering reactor
Rf Filtering resistor Cf Filtering capacitor
R0 Charging resistor Rf Filtering resistor
F Fuse R0 Charging resistor
Magnetic contactor for F Fuse
73
charging circuit Magnetic contactor for
52 charging circuit
power supply Magnetic contactor for
6F power supply
filtering circuit Magnetic contactor for
6F
(*1) Connect a stepdown transformer to limit the voltage of the sequence circuit to filtering circuit
220 V or below. (*1) Connect a stepdown transformer to limit the voltage of the sequence circuit to
(*2) Be sure to connect the auxiliary power input terminals R0 and T0 of the PWM 220 V or below.
converter and the inverter to the main power input lines via B contacts of (*2) Be sure to connect the auxiliary power input terminals R0 and T0 of the PWM
magnetic contactors of the power supply circuit (52). converter and the inverter to the main power input lines via B contacts of
(*3) Connect the fan power input terminals R1 and T1 of the inverter to the main magnetic contactors of the power supply circuit (52).
power input lines without going through the B contacts of 52, since the (*3) Connect the fan power input terminals R1 and T1 of the inverter to the main
inverter's AC fans are supplied with power from these terminals. power input lines without going through the B contacts of 73 or 52, since the
(*4) Construct a sequence in which a run command is given to the inverter after inverter's AC fans are supplied with power from these terminals.
the PWM converter becomes ready to run. (*4) Construct a sequence in which a run command is given to the inverter after
(*5) Set the timer 52T at 1 sec. the PWM converter becomes ready to run.
(*6) Assign the external alarm THR to any of terminals [X1] to [X9] on the inverter. (*5) Set the timer 52T at 1 sec.
(*7) Wiring for terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1 should match
with the phase sequence.
11-24
11.9.5 External dimensions

PWM converter
Fig. A Fig. B
Hanging hole
Fig. D
Fig. C
Dimensions (mm) Mass

PWM converter type Figure
W W1 H H1 D D1 n B C (kg)
RHC7.5-2C A 250 226 380 358 245 125 2 10 10 12.5
RHC11-2C
RHC15-2C

RHC18.5-2C B 340 240 480 460 255 145 2 10 10 24
RHC22-2C
200V class series RHC30-2C B 340 240 550 530 255 145 2 10 10 29
RHC37-2C B 375 275 615 595 270 145 2 10 10 36
RHC45-2C B 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 42
RHC55-2C B 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 44
RHC75-2C C 530 430 750 720 285 145 2 15 15 70
RHC90-2C C 680 580 880 850 360 220 3 15 15 115
RHC7.5-4C A 250 226 380 358 245 125 2 10 10 12.5
RHC11-4C
RHC15-4C
RHC18.5-4C B 340 240 480 460 255 145 2 10 10 24
RHC22-4C
RHC30-4C B 340 240 550 530 255 145 2 10 10 29
RHC37-4C B 375 275 550 530 270 145 2 10 10 34
RHC45-4C B 375 275 675 655 270 145 2 10 10 38
RHC55-4C B 375 275 675 655 270 145 2 10 10 39
RHC75-4C B 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 48
RHC90-4C C 530 430 740 710 315 175 2 15 15 70
400V class series
RHC110-4C
RHC132-4C C 530 430 1000 970 360 220 2 15 15 100
RHC160-4C
RHC200-4C C 680 580 1000 970 360 220 3 15 15 140
RHC220-4C
RHC280-4C C 680 580 1400 1370 450 285 3 15 15 320
RHC315-4C
RHC355-4C C 880 780 1400 1370 450 285 4 15 15 410
RHC400-4C
RHC500-4C D 999 900 1550 1520 500 313.2 4 15 15 525
RHC630-4C
11-25
< Boosting reactor >
Figure A Figure B
6-terminal hole
6-terminal hole (M screw)
(M screw)
φK Elongated hole
φK Elongated hole
Figure C Figure D
6-terminal hole
(M screw)
6-terminal
(M screw)
Detailed view of
terminal

Boosting reactor type Figure
W W1 H D D1 D2 K M (kg)
LR2-7.5C A 180 75 205 105 85 95 7 M5 12
LR2-15C B 195 75 215 131 110 130 7 M8 18
LR2-22C C 240 80 340 215 180 145 10 M8 33
200V class series LR2-37C C 285 95 420 240 205 150 12 M10 50
LR2-55C C 285 95 420 250 215 160 12 M12 58
LR2-75C C 330 110 440 255 220 165 12 M12 70
LR2-110C C 345 115 500 280 245 185 12 M12 100
LR4-7.5C B 180 75 205 105 85 90 7 M4 12
LR4-15C A 195 75 215 131 110 120 7 M5 18
LR4-22C C 240 80 340 215 180 120 10 M6 33
LR4-37C C 285 95 405 240 205 130 12 M8 50
LR4-55C C 285 95 415 250 215 145 12 M10 58
LR4-75C C 330 110 440 255 220 150 12 M10 70
LR4-110C C 345 115 490 280 245 170 12 M12 100
400V class series LR4-160C C 380 125 550 300 260 185 15 M12 140
LR4-220C C 450 150 620 330 290 230 15 M12 200
LR4-280C C 480 160 740 330 290 240 15 M16 250
LR4-315C C 480 160 760 340 300 250 15 M16 270
LR4-355C C 480 160 830 355 315 255 15 M16 310
LR4-400C C 480 160 890 380 330 260 19 M16 340
LR4-500C C 525 175 960 410 360 290 19 M16 420
LR4-630C D 600 200 64 440 390 290 19 4×M12 450
11-26
< Filtering reactor >
Figure A Figure B Figure C
6-terminal hole 6-terminal hole 6-terminal hole

(M screw) (M screw) (M screw)
φK Elongated hole
φK
φK Elongated hole
Figure D Figure E
6-terminal hole
(M screw)
6-terminal
(M screw)
Detailed view of terminal

Filtering reactor type Figure
W W1 H D D1 D2 K M (kg)
LFC2-7.5C B 125 40 100 85 67 85 6 M5 2.2
LFC2-15C B 125 40 100 93 75 90 6 M8 2.5
LFC2-22C B 125 40 100 93 75 105 6 M8 3.0
200V class series LFC2-37C B 150 60 115 103 85 125 6 M10 5.0
LFC2-55C B 175 60 145 110 90 140 6 M12 8.0
LFC2-75C B 195 80 200 120 100 150 7 M12 13
LFC2-110C C 255 85 230 118 95 165 7 M12 20
LFC4-7.5C A 125 40 100 85 67 75 6 M4 2.2
LFC4-15C A 125 40 100 93 75 90 6 M5 2.5
LFC4-22C A 125 40 100 93 75 95 6 M6 3.0

LFC4-37C B 150 60 115 108 90 110 6 M8 5.0
LFC4-55C B 175 60 145 110 90 120 6 M10 8.0
LFC4-75C B 195 80 200 113 93 130 7 M10 12
LFC4-110C C 255 85 220 113 90 145 7 M12 19
400V class series LFC4-160C C 255 85 245 137 110 150 7 M12 22
LFC4-220C D 300 100 320 210 180 170 10 M12 35
LFC4-280C D 330 110 320 230 195 195 12 M16 43
LFC4-315C D 315 105 365 230 195 200 12 M16 48
LFC4-355C D 315 105 395 235 200 210 12 M16 53
LFC4-400C D 345 115 420 235 200 235 12 M16 60
LFC4-500C D 345 115 480 240 205 240 12 M16 72
LFC4-630C E 435 145 550 295 255 205 15 4×M12 175
11-27
< Filtering capacitor >
Fig. A Fig. B
3-terminal bolt 3-terminal bolt

(J screw) (J screw)

Filtering capacitor type Figure
W W1 H H1 D D1 E F J (kg)
CF2-7.5C A 165 150 185 - 70 40 30 7 M5 1.9
CF2-15C A 205 190 245 - 70 40 30 7 M5 3.5
CF2-22C A 280 265 215 - 90 55 30 7 M5 5.5
200V class series CF2-37C A 280 265 235 - 90 55 30 7 M5 6.0
CF2-55C A 280 265 340 - 90 55 80 7 M6 8.5
CF2-75C A 280 265 235 - 90 55 30 7 M5 6.0
CF2-110C A 280 265 340 - 90 55 80 7 M8 8.5
CF4-7.5C A 165 150 135 - 70 40 30 7 M5 1.3
CF4-15C A 165 150 215 - 70 40 30 7 M5 2.3
CF4-22C A 205 190 185 - 70 40 30 7 M5 2.5
CF4-37C A 205 190 205 - 70 40 30 7 M5 2.9
CF4-55C A 205 190 245 - 70 40 30 7 M5 3.5
CF4-75C A 205 190 205 - 70 40 30 7 M5 2.9
CF4-110C A 205 190 245 - 70 40 30 7 M5 3.5
CF4-160C A 280 265 260 - 90 55 80 7 M6 6.0
CF4-220C B 435 400 310 125 100 - 80 15x20 M12 13.0
Elongated hole
400V class series CF4-280C B 435 400 350 165 100 - 80 15x20 M12 15.0
Elongated hole
CF4-315C B 435 400 460 275 100 - 80 15x20 M12 20.0
Elongated hole
CF4-355C B 435 400 520 335 100 - 80 15x20 M12 23.0
Elongated hole
CF4-400C B 435 400 610 425 100 - 80 15x20 M12 27.0
Elongated hole
CF4-500C B 435 400 310 125 100 - 80 15x20 M12 13.0
Elongated hole
CF4-630C B 435 400 460 275 100 - 80 15x20 M12 20.0
Elongated hole
11-28
< Filtering resistor >
Fig. A Fig. B
2-M12 Eye bolts Terminal
Fig. C
M12 Eye bolts Terminal
Earth
terminal
4-φ15 Mounting holes

Filtering resistor type Figure
W W1 W2 H1 H2 D D1 D2 C (kg)
GRZG80 0.42Ω A 167 148 115 22 32 33 26 6 5.5 0.19
GRZG150 0.2Ω A 247 228 195 22 40 33 26 6 8.2 0.19
200V class
GRZG200 0.13Ω A 306 287 254 22 40 33 26 6 8.2 0.35
series
GRZG400 0.1Ω A 411 385 330 40 46 47 40 9.5 8.2 0.85
GRZG400 0.12Ω A 411 385 330 40 46 47 40 9.5 8.2 0.85
GRZG80 1.74Ω A 167 148 115 22 32 33 26 6 5.5 0.19
GRZG150 0.79Ω A 247 228 195 22 32 33 26 6 5.5 0.3
GRZG200 0.53Ω A 306 287 254 22 32 33 26 6 5.5 0.35
GRZG400 0.38Ω A 411 385 330 40 46 47 40 9.5 8.2 0.85
GRZG400 0.26Ω A 411 385 330 40 46 47 40 9.5 8.2 0.85
GRZG400 0.53Ω A 411 385 330 40 46 47 40 9.5 8.2 0.85
400V class RF4-160C B 400 370 - 240 55 470 460 320 - 22
series RF4-220C 25
RF4-280C C 655 625 - 240 55 470 460 320 - 31
RF4-315C 35

RF4-355C 36
RF4-400C 38
RF4-500C 41
RF4-630C C 655 625 - 440 55 530 520 320 - 70
11-29
< Charging box >

The charging box contains a combination of a charging resistor and a fuse, which is essential in the
configuration of the RHC-C series of PWM converters. Using this charging box eases mounting and wiring
jobs.
 Capacity range
200 V class series: 7.5 to 90 kW in 10 types,
400 V class series: 7.5 to 220 kW in 14 types, Total 24 types
As for 400 V class series with a capacity of 280 to 400 kW, the charging resistor and the fuse are separately
provided as before.
Dimensions (mm) Mounting Mass

Fuse type
W W1 H H1 H2 H3 4 D D1 C bolt (kg)
CU7.5-2C 270 170 300 285 270 7.5 15 100 2.4 6 M5 6
CU11-2C
CU15-2C
CU18.5-2C
CU22-2C
200V class series
CU30-2C 300 200 310 295 280 7.5 15 110 2.4 6 M5 7
CU45-2C 330 230 310 295 280 7.5 15 130 2.4 6 M5 8
CU55-2C
CU75-2C 430 330 560 536 510 12 25 150 3.2 10 M8 17
CU90-2C 20
CU7.5-4C 270 170 300 285 270 7.5 15 100 2.4 6 M5 5.5
CU15-4C
CU18.5-4C 6
CU22-4C
CU30-4C 300 200 310 295 280 7.5 15 110 2.4 6 M5 7
CU45-4C
CU55-4C
400V class series
CU75-4C 330 230 310 295 280 7.5 15 130 2.4 6 M5 8
CU90-4C
CU110-4C
CU132-4C 430 330 560 536 510 12 25 150 3.2 10 M8 18
CU160-4C
CU200-4C 20
CU220-4C
11-30
< Charging resistor >
Fig.A Fig.B
Fig.C

Charging resistor type Figure
W W1 W2 H1 H2 D D1 D2 C (kg)
GRZG120 2Ω A 217 198 165 22 32 33 22 6 5.5 0.25

GRZG400 1Ω A 411 385 330 40 39 47 40 9.5 5.5 0.85
TK50B 30ΩJ (HF5B0416) B - - - - - - - - - 0.15
80W 7.5Ω (HF5C5504) C - - - - - - - - - 0.19
11-31
< Fuse >
Fig.A Fig.B Fig.C
Side view of the A70P1600-4TA
Side view of the A70P2000-4

Fuse type Figure
W W1 W2 H D D1 G E (kg)
CR2LS-50/UL A 56 42 26 18.5 17.5 12 2 6.5x8.5 0.03
CR2LS-75/UL
CR2LS-100/UL
CR2L-150/UL A 80 58 29.5 30.5 27 20 3 9x11 0.10
200V class series
CR2L-200/UL A 85 60 30 33.5 30 25 3.2 11x13 0.13
CR2L-260/UL
CR2L-400/UL A 95 70 31 42 37 30 4 11x13 0.22
A50P600-4 B 113.5 81.75 56.4 - 50.8 38.1 6.4 10.3x18.2 0.60
CR6L-30/UL A 76 62 47 18.5 17.5 12 2 6.5x8.5 0.04
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-75/UL A 95 70 40 34 30 25 3.2 11x13 0.15
CR6L-100/UL
CR6L-150/UL
CR6L-200/UL A 107 82 43 42 37 30 4 11x13 0.25
400V class series
CR6L-300/UL
A50P400-4 B 110 78.6 53.1 - 38.1 25.4 6.4 10.3x18.4 0.30
A50P600-4 B 113.5 81.75 56.4 - 50.8 38.1 6.4 10.3x18.2 0.60
A70QS800-4 B 180.2 129.4 72.2 - 63.5 50.8 9.5 13.5x18.3 1.1
A70P1600-4T C - - - - - - - - 8.0
A70P2000-4 C - - - - - - - - 8.0
11-32
 Generated loss
In CT mode
PWM converter Boosting reactor Filtering reactor Filtering resistor

Type Generated loss (W) Type Generated loss (W) Type Generated loss (W) Type Qty. Generated loss (W)
Two in parallel
Two in parallel
In VT mode
PWM converter Boosting reactor Filtering reactor Filtering resistor
Type Generated loss (W) Type Generated loss (W) Type Generated loss (W) Type Qty. Generated loss (W)

Two in parallel
Two in parallel
Note: Generated losses listed in the above tables are approximate values that are calculated according to
the following conditions:
• The power supply is three-phase 200 V/400 V 50 Hz with 0% interphase voltage unbalance ratio.
• The power supply capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the
inverter.
• The motor is a 4-pole standard model at full load (100%).
11-33
11.10 DC Reactors (DCRs)

A DCR is mainly used for power supply matching and for input power factor correction (for reducing
harmonic components).
 For power supply matching

• Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more
the rated inverter capacity. In this case, the percent reactance of the power supply decreases, and
harmonic components and their peak value increase. These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in
the converter section of inverter, or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor (which can shorten the
inverter's service life).
• Also use a DCR when there are thyristor-driven loads or when phase-advancing capacitors are being
turned ON/OFF.
• Use a DCR when the interphase voltage unbalance ratio of the inverter power supply exceeds 2%.
Interphase voltage unbalance (%) =  67
Three - phase average voltage (V)
 For input power factor correction (for suppressing harmonics)

Generally a capacitor is used to improve the power factor of the load, however, it cannot be used
in a system that includes an inverter. Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter's power supply so as
to decrease harmonic components on the power supply lines and improve the power factor of inverter.
Using a DCR improves the input power factor to approximately 86% to 95%.
• At the time of shipping, a jumper bar is connected across terminals P1 and P (+) on the
terminal block. Remove the jumper bar when connecting a DCR.
• If a DCR is not going to be used, do not remove the jumper bar.
Power supply
Motor
Figure図11.10-1
4.10 External View of a DC Reactor (DCR) and Connection
直流リアクトル（DCR）および接続例
Example
11-34
Table 11.10-1 DC Reactors (DCRs)

Nominal
Power
applied DC reactor Rated current Generated
supply Inductance (mH)
motor type (A) loss (W)
voltage
(kW)
18.5 DCR4-18.5 41 1.4 29
22 DCR4-22A 49 1.2 35
30 DCR4-30B 71 0.86 35
DCR4-37B/ 88/ 0.70/ 40/
37
DCR4-37C 88 0.483 63
Three-
DCR4-45B/ 107/ 0.58/ 44/
phase 45
DCR4-45C 107 0.4 69
400V
DCR4-55B/ 131/ 0.47/ 55/
55
DCR4-55C 131 0.324 78
75 DCR4-75C 178 0.23 97
90 DCR4-90C 214 0.2 111
110 DCR4-110C 261 0.166 122
Note: Generated losses listed in the above tables are approximate values that are calculated according to the
following conditions:
• The power supply is three-phase 400 V 50 Hz with 0% interphase voltage unbalance ratio.
• The power supply capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of
the inverter.
• An AC reactor (ACR) is not connected.
Terminal block 2-terminal hole
(J screw)
(J screw)
4-mounting
hole
(G screw)
4-mounting 4-mounting 4-mounting

hole (G hole (G hole (G
screw) screw) screw)
Fig.C
Fig.A Fig.B
2-terminal
(J screw)
2-terminal
hole
(J screw)

2-terminal
hole
(J screw)
4-mounting
4-mounting
hole (G
hole (G
screw)
screw)
Fig.D Fig.E Fig.F
Table 11.10-2 DC Reactors (DCRs) External Dimensions
Power Dimensions (mm)

DC reactor Mass
supply Figure
type Terminal (kg)
voltage W W1 D D1 D2 H H1 Mounting hole
hole
DCR4-18.5 A 146 124 120 96 25 171 - M6 (7×11) M6 7.2
DCR4-22A A 146 124 120 96 25 171 - M6 (7×11) M6 7.2
DCR4-30B B 152 90 157 115 100 130 190 M6 (φ8) M8 13
DCR4-37B B 171 110 150 110 100 150 200 M6 (φ8) M8 15
DCR4-37C D 210 185 101 81 105 125 - M6 (7×13 M8 7.4
Three- DCR4-45B B 171 110 165 125 110 150 210 M6 (φ8) M8 18
phase
400V DCR4-45C D 210 185 106 86 120 125 - M6 (7×13) M8 8.4
DCR4-55B B 171 110 170 130 110 150 210 M6 (φ8) M8 20
DCR4-55 D 255 225 96 76 120 145 - M6 (7×13) M10 11
DCR4-75C D 255 225 106 86 125 145 - M6 (7×13) M10 13
DCR4-90C D 255 225 116 96 140 145 - M6 (7×13) M12 15
DCR4-110C D 300 265 116 90 175 155 - M8 (10×18) M12 19
11-35
11.11 AC Reactors (ACRs)

Use an ACR when the converter part of the inverter should supply very stable DC power, for example, in DC
link bus operation (shared PN operation). Generally, ACRs are used for correction of voltage waveform and
power factor or for power supply matching, but not for suppressing harmonic components in the power
lines. For suppressing harmonic components, use a DCR.
Figure 11.11-1 External View of AC Reactor (ACR) and Connection Example
Table 11.11-1 AC Reactor (ACR)

Nominal Reactance
Power
applied Rated (mΩ/phase) Coil resistance Generated
supply DC reactor type
motor current (A) (mΩ) loss (W)
voltage 50Hz 60Hz
(kW)
18.5 ACR4-18.5A 39 114 137 - 57
22 ACR4-22A 45 95.8 115 - 62
30 ACR4-37 100 41.7 50 2.73 38.9
37 ACR4-37 100 41.7 50 2.73 55.7

Three-
phase 45 ACR4-55 135 30.8 37 1.61 50.2
400V
55 ACR4-55 135 30.8 37 1.61 70.7
75 ACR4-75 * 160 25.8 31 1.16 65.3
90 ACR4-110 250 16.7 20 0.523 42.2
110 ACR4-110 250 16.7 20 0.523 60.3
* Cool this reactor using a fan with 3 m/s or more WV (Wind Velocity).
Note: Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to
the following conditions:
• The power supply is three-phase 400 V 50 Hz with 0% interphase voltage unbalance ratio.
• The power supply capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the
inverter.
11-36
Fig.E
Fig.D
6-terminal
(J screw)
4-mounting
6-terminal
hole
(J screw)
(G screw)
4-mounting hole
(G screw)
Table 11.11-2 AC Reactors (ACRs) External Dimensions
Power Dimensions (mm)

DC reactor Mass
supply Figure Terminal
type W W1 D D1 D2 G H (kg)
voltage hole
ACR4-18.5A 180 60 110 85 106 M6 (7×11) 137 M6 5.7
ACR4-22A D 180 60 110 85 106 M6 (7×11) 137 M6 5.9
Three- ACR4-37 190 60 120 90 172 M6 (7×11) 190 M8 12
phase
400V ACR4-55 190 60 120 90 200 M6 (7×11) 190 M10 14
ACR4-75 E 190 60 126 90 157 M6 (7×10) 190 M10 16
ACR4-110 250 100 136 105 202 M8 (9.5×18) 245 M12 24
11-37
11.12 Surge Suppression Unit (SSU)
11.12 Surge Suppression Unit (SSU)
If the drive wire for the motor is long, an extremely low surge voltage (micro surge) occurs at the
wire end connected to the motor. Surge voltage causes motor degradation, insulation
breakdown, or increased noises. The surge suppression unit (SSU) suppresses the surge
voltage. It features the connectivity for all inverter capacities and easy wiring work.
Surge suppression mechanism
Pulse
Power
supply
Surge suppression unit Surge absorption
Dimensions
• 50 m spec 100 m spec
Output terminal block (with

Output terminal block (with 4-φ6.5 Mounting hole terminal block cover) 4-φ6.5 Mounting hole
terminal block cover)
Input cable
Input
Grounding terminal Grounding terminal
cable
Effects of surge suppression units (voltage waveform between motors)
• Motor/inverter capacity: 3.7 kW w/o SSU w SSU

• Running status: No-load
• Wiring length: 50 m
• Power supply voltage:
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Three-phase 400 V
w/o SSU w SSU

• Motor/inverter capacity: 75 kW
• Running status: No-load
Voltage (V)
• Wiring length: 100 m

Voltage (V)
• Power supply voltage:

Three-phase 400 V
Basic specifications
Item Specifications
Type
Applicable wiring length Up to Up to
Power supply voltage 200 V and 400 V classes; PWM converter is applicable.
Inverter capacity Up to 75 kW (90 kW or larger requires customized service.)
Output frequency
Carrier frequency (Cannot be used at 16 kHz.)
Enclosure
Installation environment Ambient temperature: -20 to +40°C, relative humidity: 85% RH or below, vibration: 0.7 G or less, Installation: horizontally
Dielectric strength voltage
11-38
11.13 Output Circuit Filters (OFLs)

Insert an OFL in the inverter power output circuit to:
• Suppress the surge voltage at motor terminal
This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge currents
from the 400 V class series of inverters.
• Suppress leakage current from the output lines
This reduces the leakage current from long power feed lines. (The maximum wiring length must be 400
m.)
• Minimize radiation and induction noise from the output lines
An OFL effectively suppresses noise from long lines such as wiring at plants.
Inverter Output circuit filter (OFL)
U U X
Motor
V V Y M
W W Z
Figure 11.13-1 External View of Output Circuit Filter (OFL) and Connection Example

Table 11.13-1 Output Circuit Filter (OFL)
OFL--4A
Power
Nominal applied Generated loss
supply Filter type Rated current (A)
motor (kW) (kW)
voltage
18.5
OFL-22-4A 45 350
22
30 OFL-30-4A 60 570
37 OFL-37-4A 75 610
Three-phase
45 OFL-45-4A 91 810
400V
55 OFL-55-4A 112 910
75 OFL-75-4A 150 1200
90 OFL-90-4A 176 1360
110 OFL-110-4A 210 1410
11-39
OFL--4A
Filter (for 22 kW or below)  Filter (for 30 kW or above) : Reactor  Filter (for 30 kW or above) :
Resistor/Capacitor
Fig B Grounding Fig C 6-terminal hole
Fig F
screw H (J screw)
4-mounting
hole (K screw)
Terminal
screw J
4-mounting
hole (K screw)
For filters OFL-30-4A and greater, a reactor, resistor, and

Fig D 6-terminal hole
capacitor should be installed separately. (Those parts
(J screw)
are not included in the mass of a filter. If ordered with the
filter type, the filter is shipped in combination with a
reactor, resistor, and capacitor.)
4-mounting
hole (K screw)
Table 11.13-2 Output Circuit Filter (OFL) Dimensions
Dimensions (mm)
Filter Mass
Filter type Grounding Terminal Mounting
type Figure A B C D E F G (kg)
screw screw screw
OFL-22-4A B 330 300 330 300 170 - - M6 M6 M8 45
OFL-30-4A 210 175 210 70 140 90 160 - M5 M6 12
C/F
OFL-37-4A 220 190 220 75 150 95 160 - M5 M6 15
Three- OFL-45-4A 220 195 265 70 155 140 160 - M6 M8 17
phase
400V OFL-55-4A 260 200 275 85 160 150 160 - M6 M8 22
OFL-75-4A D/F 260 210 290 85 170 150 233 - M8 M10 25
OFL-90-4A 260 210 290 85 170 155 233 - M8 M10 28
OFL-110-4A 300 230 330 100 190 170 233 - M8 M10 38
* The OFL-***-4A models have no restrictions on carrier frequency.
11-40
11.14 Zero-phase Reactors for Reducing Radio Noise (ACLs)
11.14 Zero-phase Reactors for Reducing Radio Noise (ACLs)

An ACL is used to reduce radio frequency noise emitted by the inverter.
An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by switching operation for the power
supply lines inside the inverter. Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL.
If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 20 m, insert an ACL to the power supply lines; if
it is more than 20 m, insert it to the power output lines of the inverter.
Wire size is determined depending upon the ACL size (I.D.) and installation requirements.
w/o mounting base w/ mounting base
MCCB or RCD/ELCB* ACL
Power
supply
MC Motor
Inverter
Figure 11.14-1 Dimensions of Zero-phase Reactor for Reducing Radio Noise (ACL) and Connection Example

Table 11.14-1 Zero-phase Reactors for Reducing Radio Noise (ACL)
Installation
Zero-phase reactor requirements
Wire size (mm2)
type Qty. Number of
turns
1 4 2.0, 3.5, 5.5

ACL-40B
2 2 8, 14
1 4 8, 14
ACL-74B 2 2 22, 38，60，5.5×2，8×2，14×2，22×2
4 1 100，150，200，250，325，38×2，60×2，100×2，150×2
F200160, F200160PB 4 1 200×2，250×2，325×2，325×3

The selected wires are for use with 3-phase input/output lines (3 wires).
Note: Use the insulated wire of 75°C, 600 V, HIV-insulated.
11-41
11.15 External Cooling Fan Attachments
11.15 External Cooling Fan Attachments

An external cooling fan attachment for the FRENIC-Ace has the cooling fin outside the panel, which
enhances cooling efficiency while making the panel small. It can discharge from the panel approximately
70% of the inverter's generated loss.
Panel mounting surface
Option type Applicable inverter type
Panel processing diagram
11-42
11.16 External Frequency Command Potentiometer
11.16 External Frequency Command Potentiometer

An external frequency command potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency. Connect the
potentiometer to control signal terminals [11] through [13] of the inverter as shown in Figure 11.16-1
Type: RJ-13 (BA-2 B-characteristics, 1 k)
Panel hole size

φ6 Shaft Knob type: MSS-2SB
Dial plate type: YS549810-0
Note: The dial plate and knob must be ordered separately. Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Type: WAR3W-1k (3W B-characteristics)
Knob type: 25H Panel hole size

Dial plate type: 40P
Note: The dial plate and knob must be ordered separately. Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Inverter
+10VDC 0V
3 [13]
2
[12]
External volume
1 [11]
Figure 11.16-1 External Frequency Command Potentiometer Dimensions and Connection Example
11-43
11.17 Extension Cable for Remote Operation
11.17 Extension Cable for Remote Operation

The extension cable connects the inverter with the keypad (standard or multi-function) or USB−RS-485
converter to enable remote operation of the inverter. The cable is a straight type with RJ-45 jacks and its
length is selectable from 5, 3, and 1 m.
Cable
Table 11.17-1 Extension Cable Length for Remote Operation
Type Length (m)
CB-5S 5
CB-3S 3
CB-1S 1
11-44
11.18 Frequency Meters
11.18 Frequency Meters

Connect a frequency meter to analog signal output terminals [FM], [FM2] (for China only) and [11] of the
inverter to measure the frequency component selected by function code F31. Figure 11.8-1 shows the
dimensions of the frequency meter and a connection example.
Type : TRM-45 (DC10V, 1mA)

This model has two types of calibration: "0 to 60/120 Hz" and "60/120/240 Hz."
Type : FMN-60 (10VDC, 1mA) Type : FMN-80 (10VDC, 1mA)
2-M4 screw 2-M4 screw

2-M3 screw 2-M3 screw
2-φ4 hole 2-φ4 hole

Panel cutout Panel cutout
Inverter
Frequency (SW5:FMV)
meter (SW7:FMV)
(for China only)
Figure 11.18-1 Frequency Meter Dimensions and Connection Example
11-45
Chapter 12
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes the output ratings, input power, basic functions and other specifications of
the FRENIC-Ace standard model.
Contents
12.1 Standard Model ...................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.1 ND-mode inverters for general load ................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.2 HD-mode inverters for heavy duty load .......................................................................... 12-2
12.1.3 HND-mode inverters for general load ............................................................................. 12-3
12.1.4 HHD-mode inverters for heavy duty load ........................................................................ 12-4
12.2 Common Specifications.......................................................................................................... 12-5
12.1 Standard Model
12.1 Standard Model
12.1.1 ND-mode inverters for general load
 Three-phase 400 V class series
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4) 0059 0072 0085 0105 0139 0168 0203
Nominal applied motor (kW)
30 37 45 55 75 90 110
(Output rating) *1
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 45 55 65 80 106 128 155
Output ratings
Rated voltage (V) *3 Three-phase 380 to 480 V (with AVR function)
Rated current (A) *4 59 72 85 105 139 168 203
Overload capability 120%-1 min

Three-phas
e 380 to 440
V, 50 Hz
Voltage, frequency Three-phase 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Three-phas
e 380 to 480
Input power
V, 60 Hz *5
Allowable Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less) *6, Frequency: +5 to
voltage/frequency -5%
Rated input current *7 77.9 94.3 114 140 – – –
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 57.0 68.5 83.2 102 138 164 201
Required capacity
39 47 58 71 96 114 139
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 12% 5% to 9%
Braking starting frequency: 0.1 to 60.0 Hz, Braking time: 0.0 to 30.0 s, Braking level: 0
Braking
DC braking
to 60%
Braking transistor Built-in as standard Separately mounted option
Braking resistor Separately mounted option
DC reactor (DCR) *6 Separately mounted option Bundled as standard *10
Applicable safety standards IEC/EN61800-5-1: 2007
Enclosure (IEC60529) IP20, UL open type IP00, UL open type
Cooling method Fan cooling
Weight / Mass (kg) 9.5 10 25 26 30 33 40
*1 Fuji 4-pole standard motor

*2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 440 V.
*3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
Chap 12 SPECIFICATIONS
*4 Setting the carrier frequency (F26) to 4 kHz or above requires current derating.
If the ambient temperature is 40°C (104°F) or above, derating of 2%/°C (2%/1.8°F) relative to the rated current
given in this manual is required. For details, refer to Figure 10.4.2-1 in Chapter 10, Section 10.4.2 "Guideline for
selecting inverter drive mode and capacity."
*5 Inverters of FRN0203E2S-4 or above (400 V class series) are equipped with a power switching connector.
Use the connector depending upon the applied voltage. For details, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.2.7 "Switching
Connector."
*6 Voltage unbalance (%) = Three - phase average voltage (V) × 67 (IEC 61800 - 3)
If the unbalance ratio is 2% to 3%, use an optional AC reactor (ACR).

*7 This specification is an estimate to be applied when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (Inverter capacity x
10 when the capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and the power supply with %X = 5% is connected. For applied motors of
75 kW or above, a DC reactor (DCR) should be used.
*8 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.
*9 Average braking torque for the motor running alone. (It varies with the efficiency of the motor.)
*10 Separately mounted option for the FRN_ _ _ _ E2S-4C (destined for China).
Note: A box () in the above table replaces C, A, E, or U depending on the shipping destination.
12-1
12.1 Standard Model
12.1.2 HD-mode inverters for heavy duty load

Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4) 0059 0072 0085 0105 0139 0168 0203
22 30 37 45 55 75 90
(Output rating) *1
Output ratings
Rated current (A) *4 45 60 75 91 112 150 176
Overload capability 150%-1min

Three-phase
380 to 440 V,
50 Hz
Three-phase
380 to 480 V,
Input power
60 Hz *5
Rated input current *7 60.6 77.9 94.3 114 140 – –
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 42.2 57.0 68.5 83.2 102 138 164
Required capacity
29 39 47 58 71 96 114
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 15% 7 to 12%
Braking starting frequency: 0.1 to 60.0 Hz, Braking time: 0.0 to 30.0 s, Braking level: 0 to
Braking
DC braking
80%
Braking transistor Built-in Separately mounted option
Weight / Mass (kg) 9.5 10 25 26 30 33 40

*4 Setting the carrier frequency (F26) to 4 kHz or above requires current derating.
If the ambient temperature is 40°C (104°F) or above, derating of 2%/°C (2%/1.8°F) relative to the rated current
given in this manual is required. For details, refer to Figure 10.4.2-1 in Chapter 10, Section 10.4.2 "Guideline for
selecting inverter drive mode and capacity."
Connector."

12-2
12.1 Standard Model
12.1.3 HND-mode inverters for general load

Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4) 0059 0072 0085 0105 0139 0168 0203
22 30 37 45 55 75 90
(Output rating) *1
ratings
Output
Rated current (A) *4 45 60 75 91 112 150 176

Overload capability 120%-1min
Three-phase
380 to 440 V,
50 Hz
Three-phase
380 to 480 V,
Input power
60 Hz *5
Rated input current *7 60.6 77.9 94.3 114 140 – –
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 42.2 57.0 68.5 83.2 102 138 164
Required capacity
29 39 47 58 71 96 114
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 15% 7 to 12%
Braking starting frequency: 0.1 to 60.0 Hz, Braking time: 0.0 to 30.0 s, Braking level: 0
Braking
DC braking
to 80%
Weight / Mass (kg) 9.5 10 25 26 30 33 40

*4 Setting the carrier frequency (F26) to the following value or above requires current derating.
FRN0059E2S-4: 10 kHz, FRN0072E2S-4 to FRN0168E2S-4: 6 kHz, FRN0203E2S-4: 4 kHz
Connector."


12-3
12.1 Standard Model
12.1.4 HHD-mode inverters for heavy duty load

Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4) 0059 0072 0085 0105 0139 0168 0203
18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
(Output rating) *1
Output ratings

Rated current (A) *4 39 45 60 75 91 112 150
Overload capability 150%-1min, 200%-0.5s
Three-phase
380 to 440 V,
50 Hz
Three-phase
380 to 480 V,
Input power
60 Hz *5
Rated input current *7 52.3 60.6 77.9 94.3 114 140 –
(w/o DCR) (A)
(with DCR) (A) 35.5 42.2 57.0 68.5 83.2 102 138
Required capacity
25 29 39 47 58 71 96
(with DCR) (kVA) *8
Torque (%) *9 20% 10 to 15%
Braking starting frequency: 0.1 to 60.0 Hz, Braking time: 0.0 to 30.0 s, Braking level: 0 to
Braking
DC braking
100%
Bundled as
DC reactor (DCR) *6 Separately mounted option
standard *10
Weight / Mass (kg) 9.5 10 25 26 30 33 40

*4 Setting the carrier frequency (F26) to the following value or above requires current derating.
FRN0059E2S-4 to FRN0168E2S-4: 10 kHz, FRN0203E2S-4: 6 kHz
Connector."

12-4
12.2 Common Specifications

Item Explanation Remarks
Maximum HHD/HND/HD mode: 25 to 500 Hz variable (under V/f control)
frequency ND mode: 25 to 120 Hz (under any drive control)
Base frequency 25 to 500 Hz variable (in conjunction with the maximum frequency)
Starting
0.1 to 60.0 Hz variable
frequency
FRN0059E2S-4:
• 0.75 to 16 kHz variable (HHD/HND/HD mode)
Setting range
• 0.75 to 10 kHz variable (ND mode)

FRN0072/0085/0105/0139/0168E2S-4:
• 0.75 to 16 kHz variable (HHD mode)
• 0.75 to 10 kHz variable (HND/HD mode)
Output
Carrier
frequency • 0.75 to 6 kHz variable (ND mode)
FRN0203E2S-4:
• 0.75 to 10 kHz variable (HHD mode)
• 0.75 to 6 kHz variable (HND/HD/ND mode)
Note: The carrier frequency may automatically lower depending upon the
ambient temperature or the output current to protect the inverter. (The automatic
lowering function can be disabled.)
Output frequency • Analog setting: 0.2% of maximum frequency (at 2510°C)
accuracy (Stability) • Keypad setting: 0.01% of maximum frequency (at -10 to +50°C)
• Analog setting: 0.05% of maximum frequency
Frequency setting
• Keypad setting: 0.01 Hz (99.99 Hz or less), 0.1 Hz (100.0 to 500 Hz)
resolution
• Link setting: 0.05% of maximum frequency or 0.01 Hz (fixed)
• V/f control
Control method • Vector control without speed sensor (Dynamic torque vector)
• V/f control, with slip compensation
• Possible to set 160 to 500 V at base frequency and at maximum output
frequency.
Voltage/frequency
• The AVR control can be turned ON or OFF.
characteristics
• Non-linear V/f setting (3 points): Free voltage (0 to 500 V) and frequency (0 to
500 Hz) can be set.
• Auto torque boost (For constant torque load)
• Manual torque boost: Torque boost value can be set between 0.0 and 20.0%
Torque boost
• Select application load with the function code. (Variable torque load or constant
torque load)
• 200% or higher, reference frequency 0.5 Hz (HHD-mode inverters of
Control
FRN0072E2S-4 or below)
150% or higher, reference frequency 0.5 Hz (HHD-mode inverters of
Starting torque FRN0085E2S-4 or above)
• 120% or higher, reference frequency 0.5 Hz (HND mode)
• 150% or higher, reference frequency 0.5 Hz (HD/ND mode)
Base frequency 50 Hz, with slip compensation and auto torque boost active
Keypad:
Start and stop with and keys (Standard keypad)
Start and stop with / and keys (Optional multi-function keypad)
External signals (digital inputs): Forward (Reverse) rotation, stop command
Start/stop operation (capable of 3-wire operation), coast-to-stop command, external alarm, alarm
reset, etc.
Link operation: Operation through RS-485 (built-in as standard), CANopen
(built-in as standard) or field bus (option) communications link
Switching run command: Remote/local switching, link switching
12-5

Keypad: Using and keys
External potentiometer: Using external frequency command potentiometer.
(External resistor of 1 to 5 kΩ 1/2 W)
Analog input: 0 to 10 VDC (5 VDC)/ 0 to 100% (terminal [12]),
0 to +10 VDC (+5 VDC)/ 0 to +100% (terminal [12])
Frequency setting 4 to 20 mADC/ 0 to +100% (terminal [C1] (C1 function))
4 to 20 mADC/ 0 to 100% (terminal [C1] (C1 function))
0 to 20 mADC/ 0 to +100% (terminal [C1] (C1 function))
0 to 20 mADC/ 0 to 100% (terminal [C1] (C1 function))
0 to +10 VDC (+5 VDC)/ 0 to +100% (terminal [C1] (V2 function)),
0 to +10 VDC (+5 VDC)/ 0 to 100% (terminal [C1] (V2 function))
UP/DOWN operation:
Frequency can be increased or decreased while the digital input signal is ON.
Multistep frequency: Selectable from 16 different frequencies (step 0 to 15)
Pattern operation: The inverter runs automatically according to the previously
specified run time, rotation direction, acceleration/deceleration time and
reference frequency. Up to 7 stages can be specified.
Link operation: Operation through RS-485 (built-in as standard), CANopen
(built-in as standard) or field bus (option) communications link
Frequency setting: Two types of frequency settings can be switched with an
external signal (digital input). Remote/local switching, link switching
Auxiliary frequency setting: Inputs at terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function) or [C1] (V2
function) can be added to the main setting as auxiliary frequency settings.
Operation at a specified ratio: The ratio can be set by analog input signal.
Frequency setting 0 to 10 VDC/0 (4) to 20 mA/0 to 200% (variable)
Inverse operation: Switchable from "0 to +10 VDC/0 to 100%" to "+10 to 0 VDC/0
to 100%" by external command (terminals [12] and [C1] (V2
function)
Switchable from "0 to -10 VDC/0 to -100%" to "-10 to 0 VDC/0
to -100%" by external command (terminal [12])
Switchable from "4 to +20 mA DC/0 to 100%" to "20 to 4 mA
DC/0 to 100%" by external command (terminal [C1] (C1
function))
Control
Switchable from "0 to +20 mA DC/0 to 100%" to "20 to 0 mA

DC/0 to 100%" by external command (terminal [C1] (C1
function))
Pulse train input (standard):
Pulse input = Terminal [X5], Rotational direction = general terminal
Complementary output: Max. 100 kHz, Open collector output: Max. 30 kHz
Setting range: Between 0.00 and 6000 s
Switching: The four types of acceleration/deceleration time can be set or
selected individually (switchable during operation).
Acceleration/deceleration pattern: Linear acceleration/deceleration, S-curve
acceleration/deceleration (weak, arbitrary (with function code)), curvilinear
Acceleration/ acceleration/deceleration
deceleration time
Deceleration mode (coast-to-stop):
Shutoff of the run command lets the motor coast to a stop.
Acceleration/deceleration time exclusive to jogging (0.00 to 6000 s)
Forcible stop deceleration time: Deceleration stop by the forcible stop STOP.
During forced stop operation, S-curve acceleration/deceleration is disabled.
Frequency limiter • Specifies the upper and lower limits in Hz.
(Upper limit and
lower limit • "Continue to run" or "Decelerate to a stop" selectable when the reference
frequencies) frequency drops below the lower limit.
Frequency/PID • Bias of reference frequency and PID command can be independently set
command bias (setting range: 0 to 100%).
12-6

• Gain: Setting range from 0 to 200%
• Offset: Setting range from -5.0 to +5.0%
Analog input
• Filter: Setting range from 0.00 s to 5.00 s
• Polarity selection (/+)
Jump frequency • Three operation points and their common jump width (0 to 30.0 Hz) can be set.
The inverter drives the motor for the run time specified from the keypad and stops
Timer operation
its output. (Single-cycle operation)
• Operation with key (standard keypad), or key (multi-function
Jogging operation keypad), or digital input signal FWD or REV
(Exclusive acceleration/deceleration time setting, exclusive frequency setting)
• Trip immediately: Trip immediately at the time of power failure.
• Trip after a recovery from power failure: Coast to a stop at the time of power
failure and trip when the power is recovered.
• Trip after decelerate-to-stop: Deceleration stop at power failure, and trip after
stoppage
Auto-restart after • Continue to run: Operation is continued using the load inertia energy.
momentary power • Start at the frequency selected before momentary power failure: Coast-to-stop
failure at power failure and start after power recovery at the frequency selected before
momentary stop.
• Start at starting frequency: Coast-to-stop at power failure and start at the
starting frequency after power recovery.
• Start at the frequency searched at the time of power recovery: Coast-to-stop at
power failure, search for the idling motor speed, and restart the motor.
Limits the current by hardware to prevent an overcurrent trip from being caused
Hardware current
by fast load variation or momentary power failure, which cannot be covered by
limiter
the software current limiter. This limiter can be canceled.
Operation by
With commercial power selection commands (SW50, SW60), the inverter outputs
commercial power
50/60 Hz.
supply
• Compensates for decrease in speed according to the load
Slip compensation
• Possible to set constants at the response of slip compensation.
Droop control • Decreases the speed according to the load torque.
Controls the output torque to suppress it below the preset specified limit value.
Torque limit
• Switchable between 1st and 2nd torque limit values
Software current Automatically reduces the frequency so that the output current becomes lower
limiter than the preset operation level.
If the detected torque or current exceeds the preset value, the inverter
Overload stop
decelerates the motor to a stop or causes the motor to coast to a stop.
• PID processor for process control/dancer control
• Normal operation/inverse operation
• PID command: Keypad, analog input (from terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function) and
[C1] (V2 function)), multistep frequency (3 steps), RS-485 communication
• PID feedback value: Analog input (from terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function) and
Control
[C1] (V2 function))

PID control
• Alarm output (absolute value alarm, deviation alarm)
• Slow flowrate stop function (Pressurized operation is possible before the slow
flowrate stop.)
• Anti-reset wind-up function
• PID output limiter
• Integration reset/hold
The inverter automatically searches for the idling motor speed to be harmonized
Auto search for
and starts to drive it without stopping it.(Motor parameters need tuning: Offline
idling motor speed
tuning
• If the DC link bus voltage or calculated torque exceeds the automatic
deceleration level during deceleration, the inverter automatically prolongs the
deceleration time to avoid overvoltage trip.
Automatic (It is possible to select forcible deceleration actuated when the deceleration
deceleration time becomes three times longer.)
• If the calculated torque exceeds automatic deceleration level during constant
speed operation, the inverter avoids overvoltage trip by increasing the
frequency.
Deceleration
characteristic The motor loss is increased during deceleration to reduce the regenerative
(improved braking energy in the inverter to avoid overvoltage trip.
capacity)
12-7

Auto energy saving Controls the output voltage to minimize the total sum of the motor loss and
operation inverter loss.
Overload If the surrounding temperature or IGBT joint temperature increases due to
prevention control overload, the inverter lowers the output frequency to avoid overload.
Tunes the motor while the motor is stopped or running, for setting up motor
Offline tuning
parameters.
Controls the motor speed variation caused by the motor temperature rise during
Online tuning
running.
• Detects inverter internal temperature and stops cooling fan when the
Cooling fan temperature is low.
ON/OFF control
• Possible to output a fan control signal to an external device.
• Switchable between two motors
1st to 2nd motor
settings It is possible to set the base frequency, rated current, torque boost, and
electronic thermal slip compensation as the data for 1st and 2nd motors.
Transfers the status of an external digital signal connected with the
Universal DI
general-purpose digital input terminal to the host controller.
Outputs a digital command signal sent from the host controller to the
Universal DO
general-purpose digital output terminal.
Outputs an analog command signal sent from the host controller to the analog
Universal AO
output terminal.
Applies DC current to the motor at the operation start time or at the time of
DC braking
inverter stop to generate braking torque.
• Possible to output mechanical brake control signals with the brake ON/OFF
Mechanical brake timing adjusted by the output current, torque command, output frequency and
control timer.
• Mechanical brake application check input.
Rotation direction
Select either of reverse or forward rotation prevention.
control
Possible to select or connect digital logic circuits or analog operation circuits with
digital/analog I/O signals, configure a simple relay sequence, and operate it
freely.
• Logic circuits:
(Digital) AND, OR, XOR, flip-flop, detection of rising and falling edges,
Control
various counters.
Customizable logic (Analog) Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, limiters, absolute values,
interface sign inversion addition, comparison, maximum value selection, minimum value
selection, average values, scale conversion.
• Multifunction time: On-delay timer, off-delay timer, pulse train output, etc.
Setting range: 0.0 to 600 s
• Input/output signals: Terminal input/output, inverter control functions
• Others: Available in 100 steps configured with 2 input and 1 output per step.
Functions for
wiredrawing
Customizable logic function enables dedicated functions for each application.
machines, hoists,
(Available soon)
and spinning
frames
Detachable, 7-segment, 4-digit LED, 7 push-buttons (PRG/RESET, FUNC/DATA,
Indicators UP, DOWN, RUN, STOP, and SHIFT), and 6 LED indicators (KEYPAD
CONTROL, Hz, A, kW, X10, and RUN)
Speed monitor (reference frequency, output frequency, motor speed, load shaft
Display
speed, line speed, and speed indication with percent), output current (A), output
voltage (V), calculated torque (%), input power (kW), PID command value, PID
Running/stopping feedback amount, PID output, timer values for timer operation (s), load factor
(%), and motor output (kW)
• Analog input monitor, input watt-hour, constant feeding rate time (min.), and
remaining time for timer operation (s) can be displayed.
12-8

DC link bus voltage, maximum effective current, input watt-hour, input watt-hour
data, temperature (inverter internal temperature, maximum inverter internal
temperature, heat sink temperature, maximum heat sink temperature),
capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor, service life of DC ink but capacitor
Maintenance
(elapsed time/remaining time), cumulative run times (inverter power-ON time,
monitor
electrolytic capacitors on printed circuit boards, cooling fans, individual motors),
light-alarm contents (last four alarms), RS-485 error contents and number of
error times, CANopen error contents, option error contents and number of error
times, ROM version (inverter, keypad, and option)
Displays the I/O signal states of control circuit terminals using the segment
I/O check ON/OFF of the 7-segment LED monitor or hexadecimal format. (digital and
analog signals)
Trip Displays the cause of a trip by codes.
Light-alarm Shows the light-alarm display l-al.
During running or at • Trip history: Saves and displays the cause of the last four trips (with a code).
the time of a trip • Saves and displays the detailed running status data of the last four trips.
When the protective function is activated so that the LED monitor shows alarm codes, refer to Chapter 6
"Troubleshooting."
For the usage environment and storage environment, refer to Chapter 1, Section 1.3 "Precautions for Using Inverters."
12-9
Chapter 13
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
This chapter gives external dimensions of the inverter.
Contents

13.1 Standard Model ...................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Keypad ................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.1 Standard Model

13.1 Standard Model
The drawings below show external dimensions of the FRENIC-Ace series of inverters according to the inverter
capacity. (400 V class series)
* A figure given in the lower right-hand corner of each set of drawings shows the dimension of panel cutting required
for external cooling. To employ external cooling for inverters FRN0059E2S-4 and FRN0072E2S-4, the
optional mounting adapter for external cooling is necessary. For the external dimensions of the mounting adapter,
refer to Chapter 11, Section 11.15.
(Unit: mm)
 FRN0059E2S-4, FRN0072E2S-4
Chap 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
13-1
13.1 Standard Model
(Unit: mm)
 FRN0085E2S-4，FRN0105E2S-4
 FRN0139E2S-4
13-2
13.1 Standard Model
(Unit: mm)
 FRN0168E2S-4
 FRN0203E2S-4
Chap 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
13-3
13.2 Keypad
13.2 Keypad
(Unit: mm)
Panel
cutout
When operating the keypad at remote
location or mounting it in a panel
(Keypad rear cover attached)
Dimensions of panel cutting (viewed from arrow "A")
13-4
APPENDICES
Contents
Appendix A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise) ....................... Appendix-1

A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices..................................................................... Appendix-1
[1] Effect on AM radios .......................................................................................... Appendix-1
[2] Effect on telephones ......................................................................................... Appendix-1
[3] Effect on proximity switches ............................................................................. Appendix-1
[4] Effect on pressure sensors ............................................................................... Appendix-1
[5] Effect on position detectors (pulse encoders) .................................................. Appendix-1
A.2 Noise ................................................................................................................... Appendix-2
[1] Inverter noise .................................................................................................... Appendix-2
[2] Types of noise .................................................................................................. Appendix-3
A.3 Measure .............................................................................................................. Appendix-4
[1] Noise prevention prior to installation ................................................................ Appendix-4
[2] Implementation of noise prevention measures ................................................ Appendix-5
[3] Noise prevention examples .............................................................................. Appendix-8
Appendix B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High
Voltage or Special High Voltage (General-purpose inverter) ...................... Appendix-12
B.1 Application to general-purpose inverters .......................................................... Appendix-12
[1] Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general-purpose
appliances ...................................................................................................... Appendix-12
[2] Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or
special high voltage ........................................................................................ Appendix-12
B.2 Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or
special high voltage .......................................................................................... Appendix-13
[1] Calculation of equivalent capacity (Pi) ........................................................... Appendix-13
[2] Calculation of Harmonic Current .................................................................... Appendix-14
[3] Examples of calculation .................................................................................. Appendix-16
Appendix C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class
Inverters ...................................................................................................... Appendix-17
C.1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages ........................................................ Appendix-17
C.2 Effect of surge voltages..................................................................................... Appendix-18
C.3 Countermeasures against surge voltages ........................................................ Appendix-18
[1] Using a surge suppressor unit, SSU (Patent pending) .................................. Appendix-18
[2] Suppressing surge voltages ........................................................................... Appendix-19
[3] Using motors with enhanced insulation .......................................................... Appendix-19
C.4 Regarding existing equipment .......................................................................... Appendix-19
[1] In case of a motor being driven with 400 V class inverter .............................. Appendix-19
[2] In case of an existing motor driven using a newly installed
400 V class inverter ........................................................................................ Appendix-19
Appendix D Inverter Generating Loss......................................................................... Appendix-20
Appendix E Conversion from SI Units ............................................................................ Appendix-21
[1] Conversion of units ......................................................................................... Appendix-21
[2] Calculation formula ......................................................................................... Appendix-22
Appendix F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires.......................................................... Appendix-23
Appendix G Index by Functional Code Purpose ......................................................... Appendix-25
G.1 Performing the minimum setting required for simple operation ........................ Appendix-25
G.2 Setting the frequency ........................................................................................ Appendix-25
[1] Frequency setting on the keypad ................................................................... Appendix-25
[2] Analog-based frequency setting ..................................................................... Appendix-25
[3] Other frequency setting .................................................................................. Appendix-27
G.3 Inputting operation command ........................................................................... Appendix-28
G.4 Starting/Stopping ............................................................................................... Appendix-28
G.5 Setting acceleration/deceleration (time/method/pattern) .................................. Appendix-28
G.6 Adjusting operation performance ...................................................................... Appendix-29
G.7 Controlling the motor ......................................................................................... Appendix-30
[1] Selecting the motor control system ................................................................ Appendix-30
[2] Setting the motor constant ............................................................................. Appendix-30
G.8 Setting input/output terminals ........................................................................... Appendix-31
G.9 Performing motor output ................................................................................... Appendix-31
G.10 Continuing the operation ................................................................................... Appendix-32
G.11 Detecting/Outputting the inverter state signal ................................................... Appendix-32
G.12 Performing various operations .......................................................................... Appendix-33
G.13 Performing control to suit each application ....................................................... Appendix-34
[1] Droop operation .............................................................................................. Appendix-34
[2] PID control for process control ....................................................................... Appendix-35
[3] PID control for dancer control......................................................................... Appendix-38
G.14 Using convenient functions on the keypad ....................................................... Appendix-41
G.15 Controlling via communications ........................................................................ Appendix-41
G.16 Using customized logic ..................................................................................... Appendix-43
G.17 Using protective functions ................................................................................. Appendix-44
[1] Protecting the machine (Limit functions) ........................................................ Appendix-44
[2] Protecting the motor ....................................................................................... Appendix-44
[3] Other protective/safety functions .................................................................... Appendix-45
G.18 Performing maintenance ................................................................................... Appendix-46
[1] Maintenance of inverter .................................................................................. Appendix-46
[2] Maintenance of machine ................................................................................ Appendix-47
Appendix H Conformity with Standards ...................................................................... Appendix-48
H.1 Compliance with European Standards ( ) .................................................. Appendix-48
H.1.1 Compliance with EMC standards ......................................................................... Appendix-48

H.1.2 Compliance with the low voltage directive in the EU ............................................ Appendix-50
Appendix A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
Appendix A Advantageous Use of Inverters

(Notes on electrical noise)
Excerpt from technical material of
the Japan Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (JEMA) (April 1994)
A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices

Inverters have been and are rapidly expanding its application fields. This paper describes the effect that
inverters have on electronic devices already installed or on devices installed in the same system as
inverters, as well as introducing noise prevention measures. (Refer to Section A.3 [3], "Noise prevention
examples" for details.)
[1] Effect on AM radios

Phenomena If an inverter operates, AM radios may pick up noise radiated from the inverter. (An
inverter has almost no effect on FM radios or television sets.)
Probable cause The noise radiated from the inverter may be received by a radio.
Measure Inserting a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter is effective.
[2] Effect on telephones
Phenomena If an inverter operates, nearby telephones may pick up noise radiated from the
inverter in conversation so that it may be difficult to hear.
Probable cause A high-frequency leakage current radiated from the inverter and motors enters
shielded telephone cables, causing noise.
Measure It is effective to commonly connect the grounding terminals of the motors and return
the common grounding line to the grounding terminal of the inverter.
[3] Effect on proximity switches
Phenomena If an inverter operates, proximity switches (capacitance-type) may malfunction.
Probable cause The capacitance-type proximity switches may provide inferior noise immunity.
Measure It is effective to connect a filter to the input terminals of the inverter or change the
power supply treatment of the proximity switches. The proximity switches can be
replaced with superior noise immunity types such as magnetic types.
[4] Effect on pressure sensors
Phenomena If an inverter operates, pressure sensors may malfunction.
Probable cause Noise may penetrate through a grounding wire into the signal line.
Measure It is effective to install a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter or to
change the wiring.
[5] Effect on position detectors (pulse encoders)
Phenomena If an inverter operates, pulse encoders may produce erroneous pulses that shift the
stop position of a machine.
Probable cause Erroneous pulses are liable to occur when the signal lines of the PG and power lines
are bundled together.
Measure The influence of induction noise and radiation noise can be reduced by separating
the PG signal lines and power lines. Providing noise filters at the input and output
terminals is also an effective measure.
APPENDICES
Appendix-1
A.2 Noise
This section gives a summary of noises generated in inverters and their effects on devices subject to
noise.
[1] Inverter noise

Figure A.1 shows an outline of the inverter configuration. The inverter converts AC to DC (rectification) in a
converter unit, and converts DC to AC (inversion) with 3-phase variable voltage and variable frequency.
The conversion (inversion) is performed by PWM implemented by switching six transistors (IGBT:
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor, etc), and is used for variable speed motor control.
Switching noise is generated by high-speed on/off switching of the six transistors. Noise current (i) is
emitted and at each high-speed on/off switching, the noise current flows through stray capacitance (C) of
the inverter, cable and motor to the ground. The amount of the noise current is expressed as follows:
i = C · dv/dt
It is related to the stray capacitance (C) and dv/dt (switching speed of the transistors). Further, this noise
current is related to the carrier frequency since the noise current flows each time the transistors are
switched on or off.
In addition to the main circuit of the inverter, the DC-to-DC switching power regulator (DC/DC converter),
which is the power source for the control circuit of the inverter, may be a noise source in the same
principles as stated above.
The frequency band of this noise is less than approximately 30 to 40 MHz. Therefore, the noise will affect
devices such as AM radios using low frequency band, but will not virtually affect FM radios and television
sets using higher frequency than this frequency band.
Converter part Inverter part
Power source
DC/DC
converter Control circuit
Figure A.1 Outline of Inverter Configuration
Appendix-2
[2] Types of noise

Noise generated in an inverter is propagated through the main circuit wiring to the power supply and the
motor so as to affect a wide range of applications from the power supply transformer to the motor. The
various propagation routes are shown in Figure A.2. According to those routes, noises are roughly
classified into three types--conduction noise, induction noise, and radiation noise.
Radio
Power transformer
(1) (5)
ELCB Inverter
(2) Machine
(4) Sensor
Amplifier
(3)
Electronic
equipment
Figure A.2 Noise Propagation Routes
(1) Conduction noise

The noise that has occurred in the inverter and propagates through a conductor to influence peripheral
equipment is called a conduction noise. Some conduction noises will propagate through the main circuit (1).
If the ground wires are connected to a common ground, conduction noise will propagate through route (2).
As shown in route (3), some conduction noises will propagate through signal lines or shielded wires.
Power source Inverter

(1)
(2) (3)
Electronic
equipment
Signal line Sensor
Figure A.3 Conduction Noise
(2) Induction noise

When wires or signal lines of peripheral devices are brought close to the wires on the input and output sides
of the inverter through which noise current is flowing, noise will be induced into those wires and signal lines
of the devices by electromagnetic induction (Figure A.4) or electrostatic induction (Figure A.5). This is called
"induction noise" (4).
(4) (4)
Electronic
equipment
Signal line Sensor
Figure A.4 Electromagnetic Induced Noise

APPENDICES
Appendix-3

(4) (4)
Electronic
equipment
Signal line Sensor
Figure A.5 Electrostatic Induced Noise
(3) Radiation noise

Noise generated in an inverter may be radiated through the air from wires (that act as antennas) at the input
and output sides of the inverter so as to affect peripheral devices. This noise is called "radiation noise" as
shown below as (5). Not only wires but motor frames or control system panels containing inverters may also
act as antennas.
(5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5)

Electronic
equipment
Sensor
Figure A.6 Radiation Noise
A.3 Measure
The more noise prevention is strengthened, the more effective. However, with the use of appropriate
measures, noise problems may be resolved easily. It is necessary to implement economical noise
prevention according to the noise level and the equipment conditions.
[1] Noise prevention prior to installation

Before installing an inverter in your control panel or installing an inverter panel, you need to consider noise
prevention. Once noise problems occur, it will cost additional materials and time for solving them.
Noise prevention prior to installation includes:
(1) Separate the main circuit from the control circuit.

(2) Accommodate the main circuit wiring in a metal pipe (conduit pipe).
(3) Use shielded wire or twisted shielded wire in the control circuit.
(4) Perform reliable grounding work and wiring.
These noise prevention measures can avoid most noise problems.
Appendix-4
[2] Implementation of noise prevention measures

There are two types of noise prevention measures--one for noise propagation routes and the other for noise
receiving sides (that are affected by noise).
The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the receiving side include: Separating the main
circuit wiring from the control circuit wiring, avoiding noise effect.
Measures on the noise-affected side are:

(1) Lower the noise level for example by installing a noise filter.
(2) Suppress the noise level for example by using a metal wiring pipe or metal control panel.
(3) Block the noise propagation route for example by using an insulation transformer for power source.
Table A.1 lists the noise prevention measures, their goals, and propagation routes.
Table A.1 Noise Prevention Measures
Goal of noise
Conduction
prevention
route
measures
Make it more difficult to receive noise
Cutoff noise conduction
Reduce noise level
Conduction noise
Radiation noise
Induction noise
Confine noise
Noise prevention method
Separate main circuit from control circuit  

Minimize wiring distance    
Avoid parallel and bundled wiring  
Wiring and
Use appropriate grounding    
installation
Use shielded wire and twisted shielded wire   
Use shielded cable in main circuit   
Use metal conduit pipe   
Appropriate arrangement of devices in panel   
Control panel
Metal control panel   
Line filter    
Anti-noise devices
Insulation transformer   
Use a passive capacitor for control circuit   
Measures taken on
Use ferrite core for control circuit    
noise-affected side
Line filter   
Separate power supply systems  
Other
Lower the carrier frequency    
In the table, a column marked with  shows a measure expected to produce an effect and a column
marked with  shows a measure expected to produce an effect depending on the conditions. A vacant
column shows an ineffective measure.
APPENDICES
Appendix-5
What follows is noise prevention measures for the inverter drive configuration.
(1) Wiring and grounding

As shown in Figure A.7, separate the main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring as far as possible
regardless of being located inside or outside the system control panel containing an inverter. Use shielded
wires and twisted shielded wires that will block out extraneous noises, and minimize the wiring distance.
Also avoid bundled wiring of the main circuit and control circuit or parallel wiring.
Shield (steel plate)

Shield (steel plate)
Power
Signal line line
Signal line
For Duct For Rack
Figure A.7 Separate Wiring
For the main circuit wiring, use a metal conduit pipe and connect its wires to the ground to prevent noise
propagation (refer to Figure A.8).
The shield (braided wire) of a shielded wire should be securely connected to the base (common) side of the
signal line at only one point to avoid the loop formation resulting from a multi-point connection (refer to
Figure A.9).
The grounding is effective not only to reduce the risk of electrical shocks due to leakage current, but also to
block noise penetration and radiation. Corresponding to the main circuit voltage, the grounding work should
be Class D (300 VAC or less, grounding resistance: 100Ω or less) and Class C (300 to 600 VAC, grounding
resistance: 10Ωor less). Each ground wire is to be provided with its own ground or separately wired to a
grounding point.
Metal wiring Metal wiring Relay terminal

pipe pipe Inverter Inverter
Inverter
(Common) (Common)
Figure A.8 Grounding of Metal Conduit Pipe Figure A.9 Treatment of Braided Wire of
Shielded Wire
(2) Control panel

The system control panel containing an inverter is generally made of metal, which can shield noise radiated
from the inverter itself.
When installing other electronic devices such as a programmable logic controller in the same control panel,
be careful with the layout of each device. If necessary, arrange shield plates between the inverter and
peripheral devices.
Appendix-6
(3) Anti-noise devices

To reduce the noise propagated through the electrical circuits and the noise radiated from the main circuit
wiring to the air, a line filter and power supply transformer should be used (refer to Figure A.10).
Line filters are classified into simple-type filters including capacitive filters to be connected in parallel to a
power line and inductive filters to be connected in series to a power line and authentic filters (LC filters) to
address radio noise restrictions. They are used selectively used to meet the target noise reduction effect.
Power transformers include generally used insulation transformers, shield transformers and noise-cut
transformers, which have different effects to block propagation of noise.
Inverter Inverter Inverter
Power
Power source
source
Power
source
(a) Capacitive filter (b) Inductive filter (c) LC filter

(zero-phase reactor)
Figure A.10 Various Filters and their Connection
(4) Noise prevention measures at the receiving side

It is important to strengthen the noise immunity of those electronic devices installed in the same control
panel as the inverter or located near an inverter. Line filters and shielded or twisted shielded wires are used
to block the penetration of noise in the signal lines of these devices. The following treatments are also
implemented.
1) Lower the circuit impedance by connecting capacitors or resistors to the input and output terminals of
the signal circuit in parallel.
2) Increase the circuit impedance for noise by inserting choke coils in series in the signal circuit or passing
signal lines through ferrite core beads. It is also effective to widen the signal base lines (0 V line) or
grounding lines.
(5) Other
The level of generating/propagating noise will change with the carrier frequency of the inverter. The higher
the carrier frequency, the higher the noise level.
In an inverter whose carrier frequency can be changed, lowering the carrier frequency can reduce the
generation of electrical noise and result in a good balance with the audible noise of the motor under driving
conditions.
APPENDICES
Appendix-7
[3] Noise prevention examples

Table A.2 lists examples of the measures to prevent noise generated by a running inverter.
Table A.2 Examples of Noise Prevention Measures
Target
No. Phenomena Measure
device Notes
1 AM radio Noise enters the AM radio 1) Install an LC filter at the 1) The radiation
broadcast (500-1500kHz) power supply side of the noise of the
when the inverter is operated.
inverter. (In some cases, wiring can be
a capacitive filter may be reduced.
used as a simple
Power
source
method.)
Inverter
2) Install a metal conduit
wiring between the motor 2) Reduce the
and inverter. conduction noise
AM radio to the power
source or apply
Power
source shielded wiring.
Inverter
<Possible cause>
LC filter
Radiation noise from the Note: Sufficient
power source and output improvement may
wiring of inverted was Capacitive
filter
not be expected in
received by the AM radio.
narrow regions such
as between
(Note) Minimize the distance
between the LC filter and mountains.
the inverter (within 1m).
2 AM Noise enters the AM radio 1) Install inductive filters at 1) The radiation

radio broadcast (500 to 1500kHz) the input and output sides noise of the
when the inverter is operated.
of the inverter. wiring can be
Pole
transformar Short Short reduced.
distance distance
Power
Inverter source
Inverter
Radio
Inductive filter Inductive filter
(zero-phase (zero-phase
reactor) reactor)
<Possible cause>
The number of turns of
Radiation noise from the
power line of inverter’s power the zero-phase reactor
source was received by the (or ferrite ring) should be
AM radio. as large as possible.
Minimize the distance
between the inverter and
the inductive filter (within
1 m).
2) When further
improvement is
necessary, install LC
filters.
Power
LC
Inverter
source LC
filter filter
Input side Output side
Appendix-8
Table A.2 Examples of Noise Prevention Measures (Continued)
Target
device Notes
3 Telephone When driving a ventilation 1) Connect the ground 1) The effect of the
(in a fan with an inverter, noise terminals of the motors in inductive filter
common enters a telephone in a
a common connection. and LC filter may
private private residence at a
distance of 40 m. Return to the inverter not be expected
residence
panel, and insert a 1 μF because of
at a
distance of Pole transformer capacitor between the sound frequency
40 m) input terminal of the component.
inverter and ground. 2) In the case of a
Inverter
V-connection
power supply
Private transformer in a
residence
200V system, it
Inverter
40 mm
is necessary to
connect
<Possible cause>
capacitors as
Harmonic leak current of the
shown in the
inverter and motor flows into
the shielded groung of the following figure,
telephone cable on the way because of
back via the ground of the different
pole transformer to cause potentials to
noise by electrostatic
ground.
induction.
Power
transformer
Inverter
4 Photo- A photoelectric relay 1) As a temporary measure, 1) Separate the

electric malfunctioned when the Insert a 0.1 μF capacitor wiring (30 cm or
relay inverter runs the motor.
between the 0 V terminal more).
[The inverter and motor are
of the power supply circuit 2) When separation
installed in the same place (for in the detection unit of the is impossible,
overhead traveling)] overhead photoelectric signals can be
relay and a frame of the received and
overhead panel. sent with dry
Inverter
contacts etc.
Power line
Photoelectric Frame of 3) Do not wire
relay ceiling
Ceiling panel
Photoelectric panel low-current signal
relay
lines and power
Photoelectric relay
(24V) lines in parallel.
Ground
panel
2) As a permanent measure,
<Possible cause>
move the 24 V power
Input power line of the
supply from the ground to
inverter and wiring of the
photoelectric relay run the overhead unit so that
parallel for 30 to 40 m with a signals are sent to the
spacing of about 25 mm, ground side with relay
which invites induction contacts in the ceiling
APPENDICES
noise. Due to conditions of

part.
the installation, these lines
cannot be separated.
Appendix-9
Target
device Notes
5 Photo- A photoelectric relay 1) Insert a 0.1 μF capacitor 1) If a low-current

electric malfunctioned when the between the output circuit at the
relay inverter was operated. common terminal of the malfunctioning
amplifier of the side is observed,
photoelectric relay and the measures
Inverter the frame. may be simple
and economical.
Power line 40m
photoelectric
Amplifier for
Amplifier
relay
Light Light Light Light
emitter receiver emitter receiver
<Possible cause>
While the inverter is
sufficently away from the
photoelectric relay, the power
source is connected in
common. Comnduction noise
has enteted from the power
source line.
6 Proximity A proximity switch 1) Install an LC filter at the 1) Noise generated
switch malfunctioned. output side of the in the inverter
(capacita inverter. can be reduced.
nce type)
Power 2) Install a capacitive filter 2) The switch is
Inverter
source
at the input side of the superseded by a
inverter. proximity switch
3) Ground the 0 V of superior noise
Power Proximity switch
source (common) line of the DC immunity (such
power supply of the as a magnetic
proximity switch through type).
<Possible cause> a capacitor to the box
body of the machine.
The electrostatic capacitive
proximity switch has a low Inverter
noise immunity, and is
LC filter
Capacitive
vulnerable to circuit
filter
Power
conduction noise and source
radiation noise.
Power Proximity
source switch
Box body
7 Pressure A pressure sensor 1) Install an LC filter on the 1) The shielded

sensor malfunctioned. input side of the inverter. parts of shield
2) Connect the shield of wires for sensor
Power
source
Inverter the shielded wire of the signals are
pressure sensor to the 0 connected to a
DC
Power
Pressure V line (common) of the common point
source sensor
pressure sensor, in the system.
Shielded wire
changing the original 2) Conduction
Box body connection. noise from the
Power inverter can be
<Possible cause> source
Inverter
reduced.
Noise enters from the box LC filter
body via the shielded wire DC

Power
Pressure
sensor
to cause malfunctioning of source
the pressure sensor. Shielded wire
Appendix-10
Target
device Notes
8 Position Erroneous-pulse outputs from 1) Install an LC filter and a 1) This is an

detector a pulse converter caused a capacitive filter at the example of a
(pulse shift in the stop position of a
encoder) input side of the inverter. measure where
crane.
2) Install an LC filter at the the power line
output side of the inverter. and signal line
Power
Inverter
cannot be
source LC filter LC filter
Curtain cable separated.
Power Inverter
Converter
source 2) Induction noise
Pulse encoder Curtain cable and radiation
Capacitive
noise at the
filter
output side of the
<Possible cause> Converter
inverter can be
Pulse
The motor power line and the encoder reduced.
signel line for the encoder are
wired together in a bundle.
This produces induction noise
to cause output of error
pulses.
9 Program The PLC program sometimes 1) Install a capacitive filter 1) Total conduction
mable malfunctions. and an LC filter on the noise and
logic
controller input side of the inverter. induction noise in
(PLC) Power 2) Install an LC filter on the the electric line
Inverter
source can be reduced.
output side of the
inverter.
Power Signal
source source 3) Lower the carrier
frequency of the inverter.
<Possible cause> Power Inverter

source
Power sources of the inveter LC filter LC filter
and PLC are in the same
system so that noise enters Capacitive
filter
PLC via the power source.
Power Signal
source source APPENDICES
Appendix-11
Voltage or Special High Voltage
Appendix B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing

Harmonics by Customers Receiving High
(General-purpose inverter)
Agency of Natural Resource and Energy of Japan published the following two guidelines for suppressing
harmonic noise in September 30, 1994.
(1) "Guideline to reduce harmonic emissions caused by electrical and electronic equipment for household
and general use"
(2) "Guideline of harmonics reduction for consumers with high or ultra-high voltage power receiving
facilities"
Assuming that electronic devices generating high harmonics will be increasing, these guidelines are to
establish regulations for preventing high frequency noise interference on devices sharing the power source.
These guidelines should be applied to all devices that are used on the commercial power lines and
generate harmonic current. This section gives a description limited to general-purpose inverters.
B.1 Application to general-purpose inverters

[1] Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general-purpose
appliances
Our three-phase, 200 V class series inverters of 3.7 kW or less (FRENIC-MEGA series) were the products
of which were restricted by the "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and
General-purpose Appliances" (established in September 1994 and revised in October 1999) issued by the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. The above restriction, however, was lifted when the Guideline
was revised in January 2004. Since then, the inverter makers have individually imposed voluntary
restrictions on the harmonics of their products. We, as before, recommend that you connect a reactor (for
suppressing harmonics) to your inverter.
[2] Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or

special high voltage
Unlike other guidelines, this guideline is not applied to the equipment itself such as a general-purpose
inverter, but is applied to each large-scale electric power consumer for total amount of harmonics.
Regulation is applied to each power consumer rather than direct regulation of harmonic current generating
equipment such as the "general-purpose inverter". Calculation of the amount of generated harmonic
current is necessary on individual equipment.
(1) Scope of regulation

In principle, the guideline applies to the customers that meet the following two conditions:
 The customer receives high voltage or special high voltage.

 The "equivalent capacity" of the converter load exceeds the standard value for the receiving voltage
(50 kVA at a receiving voltage of 6.6 kV).
Appendix B.2 [1] "Calculation of equivalent capacity (Pi)" gives you some supplemental information with
regard to estimation for the equivalent capacity of an inverter according to the guideline.
Appendix-12
(2) Regulation
The level (calculated value) of the harmonic current that flows from the customer's receiving point out to
the system is subjected to the regulation. The regulation value is proportional to the contract demand. The
regulation values specified in the guideline are shown in Table B.1.
Appendix B.2 gives you some supplemental information with regard to estimation for the equivalent
capacity of the inverter for compliance to "Japanese guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers
receiving high voltage or special high voltage."
Table B.1 Upper Limits of Harmonic Outflow Current per kW of Contract Demand (mA/kW)
Receiving 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over

voltage 25th
6.6kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.90 0.76 0.70
22kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36
(3) When the regulation applied

The guideline has been applied.
As the application, the estimation for "Voltage distortion factor" required as the indispensable conditions
when entering into the consumer's contract of electric power is already expired.
B.2 Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving

high voltage or special high voltage
When calculating the required matters related to inverters according to the guideline, follow the terms
listed below. The following descriptions are based on "Technical document for suppressing harmonics"
(JEAG 9702-1995) published by the Japan Electrical Manufacturer's Association (JEMA).
[1] Calculation of equivalent capacity (Pi)
The equivalent capacity (Pi) may be calculated using the equation of (input rated capacity) x (conversion
factor). However, catalogs of conventional inverters do not contain input rated capacities, so a description
of the input rated capacity is shown below:
(1) "Inverter rated capacity" corresponding to "Pi"

 In the guideline, the conversion factor of a 6-pulse converter is used as reference conversion factor 1.
It is, therefore, necessary to express the rated input capacity of inverters in a value including harmonic
component current equivalent to conversion factor 1.
 In particular, calculate the input fundamental current I1 from the kW rating and efficiency of the motor
and the efficiency of the inverter as loads and then calculate:
Input rated capacity=3 × (power voltage) × I1 × 1.0228/1000 (kVA).
Then, calculate the input rated capacity as shown below: where 1.0228 is the 6-pulse converter's value
of (effective current)/ (fundamental current).
 When a general-purpose motor or inverter motor is used, the appropriate value shown in Table B.2
can be used. Select a value based on the kW rating of the motor used, irrespective of the inverter type.
The input rated capacity shown above is for the dedicated use in the equation to calculate
capacity of the inverters, following the guideline. Note that the capacity cannot be applied to the
reference for selection of the equipment or wires to be used in the inverter input circuits.
 For selection of capacity for the peripheral equipment, refer to the catalogs or technical documents
issued from their manufacturers.
APPENDICES
Appendix-13
Table B.2 "Input Rated Capacities" of General-purpose Inverters Determined by the Applicable Motor
Ratings
Applicable motor
rating (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
Pi 200V 0.57 0.97 1.95 2.81 4.61 6.77 9.07 13.1 17.6 21.8
(kVA) 400V 0.57 0.97 1.95 2.81 4.61 6.77 9.07 13.1 17.6 21.8
Applicable motor
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160
rating (kW)
Pi 200V 25.9 34.7 42.8 52.1 63.7 87.2 104 127
(kVA) 400V 25.9 34.7 42.8 52.1 63.7 87.2 104 127 153 183
Applicable motor
rating (kW) 200 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 630
Pi 200V
(kVA) 400V 229 252 286 319 359 405 456 512 570 718
(2) Values of "Ki (conversion factor)"

Depending on whether an optional ACR (AC reactor) or DCR (DC reactor) is used, apply the
appropriate conversion factor specified in the appendix to the guideline. The values of the conversion
factor are listed in Table B.3.
Table B.3 "Conversion Factors Ki" for General-purpose Inverters Determined by Reactors
Circuit Conversion Main applications
Circuit type
category factor Ki
w/o a reactor K31=3.4  General-purpose
inverter
w/- a reactor (ACR) K32=1.8  Elevator
Three-phase bridge
3 w/- a reactor (DCR) K33=1.8  Cold air refrigerating
(Capacitor smoothing)
machine
w/- reactors (ACR and DCR) K34=1.4  Other equipment in
general
Some models are equipped with a reactor as a standard accessory.
[2] Calculation of Harmonic Current

(1) Value of "input fundamental current"
 When you calculate the amount of harmonics according to Table 2 in Appendix of the Guideline, you
have to previously know the input fundamental current.
 Apply the appropriate value shown in Table B.4 based on the kW rating of the motor, irrespective of the
inverter type or whether a reactor is used.
If the input voltage is different, calculate the input fundamental current in inverse proportion to the
voltage.
Table B.4 "Input Fundamental Currents" of General-purpose Inverters Determined by the Applicable Motor
Ratings
Applicable motor rating
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
(kW)
Input fundamental 200V 1.62 2.74 5.50 7.92 13.0 19.1 25.6 36.9 49.8 61.4
current (A) 400V 0.81 1.37 2.75 3.96 6.50 9.55 12.8 18.5 24.9 30.7
6.6 kV converted value
49 83 167 240 394 579 776 1121 1509 1860
(mA)

22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160
(kW)
Input fundamental 200V 73.1 98.0 121 147 180 245 293 357
current (A) 400V 36.6 49.0 60.4 73.5 89.9 123 147 179 216 258
2220 2970 73.5 4450 5450 7450 8910 10850 13090 15640
(mA)

200 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 630
(kW)
Input fundamental 200V
current (A) 400V 323 355 403 450 506 571 643 723 804 1013
19580 21500 24400 27300 30700 34600 39000 43800 48700 61400
(mA)
Appendix-14
(2) Calculation of harmonic current

Usually, calculate the harmonic current according to the Sub-table 3 "Three-phase bridge rectifier with the
smoothing capacitor" in Table 2 of the Guideline's Appendix. Table B.5 lists the contents of the Sub-table 3.
Table B.5 Generated Harmonic Current (%), 3-phase Bridge Rectifier (Capacitor Smoothing)
Degree 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
w/o a reactor 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
w/- a reactor (ACR) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
w/- a reactor (DCR) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
w/- reactors (ACR and DCR) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
 ACR: 3%
 DCR: Accumulated energy equal to 0.08 to 0.15 ms (100% load conversion)
 Smoothing capacitor: Accumulated energy equal to 15 to 30 ms (100% load conversion)
 Load: 100%
Generated nth harmonic current (%)

nth harmonic current (A) = Fundamental current (A) ×
100
Calculate the harmonic current of each degree using the following equation:
(3) Maximum availability factor

 For a load for elevators, which provides intermittent operation, or a load with a sufficient designed motor
rating, reduce the current by multiplying the equation by the "maximum availability factor" of the load.
 According to the Appendix to Guideline, “Maximum availability factor of equipment refers to the ratio of
the maximum capacity of the operating equipment to the total capacity of the harmonic generation
equipment. Capacity of the operating equipment shall be an average value over 30 minutes.”
 In general, the maximum availability factor is calculated according to this definition, but the standard
values shown in Table B.6 are recommended for inverters for building equipment.
Table B.6 Availability Factors of Inverters, etc. for Building Equipment (Standard Values)
Equipment Inverter capacity Single inverter
type category availability
Air 200 kW or less 0.55
conditioning
Over 200 kW 0.60
system
Sanitary pump - 0.30
Elevator - 0.25
Refrigerator,
50 kW or less 0.60
freezer
UPS (6-pulse) 200kVA 0.60
Correction coefficient according to contract demand level

Since the total availability factor decreases if the scale of a building increases, calculating reduced
harmonics with the correction coefficient β defined in Table B.7 is permitted.
Table B.7 Correction Coefficient according to the Building Scale
Contract demand (kW) Correction coefficient β

300 1.00
500 0.90
1,000 0.85
2,000 0.80
APPENDICES
Appendix-15
Note: If the contract demand is between two specified values listed in Table B.7, calculate the value by
interpolation.
Note: The correction coefficient β is to be determined as a matter of consultation between the customer
and electric power company for the customers receiving the electric power over 2000 kW or from the
special high voltage lines.
(4) Degree of harmonics to be calculated

The higher the degree of harmonics, the lower the current flows. This is the property of harmonics
generated by inverters so that the inverters are covered by "The case not causing a special hazard" of the
term 3.(3) in the above Appendix for the 9th or higher degrees of the harmonics.
Therefore, "It is sufficient that the 5th and 7th harmonic currents should be calculated."
[3] Examples of calculation

(1) Equivalent capacity
Example of loads Input capacity Conversion Equivalent capacity

and No. of factor
inverters
[Example (1)] 400V, 3.7kW,10 units 4.61 kVA × 10 units K32=1.4 4.61101.4= 64.54 kVA
w/- AC/DC reactor
[Example (2)] 400V, 1.5kW, 15 units 2.93 kVA × 15 units K34=1.8 2.93151.8= 79.11 kVA
w/- AC reactor
Refer to Table Refer to

B.2. Table B.3.
(2) Harmonic current every degrees

Example 1: 400V, 3.7kW, 10 units (w/- AC reactor), maximum availability factor: 0.55
6.6kV side
fundamental current Harmonic current onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
(mA)
5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23th 25th

394 × 10= 3940
(38%) (14.5%) (7.4%) (3.4%) (3.2%) (1.9%) (1.7%) (1.3%)
3940 × 0.55= 2167
823.5 314.2
Refer to Tables B.4 and

Refer to Table B.5.
B.6.
Example 2: 400V, 3.7kW, 15 units (w/- AC/DC reactor), maximum availability factor: 0.55
6.6kV side
fundamental current Harmonic current onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
(mA)
5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23th 25th

394 × 15= 5910
(28%) (9.1%) (7.2%) (4.1%) (3.2%) (2.4%) (1.6%) (1.4%)
5910 × 0.55= 3250.5
910.1 295.8
Refer to Tables B.4 and

Refer to Table B.5.
B.6.
Appendix-16
Appendix C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
Appendix C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose

Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
Excerpt from technical material of
the Japan Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (JEMA) (March 1995)
Preface
When an inverter drives a motor, surge voltages generated by switching the inverter elements are
superimposed on the inverter output voltage and applied to the motor terminals. If the surge voltages are
too high they may have an effect on the motor insulation and some cases have resulted in damage.
For preventing such cases this document describes the generating mechanism of the surge voltages and
countermeasures against them.
 Refer to A.2 [1] "Inverter noise" for details of the principle of inverter operation.
C.1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages

As the inverter rectifies a commercial power source voltage and smoothes into a DC voltage, the magnitude
E of the DC voltage becomes about 2 times that of the source voltage (about 620 V in case of an input
voltage of 440 VAC). The peak value of the output voltage is usually close to this DC voltage value.
But, as there exists inductance (L) and stray capacitance (C) in wiring between the inverter and the motor,
the voltage variation due to switching the inverter elements causes a surge voltage originating in LC
resonance and results in the addition of high voltage to the motor terminals. (Refer to Figure C.1)
This voltage sometimes reaches up to about twice that of the inverter DC voltage (620 V x 2 =
approximately 1,200 V) depending on a switching speed of the inverter elements and wiring conditions.
Surge voltage
Commercial
Inverter Motor
power
source
Figure C.1 Voltage Waveform of Individual Portions
A measured example in Figure C.2 illustrates the relation of a peak value of the motor terminal voltage with
a wiring length between the inverter and the motor.
From this it can be confirmed that the peak value of the motor terminal voltage ascends as the wiring length
increases and becomes saturated at about twice the inverter DC voltage.
The shorter a pulse rise time becomes, the higher the motor terminal voltage rises even in the case of a
short wiring length.
APPENDICES
Appendix-17
Surge voltage magnification factor For IGBT,

tr is equivalent to 0.1 to 0.3 s.
For the bipolar transistor,
tr is equivalent to 0.3 to1 s.
In case an output reactor or a filter is
Surge voltage inserted,
Voltage tr is equivalent to 1s or more.
Surge voltage magnification factor:
Rise time
Magnification factor for DC voltage E
Inverter Motor
3-core 5.5mm2 cable
Cable length [m]
Excerpt from Journal of IEEJ, No. 7, vol. 107, 1987
Figure C.2 Measured Example of Wiring Length and Peak Value of Motor Terminal Voltage
C.2 Effect of surge voltages

The surge voltages originating in LC resonance of wiring may be applied to the motor terminals and
depending on their magnitude sometimes cause damage to the motor insulation.
When the motor is driven with a 200 V class inverter, the dielectric strength of the insulation is no problem
since the peak value at the motor terminal voltage increases twice due to the surge voltages (the DC
voltage is only about 300 V).
But in case of a 400 V class inverter, the DC voltage is approximately 600 V and depending on the wiring
length, the surge voltages may greatly increase and sometimes result in damage to the insulation.
C.3 Countermeasures against surge voltages

When driving a motor with a 400 V class inverter, the following are countermeasures against damage to the
motor insulation by the surge voltages.
[1] Using a surge suppressor unit, SSU (Patent pending)

The surge suppressor unit (SSU) is a newly structured unit using circuits based on the impedance-matching
theory of a transmission line. Just connecting the SSU to the surge suppressor cable of the existing
equipment can greatly reduce the surge voltage that results in a motor dielectric breakdown.
For 50 m of wiring length: SSU 50TA-NS For 100 m of wiring length: SSU 100TA-NS
Appendix-18
[2] Suppressing surge voltages

There are two ways for suppressing the surge voltages, one is to reduce the voltage rise time and another
is to reduce the voltage peak value.
(1) Output reactor

If wiring length is relatively short, the surge voltages can be suppressed by reducing the voltage rise time
(dv/dt) with the installation of an AC reactor on the output side of the inverter. (Refer to Figure C.3 (1).)
However, if the wiring length becomes long, suppressing the peak voltage due to surge voltage may be
difficult.
(2) Output filter

Installing a filter on the output side of the inverter allows a peak value of the motor terminal voltage to be
reduced. (Refer to Figure C.3 (2).)
Reactor
Motor Motor
Commercial Commercial
Inverter power Inverter
power
source source
(1) Output reactor (2) Output filter

Figure C.3 Method to Suppress Surge Voltage
If the wiring length between the inverter and the motor is comparatively long, the crest value of
the surge voltage can be suppressed by connecting a surge suppressor unit (SSU) to the motor
terminal. For details, refer to Chapter 11, "11.12 Surge Suppression Unit (SSU)."
[3] Using motors with enhanced insulation

Enhanced insulation of a motor winding allows its surge withstanding to be improved.
C.4 Regarding existing equipment

[1] In case of a motor being driven with 400 V class inverter
A survey over the last five years on motor insulation damage due to the surge voltages originating from
switching of inverter elements shows that the damage incidence is 0.013% under the surge voltage
condition of over 1,100 V and most of the damage occurs several months after commissioning the inverter.
Therefore there seems to be little probability of occurrence of motor insulation damage after a lapse of
several months of commissioning.
[2] In case of an existing motor driven using a newly installed 400 V class inverter
We recommend suppressing the surge voltages with the ways shown in Section C.3.
APPENDICES
Appendix-19
Appendix D Inverter Generating Loss
Appendix D Inverter Generating Loss

The table below lists the inverter generating loss.
Unit: W
Carrier frequency (Functional code:F26)
ND mode HD mode HND mode HHD mode
Power Factory Factory
Inverter type Factory Factory Maximum Maximum
system shipment shipment
shipment value shipment value set value set value
value value
3-phase FRN0059E2S-4 710 510 510 870 440 770
400V FRN0072E2S-4 900 750 710 1000 510 900

FRN0085E2S-4 1200 1000 1000 1250 800 1150
FRN0105E2S-4 1350 1200 1200 1550 1000 1450
FRN0139E2S-4 1700 1300 1300 1700 1100 1600
FRN0168E2S-4 2000 1850 1850 2300 1350 1950
FRN0203E2S-4 2250 1950 1950 2250 1600 2150
Note 1: The maximum set value (max. carrier) differs depending on specification. For details please refer to
Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODE F26.
Note 2: When NH/HD specification units are operated at maximum carrier, reduce output to 60% of rated current.
At that setting, generated losses will be at same level as the factory shipment value.
Appendix-20
Appendix E Conversion from UI Units
Appendix E Conversion from SI Units

All expressions given in Chapter 10, "SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES" are
based on SI units (The International System of Units). This section explains how to convert expressions to
other units.
[1] Conversion of units

(1) Force (6) Inertia constant
• 1[kgf]9.8[N] J[kg•m2] :moment of inertia
2 2
• 1[N] 0.102[kgf] GD [kg•m ] :flywheel effect
(2) Torque 2
• GD =4J
• 1[kgf•m] 9.8[N•m] GD2
•J=
• 1[N•m] 0.102[kgf•m] 4
(3) Power (energy) (7) Pressure, stress

• 1[kgf•m] 9.8[N•m]=9.8[J]=9.8[W•s] • 1[mmAq] 9.8[Pa] 9.8[N/m2]
• 1[Pa] 1[N/m2] 0.102[mmAq]
(4) Power
• 1[bar] 100000[Pa] 1.02[kg•cm2]
• 1[kgf•m/s] 9.8[N•m/s]=9.8[J/s]=
• 1[kg•cm2] 98000[Pa] 980[mbar]
9.8[W]
• 1 barometric pressure
• 1[N•m/s] 1[J/s]=1[W] 0.102[kgf•m/s]
=1013[mbar]=760[mmHg]
(5) Rotation speed =101300[Pa] 1.033[kg/cm2]
2
• 1[min-1]= [rad/s] 0.1047[rad/s]
60
60
• 1[rad/s]= [min-1] 9.549[min-1]
2
APPENDICES
Appendix-21
Appendix E Conversion from UI Units
[2] Calculation formula
(1) Torque, power, rotation speed (4) Acceleration torque

2 [Driving mode]
• P[W] •N[min-1]•[N•m] 2
60 J[kg•m ] N[min-1]
• [N•m]  •
9.55 t[s]•G
• P[W] 1.026•N[min-1]•T[kgf•m]
2 2
GD [kg•m ] N[min-1]
P[W] • T[kgf•m]  •
375 t[s]•G
• [N•m] 9.55•
N[min-1]
[Braking mode]
P[W] J[kg•m2] N[min-1]•G
• T[kgf•m] 0.974• • [N•m]  •
N[min-1] 9.55 t[s]
(2) Kinetic energy GD2[kg•m2] N[min-1]•G

• T[kgf•m]  •
1 375 t[s]
2 2 2
• E[J]  • J[kg•m ]•N [ (min-1) ]
182.4
(5) Acceleration time
1 J1+J2/G[kg•m2] N[min-1]
2 2 2 2 • tACC[s]  •
• E[J]  • GD [kg•m ]• N [ (min-1) ] M-L/G[N•m] 9.55
730
GD12+GD22/G[kg•m2] N[min-1]
(3) Linear motion load torque • tACC[s]  •
TM-TL/G[kgf•m] 375
[Driving mode]
• [N•m] 0.159
V[m/min]
• F[N]
(6) Deceleration time
NM[min-1]•G J1+J2•G[kg•m2] N[min-1]
• tDEC[s]  •
M-L•G[N•m] 9.55
V[m/min]
• T[kgf•m] 0.159 • F[kgf]
NM[min-1]•G GD12+GD22•G[kg•m2] N[min-1]
• tDEC[s]  •
TM-TL•G [kgf•m] 375
[Braking mode]
V[m/min]
• [N•m] 0.159 • F[N]
NM[min-1]/G
V[m/min]
• T[kgf•m] 0.159 • F[kgf]
NM[min-1]/G
Appendix-22
Appendix F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires

The tables below list the allowable current of IV wires, HIV wires, and 600 V cross-linked polyethylene
insulated wires.
 IV wire (Maximum allowable temperature: 60C)

Table F.1 (a) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Allowable
Wiring in free air Wiring in wire duct (up to three wires in the same duct)
current
Reference
Wire size 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
value
(30C or
(mm2) (Io×0.91) (Io×0.82) (Io×0.71) (Io×0.58) (Io×0.40) (Io×0.63) (Io×0.57) (Io×0.49) (Io×0.40)
less)
Io (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
2.0 27 24 22 19 15 11 17 15 13 10
3.5 37 33 30 26 21 15 23 21 18 14
5.5 49 44 40 34 28 20 30 27 24 19
8.0 61 55 50 43 35 25 38 34 29 24
14 88 80 72 62 51 36 55 50 43 35
22 115 104 94 81 66 47 72 65 56 46
38 162 147 132 115 93 66 102 92 79 64
60 217 197 177 154 125 88 136 123 106 86
100 298 271 244 211 172 122 187 169 146 119
150 395 359 323 280 229 161 248 225 193 158
200 469 426 384 332 272 192 295 267 229 187
250 556 505 455 394 322 227 350 316 272 222
325 650 591 533 461 377 266 409 370 318 260
400 745 677 610 528 432 305 469 424 365 298
500 842 766 690 597 488 345 530 479 412 336
2 x 100 497 452 407 352 288 203 313 283 243 198
2 x 150 658 598 539 467 381 269 414 375 322 263
2 x 200 782 711 641 555 453 320 492 445 383 312
2 x 250 927 843 760 658 537 380 584 528 454 370
2 x 325 1083 985 888 768 628 444 682 617 530 433
2 x 400 1242 1130 1018 881 720 509 782 707 608 496
2 x 500 1403 1276 1150 996 813 575 883 799 687 561
 HIV wire (Maximum allowable temperature: 75C)

Table F.1 (b) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Allowable
current
Reference
value
2 (30C or
(mm ) (Io×0.91) (Io×0.82) (Io×0.71) (Io×0.58) (Io×0.40) (Io×0.63) (Io×0.57) (Io×0.49) (Io×0.40)
less)
Io (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
2.0 32 31 29 27 24 22 21 20 18 17
3.5 45 42 39 37 33 30 29 27 25 23
5.5 59 56 52 49 44 40 39 36 34 30
8.0 74 70 65 61 55 50 48 45 42 38
14 107 101 95 88 80 72 70 66 61 55
22 140 132 124 115 104 94 92 86 80 72
38 197 186 174 162 147 132 129 121 113 102
60 264 249 234 217 197 177 173 162 151 136
100 363 342 321 298 271 244 238 223 208 187
150 481 454 426 395 359 323 316 296 276 248
200 572 539 506 469 426 384 375 351 328 295
250 678 639 600 556 505 455 444 417 389 350
325 793 747 702 650 591 533 520 487 455 409
400 908 856 804 745 677 610 596 558 521 469
500 1027 968 909 842 766 690 673 631 589 530
2 x 100 606 571 536 497 452 407 397 372 347 313
2 x 150 802 756 710 658 598 539 526 493 460 414
2 x 200 954 899 844 782 711 641 625 586 547 492
APPENDICES
2 x 250 1130 1066 1001 927 843 760 741 695 648 584
2 x 325 1321 1245 1169 1083 985 888 866 812 758 682
2 x 400 1515 1428 1341 1242 1130 1018 993 931 869 782
2 x 500 1711 1613 1515 1403 1276 1150 1122 1052 982 883
Appendix-23
 600V crosslinkable polyethylene insulated wire (Maximum allowable tempertaure: 90C)

Table F.1 (c) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Allowable
current
Reference
value
(30C or
(mm2) (Io×0.91) (Io×0.82) (Io×0.71) (Io×0.58) (Io×0.40) (Io×0.63) (Io×0.57) (Io×0.49) (Io×0.40)
less)
Io (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
2.0 38 36 34 32 31 29 25 24 22 21
3.5 52 49 47 45 42 39 34 33 31 29
5.5 69 66 63 59 56 52 46 44 41 39
8.0 86 82 78 74 70 65 57 54 51 48
14 124 118 113 107 101 95 82 79 74 70
22 162 155 148 140 132 124 108 103 97 92
38 228 218 208 197 186 174 152 145 137 129
60 305 292 279 264 249 234 203 195 184 173
100 420 402 384 363 342 321 280 268 253 238
150 556 533 509 481 454 426 371 355 335 316
200 661 633 605 572 539 506 440 422 398 375
250 783 750 717 678 639 600 522 500 472 444
325 916 877 838 793 747 702 611 585 552 520
400 1050 1005 961 908 856 804 700 670 633 596
500 1187 1136 1086 1027 968 909 791 757 715 673
2 x 100 700 670 641 606 571 536 467 447 422 397
2 x 150 927 888 848 802 756 710 618 592 559 526
2 x 200 1102 1055 1008 954 899 844 735 703 664 625
2 x 250 1307 1251 1195 1130 1066 1001 871 834 787 741
2 x 325 1527 1462 1397 1321 1245 1169 1018 974 920 866
2 x 400 1751 1676 1602 1515 1428 1341 1167 1117 1055 993
2 x 500 1978 1894 1809 1711 1613 1515 1318 1262 1192 1122
Appendix-24
Appendix G Repalced documents
Appendix G Index by Functional Code Purpose

G.1 Performing the minimum setting required for simple operation
To perform simple operation under a constant torque load and V/f control, setting of the following functional
codes is mandatory. These are functional codes displayed via quick setup.
Functional
Application/Purpose Functional code name
code
Select the frequency setting input method. F01 Frequency command 1
Select the operation/stop method. F02 Operation method
Set the maximum value of motor rotations (output
F03 Maximum frequency 1
frequency).
Limit the set frequency. F16 Frequency limiter (lower limit)
Input the motor nameplate value for correct operation
F05 Base frequency voltage 1
of the motor.
F07 Acceleration time 1
Set the acceleration/deceleration time.
F08 Deceleration time 1
Adjust the insufficient torque at low speed with torque
F09 Torque boost 1
boost.
Electronic thermal switch 1
(for motor protection)
Protect the motor. F10
(Characteristics selection)
F11
(Operation level)
(Selection of restart from
Set the restart from instantaneous power failure. F14
instantaneous power failure)
Motor operation noise (Carrier
Reduce the noise from the motor. F26
frequency)
Cancel the menu restrictions to allow use of various
E52 Keypad menu selection
check functions on the keypad.
Motor 1
P02 (Capacity)
Set the motor constant. P03 (Rated current)
P04 (Auto tuning)
G.2 Setting the frequency

[1] Frequency setting on the keypad
Functional
code
Frequency setting 1
F01
Set the frequency on the keypad. Storage of digitally set
E64
frequency
[2] Analog-based frequency setting

Functional
APPENDICES
code
Externally set the frequency via analog voltage/current.
F01 Frequency command 1
(Terminal [12] , [C1] (C1 function), [C1] (V2 function))
Appendix-25
Functional
code
F18 Bias (Frequency command 1)
C50 Bias (for Frequency setting 1)
(Bias reference point)
Analog input adjustment
C55 (Terminal [12] ) Bias
C56 (Terminal [12] ) (Bias reference
point)
C61 (Terminal [C1] (C1 function))
Bias
C67 (Terminal [C1] (V2 function))
Give the bias/gain such as 1-5V to the analog Bias
frequency setting and set the analog input and C68 (Terminal [C1] (V2 function))
frequency setting to an arbitrary relation. (Bias reference point)
(Terminal [12] ) (Gain)
(Terminal [12] ) (Gain reference
C32 point)
C34 (Terminal [C1] (C1 function)
(Gain)
C37
C39
(Gain reference point)
C42
C44 (Gain)
Use Terminal [12] at both polarities (such as 10V), or
minus polarity (such as -10V). Analog input adjustment
At Terminal [12] , provide an offset for zero point via the C35 (Terminal [12] ) (Polarity
bias function and use 0 to +10V as -100% to +100% or selection)
the like.
At Terminal [C1] (V2 function), provide an offset for
zero point via the bias function and use 0 to +10V as C45
(Polarity selection)
-100% to +100% or the like.
Use Terminal [C1] (C1 function) within the range of 0 to
20 mA.
Terminal [C1] (C1 function)
At Terminal [C1] (C1 function), provide an offset for C40
range selection
zero point via the bias function and use 4 to 20 mA/0 to
20 mA as -100% to +100% or the like.
(Terminal [12] ) (Offset)
Cancel the offset of the equipment from which an C31 (Terminal [C1] (C1 function))
analog input is to be outputted. C36 (Offset)
(Offset)
Appendix-26
Functional
code
(Terminal [12] ) (Filter)
Remove the noise of the analog input with a filter.
C38 (Filter)
(Filter)
Synchronize the operation pattern of analog frequency Forward/Reverse operation

C53
setting with switchover of forward/reverse operation selection (Frequency setting 1)
(air conditioning) . E01-E05
Terminal [X1] - [X5] "IVS"
E65 Command loss detection

Detect a fault or wire break in an external frequency (operation continuation
setting unit and output a warning and continue frequency)
operation. E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "REF OFF"
[3] Other frequency setting
Functional
code
Make frequency setting via UP Frequency setting 1
F01
command (speed increase) or DOWN Terminal [X1] - [X5]
command (speed decrease). E01-E05
"UP" "DOWN"
UP/DOWN
Reset the initial value of UP/DOWN
UP/DOWN control (Initial
command at the start of operation H61
frequency setting)
(start from 0Hz).
Frequency setting 1
Store multiple frequencies and switch F01
Multi-stage Terminal [X1] - [X5]
between frequencies with the E01-E05
frequency "SS1, 2, 4, 8"
multi-stage frequency slection signal. C05-C19
Multi-stage frequency 1-15
Make frequency setting with pulse F01 Frequency command 1
train. d59 Command (pulse train input)
(Pulse input system)
d61 (Filter time constant)
d62 (Pulse correction coefficient 1)
Pulse train
d63 (Pulse correction coefficient 2)
input Receive pulses from PG of another E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5]
motor and perform ratio operation. (Only Terminal [X5] is
valid."PIN")
(Terminals except Terminal [X5]
are valid. "SIGN")
Switchover of frequency sething
method; Switch between the
frequency command via analog F01 Frequency setting 1
Distant/Local
current (4-20mA) command from the C30 Frequency setting 2
switchover
distant electricity room and analog E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "Hz2/Hz1"
voltage (0-10V) command from the
local operation unit.
Terminal [12] (Extended function
Give the correction setting (auxiliary E61 selection)
Auxiliary
frequency setting) to the main setting Terminal [C1] (C1 function)
frequency E62
of preset frequency via analog input (Extended function selection)
setting E63
and add the same to the main setting. Terminal [C1] (V2 function)
(Extended function selection)
E61 selection)
Give ratio setting via analog input and
Ratio setting multiply the frequency command with E62
the ratio to perform override. E63 Terminal [C1] (V2 function)
Digital input Make frequency setting via binary
APPENDICES
interface card codes (8, 12, bits).

(option) F01 Frequency command 1
(For details, refer to the optional
Instruction Manual.)
Appendix-27
G.3 Inputting operation command

Functional
code
Operation/Manipulation
F02 Terminal [FWD] (Function
Perform operation and stop by using E98 selection)
Keypad
keypad keys. E99 Terminal [REV] (Function
E20-E21 selection)
Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "KP"
Operation/Manipulation
Use the ‘FWD’ or ‘REV’ command
assigned to Terminals [FWD] and
E98 selection)
[REV] to perform operation and stop
E99 Terminal [REV] (Function
(2-wire operation).
selection)
External signal Operation/Manipulation
Use the ’FWD’ ’REV’ or ’HOLD’
command assigned to Terminal
E98 selection)
[FWD], [REV] or any one of [X1] - [X5]
E99 Terminal [REV] (Function
to perform operation and stop (3-wire
E01-E05 selection)
operation).
Terminal [X1] - [X5] "HLD"
G.4 Starting/Stopping
Functional
code
Starting Start frequency 1
F23
frequency Perform smooth startup. Start frequency 1 (Continuation
F24
(Freq.) time)
Start characteristics
H09 (Restart-from-free-run mode)
Restart from Restart a free-running motor in a
H49 (Restart-from-free-run wait time 1)
free-run shockless way.
H46 (Restart-from-free-run wait time 2)
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] ’STM’
Smoothly stop the system. Stop frequecy
F25
Stop method Stop frequecy (Continuation
Provide a sufficient torque at low F39
time)
speed before stop.
DC braking 1
F20 (Start frequerncy)
Prevent jerky stop operation of the
F21 (Operation level)
motor by DC braking.
DC Braking 1 F22 (Time)
H95 (Characteristics selection)
Perform DC braking via external
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "DCBRK"
command.
H56 Forced stop deceleration time
Force to stop Use forced stop for safety.
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "STOP"
Terminal [X1] - [X5]
Free-run stop Use free-run stop for safety. E01-E05
(Function selection) "BX"
G.5 Setting acceleration/deceleration (time/method/pattern)

Functional
code
Acceleration/ Perform acceleration/deceleration in
F07 Acceleration time 1
Deceleration the specified
F08 Deceleration time 1
time acceleration/deceleration time.
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5]
"RT1" "RT2"
E10 Acceleration time 2
Acceleration/D
Switch over the E11 Deceleration time 2
eceleration
acceleration/deceleration time. E12 Acceleration time 3
time switchover
E13 Deceleration time 3
E14 Acceleration time 4
E15 Deceleration time 4
Appendix-28
Functional
code
Place the motor in free-run operation
to minimize variations in the
deceleration torque when operation
Coast-to-stop command is OFF. H11 Deceleration mode
Cause the motor to run free to
prevent conflict with the mechanical
brake.
H07 Curve acceleration/deceleration
H57 1st S curve range at
acceleration (start)
Give an S curve to the
H58 2nd S curve range at
acceleration/deceleration pattern and
S-curve acceleration (end)
perform shockless
H59 1st S curve range at
acceleration/deceleration operation.
deceleration (start))
H60 2nd S curve range at
deceleration (end)
Set the curve
acceleration/deceleration pattern and
Curvilinear perform acceleration/deceleration H07 Curvilinear
pattern at the maximum capability of
the inverter.
F40 Torque restriction value1
(Driving)
F41 Torque restriction value 1
(Braking)
E16 Torque restriction value 2
Torque- Use torque-restricted
(Driving)
restricted acceleration/deceleration pattern and
E17 Torque restriction value 2
acceleration/ perform acceleration/deceleration
(Braking)
deceleration pattern at the maximum capability or
H73 Torque restriction (Operating
pattern arbitrary capacity of the inverter.
condition selection)
H76 Torque restriction (Braking)
(Increase frequency limiter)
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "TL2/TL1"
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] [Y2] "IOL" "’IOL2"
G.6 Adjusting operation performance

Functional
code
Load selection/automatic torque
Select the V/f setting to suit the load
F37 boost/automatic energy-saving
facility.
operation 1
Polygonal line V/f 1
H50 (Frequency)
H51 (Voltage)
V/f setting
Select an arbitrary V/f setting to suit
H52 (Frequency)
the load facility.
H53 (Voltage)
H65 (Frequency)
H66 (Voltage)
Provide the torque at a low speed. F09 Torque boost 1
Torque boost Provide the torque at a low speed and
F37 boost/ automatic energy-saving
prevent over-excitation.
operation 1
Jump Operate while avoiding resonance
C01-C04 Jump frequency 1-4
frequency with load.
Magnetize
current Output current fluctuation
APPENDICES
Stabilize the motor current. H80

vibration damping gain for motor 1
damping gain
Appendix-29
Functional
code
Motor operation noise
Motor sound Reduce the noise from the motor. F26 (Carrier frequency)
F27 (Tone)
G.7 Controlling the motor

[1] Selecting the motor control system
Functional
code
Select the motor control system to
Control system suit the machine characteristics (such F42 Drive control selection 1
as V/f and torque vector).
Upgrade the motor speed accuracy.
Slip Slip compensation 1 (Operating
(Compensate for the drop of motor H68
compensation condition selection)
speed or slip due to load.)
[2] Setting the motor constant

Functional
code
Use the Fuji general-purpose motor (Type 8 series, 4P,
P02 Motor 1 (Capacity)
50Hz base).
H03 Data initialization

F05 Base frequency voltage 1
Set the motor constant referring to the motor
nameplate.
Motor 1
P01 (No. of poles)
P02 (Capacity)
P03 (Rated current)
Motor 1
Perform motor constant tuning (offline tuning). P04
(Auto tuning)
Appendix-30
Functional
code
Motor 1
P06 (No-load current)
P07 (%R1)
P08 (%X)
P09 (Slip compensation gain
Set the motor constant from tuning or test report. (For (driving))
test report, conversion is necessary.) P10 (Slip compensation response
time)
P11 (Slip compensation gain
(braking))
P12 (Rated slip)
P13 (Iron loss coefficient)
Identify the motor constant corresponding to the Motor 1
change in the motor temperature (online tuning) to P05 (Online tuning)
reduce variations in the motor speed.
G.8 Setting input/output terminals

Functional
code
Assignment of
Assign functions to digital input Terminal [X1] - [X5] (Function
input terminal E01-E05
terminals and control the inverter. selection)
functions
Assignment of
Output the operating state of the
general-purpos Terminal [Y1] - [Y2]
inverter/motor to the transistor output E20-E21
e output (Function selection)
or contact output.
terminals
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] (Function
Input/Output Perform logical inversion of E20-E21 selection)
signal general-purpose input/output. Terminal [Y1] - [Y2]
G.9 Performing motor output

Functional
code
F29 Terminal [FM] (Operation
selection)
SW5 <Switch to select
voltage/current/pulse output of
Terminal [FM] >
As output for the meter, output
F30 Terminal [FM] (Output gain)
various information from Terminals
F31 Terminal [FM] (Function
[FM] and [FM2] via analog voltage or
Analog output selection)
analog current.
F32 Terminal [FM2] (Operation
(Terminal [FM2] is mounted only on C
selection)
(for China).
SW7 <Switch to select voltage/current
output of Terminal [FM2] )
F34 Terminal [FM2] (Output gain)
F35 Terminal [FM2] (Function
selection)
Terminal [FM] (Pulse output)
Terminal [FM] (Operation
selection)
F29
As output for the meter, output <Switch to select
SW5
Pulse output various information from Terminal voltage/current/pulse output of
Terminal [FM] via pulse signal. Terminal [FM] )>
F33
Terminal [FM] (Pulse rate)
F31
Terminal [FM] (Function
APPENDICES
selection)
Appendix-31
G.10 Continuing the operation

Functional
code
Retry
Enable the retry operation that
H04 (Count)
Auto-reset automatically generates a reset signal
H05 (Wait time)
despite an alarm and attempts restart.
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "TRY"
Continue the operation despite F14 Restart from instantaneous
instantaneous power failure. power failure (Operation
Restart from the frequency at the time selection)
of instantaneous power failure despite H13 (Wait time)
instantaneous power failure. H14 (Frequency drop ratio)
H15 (Operation continuation level)
H16 (Instantaneous power failure
Restart from allowable time)
Restart from the start frequency H92 Operation continuation (P)
instantaneous
despite instantaneous power failure. H93 Operation continuation (I)
power failure
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "LU"
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "IL"
Search for the speed of the Start characteristics
free-running motor and restart the H09 (Restart-from-free-run mode)
free-running motor in a shockless way H46 (Restart-from-free-run wait time
at restart from instantaneous power d67 2)
failure. (Restart-from-free-run mode)
H69 Regeneration avoidance control
Regeneration
avoidance
H76 Torque restriction (Braking)
control
Prevent trips due to overvoltage (Increase frequency limiter)
(Trip
protection in a system without DB E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2]
avoidance)
resistor. "IOL" "IOL2"
Brakeing
capability H71 Deceleration characteristics
enhancement
Lower the frequency to reduce the
Overload
load before the inverter trips due to H70 Overload avoidance control
avpidance
overload (overheating of cooling fin or E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "OLP"
control
inverter overload).
Detect a fault or wire break in an Command loss detection
E65
Reference loss external frequency setting unit and (Operation continuation
detected perform alarm output and frequency)
E20-E21
continuation of operation. Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "REF OFF"
H81 Light alarm selection 1
Continue operation despite a specific
Light alarm H82 Light alarm selection 2
alarm.
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "L-ALM"
G.11 Detecting/Outputting the inverter state signal

Functional
code
Frequency detection
(Operation level)
E31 (Hysteresis width)
E32 Frequency detection 2
Frequency Detect the level of the motor
E36 (Operation level)
level detection operation speed.
E54 Frequency detection 3
(Operation level)
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2]
"FDT" "FDT2" "FDT3"
Frequency reaching detection
Frequency
Determine whether the motor speed E30 width (Detection width)
equivalence
has reached the target set value. E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2]
signal
"FAR" "FAR3"
Appendix-32
Functional
code
Torque detection 1
Detect the torque to check whether E78 (Operation level)
Torque the preset torque is outputted and
E79 (Timer time)
detection whether an excessive torque is not
outputted. E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2]
"B/D" "TD1"
Torque detection 2/Low torque
E80 detection
Low torque Detect a low torque (no load state) to E81 (Operation level)
output detect belt break in the drive system. E20-E21 (Timer time)
Terminal [Y1] - [Y2]
"B/D" "U-TL" "TD2"
Overload forecast/Current
E34 detection
E35 (Operation level)
Detect the current to check whether (Timer time)
Current the current is flowing in the specified Current detection 3
detected amount or more, and whether an E55
excessive current is not flowing. E56 (Operation level)
E20-E21 (Timer time)
"ID" "ID3" "OL"
Current detection 2/
E37 Low current detection
Low current Detect a low torque (no load state) to E38 (Operation level)
detection detect belt break in the drive system. E20-E21 (Timer time)
"ID2" "ITL" "IDL"
Undervoltage Output the undervoltage state. E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "LU"
G.12 Performing various operations

Functional
code
Perform JOG operation using keypad C20 JOG frequency
keys. H54 Acceleration time
Perform JOG operation via a signal to (JOG operation)
JOG operation Terminals [FWD] and [REV] . H55 Deceleration time
(JOG operation)
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "JOG"
Enable ’JOG’ via communications.
d99 *4 Extended function 1

boost/automatic energy-saving
F37 operation 1
Perform energy-saving operation.
H67 Automatic energy-saving
operation
Energy-saving
operation (Mode selection)
Integral power data display
E51 coefficient
Perform energy management.
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5]
"SW50" "SW60"
A42
Motor/Parameter switchover
E01-E05
2 (Operation selection)
APPENDICES
Motor-switched Switch over two motors via one

operation inverter. E20-E21
Terminal [X1] - [X5] "M2"
Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "SWM1, 2"
Appendix-33
Functional
code
Brake signal
J68 (Release current)
J69 (Release frequency/speed)
J70 (Release timer)
Use a brake signal effective for
Brake signal J71 (Input frequency/speed)
elevating transfer machine, etc.
J72 (Input timer)
J95 (Release torque)
J96 (Speed selection)
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "BRKS"
Motor/Parameter switchover
A42
Operate with parameters to suit the 2 (Operation selection)
Control varying conditions (such as inertia) of E01-E05
parameter the mechanical system.
switchover (Change parameters via gear Terminal [X1] - [X5] "M2"
E20-E21
switchover.) Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "SWM1, 2"
d25
ASR switchover time
G.13 Performing control to suit each application

[1] Droop operation
Functional
code
H28 Droop control

Use the droop control function to strike a load balance.
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "DROOP"
Appendix-34
[2] PID control for process control

Functional
code
Perform process control related to pressure, flow rate PID control (Operation
J01
and temperature. selection)
PID control (Operation
Reverse Switch over the operation on PID J01
selection)
operation output via air conditioning. E01-E05
Terminal [X1] - [X5] "IVS"
PID command Perform setting of PID command on
J02 PID control (Remote command)
the keypad.
PID control (Remote command)
J02
selection)
E61
E62
E63
Terminal [C1] (V2 function)
C61 point)
C68 point)
(Terminal [12] ) Bias
(Terminal [12] ) (Bias reference
point)
Perform setting of PID command via (Terminal [12] ) (Gain)
analog input. (Terminal [12] ) (Gain reference
point)
C32
C34
(Gain)
C37
C39
C42
C44
(Gain)
C36 (Offset)
(Offset)
C38 (Filter)
(Filter)
(Terminal [12] ) (Polarity
C35
selection)
J02 Terminal [X1] - [X5]
Perform setting of PID command via
E01-E05 "UP" "DOWN"
UP command and DOWN command.
H61 UP/DOWN control initial value
selection
APPENDICES

communications.
Appendix-35
Functional
code
J02
Store multiple PID commands and E01-E05
"PID-SS1" "PID-SS2"
switch between PID commands via J136
the multi-stage frequency signal. PID multi-stage command 1
J137
PID multi-stage command 2
J138

selection)
E61
E62
E63
Perform setting of PID feedback via (Terminal [12] ) (Gain reference
PID feedback
analog input. point)
C32
(Gain)
C37
C39
C42
C44 (Gain)

C36 (Offset)
Perform setting of PID feedback via (Offset)
PID feedback
analog input. Analog input adjustment
C38 (Filter)
(Filter)
PID control
J03 P (Gain)
Perform optiumum setting of the PID
PID adjustment J04 I (Integral time)
adjusting unit.
J05 D (Derivative time)
J06 (Feedback filter)
PID control
Anti-reset windup Reduce the overshoot. J10
(Anti-reset windup)
PID control
Output a PID control error (deviation J11 (Warning output selection)
warning, absolute value warning, etc.) J12 (Upper limit warning (AH))
as a warning. J13 (Lower limit warning (AL))
Warning output
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "PID-ALM"
PID feedback wire break

H91
PID feedback wire break detection
E20-E21
Terminal [Y] - [Y2] "C1OFF"
Appendix-36
Functional
code
PID control
J15 (Small water amount stop
Small water operation frequency level)
amount stop Use the small water amount stop
J16 (Small water amount stop
function to save energy of pump.
function elapsed time)
J17 (Start frequency)
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "PID-STP"
PID control
Limit the operation of PID control with
Output limiter J18 (PID output limiter upper limit)
a limiter.
J19 (PID output limiter lower limit)
Externally perform PID control, such Terminal [X1] - [X5]

PID control as holding/resetting the PID adjusting E01-E05
unit and canceling the PID control. "PID-HLD" "Hz/PID" "PID-RST"
Output of PID
control under Output that PID control is under way. E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "PID-CTL"
way
Display the control amount on the J105 PID control (Display unit)
Process
keypad in terms of the physical J106 PID control (Maximum
display
amount of the process. measure)
J107 PID control (Minimum measure)
APPENDICES
Appendix-37
[3] PID control for dancer control

Functional
code
PID control
Perform speed control such as dancer control. J01
(PID control block diagram
J62
selection)
PID control
Perform setting of PID control on the
J02 (Remote command)
keypad.
J57 (Dancer reference position)
J02 Terminal [12] (Extended function
selection)
E61
E62
E63
C61 point)
C67 Bias
Bias
PID command (Terminal [12] ) (Gain)
(Terminal [12] ) (Gain reference
point)
analog input. C32
C34
(Gain)
C37
C39
C42
C44
(Gain)
C36 (Offset)
(Offset)
C38 (Filter)
(Filter)
(Terminal [12] ) (Polarity
C35
selection)
J02 Terminal [X1] - [X5]
E01-E05 "UP" "DOWN"
UP command and DOWN command.
PID command H61 UP/DOWN control initial value
selection
communications.
Appendix-38
Functional
code
J02
Store multiple PID commands and E01-E05
"PID-SS1" "PID-SS2"
switch between PID commands via J136
the multi-stage frequency signal. PID multi-stage command 1
J137
J138
selection)
E61
E62
E63
Perform setting of PID feedback via (Terminal [12] ) (Gain reference
PID feedback
analog input. point)
C32
(Gain)
C37
C39
C42
C44 (Gain)
C36 (Offset)
Perform setting of PID feedback via (Offset)
PID feedback
analog input. Analog input adjustment
C38 (Filter)
(Filter)
PID control
J03 P (Gain)
Perform optiumum setting of the PID
J04 I (Integral time)
adjusting unit.
J05 D (Derivative time)
J06 (Feedback filter)
PID adjustment PID control
Perform control using a different (Dancer reference position
J58
constant of the PID adjusting unit in detection width)
J59
case the dance position is close to P (Gain) 2
the target position. J60
I (Integral time) 2
J61
D (Derivative time) 2
PID control
Anti-reset windup Reduce the overshoot. J10
(Anti-reset windup)
APPENDICES
Appendix-39
Functional
code
PID control
Output a PID control error (deviation J11 (Warning output selection)
warning, absolute value warning, J12 (Upper limit warning (AH))
etc.) as a warning. J13 (Lower limit warning (AL))
Warning output
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "PID-ALM"
PID feedback wire break

H91
PID feedback wire break detection)
E20-E21
Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "C1OFF"
PID control
Limit the operation of PID control with
Output limiter J18 (PID output limiter upper limit)
a limiter.
J19 (PID output limiter lower limit)
Externally perform PID control, such Terminal [X1] - [X5]

PID control as holding/resetting the PID adjusting E01-E05
unit and canceling the PID control. "PID-HLD" "Hz/PID" "PID-RST"
Output of PID
control under Output that PID control is under way. E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "PID-CTL"
way
PID control (Display unit)

Process Display the control amount in terms of J105
display the physical amount of the process. PID control (Maximum
J106
measure)
J107
PID control (Minimum measure)
Appendix-40
G.14 Using convenient functions on the keypad

Functional
code
Prevent functional code data from being inadvertently F00 Data protection
overwritten. E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "WE-KP"
Reset functional code data to the initial value.
H03 Data Initializing
Reset the motor constant. (Initialize the constant.)
Cancel the menu restrictions to allow use of various
E52 Touch penel menu selection
check functions on the keypad.
Suppress variations in the display on the keypad. E42 LED Display Filter
LED monitor (Display selection)
Specify the display details on the keypad (LED E43
LED monitor details
monitor). E48
(Speed monitor selection)
Display the output frequency even while the inverter LED monitor (Display during
E44
operation is stopped. stop)
selection)
E61
E62
E63
C58 Terminal [12] Display unit

C59 Terminal [12] Maximum
measure
C60 Terminal [12] Minimum measure
Input the extenal analog sensor signal and display data
C64 Terminal [C1] (C1 function)
in terms of the physical amount of the sensor.
Display unit
Maximum measure
Minimum measure
C70 Terminal [C1] (V2 function)
Display unit
Maximum measure
Minimum measure
Display the load rotation speed and line speed. E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication
Display the integral power amount (kWh) multiplied by Integral power data display
E51
a coefficient. coefficient
J105 PID control (Display unit)

Display the PID command value and feedback value in
J106 PID control (Maximum
terms of the physical amount.
measure)
J107 PID control (Minimum measure)
G.15 Controlling via communications

Functional
code
RS-485 setting 1
y01 (Station address))
y02 (Operation selection upon error)
(Timer time)
y03 (Transmission speed)
y04 (Data length selection)
y05 (Parity bit selection)
Set conditions for communications. y06 (Stop bit selection)
y07 (Communication drop detection
y08 time)
(Response interval time)
APPENDICES
y09 (Protocol selection)

y10 <RS-485 communications
SW2 terminator resistorselector switch
(RS-485 communication port 1)>
Appendix-41
Functional
code
RS-485 setting 2
y11 (Station address))
y12 (Operation selection upon error)
(Timer time)
y13 (Transmission speed)
y14 (Data length selection)
y15 (Parity bit selection)
Set conditions for communications. y16 (Stop bit selection)
y17 (Communication drop detection
y18 time)
(Response interval time)
y19 (Protocol selection)
y20 <RS-485 communications
SW6 terminator resistor selector switch
(RS-485 communication port 2)>
y21 Built-in CAN setting (Station
address)
y22 Built-in CAN setting
(Transmission error (Operation
selection))
(Transmission speed)
(Transmission error (Timer time))
y25 Built-in CAN setting Write
functional code allocation 1
Set conditions for communications (Built-in CAN
communications).
(CAN is not mounted on C (for China).)
y33 Built-in CAN setting (Operation
selection)
(Transmission error (Operation
selection))
(Transmission error (Timer time))
Link function (Operation
H30 selection)
Set the command paths of operation command and
y98 Bus fon (Operation selection)
frequency command.
y99 Support link function (Operation
selection)
Frequently change the functional code during Communication data storage
y97
communications. system selection
Switch the operation command or frequency
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "LE"
command on the communicating side.
Use the input/output signal for the inverter as E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "U-DI”
general-purpose DI/DO. E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "U-DO"
Appendix-42
G.16 Using customized logic

Functional
code
Enable the sequence built by a customized logic. U00 Customized logic
U01-U70 Customized logic: Step 1-14
(Operation setting)
U71-U77 Customized logic output signal
1-7 (Output selection)
U81-U87 Customized logic output signal
1-7 (Function selection)
Customized logic timer monitor
U91 (Step selection)
Form a logic circuit for the digital input/output seignal Conversion factor
and analog input/output signal, arbitrarily process the U92-U107 Functional code switchover setting
signal and build a relay sequence in the inverter.
U121-U124
Terminal [X1] - [X5] (Function

E01-E05
selection)
Terminal [Y1] -
E20-E27 Terminal [30A/B/C] (Ry output)
Terminal [FWD] [REV] (Function

E98, E99
selection)
APPENDICES
Appendix-43
G.17 Using protective functions

[1] Protecting the machine (Limit functions)
Functional
code
Frequency limiter
(Upper limit)
F15
(Lower limit)
F16
Lower limiter (Operation
H63
Limit the frequency to protect the machine. selection)
F03 Maximum Frequency 1
Lower limiter
(Minimum frequency during
H64 restricted operation)
Limit the motor rotating direction to protect the machine. H08 Rotational direction limitation
Current restriction
F43 (Operation selection)
Limit the load by restricting the current to protect the
F44 (Operation level)
machine.
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2]
"IOL" "IOL2"
F40 Torque restriction value 1-1
F41 Torque restriction value 1-2
E16 Torque restriction value 2-1
E17 Torque restriction value 2-1
E61 Terminal [12] (Extended
E62 function selection)
E63 Terminal [C1] (C1 function)
Limit the load by restricting the torque to protect the
H74 Terminal [C1] (V2 function)
machine.
H76 (Extended function selection)
E01-E05 Torque restriction (Target of
E20-E21 control)
(Braking) (Increase
frequency limiter)
Terminal [X1] - [X5] "TL2/TL1"
"IOL" "IOL2"
E61 Terminal [12] (Extended
E62 function selection)
Limit the overspeed level via speed restriction to protect E63 Terminal [C1] (C1 function)
the machine. (Extended function selection)
[2] Protecting the motor

Functional
code
Electronic Electronic thermal switch 1
thermal Protect the motor from high temperature (for motor protection)
F10
overload via electronic thermal cutoff function of (Characteristics selection)
F11
protection for the inverter. (Operation level)
F12
braking resistor (Thermal time constant)
Electronic thermal switch 1
F10 (for motor protection)
F12 (Characteristics selection)
Output a warning before the motor trips (Thermal time constant)
OL1 function
via the electronic thermal cutoff function. E34 Overload forecast/Current
E20-E21 detection
(Timer time)
Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "OL"
Appendix-44
Functional
code
Thermistor (for motor)
Perform thermal protection of the motor H26 (Operation selection)
Motor overheat via the PTC thermistor built into the H27 (Operation level)
motor. SW3 <Function selecctor switch for
SW4 Terminal [C1] >
Thermistor (for motor)

H26 (Operation selection)
Detect that the PTC thermistor built into
Thermistor H27 (Operation level)
the motor has operated and output a
detection SW3 <Function selecctor switch for
warning.
Terminal [C1] >
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "THM"
[3] Other protective/safety functions

Functional
code
Immediately shut down (trip) the Restart from instantaneous
inverter upon instantaneous power power failure
failure. F14 (Operation selection)
The inverter immediately start free H15 (Operation continuation
Tripping upon
running but does not trip upon level)
instantaneous
power failure instantaneous power failure. It trips H92 Operation continuation (P)
when power is recovered. H93 Operation continuation (I)
(No restart)
The inverter is immediately decelerated E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2]
to stop upon instantaneous power "LU" "IPF"
failure. It trips when the frequency has E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "IL"
dropped to zero.
Immediately interrupts the inverter
External alarm output upn error in the peripheral E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "THR"
equipment.
Enables/Disables:
• Carrier frequency automatic reducing
function
Protective/ Protective/Maintenance
• Input phase loss/Output phase loss
Maintenance H98 function
function • Main circuit capacitor service life
decision
• DC fan lock detection
• Error in braking transistor
Electronic thermal switch
(for protection of braking
Protect the inverter with electronic resistor)
Braking resistor thermal by using an external braking F50
(Discharge immunity)
resistor. F51
(Average allowable losss)
F52
(Braking resistance value)
Braking Detect error in the braking transistor
E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "DBAL"
transistor and protect the inverter.
RS-485 setting 1
(Operation selection upon
y02 error)
y03 (Timer time)
y08 (Communication drop
Communication detection time)
Detect communication errors.
error RS-485 setting 2
(Operation selection upon
y12 error)
y13 (Timer time)
y18 (Communication drop
detection time)
APPENDICES
Shuts down the system in the event of

PID feedback
wire break of PID feedback (Current H91 PID feedback wire break
wire break
input [C1] ).
Appendix-45
Functional
code
H56 Forced stop deceleration time

Force to stop Use forced stop for safety.
E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "STOP"
Free-run stop Use free-run stop for safety. E01-E05
(Function selection) "BX"
STOP key STOP key priority /Start

Enable STOP key at any time for safety. H96
priority check fuction
Check for an operation command upon

Start check STOP key priority /Start
mode change for safety to prevent H96
function check fuction
sudden operation of the motor.
Cooling fin Output a warning before the inverter
overheat trips due to overload (overheat of E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "OH"
forecast cooling fin).
Cancel current restriction in case a

Cancellation of Instantaneous current
nonconformity arises when the
current H12 restriction (Operation
motor-generated torque temporarily
restriction selection)
drops due to current restriction.
Erase the alarm history. H97 Alarm data clear
Alarm
Generate a simulated fault. H45 Mock alarm
G.18 Performing maintenance

[1] Maintenance of inverter
Functional
code
Main circuit capacitor

Main circuit Tailor the operating conditions for main H42 measurement value
capacitor circuit capacitor service life mesurement
service life to the use conditions of the user. H47 Main circuit capacitor initial
value
In case the control power auxiliary input

is provided and the main circuit capaitor Protective/Maintenance
Service life function
service life measurement is incorrect, H98
decision
disable the main circuit capaitor service (Operation selection)
life decision.
Cooling fan Extend the service life of the inverter Cooling fan ON-OFF control
H06
ON/OFF cooling fan and reduce the fan noise Terminal [Y1] - [Y2]
control when stopped. E20-E21
"FAN" "LIFE"
Appendix-46
[2] Maintenance of machine

Functional
code
Check the cumulative operation time of Cumulative motor operation

H94
Cumulative the motor. time 1
motor Count the cumulative motor operation
operation time Terminal [X1] - [X5]
time even while the motor is driven from E01-E05
a commercial power source. "CRUN-M1, M2, M3, M4"
In a facility where start torque is applied

to the drive belt for each start sequence
Start count to degrade the belt, check the start H44 Start count 1
count to determine the service life of the
belt.
Notify the maintenance period based on H78 Maintenance set time (M1)
the cumulative motor operation time. E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "MNT"
Maintenance
timer Maintenance set start count
Notify the maintenance period based on H79
(M1)
the start count. E20-E21
Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "MNT"
Disconnect the inverter from the system

Remote/Local and perform maintenance of the inverter E01-E05 Terminal [X1] - [X5] "LOC"
switchover while keeping it operated by a command E20-E21 Terminal [Y1] - [Y2] "RMT"
from the keypad.
APPENDICES
Appendix-47
Appendix H Conformity with Standards
H.1 Compliance with European Standards ( )

The CE marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive 2004/108/EC, Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, and Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC which are issued by the Council of the European Communities.
Table H.1-2 1 Conformity with Standards
Standards
IEC/EN61800-3 : 2004/Ａ1：2012
Immunity : Second environment (Industrial)
EMC Directives
Emission : Category C2
IEC/EN61326-3-1 : 2008
Low Voltage Directive IEC/EN61800-5-1 : 2007
H.1.1 Compliance with EMC standards

The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE-marked products is
compliant with the EMC Directive. Therefore, CE marking for the equipment shall be the responsibility of the
equipment manufacturer. For this reason, Fuji’s CE mark is indicated under the condition that the product shall be
used within equipment meeting all requirements for the relevant Directives. Instrumentation of such equipment
shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer.
Generally, machinery or equipment includes not only our products but other devices as well. Manufacturers,
therefore, shall design the whole system to be compliant with the relevant Directives.
■ List of EMC-compliant filters

To satisfy the requirements noted above, use inverters in combination with an external filter (option) dedicated to
Fuji inverters. In either case, mount inverters in accordance with the installation procedure given below. To ensure
the compliance, it is recommended that inverters be mounted in a metal panel.
Table H.1-2 2 EMC-compliant filter

Power supply voltage Inverter type Specification Filter type
ND FS21312-78-07
HD FS5536-72-07 (EFL-22G11-4)
FRN0059E2S-4□
HND FS5536-72-07 (EFL-22G11-4)
HHD FS5536-72-07 (EFL-22G11-4)
ND -
HD FS21312-78-07
FRN0072E2S-4□
HND FS21312-78-07
HHD FS5536-72-07 (EFL-22G11-4)
ND FS5536-180-40
HD FS5536-100-35
FRN0085E2S-4□
HND FS5536-100-35
HHD FS5536-100-35
ND FS5536-180-40
HD FS5536-180-40
Three-phase 400V FRN0105E2S-4□
HND FS5536-180-40
HHD FS5536-100-35
ND FS5536-180-40
HD FS5536-180-40
FRN0139E2S-4□
HND FS5536-180-40
HHD FS5536-180-40
ND FS5536-180-40
HD FS5536-180-40
FRN0168E2S-4□
HND FS5536-180-40
HHD FS5536-180-40
ND FS5536-250-99-1
HD FS5536-180-40
FRN0203E2S-4□
HND FS5536-180-40
HHD FS5536-180-40
Appendix-48
■ Recommended installation procedure

To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive, have certified technicians wire the
motor and inverter in strict accordance with the procedure described below.
When an EMC-compliant filter (option) is externally used

1) Mount the inverter and the filter on a grounded panel or metal plate. Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route the cable as short as
possible. Firmly clamp the shields to the metal plate to ground them. Further, connect the shielding layers electrically to the grounding terminal
of the motor.
2) For connection to inverter's control terminals and for connection of the RS-485 communication signal cable, use shielded wires. As with the
motor, clamp the shields firmly to a grounded panel.
3) If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level, enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal panel as shown in Figure Appendix
C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
Note: Connect the shielding layer

MCCB or Metal panel of shielded cable to the motor and
panel electrically and ground the
RCD/
motor and panel.
Power ELCB* Inverter
supply
EMC-
compliant
filter
(optional)
Three-
phase Motor
Shielded
cable
Figure H.1- 1 Mounting an EMC-compliant Filter (option) in a Metal Panel
APPENDICES
Appendix-49
H.1.2 Compliance with the low voltage directive in the EU

General-purpose inverters are regulated by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU. Fuji Electric states that all our
inverters with CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive.
 Note
If installed according to the guidelines given below, inverters marked with CE are considered as compliant with the
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
Compliance with European Standards
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.
Part 5-1: Safety requirements. Electrical, thermal and energy. IEC/EN61800-5-1 : 2007
1. The ground terminal G should always be connected to the ground. Do not use only a residual-current-operated
protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)* as the sole method of electric shock protection. Be
sure to use ground wires whose size is greater than power supply lines.
*With overcurrent protection.
2. To prevent the risk of hazardous accidents that could be caused by damage of the inverter, install the specified
fuses in the supply side (primary side) according to the following tables.
・- Breaking capacity: Min. 10 kA - Rated voltage: Min. 500 V
Power supply Nominal applied HD/MD/LD Fuse rating
Inverter type
voltage motor (kW) mode (A)
30 ND 160(IEC60269-4)
22 HD 160(IEC60269-4)
FRN0059E2S-4□
22 HND 160(IEC60269-4)
18.5 HHD 160(IEC60269-4)
37 ND 160(IEC60269-4)
30 HD 160(IEC60269-4)
FRN0072E2S-4□
30 HND 160(IEC60269-4)
22 HHD 160(IEC60269-4)
45 ND 250(IEC60269-4)
37 HD 250(IEC60269-4)
FRN0085E2S-4□
37 HND 250(IEC60269-4)
30 HHD 250(IEC60269-4)
55 ND 315(IEC60269-4)
Three- 45 HD 315(IEC60269-4)
phase FRN0105E2S-4□
400V 45 HND 315(IEC60269-4)
37 HHD 315(IEC60269-4)
75 ND 315(IEC60269-4)
55 HD 315(IEC60269-4)
FRN0139E2S-4□
55 HND 315(IEC60269-4)
45 HHD 315(IEC60269-4)
90 ND 350(IEC60269-4)
75 HD 350(IEC60269-4)
FRN0168E2S-4□
75 HND 350(IEC60269-4)
55 HHD 350(IEC60269-4)
110 ND 350(IEC60269-4)
90 HD 350(IEC60269-4)
FRN0203E2S-4□
90 HND 350(IEC60269-4)
75 HHD 350(IEC60269-4)
Appendix-50
Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU (Continued)
3. When used with the inverter, a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), residual-current-operated protective device
(RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) or magnetic contactor (MC) should conform to the EN or IEC standards.
4. When you use a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) for
protection from electric shock in direct or indirect contact power lines or nodes, be sure to install type B of
RCD/ELCB on the input (primary) of the inverter.
MCCB or RCD/ELCB *1
Nominal applied ND/HD/
Power supply Rated current
motor Inverter type HND
voltage
(kW) mode W/DCR W/o DCR
30 ND 75 125
22 HD
FRN0059E2S-4□ 50 100
22 HND
18.5 HHD 40 75
37 ND 100
30 HD 125
FRN0072E2S-4□ 75
30 HND
22 HHD 50 100
45 ND 150
37 HD 100
FRN0085E2S-4□
37 HND 125
30 HHD 75
55 ND 125 200
Three-phase 45 HD
FRN0105E2S-4□ 150
400 V 45 HND 100
37 HHD 125
75 ND 175 －
55 HD
FRN0139E2S-4□ 125 200
55 HND
45 HHD 100 150
90 ND 200
75 HD －
FRN0168E2S-4□ 175
75 HND
55 HHD 125 200
110 ND 250
90 HD
FRN0203E2S-4□ 200 －
90 HND
75 HHD 175
*1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) will vary, depending on the power
transformer capacity. Refer to the related technical documentation for details.
5. The inverter should be used in an environment that does not exceed Pollution Degree 2 requirements. If the
environment conforms to Pollution Degree 3 or 4, install the inverter in an enclosure of IP54 or higher.
6. Install the inverter, AC or DC reactor, input or output filter in an enclosure with minimum degree of protection of IP2X
(Top surface of enclosure shall be minimum IP4X when it can be easily accessed), to prevent human body from
touching directly to live parts of these equipment.
7. Do not connect any copper wire directly to grounding terminals. Use crimp terminals with tin or equivalent plating to
connect them.
8. When you use an inverter at an altitude of more than 2000 m, you should apply basic insulation for the control
circuits of the inverter. The inverter cannot be used at altitudes of more than 3000 m.
APPENDICES
9. Use wires lsiterd in Chapter 2 “2.2.5 [1] Screw Specifications and Recommended Wire Size (Main Circuit
Terminals).”
Appendix-51
High Performance Inverter
User’s Manual
First Edition, February 2013
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
The purpose of this User’s manual is to provide accurate information in handling, setting up and operating of the
FRENIC-Ace series of inverters. Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you
may have found, or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual.
In no event will Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of
the information in this manual.
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
Gate City Ohsaki, East Tower, 11-2, Osaki 1-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo, 141-0032, Japan
Phone: +81 3 5435 7058 Fax: +81 3 5435 7420
URL http://www.fujielectric.com/
2013-2

FUJI FRENIC-Ace User - S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FUJI FRENIC-Ace User - S Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FUJI FRENIC-Ace User - S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

High Performance Inverter

Thank you for purchasing our multifunction FRENIC-Ace series of inverters.

The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice

Name Material No. Description

Product scope, features, specifications, external drawings,

Overview of functions implemented by using FRENIC-Ace

This manual contains Chapters 1 through 13 and Appendices.

Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Chapter 10 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

Chapter 11 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Chapter 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Chapter 1 BEFORE USE

Chapter 2 INSTALLATION AND DRAWING

Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

Chapter 4 TEST RUN PROCEDURE

Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODE

Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Chapter 8 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC

Chapter 9 COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS

Chapter 10 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

Chapter 11 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Chapter 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Appendix A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise) ······································ Appendix-1

• Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non-flammable material.

• Do not support the inverter by its front cover during transportation.

• Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.

 This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information.

Chapter 1 BEFORE USE

Chapter 1 BEFORE USE

Chap 1 BEFORE USE

(a) Main Nameplate (b) Sub Nameplate

TYPE: Type of inverter

In this manual, inverter types are denoted as "FRN_ _ _ _E2S-4."

ND mode : Designed for general load applications.

1.2 External View and Terminal Blocks

Chap 1 BEFORE USE

Internal air circulation fan

Front cover Control circuit

(2) Warning plates and label

(a) FRN0072E2S-4 (b) FRN0203E2S-4

1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters

1.3.1 Usage environment

Table 1.3-2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude

Output current derating

Chap 1 BEFORE USE

Environments Possible problems Sample measures Applications

1.3.2 Storage environment

Precautions for temporary storage

Precautions for storage over 1 year

1.3.3 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment

Chap 1 BEFORE USE

[ 2 ] Power supply lines (Application of a DC/AC reactor)

Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)

[ 4 ] PWM converter for correcting the inverter input power factor

[ 5 ] Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) / residual-current-operated protective device

[ 6 ] Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter input (primary) circuit

[ 7 ] Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter output (secondary) circuit

Chap 1 BEFORE USE

[ 8 ] Surge absorber/surge killer